IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 A. 
 
 m 
 
 IM 
 
 ^ y,2 
 
 ■ 2.2 
 £^0 1^ 
 
 il 116 
 
 6" 
 
 «' 
 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 
 &*■-. 
 
«' 
 
 M 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICIVIH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 jr 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
MPMM 
 
 mm 
 
 Technical and Bibliographic IMotes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliographically unique, 
 which may alter any of the images in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checited below. 
 
 H 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 I I Covers damaged/ 
 
 Couverture endommag^e 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaur6e et/ou pellicul6e 
 
 Cover title missing/ 
 
 Le titre de couverture manque 
 
 Coloured maps/ 
 
 Cartes g6ographiques en couleur 
 
 Coloured init (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Reli6 avec d'autres documents 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 W 
 
 Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion 
 along interior margsn/ 
 
 La re liure serr^e peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distortion le long de la marge int^rieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajout6es 
 lors d'une restauration apparaiss* it dans le texte, 
 mais. lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas 6t6 filmdes- 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentaires suppldmentaires; , 
 
 fl^dr<ii^ ^ U^M^ 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a hxh possible de se procurer. Les details 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
 modification dans la methods normale de filmage 
 sont indiquAs ci-dessous. 
 
 n 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 D 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est fiim6 au taux de rMuction indiqud ci-dessous. 
 
 10X 14X 18X 22X 
 
 Coloured pages/ 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommagdes 
 
 Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 Pages restaurdes et/ou pellicul6es 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 Pages d6color6es, tachetdes ou piqu^es 
 
 Pages detached/ 
 Pages d6tach6es 
 
 Showthrough/ 
 Transparence 
 
 Quality of print varies/ 
 Quality indgaie de I'impression 
 
 Includes supplementary material/ 
 Comprend du materiel suppldmentaire 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 C) 
 
 Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc., have been refiimad to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Les pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, 
 etc., ont ixh filmtes h nouveau de fa^on d 
 obtenir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 26X 
 
 30X 
 
 12X 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 H 
 
 24X 
 
 28X 
 
 32X 
 
"t^ip:- 
 
 ils 
 
 lu 
 
 iifier 
 
 ne 
 
 age 
 
 ) 
 
 ita 
 
 lure. 
 
 ] 
 
 The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks 
 to the generosity of: 
 
 Library of Congress 
 Photoduplication Service 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quality 
 possible considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 or illustrated impression. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol ^^> (meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol ▼ (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 L'exemplaire film6 fut reproduit grdce d la 
 g6n6rosit6 de: 
 
 Library of Congress 
 Photoduplication Service 
 
 Les images suivantes ont 6x6 reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et 
 de la nettetd de l'exemplaire film6, et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprim6e sont film6s en commenpant 
 par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la 
 dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'iliustration, soit par le second 
 plat, salon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires 
 originaux sont film6s en commenqant par la 
 premiere page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'iliustration et en terminant par 
 la dernidre page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparattra sur la 
 dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon !e 
 
 cas: le symbols — ^ signifie 
 symbols y signifie "FIN". 
 
 'A SUIVRE", le 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre 
 film6s d des taux de reduction diff6rents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtre 
 reproduit en un seul clich6, 11 est film6 d partir 
 de I'angle supdrieur gauche, de gauche d droite, 
 et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'images ndcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants 
 illustrent la mdthode. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 >ma)Himmsumit 
 
J 
 

No. 100. 
 
 
 HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE. 
 
 SAILING DIRECTIONS 
 
 VOB 
 
 THE GULF AND RIVER ST. LAWRENCE 
 
 SECOND EDITION. 
 
 -♦•^•- 
 
 WASHINGTON: 
 
 GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE, 
 1897, 
 
 3 ; 
 
'? 
 
 ^K 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 ■ 
 
 <? 
 
 
 vr 
 
 .^^.1 
 
 w 
 
 
w 
 
 I 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 Preface ' ^»«; 
 
 Note ..."..."!."!!."!. vi 
 
 Index chart ^m 
 
 List of Hydro(j;raphio Office agents '.' 411 
 
 List of Hydrographic Offlue publications 4O6 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 General remarks— Ice, fogs, winds anil weather, currents— General directions, 
 St. Lawrence Gulf and Kiver j 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 Islands in the Gnlf of St. Lawrence 32 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Capts Breton Island, west coast and St. George Bay 57 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 Northumberland Strait, sonth and west shores, Cape St. George to Miramichi 
 
 ^^y 71 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 Prince Edward Island, Northumberland Strait, north shore 107 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 Gnlf of St. Lawrence, west coast, Miramichi Bay to Gasp^ Bay 157 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 St. Lawrence River, f,o'ith shore, Cape Gaspd to Green Island 203 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 Remarks on Belle Isle Strait— Gulf of St. Lawrence, north coast. Belle Isle 
 Straitto Cape Whittle 219 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Gulf of St. Lawrence, north coast. Cape Whittle to Point des Monta 256 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 St. Lawrence River, north shore. Point des Monts to Saguenay River, and the 292 
 Saguenay River 
 
 ui 
 
 4 
 
'I 
 
 *▼ OOMTEMTS. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 St. Lawrence River, Green IsUnd and Red Islet to South Traverse and Coudres ''*' 
 Wand gjjjj 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 St. Lawrence River, South, Middle, and North Channels to Quebec 329 
 
 CHAPTER XIII, 
 St. Lawrence River, above Queoec 3^^ 
 
Page. 
 309 
 
 329 
 
 364 
 
 
 PREFACE 
 
 This publication is a revision of the first edition, from the latest infor- 
 mation, by. AJr. K. 0. liay, U. 8. Navy, in the Division of Sailing 
 Directions. The first edition was compiled by Mr. R. II, Orr. 
 
 The meteorological remarks in the opening chapter were prepared by 
 Mr. James Page, in the Division of Marine Meteorology. 
 
 The description of the southeast and east coasts of Oape Breton 
 Island, found in the first edition, has been omitted, and the description 
 relating to the south shore of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, in the first 
 edition of Hydrographic Office publication No. 99, added. 
 
 Since much of the coast described is imperfectly surveyed, mariners 
 are requested to point out to the U. S. Hydrographic Ofiice, either 
 directly or through one of its branch offices, any errors and omissions 
 that they may discover. With a view of making the next editii.n of 
 this publication more useful and complete, new information is also 
 requested. 
 
 J. B. Oraio, 
 Commands, U. S. Navy, Hydrographer. 
 U. S. Htdbogeaphio Officb, 
 
 Washington, D. C, October 1, 1897. 
 
 V 
 
 
 ^ 
 
NOTTS. 
 
 The bearings, courses, and trend of the laud are true, but, lor cou- 
 veuieuce, the corresiMjiiding magnetic bearings to tbe nearest degree 
 follow in parentheses (variation in 1897). The directions of the winds 
 are given for the points from which they blow; the directions of the 
 currents for the points toward which they set. Distances are expresst^ 
 in nautical miles; soundings, unless otherwise stated, are retluced to 
 mean low water. ^^ 
 
it, lor cou- 
 est degree 
 ' the winds 
 ,ou8 of the 
 ft expresstMl 
 reduced to 
 
 VI 
 
INDEX TO H 
 
 ALLUDED TO IN PUBLIC 
 
 Ihviii.'ii ,,l< hull r,,i,.-.lvii,ti,:ii llWLxttUhuti-i AKxiHl-nil in t'liiitj/r. 
 
INDEX TO H. O. CHARTS 
 
 DED TO IN FUBLICATIONS NO S. 99 AND 11)0 
 
 
 . S*1>1«I 
 
 NewT/brh teFlemiaK Cap. inctudin^\ 
 ths 9ulf of St.Lwi^enc9 and. the J 1*12 
 OnatBarUc of ttn/fcumdlimd: 
 
 J 
 
 9BI 
 
 W* 
 
 Xtnmm. Ijy O Koetxxl, 
 
 En«ro»-e<I hy tUlJlanUl aiul CAXciU 
 
I 
 
 :.'*5int:;?^ ^i«iaft-;_-_ 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 GENERAL REMARk3-ICE, F(»G8, WINDS AND WEATHER, CURRENTS- 
 GENERAL DIRECTIONS, ST. LAWRENCE GULF AND RIVER 
 
 General Remarks.-Tlie navigation of the gulf and river of St 
 Lawrence (in tlie present chapter spoken of as the gulf and the river) 
 requires much careful attention; the irregularity of the tides and cur- 
 rents, the severity of the climate, especially toward the close of the 
 navigable season, and, above all, the frequent fogs, are difficulties 
 which may well cause much anxiety in the mind of the seaman and 
 which call for the exercise of all his vigilance, prudence, and ability 
 
 In thick weather the continuous use of the deep-sea lead in some 
 form so as to obtain accurate depths is necessary for safety, and wheu 
 near the land the speed should be slow. 
 
 The Variatioa— The navigator is reminded that the variation of 
 the compass differs nearly two points between the limits of the places 
 described in this work. 
 
 The Deviation or local attraction of the compass needle is another 
 source of error, independent of charts altogether. This subject is one 
 of great importance in approaching and navigating the gulf, as from 
 the increase of the magnetic dip and the decrease in the horizontal 
 magnetic force that is found here— two elements affecting the ship's 
 magnetism— the original deviation of the compass will, in all proba- 
 bihty, be much increased. In many vessels it has been ascertained by 
 direct observation that their maximum deviation has been increased 
 by one-third. 
 
 Magnetic Attraction of the flhores.— An opinion is prevalent that 
 the compasses of vessels are disturbed in the gulf and river, and such 
 disturbance has been attributed to the magnetic ores of iron in the 
 hills, particularly those of the north coast. The magnetic oxide of 
 iron does exist abundantly, and attracts the needle very powerfully at 
 some points, particularly along the coast from the Bay of Seven Islands 
 eastward. Among the Mingan Islands the variation was found to vary 
 from this cause from 19o to 31o w. At Port Neuf and on Manicougau 
 Point the needle was also disturbed. But these eflfects were only 
 noticed when the instrument was placed on the shore. 
 
 When running.from place to place, at greater distances than 2 miles 
 from the coast, nothing of the kind was noticed; so that in nine cases 
 out of ten where this source of erroneous reckoning has been alleged as 
 the cause of accidents to vessels, they probably originated either in 
 errors of the chart or in the local attraction on board the vessels 
 themselves. 
 
 Lights -The intrinsic power of a light should always be considered 
 1161 1 
 
GULP OF ST. LAWRENCE. 
 
 when expecting to make it in thick weather. A weak light ia easily 
 obscured by haze, and no dependence can bo placed on its being seen. 
 The i)ower of a light can be estimated by remarking its order, as given 
 in the Light List, and in some cases by noting how much its visibilit.\-, 
 in clear weather, falls short of the range due to the height at which it 
 is placed. Thus, a light placed at 200 feet above the sea, and only 
 recorded as visible 10 miles in clear weather, is manifestly of little 
 brilliancy, as if of any power its height would permit it to be seen over 
 20 miles. 
 
 Under certain atmospheric conditions, and especially with the more 
 powerful lights, the glare is visible considerably bejoud the radius 
 given, which is calculated for the actual flame of the light. 
 
 In some conditious of the atmosphere white lights may have a red- 
 dish hue. The mariner, therefore, should not trust solely to color 
 where there are sectors, but verify the position by taking a bearing of 
 the light. On either side of the line of demarcation between white and 
 red, and also between white and green, there is always a small arc of 
 uncertain color. 
 
 In the St. Lawrence River below Quebec the lighthouses, including 
 Point de Monts, Cape Chatte, and Egg island, are lighted on April 1 
 and extinguished December 10. Those in the Gulf of St. Lawrence, 
 Strait of Belle Isle, Northumberland Strait, Prince Edward Island, and 
 Gut of Canso are extinguished December 20. Bird Bocks light and 
 the lights on St. Paul Island jxre shown from April 1 to December 31, 
 or even later, if navigation is open. The lightvessels are replaced in 
 position each spring as soon as the state of the ice permits. 
 
 Lightbuoys are withdrawn November 10, and are replaced as soon 
 after May 11 as possible. Other buoys are withdrawn on November 14, 
 except those at Beaujeu Bank, Channel Patch, Middle Ground, St. 
 Eoch des Auluets, and South Traverse, which remain in position till the 
 last vessel has passed. 
 
 Uniform System of Buoyage. — Throughout the ports and chan- 
 nels of the Dominion of Canada, approaching from seaward, all buoys 
 on the starboard side of the channel are painted red, and, if numbered, 
 marked with even numbers, and must be left on the starboard hand. 
 
 Approaching from* seaward, all buoys on the port side are painted 
 black, with odd numbers, if any, and must be left on the port hand. 
 
 Buoys painted red and black in horizontal bands mark obstructions 
 or middle grounds, and may be left on either hand. 
 
 Buoys painted white and black in vertical stripes mark mid-channel, 
 and must be passed close to to avoid danger. 
 
 All other distinguishing marks to buoys are in addition to the fore- 
 going, and indicate particular spots, a detailed description of which 
 is given wlun the mark is iirst established. 
 
 Perches with balls, cages, etc., will, when placed on buoys, be at turning 
 points, the color and number indicating on which hand they are to be left. 
 
 i! 
 
BUOYAGE. 
 
 Starboard hand spar buoys, entering channels or harbors, will in 
 some cases be surmounted by a ball; these buoys will be red. 
 
 The rule for coloring buoys is equally applicable to beacons and other 
 day marks, so far as it may bo practicable to carry it out. 
 
 Caution.— Buoys marking outlying dangers, owing to tlieir exposed 
 positions, are always liable to break adrift or to other accident; there- 
 fore implicit reliance should not be placed on their being in position. 
 
 Buoys Removed during Winter.— All the buoys are removed at 
 the end of navigation iri each season in the following areas in the Prov- 
 ince of Quebec : Chaleur Bay and Magdalen Islands, in Gaspc Basin, in 
 the Gulf of St. Lawrence from Souris Eock, near Fame Point, to Ma- 
 tane, in the St. Lawrence River from Matane and Bersimis to St. 
 Croix, and in Saguenay and Richelieu Rivers. 
 
 Eight spar buoys are moored below Quebec, to assist late vessels 
 leaving that port, after the ordinary buoys have been removed, but 
 these are liable to be displaced by ice in the 
 spring of the year. 
 
 In the Province of New Brunswick all the 
 buoys in harbors and rivers that are not navi- 
 gable during the winter months are taken up 
 about November 20, and some coast buoys about 
 December 15. 
 
 With regard to the buoyage of Nova Scotia, 
 all the buoys east of Halifax are withdrawn 
 during the winter. 
 
 Prince Edward Island buoys are all with- 
 drawn, with the exception of a spar buoy marking Eitzroy Rock and 
 another marking St. Peters Island Spit, near the mouth of Charlotte- 
 town Harbor, and a spar buoy marking Wheeler Bar and Knoll Shoal 
 in Georgetown Harbor. 
 
 Wrecks.— Buoys, and the top sides of vessels used for marking 
 wrecks, are painted green with a white inscription, and moored, when 
 possible, near the side of the wreck next to mid-channel. 
 
 The following are exhibited from wreck vessels: 
 
 By day.— Three balls from a yard, 20 feet above the sea; two placed 
 vertically on the side that shipping may safely pass, and one on the 
 other side. 
 
 By night— Three fixed white lights, similarly arranged, but the ordi- 
 nary riding light will not be shown. 
 
 Mariners will therefore know on sighting a wreck-marking vessel that 
 she IS thus employed, and they should pass on that side of her on which 
 the two balls or two lights are shown. 
 
 Telegraph and Signal Stations.— The Government of the Dominion 
 of Canada has given notice, dated February 20, 1886, that the marine 
 telegraph system, established in the Gulf of St. Lawrence in the inter- 
 ests of navigation and fisheries, is now in operation. 
 
4 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE. 
 
 1. Vessels exhibiting their distinctive numbers will have their names 
 transmitted to the local press (for publication only) free of charge. 
 
 1'. Dispatches to or from vessels within signaling distance, by the 
 international code of all nations, either by Hags or semaphores, will be 
 duly delivered as addressed. 
 
 3. Dispatches will be charged for at the ordinary telegraph rates 
 between stations; but no charge will be make for signaling between 
 coast stations and vessels at sea. 
 
 4. Dispatches may (by special request) be delivered in cipher, other- 
 wise they will be transmitted in ordinary language. 
 
 5. Vessels may obtain information as to winds, weather, and ice at 
 any signal station within the Gulf of St. Lawrence free of charge. 
 
 stations. 
 
 Nanie of Btation. 
 
 SijcnnlB in 
 use. 
 
 I 
 
 St. Paul Island (S) i Flags. 
 
 Meat CovH ...do .. 
 
 UrosBolHlo (S) l...do .. 
 
 AVolf Islet I 
 
 House Harbor I 
 
 Amherst Island liighthouso (S) { Flags. 
 
 A nilierst Harbor I 
 
 Fox Bav 
 
 Juuil<^r"Kiver ((Jhallop Creek) . 
 
 Salt Lake Hay 
 
 Soutli west Point Lighthiinse (S) .' I Flags . 
 
 BecHcio River ! 
 
 West Point Lighthouse (S) Flags. 
 
 Macquvreau Point Lighthouse (S) I. ..do . 
 
 Cape Despair Lightliouse (S) do . 
 
 I'ointSt. Peter 
 
 l)ouglast4iwn 
 
 Oaspti liasin 
 
 Peninsula 
 
 O rand ( Irftvo >. 
 
 Capo Kosier Lighthouse (S) ■ 
 
 Flags . 
 
 GritfinCovo 
 
 Fox Kivcr i 
 
 Fame Point Ligbtbouse (S) Flags. 
 
 The Great Pond <Crrand Etang) I 
 
 Choloi',v<lornie (about lOmilesl^W.of Fame Point) 
 
 Flags. 
 Flags. 
 
 Flags . 
 
 Graiiil Vnih\v (Grande VallOe) 
 
 Magdalen IJi ver 
 
 Cnpe Mai;dalen Ligiithonse (S) 
 
 Mount Liiuis River 
 
 Martin Hi ver Ligiithouse (S) 
 
 St. Anne Point (St. Anne des Monts) 
 
 Cape (;iintto Village 
 
 Cai)eCliatie Li<!hthouHa (S) 
 
 Les Mc'cbins (near Cape Miuhaux) 
 
 St. Ft'licitu (near Cnpe Balance) 
 
 Matane Ligiithouse (S) 
 
 Little Metis Lighthouse (8) 
 
 Grand Metis 
 
 St. Flavio (about 10 miles SW. of Metis Point) 
 
 Father Point*Lighthou8e (S) 
 
 Rimouski (S) 
 
 Rivi(iroduLoup(S) 
 
 L'Islet (S) I. ..do 
 
 Egg Island Lighthouse '...do . 
 
 Point de Monts Lighthouse (S) '...do . 
 
 Manicouagan Point (S) ...do . 
 
 Portueiif Xighthouse (S) L..do . 
 
 Flags . 
 . .do . . 
 
 Flags . 
 do., 
 do.. 
 
 I 
 
 Situation. 
 
 Heath Point Liehtliouse (S) | Flags 
 
 South Point Lighthouse (S) L. do 
 
 Cabot Strait. 
 
 Do. 
 IvLdgdalcn Islands, 
 
 Do! 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 Anticosti Island. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 Chaleur Bay, north side of 
 entrance. 
 
 Do. 
 Gasp6 Bay. 
 
 Do! 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 St. Lawrence River, sooth 
 shore. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do, 
 
 Do, 
 St, Lawrence Gulf, north 
 
 shore. 
 St. Lawrence Rirer, north 
 shore. 
 
 Do. 
 
 Do. 
 
 The stations in the above list marked ' 
 signals is used. 
 
 S " are also signal stations at which the international code of 
 
Crt W :-»SfBWM"*^ W-'.'P*V* 
 
 3ir names 
 argo. 
 36, by the 
 !8, will be 
 
 iipli rates 
 between 
 
 er, otlier- 
 
 nd ice at 
 jirge. 
 
 ion. 
 
 ids. 
 
 north side of 
 
 River, sonth 
 
 Gulf, north 
 RiTur, north 
 
 tionalcodeof 
 
 ICE. f 
 
 Ice.— Among the difficulties of navigation may be mentioned the ice. 
 In spring, generally in the month of 3Iay, the entrance and eastern 
 parts of the gulf are frequently covered with drift ice, and vessels are 
 sometimes beset by it for many days. If unprepared for contending 
 with this danger they often sutler from it and are occasionally lost; 
 but serious accidents from this cause do not frequently occur, because 
 the ice is generally more or less in a melting state from the powerful 
 effect of the sun in spring. In the fall of the year accidents from ice 
 seldom happen, except when the winter commences unusually early, or 
 when vessels have lingered imprudently late from the temptation of 
 obtaining high freights. 
 
 Cabot Strait is never frozen over, but vessels built in the ordinary 
 way can not navigate it in safety between January 1 and May 1 on 
 account of the heavy drift ice. Sealing steamers pass through at all 
 times, but are occasionally fast in the ice for days together. 
 
 Nearly every year the great rush of ice outot the Gulf of St. Law- 
 rence in the spring causes a stoppage, locally known as the "Bridge," 
 between St. Paul Island and Cape Ray. The "Bridge" sometimes lasts 
 for 2 or .i weeks, and completely prevents the passage of sliips; it is 
 recorded that .'$00 sail have at one time been detained by this obstacle, 
 and many wrecks have occurred in consequence on the Newfoundland 
 coast. The usual time of the formation of the "Bridge" is between 
 the middle and end of Ai)ril to the middle of May. 
 
 The prevalence of northwesterly and northerly winds orives the ice 
 toward the entrance to the gulf and along the west coast of Capo 
 Breton, and incoming vessels will meet no ice except SW. of St. Paul 
 Island. A SW. gale opoasionally brings the ice out from the channel 
 between the Magdalen Islands and Cape Breton, which meets the main 
 body, flowing past Bird Rocks, and closes the strait between St. Paul 
 and Cape Anguilla. The strait often appears to clear rapidly; in 36 
 hours very little ice may be seen from Cape Ray, but bodies of ice will 
 pass many days after navigation is open, particularly if the winds are 
 northerly. The ice usually passes out of the gulf in the direction of 
 Banquereau, the eastern edge extending halfway between Scatari and 
 St. Pierre. Occasionally it is drifted along the south coast of New- 
 foundland and reaches St. Pierre, although, according to the report of 
 the Canadian department of marine, no ice has been sighted from that 
 island aft«r the middle of April during the past 7 years (1889-1895). 
 The coast between Cape North and Scatari often holds the ice during 
 easterly winds until late in May. 
 
 The early stream of slob made on the Labrador coast and the north 
 usually passes into the gulf during the month of December and mixes 
 with the gulf sheet when it is made eariy, but it is often open water. 
 The east winds and snow build this thin ice and produce a form of white 
 slob. The northern slob enters the gulf about the 9th of January with 
 variations extending over a month, but it may not be permitted to pass 
 
 % 
 
6 
 
 GULP OP ST. LAWRENCE. 
 
 Blanc Sablon if tlie wind i.s NW. The ice can not at present be fol- 
 lowed; It may arrive off Bonne Bay during January or February, or it 
 may be driven into the Labrador coast, ail depending on the wind 
 
 The gulf sheet majjes early and rapidly during the cold season and 
 18 often 111 sheets a mile or two in length, and occasionally it win be fust 
 for a few days from Meccatina to Cow Read in Februarv. Generally 
 speaking, it is loose, witli lanes and lakes extending in tlie direction of 
 the wind and current, and is navigated by small vessels during March 
 and April sailing from Natashquan and Esquimaux Point. 
 
 ICE IN THE GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE AND VICINITY. ' 
 
 During December and January the harbors and bays around the 
 Gulf of St. Lawrence begin to freeze, and by January 20 ice will have 
 formed over most of them. In some the ice made there will eventually 
 become thick enough to interfere with navigation, while in others it 
 Will completely close the port and prevent the entrance of all vessels 
 By February 1, the open water in the gulf will be full of ice fields 
 formed there, while other ice will enter through the Strait of Belle Isle 
 and from the St. Lawrence River. j 
 
 Off the coast the ice is in constant motion, drifting with the winds 
 tides, and currents, and is slowly working down toward Cabot Strait' 
 through which it passes and finds its way to seaward. Its path broad' 
 ens when through the strait, and will be governed generally by the 
 prevailing winds. Under the influence of currents alone it will drift to 
 the southward and westward, and in latitude 45° N. may be from 10 to 
 7o miles wide. Much of this is very heavy, and will prevent the passage 
 through it of all vessels not specially built to go through ice. 
 
 Its thickness will be anything from a few inches to several feet It is 
 only in the Strait of Belle Isle that bergs are encountered, but rarely 
 farther west than Greenly Island, though a few have been known to 
 find their way south through Cabot Strait. 
 
 Within the Gulf of St. Lawrence navigation opens during the month 
 ot April. Ice is generally found to the north and west of Bird Rocks 
 up to the middle of April, and the last reports of ice within the gulf 
 generally precede May 10. The fleet of sealing schooners leaves 
 Pleasant Bay, Magdalen Islands, between March 20 and April 10, and 
 Esquimaux Point about a week earlier. During the period 1889-1896 
 the last transatlantic steamship has left the gulf between November 
 21 and December 5, and the first has arrived between April 20 and 
 April 26. Sailing vessels are from 10 days to 2 weeks earlier in leaving 
 and later in arriving, respectively. 
 
 The harbors along the northeast coast of New Brunswick and Nova 
 Scotia are closed by ice for a portion of each year. The records kept 
 at Sydney during several years past show that the harbor is rarely 
 closed before the latter part of January and is generally open after 
 April 15. The Gut of Canso and Northumberland Strait are rarely 
 
Y 
 
 t at present be fol- 
 or February, or it 
 g on the wind. 
 Uo cold season and 
 nally it win be fust 
 ruary. Generally 
 in the direction of 
 sels during March 
 Point. 
 
 VICINITY. 
 
 bays around the 
 ry 20 ice will have 
 jre Avill eventually 
 while in others it 
 nee of all vessels. 
 
 full of ice fields 
 Itrait of Belle Isle 
 
 g with the winds, 
 ard Cabot Strait, 
 Its path broad- 
 generally by the 
 ane it will drift to 
 nay be from 10 to 
 event the passage 
 ugh ice. 
 
 everal feet. It is 
 itered, but rarely 
 ) been known to 
 
 luring tl^e month 
 St of Bird Rocks 
 e within the gulf 
 schooners leaves 
 rud April 10, and 
 period 1889-1896 
 ;ween November 
 sen April 20 and 
 earlier in leaving 
 
 swick and N^ova 
 rhe records kept 
 harbor is rarely 
 erally open after 
 Strait are rarely 
 
AVERAGE TIME OF OPENINC 
 
 PiMMI. 
 
 Harbor froirn am. I DimppeBranr* of harbiir iri> 
 
 Arrival of Aald Im. 
 
 Pof 
 
 '* w^Mbiiry. Can* Hn-ton Fnb.S.lMM. 
 
 r; llarlMir (NIC. ami), Capn HrcloB Ian. 15 
 
 Cow II ,, Cape Itrelon Rarrly (rcpxr*. :i tliiipa in 
 
 laKl X> \ran. 
 Hydney. Ca|i« llrelon • Jan. 14, I8M 
 
 Pnrtllond, Capx Breton ' Jan. IS to Feb. I 
 
 Uaddwk, CapnBrelun Jan. 33 
 
 I 
 
 Oeorgetown, I'rinrr KilwanI lalanil Ilac.X. 
 
 Chariot 
 
 Tottotown. I'rinn- EilwanI laland Dae.Sl. 
 
 Apr.Zl.tlM 
 
 Ilrpaltii up with aoiitiierly 
 
 winii. I 
 
 NiiBf rirepl in dncka ; 
 
 Feb. TIKM.... 
 AlHiiit Mar. I? 
 
 Apr. 20. IMA 
 
 Apr. IS to May I. 
 Apr. 13 
 
 Apr. 31 
 
 Vrh litttH 
 
 UcniTally in Jan . 
 
 ■Inn. 15 to Feb. I . 
 Nona 
 
 Jan. 
 Non«' 
 
 flnmmaralda, I'rinrr EilwanI laland Vve. II 
 
 Uaacumpeqiia, I'rinrr MwanI laland Ian. 3, IM7 
 
 KiobniondBay. I'rinor F^ward laland Abontllec.lS 
 
 Ualprqnr, Prlncr Edward laland | Not nntil oIommI by Arid Icr.' 
 
 Sooria, Prlnca Edward laland . 
 Ptctou, Nora Srotia 
 
 Jan. 4 to 10. 
 Uee.M 
 
 Shadlae, New Bmnawirk Dee.!.. 
 
 lllramlchl Bay, New Bmnawlek I)ee.S . 
 
 HhipprKan, New Bmnawlek r Ilrc.S.. 
 
 Caraiiarttr. New Bmnawlek I>er. II. 
 
 lialhauiiir, Nrw Bmnawlek Ilac.S.. 
 
 Uaap«, New Bmnawlek l>ao. 10. 
 
 Cape MaKdaten, Quebec » Dae. 16 to Jan. 1. 
 
 Father Point, Quebec 
 
 Stnerra 
 
 St. Paula laland . 
 
 Amherat, 8. If afdalen laland 
 
 Antlcoati, gouthweat Point 
 
 Cape Norman. Newfonndland 
 
 Canada Bay, Newfonndland 
 
 Wblta Bay (waatam ann), Nawfonndland . 
 
 Twilinnta Harbor, Newfoundland 
 
 Little Bay (Betto Core), Newfonndland . 
 
 Bzplolta Bunt laland, Newfoundland. 
 
 TouUngnet, Newfonndland 
 
 FoKo Harbor, Newfonndland 
 
 Oander Bay, Newfoundlawl 
 
 Qiaanapond, Newfoundland ,. 
 
 BonaTlata Harbor, Newfoundland. 
 Trinity Harbor, Newfoundland. . . 
 
 Hanta Harbor. NawAmndland.. 
 Hearta Content, Newfoundland. 
 
 Harbor Grace, Newfoundland . . 
 
 St Jobna Harbor, Newfoundland . 
 
 Ferryland, Newfoundland 
 
 Cape Race, Newfoundland 
 
 Trepaaay Harbor, Newfoundland. 
 Plaoentla, Newfonndland 
 
 Lamelin Harbor, Kawfoundland. 
 
 Grand Bank, Nawfonndland.... 
 Harbor Breton, Newfoundland . 
 
 La Hunr Bay, Newfoundland. 
 Biirco, Newfoundland 
 
 La I'oiln Harbor, Newfonndland. 
 Cliannvl, Newfoundland 
 
 Itny of lalnnda (Humlirr Rivrr), Newfonndland 
 
 Ihinue Bay. Newfoundland 
 
 Itli'li Point, Nrwfounilland 
 
 <>re<-uly Island 
 
 Apr. m 
 
 Apr a. ISM 
 
 AiMHit Apr. I . bay ice iiflen 
 
 tbick and liani on May I. 
 
 May I 
 
 Apr. 1 to 10 . 
 Apr.lt 
 
 Apr. M . 
 Apr. 31 . 
 May 4.. 
 
 Klrer rarrly fteeiea; only 
 moving ice. 
 
 Mays 
 
 Apr. 15 
 
 May 10 
 
 Apr. lu to 36. 
 
 Once in 40 yrara . 
 
 Jan.l 
 
 Dec 35 
 
 Dee. 36 to Jan. le. 
 
 Dee. 30. 
 
 Jan. 33 
 
 Jan.lto30. 
 
 Ja 
 
 Jan. 1 to Feb. 30, averaging 
 about Jan. 30. 
 
 Jan.Otolt 
 
 Jan.l 
 
 Jau.U 
 
 Jan. 30. 
 Jan. SI. 
 
 RareW f reotea 
 
 Jan. It to Feb. 30, averaging 
 
 about Fab. I. 
 Jan. lot* Feb. SO 
 
 Barely fteeiea'. 
 
 Oeeasinnally blocked by 
 
 aeldice. 
 About Feb.l 
 
 Occaaionally blocked by 
 field ire lu days at a t ime, 
 and fhnan over at inter- 
 vala varying fhmi S to 10 
 yeara. 
 
 Never 
 
 Outer aneborag* aeldom 
 froien for more than 3 or 
 S days. Inner anchorage 
 flrorn Jan. I to Apr. IS. 
 
 About Dec. 1, but earily 
 broken up. 
 
 Never frozen ; occaMionally 
 bloi'keil by drift ice from 
 ailiacent eovea. 
 
 Feb. 10 
 
 Itarely frozen. 
 
 I»re.2« 
 
 Jnn. 15 
 
 |)e<*. 15 
 
 Dec. l5to.laVi.2i! 
 
 Belk>Islr I 
 
 battle Harbor. Lubmdor I>er.l3. Navintion i-losen 
 
 4 we«-k« earfli-r or later. 
 
 according to neason. 
 
 Fab. to Mar., flnntlng lee 
 fhim aiUaoant eovea. 
 
 May 10 . 
 Mar. 31 
 May 20, 
 
 May 10 . 
 
 MayO 
 
 May I to 10. 
 
 .do 
 
 Apr. 36 to June 4, averaging 
 alHint May 10. 
 
 Apr.23 
 
 Apr.n 
 
 Mar.O 
 
 Mar. 30. 
 Mar. 36, 
 
 Mar. 4 to May 33, averaging 
 
 Apr. 10. 
 Mar.ltoApr.l 
 
 Mar. SO. 
 
 Apr. 1 
 
 ...do 
 
 .Ian. 4. 18H7 
 
 Apr I; drtveabaok harbor 
 
 Ice. 
 Jan. IS 
 
 About Feb 1 
 
 But HttIa field iaa. 
 
 None 
 
 ..do 
 
 None aince apring of !•?•, 
 . than May 14. 
 
 None 
 
 ...do 
 
 Dae. 9, mean of 4 yeara. 
 
 Feb. IS; 
 Jan. 13. 
 
 dapandanpon wind 
 
 Jan. IS 
 
 Jan. 1 to 16.. 
 Dec.24,IS«7. 
 
 Dec. 36 to Jan. 10. 
 
 Feb. 10 to 30 . 
 Jan. 10 
 
 Jan. 16 to SO. 
 
 Jan. 18 
 
 Jan. 14 
 
 Mar. 11 . 
 
 Feb. IB.. 
 Apr. It . 
 
 Apr.l .. 
 Apr. 16 . 
 
 Jan. 30 to Feb. 30. 
 
 Jan. to Fab. 16. 
 
 FM>. 10 to Apr. 10, 
 
 38 veara. 
 Jan.°30 toMar. 17, 
 
 38 yeara. 
 
 Barely any, only with aouth- 
 arly wind after ice has 
 rounded Cape Race. 
 
 About Mar. 1 . 
 Feb. 36 
 
 Veaaels can nearly always 
 
 enter by April. 
 Moves oir with northerly 
 
 wind, and disappears in 
 
 April. 
 Mar.20 
 
 Apr. 24 
 
 Apr. 15 
 
 Mav 20 
 
 Mar. I to 10 
 
 May 11 
 
 Feb. (rare occurrence) . 
 
 Rarely comea 
 
 For a few days in Feb. and 
 Mar. 
 
 Jan.l 
 
 .Ian. 15 1 Apr. 15 
 
 .Ian. 15 1 May 15 
 
 Jan.l to 10 June 10 to 30. 
 
 Disappearance of field loo. 
 
 Feb. 33, 1886 ... 
 About AprSO . 
 
 Varira. about May I. 
 With wmtcrly winda 
 
 Apr 15 to May 1. 
 Nona 
 
 Kml ol Apr. 
 None 
 
 ...do 
 
 May 10 
 
 Apr. 1 to May 1. 
 
 May IS 
 
 Apr.l to May 1. 
 
 Nona 
 
 ...do 
 
 June 4, 1IT8. 
 
 Nona 
 
 ...do 
 
 ...do 
 
 ...do 
 
 Apr. 8, mean of 4 yenra. 
 
 BnralTrei 
 
 of timo. 
 
 May 81 .. 
 
 any length 
 
 May 18 
 
 Mar. SI to Apr. SO.. 
 
 Jnna II. ISSlT. 
 
 May 10 to June 35. 
 May 10 to June IS. 
 
 Apr.34 
 
 May 1 to 10 . 
 
 MayltoSO 
 
 May» 
 
 May 1 to June I 
 
 May 11 . 
 
 May 30. 
 
 Apr.St . 
 
 Uneartain 
 May IS.... 
 
 May 1 to St. 
 
 Apr.orMay 
 
 Feb. 36 to Apr. SO, 
 
 28 years. 
 Mar. 13 to June 7, 
 
 SSyanrs. 
 
 About Apr. 1 
 Mar. 36 
 
 Apr.l 
 
 Apr. 15 
 
 Jan. 3 to F<-l>. 13. 
 Jan. to Apr. IS.. 
 
 June 14. 
 May 18 . 
 
 1151 Face page 7 
 
rERAOE TIME OF OPENINO AND CLOSING OF PORTS. 
 
 lappearuire of Aeld loe. 
 
 ) 23, IWM ... 
 out Apr.W. 
 
 rim . about May I . . 
 (Ii wmtcrly wind*. 
 
 r lA li> May 1. 
 na 
 
 il nl Apr. 
 
 dr 
 
 do 
 
 ly 10 
 
 r.l tollayl. 
 
 \jU 
 
 iMtoMajl. 
 
 do 
 
 m4, itn. 
 
 do. 
 do. 
 do. 
 
 tr. I, maao or4 ycara. 
 
 tralr remaina aoy laagtb 
 
 if tinM. 
 
 tyU 
 
 »yi« 
 
 ir.SltoAar.W.. 
 
 iBall.iaair. 
 
 ay 10 to Jon* SS . 
 ay lotoJnaelS. 
 
 pr.M 
 
 ay 1 to 10 . 
 
 ay I to 90 
 
 •y« 
 
 ay 1 to Jane 1 
 
 ay 11 . 
 
 •yao. 
 
 pr.M . 
 
 Dcartaln .. 
 ay IS 
 
 ay 1 to 20. 
 
 pr.orHay 
 
 th. IS to Apr. 30, 
 
 28yeara. 
 
 ar. 13 to Jnne 7. 
 
 aSywura. 
 
 boat Apr. 1 . 
 ar.2S 
 
 Dcpartara of last vtwael 
 Mfora loo aaaaoB 
 
 Arrival of flmt vraaf I aflrr 
 lee I 
 
 iplctely or partially 
 do ■ 
 
 Interval. If mimpletely 
 eloaod. 
 
 DM-.n. KM. 
 Feb. 90 
 
 About Feb. I. 
 Jan.ft. IIM... 
 
 Jan. I. 
 Jan. 6. 
 
 Apr. 5. IHM. 
 Mir. IS 
 
 Qencrally la Mar . 
 Apr. U 1«M 
 
 AtlBterrsIa 
 
 At iuterrala by Seld lea — 
 
 At iBtorrala by llald Iro; 
 
 naver by harrnir Int. 
 Averam i montba each year 
 
 Jan I to Apr. IS 
 
 Houlhweal arm open all 
 » Intor. 
 
 iTeramS 
 rioaed. 
 
 llayl ' Cnmplately at timea 
 
 Apr.94 Htine yean at Interrala, 
 
 otbar yaara oonpletely. 
 
 Dm. 90 Apr.9t . 
 
 Dao.tl 
 
 Dae. 30 tea. 
 Bod of Dec. 
 
 Miildla of Dae. : aeldom any 
 Im to pravpDt veaaola laaT 
 IDB nntilJan. 
 
 JaB"9 
 
 D«c.» 
 
 Dec.!... 
 Nov. 96 . 
 Mot. 19 . 
 
 KoT.9S 
 
 NoT.lt 
 
 U«o.4to» 
 
 Not. 3S to Dee. S . 
 
 Nor. U, moan of 8 yean . 
 
 Open at all 
 Dec. 13 
 
 Dae. 17.. 
 Dec.S... 
 Mot. la . 
 
 Not. ao . 
 
 I>M>.7 
 
 iut. 1 to 10. 
 
 About Jan. 1 . 
 
 Jan.». 
 Ju.'7..' 
 
 Doc 90. 
 Jar. 98. 
 
 Dm).9S. 
 
 Teaaala eone and go all year 
 round : aamotlmea delayed 
 by ileld lee. 
 
 ....do 
 
 pr.l 
 
 pr. 15 
 
 pr. 1.5 
 
 «y ]R 
 
 line lu tu30. 
 
 line 14 
 
 ay 18 
 
 Dms.94. 
 Dee. IS. 
 
 Open at all 
 
 Ajrri ve and depart at all aea- 
 aons. 
 
 Navigation nearly always 
 
 open in buy. 
 Generally open all tli« year 
 
 roumL 
 
 Jan.l 
 
 Jan.] 
 
 Nov.lO 
 
 NoT.Stull 
 
 Apr.94 
 
 Apr. 99 
 
 May I to 10 . 
 
 May 16 
 
 Coinpletaly . 
 ...do 
 
 .do. 
 .do, 
 .do. 
 
 Jaa. to Apr 
 
 Jan. IS to Apr. 16. 
 Jaa. 10 to Apr. II. 
 
 Jaa. to Apr — 
 Dae. 90 to Apr. 
 
 At intarvaU antU Tab. 1. . 
 
 Canpletely . 
 ,...do 
 
 Apr.9i 
 
 Apr.90 
 
 Apr.lO ....do 
 
 May7 ....do 
 
 May 91 j.-do 
 
 May 19 '....do 
 
 May 6 '....do 
 
 Mavll ....do 
 
 Apr.90 to May 1 i Generally In motion all win- 
 
 trr. 
 Apr. 94, mean of 7 yaara — (Junipletely at Intarvala — 
 
 Dae. 10 to Apr. 10 
 
 Jan. 1 to Apr. 10 
 
 Dec. 10 to May 1 : shinning 
 
 plaea open lalor In fall. 
 Complotaly flroB Fab. 1 to 
 
 Jan. 14 to Apr. •■ 
 Jan.* t4i Apr.3 . 
 
 Apr. 11. 
 
 May 10 
 
 Apr. IS to May 4. 
 Jane • 
 
 Mayl 
 
 Mav9S 
 
 May I to 10. 
 
 May 1 to 10. 
 
 ▲pr.7. 
 
 Apr. 98 . 
 
 May 1 (at intenrala all win 
 
 ter). 
 Mar.6 
 
 Attr.lS. 
 
 Mar. 9.. 
 
 Apr. 30. 
 
 May 12 
 
 Mayl 
 
 May IS 
 
 .1 uoe 10 to 20. 
 
 Oeeaalonally obatmeted by 
 Bebl lee. 
 
 Dee. 17 to May 10 . 
 
 Completaly 
 
 ...do 
 
 Doe.itoApr.lt 
 
 BarlyiaDae.t*Apr.lS. 
 ■ariy in Dae, to May 10. 
 
 Dm. 10 to May!.. 
 Dec. IS to May*.. 
 Dor. 9K to May 10. 
 Jan. I to Apr. 96.. 
 
 Mavlgatiua chiaod Iwtweaa 
 Dee. lOand Apr. 10: potba 
 ars opw aboat half of tka 
 
 Jan. 1 to Apr. 1. 
 Doe. to May 
 
 Completely i DFe.toMay. 
 
 .do. 
 .do 
 
 Completaly . 
 doaipisleljr" 
 
 At laterrala tnm Jan. 91 
 toM^II. 
 
 At iatarraUi altar 94 honra 
 of aontbwaat wind too- 
 aelaean enter harbor. 
 
 AtinterTala 
 
 At interTals Ihw Jw. 90 to 
 Mar. 90. 
 
 At interraU by flaU lee . . . 
 
 Completely rioaed twiee in 
 
 30 years. 
 At intenrala by fleld ice — 
 
 Only at intenrala . 
 
 At intervals fhim Mar. 1 to 
 
 20. 
 At interTals by fleld ice — 
 
 Completely . . 
 
 ilo 
 
 . .do 
 
 At intenrals. 
 
 Jaa. a to Apr.W. 
 Jan. S to May 10.. 
 
 V^ltoApr.l. 
 
 JaiLlltoApr.lI. 
 
 Completely fkom Feb. I to 
 Mar. 0, at intorrala tnm 
 Jan. II to Feb. a. 
 
 Feb. 9t to Mar. 95. 
 
 Tbiekasss o( Ico. 
 
 .\boat9 feet 
 
 Northraat arm Ato 19 incbrs 
 
 Harbor Ire about 4 Inebes . 
 
 6 to lu Inches 
 
 itinehao. 
 ...do.... 
 
 ...do 
 
 19 lo II Inches , 
 
 19ln«hee 
 
 8 to 13 inrhea . 
 Aboutlfert.. 
 
 lto9llMt 
 
 lu to 2U Incheo . 
 
 90 to as inebee . 
 
 9 to 3 feet 
 
 10 to M inebee . 
 
 9tol feet 
 
 4 feet 
 
 a fret 
 
 10 lo 9i) inebee . 
 
 Ordinary Held lee. 
 
 1 to I feet. 
 IMinehea.. 
 
 9toafbot. 
 
 ...do. 
 9 feet. 
 
 .do. 
 
 9 foot. 
 
 Ifoot 
 
 II 
 
 a to 13 inobea . 
 atoiainohaa. 
 
 Harhor lee 1 or 9 Inohee. 
 
 ainchea. 
 4 inebee. 
 
 Dee. 95 to Apr. 30 ISinebea. 
 
 Jan. to Apr ; 2feet .... 
 
 Dee. IS to May 20 Sfeet.... 
 
 Coni|iletely nt Umea |;y fleld 3 to S feet, 
 ice. 
 
 Itemarlis. and records of previous 
 years. 
 
 Kerorri 23 years, open ganarally all 
 the year round. 
 
 Mean of 3U years. 
 
 Mean of llyeara' cloatng: ramaiadar 
 
 mean of IS yiKin, 
 Mean of a years. 
 
 Maaa of 19 years. 
 
 of la yaara. 
 Mean of S years, ferry. boat ran In 
 
 traali exespt t*om Fab. 6 to la. 
 Maaa at t yaara. 
 
 of Bi J 
 
 Mean of 5 yi 
 Mean of 19 yi 
 
 Tbora is rarsly aay boary tea natil 
 sad of Dae. Tboralaalwayaaeban. 
 aal of opaa water on aorth or aontb 
 aide of tbo rlrer. dependlac apon 
 wlad. Wlad Talodty of 7 maaa par 
 boar aaSekat to drtvo lee to mid- 
 ekaanol. Sometlaiea epaa water 
 laataamoathatattaM. 
 
 Fak. 16 to Apr. 91; 
 
 MaaaofMfwua. 
 
 Mean of 99 yaara. 
 
 Fleld lea baa remained antll Joly 1 
 and baa diaappeared by Apr. 10. 
 
 Mean of 10 yearai aeaUag ateanors ea* 
 ter all moathss other ataamiaa «aa 
 oeeaataa«Uy enter. 
 
 Opea at iatarrala beti 
 llayM. 
 
 Oeeasioaally opoa. 
 Mean of 11 ] 
 
 Apr. 1 1 
 
 Dataa Tarlabk 
 Mean of It yi 
 
 Mean of 10 years i noTor 
 more than a weeka at a time. 
 
 Mail atoamer unable to enter only I 
 times in 30 yeara. 
 
 NaTigation eloaed only S or a tin 
 SUyean. 
 
 I in 
 
 KoTer fnisrn until arrival of fleld ice. 
 
ICE — FOGM. 
 
 The hill bor of rictmi in fieiincntly cpeii 
 
 <!lo8('<l by ice after April LT.. 
 two weeks earlier tliiin this. 
 
 West of Cape Canso the ice r„ -ly, if ever, interferes with naviKa- 
 t on. Hahtax, for example, has only b.ei. closed once in 3r, years, and 
 then for only a short time, by ice fro/en ,n the harbor, though ice im 
 inch or two in thickness freciuontly freezes there. 
 
 Heavy ice is noticed at the month of the St. Lawrence River in the 
 latter part of December and lasts until April 10 or ir,, hut all duriny 
 the season leads can be found when the wind .Irives the ice to either 
 side of the river. The north shore of the river, in the vicinity of the 
 SaKuenay, during certain years remains open after the surrounding 
 waters are filled with ice, and a vessel would find no diHiculty in male 
 mg Tadousac Harbor. The river, from Quebec to Montreal, generally 
 opens during the last week in April. 
 
 In the Strait of Jielle Isle thin sheet ice makes its appearance between 
 December lo and December 25, and close-packed ice a little later 
 Bergs do not appear in any great numbers until after April 1, but from 
 that time until the following September they are numerous and some- 
 times very large. They sometimes make their way through the strait 
 and are seen occasionally as far west as Greenly Island and as far 
 south as Rich Point. Since 1889 the first transatlantic steamer has 
 passed through the strait within a day or two of June 17, although 
 navigation has frequently been open some days earlier. The date of 
 the last passage during the same period has varied from November 6 
 to December 7. 
 
 At the time of the opening and the closing of navigation, full reports 
 as to the condition of the ice at various points of the river and gulf of 
 St. Lawrence are forwarded, for the benefit of commerce, to the Boards 
 of Trade oi Montreal, St. John, New Brunswick, and Quebec, and to 
 the Chamber ot Commerce, Halifax, Nova Scotia. Full information is 
 a so supplied by the Marine Department to their agents at Anticosti, 
 Magdalen Islands, Meat Cove, Cape Breton, Cape Bay, Low Point 
 North Sydney, and Cape Race as to weather, wind, and movement and 
 condition of the ice in the gulf and river St. Lawrence up to Montreal, 
 for the guidance of any vessel calling for information. 
 
 Fogs may occur at any time during the open or navigable season, 
 and they sometimes last several days in succession, but are most fre- 
 quent in the early part of summer, and seldom fail to accomimny an 
 easterly wind of any strength or duration. In the months of October 
 and November the fogs and rain that accompany easterly gales are 
 replaced by thick snow. During westerly winds they are rare, and 
 never of long continuance. 
 
 The above general observation is subject, however, to restriction, ac- 
 cording to locality or season. Thus winds between the south and west, 
 which are usually clear-weather winds above Anticosti, are frequently 
 accompanied with fog in the eastern parts of the gulf. Winds between 
 
8 
 
 GULF OP ST. LAWRENCE. 
 
 the south and east are almost always accompanied with rain and fog in 
 every part. NE. winds above Point des Monts are often east or more 
 to the southward in the gulf, changed in direction by the high lands of 
 the south coast, and have therefore in general the same fogpy charac- 
 ter. Winds of considerable strength and duration are here meant, and 
 ■which probably extend over great distances. 
 
 Moderate and partially fine weather winds may occur without fog in 
 any season and in any locality. In the early part of the navigable sea- 
 son, especially in the months of April and May, clear weather NE. 
 winds are of frequent occurrence, and they also sometimes occur at 
 other seasons in every part of the gulf and river. 
 
 The fogs which accompany easterly gales extend high above the sea, 
 and can not be seen over from V\e masthead of a vessel; occasionally 
 they admit the land or other objects to be distinguished at the dis- 
 tance of ^ mile or more in the day time. The fogs that occur in calms, 
 ■especially after strong winds, are frequently so dense as to conceal 
 a vessel within hail ; these fogs are usually not much elevated above the 
 sea, so that when objects are hidden at 50 yards from the deck they can 
 be plainly seen by a person 50 or 60 feet up in the rigging. 
 
 When within sight of land in foggy weather the usual effect of fog 
 is that of causing estimations of distance to be erroneously in excess. 
 No gi'eat reliance should be placed upon an assumption of position 
 depending upon the distance at which the sound of surf breaking on 
 a rocky shore can be heard, but on many portions of the coast where 
 steep cliffs extend to the shore the proximity of a steamer to them 
 may be detected by the echo of the whistle. There is no safe guide but 
 the constant nse of the lead. 
 
 Winds. — The prevailing winds during the navigable season are 
 either directly up or directly down the estuary, following the course 
 of the chains of highlands on either side of the great valley of the St. 
 Lawrence. The westerly winds do not appear to be so much guided 
 in direction by the highlands, excepting along the south coast, where 
 a SW. wind at the island of Bic was observed to become a NW. wind 
 at Cape Gasp^. These wincio T. equently blow strong for 3 or 4 days in 
 succession; the westerly winds being almost always accompanied by 
 fine, dry, clear, and sunny weather; the easterly winds as frequently 
 the contrary — cold, wet, and foggy. 
 
 In the spring easterly winds mostly prevail, frequently blowing sev- 
 eral weeks in succession. As the summer advances the westerly winds 
 become more frequent, and the SW. wind may be said to be the pre- 
 vailing wind in summer in all parts of the river and gulf. Light south 
 winds blow occasionally; but north winds are not common in summer, 
 although they sometimes occur. Steady NW. winds do not blow fre- 
 quently before September, excepting for a few hours at a time, when 
 they generally succeed easterly winds which have died away to a calm, 
 forming the commencement of strong winds and usually veering to the 
 
 
 I .! 
 
n and fog in 
 east or more 
 ligh lands of 
 jggy cliarac- 
 3 meant, and 
 
 ithoiit fog in 
 avigable sea- 
 weather NB. 
 nes occur at 
 
 bove the sea, 
 occasionally 
 d at the dis- 
 cur in calms, 
 IS to conceal 
 ted above the 
 leek they can 
 
 r 
 
 1 effect of fog 
 sly in excess, 
 in of position 
 breaking on 
 5 coast where 
 mer to them 
 afe gnide but 
 
 season are 
 
 the course 
 
 oy of the St. 
 
 much guided 
 
 coast, where 
 
 a NW. wind 
 
 or i days in 
 
 iompanied by 
 
 1,8 frequently 
 
 jlowing sev- 
 BSterly winds 
 o be the pre- 
 
 Light south 
 ft in summer, 
 not blow fre- 
 a time, when 
 
 ay to a calm, 
 
 eeriug to the 
 
 WINDS. 9 
 
 SW. The NW. wind is dry, with bright clear skj', flying clouds, and 
 showers. After the autumnal equinox, winds to the northward of west 
 become more common, and are then often strong steady winds of con- 
 siderable duration. In the months of October and Nov'embor the NW. 
 wind frequently blows with great violence in heavy squalls, with i>a8sing 
 showers of hail and snow, and attended with sharp frost. 
 
 Thunder-storms are not uncommon in July and August. They sel- 
 dom last more than an hour or two, but the wind proceeding from them 
 is in general violent and sudden, imrticularly when near the mountainous 
 part of the coast. Sail should, therefore, be fully and quickly reduced 
 on their approach. 
 
 Strong winds seldom veer quickly from one quarter of the compass 
 to the opposite. They generally fall calm, and are succeeded by a wind 
 in the opposite direction. It is not meant, however, by this observa- 
 tion that they may not veer to the amount of several joints. The NW. 
 winds seldom or never veer round by north and NE. to east and 8K., 
 but they do frequently by degrees to the SW., after becoming moderate. 
 SW. winds seldom veer by the NW. and north to the eastward, but 
 sometimes by the south to SE. and east. Easterly winds gener.ally 
 decrease to a calm, and are succeeded by a wind from the ojjposite 
 direction. 
 
 In the fine westerly winds of summer a fresh breeze will often decrease 
 to a light breeze or calm at night, and spring up again from the same 
 quarter on the following morning. Under these circumstances only 
 may a land breeze off the north coast be looked for. The same has been 
 observed off the south coast also, but not so decidedly or extending so 
 far off shore. The north land wind may occasionally be carried nearly 
 over to the south coast just before daylight, but the south land wind 
 seldom extends more than 5 or 6 miles off, and that very rarely. Under 
 the same circumstances, that is, with a fine weather westerly wind 
 going down with the sun, a SW. land breeze will frequently be found 
 blowing off the north coast of Anticosti at night and during the early 
 part of the morning. If, however, the weather be not settled fair, and 
 the wind does not fall with the sun, it will usually prove worse than 
 useless to run a vessel close inshore at night in the hope of a breeze off 
 the land. 
 
 Such is the usual course of the winds in common seasons, in which a 
 very heavy gale of wind will probably not be experienced from May to 
 October, although close-reefed topsail breezes are usually common- 
 enough. Occasionally, however, there are years the character of which 
 is decidedly stormy. Gales of wind of considerable strength then fol- 
 low each other in quick succession and from opposite quarters. 
 
 Barometer. — When, after a continuance of Avesterly winds and flue 
 weather, the barometer has risen nearly to its greatest height, say some 
 tenths above 30 inches, or begins to fall a little, an easterly wind may 
 soon be expected. If to this notice given by the barometer be added 
 
 I 
 
' 
 
 10 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWKENCE. 
 
 a warm bazy atmosphere during the day, and a heavy precipitation of 
 dew at night, with very bright twinkling stars, or a colored aurora 
 borealis, the approach of a southerly or an easterly wind is almost cer- 
 tain. If land be in sight at such a time, and appears much distorted 
 by terrestrial refraction, or if vessels in sight have the relative propoi- 
 tlon of their hull and sails changed by the mirage, or present double or 
 treble images, such appearances will render the before probable indi- 
 cations of the barometer certain. At the commencement, the southeily 
 or easterly wind will probably be light, with fine clear weather; but 
 this will not last above a few hours if the barometer continues to fall. 
 On the contrary, the wind will gradually increase, and as it does so the 
 sky will become overcast by degrees until it is completely clouded. 
 Eain and fog will follow, and continue during the continuance of the 
 southerly or easterly wind, with little intermission until they are dissi- 
 pated by a fresh breeze from a contrary quarter. 
 
 If the fall of the barometer, during the continuance of the southerly 
 or easterly wind, be very slow, the gale wiU probably continue and not 
 be violent; if rapid, it will probably be of short duration and of greater 
 strength ; at any rate, when the mercury falls toward 29 inches, a 
 change is certainly at hand and the gale will, in general, come from tlie 
 NW. The strength of this succeeding gale will be in proportion to the 
 fall of the barometer and to the strength of the southerly or easterly 
 gale which preceded it. In such a case there is seldom many hours* 
 interval between the one gale and the other. The southerly or easterly 
 wind generally dies away to a calm, and in a very few hours, and some- 
 times in a much less time, the NW. gale springs up. A heavy cross 
 sea remains for some time from the previous gale. 
 
 The barometer sometimes begins to jise in the interval of the calm 
 which precedes the XW. gale, at others, at its commencement; the fog 
 and rain cease, and the weather becomes quite clear, generally in a few 
 hours, and sometimes almost immediately. The strength of the west- 
 erly gale is usually greatest soon after its commencement, and dimin- 
 ishes as the bai'ometer rises, veering gradually to the west and SW. 
 It is worthy of remark that the circumstances just mentioned are 
 exactly the reverse of those attending the easterly gale. The latter 
 usually commences with clear weather and a high barometer, light at 
 first from the south or SE. and gradually increasing as it veers' to the 
 eastward, with a falling barometer. 
 
 To return to the westerly galfe. If, after it has veered to the SW. and 
 become moderate, the barometer remains steady at a moderate height, 
 fine weather may be expected. If it remains at a considerable height, 
 but still fluctuating and unsteady, within certain limits, variable, but 
 not heavy, winds and variable weather may be expected. If, on the 
 contrary, it rises quickly to a great height, a repetition of the south- 
 erly or easterly gale will not be improbable. Seasons have been ex- 
 perienced in which the barometer may be said to have been no sooner 
 
jipitation of 
 >red aurora 
 almost cer- 
 ;h distorted 
 tivo propoi'- 
 it double or 
 >bable imli- 
 le soutbeily 
 eather; but 
 Ques to fall, 
 does so the 
 ly clouded, 
 ance of the 
 )y are dissi- 
 
 le southerly 
 uie and not 
 1 of greater 
 9 inches, a 
 ne from tlie 
 rtion to the 
 or easterly 
 aany hours' 
 ■ or easterly 
 I, and some- 
 tieavy cross 
 
 of the calm 
 nt; the fog 
 lly in a few 
 >f the west- 
 and dimin- 
 it and SW. 
 itioned are 
 The latter 
 ;er, light at 
 reers to the 
 
 lie SW. and 
 *ate height, 
 Me height, 
 iriable, but 
 If, on the 
 ^ the south- 
 ro been ex- 
 I no sooner 
 
 WINDS. 
 
 11 
 
 blown up by one wind than it was blown down by another, and this 
 stormy alternation to have continued for several months, whilst in others 
 there has been scarcely a double-reefed topsail breeze during the whole 
 summer. 
 
 There is in fact so great a difference in the phenomena of the weather 
 in different seasons, that it becomes difficult to write anything respect- 
 ing it that shall not be liable to many exceptions. There are, however, 
 some strongly marked cases of connection betwten the indications of 
 the barometer and changes of tlie winds and weather wl.ich have been 
 subject to few, or almost no exceptions. The flrst of these cases is that 
 most common one of a southerly or an easterly gale, with a falling 
 barometer, being always wet and foggy, and succeeded by a strong 
 wind from the opposite quarter, with a rising barometer, and fine 
 weather. 
 
 A second case not of so frequent occurrence in commcm seasons, 
 excepting in spring or early in summer, is the northeasterly wind with 
 a rising barometer; which, although it may not bo at first for a few 
 hours, will almost always become fine and clear, and end in fine wea- 
 ther. A third case may be considered certain: Jf the barometer fall 
 suddenly and greatly at any time, a northerly, and most probably a 
 NW. gale of great strength may be confidently expected. It does not 
 follow that It will be immediate, for it may be preceded by a strong gale 
 from SW. for a few hours, during which the barometer will seldom rise, 
 and even, probably, continue to fall; but when the SW. gale dies away 
 the northerly or NW. will soon succeed, with a rising barometer. 
 
 In conclusion it may be remarked that as, on the one hand, a con.sid- 
 erable fall of the barometer may occur without being folIowe«l by a 
 strong wind, so, on the other, a breeze of considerable strength may 
 come on without any indication from the barometer; but not anything 
 that deserves the name of a gale. There lias never, within our experi- 
 ence, occurred a gale so heavy as to be of serious consequence to a good 
 vessel the approach of which has not been indicated by the barometer. 
 But it must be remembered that a high barometer in this climate, and 
 under the circumstances which have been mentioned, is often indicative 
 of a southerly or an easterly gale. It is remarkable that in the gulf 
 and estuary of the St. Lawrence a high barometer may be considered 
 as the forerunner of wet and foggy weather, which usually accompanies 
 Its fall; whilst a low barometer renders it equally probable that dry 
 weather will ensue, since it as often accompanies its rise. The nmrine 
 barometer, therefore, is of the greatest as-^istance in the navigation of 
 the gulf and river; and by attending constantly to its state and 
 changes, with reference to the winds and weather which preceded them, 
 combined with the indications afforded by the appearance of the sky, 
 etc., those changes of the wind and weather which are about to take 
 place may be anticipated with a degree of certainty sufficient, in most 
 cases, to enable a vessel to avoid being caught on a lee-shore or in an 
 
12 
 
 GULF OF 8T. LAWRENCE. 
 
 unsaft} anchorage, as well as to regulate her course in anticipation of 
 the coming change. 
 
 Currents. — In the main entrance of the gulf, between Newfound- 
 land and ('ai)e Breton Isliind, a current is very often found setting to 
 the southeastward during westerly winds, or in calm weather; but 
 easterly winds retard it and sometimes cause it to run in the contrary 
 direction. It is frequently deflected to the southward towards Cape 
 Breton Island by northerly winds. But winds, both present .and at a 
 distance, act so powerfully and irregularly on the rate and direction of 
 the currents and tides in this entrance of the gulf, as to render it diffi- 
 cult to say anything respecting them that is not aubject to exceptions. 
 
 Current observations conducted during August and September, 1894 
 and Irffto, showed that between Cape North and St. Paul Island the 
 current varied in direction from NNW. to NNE., and ranged in velocity 
 from i^ft, knot to 2 knots per hour. East of St. Paul Island the cur- 
 rent showed the same variation in direction, but the velocitj'^ ranged 
 from 1^1 knot to 1 ,^f knots. Off Cape North he current is stated to 
 run continuously from a northwesterly direction, except that sometimes 
 it may 'be checked or reversed for a few days by heavy southeasterly 
 winds. The current is no stronger in the spring than at other times. 
 From the Magdalen Islands toward Cape North, the current has a more 
 tidal character, but it makes to the southeastward. When sealing in 
 the spring, vessels caught in the ice will drift southeastward past 
 Cape North and sometimes as far as St. IMerre Island. 
 
 According to information as to 13 trips, dating from June 16 to Octo- 
 ber 17, 1895, returned by the steamers plying between Montreal and 
 Sydney, Cape Breton, the current between Magdalen Islands and Cape 
 NortU was found to run 8 times in the outward direction, from NW., 
 west, or SW., with a velocity of J to one knot; and twice from SE. or 
 south with a velocity of half a knot. Also three times there was no 
 current appreciable. It is also noted that in the vicinity of Cape North 
 during easterly winds the current appears to divide; and to the west- 
 ward of that cape a current is found which runs from NNE., as if it 
 were a branch from the main current. 
 
 In the region between Gasp(g and the Magdalen Islands, the elTect of 
 the tide from Chaleur Bay was felt as far as 30 miles out from Miscou 
 Island at the mouth of the bay. This may therefore occasion an appar- 
 ent cross current in that vicinity at times, and thus account for some 
 of the irregularities there met with. 
 
 On the south coast of Newfoundland, between St. Pierre Island and 
 Cape Kay, the current makes to the westward, and jjasses around Cape 
 Eay into the gulf. This was found to be the case at the stations off 
 Cape Ray where observations were taken during 1894 and 1895, and it 
 is also shown by the movement of icebergs oft" St. Pierre Island, 
 which make westward even against a NW. wind. The experience of 
 masters of vessels and of flsherineu frequenting these waters confirms 
 
CURRENTS. 
 
 m 
 
 ipatiou of 
 
 rewfound- 
 setting to 
 ther; but 
 3 contrary 
 arils Cape 
 t and at a 
 irection of 
 ler it diffl- 
 xceptions. 
 mber,lS94 
 Island the 
 in velocity 
 d tbe cur- 
 ity ranged 
 stated to 
 sometimes 
 itheasterly 
 tber times, 
 has a more 
 I sealing in 
 ;ward past 
 
 16 to Octo- 
 utreal and 
 3 and Cape 
 fropi NW., 
 om SE. or 
 ere was no 
 !ape North 
 } the west- 
 E., as if it 
 
 lie effect of 
 
 »m Miscoa 
 
 an appar- 
 
 t for some 
 
 sland and 
 ouud Cape 
 stations off 
 895, and it 
 re Island, 
 lerieiice of 
 s confirms 
 
 the result of the observations, and goes to show that the current is 
 distinctly felt for a width of 8 or 10 miles out, and that it must often 
 extend considerably farther, as it sometimes occupies half the width of 
 Cabot Strait. 
 
 The inward current past Cape Kay is, however, not constant. There 
 are instances of sealing schooners in the ice about the month of March, 
 which drifted in the opposite direction past Cape Kay. It appears, 
 however, that while the inward current prevails, the water is usually 
 open and free from drift ice, as it remains open off tlie south coast of 
 Newfoundland throughout the Avinter and spring. The evidence goes 
 to show that when there is ice in the oftlng of St. Georges Bay and off 
 Cape Kay, it comes from the opposite direction, carried by the general 
 current which makes across the gulf from Gaspe toward Cape North, 
 and at times when this current, or a branch of it, is driven farther to 
 the eastward than usual. 
 
 The ice is thus brought there under conditions which make it an indi- 
 cation of the disturbance of the current, as otherwise the water would 
 remain open. This disturbed condition is also accompanied by circling 
 movements in the ice. A schooner in the ice off St. George Bay has 
 circled around for several days between Cape St. George and Cape Kay 
 without passing either of these capes. When there is ice in this local- 
 ity, circling movements of a similar kind occur also in Cabot Strait 
 itself, which indicate an outward current in some part of the strait. 
 
 It is not clear what becomes of the current that passes in at Cape Kay. 
 As a rule there U no appreciable current off" St. George Bay, and very 
 little from Cape St. George to the Bay of Islands. We can not thus 
 trace this inflowing water as an actual current, but it is probable that 
 it makes to the northeastward, and diffuses itself over the gulf, because 
 we find that the density of the water throughout the northeastern por- 
 tion of the gulf is the same as in the open Atlantic, and this density 
 could not be so maintained M'ithout some inflow of this character. 
 
 Through Strait of Belle Isle. — There has been a widespread impres- 
 sion that the current in the Strait of Belle Isle runs constantly inward, 
 the statement being generally made that a branch of the Arctic current 
 flows through the strait into the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and again 
 enters the Atlantic iu a southeasterly direction between Cape Breton 
 Island and Newfoundland. 
 
 The idea of a constant inward flow appears to be based on the drift 
 of icebergs, and as they are most usually seen drifting inward, it has 
 been inferred that this is the constant direction of the current. The 
 converse of this, however, is much nearer the truth, and it may be 
 stated in general that when icebergs are numerous at the outer end of 
 the Strait of Belle Isle, and are also found within the strait, this indi- 
 cates that the direction of the current has been predominantly inward 
 irom the east during the days previous, while the absence of icebergs 
 indicates a current pred'^minantly out from the west. This, of coarse, 
 
 •i 
 
 .- ' ..J. !!-!U. W 
 
 1wrrfriTftiitr^"Yh7VTiHTri''-"''''f^ •'■"'•'^ •'"■'■'" ''™"''''"'' 
 
31 
 
 14 
 
 GULF OP ST. LAWRENCE. 
 
 refers to the preseuce or absence in the strait of floating bergs, and not 
 to bergs which may be aground near either shore. It may also be noted 
 that only a very small percentage of the bergs of the outer end of the 
 strait ever enter it. 
 
 A recent investigation of the currents of this region by theOanadian 
 department of marine, from the report of which the present informa- 
 tion has been compiled, has shown that the current in the Strait of 
 Belle Isle is fundamentally tidal. The best com])arison of the current 
 with the tide showed a complete correspondence between the two, 
 especially in moderate weather and during the prevalence of moderate 
 Avesterly winds. On such occasions there were several days during the 
 period of observation when the current ran east and west for an equal 
 length of time in each direction, and turned regularly with the rise and 
 fall of the tide. 
 
 During the period of greatest regularity, the current ran inward from 
 the east during the rise of the tide, and would either stop at high water 
 or still continue to run inward for some time after. The greatest length 
 of time after high water during which it was observed to run inward 
 was 2 hours and 15 minutes. The current then turned and ran outward 
 from the west during the fall of the tide, and would continue in that 
 direction for a length of time after low water, which varied from 40 
 minutes to 2 hours and 55 minutes. The greatest velocity of the cur- 
 rent in either direction under ordinary conditions of tidal regularity did 
 not exceed 2 knots per hour. 
 
 With a heavy and long-continued wind, the current would first run 
 for a longer time with it, and a shorter time against it, and would even- 
 tually run continuously in the same direction as the wind^ with a fluc- 
 tuation in velocity corresponding to the tide. The most marked 
 example of a persistent current running out of the strait occurred from 
 Monday, July 16, to Thursday, July 19. During these 3 days the cur- 
 rent (as observed 3 miles oft' the north shore), ran in from the east for 
 only 5 hours, and out fi'om the west for 19 hours, each day. The maxi- 
 mum velocity of the current fi:om the east was 1^- knots per hour; 
 from the west, 2i^^ knots per hour. The best example of a persistent 
 current running in through the strait from the east occurred from 
 Wednesday, September 5, to Saturday, September 8. All the indications 
 concurred in showing that the current ran continuously in the one direc- 
 tion during these days, although the observations were much inter- 
 rupted by bad weather. The observed motion of the icebergs seen in 
 the strait at this time agreed with the regular observations in showing 
 that the current ran continuously inward from the eaat. The currerv 
 then varied from a minimum of ^^ knot per hour to a maximum of 
 3,J;fu knots, in one direction. The tides themselves were anomalous, 
 as the low water for 5 successive tides scarcely fell below mean sea 
 level, and the whole rise was less than 2 feet, or abput half the usual 
 amount. 
 
 M<*-.ij|il\ 
 
 < I ' lli M-..-»M.lUUHt.J„j.g^^ 
 
i, and not 
 t be noted 
 nd of the 
 
 Canadian 
 ; intbrma- 
 
 Strait of 
 le current 
 
 the two, 
 
 moderate 
 
 luring tlie 
 
 ' an equal 
 
 te rise and 
 
 ward from 
 tiigb water 
 %st length 
 un inward 
 in outward 
 lue in that 
 id from 40 
 of the cur- 
 ularitydid 
 
 d first run 
 rould even- 
 1th a ttuc- 
 8t marked 
 urred from 
 ys the cur- 
 ie east for 
 The maxi- 
 per hour; 
 >ersistent 
 irred from 
 indications 
 one direo* 
 inch inter- 
 'gs seen in 
 in showing 
 he currer'- 
 ftximum of 
 momalous, 
 mean sea 
 the usual 
 
 CURRENTS. f(| 
 
 The gi'iieral characteristics of the current may be set down as follows: 
 
 1. The current is fundamentally tidal in its nature, and under normal 
 conditions it runs east and west witli velocities which are nearly e«iual. 
 It attains at times a velocity of 2 knots per hour in each din'ctir)n. 
 
 2. The conditions are normal in moderate weather and during the 
 prevalence of moderate westerly winds. 
 
 3. During heavy winds, especially when easterly or westerly in direc- 
 tion, the current whicih runs with the wind becomes stronger than the 
 current against it, and eventually the current may come to be contin- 
 uous ill the same direction as the wind. 
 
 4. The greatest velocities of the current which were observed during 
 heavy winds (in the months of .Inly and September) were as follows: 
 From the east, 3-iV,t knots; from the west, 2i knots per hour. 
 
 In reply to circulars issued, reports have been received from the 
 captains of transatlantic steamships of the leading lines, which state 
 the direction of the currents met with on oacli trip through the strait, 
 between Belle Isle and its western end, a distance of about 75 miles. 
 The result is as follows : In 1895, from July 11 to October 18, only 8 
 trips were reported. Out of this number, a current set outward to the 
 east 3 times, with a velocity of ^ knot to li knots per hour on the average 
 during the whole run through the strait, and twice there was no cur- 
 rent, or it was partly in enrh direction. In 1896 there were twenty- 
 six trips reported, ■which wme made between June 27 and October 30. 
 Out of this number, the current set outward 15 times with a velocity of 
 4 to 2 knots on the average during the run; it set inward to the west 5 
 times, with an average velocity of f to 1.^ knots, and 6 times there was 
 either no current, or it was part of the time in each direction. 
 
 Beports have also been received from the captains of transatlantic 
 steamers with regard to the currents encountered on the run between 
 Heath Point and Greenly Island, the result being as follows : In 1895, 
 from July il to October 18, eight trips were reported. Of this number 
 there were C times when there was no current appreciable; and twice 
 thecurrent set to the westward with the velocityof half aknot. In 1896, 
 there were twenty-four trips reported, which were made between July 5 
 and October 30. Ten times there was no current appreciable ; nine times 
 the current set eastward with a velocity which ranged from f^ to i^^ 
 knot per hour on the average during the above run ; five times the cur- 
 rent set westward with a velocity which ranged from -^o to to^o knot. 
 
 On account of the tidal character of the current in the Strait of Belle 
 Isle it is clear that no great volume of water can enter the Gulf of St. 
 Lawrence from that quarter. During the summer season the current 
 Hows through the strait in both directions with velocities which are 
 nearly equal, and there is only a difference in favor of inward flow from 
 tbe east, which on the whole does not probably amount to more than a 
 moderate percentage. There is reason to believe that in the early 
 spring the preponderance of flow from the east may be proiwrtionally 
 
 I 
 I 
 
 4 
 
16 
 
 GULP OF 8T. LAWRENCE. 
 
 II 
 
 fc'reater tlian at other seasoim. There is some evidence to show that 
 the incoming water may then penetrate the gulf as far as Bonne Bay 
 on the west coast of Newfonudland. But no reasons have been found 
 for supposmg that this water passes completely round the west coast of 
 Newfoundland and finds its way out into the Atlantic through Cabot 
 btrait, between Cape North and Cape Ray, in accordance with the 
 theory which has been more or less accepted up to the present time 
 The water in the Strait of Belle Isle is exceedingly clear. It is also very 
 cold, having as late as September an average temperature from surface 
 to bottom of less tiian 45o. Its density is as high as that of any water 
 found within the gulf, being on an average 1.0244 at the surface. The 
 water in Cabot Strait is quite diflerent from this in character The 
 outflowing current is on the side next to Cape North, or the farther 
 side from Belle Isle. The greater part of the width of the strait is 
 occupied by water having the usual milky-greea color of ordinary sea 
 water. The outflowing current has also a distinctly brown tinge Its 
 Hnrface temperature ranges from 55© to G5o, and its average density to 
 a depth ot 10 fathoms from the surface is 1.0230. 
 
 There is not only this difference in the charactei- of the water in 
 these two straits, but also a want of connection between them The 
 few observations obtained along the west coast of Newfoundland show 
 that there is a slight current from the SW. It is also stated by Lieu- 
 tenant Betty, li. N., navigating lieutenant of H. M. S. Pelican, that the 
 current between Cape Gregory and Eich Point runs almost constantly 
 from the SW., and is only intercepted by the ebb and flood tides 
 running in and out of the larger bays on the coast. 
 
 The fishermen on this coast anchor their boats as much as 10 or 12 
 miles otf shore, in about 30 fathoms of water. They thus have an 
 excellent opportunity of observing the behavior of the current. It will 
 be understood, however, that their information refers chiefly, if not 
 entirely, to the surface current. They state that its prevalent direc- 
 tion IS to the ENE., parallel to the shore; it wiU run constantly in that 
 direction 3 or 4 days together, and on the whole it has that direction 
 for rather more than two-thirds of the time. For 12 to 20 hours before 
 the arrival of a southwesterly gale it sets more strongly in its usual 
 direction, and before a northeasterly gale arrives it slacks; although 
 this IS not so certain an indication of wind, as it may also slack at 
 other times. With long-cou tinned easterly winds it may be reversed 
 in direction. It may also set directly off or on shore for 3 or 4 hours 
 or even longer. . ' 
 
 The ciurent is stronger near the shore and weaker farther out, as it 
 IS found that a schooner going westward will make better headway 
 with long tacks; but if going eastward, with short tacks inshore. 
 
 GASPli: CURRENT. 
 
 1. The usual currents.— WhilQ the ordinary weather for the season of 
 the year prevails, the current in the offing of the Gasp6 Coast runs 
 
 ub>«i<*<iAi^ 
 
CURRENTS. 
 
 17 
 
 show that 
 }oi)uo Bay, 
 been found 
 est coast of 
 >ugh Cabot 
 B with the 
 Bseut time, 
 is also very 
 'ODi surface 
 ' any water 
 :face. The 
 icter. The 
 the farther 
 le strait is 
 fdinary sea 
 tinge. Its 
 ) density to 
 
 e water in 
 hem. The 
 Hand show 
 3d by Lieu- 
 en, that the 
 constantly 
 flood tides 
 
 as 10 or 12 
 have an 
 It. It will 
 efly, if not 
 ent direc- 
 tly in that 
 direction 
 turs before 
 its usual 
 although 
 slack at 
 reversed 
 )r 4 hours, 
 
 out, as it 
 headway 
 lore. 
 
 season of 
 oast runs 
 
 constantly outward from the NNW. luul north. It usually occupies a 
 belt about V2 miles in width, lying from 13 to 1-1 miles otV shore, in the 
 vicinity of Fame Point. This belt appears to become narrower and 
 the current stronger toward (Jape liosier, and between it and the 
 shore there is a tidal current in both directions., as shown on the Admi- 
 ralty (Miart, No. 1021. [n passing Capo (laspt'; it keeps closer to the 
 shore, cutting off the inshore tide, and its <lirecti<>n therefore varies 
 from NNW. to NNE. This current past Cape Gasp*'* was found to 
 be constant during very varying conditions of the current elsewhere. 
 Tbe velocity of the current generally ranges from one to 2" knots, 
 the highest observed being 2 ,\- knots per hour. 
 
 2. Displacement of the currrent. — The main current from the NW., 
 consisting of water of the least density was found at times to lie in 
 the middle of the papsage between the Gasp<^ Coast and Anticosti, and 
 to have approximately the position shown by the line along the middle 
 of the passage marked "Constant Current" on Admiralty Charts Nos. 
 2516 and 1021. When the current is in this position, the area between 
 it and the Oasp6 Coast may be occupied by weak and fluctuating cur- 
 rents or even by a reverse current setting inward from the 8B. This 
 position of the current in tbe middle of the passage may therefore be 
 regarded as a displacement of the current, or an alternative route which 
 it may take. 
 
 3. Reversal of the current. — When the current takes this route along 
 the middle of the passage, there may be a reverse current running 
 inward from the SE., along the Gaspii Coast. Such a current may 
 occupy a belt lying between 2 and 12 miles from shore, and may run 
 constantly from the SE. for as much as 6 days with a velocity which 
 ranges from -^ to ItV knots per hour. This reverse current may thus 
 occupy the site of the usual outward current along the Gasp6 Coast, 
 and it appears to be caused by the current in the middle of the passage 
 circling round and turning back. While this takes place, the current 
 past Gape Gasp6 still runs from the north, and its direction will proba- 
 bly be a little east of north. This appears to be a branch which leaves 
 the main current at the bend where it turns back to form the current 
 from the SE. 
 
 4. Off and on shore directions of the current. — It Is possible for the 
 current, while veering in direction, to set directly off or on shore for a 
 few hours at a time. 
 
 5. Tidal influence. — When the current runs constantly in one direc- 
 tion, whatever position it may take, and whether it runs with its usual 
 outward direction or is reversed, it is always subject to a fluctuation 
 in velocity which corresponds with the tide. When the current has 
 its usual direction from the NW., or outward from the St. Lawrence 
 toward the gulf, it is strongest at low water, but when the current runs 
 inward the reverse is the case. 
 
 1161 a ' * 
 
 
 I 
 
 "TT.I ' Wr *- 
 
 ■ — 
 
18 
 
 GULP OP ST. LAWRENCE. 
 
 6. Return flow. — It is evident that there most be some retnm flow 
 to compensate for the ontflowiiitc water of the Gaspi^ Current, as its 
 vohune is more tlian 6() times as great as the average discharge of 
 the 8t. Lawrence River. The current in the Mingan Channel is a tidal 
 one, in botti directions, with only a very slight difl'erence of How in 
 favor of the inward direction. Also the deep water in the channel 
 between (iasp«'^ and Anticosti was found to be without movement. It 
 would therefore appear probable that the return flow must consist of 
 an inward movement of the water In somo part of the width of the 
 main ch'annel, and perhaps, usually on the Anticosti side, and that this 
 movement occurs either at the surface or as an undercurrent at a 
 moderate depth. 
 
 7. Inftuente of the wind. — It appears probable that the <!hief reason 
 the current keeps along the Caspi'; Coast is because the prevailing 
 winds (»n the lower St. Lawrence are toward the SB. side. Whei *.he 
 winds are also northwesterly in the GasiK' Kegioii they assist in keep- 
 ing the current along that shore, and tend to increase its speuU. On 
 the other hand, the current appears to be kept away from the coasi and 
 to be most disturbed when the winds are I'om the southward, WSW., 
 on the lower St. Lawrence, and at the same time south or SE. in the 
 Gaspi'' Region. The winds then blow in upon both ends of the water- 
 way which forms the entrance to the St. Lawrence, and they have an 
 ofi'shore direction along that part of the coast which uhe Gasp^ Current 
 asnally follows. The winds can only have the above l^ections in these 
 regions when a low-pressure area or storm center is uraveMng along a 
 course which lies to the northward of the St. Lawrence Valley. This 
 northern course for an area of low pressure is less frequent, as the 
 usual path of storms lies to the south of the St. Lawrence Valley, or 
 along the Atlantic seaboard. The conditions above indicated are there- 
 fore unusual ; and if the displacement and the reversal of the Gar,p^ 
 Current are dependent upon them, it is clearly correct to consider these 
 conditions of the (;urrent itself as exceptional. 
 
 It may therefore be said, in general, that vessels may expect to And 
 the usual outgoing current from the NW. along the Gaspe Coast, 
 unless they have reason to' infer from the weather they meet with that 
 a low-pressure area or storm center is passing to the iiorthward; 
 accompanied by winds which are southward of WSW. along the lower 
 St. Lawrence, and strong southerly winds with a falling or low barom- 
 eter at the entrance to the St. Lawrence south of Anticosti. The con- 
 dition of the current will then be disturbed, and it may lie in the mid- 
 dle of the passage between the Gasp^ Coast and Anticosti; wbile a 
 current which is irregular, or possibly inward from the SE., may be 
 foand in the offing of the Gasp<J Coast. Vessels making inward, espe- 
 cially if the weather is foggy, must not count too deflinitely, however, on 
 the absence of the outward current as an assistance in roonding the 
 
PILOTS — DraECTIONS. 
 
 19 
 
 some retnm flow 
 }6 Current, as its 
 rage diHcIiarge of 
 Ohaiinel is a tidal 
 erence of flow in 
 sr ill tlie channel 
 ut movement. It 
 w must consist of 
 the widtli of tlie 
 lide, and that this 
 ndercurrent at a 
 
 the <ihief reason 
 se tlie prevailing 
 side. Wher *.he 
 sy assist in k^ricp- 
 «e its specii. On 
 'om the coasi and 
 uthward, WSW., 
 utli or SB. in the 
 ttds of the water- 
 uid they have au 
 le Oasp^ Current 
 ■"ections in these 
 rave'ing along a 
 ce Valley. This 
 
 frequent, as the 
 Tence Valley, or 
 iicated are there- 
 lal of the Crar.p^ 
 -o consider these 
 
 y exjiect to find 
 e Gaspe Coast, 
 meet with that 
 the uorthward; 
 along the lower 
 g or low barom- 
 Bosti. The eon- 
 ^ lie in the mid- 
 ticosti; while a 
 he SE., may be 
 g inward, espe- 
 sly, however, on 
 u rounding the 
 
 Gaspt'^ Coast is under these disturbed conditions there an; tin .'s when 
 the current may be setting more or less on shore. 
 
 (The above information is ilerived from the report of progress of the 
 "Survey of Tides and('urrents in Canadian VVators.) 
 
 Pilots. — Pilots for the Ht. Lawrence cruise in their schooners in the 
 entrance of the river, and during the day these vessels cany a white 
 and red flag (upper half white, lower half red); by night one white li^ht 
 on the middle stay, just before the mainmast, but they Ore Hash lights 
 at least every tpiarter of an hour. During fogs a patent bellows horn is 
 sounded. Their cruising ground is comprised in 4 stations, namely. 
 Pilot station No. 1 , across the St. Lawrence in a northwesterly direc- 
 tion from the east extreme of Bic Lsland; Pilot station No. 2, in the 
 same direction from the west extreme of Hie Island ; Pilot station No. 
 3, in the same direction from Port au Pic, about 8 or !> miles westward 
 of Bic Island; Pilot station No. 4, between liazade Islets and (Jreen 
 Island. A yacht is kept at the entrance to Saguenay River for vessels 
 wishing to ascend that river. In bad weather, with fog and easterly 
 winds, the westernmost schooner anchors off the west end of Green 
 Island, and the yacht from Saguenay Ifiver goes to Brandy Pots, where 
 vessels are waited for. In heavy weather, when it is dangerous to 
 board vessels, signals are made to follow the pilot schooners to leeward 
 of Bic Island, where the pilot can be shipi>ed in smooth water. 
 
 General Directions. — Full Powered Steamers proceeding to the 
 gulf through Cabot Strait in the spring, should, if the weather be clear, 
 pass near enough to Galantry Head, St. Pierre Island, to obtain infor- 
 mation from the signal station as to the state of the ice; or, failing this, 
 seek the same intelligence either iVom Cape Kay with northerly winds, 
 or from the station on St. Paul Island under other circumstances. 
 After the ice has disappeared, generally about the end of May, they 
 should keep farther off Galantry Head, to avoid the dense fogs that 
 prevail in that neighborhood during the months of June and July, and 
 pay due regard to the strong current that occasionally sets into the 
 bays on the soath coast of Newfoundland. A.lso, during the same 
 period, it is better to be near St. Paul Island than Cape Bay, when 
 passing through Cabot Strait. 
 
 Auxiliary Powered Steamers should follow the same directions as 
 those with Aill power. 
 
 Sailing Vessels bound to any of the ports in the Gulf of St. Law- 
 rence should endeavor to make St. Paul Island, which, being of con- 
 siderable elevation, bold all round, and well lighted, may be safely made 
 at night or in daylight, or with care and good lookout, -be steered for 
 even in fogs, unless they are very thick. 
 
 Caution. — In approaching St. Paul Island from the SE. with northerly 
 winds the current, mentioned as at times coming from the north- 
 ward and setting toward the shore of Cape Breton Island, should be 
 
20 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE. 
 
 giinriled apfninst by atteiHliiig to the Hounding on the bank, which 
 extends about 2't niiles ott' 8(raturi Island, and oil' tlio eastern coast of 
 Cape Ilreton Island as far northward as Ingonish; beyond whicit tlie 
 deptli is too great to atl'ord any guidance. Tlie south coast of New- 
 foundland, eastward of Cape Itay, is broken, rocky, and dangerous. 
 The tidal streams being intluoMced by the winds are irregular, while 
 southerly and easterly winds bring a thick fog, which is njost dense near 
 the lee shore. On these accounts the coast should not be approached, 
 excei)ting with a decidedly northerly wind an<l clear weather. 
 
 St Paul to Bird Rocks and Magdalen Islands.— Aftei!- having 
 passed St. Paul Island, vessels bound across the gulf should endeavor, 
 if the weather be clear, to make Bird Hocks; Creat Hird Hock, the 
 largest or southeasternmost, bears from the north point of St. Paul N. 
 48° W. (N. 21° W. mag.) 65 miles. 
 
 In thick weather, which almost always accompanies easterly and 
 southerly winds, the bank surrounding Magdalen Islands is an excel- 
 lent guide up to Bird Bocks, but under such circumstances if the light 
 cau uot be seen it will be safer to run along the northern edge of the 
 bank, taking care not to come into less than 40 fathoms, than to attempt 
 to make the rocks. When well past them by the reckoning a course 
 cau be shaped up the gulf. 
 
 lu northerly winds the weather is usually clear; and, if the vessel be 
 far enough to windward, it will be advisable to stand to the westward and 
 endeavor to make Entry Island, taking care to avoid Doyle Beef and 
 the sandy spitofi" the east end of Magdalen Islands by not approaching 
 the islands in that part nearer than the depth of 20 fathoms. Under 
 the lee of these islands a smooth sea will be found, sufficient guidance 
 by the soundings, and good shelter and excellent anchorage in Pleasant 
 Bay. 
 
 Another advantage of following this course arises from the circum- 
 stance that the winds generally veer to the SW.; so that, if a vessel 
 has passed to leeward of Magdalen Islands with northerly or NW. 
 winds on the starboard tack, the succeeding SW. wind will enable her 
 to stand on the opposite tack towards Cape Gasp^. 
 
 Through the G-ut of Canso. — Proceeding to the Gulf of St. Law- 
 rence through the Gut of Canso, vessels when approaching the gulf 
 have to cross the banks which lie off the much exposed and dangerous 
 coast of Nova Scotia. Of these banks, the principal in extent and 
 most important in position, are the Banquereau and Sable Banks, the 
 former being the easternmost of what may be correctly designated the 
 Nova Scotia, Bank 8. 
 
 Banquereau Bank, an extensive plateau of sand, gravel, and shell, 
 with 15 to 20 fathoms water, is distinguished from contiguous banks by 
 numerous flat sea eggs without prickles, which are found on the bot- 
 tom. It extends from about latitude 44° 30' N., longitude 57° 20' W., 
 in a westerly direction about 120 miles to the meridian of 60<^ W. This 
 
 mm*' 
 
BANKS. 
 
 21 
 
 bank, which 
 stern coast of 
 nd which the 
 ;oaHt of New- 
 d (langorous. 
 regular, while 
 j»t dense near 
 i approached, 
 ther. 
 
 Aftei- having 
 mid endeavor, 
 ird Hock, the 
 )f St. Paul N. 
 
 easterly and 
 Is is an excel- 
 ces if the light 
 rn edge of the 
 lan to attempt 
 }ning a course 
 
 f the vessel be 
 westward and 
 oyle Beef and 
 ►t approaching 
 horns. Under 
 jient guidance 
 ,ge Id Pleasant 
 
 m the circum- 
 
 lat, if a vessel 
 
 lerly or NW. 
 
 rill enable her 
 
 f of St. Law- 
 shing the gulf 
 ind dangerous 
 in extent and 
 )le Banks, the 
 lesignated the 
 
 rvel, and shell, 
 uous banks by 
 td on the bot- 
 de 57° 20' W., 
 60° W. This 
 
 bank is Hcparated from Sr. Piern; Hunk l)y ;i drep Ktilly, nearly 00 miles 
 wide, having from lioo t<» •>00 fatiioms, muddy bottom; and from the 
 east edge (if Sable Isliuirl by another gully of deep water, 9 miles across 
 its narrowest part. 
 
 On reftMTing to th»! chart it will be seen that the shoalest part of the 
 BanquiM-eau Hank, with 1') fathoms, in latitude 4 P .'t5' N., and longi- 
 tude .17^ '>(' W., is the apex of a ridge (having less than .'tO fathoms' 
 water), about 40 miles in length NH.and HW., and that rehitively with 
 the dangers of Sable Island it is not only a safe ottliig for vessels 
 intending to pass to the northward of tie lai»l, named danger, but by 
 k('ei)ing, if possible, on the parellel of t'le bank, this continuous line 
 of comparatively shoal water would enable a vessel, under ordinary 
 circumstances, to feel her way with some degree of contldence, until 
 she has passed to the westward of Sable Island. 
 
 Soundings obtained by the French cruiser Na'iade, in 1894, indicate 
 that Banquereau Bank extends more to the eastward than is indicated 
 on the charts. This vessel obtained a sounding of 40^ fathoms in lati- 
 tude 44° 4;v N., longitude 57"^ 18' 15" W., half an hour before not bay 
 ing found bottom in 109 fathoms. From the above imsition the Na'iade 
 stood west at a speed of 6 to 6A knots, sounding every half hour, and 
 obtained soundings of 32, 28A, 29, 244, 10, 20 and 20 fathoms. 
 
 Misaine and Canso Banks. — Misaine Bank lies to the northward 
 of Banquereau Bank, between the latter and Scatari Island, and 
 between its NW. edge, with 00 fathoms water, and a similar depth on 
 the outer edge on a bank extending from the shores of Cape Breton 
 Island, there is a deep gully 20 miles wide, with from 70 to 130 fathoms. 
 The least water yet found on this bank is 30 fathoms, the general depth 
 being more than 40 fathoms, with a bottom of stone and broken shell. 
 The outline of the bank is very irregular; its eastern limit is in 45° 
 28' N., longitude, 58° 10' W., and its western extremity is connected 
 with Canso Bank by the 60-fathom line. 
 
 The least water found on Canso Bank is 35 fathoms, sandy bottom; 
 the bank is separated from the north end of Middle Ground by a space 
 of deep water with 112 fathoms, and from the bank extending from 
 Cape Canso by a narrow deep-water channel with 84 fathoms. 
 
 Artimon Bank, at the east end of the deep-water gully separating 
 Misaine Bank from Banquereau, is of small extent, the least water found 
 being 37 fathoms, over a bottom of stone with starfish and sea eggs. 
 
 Bird Rocks to Anticosti Island.— After leaving the bank of sound- 
 ings, northward of Bird Rocks, the water is deep until near the shores 
 of Anticosti. In making this part of the voyage the southerly current 
 should be considered, and the lead should be frequently hove. By 
 consulting the chart, it will be seen that there are soundings to be 
 obtained nearly all the way upon, and to southward of, a line joining 
 Bird Bocks and Cape Gaspe, while a few miles to the northward of that 
 line the depth is 200 fathoms. 
 
 Jonii^i&Mlia^' 
 

 n 
 
 GULP OF ST. LAWRENCE. 
 
 With a fair wind make Southwest Point of Anticosti which is marked 
 by a revolving white light; and, with westerly winds any part of the 
 coast of that island which can be attained. The fixed white light on 
 Heath Point, at the east end of that island, renders it easy to make at 
 night, if the weather be clear; and, if the weather be thick, the bank 
 of soundings, which extends 23 miles southeastward, may serve to 
 determine the vessel's position by the lead. 
 
 Approaching Anticosti, especiallj'^ from the eastward, soundings 
 should be obtained until the vessel's position has been accurately 
 determined, as sometimes, owing to peculiar atmospheric conditions, 
 that island is said to be difficult to distinguish, even when the weather 
 is moderately clear. The loss of the steamers Titania and Brooklyn 
 was as(;ribed to these causes. 
 
 Passage North of Anticosti Island. — In the event of making East 
 Cape, or the light on Heath Point, with a SW. wind, it will often be 
 preferable to proceed to the northward of the island, where there is a 
 good channel, rather than to tack arid stand back to the southward and 
 eastward. Under the lee of Anticosti, a vessel will have a smooth sea 
 and often clear weather, while there is a heavy swell and frequently a 
 thick fog to windward of it. She will, moreover, avoid the current out 
 of the St. lawrence, which runs constantly with westerly winds 
 between the south coast of the gulf and Anticosti; and thus be able at 
 all times to make way to the westward in moderate weather. At night, 
 or in foggy weather, the bank of soundings off" the Labrador Coast, and 
 farther westward the bank off Mingan Islands will safely guide her, 
 even although the land should not be visible, as from !N^atashquan 
 Point to St. John River westward of Mingan Islands there are banks 
 of sand, gravel, broken shell, and bits, of coral extending off the coast 
 many miles. Southward of these banks, and between them and Anti- 
 costi, there is a deep channel, in which, with the exception of the part 
 northward of North Point of Anticosti, the bottom Is, for the most 
 part, of blue mud. Such a remarkable difference in the nature of the 
 bottom, as well as in the depth of water, renders it comparatively easy 
 to take a vessel through this channel at night, or in foggy weather. 
 But in order to eft'ect this with safety the vessel should be furnished 
 with a patent sounding machine, which must be freely used as she runs 
 along the southern edge of the banks of saud, gravel, and shell, sheering 
 occasionally to the southward into the deep water and muddy bottom, 
 to make sure of not getting too far to the northward. 
 
 The dangers of this channel may be said to commence with the reefs 
 off St. Genevieve and Hunting Islands, on approaching which from the 
 eastward, the chart should be carefully consulted, for they are very 
 dangerous, an'l there are deep soundings, inside the outer banks, which 
 might lead to a mistake if care were not taken to keep on the southern 
 edge of the outer banks. 
 
 To pass the narrow part of this channel safely at night or in foggy 
 
 «iff«inaMpi»' 
 
I 
 
 DIRECTIONS. 
 
 23 
 
 ;i which is marked 
 i any part of the 
 id white light on 
 t easy to make at 
 B thick, the bank 
 rd, may serve to 
 
 iward, soundings 
 been accurately 
 )heric conditions, 
 when the weather 
 nia and Brooklyn 
 
 it of making East 
 , it will often be 
 where there is a 
 he southward and 
 iave a smooth sea 
 1 and frequently a 
 id the current out 
 
 westerly winds 
 nd thus be able at 
 sather. At night, 
 brador Coast, and 
 safely guide her, 
 rom Natashquan 
 
 there are banks 
 ling off the coast 
 a them and Anti- 
 sption of the part 
 is, for the most 
 the nature of the 
 imparatively easy 
 " foggy weather, 
 uld be furnished 
 / used as she runs 
 nd shell, sheering 
 1 muddy bottom, 
 
 nee with the reefs 
 ag which from the 
 or they are very 
 liter banks, which 
 p on the southern 
 
 night or in foggy 
 
 weather it is necessary that the lead should be kept constantly going 
 as the vessel runs along the southern edge of the bank off Miugan 
 Islands, and she should not be allowed to go to the northward into less 
 than 30 fathoms of water. 
 
 Should westerly winds be experienced, the weather will be clear, and 
 the Avhite cliffs on the north side of Anticosti, which extend from the 
 East Cape westward to opposite St. Genevieve Ishuid, will easily be 
 seen. In clear weather a vessel may stand in toward the north coast 
 of Anticosti to within one or 2 miles, as with the exception of the reefs 
 off Fox Bay it is bold and free from danger. To the M-estward of West 
 Cliff, the coast is low and shelving and reefs extend farther off. When 
 standing to the northward the soundings on the banks will show when 
 to tack. 
 
 Currents.— It has been remarked already that in westerly winds 
 there is a weak easterly current, but it is not constant and its rate 
 seldom exceeds half a knot. Sometimes it is imperceptible during the 
 westerly stream and runs even westerly the other way, on the approach 
 of easterly winds. On arriving off North Point of Anticosti with a 
 west or SW. wind, this current will almost always be found setting to 
 the NE., being turned in that direction by the west end of the island. 
 Confined M'ithin a comparatively narrow channel, it is here stronger 
 than elsewhere, running during the easterly stream abotit one knot, and 
 during the westerly rtream half a knot, in the ofBng. 
 
 Passage South i-"! Anticosti — Vesscils experiencing westerly winds 
 in the south channel should stand over toward Anticosti and make 
 boards, off and on, of 9 to 12 miles, to avoid the current out of the St. 
 Lawrence. In beating between Cormorant Point and South Point, off 
 which, at the distance of one mile from the shore, there is a rock with 
 16 feet water, keep the lighthouse on Heath Point open of Cormorant 
 Point. In standing inshore at night in the neighborhood of Southwest 
 Point, do not bring the light on this point to bear westward of N. 50° W. 
 (K 23° W. mag.), or when standing inshore to the westward of it, 
 southward of S. 56° E. (S. 29° W. mag.). 
 
 Caution. — In moderate weather a vessel will generally gain ground 
 to windward all along the south coast of Anticosti, but care should be 
 taken to avoid being becalmed near the shore between Southwest and 
 West Points, where both the swell and current set inshore, and where, 
 the bottom being of clean flat limestone, an anchor will not hold. It is 
 by no means uncommon off this part of the coast for the fine- weather 
 westerly breeze of summer to die away suddenly to a calm, so that a 
 vessel should stand off shore on the first appearance of a decrease of 
 wind to avoid being driven into danger. 
 
 Having made Southwest Point, and being 4 or 6 miles oft' it, with 
 a fair wind, a course should be steered along the coast, so as to pass 
 8 or 10 miles southward and westward of Cape Henry and West Point. 
 In thick weather the lead should be hove constantly, and a depth 
 
 t 
 
 I 
 
i ? 
 
 24 
 
 GULF OP ST. LAWRENCE. 
 
 of 40 fathoms or upward maintained. With this precaution, there is 
 no danger of being too near the coast, even when the lights can not 
 be seen, since there are depths of less than 40 fathoms at a distance 
 varying from 5 to 3 miles oft" shore all the way from Southwest Point 
 to the west end of the island. 
 
 Anticosti to Point de Monts. — An inspection of the chart will 
 show that there are depths of from 50 to 100 fathoms from the western 
 end of Anticosti to nearly opposite Seven Islands, whilst to the south- 
 ward the depths are much greater. This is useful in ascertaining the 
 position of a vessel when light winds and fogs prevail for several days 
 in succession, and the land in consequence has not been seen. When 
 the vessel has arrived off the West Point of Anticosti, with a fair wind 
 still continuing, a course should be steered well to the northward, espe- 
 cially with northerly winds, say for about Egg Island. She will thus 
 avoid the strength of the current and the possibility of being set over 
 too near the south shore by its acting on her starboard bow. When 
 she has run about half way across she should haul more to the south- 
 ward so as to insure clearing Point de Monts. 
 
 Caution. — If the weather be thick, as it commonly is, with a fair wind 
 for running up, great caution is necessary. In such circumstances, 
 after having run within about 15 miles of Point de Monts by the reck- 
 oning, sail should be reduced, so as to have the vessel under complete 
 command, and soundings obtained so as to insure that she is not to 
 the northeastward of the point, and this should be repeated frequently 
 until the light be seen, the fog gun heard, or until it is certaiu that it 
 is passed. 
 
 If the vessel be to the noitheastward of Trinity Bay, soundings 
 will be obtained in less than GO fathoms, from 4 to G niles off shoie. 
 Directly off Trinity Bay, there is the same depth 3 iiiles off shore; 
 while at the same distance off Point de Monts, there h no bottom at 
 100 fathoms. If the distance to Point de Monts has been run by the 
 reckoning without finding bottom at 70 fathoms, it will be almost 
 certain that the vessel is not to the northward; but still, as the effects 
 of currents can not be exactly calculated and reckonings are liable 
 to error, it will be prudent to shape a course well to the southward of 
 the point, till there remains no doubt of its having been passed. 
 
 In making the light on Point de Monts, remember that it is not on 
 the extremity of the point, but has been placed IJ miles to the north- 
 eastward, along the coast toward Trinity Bay. 
 
 Point de Monts may be approached to f mile with safety, but not 
 nearer in a large vessel, to avoid the dangers off that point. 
 
 The foregoing remarks apply where the object is to make the light- 
 house, or light, on Point de Monts, but this is no longer absolutely nec- 
 essary, as there are numerous lighthouses from which to obtain the 
 vessel's position. 
 
 TVorking to Windiivard. — Vessels beating up against westerly 
 
 'SBSSSST" 
 
DIRECTIONS. 
 
 25 
 
 ition, there is 
 
 lights can not 
 
 at a distance 
 
 ithwest Point 
 
 :he chart will 
 m the western 
 t to the south- 
 icertaining the 
 ir several days 
 I seen. When 
 ith a fair wind 
 ►rthward, espe- 
 She will thus 
 being set over 
 1 bow. When 
 *e to the south- 
 
 ith a fair wind 
 circumstances, 
 its by the reck- 
 iinder complete 
 bt she is not to 
 ated frequently 
 I certain that it 
 
 ^ay, soundings 
 
 iiiles off shove. 
 
 liles off shore; 
 no bottom at 
 
 leen run by the 
 
 will be almost 
 as the effects 
 
 ings are liable 
 southward of 
 passed, 
 lat it is not on 
 
 ss to the north- 
 safety, but not 
 
 tint. 
 
 nake the light- 
 absolutely nec- 
 to obtain tho 
 
 aiust westerly 
 
 winds should stand over to the northward, as soon as they can weather 
 Anticosti, unless the baronetcr or uthei- indications render it probable 
 that the wind will veer to the southward. During the tiiiod tides, 
 make short boards off and on the north coast, to take advantage of it, 
 for it runs strongest inshore. During the ebb, keep farther off the 
 land, for that tide also runs strongest near the shore. The streams, in 
 general, are weak along this coast, and a vessel will always make way 
 to windward in moderat« weAther. 
 
 From Seven Islands to Point de Monts is, in general, the easiest 
 part of the passage, tor the westerly wind, which, in this part, is the 
 most common, is off the land, so that a vessel can frequently fettdi up 
 to Point de Monts in smooth water, ])articularly at night, when the 
 wind in fine weather generally veers a point or two to the northward. 
 She will also have the benefit of the flood tide, whilst the ebb, being 
 turned off by Point de Monts, is scarcely felt. 
 
 If it blows fresh, and the flood be nearly done on arriving near Point 
 de Monts, there will be no use attempting to beat round it till next tide, 
 and then only in fine weather. In this case. Trinity Bay, with westerly 
 winds, is a good anchorage with moderate depth of water, good ground, 
 and plenty of room to get under way. 
 
 Point de Monts to Bicquette Island.— In the comparatively nar- 
 row estuary, where the tides and currents are much stronger, and more 
 various in their direction, than in the wider parts previously treated of, 
 and where there are shoals extending on the north side several miles 
 oft' the shore, a good look out and constant attention to the soundings 
 become indispensably necessary at night, or during the fogs, which are 
 so prevalent and embarrassing in this locality. 
 
 Tidal Streams. — After taking a departure from the Point de Monts, 
 the course to be steered must vary under different circumstances of 
 wind and tide. The downward stream is not only turned oft' to the 
 southward by Point de Monts, but Mauicouagau and Bersimis Points 
 also produce the same effect, although in a less degree, during the ebb 
 stream ; to which must be added the streams out of the large Mani- 
 couagan, Ontarde, and Bersimis Bivers. During the flood tide the 
 streams out of these rivers cease, the general stream is checked in the 
 oflQng, whilst inshore, within a few miles of the north coast, a stream of 
 flood will be found. 
 
 A vessel taking her departure ftom Point de Monts, with a whole ebb 
 tide before her, is therefore very differently circumstanced from one 
 which does the same at the commencement of the flood, and must reckon 
 upon being set over toward the south coast much faster in the former 
 than in the latter case. 
 
 Directions will first be given for a fair wind, and afterwards for beat- 
 ing winds. 
 
 Directions up the Estuary. — Having made the light on Point de 
 Monts, and being 3 or 4 miles oft' it to the southward, with the usual 
 
•^w 
 
 m^ 
 
 26 
 
 OULF OP ST. LAWRENCE. 
 
 easterly winds, nearly or right up the estuary, steer S. 53° W. (S. 76° 
 W. mag.) until nearly abreast the ^[anicouagan Peninsula, then keep 
 half a point more to the southward, S. 47° W. (S. 70° W. mag,). These 
 are safe courses with either ebb or flood, and if the vessel has left Point 
 de Monts at or near the commencement of the ebb tide, will usually 
 bring her into soundings oif Metis, where 30 fathoms over sandy bottom 
 will be fonnd 3 miles off shore, and 50 fathoms 5 miles off shore, and on 
 the edge of the bank. 
 
 If, on the contrary, the vessel has left Point de Monts early on the 
 flood, she will probably be farther to the northward ; we say probably, 
 because the strength of the current is too uncertain to allow of saying 
 that she positively will be so. However, the degree of uncertainty 
 which the irregular rate of current gives rise to must be met by the 
 use of the lead. If, therefore, the weather be thick, and the land not 
 seen, round-to in time, particularly if the vessel has had the ebb tide 
 against her, and get a cast of the lead, to make sure that she has not 
 been set too near the south coast. 
 
 If no bottom be found at 60 fathoms, the S. 47°. VV. (8. 70° W. mag.) 
 course may be continued until the vessel is up as high as Metis by the 
 reckoning, then let soundings again be tried for, and if still without find- 
 ing bottom, haul in gradually to the southward, under easy sail, and 
 with the deep-sea lead going, so as to endeavor to strike soundings on 
 the bank off Father Point, which may be accomplished safely, since the 
 bank in that part extends several miles off shore. 
 
 To Pass Bicquette Island. — The revolving light on IMcquette Island 
 will now be distant about 15 miles to the SW., and visible in clear weather ; 
 but if it be foggy, and the light not seen, proceed as follows, attending 
 to the fog V:Ii;stlc: Bun along the northern edge of the bank of sound- 
 ings, with the lead going, taking particular care not to go to the south- 
 ward into less than 30 fathoms. When it is judged that the vessel is 
 approaching near Bicquette, having passed Barnabe Island, haul out a 
 little to the northward until she is out of soundings, and then steer 
 S. 54° W. (8. 75° W. mag.), still heaving the lead, and having the vessel 
 under moderate sail for the purfiose of getting bottom, still certain that 
 she is well above the Northwest reef of Bicquette. If soundings less 
 than 30 fathoms are struck, whilst running past this dangerous island, 
 on which many vessels have been wrecked, the vessel must be hauled off 
 immediately tu tlie northward out of soundings, and then steer as before. 
 Two miles north of Bicquette there are 30 fathoms, and only 14 miles 
 north of Northwest Reef there is the same depth, with sandy bottom. 
 Farther off no bottom will be' found at 50 or 60 fathoms. Both the 
 island and reef are bold to the northward, having 12 fathoms close to 
 them. 
 
 When it is quite certain the vessel is past Bicquette and its reefs, 
 haul in to the southward by degrees, till the edge of the bank is gained 
 again, and keep it up to Green Island Keef. 
 
 J 
 
DIRECTIONS. 
 
 n 
 
 t 
 
 3 W. (S. 76° 
 a, then keep 
 ag.). These 
 as left Point 
 will usually 
 andy bottom 
 shore, and on 
 
 early on the 
 lay probably, 
 ow of saying 
 f uncertainty 
 )e met by the 
 the laud not 
 
 I the ebb tide 
 it she has not 
 
 70° W. mag.) 
 J Metis by the 
 
 II without find- 
 easy sail, and 
 
 3 soundings on 
 ifely, since the 
 
 Icquette Island 
 clear weather; 
 ows, attending 
 bank of sound- 
 po to the south- 
 It the vessel is 
 and, haul out a 
 md then steer 
 iviug the vessel 
 till certain that 
 soundings less 
 ngerous island, 
 ist be hauled ofif 
 
 steer as before, 
 id only H miles 
 
 sandy bottom, 
 oms. Both the 
 'athoms close to 
 
 e and its reefs, 
 bank is gained 
 
 Tt would not be prudent for vessels without a pilot to attempt run- 
 ning inside of Bic Island in foggy weather, unless well acquainted. If, 
 however, it be necessary to do so, for the purjiose of anchoring, the 
 directions for that locality should be followed. 
 
 From Point de Monts with Southerly Winds. — We have hitherto 
 been speaking of the case when vessels are running up with easterly 
 winds and thick weather; but a second case is when the wind is from 
 the southward; then a> direct course H. bO° W. (S. 73° W. mag.) may be 
 steered if the vessel be, as before, close off Point de Monts, or S. ~>C)0 
 W. (S. 79° W. mag.) if she be nearer the south coast; allowing still for 
 the set of the current to the southward, according to the tide, and 
 sounding in time if the land be not in sight. Whenever the weather is 
 foggy, and the land can not be seen, the object should always be to 
 strike the bank of soundings along the south coast about Metis, or 
 Father Point at farthest, and then follow it as a guide to the westward. 
 
 With Northerly Winds. — A third ease, of fre(iuent occurrence in 
 the autumn, is when there is a fresh northerly wind. The weather is 
 then invariably clear, an^, as the land can be seen, there is no danger 
 of getting on shore with a good look out; but the strength of the cur- 
 rent to the southward is increased by this wind, and therefore the 
 vessel must be kept well to the northward, to prevent being set over to 
 the lee shore, being in consequence obliged to tack (upon the wind 
 veering a point or two to the westward) and stand all the way back 
 again. 
 
 Supposing the vessel to be in the same position as before, 3 or 4 miles 
 to the southward of Point de Monts, she may steer S. 05° W. (S. 88° 
 W. mag.) for the first 20 miles, or as long as the light is seen. Take the 
 bearing of the light frequently, and lay it down on the chart, in order 
 that the efiect of the current may be seen; take care not to bring the 
 light to bear to the eastward of 2f. 53° E. (N. 76° E. mag.), as in that 
 case the vessel would be set too near Manicouagan Shoals. Abreast 
 Manicouagan, get a cast of the lead, for although these shoals are 
 steep to on their east side, and also to the westward of Manicouagan 
 Point, yet there are soundings off their south point. 
 
 When past these dangerous and extensive shoals, the south point of 
 which extends 2^ miles off a low point of the same name, which can 
 seldom be clearly distinguished at night in consequence of the higher 
 land behind it, a vessel may haul up well under the north shore, coming 
 no nearer than 3 miles, and taking care to avoid the shoal off Bersimis 
 point, which extends nearly 1 J miles off a low poitit, also difficult to be 
 seen at night. 
 
 Working from Point de Monts to Green Island, against westerly 
 winds, which are almost always accompanied with clear weather, there 
 is little difficulty, with the assistance of the charts, other than that 
 which arises from the set of the tides and currents. 
 
 It requires a tolerably smart sailing vessel and a flood tide to beat 
 
:*'ii-«iatj^:£-;it-t:i^ m 
 
 28 
 
 OULB' OF ST. LAWRENCE. 
 
 past Point de Monts against a foul Aviud, but sbort boards round tbe 
 point and along tbe nortb coast up to Cape St. Nicbolas will most read- 
 ily succeed. It is not, bowever, advisable to keep tbis sbore close aboard 
 nnicb fiirther to tbe westward, lest tbe wind sbould fall to a calm, for 
 tbere is a strong indraugbt toward tbe uioutb of Mauicouagan Kiver 
 during tbe flood tide; and if an easterly wind sbould cbance to spring 
 up, after tbe vessel bad been drifted in near tbe moutb of Euglisb Bay, 
 it might be difficult to beat out, or to weatber the eastern side of tbe 
 Manicouagan Hboals. The light on Point de Monts can not be seen on 
 any bearing to tbe southward of N. 70° E. (S. 87° E. mag.), being inter- 
 cepted by tbe high land to tbe westward of it; and when it appears, a 
 vessel off Godbout River will be only one mile from tbe bar, or off Cape 
 St. Nicbolas little more tbau 2 miles off shore; so that it is a safe rule, 
 in standing in toward tbe coast at night, to tack as soon as tbe light 
 bears N. 60° E. (N. 83° E. mag.). 
 
 When the ebb makes, stretch over to the southward into tbe middle 
 of the estuary, where that tide is less strong than near either sbore, 
 but do not go farther to the southward, and be back again at the north 
 coast at the return of flood. 
 
 The best time to get past Point de Monts, when fine weather and 
 westerly winds prevail, is at night, or in the flrst hours of tbe morning, 
 for then vessels are often assisted by a northerly land wind. If it has 
 blown fresh from the westward during tbe preceding day a heavy bead 
 sea may be expected oft' the pitch of tbe point; the flood from along the 
 land in the direction of tbe Seven Islands meeting tbe downward cur- 
 rent off tbe point assists in causing tbis. 
 
 If, after passing Point de Monts in the morning, with a northerly land 
 wind, there are signs of its dying away, or veering to the westward as 
 tbe day advances, continue tbe board to the southward and westward, 
 instead of tacking to keep the north land on board, as directed when 
 the wind is settled right down ; for the land wind of the night wili 
 probably be succeeded by tbe fine-weather day wind, which usually 
 becomes a steady breeze about 9 a. ni., after commencing at SW., 
 and thus affords an advantageous board toward the north coast. 
 
 In the fine weather of tbe summer the wind will probably veer by 
 degrees during tbe day back to west, thus offering another good board 
 to tbe southwestward. Pilots and others who are experienced in read- 
 ing the indications of the winds and weatber frequently gain more 
 ground to the westward by calculating upon these probable changes of 
 the wind than by keeping on the north shore out of tbe current. 
 
 With tbe exception of the low points of Manicouagan, Bersiniis, and 
 Mille Vacbes, tbe land can in general be plainly seen at night during 
 tbe continuance of westerly winds; and where its features are suffi- 
 ciently remarkable, there will be Tittle difficulty in making it out. 
 Mount Camille especially, being an isolated mountain 2,036 feet above 
 high-water mark, can easily be distinguished, as \vell as tbe summit of 
 
 ! 
 
DIRECTIONS. 
 
 29 
 
 I rouud the 
 most read- 
 lose aboard 
 a calui, for 
 ngan Kiver 
 36 to spring 
 uglish Bay, 
 side of the 
 t be seen on 
 being inter- ' 
 t appears, a 
 , or off Cape 
 I a safe rule, 
 as the light 
 
 9 the middle 
 sither shore, 
 at the north 
 
 iveather and 
 the morning, 
 d. If it has 
 I heavy head 
 Dm along the 
 wnward cur- 
 
 )rtherly land 
 (westward as 
 id westward, 
 rected when 
 le night wili 
 hich usually 
 ling at SW., 
 coast. 
 
 ably veer by 
 r good board 
 need in read- 
 gain more 
 e changes of 
 rrent. 
 
 iersiniis, and 
 tiight during 
 res are suffl- 
 king it out. 
 J6 feet above 
 le summit of 
 
 the high land of Bic, 1,236 feet high. Their bearings will often be of 
 great service to vessels on clear nights, and will show when they are 
 high enough up to fetch Father Point. 
 
 On arriving oft" Father Point, or any where between it and Bic, if the 
 flood be done and the wind be light it will be better to anclkor on the bank 
 of soundings, weighing again, if there be a breeze, in sntlicient time to 
 stand over and meet the first of tlie flood on the north shore. By this 
 mode of proceeding vessels will gain much more ground to the west- 
 ward than by remaining on the south shore, for although there be a 
 weak stre.tm of flood upon the bank of sound in ;;s from Father Point to 
 Bic Island, yet there is little above that island, and none after the 
 first quarter flood, excepting so close inshore as to be useless to large 
 vessels 
 
 From Mille Vaches Bay to within 3 miles of the entrance of the 
 Saguenivy Biver, with the exception of a shoal extending a short dis- 
 tance off' shore from the bay next westward of Cape Bondesir, the coast 
 is moderately high and very bold, the flood strong, and the ebb com- 
 paratively weak. Vessels should, therefore, make short boards along 
 this shore until up to Bergeron Coves, and then stretch over to the 
 anchorage under Green Island Reef, to wait for the next flood ; for it 
 will require a whole tide, even with a good working breeze and a fair 
 sailing vessel, to beat through between Green Island and Bed Islet, and 
 reach good anchorage above before the ebb makes. 
 
 Red Islet Bank is, however, very dangerous, and the first of the 
 flood sets strongly over it in a direction from Bergeron Coves toward 
 Green Island. The ebb out of the Sagnenay also sets upon it, so that 
 a stranger should not make too free with it. If a vessel can not fetch 
 the anchorage under Green Island Reef she may anchor anywhere, in 
 fine weather, along the south bank between Bic and Green Islands, and 
 will have good ground in 12 fathoms at low water and plenty of room 
 to get under way. 
 
 In coming up with a NW. wind, the north shore should be kept close 
 aboard until up to Bergeron, and if it be flood tide the vessel may pass 
 either northward or southward of Red Islet, as may be preferred, but 
 the former passage should not bo attempted with this wind during the 
 ebb, nor yet the other, except by those who are well acquainted with 
 the set of the tides. 
 
 Although the passage to the nothward of Red Islet is the quickest, 
 there being a much stronger stream of flood in that channel, yet it can 
 pot by any means be recommended ; on the contrary, it should never 
 be attempted unless the breeze appears certain to continue, for if it fell 
 calm the vessel would run great risk of being drawn in by the stream 
 of flood among the dangerous shoals off the mouth of the Saguenay, or 
 being set down upon Red Islet Bank when the rapid ebb made ont of 
 that river, which is so strong and the water so deep that no anchor 
 would hold. 
 
30 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE. 
 
 ii 
 
 To pass to the southward of lied Islet with the same wind, haul roniid 
 the east end of the reef, and a.s close to the southward of it as is jirudeut, 
 coming no nearer tliau a depth of 20 fathoms until past the islet. To 
 those who are well acquainted both with tlie soundings and set of the 
 tides it may be desirable to keep closer in attempting the passage with 
 an ebb tide, but it can not be recommended to strangers. 
 
 Directions down the Estuary and Gulf— For the return voyage 
 down the estuary and gulf little or no instruction seems necessary as 
 long as the wind remaiiLS fair and the weather clear, beyond what may 
 be gathered from the charts and the preceding remarks. But where 
 vessels are met by easterly winds and thick weather anywhere above 
 Point de Monts, great caution, attention to the soundings, and set of the 
 tides and currents become necessary to insure safety, particularly 
 during the long nights and wild weather in the fall of the year. 
 
 Vessels iiroceeding down the St. Lawrence, after they have passed 
 Green Island, finding that the fair wind fails Jind they are met with an 
 easterly wind before they have arrived near Bic Island, should, in that 
 case, run up to Brandy Pots, especially if late, or very early in the navi 
 gable season. But if they have reached far enough down at the com- 
 mencement of the adverse wind, Bic Island affords good shelter and 
 anchorage, which should be sought in time, before tlie fog commences. 
 
 There is no other anchorage which can be recommended lower down 
 nearer than Seven Islands, and after that Gasp6. 
 
 In a vessel beating down, the south bank should be the guide in thick 
 weather or at night. She should tack from it, after striking soundings 
 on its edge, and should not stand to the northward more than half- 
 channel over in any part, to keep in the strength of the downward 
 stream, and avoid the possibility of accident from the shoals of the 
 north coast. 
 
 Effects of Tides. — It will be almost always seen, when the vessel 
 comes upon the south bank of soundings, by there being so much less 
 sea there than in the deep water, and strength of the weather current, 
 outside; a strong ripple will be observed at the edge of the bank dur- 
 ing the flood tide. 
 
 In the board from near Bicquette, during the flood tide, the vessel 
 will go to the northward rather faster than to the southward back 
 again, whilst in the ebb the contrary will be the case. But above 
 Bazade Islets she will go much faster to the southward than to the 
 northward in both tides. Lower down the estuary, and as far down as 
 Gape St. Anne, she Avill generally go faster to the southward than to 
 the northward during the ebb tide; whilst in the flood an indraught 
 into the rivers will be felt on approaching near the north coast from 
 Bersimis Point nearly down to Cape St. Nicholas. The least reflection 
 upon what has been previously said of the set of the lides and cr.rreuts 
 will account for these effects. 
 
 Caution. — In a vessel beating down in a dark night or thick weather 
 
 mm 
 
DIRECTIONS. 
 
 •I 
 
 tl, haul ronnd 
 AS is i>rudeut, 
 he islet. To 
 ind set of the 
 passage with 
 
 Btuni voyage 
 necessary as 
 lid what may 
 . But where 
 irwhere above 
 aud set of the 
 , particularly 
 i year. 
 
 have passed 
 e met with an 
 bould, ill that 
 ly in the iiavi- 
 n at the coui- 
 d shelter and 
 g commences, 
 d lower down 
 
 ^uide in thick 
 ing soundings 
 )re than half- 
 he downward 
 shoals of the 
 
 en the vessel 
 
 so much less 
 
 aether current, 
 
 he bank dur- 
 
 de, the vessel 
 ithward back 
 I. But above 
 1 than to the 
 IS far down as 
 iward than to 
 an indraught 
 uh coast from 
 east reflection 
 » aud currents 
 
 thick weather 
 
 there is no safety unless the lead be kept constantly going; when she is 
 approaching the south coast, in the board 'o the southward, sail should 
 be sufficiently reduced for soundings to im easily obtained and evoiy- 
 thing in readiness to tack or veer at the shortest notice. These pre- 
 cautions become the more necessary as tlie vessel descends the estuary 
 and the bank of soundings becomes narrower. Off Mataiie there -ire 
 30 fathoms, sandy bottom, IS miles off shore, and 00 fathoms ut .$ miles 
 oft, whilst at the distance of T. miles from the land no bottom will be 
 found at 100 fathoms. The south bank b comes narrower still to the 
 eastward of Matane, and ceases, in consequence, to be of use to vessels 
 Oft Cape Chatte there are 30 fathoms water little more than .\ mile 
 from the shore; a short distance farther oft" there are no soundin'jr.s .,t 
 70 fathoms; and between it and the Point de Monts, from 150 to 170 
 fathoms, blue-mud bottom. 
 
 Below Point de Monts there is plenty of sea room, and although 
 the lead will there be of little use, yet the south coast is so high and 
 boldthatitmay generally be seen, if the fog be no thicker than is usual 
 with a regular easterly wind up the St. Lawrence. 
 
 Lower down still, with a beating wind and thick weather, soundings 
 may be struck off the west end of Anticosti, or between the West and 
 Southwest Points of that island, if it be wisheil to ascertain how far 
 the vessel is over to the northward before night. Eastward of South- 
 west Point to Pavilion Eiver the bank of soundings off the south side 
 of the island is very narrow; but from the latter to the East Point 
 there 18 plenty of warning by the deep-sea lead, as will be seen bv the 
 soundings in the chart. 
 
 The channel northward of Anticosti can not be recommended in the 
 voyage down the St. Lawrence, because there is not only less room 
 but also less current in favor; neither the route by the Strait of Belle 
 Isle, on account of the straggling icebergs, which are in general to be 
 met with there through all the navigable season. Toward the fall of 
 the year, however, vessels occasionally pass through it, in anticipation 
 of the northerly winds which prevail at that season in the Atlantic 
 
 The foregoing general directions have purposely not been interrupted 
 by particular descriptions of the coasts, or places, alluded to ; the latter 
 together with direct.oPs for the harbors, anchorages, and dangers, will 
 be found in the following chapters. 
 
 -'^AiA^iA;Si»B5*ijflStai»*iiaGaf'-- ' 
 
 .p 
 
Sii'riSa); '.■i'^v.»'»r - 
 
 CMIAVTER IT. 
 
 ISLANDS IN THE (UILF OF 8T. LAWRENCE. 
 (H. O. Chart No. 611.) 
 
 St Paul Island, lying in Oabot Strait, tlio main entrance to the 
 Gulf of St. Lawrence, between the 8W. extreme of NewfonudlanO and 
 the north extreme of CaiKi Breton Island, is composed of primary rocks, 
 principally mica slate, dipping at an angle of not less than 4") degrees 
 to the southward. It is nearly 3 miles long, by one mile broad. Its 
 NE. point is a smajl detached islet (although it does not appear as such 
 from the sea), separated by a very narrow channel from a peninsula, 
 between .'WO and 400 feet high, which, together with the isthmus, is so 
 precipitous as tt> be nearly inaccessible. The remaining greater part 
 of the island, which is also steep and precipitous toward the sea, has 
 two parallel ranges of hills, that on the eastern coast being the higher 
 and attaining an elevation of 500 feet. 
 
 A valley runs through between these hills, having two small lakes or 
 ponds 200 or 300 feet above the sea. These supply the principal stream 
 on the island, which is about 2 yards wide, of yellowish brown water, 
 well-tasted and wholesome, and descending into the sea in the southern 
 part of Trinity Cove. There are several other, but much smaller, runs 
 of water, one of which is into Atlantic Cove. These two coves are 
 nearly one mile from the SW. extremity of the island, the first being 
 on the gulf side and the other on that which is toward the Atlantic, 
 as its name implies. They aflord the only shelter for boats, and the 
 only good landing on the island which is easier of ascent ftom them 
 than at any other part. 
 
 The islancl, is partially wooded with dwarf and scrubby spmce trees, 
 useless, excepting for fuel. 
 
 Provision Depot— The men in charge of a depot of provisions for 
 the relief of shipwrecked persons, and furnished by the Government 
 of the Dominion of Canada, reside on the north point of Trinity Cove, 
 where there is a dwelling-house and store. Fish are plentiful around 
 
 the island. 
 
 Anchorage.— Off Trinity and Atlantic Coves small fishing schooners 
 anchor, with the wind off shore, in 10 or 12 xa,*,hom8, sand and gravel 
 bottom, and at the distance of 400 yards fi*om the rocks. In very fine 
 weather large vessels might venture to ride in ftom 25 to 30 fathoms, 
 about J mile off shore, but should be in constant readiness to weigh at 
 the first sign of a change in the wind or weather. There is little or no 
 32 
 
trance to the 
 xiiulland and 
 rimary rocks, 
 in 4') degrees 
 e broad. Its 
 ppear as such 
 
 a peninsula, 
 isthmus, is so 
 
 greater part 
 1 the sea, has 
 ing the higher 
 
 small lakes or 
 incipal stream 
 brown water, 
 n the southern 
 I smaller, runs 
 two coves are 
 bhe first being 
 I the Atlantic, 
 t)oats, and the 
 )nt from them 
 
 y spruce trees, 
 
 provisions for 
 le Government 
 ' Trinity Cove, 
 eutiful around 
 
 hing schooners 
 ,nd and gravel 
 I. In very fine 
 > to 30 fathoms, 
 ess to weigh at 
 e is little or no 
 
 ST. PAUL ISLAND. 
 
 BS 
 
 warning by the lead in approaching this island In foggy weather On 
 this account, although so bold and high, it is extren.ely dangerous, and 
 many shipwrecks, attended with sacrifice of hunum life, have tkkeii 
 place upon its shores. 
 
 The irregularity of the tidal streams and currents add much to the 
 danger arising from the fogs, which prevail in southerly, easterly, and 
 often also with SW. winds. During the whole of a Me calm diy ^ 
 the end ot June, the current set to the SE. at the rate of one knot past 
 the north point of the island. ' 
 
 , ^*8j^*»--T«'o lighthouses stand on St. Paul Island-one on the 
 detached rock at the north point and the other on the extreme SW 
 point. • 
 
 The northern lighthouse is 40 feet high, of an octagonal shape, and 
 painted white. It exhibits a fixed white light, which can be seen from 
 seaward on any bearing, excepting between ]!f. Uo w. (N. 15o E matr ) 
 and N. 40O E. (N. 06° E. mag.), when it is hidden by the island! 
 
 The southern lighthouse is also an octagonal white building, 40 feet 
 high, and exhibits a revolving white light every minute, which is visi- 
 Die from seaward on all bearings, except between S. 51© E. (S 25o e 
 mag.) and S 68° W. (N. 86° W, mag.), when it is obscured by the 
 intervening land, .loth lights are elevated 140 feet above the level of 
 ttie sea, and when ihe wreather is clear they may be seen 20 miles. 
 These lights are exhibited only from April I to December 31, or after- 
 wards if navigation is open. 
 
 Fog Signal.— During thick weather or in snowstorms a steam foe 
 whistle, m Atlantic Cove, on the south side of the island, is sounded 
 five seconds m every minute. 
 
 Ice Report.-There is a telegraph and signal station at the main 
 estabhshment on St. Paul Island, from which information respecting 
 ice, weather, and the state of navigation may be obtained. The cable 
 extends from the island to Meat Cove, at the north extreme of Cape 
 xireton Island. ^ 
 
 There are two surf-boats on St. Paul Island to aid seamen in distress 
 
 Beacons.-A tidal-gauge house, painted white, erected about 40 feet 
 above high-water mark in the bight of Atlantic Cove, now forms a con- 
 spicuous landmark on the coast of the island. 
 
 A circular white bea<;on has been placed on the side of the hill, above 
 the gauge. These two marks, in line bearing N. 70° W (N 44© w 
 mag.), lead clear to the southward of Big Dick, a dangerous detached 
 rock, on which the sea breaks very heavily, off the NE. horn of the cove 
 
 The above alignment affords a good guide to vessels anchoring off 
 the cove m 15 fathoms. ^ 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1092.) 
 
 Bird Rock».-Lyiug about NW., 55 miles from St. Paul Island, are 
 two rocks of coarse red sandstone, dipping very slightly U the SW 
 which are constantly diminishing in size from the action of the sea! 
 
»4 
 
 GULP OF 8T. LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 
 
 J* 
 
 Th<>y present iMrpeiiiUcular cliflfb on every side; yet it \n poHslble to 
 ascend them with great difttciilty in one or two places, but tliere is no 
 lauding uiM)n tlteni except in the calmest sea. Every ledge and flssure 
 of the clitt'M is oct;upied by gannets, and the summits of both rucks 
 are literally cuveied with them. The white plumage of these birds gives 
 these rocks the api)earance of being cajiped with snow, and renders 
 them visible through a night glass in a clear and moonlight niglit from 
 the distance of 7 or S miles. 
 
 The two ro(;ks are about ^{ mile apart. Sunken rocks leave only a boat 
 passage between them. The southeasternmost is the larger and higher, 
 though scarcely 400 yards long, and not more than 140 feet high above 
 the sea. The other is divided into two precipitous mounds Joined 
 together bv a low ledge. The lesser of these mounds resembles a tower. 
 A reef extends about ^ mile to the eastward i¥om North Bird Kock, and 
 there is a patch of breakers nearly midway between the two, and rather 
 to the SW. of the line drawn from one to the other, (rreat Bird Hock 
 is quite bold, excepting in the direction of the other rock. 
 
 Light — On Great Bird Kock stands an hexagonal tower, 39 feet higb^ 
 and painted white, from which, at an elevation of 140 feet, is exhibited 
 a fixed white light visible 17 miles. This light is shown from April 1 
 to December 31 each year, or afterwards if navigation is open. The 
 tower is on the summit of the rock ; the keeper's dwelling, painted 
 white, is near the lighthouse. 
 
 Fog Signal — During tliick and foggy weather, and in snowstorms, 
 a cotton powder cartridge is fired every twenty minutes. 
 
 Soundings. — The soundings eastward of Bird Rocks afford ample 
 warning and assistance to vessels at night, or in foggy weather, as 
 will be seen in the chart. Between them and East Point of Magdalen 
 Islands the depth nowhere exceeds 16 or 17 fathoms, over a bottom of 
 reddish sand, and sea eggs are very frequently brought up by the lead. 
 
 Caution. — Between Bird Hocks and Bryou Island there is a ridge of 
 rocky and foul ground, on some parts of which it has been said there 
 is as little as 4 fathoms water, because bottom has been seen in calm 
 weather. Nothing, however, less than 7 fathoms could be found ; but 
 it may nevertheless exist, so that a vessel of large draft) had better not 
 cross this ridge wlien there is much sea running. The two cliffy points 
 on the north side of Bryon Island, in line, mark the northern limits of 
 this rocky ground. 
 
 Pr/on Island is rather more than 4 miles long, W. by S. and E. 
 by N., with the extreme breadth of rather more than one mile. Its 
 eastern end bears trova. East Point of Magdalen Islands, N. 4° W. (N. 
 22° E. mag.) lOJ miles, but its SW. point approaches to within 8f miles 
 of North Cape of Grosse Isle. There was noopportunity of measuring 
 the height ot Bryon Island, but it nowhere exceeds 200 feet above the 
 sea. The cliffs on the north side are much higher than those on the 
 soutli, where there are several small coves in which boats may landl 
 easily with the wind off shore. 
 
H possible to 
 it there is no 
 je and Assure 
 >f botb rocks 
 so birds gives 
 , and readtTH 
 ;htiiigbtfroin 
 
 ve only a boat 
 er and bigber, 
 et bigb above 
 lounds joined 
 mbles a tower. 
 Jird Kock, and 
 wo, and rather 
 eat Bird Kock 
 
 sr, 39 feet high; 
 )t, is exhibited 
 L from April 1 
 is open. The 
 Blling, painted 
 
 in snowstorms, 
 
 s afford ample 
 gy weather, as 
 at of Magdalen 
 'er a bottom of 
 up by the lead. 
 ire is a ridge of 
 )een said there 
 a seen in calm 
 be found; but 
 I had better not 
 jwo cliffy points 
 rthern limits of 
 
 . by S. and E. 
 
 one mile. Its 
 s, N. 40 W. (N. 
 • within 8| miles 
 ity of measuring 
 ) feet above the 
 an those on tUe 
 )oat8 may land 
 
 mmm 
 
 HKYON I.SLANr. 3:) 
 
 This island is formed of alternating and nearly horizontal stratii of 
 red sandstone, red ocherous ciii\ , and shaly gray saiidMt«>n«'. Tlicso 
 rocks are soft and friable, forming; pcrpendiciiliir or overliaiigiiig clitl's 
 nearly all around tlie island, which are broken in lioles and caverns, 
 showing liow fast tiiey are giviiiir way to tlie action of the waves. A 
 great part of the island is wooiit-d witli dwarf spruce trees, and tlicie 
 is a large upland tract covered witli good native grass. Tiiere aie a 
 few inhabitants on this ishinti who raise good crops, besides cattle and 
 sheep. 
 
 TVater. — Water is neither plentiful nor easy to be obtained, luit it 
 may be had in small ifuantities by digging, and there is a spring on the 
 north side of the narrow isthmus which joins tlie eastern peninsula to 
 the renminder of the land. 
 
 Reefa. — There are three reefs ott" Bry()n Island. One oil' its east end 
 extends nearly ^ mile to th(» northeastward; another off the west end 
 extends I4 miles to the westward, and the third, off the sandy SW. 
 point, 1^ miles to the southward. No marks can be given for clearing 
 these reefs, but the bearings of the land will afford suttlcient guidance 
 to the seamen. The reef oft" the SW. point obstructs the channel so 
 much that it may be useful to add that from the southern ridge of this 
 reef, Bryon Islaiul subtends an angle of 97 degrees, so that with the 
 island subtending any less angle the reef may be passed. The south 
 reef assists greatly in turning off' the sea from the roadstead to the 
 eastward of it, where vessels nmy safely anchor in <> fathoms water and 
 a sandy bottom, at the distance of a mile or more from the shore, and 
 with all winds from the northward. Small vessels during NW. gales 
 lie at anchor close under the reef. 
 
 Shoal. — There is an extensive patch of foul and rocky ground lying 
 SW. from the west end of Bryon Island, and having a clear channel 
 on either side of it. Not less than 5 fathoms could be found here, and 
 although the fishermen see bottom upon it in calm weather, there is 
 every reason to think that there is no less water. Nevertheless, ves- 
 sels of large draft had better not run over it when there is a heavy sea 
 running, for a small point of iv^ck, with a few feet less water, might 
 escape the most rigorous examini. tion. 
 
 Fishing Groimd8.--iThe rocky places are called fishing grounds by 
 the inhabitants of Magdalen Islands because codfish abound upon 
 them. There is one having 11 fathoms water 2^ miles north of Bryon 
 Island, and which extends a considerable distance parallel to the island. 
 There is sandy bottom and a great depth of water within this ridge, 
 and vessels may anchor in fine weather and southerly winds off' the 
 bay on the north side of the island. The soundings extend so far oft' 
 Bryon Island to seaward in every direction that there is no possibility 
 of a vessel on a voyage being endangered by it if the lead be used. 
 Great caution is requisite in approachiug the reefs, for they are very 
 steep, especially that which extende tc the southward. 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
li 
 
 36 
 
 GULP OF ST. LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 
 
 Magdelc? Islands. — Tliis chain of islauds assume an irregular 
 curved direction, the greatest length of which, from Southwest Cape of 
 Amherst Island to East Point, is .35 miles. 
 
 The central parts of these islands rise into hills, with rounded and 
 frequently dome-shaped summits, and which are in general of igneous 
 or trap rocks. No rock salt has been found upon the islands, but the 
 water of many springs and small streams is sufficiently saline to be 
 nearly unfit for use. Gypsum forms an article of commerce, and some 
 valuable ocherous pigments are also found upon the islands, but the 
 principal dependence of the iiihabitants is upon the codflshery. The 
 herring and seal fisheries are also prosecuted to a limited extent. The 
 islands are partially wooded, but the trees are small, and iriostly spruce, 
 juniper, birch, and Canadian poplar. The unwooded i^arts produce 
 good grass, and afford pasturage for cattle and sheep. 
 
 The climate is severe ; not quite so cold as at Quebec in winter, but less 
 warm in summer. Bains, and especially fogs, are extremely frequent, 
 and without this humid atmosphere the islands would be deprived of 
 the little fertility which they possess, the dry and meager soil requiring 
 continual supplies of moisture. 
 
 When first sighted from sea, Magdalen Islands api>ear like several 
 hilly islands, with channels between, but on a nearer approach they 
 are seen to be all connected together, with the exception of Entry 
 Island, by a double line of sand bars and beaches, inclosing extensive 
 lagoons, having very narrow entrances, by which the tide finds access 
 and egress. These sand bars are in some parts only a few feet above 
 the sea, while in others they rise into hills of blown sand of consider- 
 able elevation. They appear to be increasing, since they are generally 
 ridges of sand with from 9 to 12 feet of water parallel to, and from 50 
 to 100 fathoms outside, the beach. There are 3 and 4 fathoms water 
 between these ridges and the shore, a circumstance which has often 
 proved fatal to the crews of vessels wrecked upon these shores. In 
 stormy weather it is dangerous to attempt making the islands, for in 
 approaching the lower parts the breakers would probably be the first 
 thing seen from a vessel. 
 
 Population. — According to a census taken in 1891, there were upon 
 Magdalen Islands 4,942 inhabitants. These are distributed on Am- 
 herst, Grindstone, and Alright Islands, with the exception of a few 
 families divided between Entry Island, Grosse ' Isle^, and East Island, 
 near the NE. extremity of the chain. 
 
 Seals. — During the spring of the year the fishermen leave the islands 
 for seal hunting on the ice of the gulf. Many seals which are driven 
 on the ice to the shores of the islands by winds are killed by the inhab- 
 itants. Seals are also taken by means of nets in Pleasant Bay. 
 
 Supplies. — Vessels may obtain limited supplies of fresh provisions, 
 especially at Entry Island, and water most readily from Amherst Har- 
 bor, either from a spring which issues from under Demoiselle Hill, or 
 
 <"inM«|liiqif!)|;;|)|||{;p|«R.. 
 
p- - 
 
 MAGDALEN ISLANDS. 
 
 37 
 
 I 
 
 ime an irregular 
 loutliwest Cape of 
 
 with rounded and 
 general of igneous 
 le islands, but the 
 iently saline to be 
 mnierce, and some 
 10 islands, but the 
 9 codfishery. The 
 lited extent. The 
 md mostly spruce, 
 led parts produce 
 ►. 
 
 5 in winter, but less 
 ttremely frequent, 
 aid be deprived of 
 ager soil requiring 
 
 bppear like several 
 rer approach they 
 xception of Entry 
 nclosing extensive 
 e tide finds access 
 iy a few feet above 
 I sand of consider- 
 they are generally 
 ilel to, and from 50 
 1 4 fathoms water 
 !e which has often 
 I these shores. In 
 ' the islands, for in 
 'obably be the first 
 
 1, there were upon 
 istributed on Am- 
 jxception of a few 
 , and East Island, 
 
 m leave the islands 
 s which are driven 
 silled by the inhab- 
 Basant Bay. 
 )f fresh provisions, 
 rom Amherst Har- 
 Demoiselle Hill, or 
 
 from a small stream which falls into Cabaiie Bay, ncnir Southwest Cape. 
 Wood for fuel is beconnnjLT scarce near tlie sottleuients. Small spars of 
 spruce and juniper may be obtained. The latter, of wbidi the inhabit 
 ants build their fishing boats and slialioi.s or small schooners, some- 
 whut resembles larch wood. It is said to be extremely strong and 
 durable. 
 
 Harbors.— Magdalen Islands possess no harbor for large but three 
 for small vessels, named Amherst, House, and Grand Entry Harbors. 
 
 East Point, forming the NE. extreme of Magdalen Islands, is of low 
 sand, inclosing several shallow ponds, and having several sand hills, 
 some of which are ir^ar its extremity, while others, of greater elevation 
 and farther westward, extend in a chain nearly to Northeast Cape. 
 These last-mentioned sand hills are inland, and on the margin of the 
 northeastern part of Great Lagoon. Northeast Cape is a hill on East 
 Island, at the head of Grand Entry Harbor. It is a remarkable cape, 
 and Its isolated cliffs, being 230 feet high, can be seen over all the sand 
 hills and sand bars, so that, when these lust are below the horizon, the 
 cape appears to be the eastern extremity of the chain. 
 
 Long Spit— A ridge of sand, with 2 to 3 fathoms water, extends 
 ESE. rather more than U miles off East Point, and for I4 miles far- 
 ther in the same direction the depth is from 4 to G fathoms. To clear 
 this spit, observe that the southern part of Coffin Island is a peninsula, 
 forming the southern shore of Oyster Pond, and connected to the 
 remainder of the island by a low neck or isthmus at the west end of 
 the pond. Tlie mark for the 3-fathom extremity of the si)it is the 
 north side of this peninsula in line with Old Harry Head. And the 
 south side of the northern part of Coffin Island (where the narrow neck 
 joins it, as above mentioned), in line with Old Harry Head, will lead 
 over the spit in 4 fathoms. 
 
 The mariner with the chart before him will have little difficulty in 
 making out these leading marks, but may, if he pleases, pass round the 
 spit, by the lead, in 5 or 6 fathoms, taking care not to bring Old Harry 
 Head to bear southw^trd of S. 64° W. (west mag.). To know when a 
 vessel from the eastward has passed it, observe that the summit of 
 North Cape in line with the east side of Northeast Cape leads nearly 
 i mile to the SW., which mark will be useful to a vessel approaching 
 it from the westward. The tides set rapidly over this spit, and, 
 together with the shoal water, cause a heavy breaking sea. It is 
 extremely dangerous, and vessels should take care not to get becalmed 
 near it without an anchor clear. 
 
 Doyle Reef lies S. 7ao E. (S. 50© E. mag.) 65 miles from East Point, 
 and consists of pointed rocks. It is very small, being only 600 yards 
 long and 100 y.jrds wide from the depth of fathoms to G fathoms on 
 either side of it. The Jeast water is 3 fathoms on one spot nearly in 
 the center, and there are 12 and 13 fathoms all around it. The only 
 mark for this reef is North Cape, open two-thirds of its breadth NE. of 
 
 U 
 
 k 
 
uji: :-tJi£c-£iaiJ!; Lattaai^jSr/'j 
 
 4'i 
 
 38 
 
 GULP OF ST. LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 
 
 Northeast Cape. Ou the reef the angle between these marks and the 
 western point of Coffin Island is 24° 27'. 
 
 Lying directly in the way of vessels, and very seldom showing, the 
 sea breaking upon it only in heavy gales, Doyle Keef may jnstly be 
 considered as one of the worst dangers off Magdalen Islands. 
 
 Old Harry Head, the 8E. point of Coffin Island, is formed of red 
 sandstone cliffs of moderate height, with a reef off it i mile to the 
 SE. It is the first headland southwestward of East Point, from which 
 it is distant 4^ miles. Between them is a sandy bay, in which vessels 
 may anchor, with good shelter, in all winds from WSW., round by 
 north, tt> NNE. ; but it is not a place to be recommended, because a vessel 
 would be there very much embayed by the shoals on either side, and 
 might find it difficult to get out on the occurrence of a sudden shift of 
 wind either at night or during a fog. 
 
 Columbine Shoals.— The outermost of these shoals is a patch of 
 rocks with 3 fathoms over it, from which Old Harry Head bears N.2o E. 
 (N. 28° E. mag.) 2^ miles. Within this, and toward Coffin Island, are 
 numerous small shoal patches and pointed rocks, on some of which 
 there are not more than 3 feet at low water. 
 
 These shoals are extremely dangerous, and much in the way of 
 vessels hauling round East Point with northerly winds. To clear their 
 NE. side, the whole of the high Northeast Cape must be kept well open 
 eastward of Old Harry Head. There are no good marks for clearing 
 the west side, or for leading clear outside of them, so that the only 
 guide for the latter purpose is not to bring East Point to bear eastward 
 of N. 19° E. (N. 45° E. mag.). But although there are no good marks, 
 an angle with a sextant will answer the purpose as well and as easily. 
 On the outer edge of these shoals, the angle between Old Harry Head 
 and the left or west extremity of Coffin Island is 77 degrees; conse- 
 quently, with these points subtending any less angle, the vessel wiU 
 pass outside of the shoals. 
 
 Co£Eln Island extends 4 miles southwestward of Old Harry Head, 
 having on its SE. side a lagoon with a very narrow outlet, named 
 Oyster Pond, which boats can only enter in fine weather. Off the coast 
 of the island there are several rocks, besides Columbine Shoals, but as 
 these are inshore, and out of the way of vessels, it is sufficient to refer 
 to them, and to remark that this is a very dangerous part of the islands, 
 which should never be approached at night or in fogg;- weather. 
 
 arand Entry Harbor has its entrance between the SW. end of 
 Coffin Island and the sand bars westward of it, and has water enough 
 within for large vessels; but this entrance is extremely narrow, not 
 exceeding 100 yards in breadth, and the narrow channel leading to it, 
 between sandy shoals which are said to shift, extends U miles west- 
 ward. A native pilot should be employed, or the channel buoyed or 
 staked, and even then the entrance should not be attempted excepting 
 with a leading wind, flowing tide, and fine weather. The greatest 
 
 U 
 
 -m 
 
 wmmm 
 
marks and the 
 
 I showing, the 
 may jiistly be 
 lands. 
 
 formed of red 
 ^ mile to the 
 int, from which 
 I which vessels 
 iW., round by 
 ecause a vessel 
 either side, and 
 sudden shift of 
 
 1 is a patch of 
 I bears N, 2° E. 
 tffin Island, are 
 some of which 
 
 in the way of 
 To clear their 
 I kept well open 
 •ks for clearing 
 ) that the only 
 } bear eastward 
 110 good marks, 
 1 and as easily. 
 Hd Harry Head 
 degrees; couse- 
 the vessel will 
 
 Id Harry Head, 
 7 outlet, named 
 \ Off the coast 
 e Shoals, but as 
 iiflBcient to refer 
 t of the islands, 
 weather, 
 the SW. end of 
 18 water enough 
 lely narrow, not 
 lel leading to it, 
 3 li miles west- 
 mnel buoyed or 
 npted excepting 
 -. The greatest 
 
 MAGDx\LEN ISLANDS. ^ 
 
 depth that can be carried in, at low water, is 10 feet; at liigli wat*-.-, 
 neap tides, 12 feet, and in spring tides, 13 feet, Tliere are 2.S feet 
 water at, and immediately within, the entrance. The ebb tide runs out 
 with great rapidity, and tlie Hood in is also strong. There are no settle- 
 ments at the harbor, but there are a few families in the vicinity of 
 Northeast Cape who breed cattle. 
 
 Within this harbor there is a large expanse of water, from one to 3 
 fathoms deep, extending northeastward to the southern shores of (Jrosse 
 Isle, and communicating by a narrow channel with a large shallow pond, 
 which washes the base of Northeast Cape, and extends to within ab(»ut 
 2 miles of t'le eastern extremity of the chain. This great lagoon also 
 extends south westward, between a double line of sandbars, to the north- 
 eastern shores of Grindstone Island, and is, in all, 23 miles long and 
 from i mile to 3 miles wide. Throughout its whole extent there is a 
 communication for boats at high water, quite sheltered from the sea. 
 There are a t present three entrances into this lagoon irom the sea, namely. 
 Grand Entry Harbor; another 3 J miles westward, wliich is very shal- 
 low, and House Harbor, near its SW. extremity, between Alright and 
 Grindstone Islands. 
 
 Shag Isla-TiC -^ small and low, and of sandstone, lying off the east 
 coast of Mafcdf' " T:?lands, about ^ mile from the sand bars, nearly 
 midway betwef c in and Alright Islands, and out of the way of 
 vessels. 
 
 Cape Alright, U^ miles SW. of Old Harry Head, is the SE. point 
 of Alright Island. The cliffs, of a grayish-white color, with occasional 
 brick-red low down, are 400 feet high at the highest part, which is 
 about a mile to the eastward of the cape, and those to the westward of 
 the cape, toward House Harbor, are also very high and of the same 
 color. Nearly a mile inland is the summit of Alright Island, 420 feet 
 high. Between this summit and the cape there is a hill named Butte 
 Bonde. The south extremity of the cape is low, with a small rock 
 close off it. 
 
 Alright Ree^ the outer edge of which lies N. 72° E. (S. 83° E. mag.), 
 34 miles from Cape Alright, is 800 yards long by 600 yards wide, and is 
 composed of white and pointed rocks, with 6 feet least water. When on 
 this reef Butte Ronde is in one with the summit of Grindstone Island, 
 the west side of Cape Alright is in line with the west side of Cape 
 Meule, and the whole of the woody Wolf Island is just open to west- 
 ward of Shag Island. The well-marked summit of Grindstone Island, 
 open to the southwestward of Cape Alright, will lead to the SW., and 
 the east side of the woods of Wolf Island (seen over the sanrf bars), 
 open to the eastward of Shag Island, will lead to the SE. 
 
 Pearl Reef, small and dangerous, is of white pointed rocks, like most 
 of the reefs around these islands. It is round and about 400 yards in 
 diameter, with 9 feet least water ; and even with a moderate swell the sea 
 breaks heavily upon it. From the reef Cape Alright bears N. 63^ W. 
 
■:i-C3fckiZ«i:-:Sa.^^ii-.>',l:-:T3iiif*'., 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE ISLANDS. 
 
 (N. 38° W. mag.) 8 J miles; the NE. point of Entry Island S. 57° W. 
 (S. 820 W. mag.) U miles. Demoiselle Hill, shut in behind the north 
 side of Entry Island, 8. GOo W. (N. 89° W. mag.), will lead to the south- 
 ward, and the Demoiselle, kept more than half a point open to the 
 northward of Entry Island, will lead to the northward. 
 
 House Harbor lies 2f miles from Cape Alright. Its entrance is a 
 narrow and crooked channel, with a depth of only 6 feet at low water 
 and n feet at high water. 
 
 Cape Meule, formed of gray sandstone, is about 1^ miles southward 
 of the entrance to House Harbor. Meule Bocks, extending !^ mile 
 seaward of Capo Meule, are marked on their outer extremity by a black 
 buoy moored in 14 feet water 100 yards east from a 6-foot patch. 
 
 Vessels entering House Harbor should pass SB. of the buoy, and 
 those intending to anchor in Leslie Cove should, after passing south- 
 ward and westward of the buoy, steer to the NW. 
 
 Red Cape, SW. by W. 5^ miles from Cape Alright, is the southeast- 
 ern point of Grindstone Island and the north point of Pleasant Bay. 
 The opposite point of the bay, Sandy Hook, is the east point of Amherst 
 Island, and bears from Red Cape S. 40° E. (S. 15o E. mag.) G miles. 
 From this line to the shore of Amherst Island at the head of the bay 
 the distance is ^ miles. 
 
 G-rindstone Island is the second largest of the chain, being, in this 
 respect, intermediate between Amherst and Alright Islands. Its sum- 
 mit is elevated 550 feet above the sea at high water. 
 
 Light— On the west side of Grindstone Island, about f mile north- 
 ward of the entrance to Etang du Nord, is a square lighthouse, 42 feet 
 high, and painted white, which exhibits at an elevation of 200 feet a 
 revolving white light every minute and a half. The light should be 
 visible 20 miles. 
 
 Amherst Island, the largest and southwesternmost of Magdalen 
 Islands, is connected with Grindstone Island by a double line of sand 
 bars, inclosing an extensive lagoon, TJ miles long and from one to 3 
 miles wide, the southern part of which is named Basque Harbor. This 
 lagoon is full of sands, which are dry at low water, and has three out- 
 lets into Pleasant Bay, the southernmost being the deepest, but having 
 only 3 feet water over its bar at low water. The others, including three 
 through the sand bars of the NW. coast, will only admit boats at high 
 water, and when the surf is not too high. 
 
 The hills in the interior of Amherst Island rise to a height of 550 
 feet above the sea. Toward the SE. part of the island, and about one 
 mile WNW. of Amherst Harbor, is" the very remarkable conical bill 
 named Demoiselle Hill, of trap rock, and 280 feet high. The perpen- 
 dicular and dark red cliffs of this hill are washed by the waters of 
 
 Pleasant Bay. 
 
 Amherst Harbor is formed by a peninsula, presentmg cliffs of gray 
 sandstone to seaward, in the SE. corner of Pleasant Bay. Its entrance, 
 
MM 
 
 MAGDALEN ISLANDS. 
 
 41 
 
 md S. 57° W. 
 ind the north 
 d to tlie south - 
 t open to the 
 
 i entrance is a 
 fc at low water 
 
 iles southward 
 ending ij mile 
 (lity by a black 
 it patch, 
 the buoy, and 
 passing south- 
 
 the southeast- 
 Pleasant Bay. 
 
 int of Amherst 
 mag.) G miles. 
 
 ead of the bay 
 
 1, being, in this 
 inds. Its sum- 
 it f mile north- 
 ithouse, 42 feet 
 m of 200 feet a 
 light should be 
 
 «t of Magdalen 
 )le line of saud 
 I from one to 3 
 > Harbor. This 
 L has three out- 
 >est, but having 
 including three 
 it boats at high 
 
 a height of 550 
 , and about one 
 ible conical hill 
 h. The perpen- 
 jy the waters of 
 
 ng cliflfs of gray 
 r. Its entrance, 
 
 between this peninsula and the sands southward, is 2i miles within or 
 southwestward of the extremity of Sandy Hook, which is a long and 
 narrow sandy point with sand hills. The harbor is the easiest of access 
 and egress of any in the Magdalen Islands, and lias, moreover, the 
 advantage of an excellent roadstead outside, where vessels may wait 
 their opportunity of running in. Nevertheless, its entrance is extremely 
 narrow and rather crooked, so that, Avithout a pilot, it would be neces- 
 sary to buoy or stake the channel. 
 
 The depth over the bar, which is rocky, is 8 feet at low and 11 feet at 
 high water springs. Within the harbor there are from 10 to 18 feet, 
 over a bottom of soft, blaek, and fetid mud, well sheltered from every 
 wind. It is proposed to construct a breakwater on the north side of 
 the entrance to the harbor. 
 
 Ice. — The harbor is usually frozen over about January 1, and clear of 
 ice about May 10, being completely closed between January 1 and May 1. 
 Field ice generally drifts in toward the shores of the island about 
 January 15, and disai>pears about May 12. The first vessel arrives 
 from sea about May 10, and the last one leaves about December 17. 
 
 Pleasant Bay is the best roadstead in the Magdalen Islands, and 
 the only one where vessels can venture to lie with all winds during 
 the three finest months of summer— June, July, and August. In those 
 mouths a gale of wind from the eastward so heavy as to endanger a 
 vessel with good anchors and cables does not occur above once in 3 or 
 4 years. The riding, however, is often heavy enough in NE. gales, and 
 a vessel should be well moored and all snug aloft. 
 
 Anchorage. — The best and most sheltered anchorage is in 4 fathoms, 
 with the rocky point of entrance of Amherst Harbor bearing S. 27° W. 
 (S. 520 W. mag.) § mile, and a little more than J mile from high-water 
 mark on the sandy beach to the southward. A vessel of large draft 
 should anchor farther ofl'. The bottom is everywhere excellent for hold- 
 ing, and of red sandy clay. Even when the wind comes right in the 
 sea is much lessened by passing over so much of shoal water; neverthe- 
 less, the attempt to ride out a heavy easterly gale, either before June 
 or after August, will be attended with great danger. 
 
 Sandy Hook Channel, between Amherst and Entry Islands, has a 
 navigable breadth of little more than J mile between Sandy Hook Flat 
 and the rocky shoals off the west side of Entry Island. There are sev- 
 eral rocky patches of 2J fathoms off the SW. point of Entry Island, 
 reaching to fully f mile from the shore. The ebb tide sets strongly 
 through this ciiannel and over Sandy Hook Flat, so that vessels of 
 large draft should go round to the eastward of Entry Island. 
 
 Directions. — Four fathoms is the most that can be carried through 
 Sandy Hook Channel by a good pilot, but 3h fathoms is the utmost that 
 can be safely reckoned on by a stranger. Off the NE. end of Sandy 
 Hook Shoal, which is steej) to, a red buoy is moored in 5 fathoms. Ves- 
 sels must pass eastward of this buoy. 
 
irt.y.*igft6^tf:^.u-*i--..*.^w- 
 
 ■ r 
 
 42 
 
 GULP OP ST. LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 
 
 To I'lin through Sandy Hook Channel firom the southward, keep the 
 east side of Alright Island just open to the westward of Northwest 
 Spit until abreast of the SW. point of Entry Island, then haul up for 
 the summit of Grindstone Island. 
 
 Entry Island is the highest of Magdalen Islands, its summit being 
 580 feet above the sea, the red cliff's rising at the NE. point to a height 
 of 330 feet, and at the south i)oint to 400 feet. Oii' the NE. point 
 there is High Rock, about 100 yards from the clitts, and on its north 
 side the remarkable Tower Rock, of red sandstone, joined to the island, 
 and which can be seen from the SW. over the low NW. point, as well 
 as from the NE. 
 
 Light. — On the SW. side of Entry Island is a square lighthouse, 42 
 feet high, and painted white, which exhibits at an elevation of 93 feet 
 a fixed white light. The light should be visible 12 miles from S. 87° W. 
 (N. 68° W. mag.), through north and east, to S. 26° E. (S. 1° E. mag.). 
 
 Supplies. — The inhabitants of Entry Island raise cattle and sheep, 
 depending more iipon the sale of fresh provisions than the fisheries. 
 Vessels may, therefore, almost always obtain suixplies. 
 
 Anchorage. — Vessels generally anchor under Entry Island in north- 
 erly and easterly winds, but it is rough riding, by reason of the sea 
 which rolls round the island. The best anchorage in easterly winds is 
 in Sandy Hook Channel under Northwest Spit, in 5 fathoms sand. 
 
 Besides the rocky patches in Sandy Hook Channel, and off the SW. 
 point of Entry Island, there are others ofl' the south and SE. sides, 
 extending 4 mile off shore. 
 
 Andromache Rocks are several mere points of rock with deep 
 water between them, lying off the NE. point of Entry Island. The two 
 nearest the shore, with 11 feet water, do not extend beyond 260 yards 
 from High Rock. Two others, with 17 feet water, are distant 400 yards 
 and 460 yards, respectively, from High Rock on the same line of bearing; 
 and lastly, there is a patch, with 3^ fathoms water, fully ^ mile out in 
 the same direction. There is a clear channel between these rocks and 
 Pearl Reef, which lies NE., 4 miles farther off, and vessels passing east- 
 ward of Entry Island will therefore be in no danger, if vhey do not 
 haul round High Rock at a less distance than ^ mile. 
 
 Amherst Island. — The south coast of Amherst Island, consisting of 
 sand hills and beaches, with shoal water ^ mile off, curves round west- 
 ward, for 6 or 7 miles, to the entrance of the Basin, which extends 
 nearly across the island to within less than ^ mile of Pleasant Bay. 
 The Basin is now so nearly closed with sand, that boats can only enter 
 at high water, and in the finest weather. There is good anchorage off 
 the entrance, in from 6 to 9 fathoms, sandy bottom, and with winds 
 from WN W., round by north to ENE. 
 
 Westward 1^ miles from the entrance to the Basin, cliffs commence 
 and continue, except in Cabane Bay, to West Cape, which is the highest 
 cliff of Amherst Island, its summit being 300 feet above the sea. There 
 
 ""mm 
 
MAGDALEN ISLANDS. 
 
 41 
 
 ard, keep the 
 of Northwest 
 n haul up for 
 
 summit being 
 it to a height 
 le NE. poiut 
 I on its north 
 to the island, 
 point, as well 
 
 lighthouse, 42 
 tion of 93 feet 
 romS.SToW. 
 J. 1° E. mag.)> 
 ble and sheep, 
 . the fisheries. 
 
 )land in north- 
 ion of the sea 
 iterly winds is 
 cms sand, 
 id off the SW. 
 ind SE. sides, 
 
 ok with deep 
 and. The two 
 )nd 260 yards 
 ttant 400 yards 
 ine of bearing; 
 T \ mile out in 
 lese rocks and 
 3 passing east- 
 f vhey do not 
 
 1, consisting of 
 38 round west- 
 (phich extends 
 Pleasant Bay. 
 can only enter 
 anchorage off 
 id with winds 
 
 iffs commence 
 
 is the highest 
 
 he sea. There 
 
 is a remarkable rock above water close to the shore, and about \ mile 
 southward of it. 
 
 Light. — On South Cape of Amherst Island is an hexagonal-shaped 
 building, 'A feet high and painted white, which exhibits an alternating 
 light, showing red for thirty seconds and white for thirty seconds in 
 each minute, at an elevation of 107 feet, that should be visible 20 miles. 
 This light is obscured to the westward by the high land of Southwest 
 Cape or from 8. 81° W. (N. 74° W. mag.) to S. 81° E. (S. .">6^ E. mag.). 
 
 Ice Report. — There is a telegraph and ■'^'^nalstationatthis lighthouse 
 which receives and transmits sp"" I ts on the ice and the ,, ^f 
 
 navigation in the gulf during tho ...onth. April and May. 
 
 Cabane Bay is a small bight, between South and Southwest capes 
 of Amherst Island, where vessels may safely anchor with northerly and 
 easterly winds, and where good water may easily be obtained. The 
 best berth is in 8 or 9 fathoms, sandy bottom, off the center of the bay, 
 with South Cape and Cape Perc6 in line, % mile off shore. 
 
 Deadman Islet, W. by N., 7 J miles neariy from West Cal)e of Mag- 
 dalen Islands, is small, being not more than 600 yards long, and less than 
 half that in breadth. It is about 170 feet high, with steejdy sloping 
 sides, meeting at the summit like a prism, so that when seen end on it 
 resembles a pyramid. When seen from a distance, with its longest sides 
 presented to view, its outline very much resembles tliat of a botly laid 
 out for burial, from which circumstance its name is derived. The islet 
 is composed principally of trap rocks, and when seen close to, on a 
 bright sunny day, with the white surf dashing against its variously 
 colored sides, is a very beautiful object. It is so bold on the west side 
 that a vessel may pass at the distance of 400 yards with safety, but a 
 reef extends \ mile toward Amherst Island. 
 
 About one mile northward of this islet there is a rocky fi.shing 
 ground with S fathoms least water, and 6 miles south of it there is 
 another with 11 fathoms. There is no danger nearer than White 
 Horse, and vessels may safely pass between it and Amherst Island. 
 It is, however, much in the way of those passing round the west end 
 of Magdalen Islands, and they should beware of it at night, or in foggy 
 weather, for the lead will give little warning, since there is nearly as 
 much water within \ mile of it as at the distance of several miles. 
 
 G-ull Island. — From West Cape of Amherst Island the remainder 
 of the seacoast of Amherst Island consistts of red cliffs, Avithout beach, 
 all the way to W^est Lake, a small pond at the SW. end of the sand 
 bars which Join Amherst and Grindstone Islands. At the north 
 extremity of these sand bars is Gull Lsland, which is small, rocky, and 
 close to the western point of Grindstone Island, and has shoal water 
 off its west point to the distance of \ mile. About 14 miles to the SW. 
 of it, and with the west side of Gull Island and Gros Cap in line, lies 
 a rocky shoal with 3 fathoms at low water, and leaving no good passage 
 between it and the shore. Close to the NE. of Gull Island is the 
 Etang du Nord, a small inlet, affording good shelter to boats. 
 
■vMsevm 
 
 " ■-'>■*«»= ,»^..^:^^ .J 
 
 44 
 
 GULF OF 8T. LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 
 
 Hospital Rock.— The northern shore of Grindstone Island is of red 
 sandstone clitVs, loss high than those of Amherst Island. Near their 
 NE. extreme lies Hospital IJock, dose to the shore, and also some rocky 
 3-fathom i)atclie8, more than ^ mile from the shore. 
 
 White Horse is the name of a tlangerous reef lying N. 36° E. (N. 61° 
 E. mag.) 7 miles from Deadman Lslet, and west 5^ miles from Gull 
 Island. It is scarcely more than 200 yards iu diameter, and has 9 feet 
 least water over pointed rocks, on which the sea often breaks. On this 
 reef the summit of Entry Island is seen over a low part of the sand bars, 
 at the NE. outlet of Basque Harbor, but this mark can not be easily 
 discerned by a stranger. 
 
 When on the reef the western extremity of Amherst Island and 
 Hospital Cape (the northeastern extremity of the cliffs of Grindstone 
 Island) subtend an angle of 91° 30' ; consequently, with these points 
 subtending a less angle by 3 or 4 degrees, the vessel will pass outside 
 of the reef. With a greater angle, 94 or 95 degrees, she will pass 
 inside of it, or between it and the shore. 
 
 There are irregular soundings and foul ground between this reef and 
 the shore, but nothing less than 5 fathoms, excepting what has been 
 already mentioned. 
 
 Pierre de G-ros Cap, another dangerous reef of rocks, nearly of the 
 same size as White Horse, and having 18 feet least water, is seldom 
 seen, as the sea breaks upon it only in very heavy weather. It lies 
 N. 58° W. (N. 33° W. mag.) 3iJ miles off Cape le Trou, the nearest point 
 of Grindstone Island. 
 
 When on the reef, the summit of Alright Island is seen over the NE. 
 point of Grindstone Island, which is in the lagoon, and very nearly iu 
 line with Hospital Oape, and Butte de Portage, a hill of Amherst Island 
 about 1 J miles WNW. of Demoiselle Hill, is midway or in the center of 
 the narrow passage between Gull Island and the west point of Etang 
 du Nord. These marks kept open will lead NE. and SW. of the reef, 
 and a vessel will pass well clear outsida of it, and also of White Horse, 
 if Deadman Islet be not brought to bear westward of S. 25° W. (S. 60° 
 W. mag.). 
 
 Wolf Island.— From Hospital Oape to Wolf Island, off which there 
 is a rocky 3-fathom shoal nearly ^ mile from the shore, the northern 
 coast of Magdalen Islands consists merely of sand beaches and sand 
 hills for a distance of 10 miles. The low sandstone cliffs of Wolf 
 Island, which is about f mile long, interrupt the continuance of the 
 sandy shore; the sand beaches then recommence, and continue, with 
 high sand hills, occasionally, 9 miles farther to North Oape. In this 
 part the sand bars may be safely approached by the lead as near as 10 
 or 9 fathoms depth of water. 
 
 North Cape of Magdalen Islands is the northern point of Grosse 
 Isle, and a precipice of considersiblc height, but not so high as the 
 west point of the same island, which is in the Great Lagoon, and 300 
 feet above the sea. 
 
MAGDALEN ISLANDS. 
 
 46 
 
 laud is* of red 
 . Near their 
 so some rocky 
 
 36oE.(N.61^ 
 ies from Gull 
 md has 9 feet 
 aks. On this 
 the saud bars, 
 not be easily 
 
 it Island and 
 of Grindstone 
 
 I these points 
 
 II pass outside 
 she will pass 
 
 n this reef and 
 what has been 
 
 8, nearly of the 
 ater, is seldom 
 sather. It lies 
 e nearest point 
 
 u over the NE. 
 
 very nearly in 
 
 Lmherst Island 
 
 in the center of 
 
 point of Etang 
 
 W. of the reef, 
 
 White Horse, 
 
 250 w. (S. 50° 
 
 off which there 
 
 B, the northern 
 
 iches and sand 
 
 cliffs of Wolf 
 
 nuance of the 
 
 continue, with 
 
 Gape. In this 
 
 id as near as 10 
 
 loint of Grosse 
 so high as the 
 lagoon, and 300 
 
 The north coast of Magdalen Islands continues from North Cape, in 
 a curved line of sand beaches and sand hills, for about 6 miles, to East 
 Point. 
 
 North Cape Rooks, some of which always show, lie westward of 
 North Oape, the outermost being 1,200 yards off shore. The west end 
 of these rocks bears N. 48° W. (N. 22° W. mag.) from the high SW. 
 side of Grosse l(<le, and their extent to the eastward is marked by the 
 NE. sides of Nort4i and Northeast Gapes in line. Therefore, in running 
 down from the westward to anchor under North Cape, do not come 
 nearer the shore than one mile until the above-named marks are open. 
 
 Ice Report— Tiiere is a telegra]>h and signal station at Grosse Isle, 
 which receives and transmits special reports on ice, etc., during the 
 months of April and May. 
 
 Water may be had in small quantities near the houses on the east 
 side of North Cape, but there are no good watering places excepting 
 those already mentioned. 
 
 Anchorage. — In the anchorage, eastward of North Cape, vessels 
 may ride in 8 or 9 fathoms, over sandy bottom, with all southerly 
 winds, and will find good holding ground, and plenty of room to get 
 under Avay. 
 
 Directions. — Entry Island, when first made from the eastward, will 
 appear like a double-peaked hill, sloping somewhat abruptly down to 
 perpendicular and high cliffs on either side. Southwest Cape of 
 Amherst Island is also a steep cliff, but of less height, and as there is 
 no land southward and westward of it, it can not be mistaken. The 
 land rises from it in undulations to the higher parts of the island. 
 Should the weather be foggy, the soundings will safely guide vessels 
 passing southeastward of the islands. 
 
 The general soundings aruund Magdalen Islands, which extend off 
 them so uiany miles in every direction, will afford an invaluable assist* 
 ance to vessels at night or in foggy weather, and will be better under- 
 stood from the charts than by any written directions. 
 
 Tides. — At Amherst Harbor it is high water, full and change, at 
 8h. 20m.; ordinary springs rise 3 feet, and neaps 2 feet. 
 
 The tidal streams or currents around Magdalen Islands are so irreg- 
 ular that the most experienced and intelligent pilots for the islands, 
 who are also fishermen, and have passed their lives in fishing craft 
 around them, can give no certain account of their 'rate and direction, 
 but all agree in stating that they vary in both respects, either from the 
 effects of winds, or other and unknown causes. Nevertheless, the fol- 
 lowing ob.9ervations will hold good as a general rule, and although 
 subject to occasional interruption, the set of the tidal streams about to 
 be described will be found to recur with considerable constancy in fine 
 weather : 
 
 A few miles outside Bryon Island and Bird Bocks there appears to 
 be usually a current setting to the southeastward, out of the Gulf of 
 St. Lawrence; but the stream of flood tide flows between them and 
 
 * 
 
46 
 
 OULP OF 8T. LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 
 
 Magdalen iHlands. The stream of Hood comets from the SK., and i.s 
 divided by theeast pointof Ma((da]en Lslaiids. One braiich of the stream 
 sets strongly over the Long Spit, whicli, with Ohl Harry Head and the 
 shnals off it, turn it off to the south westward toward Kntry Island, 
 leaving nearly slack water in the bay between (.'oflin Ishuul and Cape 
 Alright, and also in Pleasant Bay. Tlie other branch, tu the northward 
 of the islands, follows the shore from East Point round to Southwest 
 Cape of Amherst Island, whence the greater part of the stream contin- 
 ues its coarse to the SW.; whilst the remainder, following the shore, 
 runs round and along the southern coast of Amherst Island, until it 
 meets the before-mentioned other branch of the stream from the East 
 Point, setting oft" the east side of Entry Island. It is overcome by this 
 other branch, and turned gradually round to join the general weak 
 stream of flood to the westward in the offing. 
 
 On the SE. side of the islands the stream of the ebb tide sets strongly 
 out of the lajfoons and out of Pleasant Bay, between the Sandy Hook 
 and Entry Island. It i.s also often found running to the westward 
 along the southern shores of Amherst Island, and right round it in like 
 manner, but contrary in direction, to the course of the flood already 
 described. In the offing, at the same time, the stream of ebb is from 
 the SW., and sets over the Long Spit oft' the East Point, where it meets 
 the stream from the NW., which, has followed the north shore of the 
 islands, round from Amherst Island to the East Point. The met^tiug of 
 these two streams of the ebb tide, together with the shoalness of the 
 water, causes so heavy a breaking sea in strong easterly winds that the 
 fishing shallops dare not venture at times to pass the point. 
 
 The rate of either stream seldom amounts to a knot, excepting close 
 inshore, or round the points. The ebb, however, is generally the 
 strongest stream, and its rate is increased by westerly winds, as is that 
 of the flood by winds from the eastward. 
 
 (II. O. Charts Nus. 1108 and 1109.) 
 
 Anticosti Island is 122 miles long and 30 miles in extreme breadth. 
 Its shores are everywhere of rock, affording in some parts excellent 
 building stone, of which the two lighthouses have been constructed. 
 On and near the coasts the limestone is covered with a thick and often 
 impenetrable forest of dwarf spruce, which, in some exposed situations, 
 is only a few feet in height, with gnarled branches, so twisted and 
 matted together that a man may wnlk for & considerable distance on 
 their summits. Extensive banks of limestone shingle, bush swamps, 
 morasses, and also beds of peat are of common occurrence. 
 
 Anticosti is nowhere higher than 700 feet above the sea. Its south 
 coast is low and shelving, with reefs of flat limestone which dry at low 
 water. There is, however, a range of highlands in rear of Soutliwest 
 Point, and extending for some miles both to the northwestward and 
 southeastward of it. The north coast for 70 or 80 miles to the Avest- 
 
 n 
 
ANTIC08TI ISLAND. 
 
 47 
 
 the SK., and is 
 Kill of the stream 
 y Head and the 
 I Kntry Island, 
 fland and Cape 
 ) the northward 
 il to Southwest 
 D stream contin- 
 uing the shore, 
 Island, until it 
 I from the East 
 s'crcome by this 
 e general weak 
 
 de sets strongly 
 lie Sandy Hook 
 
 the westward 
 round it in like 
 e flood already 
 
 of ebb is from 
 , where it meets 
 th shore of the 
 
 The met^ting of 
 hoalness of the 
 
 winds that the 
 oint. 
 
 excepting close 
 } generally the 
 rinds, as is that 
 
 ctreme breadth, 
 parts excellent 
 en constructed, 
 thick and often 
 osed situations, 
 80 twisted and 
 t)le distance on 
 , bush swamps, 
 nee. 
 
 sea. Its sonth 
 hich dry at low 
 r of Sontliwest 
 liweatward and 
 es to the Avest- 
 
 ward of Kast Cape is bold, precipitous, and of considerable elevation. 
 Tlio headlands end in magnificent clin's of limestone, which are exter- 
 nally so nearly white from the oflects oi' tlie weatlu'r as to reseujble 
 chalk. The remainder of the north (Mnist is low, witli reefs of flat 
 limestone, like the southern shores. 
 
 Harbors.— It is unusual to find an island so huge as Anficosti with- 
 out a good harbor; the best are only suitable for vessels drawing 10 to 
 15 feet, 
 
 Tlie reefs of flat limestone, extending in some parts to IJ miles from 
 the shore, the want of anchorage off most ])arts of the coast, and, above 
 all, the freciuent fogs, render great caution necessary in approaching the 
 coast of til is island. 
 
 Productions.— The interior of Anticosti is probably less sterile, for 
 white spruce spars have been seen large enough for the masts of a 
 schooner of UO tons, and others of juniper (a species of larch), of excel 
 lent quality, and of suflicient size to form the keel of a vessel of the 
 same dimensions. Black and white birch, and ash, the latter of bad 
 quality,, complete the list of trees which attain to any si/e upon the 
 island. 
 
 risheriea and Bacports.— Many of the streams abound with trout, 
 and are periodically visited by numbers of salmon. Seals frequent the 
 reefs and are killed annually in great numbers. Codfish and halibut 
 are taken off several parts of the coast, which is occasionally resorted 
 to by fishing vessels from the maritime provinces of tlie Dominion of 
 Canada. Black bears ar« numerous in the interior of the island. Their 
 skins, salted fish, seal skins, and oil, with the furs of smaller animals, 
 form the greater portion of the exports. 
 
 Wild geese, outardes, and ducks of various spe^jies are abundant. 
 
 Population.— The inhabitants of Anticosti, including the lighthouse 
 keepers and their families, numbered 253 in 1891, and resided prin- 
 cipally at Jupiter, Pavilion, and Becscie rivers, and at Salt Lake and 
 Fox Bays. 
 
 Climate.— The climate of Anticosti, from its proximity to an open 
 sea, is probably not more severe in winter than that of Quebec, although 
 liarther to the north, but the summers are cold, wet, and stormy, with 
 frequent fogs. Frosts are common in August, and in some severe sea- 
 sous they occur in every mouth of the year. It is probable that no 
 other grain but barley would ripen here, unless it might be oats occa- 
 sionally in sheltered situations. Potatoes are frequently prevented by 
 early frosts from coming to perfection, although planted in the most 
 favorable situations. 
 
 Communication.— The Dominion steamer, carrying supplies to the 
 lighthouses, visits Anticosti twice annually, and La Canadienne, another 
 Dominion steamer, calls officially from Gaspe five or six times during 
 each summer. 
 
 Rivers.— Streams of excellent water descend to the sea on every part 
 
48 
 
 GULP C)l' 81'. LAWKKNCK — ISLANDH. 
 
 of the coasts of Antlrosti. They me Kt'iuTully too sinsill to admit boats, 
 becoming nipid imratMliiitely within their cntiaiicea, and even the hirgeHt 
 of them, Observation Ilivor, northward of S«mtliwest I'oint, is barred 
 witli sand, excepting for short intervals of time after the spring freshets 
 or heavy rains. 
 
 Lights.— Four lighthouses are erected on Anticiosti— one on Heath 
 Point, at the east end of the island; one on Bagot Bluff', ij mile from 
 South Point; another on Southwest Point, and the fourtli on West 
 Point. These lights will be described in their places hereafter. 
 
 Ice Report— At each of the lighthouses on Anticosti there is a tele- 
 graph and signal station, which receives and transmits special reiwrts 
 on ice, etc., during the months of April and May. 
 
 Telegraph Signal Stations.— In addition to the lighthouses there 
 are marine telegraph and signal stations at Bescie Itiver, Jupiter River, 
 and Shallop Creek, all of which are connected together and to the main- 
 land at Great Fox River by telegraph lines. 
 
 There are direction boards erected on the shore, or nailed to trees 
 from which the branches have been cut off, near the beach, and on vari- 
 ous parts of the coast. These boards are intended to point out to ship- 
 wrecked i)er8ons the way <> the provision posts, and were placed on 
 the following parts of the shore : At 30 miles westward of Shallop Creek 
 and at 21 miles eastward of Shallop Creek. 
 
 East Cape is a long, rounded projection, the southeastern termina- 
 tion of one of the numerous densely wooded ridges in this portion ot 
 the island, the seaward extremity being a limestone cliff 49 feet high. 
 The northern side of the cape is steep-to, but from the SB. extreme a 
 ledge, dry at low water, extends i mile. Two of the boilers of S. S. Ctrce, 
 lost in 1801, are prominent objects on this ledge. 
 
 A conspicuous patch of sand in the face of a steep slope lies close 
 south of this ledge, and southward of it the cliff" rises to a height of UO 
 feet, falling again to 45 feet in a projection that forms the north side of 
 
 Wreck Bay. 
 
 Wreck Bay is a shallow bight, and the shores are foul to the dis- 
 tance of nearly ^ mile, while near the north side is an isolated rock with 
 10 feet on it at low water. The holding ground is of rock, and the bay 
 affords indifferent anchorage, but it is frequented by fishing vessels 
 during NW. winds. With southerly or easterly winds tlie bay should 
 not be approached, as a heavy sea rolls in. Landing may generally be 
 effected, except in bad weather, in the western corner of the bay near 
 a small storehouse, where a projection of the shore reef gives some shel- 
 ter to boats; but if there is much swell, the shore must be approached 
 with great caution. There is a lake of fresh water close inshore of the 
 landing place. 
 
 Heath Point is of limestone, about 10 feet high, with a superstratum 
 of peat, in which there are several ponds of dark bog water. Being so 
 low, this point disappears below the horizon at a distance of a few 
 
 I 
 
 i- 
 
- ■-•to • 
 
 ANTIC08TI 18LANI). 
 
 49 
 
 ) a<lmit l)«)ntH, 
 
 lint, irt biiired 
 priiig freshets 
 
 y\w oil Heivth 
 or, ij mile from 
 iirth on West 
 •eafter. 
 
 there is a tele- 
 ipecial rei)ort8 
 
 ithousea there 
 .Inpiter River, 
 ndtothe tnain- 
 
 nailed to trees 
 oh, and on vari- 
 »int out to ship- 
 ivere placed on 
 f Shallop Creek 
 
 astern termina- 
 this portion ot 
 
 iff 49 feet high. 
 SB. extreme a 
 
 rs of S. S. Circe, 
 
 slope lies close 
 
 a height of 90 
 
 he north side of 
 
 foul to the dis- 
 
 jlated rock with 
 
 )ck, and the bay 
 
 fishing vessels 
 
 the bay should 
 
 lay generally be 
 
 of the bay near 
 
 gives some shel- 
 
 t be approached 
 
 ie inshore of the 
 
 a superstratum 
 Fater. Being so 
 stance of a few 
 
 miles; the lighthouse thon apitears like a sail ott' the island, and is 
 extremely usetbl in niaiking the extent of the low land to vesHeln, either 
 from the eastward or westward, as well as in showing itH position from 
 the southward, front which direction the low poitit can not be made 
 out at night, being obHcured by the high land behind or to the 
 northward. 
 
 Light — The lighthouse on Heath Point is a circular tower, 05 feet 
 high, and painted white, with one red horizontal band that exhibits 
 between the bearings of S. 27° VV, (S. 55° W. mag.) and N. (>1° 10. (N. 
 89<^ B. mag.), at an elevation of 110 feet, a fixed white light which should 
 be visible 15 miles. 
 
 Fog Signal. — During thick weather, fogs, or snowstorms, a !otton 
 powder cartridge will be fired every twenty minutes. 
 
 Heath Point Reef extends with foul ground 1^ miles southeastward 
 from the lighthouse to the depth of 5 fathoms. A rock, with .'i fathoms 
 water over it, lies east (8.62° E. mag.) 1^ miles from the lighthouse, 
 with depths of 6 to 7 fathoms between it and the shore reef, but with 
 any swell there are breakers over both reef and shoal. A bank, with 10 
 fathoms water on it, lies 8. 84° E. (S. 56° E. mag.) 4 miles from the ligJit- 
 house, and ^ mile farthur southward is another bank with 11 fathoms 
 water over it. Over all these shoals there are strong tide rips during 
 spring tides, and in bad weather overfalls resembling breakers. 
 
 Caution. — The attention of mariners is directed to the great change 
 of variation between Belle Isle Strait and the SE. end of Anticosti 
 Island, as there is a difference of over 7 degrees between Belle Isle and 
 Heath Point. This, if not allowed for, has the tendency of setting 
 vessels toward Anticosti when bound southward through the strait. 
 
 Ample warning of approach to the land can be obtained by the lead. 
 
 Soundings. — The deep water eastward of Anticosti approaches nearer 
 the island than hitherto charted. The lines of 20 and .'iO fathoms, which 
 oft' East Cape are, respectively, i mile and 1^ miles distant from the 
 shore, turn abruptly southeastward, forming a projecting led}.. '^^' Heath 
 Point, from which the 20 fathoms line is 7^ miles and the •<' fathoms 
 line is 13 miles distant, respectively. The line of 60 fathoms, which off 
 Table Head is only 4 miles from the land, extends to 2.'5 miles K. by S. 
 from Heath Point. Southward of this point the lin<i of 50 fathoms 
 again approaches the shore, being only 8 miles disiant south from 
 Heath Point, o.^ miles from Goose Point, and 3.} milps from South Point, 
 whih the line of 10 fathoms is only 1:^ "dies fi-om South Point, with no 
 danger southward of it. 
 
 Cormorant Point is a conspicuous steep slope of red clay 20 feet 
 high, backed by wooded ridges, which here approach close to the shore. 
 Near it is a shallow bight in which is a lobster factory, abreast which 
 there is a break in the limestone reef that elsewhere fronts the coast for 
 distances varying from 100 to 800 yards. Foul ground extends ^ mile 
 from Cormorant Point, and is generally shown by breakers. 
 1151 4 
 
 .A-4S;iUMki^ii^^^ii*xfisatr-JiiiMMc=' 
 
I 
 
 l.t 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 
 
 The Coast from Oormoraut Point trends westward in a series of 
 small bights se])arated by low points. Goose Point, the next westward, 
 may be distinguished by a remarkable clump of trees $ mile northeast- 
 ward of it. A lobster factory is situated 2^ miles eastward of Goose 
 Point. The shore reef extends from Goose Point If miles to the depth 
 of 3 fathoms. 
 
 From this point westward the shore rises to a height of 300 feet at 
 4 miles inland, with occasional patches of swampy land and numerous 
 ponds. Otter River, a small stream that boats can enter at high water, 
 lies westward of Goose Point, and at 4 miles from this point is La 
 Croix Point. Two other small streams that boats can enter at high 
 water, the western known as Bell Blver, lie between this and South 
 Point. 
 
 South Point is low and flat, with some small ponds just inshore of it, 
 and no trees within a distance of ^ mile from the shore. 
 
 Beacon. — A wooden beacon, 40 feet high, is e^^cted on the extreme 
 of the point. 
 
 Bagot Bluff is a slight rise in the coast ^ mile northwestward of 
 South Point. A break in the shore reef occurs at 800 yards westward 
 of the lighthouse, where boats can land in moderate weather. 
 
 A Rock with 16 feet water on it lies west (N. 62° W. mag.) 2^ miles 
 from the lighthouse on Bagot Bluff. 
 
 Light— On Bagot Bluff is an hexagonal tower, 54 feet high, painted 
 white, with one red vertical stripe, which exhibits, at an elevation of 
 75 feet, a flashing white light showing a flash every twenty seconds. 
 The light should be visible 14 miles. 
 
 Fog SignaL — During snowstorms and in thick or foggy weather a 
 steam horn, 100 yards east of the lighthouse, will be sounded for a 
 period of ten seconds in every minute, with an interval of fifty seconds 
 between blasts. If the horn is out of order a whistle will sound at the 
 same intervals. Neither horn nor whistle are reliable. 
 
 Aspect of Coast — From South Point to the lighthouse on South- 
 west Point, a distance of 56 miles, there is such a sameness iu the 
 character of the coast that it is very difBculib to make out one part 
 from another. Fox Biver, a small stream, lies 6 miles westward of 
 Bagot Bluft". 
 
 Mariners are reminded that it is most undesirable to close this shore 
 without due cause, as the survey is very incomplete. 
 
 In this distance the coast is very low, but It begins to rise at Pavilion 
 Biver, there being a high ridge close in rear of the coast all the way to 
 Southwest Point, and beyond it for some miles. 
 
 Beaoon. — At the entrance of Pavilion Biver, where there is a lime- 
 stone cliff, is a white beacon, 40 ieet high. 
 
 A large white beacon, 40 feet high, is placed 4 miles SE. of Salt 
 Lake Bay. 
 
 Salt Lake Bay, 11 miles southeastward of Southwest Point, has 
 fine sandy beaches, inclosing lagoons or ponds, into which the tide 
 
ANTICOSTI ISLAND. 
 
 51 
 
 rd in a series of 
 le next westward, 
 ^ mile northeast- 
 istward of Goose 
 ailes to the depth 
 
 ght of 300 feet at 
 tid and numerous 
 ter at high water, 
 this point is La 
 Ban enter at high 
 a this and South 
 
 I just inshore of it, 
 
 re. 
 
 d on the extreme 
 
 northwestward of 
 
 lO yards westward 
 
 weather. 
 
 W. mag.) 24 miles 
 
 feet high, painted 
 at an elevation of 
 y twenty seconds. 
 
 r foggy weather a 
 be sounded for a 
 fal of fifty seconds 
 e will sound at the 
 le. 
 
 bthouse on South- 
 a sameness iu the 
 lake out one part 
 miles westward of 
 
 to close this shore 
 
 3 to rise at Pavilion 
 soast all the way to 
 
 ere there is a lime- 
 miles SE. of Salt 
 
 ithwest Point, has 
 ito which the tide 
 
 flows. Off the center of this bay, and with its NW. point bearing N. 
 12° W. (N. 15° E. mag.), distant 1^ miles, there is very indifferent 
 anchorage, in 7 fathoms, over sandy bottom. Vessels should be care- 
 ful not to anchor farther southward and eastward, since there is some 
 foul and rocky ground about one mile in that direction from the position 
 which has just been recommended. There are 7 fathoms rocky bottom 
 marked in the chart on the spot alluded to, and there is probably less 
 water between it and the southeastern point of the bay, so that no one 
 should attempt to pass between it and the shore. 
 
 Caution.— Between South and Southwest Points of Anticosti the 
 reefs extend one mile from shore, and are so steep that there is little 
 warning by the lead. This part of the south coast of the island should 
 therefore be approached very cautiously at night or in foggy weather. 
 When far enough westward to see the revolving light on Southwest 
 Point, care should be taken not to bring it to bear to the westward of 
 N. 490 W. (N. 220 W. mag.). 
 Telegraph.— There is a telegraph station at Salt Lake Bay. 
 Southwest Point is a low projecting mound of limestone, having a 
 small cove on its north side, which forms it into a peninsula. The land 
 rises gradually in the rear of this to the summit of the ridge already 
 mentioned. On the south side of the point there is a beach of lime- 
 stone gravel on which boats may land, as well as in the cove on the 
 north side, when the wind is off shore and the sea smooth. On the 
 north side of the point, and fop several miles along the coast to Obser- 
 vation River, the cliffs are perpendicular, anc' washed by the sea. A 
 reef extends west and SW. from the point not more than ^ mile; and 
 2 miles oft", in the same direction, there are 30 fathoms, over rocky 
 bottom, deepening rapidly to 65 fathoms, with sand and shell at the 
 distance of 3 miles. 
 
 L^ht— Southwest Point Lighthouse stands on the western extremity 
 of the point, and forms a conspicuous landmark by day. The tower is 
 circular, 90 feet high, and painted white, with two red horizontal bands, 
 •and exhibits at an elevation of 94 feet a revolving white ligbt every 
 minute; the light should be visible 15 miles. 
 
 Anchorage —Vessels may anchor in the bay on the north side of the 
 point in 12 or 13 fathoms, over a bottom of sand, gravel, and broken 
 shell, with the extremity of the point bearing south (S. 270 W. mag.) 
 f mile, when the cliffs eastward will be at the same distance. The 
 shelter is from N. by W., roun'^. easterly, to S. by E., and small vessels 
 may lie closer under the point, but it is a dangerous place to be caught 
 in by westerly winds, which are preceded by a heavy swell. The ground 
 is not to be trusted, and no vessel can be recommended to anchor here 
 unless in case of necessity. The telegraph cable from Great Fox River 
 is landed on the outer part of the western cove of this bay. Vessels 
 should anchor nearer the eastern shore to avoid fouling it. 
 
 There is no anchorage from Southwest Point to Ellis Bay. The reefs 
 of flat limestone extend from it, in most parts, fully one mile, and often 
 
 ^ 
 
■V-:^-igafeta;»!fe;*£;-v.-4^^-vffj,.--.-^f.- ^ 
 
 
 52 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 
 
 Lave 10 or 12 fathmis of water close outside of them; but vessels with 
 the lead going may safely stand in as near as 2 miles or, which will be 
 safer than an estimated distance, had better tack in 17 fathoms. 
 
 Observation River, 5^ miles northward of Southwest Point, is the 
 largest stream on the island, having 5 or feet water in its entrance, 
 after the melting of the snows in the spring of the year, but soon 
 becomes barred with saud by the 8W. gales. Its source does not 
 appear to be known to the people of tiie island. Immediately north- 
 ward of this river there are conspicuous and high sandy cliffs. 
 
 St Mary Cliffs, 21 miles from Southwest Point, are also of sand, . 
 less high, and less remarkable, but yet not difficult to distinguish. 
 
 Beacon. — On St. Mary Cliffs is a beacon 40 feet high, painted white. 
 
 Becscie River, at 7 miles northwestward of St. Mary Cliffs and 12 
 miles southeastward of Ellis Bay, is a small stream at the head of a 
 cove affording shelter to boats, where there is one resident family. 
 
 Ellis Bay affords the only tolerably sheltered anchorage in Anticosti. 
 Vessels, if their draft is not too great lor a depth of 3 fathoms, may 
 safely lie there during the three finest months of summer, namely, June, 
 July, and August, but they should moor with an open hawse to the 
 southward. If of larger draft, and only wishing to remain for a few 
 hours, they may anchor farther out, in 3J and 4 fathoms, but neither 
 the ground nor the shelter will be found so good as farther up the bay. 
 
 Anchorage. — The best berth in Ellis Bay is in a line between Cape 
 Henry and White Cliff", Captain Setter's (formerly Gamache) house, N. 
 15° W. (N. 12° E. mag.), and Cape Eagle, S. 51° E. (S. 24° E. mag.), 
 nearly. The vessel will then be in 3 fathoms over muddy bottom, uis- 
 taut about 600 yards from the flats on either side, and about J mile from 
 those at the head of the bay. Southerly winds are of rare occurrence; 
 and never last long. Moreover, when they do occur the sea is much less 
 at the anchorage than might be expected, although very heavy in the 
 entrance between the reefs. 
 
 Heefs.— These reefs are of flat limestone, and dry at low water; and 
 as the tides only rise from 4 to 7 feet, the sea always breaks upon them 
 when there is the least swell. The reef off' Cape Henry extends nearly 
 one mile southeastward, and that oft" Cape Eagle nearly ^ mile south- 
 westward. The entrance between them is J mile wide, between the 
 depth of 3 fathoms on either side. Extensive flats proceed from these 
 reefs quite around the ba,> , and do not entirely dry at low water, except 
 in very low spring tides, but there are immense bowlders upon them 
 which always show. These flats occasion the landing to be very bad, 
 except at high water, which is the only time that supplies of good water 
 can be obtained from Gamache Eiver. 
 
 Directions. — Ellis Bay can be easily made out from the sea, for Cape 
 Henry is a bluff point, and the land being very low at the head of the 
 bay, occasions the opening to show distinctly. On a nearer approach, 
 Cape Eagle and White Cliff" on the east side, and the houses near the 
 head of the bay, will be easily recognized, whilst two ridges or hills 
 
 
ut vessels with 
 ', which will be 
 fathoms. 
 St Point, is the 
 u its entrance, 
 year, but soon 
 )urce does not 
 lediately north- 
 er cliffs. 
 
 e also of sand, . 
 istinguish. 
 , painted white, 
 ry Cliffs and 12 
 ; the head of a 
 eut family, 
 ge in Anticosti. 
 'i fathoms, may 
 ', namely, June, 
 II hawse to the 
 emain for a few 
 ms, but neither 
 her up the bay. 
 e between Cape 
 ache) house, N. 
 i. 240 E. mag.), 
 ;dy bottom, liis- 
 30ut ^ mile from 
 'are occurrence; 
 sea is much less 
 iry heavy in the 
 
 low water; and 
 eaks upon them 
 ' extends nearly 
 ly ^ mile south- 
 le, between the 
 ceed from these 
 w water, except 
 iers upon them 
 to be very bad, 
 es of good water 
 
 ;he sea, for Cape 
 the head of the 
 learer approach, 
 houses near the 
 ridges or hills 
 
 ANTICOSTI ISLAND. 
 
 53 
 
 MP 
 
 will be seen far back in the country, and to the northward and east- 
 ward. The long line of breakers on either «ide, and the numerous large 
 stones 80 tar from the shore ahead, will present anything but an agree- 
 able appearance to those who may approach this bay for the first time, 
 but there wil be no danger if the following directions are attended to- 
 In approaching Ellis Bay from the westward, with westerly winds 
 run down along the outside of the reefs off Cape Henry by the lead 
 and in 10 fathoms, until the west side of White Cliff is in line with the 
 east side of the western of two hills far back in the country, and bear- 
 in^ '-n^'f- ^'° ^- '""^•^' '^'^'^ ''""^ "1^ ^^'tt «^e«e «'arks on, afd 
 they wdl lead into smooth water close under Cape Henry Reef, in U 
 fathoms. Continue running in with these marks on till Setter house 
 bears N. 150 W. (N. 12o E. mag.); then haul up for it, and anchor in 
 the line be ween Cape Henry and White Cli-; as previously recom- 
 mended. The lead should be kept going, and the reefs on either side 
 should not be approached nearer than a depth of 3 fathoms Avater in 
 any part until the vessel arrives at the anchorage 
 In running for the bay from the southeastward, with an easterly 
 
 InfhT? r.r*'"' ^"^ ^^"^ ''*'* P**^"* ^^ ^*P« Eagle Reef than the 
 depth of 7 fathoms, until the east side of White Cliff comes in line 
 with the east side of the same hul as before; then haul up with this 
 mark on until Setter house bears N. 150 W. (S. 12° E. mag.), and pro- 
 ceed as above directed. Take notice that the west side of White Cliff 
 IS used for the leading mark in westerly winds and the east side in 
 easterly winds, the intention being to keep the vessel in either case 
 from going too near the lee side of the channel. 
 
 Boats can only land near high water. 
 
 Tides.-It is high water, full and change, in Ellis Bay at Ih. 45m • 
 ordinary springs rise 6 feet, and neaps 4 feet. 
 
 Aspect of Coast-On the outside of Cape Henry, and continuing to 
 
 ! P«"'' reefs extend li miles from the shore, and vessels approach- 
 
 charts '"^^ ^'*"'^' ^""^ ^^^''•^ ^ *^" soundings in the 
 
 West Point is low and wooded, with reefs which do notextend beyond 
 one mile from the shore, and vessels may pass it in 15 fathoms water at 
 the distance of If miles. 
 
 Light-^The lighthouse on West Point is a circular tower, lOG feet 
 high, painted white, with two red vertical stripes, and exhibits at an 
 elevation of 112 feet above the sea a fixed white light, which should be 
 visible in clear weather from a distance of 15 miles. The keener's 
 dwelling is attached to the lighthouse. 
 
 Fog SignaL-A cotton powder cartridge is fired every twenty 
 mmutes during foggy weather and snowstorms. 
 
 J'Tt Pf^'^-Tlie "oith coast of Anticosti, between West and 
 ^orth Points, IS low, with reefs of flat limestone, extending one mile 
 from the shore. There are soundings, in moderate depths, for more 
 than one mile out from the reefs. Vessels should not go nearer than a 
 
 J 
 
54 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 
 
 depth of 25 fathoms water. In the rear of the coast, and about mid- 
 way between West and North Points, are the two hills or ridges 
 mentioned as forming one of the leading marks for Ellis Bay. 
 
 North Point is wooded, of moderate height, and without any cliff. 
 It is 80 little remarkable as to be only distinguished by the change 
 which takes place at it in the direction of the coast High Cliff Point, 
 distant 13 miles from North Point, is easily recognized, being the only 
 cliff on the island that has a talus in front of it, or that has not its 
 base washed by the sea at high water. 
 Beacon.— On North Point is a whitewashed beacon, 30 feet high. 
 Coast— From High Cliff Point to West Cliff, a distance of 26 miles, 
 the coast is low in front, with ridges of considerable elevation a few 
 miles back in the country. This is the most dangerous part of the 
 north coast, for the reefs extend nearly 2 miles out from high-water 
 mark, beginning at some low cliff's 7 miles eastward of High Cliff Point, 
 and continue to do so for 4 or 5 miles eastward, after which they grad- 
 ually diminish in breadth, till at West Cliff they are not more than one 
 mile from the shore. There is more or less warning by the deep-sea 
 lead all along this part of the coast until West Cliff is approached, off 
 which there are 70 fathoms at the distance of IJ miles from the surf. 
 Beacon.— On West Cliff is a whitewashed beacon, 30 feet high. 
 West Cliff is very remarkable, for there is no other high cliff near 
 it. It appears like a white patch on the land, and can be seen from 
 a distance of 20 miles. Low cliffs commence 4 miles southeastward of 
 West Cliff', and continue to Charleton Point, under which vessels may 
 anchor in fine weather with westerly winds, and obtain wood and wa,ter. 
 Cape Observation, 10 miles farther southeastward, is a bold, high, 
 and remarkable headland. On its west side there is a magnificent 
 range of grayish-white cliffs several hundred feet high. At the 
 extremity of the cape these cliffs become suddenly ^nuch lower, and 
 then rise again to their former elevation for a short distance on the 
 east side. Vessels may anchor under the lee of Cape Observation with 
 westerly winds and fine weather, and obtain supplies of wood and 
 water very conveniently. 
 
 Bear Head lies 12^ miles farther southeastward, it is composed ot 
 grayish-white cliffs 400 feet high, and in some degree resembles Cape 
 Observation. The intervening coast has the same character, is bold, 
 and has small bays between the cliff's. Cape Observation has no 
 equally high cliffy headlands westward of it, whilst Bear Head has, a 
 difference which will, independently of the beacon on Bear Head, pre- 
 vent the one from being mistaken for the other. 
 
 From West Cliff to Bear Head the coast is bold, there being in most 
 parts a depth of 100 fathoms within 3 miles of the shore. 
 
 Beacon.— On Bear Head Cliff is a beacon, 30 feet high, with diamond- 
 shaped top and whitewashed. 
 
 Bear Bay between Bear Head and Cape Robert, which are distant 
 nearly 6 miles from each other NW. and SE., is by far the best roadstead 
 
 i-.\ 
 
ANTICOSTI ISLAND. 
 
 55 
 
 ad about mid- 
 ills or ridges 
 Bay. 
 
 jout any cliff. 
 )y the chauge 
 ;li Cliff Point, 
 »eing the only 
 at has not its 
 
 ) feet high. 
 ce of 26 miles, 
 evation a few 
 IS part of the 
 )m high- water 
 igh Cliff Point, 
 ich they grad- . 
 more than one 
 y the deep-sea 
 bpproached, off 
 rom the snrf. 
 feet high, 
 high cliff near 
 a be seen from 
 iitheastward of 
 ch vessels may 
 ood and water, 
 s a bold, high, 
 a magnificent 
 bigh. At the 
 uch lower, and 
 [istance on the 
 bservation with 
 8 of wood and 
 
 ; is composed of 
 resembles Cape 
 aracter, is bold, 
 rvation has no 
 ear Head has, a 
 iear Head, pre- 
 
 •e being in most 
 
 e. 
 
 I, with diamond- 
 
 hich are distant 
 e best roadstead 
 
 on the north coast of Anticosti, and, indeed, the only one in which a 
 vessel of large draft would like to anchor, unless she had some partic- 
 ular object in view. It is sufficiently roomy, tlie bottom is excellent 
 for holding, the depth of water moderate, and the shelter extends from 
 NW., round by west and south, to SB. by E. 
 
 Cape Robert consists of cliffs of the same color and elevation as 
 those of Bear Head. There are two other points of cliffs 300 feet high 
 within the bay, the southeasteruuiost of wliich is named Tower Point. 
 The best anchorage is between Tower Point and Cape Robert, at a dis- 
 tance of one mile from the former, as well ns from the western shore, 
 and in 13 fathoms water over a bottom of brown mud. 
 
 Bear Bay is divided into three smaller bays by the two high points 
 of cliff already mentioned. In each of these bays there are fine bold 
 beaches of sand and limestone shingle, and streams where water may 
 be easily obtained. But the principal stream is Bear River, wliich 
 enters the southernmost of the tliree bays close to the SB. side of 
 Tower Point. It is too shallow and rapid to admit boats, but the water 
 IS clear and good. The cliff's in Bear Bay are of grayish-white lime- 
 stone, m thin strata, dipping very slightly to the southward, and are 
 perpendicular or overhanging. At the extremities of the points the 
 chffs are rounded by the action of the waves and atmosphere so as to re- 
 semble towers, which resemblance is rendered stronger by the masonry- 
 like appearance of th- rock. The trees are of diminutive growth. 
 
 Deep Bay, immediately northwestward of Table Head, has excellent 
 shelter at the head in 5 to 9 fathoms water, with a bottom of clay or 
 mild, from all winds between NNW. round by west to BSE. 
 
 Water may be easily obtained from a stream which flows into the SB. 
 corner of the bay. 
 
 Table Head rises to a height of 260 feet in a densely wooded sum- 
 mit, but the form of a table, which apparenUy suggested the name, is 
 difficult of recognition. A limestone ledge extends i mile, and the line 
 of 5 fathoms is 800 yardt, respectively, distant from the head. 
 
 The coast southward trends 3^ miles to Pox Point and has a flat 
 reef extending nearly ^ mile from it. Nearly midway between these 
 points 18 a break in the reef whero boats can obtain sheltered landing 
 at lew water in moderate weather. Thickly wooded ridges, rising to a 
 height of 220 feet, extend southeastward at a distance of 2 miles from 
 the coast, the intervening space alternating in swamps and patches of 
 dense wood. 
 
 Fox Bay, IJ miles southward of Fox Point, is about one mile wide 
 and deep, with a sandy beach at its head, where there is a stream drain- 
 ing the ponds and swamps mentioned before. The north shore is foul 
 for a distance of 600 yards and the south shore for 400 yards. In the 
 center there are depths of 2^ to 2f fathoms, the latter over a muddy 
 bottom, and it affords anchorage to the small vessels whi(!h resort here 
 in the summer for fishing, and is fairly well sheltered from the sea by 
 the shoals fronting the bay. 
 
 wm 
 
 -■■-■*»u*4*»6E«*., . ■i^»i*i»M^'aagfe<..Vft^»4 w *:^ ■'Mt^tM.....*.^! 
 
Xi^ijifj^ii'f.ilia -tnu-f-f^..- 
 
 56 GULF OP ST. LAWRENCE — ISLANDS. 
 
 The telegraph station and the houses of about 10 resident families 
 are on the southern shore. 
 
 Reef Point, the south entrance point of Fox Bay, is low avid flat, 
 and behind it are several lagoons and swamps. Shoal water extends 
 north i mile to the depth of 3 fathoms, and close beyond it is a detached 
 shoal with 9 feet on it at low water, and occupying a space ^ mile long 
 and 400 yards broad. The whole of the summit of the ridge on Table 
 Head open east of Fox Point leads close eastward of this shoal. 
 
 Wreck Point is 3 miles southward of Reef Point, the intermediate 
 coast forming a small bight. The shore reef extends more than 200 
 yards froip this ])oint, and foul ground extends southward one mile. 
 
 The ridge rises to a conspicuous woo^Jed summit 316 feet above high 
 water, at Ijf miles inland, with a bluflf at the north extreme, and a little 
 southward of it are two remarkable detached summits on the ridge 
 extending toward East Oape. This is the most conspicuous land in the 
 southeastern part of the island. 
 
 Cape Sandtop is a remarkable headland rising steeply to a height 
 of 120 feet, and is composed of marl and gravel that from seaward 
 resembles white sand. Thert is no secure anchorage in the bight 
 between this and Wreck Point. Southward of Cape Sandtop the lime 
 stone cliflFs continue to a conspicuous perpendicular bluft' 116 feet high, 
 and from this they fall gradually toward East Oape, forming a small 
 bight, in which there is sheltered anchorage with westerly winds in JO 
 to 12 iathoms over sand and rock. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at Heath Point at llh. 
 20m. ; springs rise 4 J feet and neaps rise 2 feet. The tidal streams run 
 strongly round the point at spring tides to a distance of 5 or miles 
 from the shore. The flood stream runs generally northeastward and 
 the ebb southwestward, but at a distance of 5 miles from the land 
 the streams turn at 1^ hours before high and low water by the shore. 
 During neap tides these streams are much modified both in ibrce and 
 direction by the wind. Between East Cape and Table Head there is 
 an almost constant stream to the southward, with an occasional weak 
 eddy northeastward close to the shore. This stream sometimes sets 
 sharply round Bast Cape into Wreck Bay, and necessitates caution in 
 this locality. Westward of Cormorant Point the flood stteam runs 
 westward and the ebb eastward, but the rates and directions are much 
 affected by the wind, and occasionally the stream has been noticed to 
 run in one or the other direction for a whole day without change, and 
 generally the tidal streams are very irregular. Between West Cliff 
 and Table Head there is generally very little stream in any direction. 
 Occasionally winds from the westward converge from both sides of the 
 island toward Heath Point. Between the junction of the winds and 
 the shore there is generally a space of light and variable airs from 6 
 to 8 miles eastward of the island. Sailing vessels should be careful 
 under these circumstances not to approach the island within this space. 
 
 J! 
 
dent families 
 
 low avid flat, 
 'ater extends 
 is a detached 
 e ^ mile long 
 idge on Table 
 sboal. 
 
 intermediate 
 ore than 200 
 L one mile, 
 it above high 
 te, and a little 
 on the ridge 
 as land in the 
 
 ly to a height 
 ^om seaward 
 in the bight 
 dtop the lime 
 116 feet high, 
 miug a small 
 y winds in JO 
 
 Point at lib. 
 il streams run 
 )f 5 or G miles 
 eastward and 
 i'om the laud 
 by the shore. 
 h in ibrce and 
 Head there is 
 casional weak 
 ometimes sets 
 btes cantion in 
 [ stteam runs 
 ions are much 
 eeu noticed to 
 t change, and 
 en West Cliff 
 any direction. 
 )h sides of the 
 ;he winds and 
 le airs from 5 
 lid be careful 
 liin this space. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 CAPE BRETON ISLAND, WEST COAST, AND 3T. GEORGE BAY. 
 
 CAPE BRETON ISLAND. 
 
 H. O. CLurtNo. 611. 
 
 West Coast— The west coast of Cape Breton Island is dangerous of 
 access and possesses no harbor but Port Hood. 
 
 Caution.— It is a dangerous coast to be near in autumn or early win- 
 ter, when the prevailing NW. winds send in a heavy sea, and the set 
 ot the current is often in the same direction. The swell frequently 
 precedes the wind by many hours, and as there is no good holding 
 ground, it becomes dangerous to vessels caught close inshore. 
 
 The Fisheries are valuable. Salmon are taken in all the principal 
 streams, and the Margaree is so celebrated for its salmon fishery that 
 It has sometimes been called the Salmon River. Herring, mackerel, 
 cod, etc., abound in their seasons, and are frequently taken in large 
 quantities. The seal fishery is also attempted occasionally, but is a 
 precarious pursuit. 
 
 Currents.— Even with a smooth sea and in fine summer weather, ves- 
 sels are set in toward this coast, an efifect which seems to be due some- 
 times to the general current from the NW. coming from between the 
 Magdalen Islands and Prince Edward Island, and at other times to the 
 direction of the ebb stream from Northumberland Strait, inclining 
 toward these sliores. These streams, beinginconstant and irregular both 
 m strength and direction, are therefore the more dangerous, and require 
 the more to be guarded against. In the summer months, however, tlie 
 rate of the current or tides will not be found to exceed one knot even 
 close inshore, excepting round Cape St. Lawrence and Cape Nortb 
 where it sometimes runs at the rate of 2 or 3 knots, causing a heavy 
 breaking sea. Its direction for three-fourths the time is from the west- 
 ward. This appears to be due to the combined action of the current 
 and ebb tide predominating over the flood stream from the NM, so as 
 to render it nearly imperceptible, excepting at or near the spring tides. 
 There is no doubt that winds, present or at a distance, also influence 
 these streams, as they have been observed to do fh aft parts of the 
 gulf. 
 
 Cape Worth, the north extremity of Cape Breton Island, is a bold 
 and rocky headland, of slate in nearly vertical strata, rising abruptlv 
 from the sea to the height of 1,00(> feet. Tliere is no shallow water off 
 
 57 
 
 -'■^m 
 
 iiJ* 
 
''WBSBBier,'.:_-i^„, iH^ ,- . 
 
 >' ^^1Wffi ft'ife^j>.TM^M 
 
 i 
 
 4: I 
 
 68 
 
 CAPE BRETON ISLAND — WE8T COAST. 
 
 it, only some rocks above water, -which at Money Point, a mile to the 
 SE. of the cjipe, run off a short distance. The passage between this 
 headland and St. Tanl Island is 13 miles wide, with deep water, and no 
 other danger than that which arises from the frequent and heavy 
 squalls whi(!h i)revail off this great promontory. 
 
 Light— North Cape lighthouse, a square building with a white 
 tower erected on it, 26 feet high, stands one mile SE. of Money Point. 
 The light is exhibited 74 feet above the sea level and is a revolving red 
 and white light every forty-flve seconds. It should be visible 15 miles. 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at Cape North at 8h.; 
 si)ring8 rise 4 feet. 
 
 St Lawrence Bay, between Cape North and Black Point, is 4J 
 miles wide and 1^ miles deep, with bold shores, and a depth of water 
 not too great for anchoring; but the bottom is not to be trusted, being 
 either of rock or loose sand. V^essels requiring supplies may anchor 
 there in the summer mouths, when strong northerly winds are of rare 
 occurrence, and will find 9 or 10 fathoms water at the distance of i mile 
 ofl' shore in the bottom of the bay, but they should be ready to weigh 
 immediately on the approach of a wind from the sea. At Deadman 
 Pond and Wreck Cove there are settlements and good landing, the 
 principal fishing establishment being at the first-named place. 
 
 Cape St Lawrence, which forms the NW. termination of the west 
 coast of Cape Breton Island, is of slate rock, affording no landing 
 except on the west side, where there is a brook, and a steep stony 
 beach, on which a boat can be hauled up with difficulty. Round this 
 headland to the SB. is the remarkable Bear Hill, a sugarloaf 750 feet 
 high, and close to the shore. This is distant leas than a mile from the 
 cape; and at an equal distance farther is Black Rock, always above 
 water, and about 360 yards off shore. 
 
 Meat Cove, where there is a settlement and good lauding for boats, 
 lies 600 yards farther in the same direction, and about a mile westward 
 from Black Point. 
 
 Lights.— On the north extreme of Cape St. Lawrence there is a 
 8(iuare white lighthouse, 56 feet high, from which is exhibited two fixed 
 white lights, at 137 feet and 95 feet above high-water mark, visible, 
 respectively, 17 and 15 miles. 
 
 The upper light is visible seaward from N. 58° E. (N. 84° E. mag.) to 
 S. 69° W. (N. 85° W. mag.) and the lower light from N. 61° E. (N. 87° 
 E. mag.) to S. 06° W. (N. 88° W. mag.). 
 The keeper's dwelling is attached to the lighthouse. 
 Telegraph and Signal Station.— Meat Cove is in telegraphic com- 
 munication with the United States and Canada. 
 
 Information as to ice, wind, temperature, and weather indications 
 may be obtained during the months of April and May, by communi- 
 cating with the signal station. The signals used are flags. 
 Coast— From Cape St. Lawrence to Grandanse, a distance of 15 
 
 mm 
 
, a mile to the 
 
 between this 
 
 water, and no 
 
 it and heavy 
 
 with a white 
 Money Point, 
 revolving red 
 sible 15 miles. 
 North at 8h.; 
 
 s. Point, is 4J 
 lepth of water 
 trusted, being 
 is may anchor 
 ds are of rare 
 tance of ^ mile 
 eady to weigh 
 At Deadman 
 1 landing, the 
 place. 
 
 )n of the west 
 ig no landing 
 a steep stony 
 r. Bound this 
 arloaf 750 feet 
 b mile from the 
 , always above 
 
 ding for treats, 
 mile westward 
 
 ace there is a 
 
 bited two fixed 
 
 mark, visible, 
 
 34° E. mag.) to 
 61° E. (N. 87° 
 
 ilegraphic com- 
 
 iier indications 
 f, by communi- 
 
 kgS. 
 
 distance of 15 
 
 CHETICAN ISLAND AND HARBOR. 
 
 miles, the coast is mountainous, with precipitous shores, attording an 
 iiiditt'e'ent landing for boats at one or two places, niul there only with 
 a smojth sea. At Grandause there is a settlement, and a small river 
 silted u;> by a shingle beach on which boats can land and be Imuled 
 over in case of need. From Orandanse to Pres([u'ile, where the foot of 
 the mountains are close to the shore, there are no inhabitants nor any 
 good landing place. 
 
 Jerome Ledge, with only 5 feet water, lies N. 30° E. (N. 55° E. mag.) 
 from Cape Gros, and at the distance of 1^ miles, it is of considerable 
 extent, being g mile long, and its NPi. point reaches to the distance of 
 a mile from the shore. The line of 10 fathoms water is only 000 yards 
 outside this ledge and the Caveau Shoals. There is, therefore, little 
 warning from the lead, but vessels beating along shore and standing 
 toward them will avoid them by tacking when the points on the outside 
 of Cheticaii Island come in line, bearing S. 27° W. (S, 51}° W, mag.). 
 
 Caveau Shoals.— Caveau Shoals, which are much in tlie way of 
 vessels wishing to anchor off the entrance of Chetican Harbor, are two 
 rocky patches, with 11 feet least water, lying at the distance of ^ mile 
 off Caveau Point, and N. 30° E. (N. 55° E. mag.), from ^ to f mile from 
 Cape Gros. 
 
 Chetican Island. — Chetican Island is only an island when high tides 
 overflow the low and narrow beach of sand and shingle which at other 
 times unites it to the mainland at its southern extremity. This beach 
 forms the shore of the bay, within the SW. point of the island, where 
 the vessels employed in the fisheries usually lie moored during the 
 summer months, receiving some shelter from the shoal which runs out 
 J mile southward from Chetican Point, out completely exposed to 
 winds from between SSW. and WNW., which send in a heavy sea. 
 The depth of water on this roadstead is 4* fathoms, but the bottom, 
 of sand and gravel, is so loose and bad for holding that the anchor- 
 age becomes quite unsafe after the month of August. 
 
 At no time is this anchorage to be recommended, and therefore ves- 
 sels merely wishing to communicate with the shore had better anchor 
 outside at the distance of a mile or two, where they will have room to 
 weigh in the event of the wind coming in from the westward. 
 
 There is no landing on the outside of Chetican Island, where the 
 cliffs of sandstone, containing coal fossils, are everywhere perpendicular 
 or overhanging, being constantly undermined by the sea. These cliff's, 
 which extend the whole length of the island, from Enragee Point south 
 to Chetican Point, are nearly equal in elevation to any part of the 
 island, rising in one part to the height of 200 feet above the sea. 
 
 Chetican Harbor, between the island and the mainland, is entered 
 from the northward between the shingle pit at Cape Gros, the NE. 
 extreme of the Island, and Caveau Point. Within this entrance, but 
 outside the bar, which is ^ mile farther in, small fishing vessels some- 
 times anchor, but the northerly winds send in so heavy a sea that this 
 
 ■ ■■«f*««»6iW<i«iaw«4*^«Wi«s**M»|«is-3»S^ 
 
 J 
 
■♦^p 
 
 .±ll.tkl.j;..,f^- _ 
 
 60 
 
 CAPE HKETON I8LAND — WEST C0A8T. 
 
 18 considered even loss secure than the unHafe anchorage ut the SW. 
 end of the island. 'I'here is a depth of 3i fathoms witliin the liarbor, 
 but only 2 feet at low water over its bar of sand, which is then in great 
 part dry. 
 
 Supplies. — The establishment on Chotican Point is the principal 
 fishing station on this coast, and will be easily recognized by the build- 
 ings, fish stages, and fiagstaft'. There are several other houses on the 
 inner side of the island, and a settlement of Acadians on the mainland 
 opposite, where supplies of fresh provision to a limited extent may be 
 obtained, and also water, which can not be had good or in any consid- 
 erable quantity upon the island. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Ohetican Harbor at 
 8:ili. ; ordinary springs rise 3i feet, neaps 2 feet. NE. winds cause high 
 tides, and SW. winds the contrary. 
 
 Lights. — The square building, 24 feet high and painted white, erected 
 on the SW. end of Ohetican Island, exhibits at an elevation of 149 feet 
 a revolving white light every forty-iive seconds, and visible 20 miles. 
 
 Two leading lights are exhibited on the eastern side of Chetican 
 Eastern Harbor. 
 
 The trout light is a iixed red light, at the height of 4.') feet above high- 
 water mark, and is visible over a small a;-c uu either side of the lights 
 in line, 8 miles. It is 00 feet from the water. 
 
 The rear light is a fixed white light, 62 feet above high water. It 
 is S. 6° E. (S. 190 W. luag.) 330 yards from the front light, and is 
 visible over a small arc on either bide of the alignment, 13 miles. 
 
 Each light is exhibited, from a four-sided, pyramidal building, painted 
 white, with red lantern. The front lighthouse is 30 feet high iind the 
 rear one 38 fe^t. 
 
 The lights in line lead through the dredged channel, which is marked 
 by spar buoys on both sides, to the anchorage in Eastern Harbor. 
 
 Squirrel Pond. — Between Chetican Island and Margaree Eiver, 10 
 miles to the southward, there are several places where boats can land 
 in fine weather, especially at Squirrel Pond, distant 3 miles from Chet- 
 ican. There are farms all along this part, the mountains running 
 parallel to the shore at a short distance back, and attaining at Mount 
 Squirrel, in rear of Squirrel Pond, an elevation of 1,220 feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 Margaree River has 5 feet over its rocky bar at low water, in a 
 very narrow and intricate channel, through which the tides run at the 
 late of 4 knots. It is only under favorable circumstances of wind and 
 weather, and with a smooth sea, that schooners can safely attempt to 
 enter it. The surf on the bar is at times heavy and dangerous to boats, 
 especially when the strong tide is running out against the wind and 
 sea. The shores of this river are well settled. In 1881 the population 
 of Margaree district numbered 1,755 inhabitants. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Margaree River at 8h. 
 
;e ut the 8W. 
 
 in the harbor, 
 
 tlieii in great 
 
 the principal 
 [ by the bniUl- 
 housca on the 
 the mainland 
 jxtent may be 
 in any consid- 
 
 an Harbor at 
 [ids canse high 
 
 white, erected 
 ;ionofl49feet 
 ble 20 miles, 
 le of Chetican 
 
 3et above high- 
 Q of the lights 
 
 igh water. It 
 t light, and is 
 13 miles, 
 lilding, painted 
 t high iind the 
 
 hich is marked 
 ■n Harbor, 
 jaree River, 10 
 )oats can land 
 liles from Chet- 
 itains rnnning 
 ning at Mount 
 220 feet above 
 
 )W water, in a 
 ides run at the 
 ;es of wind and 
 ely attempt to 
 ;erou8 to boats, 
 the wind and 
 the population 
 
 ee River at 8h. 
 
 1 
 
 SEA WOLF ISLAND — MABOU RIVKB. 
 
 61 
 
 40m.; ordinary springs rise .'^ feet, neaps 2 feet, lloats can aH(;end 5 
 or miles from the entrance, at which distance the tide ends. 
 
 Light. — A harbor liglit is exhibited frotii a lighthouse on the outer 
 end of the breakwater pier, on south side of Margaree River entrance. 
 
 The light is a flxed red light between the bearings of S.45<^ K. (S. 20^ 
 E, mag.) and S. 26° W. (S. 5(P \V. mag.) and fixed white on the east- 
 ern and western sides. It is 21 feet above high-water mark, and should 
 be visible 4 miles. 
 
 The lighthouse, 21 feet high, is a white square tower. 
 
 This light is to guide into Margaree l\iver, and in order to keep the 
 channel should be passed closely on the eastern side. 
 
 Sea Wolf Island, 7^ miles SW. of Margaree River, is of an oval 
 shape, liV miles long, parallel to the shore, 600 yards broad, and 2t)0 
 feet high. It is of sandstone, precipitous and quite bold all around, 
 excepting at the NE. point, and there the shallow water extends only 
 to the distance of 200 yards. It aftbrds some shelter to small Ashing 
 vessels and boats, which can land upon it only in fine summer weather; 
 at other times the sea rolls completely round it, and the anchorage is 
 never safe, the ground being everywhere rocky. 
 
 The deptli between this island and the shore, from which it is distant 
 rather more than 2 miles, is 7 fathoms, over a bottom of rock, with loose 
 sand and gravel occasionally. 
 
 The neighboring sea abounds with fish. 
 
 Light — The lighthouse, erected on the summit an<l near tlie middle 
 of Sea Wolf Island, is a square white building, showing at 298 feet 
 above the level of the sea a fixed white light, visible 21 miles. 
 
 Caution. — To vessels in dangerous proximity to the island, the light 
 may become obscured by the abrupt clitt's on the sides of the island. 
 
 Mabou Highland commences at Cape Mabou, about 14 nules SW. 
 of Sea Wolf Island, and is a very remarkable feature of the coast, 
 seen from great distances seaward. It extends 11 miles along the coast 
 to the NE., forming a lofty and precipitous shore, and rising to the 
 height of 1,000 feet above the sea. After passing these highlands, the 
 coast becomes less elevated, the beaches and landing places more fre- 
 quent, and the settlements are c<mtinuous until past Cheticau Island. 
 
 Mabou River, at 5 miles from Port Hood, admits small schooner)^, 
 having 6 feet at low water over its bar of sand through a dredged chan- 
 nel. The bar shifts occasionally during heavy NW. gales, but is seldom 
 disturbed during the summer months, when those gales are of rare 
 occurrence. 
 
 From the entrance to the bridge, a distance of 3J miles, this river 
 resembles a mountain lake, being in one part ^ mile wide and carrying 
 8 fathoms water. Boats can ascend with the tide to 2 or 3 miles above 
 the bridge, where the fresh water forms only a small stream. Besides 
 the Mabou, which is the main branch, there are two other smaller 
 streams, the Southwest Arm and Becket River, which last enters from 
 the northeastward. 
 
CAPE BRETON ISLAND — WEST COAST. 
 
 I- 
 
 t 
 
 \l 
 
 Thu shores of the Mubou are well settled, farms arc seen on either 
 side, and there is a church ou the northern bank .'» miles within the 
 entrance. Tlie scenery is Vv.ry beautifn:, rlie mountainH riHinjriinmcdi- 
 ately from the northero nhore to the hoijjlit of ><7(> feet. 
 
 Light*.— Two leading lights are exhibited from masts, with white 
 sheds at tlie base, at Mabou Harbor entraiurc. 
 
 The outJir lijrht iH a fixed white lijrlit, nhown from tlie extrendty of 
 the l>roiikwatcr |)ier on the S\V. , side of the dredged channel ; it i« 25 
 feet above high water, and should be visible miles. 
 
 The inner light is a tlxed red liglit, shown on the shore at McFay- 
 dens wharf, and distant 1,00<> yards from the other light; it is 30 feet 
 above high water, and should be visible 7 miles. 
 
 The lights in line lead through the dredged channel past the break 
 water. 
 
 Tides. — The entrance to Mabou River, at the southern end of a low 
 sand bar, is oni> i«JO yards wide, and the tides frequently run there at 
 the rate of 4 knots; it is therefore a dangerous place to enter, excejit 
 ing with a flowing tide and a smooth sea. It js high water there, full 
 and change, at about 9h. ; ordinary springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2 feet. 
 NE. winds often cause high tides; 8W. winds the contrary.. 
 
 Coal Mine Cove is 2 J miles northward of Mabou ; here a breakwater 
 320 feet long has been built and a double track laid to the mine; the 
 Dominion (fovernment are adding an extension 100 feet long. It is 
 intended to have 18 feet water at the loading ground. In fine weather 
 both of these wharves can be used for shipping coal. 
 
 Port Hood, the only safe anchorage on the west coast of Cape Bre- 
 ton Island to the north of the Gut of Canso, was formerly a much 
 more secure harbor. Smith Island being then a peninsula, united to the 
 mainland by a range of high sand hills, which has since been entirely 
 swept away. 
 
 Anchorage. — At the anchorage in the NW. part of Port Hood, 
 formed by the east side of Smith Island, there are depths of 3 to 4J 
 fathoms, mud, and the heavy swell is prevented from rolling in round 
 the NE. extreme of the island by a shoal which extends about 800 yards 
 southward Irom Smith Point, with 2 to 4 feet water, and is marked 
 by a small red buoy. 
 
 Supplies. — The village of Port Hood will be seen on the mainland 
 opposite the northern part of Smith Island; it is well situated, and 
 will be recognized by the steeple of the church and the courthouse of 
 stone. Supplies of fresh provisions may be obtained there, but there 
 is no good watering place, the supply from the wells of Smith Island 
 being scanty and not very good, while the brooks of the mainland are 
 difficult of access, and sometimes nearly dry in summer. 
 
 Spithead, a sandy flat, nearly dry at low water, extending 1,200 yards 
 northeastward from Portsmouth Point, the south extremity of Smith 
 Island, affords partial shelter from south winds, but a strong south or 
 southwesterly gale of any duration sends in a heavy swell. 
 
 I 
 
PORT HOOD. 
 
 fi3 
 
 seen on either 
 les within the 
 riHinjriniintHli- 
 
 sts, with white 
 
 lie extremity of 
 hunuel; it i« 25 
 
 here at McFay- 
 fht; it i8 30 feet 
 
 post the break- 
 em end of a low 
 itly run there at 
 to enter, except- 
 water there, full 
 jet, neaps 2 feet. 
 
 :rary.. 
 
 lere a breakwater 
 
 to the mine; the 
 
 feet long. It is 
 
 In ftne weather 
 
 tast of Cape Bre- 
 formerly a niucb 
 I, united to the 
 ice been entirely 
 
 of Port Hood, 
 lepths of 3 to 4J 
 
 rolling in round 
 is about 800 yards 
 r, and is marked 
 
 on the mainland 
 
 ^ell situated, and 
 
 he courthouse of 
 
 there, but there 
 
 of Smith Island 
 
 Ithe mainland are 
 
 aer. 
 
 tndingl,200 yards 
 
 Vtremity of Smith 
 
 la stroivg south or 
 
 Igwell. 
 
 Clearing Marks. — A vesHel will pai4s to the eastward of tiie S]>lth«>u(l 
 (which is steep-to andean usually be seen) by keeping the Houth end of 
 the trees NK. of the town in line with the Itoiiian (Jiitholit; chnrcli bear- 
 ing N. 19^ K. (N. 43^ E. mug.) and the east end of II. Smith's himse in 
 line with the west end of tiie ehaj>el bearing N. 2i" W. (north niag.). 
 
 Dean Shoal, on the mainland side of the port, extends (»<H) yards 
 i^om the sandy beach at .Mill Creek. It is a Hteep sandy tlat, which, 
 together with the shallow water, as far out as opposite Portsmouth 
 Point, but not farther to the south, will be cleared at the distance of 
 200 yards >iy keeping Cape Linzee and Isthmus Point in line, bearing 
 about N. 9° W. (N. 15^ K. mag.)- 
 
 Rooky Shoal. — On the same side, but outside the entrance of the 
 harbor, a rocky shoal, with 12 feet least water, runs ont 700 yards from 
 the shore ^ mile northward of Wagged I'oiiit. This being steep-to, 
 must be carefully avoided by a vessel of large draft. 
 
 Smith Island is 2 miles long and 210 feet high; it possesses much 
 fertile land, and there are farms on the inner side of the island. With 
 the exception of the sandy beach in the harbor, the island is every 
 where surrounded by cliffs of various heights up to 123 feet. They are 
 formed of soft reddisli sandstones, shales, and marls, containing occa- 
 sionally thin seams of coals, with beds of gypsum, limestone, and trap, 
 which last are well shown at the NW. end of the island. 
 
 St. G-eorge Bay.— See page G7. 
 
 Henry Island, or Just an Corps, lies about a mile S W. of Smith Island. 
 It is one mile long and its greatest height is 195 feet. It is of rock 
 formation, and nearly surrounded with cliffs which yield rapidly to the 
 action of the waves and of the atmosphere, and which on the outer side 
 attain the elevation of 100 feet. It has no permanent inhabitants, but 
 is much frequented by tishermeu during the fishing seasons. 
 
 This island is bold to seaward, but shallow water runs out from 
 Fishery Point, its SE. extremity, ^ mile to the depth of 3 fathoms and 
 J mile to 5 fathoms. 
 
 The passage between the islands is rendered so extremely intricate 
 and dangerous by rocky shoals that it should never be attempted unless 
 in a very small vessel and with fine weather. 
 
 Bnoyage. — The following buoys are removed at the end of the 
 navigable season, namely : 
 
 At Portsmouth Point Spit, a black buoy; Spithead Shoal, a black 
 buoy; Dean Shoal, a red buoy. 
 
 A small red buoy marks the southeastern and a similar buoy the 
 southwestern extremes of the shoal extending southward from Smith 
 Point. 
 
 Caution. — Too much reliance must not be placed in the buoyage, as 
 they are frequently out of position. 
 
 Light — The lighthouse erected on the cliff southward of Mill Creek, 
 at the east side of the south entrance to Port Hood, is a small square 
 building, painted white. It exhibits, at 55 feet above high water, a 
 
 ifio^tiiii' 
 
it 
 
 64 
 
 CAPE BRETON ISLAND — WEST COAST. 
 
 fixed light, which shows red from S. 22° E. (S. 2° W. mug.) to S. 85° E. 
 (S. 61° E. mag.) and white from S. 85o e. (S. 61^ E. mag.) to north 
 (N. 24° E. mag.). These lights should be visible 10 miles. 
 
 Ice. — The harbor is usually frozen over about January 20 and is 
 clear of ice about April 20, being completely closed between those 
 dates; field ice comes in and disappears about the same time as the 
 harbor ice. 
 
 Tbe first vessel arrives about May 1 and the last one leaves about 
 January 1. 
 
 Directions. — Having a fair wind, pass to the southward of Henry 
 Island at a distance not less than | mile, steering N. 76° E. (S. 80° E. 
 mag.) until the south end of the trees is in line witb tbe spire of the 
 Eoman Catholic church, bearing N. 19° E. (N. 43° E. u ag.), which will 
 lead east of the Portsmouth and Spithead 8hoals, and when the east 
 end of H. Smith's house is in line with the west end of the chapel, 
 bearing N. 24° W. (north mag.), steer for the anchorage in the NW. 
 part of the ])ort. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, iull and change, at Port Hood at 9h. ; ordi- 
 nary springs rise 4^ feet, nea])s 2 feet. The tidal streams are weak at 
 the anchorage, and their rate does not ordhiarily amount to one knot 
 anywhere within the harbor. The Hood comes from the north and the 
 ebb from the south. The flood stream from the north meets that which 
 comes in through the (xut of Canso, off Long Point, whence they set to 
 the NW., curving round tlie bay toward Cape George. 
 
 Coast. — South of Port Hood at Emersion Point the coast is danger- 
 ous to approach, and continues so to Long Point, a low cliff of red 
 sandstone, a distant of 7 oi' 8 miles; off this stretch are JudiqueBank 
 and Shoals. 
 
 Judique Pond, close to the north of Judique church, is barred by a 
 sandy ridge so as only to admit boats at high water. The shallow 
 water extends oft' it to the distance of H miles. Catherine Pond and 
 Susan Creek, distant 3 and 5 miles, respectively, to the north of the 
 church, are similar places; the latter admits boats at high water, and 
 is just to the north of Cape Susan, rendered remarkable by the white 
 gypsum in its cliffs. 
 
 From Long Point to Heft'ernan Point there are no detached dangers, 
 nor does the shallow water anywhere extend to the distance of ^ mile 
 from the shore. The laud is high and rather barren looking, rising at 
 the distance of ^ mile from the shore to the summit of a ridge 850 feet 
 above the sea, and which runs parallel to the coast line. The only 
 remarkable object in this interval is the church at Craignish. 
 
 Judique Shoal, the greatest danger on this coast and in St. George 
 Bay, is of rock, and about ^ mile in length, if the very shallow part is 
 only reckoned, but there are patches with 2 or 3 fathoms, and much 
 rocky ground both to the north and south of it. 
 
 The least water, 4 fett, is close to the outer point of tbe shoal, and 
 
■I? 
 
 OUT OP CAN80. 
 
 66 
 
 .)toS. 850E. 
 
 lag.) to north 
 
 i. 
 
 ,ry 20 and is 
 
 etween those 
 
 B time as the 
 
 I leaves about 
 
 rard of Henry 
 
 E. (S. 80° E. 
 le spire of the 
 ig.), which will 
 when the east 
 of the chapel, 
 ;e in the NW. 
 
 odat9h.;ordi- 
 ns are weak at 
 int to one knot 
 
 1 north and the 
 teets that which 
 snce they set to 
 
 joast is danger- 
 low cliff of red 
 i Judique Bank 
 
 , is barred by a 
 •. The shallow 
 erine Pond and 
 le north of the 
 ligh water, and 
 le by the white 
 
 ached dangers, 
 
 itance of ^ mile 
 
 >oking, rising at 
 
 a ridge 860 feet 
 
 ine. The only 
 ignish. 
 d in St. George 
 
 shallow part is 
 lonis, and much 
 
 the shoal, and 
 
 when en it the western extremity of the highland of Cape Porcupine 
 will appear in the same line as Flat and Hefternan Points, which form 
 the right extremity of Breton Island at the entrance of the Gut of 
 Canso, antl which bear S. 20° E. (S. 4° W. mag.). 
 
 There are 4 fathoms water between the shoal and the land, but only 
 small craft should attemi»t the ])a8sage. 
 
 Clearing Marks. — By keeping the whole of tlie highland of Cape 
 Porcapine open to the west of Hetternan Point, it will lead to the west- 
 ward of the shoal in 6 or 7 fathoms ; or if the church at Port Hood be 
 kept open to the west of Cape Susan, the shoal will be cleared in not 
 less than 4 fathoms. 
 
 Buoy. — A red buoy is placed on Judique Shoal about the 1st of May 
 and taken up in November. 
 
 Judique Bank lies NW. 2f miles from the Judique Shoal; it has 4^ 
 fathoms least water on a small rocky patch, with much foul ground 
 around it. When on this patch, Portsmouth Point (the south end of 
 Smith Island) and Cape Linzee will appear touching, and bearing 
 N. 40 E. (N. 28° E. mag.); Judique church, N. 84° E. (S. 72° E. mag.) 
 34 miles, and the left or eastern termination of the highland of Cape 
 Porcupine just shut in behind Hefi'ernan Point. 
 
 Clearing Marks. — A vessel will pass to the westward of Judique 
 Bank, which is only dangerous to vessels of large draft when there is 
 a heavy rea running, by keeping Cape Linzeo shut in beliind Smith 
 Island, or the whole of the highland of Cape Porcupine open to the 
 westward of Hefternan Point. 
 
 Gut of Canso, separating Cape Breton Island from Nova Scotia and 
 forming the southern entrance to the Gulf of St. Lawrence, is described 
 in U. S. Hydrographic Publication No. 99, Bay of Fuudy, SE. coast of 
 Nova Scotia, and the SE. and east coasts of Cape Breton Island. 
 Directions only for passing through the gut will be given here. 
 
 Directions. — When bound through the Gut to the southward, the 
 distance from Cape St. George to the light at the north entrance of the 
 Gut is 20^ miles. The approach in this direction, through St. George 
 Bay, is unattended with difliculty or danger, excepting when fogs or 
 snowstorms hide from view the light which has been judiciously placed 
 at its northern entrance. The soundings are then the only guides, and 
 they will be found sufficient, in all ordinary cases, for the safety of 
 vessels prudently conducted, with their leads going. In vessels so cir- 
 cumstanced, the endeavor should be to strike soundings on the bank off 
 Long Point, and then to follow its ledge along the shore of Cape Bre- 
 ton Island, in the low-water depth of 10 fathoms, to the entrance of the 
 Gut. It is seldom so thick, especially in a breeze of wind, but that 
 some part of the shore will be seen before the vessel has run far after 
 entering so narrow a strait. With a beating wind, she should board off 
 and on the same shore, nntil soundings are struck (in the board to the 
 westward, and after crossing the deep water) on the edge of the bank 
 1151 5 
 
,1* 
 
 66 
 
 ST. GEORGE BAY. 
 
 off Cape Jack, whore, if it be night, and the fog so thick that the light 
 can not be seen, or if the tide be nearly done, it will be advisable to 
 anchor, and wait for a change. The ground there is not good, but it is 
 out of the strength of the tides, and an anchor will hold in moderate 
 weather. The anchorage ^ mile to the SE. of the lighthouse and on 
 the same side of the channel should be iireferred if attainable. There 
 are some spots of mud there in which :\n anchor holds well in 7 to 9 
 fathoms, and where the strength of the tide is not great. 
 
 Vessels outward bound, and proceeding through the Gut to the 
 southward, very frequently meet a south or SE. wind, with its usual 
 accompaniments of fog and rain., in which case the roadstead oil" Port 
 Hawkesbnry will be found the most roomy and convenient ancliorage. 
 Eddy Gove, from its more advanced position at the entrance of the Gut, 
 offers to vessels sading with the first of a fair wind, a better chance of 
 clearing Ohedabucto Bay and the Canso Ledges before dark; but it can 
 only be recommended in fine settled summer weather, for the ground is 
 not good, and the anchorage is much exposed on the occurrence of a 
 sudden 'jhange of wind. Turbalton Bay is much more secure, but it is 
 rather small for a large and weakly manned vessel to weigh from in the 
 event of a strong wind setting in suddenly from the westward. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at the north and south 
 entrances of the Gut at 9h. 15m. and 8h., respectively. Ordinary 
 springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2 feet; but extraordinary tides may r:se 6 
 or 7 feet or only 2 feet, owing to the irregular influence of unknown 
 causes— probably strong winds at a distance. The rise and fall of the 
 tides on the shore usually continue through nearly equal periods of 
 time, but the duration of the tidal streams (the flood being to the north- 
 ward and the ebb to the southward) varies from one to 4 hours after it 
 is high or low water by the shore, even in the fine weather of summer; 
 whilst in the blowing weather, so frequent on the approach of winter 
 or in early spring, they are reports to be still more iiTegular, running 
 at times in the snrae direction for several days in succession; but this 
 never occurred during the Admiralty survey. 
 
 The rate of these streams oft' Cape Porcupine, where it is most rapid, 
 is ordinarily about 4 knots, but is increased occasionally to 5 knots by 
 strong winds. At most of the anchorages, and under almost every 
 point, there are eddies, usually running in the opposite direction to the 
 mam stream outside, but at a much inferior rate, and they render great 
 attention necessary to insure a clear anchor. 
 
 The set of the flood stream from the north entrance of the Gut is 
 nearly toward Cape St. George, diminishing rapidly in strength as it 
 expands in advancing to the northward. It is weak in the western part 
 of St. George Bay, sweeping round it tc the NW., with slight indraughts 
 toward Pomquet, Antigonish, etc. The ebb stream will be found set- 
 ting in the contrary direction. 
 On the eastern side of St. George Bay the flood stream from the Gut 
 
; the light 
 /^isable to 
 I, but it is 
 moderate 
 se and on 
 e. There 
 in 7 to 9 
 
 at to the 
 
 its usual 
 d off Port 
 iicliorage. 
 f the Gut; 
 
 chance of 
 but it can 
 ground is 
 rence of a 
 B, but it is 
 'om in the 
 d. 
 and south 
 
 Ordinary 
 nay r^ae 6 
 
 unknown 
 fall of the 
 periods of 
 the north- 
 irs after it 
 f summer; 
 I of winter 
 r, running 
 i; but this 
 
 Qost rapid, 
 5 knots by 
 aost every 
 tiou to the 
 nder great 
 
 the Gut is 
 uigth as it 
 Bstern part 
 indraughts 
 found set- 
 
 tm the Gut 
 
 <«••■ 
 
 ST. GEORGE BAY. 
 
 67 
 
 is usually met by much weaker and contrary stream of flood, coming 
 from the NB., along the west coast of Cape liretou. These opj)osiiig 
 flood streams will be found, in general, to unite somewhere ofl' the 
 Judique Shoals, and then to set toward the NW. Tlie two correspond- 
 ing ebb streams generally diverge from about the same place, the one 
 setting toward the Gut, with increasing strength as it j>rocee.ds to 
 the southward, and the other in the contrary direction, toward Port 
 Hood. All, however, that has been said respecting these streams must 
 be understood as of usual, and not of constant, occurrence, since they 
 must necessarily partake of the irregularity in the strengtli and dura- 
 tion of the tidal streams of tlie Gut of Canso. , Nevertheless, it will be 
 highly useful, and may materially aid the progress of the vessel, to bear 
 in mind the usual set of these streams. 
 
 NOVA SCOTIA. 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1066.) 
 
 St. Qeorge Bay is of great extent, being 13^ miles wide at entrance, 
 between Henry Island and Cape St. George, and 20 miles deep, from 
 the same cape to the Gut of Canso. It i s traversed by all the numerous 
 vessels which pass in or out of the gulf by its southern entrance, 
 and hence its navigation assumes a more <^iian usual degree of nautical 
 importance. 
 
 Anchorage.— Half mile SE. of the lighthouse at the north entrance, 
 and on the same side of the Gut, there is tolerable anchorage in all 
 but northerly winds. Vessels frequently stop there to wait tide. 
 
 Ligbt— The lighthouse at the north entrance of the Gut of Canso is 
 a conspicuous object, standing on a bank on the western or Nova Scotia 
 shore, 120 yards within the high-water mark. It is a Sfimtre building, 
 35 feet high, and painted white. It exhibits at an elevation of 110 feci 
 a fixed white light, which can be seen in favorable weather from al> 
 the northern parts of St. George Bay about 16 miles. 
 
 Havre Bouche is a small but convenient harbor for schooners, lying 
 between Cape Jack and the lighthouse at the north entrance. It has 
 4 feet at low water in its narrow entrance between stony points^, i; ving 
 no bar outside, and 13 or 11 feet within. There is a small stream at 
 its head. The shores and neighborhood are well cultivated, and tlie 
 church will be seen near the shore and a mile to the westward of the 
 entrance, or half way toward Cape Jack. 
 
 Lights.— On the SW. shore of Havre Bouche Harbor is a square 
 white lighthouse, 32 feet high, from which, at an elevation of 30 feet, 
 is exhibited a fixed white light. 
 
 At 473 yards S. 12o W. (S. 36o W. mag.) froni the above light stands 
 a smiilar lighthouse, exhibiting from an elevation of 107 feet a hxed 
 red light. These lights should be visible 9 miles, and in line indicate 
 the dredged channel leading to the harbor. 
 
68 
 
 ST. GEORGE BAY. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and cliaiige, at Havre Bouche at about 
 9h. .'{Om., and the rise, unless increased by northerly winds, is from 4 
 to 2 feet, accordingly as it may be spring or neap tides. 
 
 Jack Shoal. — Cape .lack, a clitt" of red sandstones 45 feet high, is the 
 most prominent headland on this part of the coast. .lack Shoal runs 
 out from the cape one mile to 3 lathoms water, and 1 A miles to 5 fathoms. 
 Between the distances of ^ and '| mile off shore there are two large 
 patches of rock, whidi dry at half tide, leaving a passage carrying II 
 or 12 feet water for small craft between them and the cape. 
 
 Caution. — The .Jack Shoal has often ])roved dangerous to vessels in 
 thick weather, when it should be approached with great cautiou, espe- 
 cially from the eastward, the soundings on that side being irregular 
 and deep near the shoal, but nevertheless quite sufficient to insure 
 safety if the lead be kept going. On the outer point of the shoal, in 3 
 fathoms, the lighthouse at the north entrance of the Gut of Canso 
 bears S. 72° E. (S. 48° E. mag.) 3;^ miles. If the light can not be seen 
 the shoal should not be approached nearer than the low water depth of 
 10 fathoms. 
 
 Little Tracadie Harbor has only one foot at low water over its bar. 
 Its entiance is in the bay between Cape Blue and Barrio Head, the 
 liitler being a cliff of red sandstone 110 feet high; the former remark- 
 able from being of limestone, and sheltering the entrance from NE. 
 winds. T''e inhabitants of these small harbors, including Pomquet, 
 are Acfidians, of French extraction, who live principally by agriculture. 
 
 Tra6adie i^arbor has its narrow entrance about J mile eastward 
 of Bowman Head. It is extensive, and has 14 feet of water in some 
 parts witliin, with many coves, islets, and small streams, the prin- 
 iiipal of which, called Trac^adie Itiver, is at the head of the eastern 
 arm, 2^ miles in from the sea. The depth over its dangerous bar of 
 gravel and stone is only 2 feet at low water, in a narrow and crooked 
 channel; it therefore admits only boats or very small vessels at high 
 water. 
 
 Tracadie Village and the <!hurch are about a mile within the entrance. 
 The church is large, and can be seen from a great distance out at sea. 
 Tlie village had 440 inhabitants in LS91. 
 
 Railway. — Tracadie is connected with the Intercolonial Railway. 
 
 Pomquet Road. — PouKpiet or Bayfield Island, which is SE. by S. 
 J4| miles from Cape George, is of red sandstone, low, wooded, about 
 i mile long, and is joined by a reef to Pomquet Point, from which it is 
 distant 350 yards. The reef dries out from the point more than half 
 way over toward the ishind, and leaves a passage with only 3 or 4 feet 
 in it at low water. Shallow water runs out from tbe island nearly 800 
 yards NE., and a reef, with a large rock near the end of it, dries out 
 from its eastern shore 300 yards. 
 
 This roadstead, which is considered safe during the summer months, 
 but where the riding must be very heavy in NE. gales, is in the bay 
 
POMQUET ROAD AND HARBOR. 
 
 69 
 
 at about 
 is I'rom 4 
 
 igh,i8tlie r 
 lioal runs 
 » fatlionis. 
 two large 
 irrying H 
 
 vessels iu 
 tiou, espe- 
 l irregular 
 -, to insure 
 shoal, iu 3 
 b of Causo 
 lot be seen 
 ,er depth of 
 
 iver its bar. 
 ( Head, the 
 aer remark- 
 6 from NB. 
 g Pomquet, 
 agriculture, 
 le eastward 
 ,ter iu some 
 8, the prin- 
 the eastern 
 irons bar of 
 and crooked 
 sels at high 
 
 ;he entrance, 
 e out at sea. 
 
 Railway. 
 is SE. by S. 
 coded, about 
 ■in which it is 
 ore than half 
 ily 3 or 4 feet 
 nd nearly 800 
 it, dries out 
 
 nmer months, 
 is iu the bay 
 
 between Pomquet Point and Little River, which last admits boats only 
 at high water, and with its church and settlement will be seen to the 
 southward a long mile from the island. 
 
 Anchorage. — Vessels may anchor in any depth from 3 to 6 fathoms 
 over sandy bottom, but the best sheltered berth is in 4 fathoms at low 
 water, with the south point of the island bearing N. 7° W. (N. 17° E. 
 mag.), distant k mile. 
 
 Pomquet Road is sheltered by the island and its reefs from all points 
 excepting between north and ENE. 
 
 Light. — From a square tower, painted white, on the NE. end of Pom- 
 quet Island a fixed red light is exhibited at an elevation of 50 feet, 
 and should be seen in clear weather 9 miles. The light is obscured on 
 easterly bearings. 
 
 Directions. — To run for this anclw>rage from the northward, pass 
 the eastern shore of Pomquet f sland at the distance of i mile, or in not 
 less than 8 fathoms water, until Poniquet Point comes in sight to the 
 southward of the island, when haul to the westward into the bay. 
 
 Approaching from the eastward Bowman Bank must be avoided in a 
 vessel of large draft, either by the lead, or by not bringing the north 
 point of the island to bear to the westward of S. 43° W. (S. GG° W. 
 mag.) until the north point of the bank is passed. The bank is of great 
 ext«nt, running oft' fully 2 miles northwestward from Quarry Point and 
 Bowman Head, and has rocky patches on it, with 13, 16, and 19 feet at 
 low water, at various distances, from ^ to 1^ miles oft' shore. 
 
 Pomquet Banks lie oft' Pomquet Island to the northward, distant 
 from 3 to 6 miles. The soundings on them are rocky and irregular, the 
 least water, 6 fathoms, being on the outer and smaller of the two banks, 
 with the church at the Little River shut in behind the east side of 
 Pomquet Island, bearing S. 3° E. (S. 20° W. mag.) .5^ miles from Pom- 
 quet lighthouse. 
 
 Pomquet Harbor has its narrow entrance, at the eastern extremity 
 of a range of low sand hills and sand beach, 2h miles SE. from Monk 
 Head, and in the bay between it and lomquet Point. It is an exten- 
 sive place, branching into two principal and many smaller inlets, coves, 
 and islets. It is navigable for small craft and boats nearly 3 miles in 
 from the sea, but it is of no use to shipping, h.^ving usually only a 
 depth of 2 feet at low water over its shifting bar of sand. The prin- 
 cipal settlements and the church are on the western shore of the NW. 
 arm, and the Indians have a chapel and a reservation of land on the 
 eastern and larger branch, at the head of Avhich is Pomquet River, a 
 small stream (I860). 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Pomquet Harbor at 9h. 
 15m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2^ feet. 
 
 Monk Head is a clift' of gypsum 45 feet high, 2^ miles from the 
 entrance of A ntigonish Harbor. A rocky bank, with 3 fathoms least 
 water, extends off" it .^ mile to the eastward, and there are no mere than 
 4^ fathoms at double that distance from shore. 
 
70 
 
 ST. GEORGE BAY. 
 
 H 
 
 Antigonish Harbor, at 2^ miles westward of Monk Head, is nearly 
 200 yards wide at the entrance, between low points of sand, from which 
 a dangerous bar extends to the distance of ^ mile. The bar and the 
 deep water up the ha-^or are marked by spar buoys on either side 
 (1871). The bar has a depth of 6 feet at low water, but both the depth 
 and direction of the very narrow channel are said to change occasion- 
 ally. The anchorage off the bar (rock) is not good, and would be quite 
 unsafe in a gale from the NE. 
 
 The harbor is of great extent, running in 6 or 7 miles to the SW., 
 the channel, between flats of mud and weeds, having in some places 
 6 or () tailioins water. There are flourishing farms on either side. 
 
 Ant;-3oni8h, containing two churches, stands at the head of the 
 westc arm, distant 6^ miles from the entrance. In 1891 Autigionish 
 Di*ist'>;i contained 6,331 people. Gypsum abounds here, forming, 
 trjvli luiiioer and the produce of an increasing agriculture, the cargoes 
 of r.w s" Doners which frequent the harbor. 
 
 Tiie United States is represented by a consular agent. 
 
 TiACi;.-- Tt is high water, full and change, in the entrance of Antig- 
 onish M: J bor at about 9h.; ordinary springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2 feet. 
 Northerly winds cause high tides and southerly winds tlu? contrary. 
 The rate of the tides in the entrance seldom exceeds 2 knots, unless it 
 may be in spring, after the melting of the winter's snow. 
 
 Maclsaac Rock, with 9 feet least water, is the center of a small 
 detached shoal, distant nearly GOO yards from the shore, between 
 Maclsaac Point and a remarkable patch of white gypsum olift". This 
 rock, which is the only danger on the west side of St. George Bay, bears 
 from the gypsum patch N. 49^ E. (N. 72° E. mag.) § mile; it is 2$ mites 
 northward of the entrance of Antigonish, and is shown occasionally by 
 heavy breakers. 
 
 Cape St. George, the NW. point of St. George Bay, is a bold Kv.id 
 precipitous headland, composed principally of slate, conglomerate, and 
 trap rocks, attainuig the elevation of 600 feet above the sea. The 
 shallow water does not extend off it beyond ^ mile, but as th«^ro is a 
 depth of 20 fathoms at double that distance, the lead affords but little 
 warning, and it should therefc ' be f^ ;. reached with caution in thick 
 weather. A phurch has been biii: L westward of the lighthouse, forming 
 a useful landmark. Off Ballaii viie Cove, on tlio astern side of the 
 cape, there is an anchorage iu >, esterly winds, but the ground is not 
 very good. 
 
 Light. — From a square lighthouse, 39 feet high, painted white, on 
 the north side of Cape St. George, is exhibited, at an elevation of 
 350 feet, a revolving whit« light, attaining its greatest brilliancy every 
 thirty seconds, visible in clear weather 25 miles. The light is said not to 
 be seen when bearing to the eastward of S. 68° B. (S. 45° E. mag.) 
 
 Tides. — It is high svater, full and change, at Cape St. George at 9h. 
 15m. ; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2 t'eet. 
 
 fiCK 
 
 diffil 
 his 
 the 
 the 
 
 is b»j 
 extij 
 uinJ 
 chaj 
 20(1 
 
 giiitj 
 
 tirf>;t| 
 
 pasf 
 
 Islal 
 
 Suvl 
 
 butf 
 
 OldJ 
 
 an 
 
« 
 
 is nearly 
 )ni which 
 : and the 
 ther side 
 the depth 
 occasion- 
 l be quite 
 
 the SW., 
 ne places 
 side. 
 
 ad of the 
 
 .utigoniah 
 
 forming, 
 
 [le cargoes 
 
 I of Autig- 
 aps 2 feet, 
 i contrary. 
 i, unless it 
 
 of a small 
 5, between 
 cliff. This 
 . Bay, bears 
 is 24 mites 
 tsionally by 
 
 a bold tv.^.d 
 aierate, and 
 3 sea. The 
 18 there is a 
 ds but little 
 ion in thick 
 use, forming 
 side of the 
 round is not 
 
 ad white, on 
 elevation of 
 lliancy every 
 is said not to 
 B. mag.) 
 jeorge at 9h. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT, SOUTH AND WEST SHORES— CAPE ST. 
 GEORGE TO MIRAMICHI BAY. 
 
 NOVA SCOTIA. 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1066.) 
 
 The Coast from Oape St. George to Merigomish Harbor, 27 miles 
 SW., is bold and free from danger. The land, rising from the sea to 
 the summit of a ridge 2 or 3 miles in rear of and parallel to the coast 
 line, is well settled, the cultivation extending occasionally to the sum- 
 mit of the ridge, which attains the extreme elevation of 1,100 feet 
 above the sea. 
 
 Malignant Bay has a small stream at its head, affording good land- 
 ing for boats, and will be known by the Sugar Loaf Hill, a mile in rear 
 of it, and 680 feet above the sea. 
 
 There is no harbor in this distance, the wooden pier at the village of 
 Arisaig affording shelter only to boats and shallops in easterly winds, 
 but none in winds from between north and west. 
 
 The remarkable rock called Frenchman Barn lies nearly a mile 
 eastward of this pier and ^ mile NE. from Arisaig church, which last 
 is 14 miles from the entrance of Merigomish. 
 
 Merigomish Harbor has 14 feet at low water over 'ts bar, and suf- 
 ficient depth within for vessels of large draft; but it is so inLiicate and 
 difficult of entrance that no directions would enable a stranger to take 
 his ship in safely, and the northerly winds send in so heavy a sea over 
 the bar that to get on shore going in would probably be attended with 
 the loss of the vessel. The outer entrance of the harbor ('| mile wide) 
 is between Merigomish Point and King Head, the former being the west 
 extreme of Merigomish Island. Tlie bar is formed by rocky shoals ruu- 
 uing- out from these points of entrance, ^ mile to the northward. The 
 channel over the bar, and leading in from it between the shoala, is over 
 20(1 yards wide ; but tae shoiils are so steep that the lead affords little 
 guidance, and there are no leading marks. The course running iu is at 
 first to the southward, and then by a sharp turn to the ivtstward close 
 past Savage Point (the sandy spit at the SW. extreme of Merigomish 
 Island) into the harbor. This inner entrance of the harboi, i^etween 
 Savage Point and the east end of Oldiug Island, is about ^ mile w ide; 
 but the navigable breadth is redu'-^d to 100 yards by the shoal off 
 Olding Island, and the tides freqjiently run there at the rate of 5 miles 
 an hour. 
 
 n 
 
72 
 
 NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT — SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 ■ ''4 
 
 This harbor is seldom visited by anything larger than a coasting 
 schooner. The pilots are therefore incompettilit from want of practice, 
 and the channel is no longer buoyed as it used to be. The harbor is 
 of great extent, running in 5 or G miles to tlm eastward, within Merigo- 
 niish Island and the sand bar which joins it to the mainland, and also 
 
 4 miles to the westward, up a bay full of islands, coves, and precipitous 
 headlands. Several small streams enter the harbor, of wliich French 
 Jiiver, opposite the east end of Oiding Island, is the principal. It is 
 approached by a very narrow channel, through tlats of mud nnd weeds, 
 and can be ascended by boats to the bridge, about a mile within its 
 entrance. 
 
 Merigomish Island, 3^ miles long and 1^ miles broad, is of clay and 
 sandstone, belonging to the coal Ibrniation, rising to the lieight of 150 
 feet above the sea. Thin seams of coal may be seen at Coal Point, 
 where the cliffs, which form the northern shore of the island, are 35 
 feet high. Its southern shore is broken into coves, clifty islets, and 
 peninsulated points similarly to the western jiart of the harbor. A 
 sand bar 2.^ miles long iinitcs the island and mainland to the eastward, 
 excepting in unusually high tides, when the water washes over one 
 part of it into the harbor. 
 
 Merigomish is 9^ miles by rail from New Glasgow, Shipbuilding is 
 cariied on. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Betty Point, in Merigo- 
 mish Harbor, at lOh. Cm.; springs rise 5,^ feet, neaps 3J feet; but the 
 diurnal inequality is strongly marked here, as well as at Pictou, caus- 
 ing a considerable difterence in the times and the heights of the two 
 iides on the same day. 
 
 Little Harbor. — In the shoal bay between Colquhoun and Evans 
 Points, which are distant 0^ **"♦! *'' Jniles, respectively, from the light- 
 house in Pictou Harbor, are two narrow, dangerous, and intricate 
 channels, leading through shoals into Little Harbor. Of these chan- 
 nels, tlie eastern and uest turns sharp in to tlie eastward, within Roy 
 Island, and close round the sandy spit at its SW. extreme. The other 
 has only a foot or two of water, and leads into the western part of Mie 
 harbor, which is several miles in extent, and broken into bays, coves, 
 and picturesque points, but only lit for boats, being nearly all dry at 
 low water, excepting the intricate and narrow channels. 
 
 Roy Ledge, a small rocky shoal, with 9 feet least water, lies off the 
 north shore of Roy Island at the distance of 700 yards and ^ mile 
 N. 73^ W. (N. 50^ W. mag.) from Colquhoun Point. Theve is also a 
 reef of sandstone, in great part dry at low water, running out from 
 Colquhoun Point ^ mile to the eastward j c.nd as all these dangers have 
 
 5 fathoms water close to them, vessels should be careful not to stand 
 into less than G fathoms along this part of the coast. 
 
 Roy Island is united at its east end to the mainland by a long and 
 narrow sand bar, stretching to the SE. across the east end of Little 
 Harbor to within ij mile of King Head. 
 
% 
 
 PICTOU HARBOR. 
 
 m 
 
 coasting 
 jractice, 
 arbor is 
 Merigo- 
 aud also 
 licipitous 
 1 French 
 al. It is 
 1(1 weeds, 
 ritbiu its 
 
 ' clay and 
 ht of 150 
 )al Point, 
 id, are 35 
 slets, and 
 irbor. A 
 eastward, 
 over one 
 
 luilding is 
 
 in Merigo- 
 b; but the 
 •ton, caus- 
 3f the two 
 
 ind Evans 
 the light- 
 L intricate 
 liese chan- 
 vithiu Roy 
 Tlie other 
 part (/f the 
 lays, coves, 
 r all dry at 
 
 lies off the 
 and I mile 
 e is also a 
 g out from 
 augers have 
 tot to stand 
 
 a long and 
 id of Little 
 
 Roaring Bull, dist;;nt 4 miles eastward of the lightliouse In Pictou 
 Harbor, is the cliffy north point (with a remarkable red patch on it) of 
 a small peninsula, united to the mainland at its western end by a sandy 
 beach, and having at the other extremity the gully or entrance to 
 Chance Harbor, dry, or nearly so, at low water. A reef of sandstone 
 runs out NE. from the Roaring Bull, 600 yards to the 3-fathom line of 
 soundings. 
 
 Pictou Harbor, in every respect the linest on the southern shore of 
 the gulf, derives additional importance from the coal mines, valmible 
 quarriea of building stone, and finely settled country in its neighbor- 
 hood. It is at the bottom of a bay, which is Ij^ miles wide at its entrance, 
 from Mackenzie Head to Logan Point, and IJ miles deep. Mackenzie 
 Head will be recognized by its sharp-pointed cliff of clay and sandstone, 
 40 feet high, with a small white house on the edge, and by its bearing 
 S. 23° W. (south mag.) from Logan Point. 
 
 Opposite the town the harbor expands into three large arms, at the 
 heads of which are the East, Middle, and West Rivers. The channels 
 of the last two are seldom used, excepting by boats or very small craft, 
 unless it be to bring down newly built vessels, when they are staked 
 for the purpose. They may be navigated without much difficulty for 2 
 or 3 miles above their confluence; but higher up they become divided 
 into (Several narrow channels, often obstructed by oyster beds, and 
 winding through extensive flats of mud and weeds, which render land- 
 ing difficult at low water. 
 
 The shores of the West Arm are well settled all the way to the head 
 of the tide, 5 miles from Pictou, and the post road to Truro and Halifax 
 passes along the northern shore. Several of the hills to the westward 
 of this arm are of considerable height. Rogers Hill, 5 miles from Pictou, 
 is 546 feet, and Dalhousie Mountain, 3 miles farther SW., the highest 
 point of which is 950 feet above the sea at high water. West River, 
 above the tide water, is a considerable stream, although shallow and 
 rapid. It winds its way through a beautiful and wdlcultivated valley, 
 containing a large population. 
 
 Middle Arm runs in 5J miles from Pictou to the SSW., at which dis- 
 tance the tide ends, and the river is rapid and fordable at low water. 
 
 East Arm is navigable by vessels for 2^ miles from Pictou, to the 
 coal-loading place, or railway terminus from the Albion Mines. Its 
 chanu«l, which Joins the harbor directly opposite Pictou, is of the aver- 
 age breadth of 180 yards, and marked out by spruce-bush stakes driven 
 into the mud flats at intervals on either side. Half a mile below the 
 loading plac4? a bar of hard ground with 12 feet at low water crosses 
 the channel; 3ud therefore vessels must not be laden to draw more than 
 15 feet neap <nd 18 feet ia spring tides. At a short distance above 
 the loH^Jiug place the ohannel is so divided and obstructed by old oyster 
 beds that it is difficult to carry the depth of 3 or 4 feet through at low- 
 water, and similar obstnictioiis occur several times up to the bridge at 
 New Glasgow, 6^ miles from Pictou. 
 
74 
 
 NORTHUMBKKLAND gTRAlT SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 i -^ \r' 
 
 t. 
 
 i 1 
 
 New Glasgow i» a huge town on the east side of Ea^t Arm, owing 
 its existence to the coal mines which are about 2 miles higher up ar*! 
 to which boats can ascend with the tide. New vessels of considerable 
 burden are built at the town and are taken down the river when light 
 with the assistance of tlui tide. 
 
 Pictou stands on the north shore of the harbor, 2 miles witliin the 
 lighthouse, on tlie declivity of a ridge, v 1ii<h rises to the height of 2(M» 
 feet above the s<'ii, at a short distance in rear of the town. A spur trom 
 this ridfi'e forms Battery Point, which shelters the place from the NE. 
 winds. On Town Toint has been built the customhouse, a new brick 
 buildiii" faced with stone, aiid having a squ ue tower at its south 
 extreme The uiost conspicuous of ihe new public buildings is tbo 
 Roman (Jatholic chmch, a red-brick edifice with a spire, near the sum- 
 mit of an eminence to the eastward of the town ; the convent, a large, 
 square brick house, stands near this church. The academy is a square 
 building of brick, surmounted by a small pinnacle, and on the summit 
 of the hill over the town. The shore margin of the town has been 
 improved by the erection of new wharves. 
 
 A little more than ^ mile west of the lighthouse and on the same 
 shore are three coaling wharves, alongside which large steamers are 
 loaded with great dispatch, and farther westward is the railway 
 wharf, at that terminus of the International Railway, known as Pictou 
 Land in cr. 
 
 From this wluirf a sveam ferryboat plies at alternate hours to and 
 from Pictou. 
 
 The United States is represented by a consular agent. 
 
 Port Charges. — Entrance fee, from 25 cents to $2.50. Tonnage tax, 
 in, 2 cents per ton; out, ih cents per ton. Port dues, 1^ cents per ton. 
 Wharfage, $2 per day. Berthing dues, $4. Shifting rates, $5. Tow- 
 age, 3 cents a ton; not necessary. Tugs are available and of sufficient 
 size and power. Vessels in distress or in ballast are not relieved from 
 dues; those calling for orders are. 
 
 Health dues are ? cents per ton. Bill of health, $1. There are no 
 quarantine or hospital fees. 
 
 Pilotage is compulsory. The rate for vessels in is 2 J cents per ton 
 for vessels of 1,000 tons and upward. For smaller vessels it goes by 
 "lump sum." The rate out is 2 cents per ton for size named above. 
 Rates are the same whether with cargo or in ballast. Detention rates, 
 $3 per day. Pilot rates for moving in port, $4. 
 
 Pilots. — The branch pilots of Pictou are, for the most part, able and 
 experienced men, and are always on the lookout for vessels. 
 
 Supplies. — Fresh meat plentiful and cheap; water plentiful and 
 good; cost, $5 per 1,000 gallons; put on board by water boat. 
 
 Coal may be obtained at the Acadia Company's wharf; the facilities 
 for coaling are such that 150 tons an hour have been put on board 
 colliers. Vessels go alongside head upstream, and secure to spar buoys 
 one on each bow and another on the starboard quarter. 
 
tn, owing 
 T up ar»l 
 siderftblP 
 ben light 
 
 itl»iu tlie 
 rht of 200 
 spur troiii 
 1 tbe NE. 
 aew brick 
 its south 
 gs is tlio 
 
 the sum- 
 t, a large, 
 i a square 
 16 summit 
 
 has been 
 
 tbe same 
 ainers are 
 e railway 
 
 as Pictou 
 
 irs to and 
 
 nnags tax, 
 its per ton. 
 $5. Tow- 
 f sufficient 
 ieved from 
 
 lere are no 
 
 its per ton 
 it goes by 
 ued above, 
 tttlon rates, 
 
 rt, able and 
 
 Bntiful and 
 
 it. 
 
 he facilities 
 
 it on board 
 
 1 spar buoys 
 
 PICTOL- HARMOR. 
 
 75 
 
 From 1,000 to 2,000 tons can be supplied immediately; heavy draft 
 vessels unable to cross the bar can bo coaled outside by li^jhtcrs. 
 
 The trade in coal has greatly developed, the harbor is geiieriilly 
 crowded with shipping, and there are several coaling stations in cuch 
 of the three rivers. 
 
 Cost, trimmed in bunkers, $2.r)0 per ton. 
 
 Quarantine and Hospital. — Pictou is a minor quarantine station 
 and has a hospital for mariners. 
 
 Repairs.— A marine railway with two cradles — largest ' tons, 
 
 smallest 800 tons. Charges, first day, ir> cents per ton; sue* > mydays, 
 half rates. Divers may be obtained ; charges, $3 per da,\ 
 
 Telegraph. — Pictou is in telegraphic communication wii ' s of 
 
 Canada and the United States. It is connected with Halitax, , ^. Juiin,' 
 and Quebec by the Intercolonial Railway; also with Poit ilawkesbury 
 in the Gut of Canso. Passenger steamers ran to all parts of the gulf. 
 
 Mackenzie Shoal is a rocky bank nearly ^ mile in diameter, with 
 16 feet least water, and with 12 or 20 feet between it and the shallow 
 water to the westward. Vessels of large draft should not attempt to 
 pass within or to the southward and westward of it. Caribou and 
 Doctor Points in one, bearing N. 41° W. (N. 18° W. mag.) will lead 200 
 yards northeastward of the shoal, and the tower of the customhouse 
 in line with the north extreme of the lighthouse embankment bearing 
 S. 69° W. (N. 88° W. mag.) will lead to the northward. 
 
 Entrance. — The shallow water extends a long J mile northward 
 from Mackenzie Head, and its edge, in 3 fathoms, trends thence west- 
 ward toward the lighthouse, the whole bay on that side being shoal, 
 with ridges of sand drying out to a considerable distance ft-om the 
 shore at low water. In the bay between Mackenzie Head and the 
 lighthouse, and on the west side of Powell Point, is Boat Harbor, the 
 entrance of an extensive inlet or lake, full of mud and weeds, and 
 which boats can traverse only when the tide is in. On the opposite or 
 northern side reefs extend off Logan Point east and SE., a long ^ mile 
 to the 3-fathom line of soundings. 
 
 Cole Point, which is of clay and sandstone cliff 3a feet high, and 
 lies a short mile farther in or south of Logan Point, has also a reef 
 stretching out eastward J mile, and the shallow water continues from 
 It southwestward to the commencement of Loudon Beach on the north 
 side of the entrance of the harbor. 
 
 Pictou Bar and Road.— The distance across the harbor's mouth 
 from the lighthouse, on the sandy pit, to Loudon Beach is about 
 400 yards, and the greatest depth is 7 fathoms water; but the channel 
 over the bar is much narrower, and has besides a turn in it, which, 
 together with the necessity of knowing exactly the set of the tides, 
 renders a pilot indispensable in a large ship. After passing the bar 
 the depth will increase to 5, 0, and 7 fathoms, sand. 
 
 Anchorage.— There is good anchorage, although exposed t^ NE. 
 winds, in Pictou Boad, where the depth is 5 fathoms, clay and mud 
 
''S. 
 
 76 
 
 NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 ' i 
 
 ^J 
 
 i .J 
 
 bott«im. \'«8sels running or beating up to tluH road at night will find 
 tliu 8(mndin<;8 in the chart Hiitticient gui(lan<;e, when kee])ing the south- 
 ern shore aboard with the prevailing 8W. winds; and on the o])posite 
 side or with northerly winds will have the advantage of the tbllowing 
 excellent leading nuirka: The light on Lighthouse Point can be seen in 
 a'clear night from a distance of about 11 miles, and when in one with 
 Cole I'oint bearing S. 40° W. (8. «»!P W. mag.) lea<l.s a long A mile to the 
 eastward of the reef otl" the east end of Pictou Island, and also clears the 
 southern extremity of the Pictou Island Bank in ofathoms, therefore, if 
 beating, tack in the board to the northward the instant the light begins 
 to disappear behind Cole Point; and if running, keep the lightjust open 
 to the southward of Cole Point until soundings are struck in the low- 
 water depth at 5 fathoms, on the edge of the bank off Logan Point; 
 then follow the same depth about li miles to the 8W., taking care not 
 to bring the light to bear to the northward of S. G!)^ W. (N. 88° W. 
 mag.), and the vessel will be in safe anchorage in the road, where she 
 may wait for daylight, or a pilot, act^ordiug to circumstances. Although 
 19 feet at low water, in ordinary spring tides, can be carried over the 
 bar, yet the aid of an able and experienced pilot would be re(iuired to 
 insure that depth. 
 
 Lights — South Entrance Point. — The lighthouse, standing close to 
 the water at the extremity of the f >)t forming the south side of the 
 entrance to Pictou Uarbor, is au octa^" al 1 i l<liug, 50 feet high, painted 
 vertically with red and white stripes and exhibits at au elevation of 05 
 feet a fixed white light, which '^^'h aid be visible 11 miles. A small 
 fixed red light is shown 25 feet L. oiow the white light, to clear the reefs 
 off Pictou Island. 
 
 Customhouse. — From the highest window in the tower of the cus- 
 tomhouse is exhibited, at an elevation of 00 feet, a fixed white (gas) 
 light, which should be visible 8 miles. The masts of vessels moored in 
 Pictou Harbor occasionally obscure this light from seaward. 
 
 These lights in line bearing S. 09° W (N. 88° W. mag.) lead through 
 the channel seaward of the bar. 
 
 Fraser Farm. — Two leading lights are established on the north side 
 of the entrance to Pictou Harbor, which are exhibited throughout the 
 season of navigation, and during the winter whenever steamers are 
 running into the harbor. 
 
 The lights are fixed red lights, visible through a small arc on each 
 side of their line of direction from a distance of 8 miles. 
 
 The towers are square buildings, surmounted by square lanterns, the 
 whole painted white. The rear light is 384 feet N. 83° W. (N. 00° W. 
 mag.) from the front light, and the range shows the direction of the 
 channel between the sand spit off Pictou Bar on the south and Murdoch 
 Shoal on the north. 
 
 Buoys. — A black buoy, marked 1, is moored in 14^ feet at low water 
 near tjhe north extreme of the bank eastward of the lighthouse on 
 Lighthouse Point. , ' 
 
 -.:S^^i'^iMi^iiiii^M^^M^iM^, 
 
w 
 
 lit will find 
 jj the soutli- 
 lie oi)i)Osite 
 iio following 
 n bo seen iu 
 in one with 
 h mile to the 
 so I'luai'S the 
 , therefore, if 
 light begins 
 ;i;ht. just open 
 
 I in the low- 
 ogan I'oint; 
 ing care not 
 . (N. 88° W. 
 il, where she 
 i. Although 
 ried over the 
 B recjuired to 
 
 id ing close to 
 
 II side of the 
 high, painted 
 levation of 65 
 en. A small 
 ilear the reefs 
 
 er of the cus- 
 i white (gas) 
 sels moored in 
 ird. 
 
 I lead through 
 <) '- 
 
 the north side 
 
 iroughout the 
 
 steamers are 
 
 II arc on each 
 
 e lanterns, the 
 W. (N. 60° W. 
 irection of the 
 a and Murdoch 
 
 ;t at low water 
 lighthouse on 
 
 I' 
 
 ~^mmim:s>sm^^ss^sm^s!^s^sm^is&gmf^^s^ss^^!^^^m'^^^i'^:^^^' 
 
^ 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 v^,^' 
 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 ■^ Kii |2.2 
 
 !^ 1^ 12.0 
 
 lit 
 
 HiotDgraphic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 iiafS,^ 
 
*,. 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICIVIH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical IVHcroraproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
 M.'ff*-^'««B(aaR3(^wi|i(w«,^^ 
 
(S 
 E, 
 
 01 
 
 ai 
 
 P< 
 14 
 
 1,' 
 of 
 
 of 
 9 
 lee 
 dr 
 
 dn 
 an 
 
 thi 
 lin 
 br( 
 be 
 W 
 ] 
 boi 
 hai 
 aiii 
 tio 
 an( 
 
 r 
 
 Ha 
 
 is ; 
 
 rec 
 
 of 
 
 tid 
 
 the 
 
PICTOU HARBOR. ^^ 
 
 A red spar bxioy in 12 feet water lies X. 7.3o w, (X. 50° W. mag.) 1^ 
 miles iTom Mackenzie Head. During the strength of the ebb this buoy 
 almost disappears, and is difficult to see. 
 
 A red buoy, marked 1, in 13 feet water, lies N. 84° E. (S. 73° E. mag.) 
 from Cole I'oiiit, J mile from the high-water line. 
 
 A red buoy, marked Macdonald liecf, lies in 23 feet water S. 76° B. 
 (S. 53° E. mag.) 930 yards from Logan Point. 
 
 A red buoy, marked SMnner Beef, lies in 4 fathoms IST. 50° E. (N. 73o 
 E. mag.) l,GfiO yards from Doctor Point. 
 
 A black can buoy is placed on the east side of entrance to East River 
 on the edge of the bank. 
 
 A black can buoy marks the point of the spit at the junction of West 
 and Middle Eivers. 
 
 A red spar buoy is placed on the edge of the bank SW. of Town 
 Point, to mark the port side of entrance to a channel 50 feet wide with 
 14 feet least water. 
 
 The direction of this channel is N. 63° W. (N. 40° W. mag.) for about 
 1,200 feet, to a pier built out 400 feet from the shore. 
 
 These buoys are laid down in the spring and removed in the autumn 
 of each year. 
 
 Ice.— The harbor is usually frozen over about December 26, and clear 
 of ice about April 18, being completely closed between about January 
 9 and April 3. The first vessel arrives about April 20 and the last 
 leaves about December 21. A small quantity of field ice occasionally 
 drifts in after the harbor has opened. 
 
 Directions. — A pilot would be indispensable in a vessel of large 
 draft with beating winds, and even smaller vessels must xnow the tides 
 and the place well to beat in or out with safety. 
 
 To enter Pictou Harbor, having a fair wind and being farther out 
 than Mackenzie Shoal, keep Pictou Bar and the customhouse lights in 
 line bearing S. 69° W. (N. 88o W. mag.) until Frazer Farm lights are 
 brought in line bearing N. 83° W. (N. 60° W. mag.), which should then 
 be steered for until Pictou Bar light is nearly abeam, whence a S. 62° 
 W. (S. 85° W. mag.) course will lead to the anchorage off Pictou. 
 
 Prom the lighthouse to the usual anchorage, in 6 or 7 fathoms, mud 
 bottom, off the easternmost wharves at Pictou, the channel of the 
 harbor is direct, nearly J mile wide, deep enough for the largest ships, 
 and clear of danger. The chart will therefore afford all further informa- 
 tion that may be necessary, for the vessel will be in safety, and may 
 anchor as convenient within Lighthouse Point. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at the entrance of Pictou 
 Harbor at loh.; springs rise 6 feet, neaps 4 feet. With a good tide it 
 is possible to carry 2d feet over the bar, and 23 feet may generally be 
 reckoned upon. The harbor, therefore, is capable of admitting vessels 
 of large draft, but it must be remembered that the best of the two 
 tides is always spoken of in the 24 hours, for the diurnal inequality in 
 the rise of the tides, which occurs more or Iwss in all parts of North- 
 
78 NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT— SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 umberland Btrait, Is very strongly marked in this harbor. " .nay^^«« 
 bHdded that in the month of August, when these observations ^eie 
 ^ade the a'm. tides were always the highest, ^f ^^^^/^J^^/^^^^; 
 Ta St of the moon with north declination in the flrst part o th bu.a- 
 tion and the superior transit with south declination m the latte part 
 U is high water, full and change, at ^^ew Glasgow Bridge at 12h.; 
 
 ^^:Z:tl^:^'^^^- -<! WNW. and IJ miles wide, 
 is of Xy and tndstone, rising in the central parts to the extreme 
 heilt of 150 feet above the sea. It is wooded on the northern side, 
 SlLre are settl ..aents and farms along its southern shore. Low 
 ^^Zu^lo.Uu.e, with the exception of several smal bays and 
 tger Point, on the siuth side, which is of sand, and attords the best 
 
 '' Wesf Pointy be passed in 3 fathoms water within ^ mile; but 
 on either side oT the west end of the island there are rock, nearly dry 
 
 T e southern shore maybe approached to 5 fathoms; but ^^ I'^^« J^^^* 
 
 "'nl^rtea Sho'r-In*mo»t of tLe old charts a ,b„a. i, laid down 
 ab^^f^Uef^tlard of PWoa Island, but no indications of .ts 
 
 PTfiatfiuce were discovered during the survey ot ims. 
 Lter-^rherightLouse,on tLe SE.pointof Picto^ 
 
 tower32 feet hi|h, painted white, and exhibits at jjlevati^ of 52 
 fPPt a fixed white light, which ^l.d be visible 12 miles. 
 
 Cautn -Whe,;8tanding t. eastward through Northumberland 
 StraU remember that Pictou i... ad light does not open out uptU it 
 beirs S Too W (S. 39o W. mag.) ; also the light on Cape St. George is 
 not seen to the eastward of S. G8o E. (S. 45° E. i"ag.) 
 
 Lifeboat.-A lifeboat is stationed near the lighthouse on P.ctou 
 
 ^'plctou Island Bank extends from Pictou Island to the we^t and 
 so!S mUef It is of irregular outline, of great extent a.do sand^ 
 stone thinly covered with sand, gravel, mud, and b«-oken shell The 
 depths are as irregular as the nature of the bottom, being from 2| to 6 
 fathoms, excepting on the Middle Shoals 
 
 The Middle Shoals are a chain of rocky patches, with 11 fact least 
 water s^ etching across the northern part of the bank li miles m a 
 ru'hwest^rly direction, so as to approach within | mile of the Caribou 
 
ORE. 
 
 •bor. It may also 
 observations were 
 wing the inferior 
 t part of the lima- 
 in the latter part. 
 V Bridge at 12h. ; 
 
 uul li miles wide, 
 ts to the extreme 
 ;he northern side, 
 ;hern shore. Low 
 al snmll bays and 
 id affords the best 
 
 within i mile; but 
 e rocks, nearly dry 
 ling to the distance 
 accasionally to the 
 iiich should not be 
 s in the nighttime. 
 ; but at East Point 
 ans out J mile to 3 
 'here are 9 fathoms 
 istward. It should 
 i, but especially at 
 
 shoal is laid down 
 indications of its 
 
 3. 
 
 itt Island, is a square 
 
 b an elevation of 52 
 
 miles. 
 
 igh Northumberland 
 
 ot open out until it 
 
 a Cape St. George is 
 
 ghthouse on Pictou 
 
 and to the west and 
 
 extent, and of sand- 
 
 L broken shell. The 
 
 m, being from 2| to 6 
 
 es, with 11 foet least 
 ebank IJ miles in a 
 ^ mile of the Caribou 
 
 CARIBOU HARBOR. ' 
 
 Channel, on tlie one hand, and within IJ miles of the west point of Pic- 
 tou Island on the otlier. There is but little doubt that at least .'JJ 
 fatlioms at low water can be carried through between these shoals 
 and Pictou Island, although the irregular soundings forbid absolute 
 certainty. Koger Point and West Point (Pictou Island), bearing east 
 (S. (MO E. mag.), will lead close to the northward of them in 4 fathoms, 
 but large ships had better not approach tiiem on that side nearer than 
 7 fathoms. 
 
 Buoy.— A red buoy is moored near the 11-foot patcij on the Middle 
 Shoal. 
 
 Caribou Harbor, between Doctor and Caribou Islands and the main- 
 land, is an extensive place, being (J luiles long from the southern 
 entrance to the West Gully, and in some parts a mile wide. The 
 whole of this large space is occupied by shallow water, excepting the 
 narrow channel of the harbor, which is deep enough for vessels of far 
 larger draft than can pass the bar, but does not run through, being lost 
 in mud flats at the distance of 3^ miles from the southern entrance. 
 The West Gully is dry at low water; about a mile within it Caribou 
 River enters the harbor, and is navigable tor boats to the distance of 
 2 or 3 miles. There are settlements and farms along the southern shore 
 of the harbor, also upon the inner side of the islands, and a road from 
 the former to Pictou. 
 
 The vessel entrance to this harbor between Widow Point and Doctor 
 Spit is only 120 yards -vide, and the navigable breadth is reduced by 
 the shallow water off Widow Point to 80 yards. The depth is here 5 
 fathoms, but an abrupt turn and a tide of 4 knots render so nairow a 
 channel extremely difficult. Outside the entrance the channel between 
 the shoals becomes wider, and the depth diminishes gradually out to 
 the bar at the distance of a mile, and over which only 9 feet can be 
 carried at low water. The great superiority of the neighboring harbor 
 of Pictou renders it in the highest degree unlikely that this harbor 
 will ever be much frequented by shipping; and its bar and entrance 
 are too difficult and dangerous to be attempted without some special 
 object, and then a pilot should be employed. Widow Point, the south 
 or mainland point of entrance of the harbor, is of sand and shingle, 
 and Oak Tree Point, a steep clay bank, with a house and barn upon it| 
 IS the first point of the mainland within the entrance, from which it is 
 distant ^ mile. 
 
 Light— The lighthouse on the NE. part of Caribou or Gull Island is 
 square, 26 feet high, painted white, and exhibits at an elevation of 35 
 feet a revolving white light every minute, which should be visible 10 
 miles. 
 
 Directions.— To enter Caribou Harbor— having a fair wind, and 
 being in not less than 5 fathoms water— bring the high-water extremes of 
 Widow and Oak Tree Points in one bearing N. 89° W. (N. 66° W. mag.), 
 and run toward them till the vessel has passed the bar in the low- water 
 
80 
 
 NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT — SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 depth of 9 feet and lias deepened to 13 or 14 feet; then lookout when 
 Caribou and Doctor Points come in one, bearing N. 36° W. (X. 13° \V. 
 mag.)» when sheer immediately to the northward sufficiently to bring 
 Oak Tree Point and Doctor Spit in one, bearing S. 85° W. (X. 72'^ W 
 mag.). Keep the last-named marks accurately in one, or closely touch- 
 ing, until the vessel is not more tiiau 60 yards from the end of the spit, 
 when sheer to the SW. so as to pass its south extreme at the same 
 distance into the harbor. The channel for the first ^ mile in from the 
 entrance is not more than 180 yards wide, the tide is stronger there, 
 and the bottom not quite so good as farther in, where the channel 
 expands to 260 yards in width, with a depth,of from 4 to 7 fathoms over 
 mud bottom. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Caribou Harbor at 10 h., 
 the diurnal inequality causing at times a ditterence of nearly 2 hours 
 in the two tides of the same day, and also 2 feet in the height of the 
 water. The rise of the highest of the two ordinary spring tides of the 
 same day is 6 feet, and of neap tides 4 feet; there are, therefore, 15 
 feet over the bar at high-water ordinary springs.- 
 
 Ca/ibou Channel, between the Caribou Keef and the Picton Island 
 Bank, has sufficient depth for vessels of large draft, and in breadth, at 
 the narrowest part, exceeds ^ or ^ mile, according as it is conceived to be 
 bounded on either side by the 3-tathom or the 5-fathom line; but it is 
 nevertheless difficult, because so crooked that no marks can lead through 
 its whole extent. 
 
 The safest mode of running through this channel to the westward is 
 to strike soundings in or 7 fathoms on the edge of the shoal water off 
 Doctor Island, and follow it to the NW. until McKenzie Head is just 
 shut in behind Logan Point, bearing S. 17° E. (S. 6° W. mag.); then 
 steer from those marks, keeping the head just shut in, and they will 
 lead across the deep water, and afterwards along the western edge of 
 the Pictou Island Bank out to sea. If the wind were strong from the 
 SW. with an ebb tide, it would be preferable to keep on the weather 
 side of the channel, in which case the edge of the shoal water off Doc- 
 tor Island should be followed farther to the NW., until Logan Point is 
 only a little open to the eastward of Doctor Point, bearing S. 23° E. 
 (south mag.). Those points in one lead along the east side of Caribou 
 Eeef in 4 fathoms water. Keep Logan Point a little open, and it will 
 lead clear out to sea in not less than 4^ fathoms. 
 
 The same marks and directions taken in the reverse order will ena- 
 ble a vessel to take this channel from the northward or westward, it 
 being only necessary to add that she should not haul to the eastward 
 until the Hawksbill is well shut in behind Caribou Point, nor open out 
 the former again, after having shut it in, until the lighthouse at Pictou 
 is open to the southward of Cole Point, the lighthouse and Cole Point 
 in line, bearing S. 44° W. (S. 07° W. mag.), being the mark for clearing 
 the south extreme of the Pictou Island Bank in 5 fathoms. 
 
iE. 
 
 CARIBOU HARBOR — AMET SOUND. 
 
 81 
 
 L lookout Avhen 
 W. (K i;{o W. 
 iently to bring 
 W. (N. 72-^ W 
 r closely toucli- 
 entl of the spit, 
 le at the same 
 [lile in from the 
 stronger there, 
 ire the channel 
 7 fathoms over 
 
 Harbor at 10 h., 
 ' nearly 2 hours 
 le height of the 
 ■ing tides of the 
 re, therefore, 15 
 
 e Pictou Island 
 d in breadth, at 
 , conceived to be 
 in line; but it is 
 an lead through 
 
 the westward is 
 ) shoal water off 
 le Head is just 
 V. mag.); then 
 [1, and they will 
 western edge of 
 Istrong from the 
 on the weather 
 [l water off Doc- 
 Logan Point is 
 laring S. 23° E. 
 side of Caribou 
 ipen, and it will 
 
 order will ena- 
 
 |or westward, it 
 
 the eastward 
 
 it, nor open out 
 
 thouse at Pictou 
 
 and Cole Point 
 
 irk for clearing 
 
 ^ms. 
 
 Allow for a strong set over Pictou Bank, according to the tide. 
 
 The light on Caribou Island is a very brilliant one, and from an 
 elevation of 25 feet has been seen 19 or 20 miles. 
 
 Doctor Island, at the entrance to Caribou Ilarbor, forms two 
 entrances into the harbor, of which the northern, between two sandy 
 spits, is 800 yards wide, but has only 4 feet in it at low water. 
 
 Doctor Reef, very dangerous, extends from Doctor Point eastward 
 14 miles, to the depth of 3 fathoms, and shows rocks dry at low water 
 to the distance of ^ mile. Southward of this reef, and § mile SE. by 
 B. ^ E. from Doctor Point, lie the Seal Rocks, dry at low water, and 
 from which the shallow water, forming the bar of Caribou Harbor, 
 extends to Logan Point, the north point of Pictou Bay. 
 
 Buoy. — Skinner Beef buoy is red, and is moored in 4 fathoms N. 50° 
 B. (N. 730 E. mag.) 1,«60 yards from Doctor Point. 
 
 Caribou Reef.— Caribou Reef, of large stones, which dry out to the 
 distance of 600 yards from the shore, is also very dangerous, the deep 
 water approaching nearly close to its north point and eastern side. 
 It stretches out from Caribou Point northward ^ mile to the 3-lathom 
 and % mile to the 5-fathom line of soundings. 
 
 The Coast — From the Caribou Point to West Gully the coast is 
 formed by the northern shore of Caribou Island, appearing from a dis- 
 tance like several islands; bat on a nearer approach the wooded parts- 
 are found to be joined together by sand bars. From West Gully of 
 Caribou to Cape John it is nearly straight, unbroken, and free from 
 danger, the shoal water nowhere extending beyond ^ mile oft' shore. 
 Cliffs of clay and sandstone, not exceeding the height of 50 feet, and 
 in general much lower, form the x)i'edominating feature; but there is, 
 nevertheless, good landing for boats almost everywhere in fine weather. 
 
 Amet Sound is very extensive, affording excellent anchorage for 
 any number and class of vessels. Cape John and Mullegash Point, its 
 eastern and western points of entrance, are more than 4 miles apart, 
 but there are detached dangers outside, or oft' the entrance, which 
 require to be described before directions can be given for entering by 
 either of the three channels which they form. 
 
 Amet Isle in very small, and is divided into two parts, of which the 
 western is the larger, presenting clay cliffs on every side, excepting 
 where they are joined together by a sandy heck. It is flat at top, bare 
 of trees, covered with a coarse grass, and about 20 feet above the sea 
 at high water. 
 
 This islet was formerly much larger than at present, and the cliffs 
 still continue to be undermined by every heavy gale and high tide; the 
 frosts also aid in the work of destruction, so that the time can not be 
 very distant when there will only remain a reef of the highly inclined 
 sandstone which at present forms the base of the islet, and dries out 
 about 400 yards, excepting on the southern side, where boats can 
 generally laud at all times of tide (I860). Shallow water extends 
 1151 6 
 
82 
 
 NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT — SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 off the islet 000 yards westward, and will be cleared in not less than 
 34 fathoms if St. John's church steeple, at the Jo.ni River, be kept in 
 line with Reef Point S. 50o E. (8. 28° E. mag.); but vessels of large 
 draft should stand in only to 6 fathoms, remembering that iu every 
 other direction shallow water extends from the island to far greater 
 
 Amet ShoalB are rocky, with very irregular soundings, av <\ are much 
 more extensive and dangerous than have been hitherto represented. 
 They extend nearly 4 miles from the islet to the eastward, and also J 
 miles to the SB. toward Cape John. In both directions there are rocky 
 patches, with no more than 5 or 6 feet of water, a long mile out from 
 the islet; at a greater distance than 2 miles there are not less than 16 
 feet; but there is East Patch, with that depth, fully 3 miles to the east- 
 ward of the islet. The marks for EaSt Patch are the north extreme of 
 Amet Islet and Treen Bluflf in line and Cape John S. 19° W. (S. 41° 
 
 W. mag.). 
 
 Conn House and Cape John bearing S. 25° W. (S. 47° W. mag.), 
 lead about a i mile SE. of it iu 4 fathoms of water; but to clear the 
 extreme east end of the shoal in a greater depth. Cape John must bear 
 to the westward of S. 33° W. (S. 55o W. mag.). The northern side of 
 these shoals is very steep, and should not be approached in a large 
 vessel, especially at night, to a less depth than 10 fathoms. Treen 
 Bluff and Saddle Island touching, and bearing S. 84° W. (N. 74° W. 
 mag.), lead along the southern side in 2^ fathoms. 
 
 Light— The lighthouse on the center of Amet Isle, a square build 
 ing, painted white, exhibits, at an elevation of 44 feet, a fixed white 
 light, which should be visible 10 miles. 
 
 Waugh Shoal, which from its position and steepness is extremely 
 dangerous, is a rocky bank nearly H miles long and i mile broad, 
 with irregular soundings from 3i to 5 fathoms, excepting toward its 
 northern end, where there is a patch of considerable extent with from 
 2 to 2| fathoms, 12 feet being the least water, unless it may be m 
 unusually low tides. In this shallowest pait the shoal is very steep, 
 and should not be approached from the northward nearer than the 
 depth of 7 fathoms; but in all other parts vessels may approach to 5 
 fathoms at low water. There are no clearing marks for the western 
 side of this shoal, the lead is the only guide. The NB. side is just 
 cleared in 5 and 6 fathoms, either by the eastern extremes of Amet Isle 
 and Cape John in line or by the English church steeple, at the John 
 River in line with Reef Point, bearing S. 49° E. (S. 27" E. mag.). Tlic 
 SB side is cleared in 4 fathoms, by the eastern extremes of MuUegash 
 and Chamber Points in one bearing S. 16° W. (8. 38° W. mag.). AH 
 these objects will easily be made out excepting Chamber Point, which, 
 being very low, is at times difficult to distinguish from the high land 
 
 behind it. , j n 
 
 Eastern Passage into the sound, between the Amet Shoals and Cape 
 
EtE. 
 
 n not less than 
 ver, be kept in 
 ressels of large 
 g that iu every 
 I to far greater 
 
 »8, ait '1 are much 
 rto represented, 
 rard, and also li 
 I there are rocky 
 g mile out from 
 not less than 16 
 iiiles to the east- 
 Qorth extreme of 
 J.I90 W. (8.41° 
 
 3. 470 W. mag.), 
 but to clear the 
 I John must bear 
 northern side of 
 iched in a large 
 fathoms. Treen 
 to w. (N. 740 W. 
 
 , a square build- 
 et, a fixed white 
 
 less is extremely 
 ad ^ mile broad, 
 pting toward its 
 extent with from 
 ess it may be in 
 oal is very steep, 
 
 nearer than the 
 lay approach to 5 
 s for the western 
 
 NB. side is just 
 smes of Amet Isle 
 eple, at the John 
 70 E. mag.). The 
 mes of Mnllegash 
 30 W. mag.). AH 
 aber Point, which, 
 com the high land 
 
 ii Shoals and Cape 
 
 AMET SOUND. 
 
 83 
 
 John, is ^ mile wide, between the 3-fathom lines, with irregular sound- 
 ings from 3i to « fathoms, and with rock, red sand, broken shell, and 
 mud bottom. 
 
 It is difficult to carry more than 4 fathoms through at low water. 
 To safely take this passage from the eastward with a fair wind, bring 
 Cape John to bear to the westward of S. 33° W. (S. 65° W. mag.), or 
 bring that cape and Brul6 Point to touch, bearing S.39o W.(S.61o \v. 
 mag.), and steer for them till Treen Bluff opens to the southward of 
 Saddle Island, when alter course to S. 62° W. (S. 84° W. mag.), which 
 is for the mouth of Tatamagouche Bay, and the vessel will sail nearly 
 through the middle of the passage. There will be no danger from the 
 Amet Shoals, if Treen Bluff be kept open to the southward of Saddle 
 Island, nor yet from the shallow water off Cape John if it bs not 
 approached nearer than the depth of 4 fathoms. 
 
 Middle Passage.— The Middle Passage into Amet Sound, between 
 the Waugh Shoal and Amet Isle, is a long mile wide from the depth of 
 6 fathoms to 5 fathoms on either side, clear of all danger, and carries 6 
 to 10 fathoms water, with sand and mud bottom. An excellent leading 
 mark for running through this passage with a fair wind is Conn House 
 and Brul6 Point in line, bearing S. 9o E. (S. 13o W. mag.) (1860). 
 
 Western Passage, between Saddle Island and Eeef and Waugh 
 Shoal, is a mile wide, with irregular soundings from 5 to 8^ fathoms, 
 the lesser depth being to the southward of "Waugh Shoal, where the 
 bottom is rocky and uneven, whilst farther westward it is of mud. 
 
 If bound to Brul6 Harbor, after rounding Saddle Reef, steer for Bruld 
 Point, or a little to the east of it, until the mark for clearing the NE. 
 side of the Brul6 Shoals, namely, the English church steeple, at the Johii 
 River, a little open to the northward of Long Point, comes .?n S. 70° E, 
 (S. 48° E. mag.), then alter course, and run toward tho narks till 
 Brul6 Point bears S.36o W. (S. 58o W. mag.), when haul in to the south- 
 ward, and run by the lead along the SB. side of the Brul6 Shoals in 
 from 3^ to 3^ fathoms, until the Uiichorage is reached. A pilot, or a 
 previous buoying of the channel, would be necessary to take the vessel 
 into the harbor. 
 
 If bound to the anchorage off the bar of the John River, it is only 
 necessary to run up the middle of John Bay till the water shoals to 3J 
 fathoms, which is as near as a large ship should go, although distant li 
 miles from the river's mouth. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, in Amet Sound at lOh.: 
 springs rise 8 feet, neaps 5 feet. The tidal streams are very weak 
 within the sound, setting regularly up the bays and rivers. In the 
 Western Passage both tides in general set fairly through, the flood 
 about west and the ebb about east, at rates never exceeding 1^ knots 
 and usually much less. In Middle Passage the ebb sets out to the 
 northward and eastward less than a knot and the flood to the west- 
 ward, at the same rate, over Waugh Shoal. In the Eastern Passage 
 
84 
 
 NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT — flOUTH SHORE. 
 
 the ebb sets out to the NE. and the flood in tlie opposite direction, tlie 
 rates varying from i to 1^ knots. 
 
 John Bay rnns in nearly 4 uiileR to the 8K. ft-om Cape John to 
 Mnrphy Point, which Is the sandy east point of entrance of the river. 
 The bay is free from detached dangers, but the shoals extending out 
 from its shores are often very steep, and should not be approa(!hed 
 nearer than the h>w- water depth of 3^ fathoms, nor without due cau- 
 tion. Sandy shoals occupy the head of the bay, drying out nearly ^ 
 mile, and extending 1| miles from the entrance of the river to the 
 3-fathom line. 
 
 Cape John, the northern point of John Bay, will be easily recog- 
 nized by its sharp-pointed cliffs of sandstone, 40 or 50 feet high, and 
 by two high rotiks, always above water, on the inner part of the reef, 
 which extends from it 800 yards to the NW. This reef is very steep, 
 especially at its western point, where there are nearly U fathoms at low 
 water quite close to it, being a greater depth than occurs anywhere else 
 near by. Off the northern side of the cape shallow water extends 
 nearly ^ mile, and as there are only 15 or 16 feet close within the 
 3-fathom mark, large vessels should not approach nearer than the 
 low- water depth of 4 or 3J fathoms. 
 
 John River has only one foot at low water over its bar of sand, and 
 an iiregular depth, from 3 to 11 feet, in a very narrow channel up to 
 the bridge, a distance of nearly a mile. Several ships are built here 
 annually, and notwithstanding the shallow bar, are taken out light and 
 moored outside to take in cargoes of lumber which are brought down 
 the river. The vessels lie off' the entrance in from 2^ to 3J fathoms, 
 over mud bottom ; and although the bay is completely open to the N W., 
 .are considered safe in the summer months. * 
 
 There are extensive and flourishing settlements on either side of this 
 river. Tlie English church will be known by its spire, about J mile to 
 the eastward of the bridge, and the chapel by its cupola, on the opposite 
 or western bank, ^ mile from the bridge toward the river's mouth. 
 
 Bml6 Peninsula. — Brule Peninsula is wooded, rather low, and united 
 to the mainland at its 8W. end by a low and marshy isthmus. Penin- 
 sula Point, its NW. extreme, has a reef extending from it 800 yards to 
 the NW., in great part dry at low water, and so bold that there is little 
 warning by the lead. Brul6 Point is 1^ miles farther to thjB eastward, 
 the intermediate northern shore of the Peninsula being nearly straight, 
 and of clay cliffs 8 or 10 feet high, the whole appearing to a vessel in 
 the offing like a low island in the center of Aroet Sound. 
 
 Bml6 Shoals, extending 1^ miles to the north from Brdl^ Point, are 
 rocky, with irregular soundings, and there is onily 9 feet water not far 
 from their outer edge. The north and NW. sides of these shoals should 
 be approached very cautiously, for they are there extremely steep, having 
 4 or 5 fathoms close to the edge, and no good clearing mark. The 
 English church steeple, at the John Kiver, just open to the northwai'd 
 
E. 
 
 TATAIIAQOIJCHE BAY. 
 
 85 
 
 1' 
 
 ) (Ureotion, the 
 
 Oape Jobn to 
 ;e of the river. 
 
 extending out 
 bo approached 
 ithout due oau- 
 ig out nearly i 
 he river to the 
 
 be easily recog- 
 ) feet high, and 
 jart of the reef, 
 ef is very steep, 
 « fathoms at low 
 rs anywhere else 
 r water extends 
 close within the 
 nearer than the 
 
 I bar of sand, and 
 ow channel up to 
 lipB are built here 
 ,ken out light nnd 
 ire brought down 
 2^ to 3i fathoms, 
 open to the NW., 
 
 either side of this 
 •e, about i mile to 
 la, on the opposite 
 
 iver's mouth, 
 ler low, and united 
 isthmus. Penin- 
 om it 800 yards to 
 that there is little 
 
 to the eastward, 
 ug nearly straight, 
 in g to a vesseil in 
 md. 
 n Bnil6 Point, are 
 
 feet water not far 
 hese shoals should 
 i»mely8teep,having 
 taring mark. The 
 
 to the northward 
 
 of Long Point, bearing S. 70^ E. (S. 48° E. mug.), leads along their 
 17E. side in 3 fathoms ; tlieir east and HE. sides may safely be approached 
 by the lead to 3^ fathoms. 
 
 Brul6 Harbor runs in within Brule'; Peninsula, 2^ miles, in a SW. 
 direction, and is nearly a mile wide, but the far greater part of this 
 large space is occupied by flats of mud and weeds. There are 14 feet 
 on the bar at low water, and 10 feet for a short distance within, but the 
 channel soon becomes very narrow and divided iuto several branches. 
 
 Anchorage. — The anchorage outside the bar, in 3^ fathoms, mud 
 bottom, is the best sheltered of any, in the sound, and a ship or two 
 usually lie there to take in lumber every year. In the best berth Bruit- 
 Point will bear N. 00° W. (N. 38° W. mag.), with the eastern end of 
 Saddle Island showing open one point to the right of it and Cape John 
 N. 25° E. (N. 47° E. mag.). 
 
 Barachois Harbor. Between Peninsula and Chamber Points, is the 
 entrance to a small harbor called the Barachois, which runs in, within 
 Chamber Point, SW. 1^ miles, and is then contracted to a very narrow 
 channel, turning to the SE. into a shallow lake one mile long, with 
 steep banks and an island at its head. This place, which is seldom 
 visited by shipping, has 12 feet over its bar and 14 feet within at low 
 water. 
 
 Tatamagouche Bay, 2^ miles wide at entrance, between Mullegash 
 Point and Brul^ Peninsula, runs in 7 miles to the southwestward, 
 afibrding everywhere good anchorage over a bottom of soft mud, but 
 with insufiHcient depth of water for large ships far up the bay. From 
 5 fathoms at entrance the depth decreases to 3 fathoms at the distance 
 of 1^ miles up the bay, and to 2 fathoms at 4 miles, the remainder 
 being all shallow, and in part dry at low water, with the exception of 
 boat channels leading to the Basin and to Millbrook. The only detached 
 danger in the bay is a rock with 7 feet least water, lying 700 yards off 
 the northern shore and 2 miles in from Mullegash Point; Amet Isle 
 and Mullegash Point touching, and bearing N. 47° E. (N. 69° E.mag.), 
 will lead to the southeastward of it. A stranger may safely approach 
 to the low- water depth of 3 fathoms in the outer part of the bay, and to 
 2^ fathoms farther in; but in entering should keep well over to the 
 northward to avoid the Brul^ Shoals. 
 
 Anchorage. — In 4 £a>thoms, good holding ground (mud), with Cape 
 John N. 65° E. (N. 87° E. mag.), Amet Island N. 31° E. (N. 53° E. mag.), 
 and Mullegash Point N. 47° W. (N. 25° W. mag.) 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, fUU and change, at Tatamagouche Bay at 
 lOh. ; springs rise 8 feet, neaps 5 feet. 
 
 Tatamagouche River, in the SW. corner of Tatamagouche Bay, 
 and 5 miles from its entrance, is approached by a very narrow channel 
 through the flats, obstructed by oyster beds, and ouly one foot deep at 
 low water in ordinary spring tides; nevertheless, new ships of consider- 
 able burden ore brought down it occasionally. The principal settle- 
 
 m 
 
 .^&tii&^^sk . 
 
86 NORTHUMBBBLAND STRAIT— SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 meut in the bay, containinR a Bhlp-bulldlnKestobltahment and a chapeK 
 stands on the western bank, and there is abridge 2 miles from the 
 entrance of the river. 
 
 Several vessels visit this river for lumber every year; they amhor 
 off it where there are only U or 12 feet at low water, and as the tide 
 falls are suflered to ground on the soft mud without injury. 
 
 MuUeKash Point, tio north point of Tatamagouche Bay, is one mile 
 to the southeastward of Saddle Island ; shallow water extends from tha 
 one to the other, and oflf the point to the distance of a long * mile. 
 
 Saddle Island is low, wooded, and joined to the shore by shoals at 
 
 ^"^ Sild^e Reef runs out from the east point of the island one mile to 
 the depth of 3 fathoms, and is very dangerous, having on it a round- 
 backed rock called the Washball, dry at low water, and uistant J mile 
 from the island. There are only a few feet of water much farther out. 
 In approaching this reef from the northward, the soundings give httle 
 waring, but an excellent leading mark namely, T;e«nBluft, just open 
 to the northward of Saddle Island, and bearing S. 75° W. (N. 83o W. 
 mag.), just clears it in 4 fathoms. The lead affords the only guide for 
 clearing it to the eastward, where it may be safely approached to the 
 depth of 6 fathoms with care. 
 
 Wallace Harbor is the finest on this coast, excepting Pictou, hav- 
 ing 16 feet over its bar at low water in ordinary spring tides, which rise 
 8 feet, so that it is capable of admitting vessels of large draft. Its 
 entrance, 2A miles S8W. of Oak Island, an*i between two sandy spits, 
 named ckulfleld and Palmer Points, is nearly iOO yards wide and carries 
 6i fathoms water; but the approach to this entrance, over the bar and 
 through the bay for a distance of 3 miles, is by a crooked channel, 
 which, although nowhere less than 300 yards wide, is difficult with- 
 out the aid of buoys or sufficient leading marks. The services of the 
 pilots of the place will, therefore, alwuys be necessary to insure safety. 
 Wallace stands on the southern shore, IJ miles withm the entrance 
 of the harbor. The land rises gradually in the rear to the 8n°»"^* «f » 
 ridge extending to the eastward, and attaining the elevation of 400 feet. 
 Opposite Wallaee the river is more than i mile broad, whilst the chan- 
 nel between the flats is only 60 or 70 yards wide, and with 5 or 6 fath- 
 oms water. At the distance of 2 miles higher up the river is divided 
 into two branches, both of which are rendered narrow and intricate 
 
 by oyster beds in the channel. 
 Wallace,under the nameofRamsheg, was formerly visited annuallyby 
 
 many more vesselsthan at present, the supply of lumber being then much 
 greater; at present only a few cargoes are embarked and two or three 
 vessels built there every year. There are no fisheries of commercial 
 consequence; the salmon and gaspereux, or alewives, 8t»"j»«* *;^ 
 river, but in diminished numbers, and a few codfish are caught off Oak 
 Island and the neighboring coast in the months of May and June. 
 
f 
 
 E. 
 
 it and a chapc^K 
 mlleii from the 
 
 r; they anchor 
 
 aind as the tide 
 
 ary. 
 
 Bay, is one mile 
 
 xtends from tha 
 
 long A mile. 
 
 )re by shoals at 
 
 land one mile to 
 g on it a round- 
 id distant 4 mile 
 inch farther out. 
 dings give little 
 I Bluff, just open 
 ,o w. (N. 83° W. 
 he only guide for 
 pproached to the 
 
 ting Pictou, hav- 
 f tides, which rise 
 large draft. Its 
 two sandy spits, 
 8 wide and carries 
 over the bar and 
 crooked channel, 
 is difficult with- 
 le services of the 
 r to insure safety, 
 thin the entrance 
 
 the summit of a 
 vationof400feet. 
 , whilst the chan- 
 
 1 with 5 or 6 fath- 
 e river is divided 
 row and intricate 
 
 risited annually by 
 )r being then much 
 I and two or three 
 es of commercial 
 res, still visit the 
 ire caught off Oak 
 •f May and June. 
 
 WALLACE HARBOR. 
 
 87 
 
 There ib difllculty in obtaining a large supply of fresh water at Wallace, 
 also at Pugwash; it is obtained from wells and springs, which bouts 
 can only approach at high water. 
 
 Tlie United States is represented by a (Mtnsniar agent. 
 
 Ship ChanneL — Oak Island Rur is of sand, and extends from Oak 
 island nearly L'.^ miles to tliu southward toward (^ravois I'oiiit, which 
 may be re<;ogiii/.od by its being the highest ])art of tlie clay and sand- 
 stone cliffs, and by its bearing and distance from the east end of Oak 
 island, namely, S. 22° E. (south mag.) 3 miles. Within or to the west- 
 wanl of the bar the whole bay is shallow, excepting tlio Ship or Wal- 
 lace Channel leading to Wallace Harbor. The outer or eastern side of 
 this bar may be safely approached by the lead to the depth of 4 
 fathoms. 
 
 Ship Channel is fully (KM) yards wide at its entrance, between the south 
 point of the bar and the shoal which stretches out 800 yards from (Ira- 
 vois Point, and ."U fathoms in it at low water. From the entrance the 
 channel runs to the northward and westward, curving round Hort(m 
 Shoal, and between it and the shallow water to the northward, which 
 is continuous from the bar to Mullin Point. 
 
 Horton Shoal, of sand, stretches out ^ mile to tlie eastward from 
 Horton and Gantwell Points, and its northern part, drying out to the 
 distance of 800 yards from the Horton Spit, can therefore generally be 
 seen. 
 
 Horton Spit, of low sand, inclosing a marsh, extending to the north- 
 ward from Horton Point, and distant 2J miles northwestward of Gra- 
 vois Point, will easily be recognized by a vessel entering the Ship 
 Channel. The northern end of this spit is quite bold, the channel pass- 
 ing close to it, and thence f mile W. by S. of the entrance of tiic harbor. 
 
 Buoys. — On entering Wallace Harbor, if any buoys are placed, the 
 black buoys must be left on the port and red buoys on the starboard 
 hand. 
 
 Lights. — On Mullin Point stands a square white building, 25 feet 
 high, exhibiting at 39 feet above high water a fixed white light, which 
 should be visible 11 miles. 
 
 The inner leading light is fixed red, 82 feet above high water and 
 visible 8 miles, over a small arc on each side of the leading mark. The 
 lighthouse, a square tower 48 feet high rising through a dwelling, is 
 painted white, and stands 1,473 feet N. 76° W. (N. 52° W. mag.) from 
 the outer light. 
 
 The two lights in line lead over the bar in 9 feet water and up to the 
 entrance of the harbor. 
 
 Directions. — Approaching from the northward pass Oak Island at a 
 distance of fully f mile, or in 5 fathoms water, to avoid the reef off its 
 east point. Approaching from the eastward, Treen Bluff (the cliffy 
 point 2^ miles to the eastward of Gravois Point) must be passed at an 
 equal distance or depth to avoid the Treen Reef, which is sandstone, 
 
 m 
 
88 
 
 NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT — SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 and stretches out i mile from the bluff to the 3-fiftthom line of soundings; 
 the north extremes of Saddle Island and Cape John in one, bearing S. 
 870 E. (S. 65° E. mag.), lead to the northward of it in 4 fathoms. In 
 either case, approach the shore about ^ mile to the eastward of Gravois 
 Point, taking care not to bring the east end of Oak Island to bear less 
 to the westward than N. 34o W. (N. 12° W. mag.) until the south side 
 of Saddle Island is only one degree open to the northward of Treen 
 Bluff, bearing N. 82° E. (S. 76° E. mag.). 
 
 Steer now S. 82° W. (N. 76° W. mag.), taking all i)08sible care to seep 
 the island as nearly as possible one degree open,* but remembering that 
 the lead must be principally depended upon to guide the vessel along 
 the edge of the shallow water off the mainland, in SJ or 3 fathoms at 
 low water, or a corresponding depth at other times of tide, until Smith 
 Point (the eastern extreme of the mainland outside or to the northward 
 of Oak Island) appears through the middle of the opening in the trees 
 of Oak Island and over the low and narrow neck which joins the south- 
 western part to the rest of the island, and bearing N. 31° W. (N. 9° W. 
 mag.). Then alter course to N.56o W. (N.34o w. mag.), and a run of ^ 
 mile will place the vessel within, or to the westward of the south point 
 of the bar, in about 15 feet at low water. 
 
 Let the course be now immediately changed to N. 22° W. (north 
 mag.) for another J mile, and when Palmer Point opens out to the 
 northward of the Horton Spit, bearing west (N. 68^ W. mag.), steer 
 N. 70O W. (N. 48° W. mag.), and the water will soon deepen to 4 and 5 
 fathoms with mud bottom, affording tolerably safe anchorage under 
 shelter of the bar, on which the sea breaks in heavy weather. But if 
 it be wished to proceed to the harbor, let the N. 70° W. (N. 48° \7. 
 mag.) course be continued for ^ mile, and Caulfleld Point will open out 
 to the northward of the Horton Spit; and, immediately afterwards, 
 Smith Point will open out to the westward of the west extreme of the 
 trees on Oak Island, when the vessel must be kept gradually away to 
 the westward, and toward Palmer Point, so sl6 to run along the north- 
 ern edge of Horton Shoal, which can generally be seen until off the 
 Horton Spit at the distance of 200 yards, whence the course is S. 79° 
 W. (N. 79° W. mag.) for 3 mile to the harbor's mouth. 
 
 in entering the harbor keep two-thirds of the way over toward the 
 northern or Palmer Point, which is quite bold, to avoid the shoal water 
 extending 100 yards from Caulfleld Point. 
 
 Anchorage.— Anchor about 500 yards within the entrance, where the 
 channel is 300 yards wide and carries from 3 to 6 fathoms, with mud 
 bottom. On either side, flats of stiff red clay, dry at low water, extend 
 to the shore and render the landing difficult. At 1,200 yards within 
 
 •This mark is given ns only better than none, for it is not easy to keep the island 
 80 nearly one degree open as is reouired. If the island and bluff be brought to touch, 
 the vessel will be ashore on Gravois Reef, and if they be opened to the extent of 2 
 degrees only, she will be on the south point of the bar. 
 
 4t, 
 
RE. 
 
 POX HARBOR— PUGWA8H KEEP. 
 
 le of soundings; 
 ; one, bearing S. 
 4 latboms. In 
 ward of Gravois 
 land to bear less 
 il tbe south side 
 ;hward of Treen 
 
 ible care to Keep 
 emembering that 
 the vessel along 
 or 3 fathoms at 
 tide, until Smith 
 to the northward 
 ming in the trees 
 h joins the south- 
 51° W. (N. 9° W. 
 j^.),and a run oi^ 
 ►f the south point 
 
 5J. 220 W. (north 
 opens out to the 
 p W. mag.), steer 
 deepen to 4 and 5 
 anchorage under 
 weather. But if 
 
 W. (N. 48° \V. 
 oint will open out 
 lately afterwards, 
 ist extreme of the 
 [radually away to 
 
 1 along the north- 
 seen until off the 
 e course is S. 79° 
 
 1. 
 
 y over coward the 
 
 lid the shoal water 
 
 ntrance, where the 
 
 athoms, with mud 
 
 low water, extend 
 
 1,200 yards within 
 
 isy to keep the island 
 f be brought to touch, 
 led to the extent of 2 
 
 the entrance, a middle ground commences and diminishes the breadth 
 of the channel to 100 yards. Neaily abreast the eastern end of this 
 middle ground there i<, a narrow (channel through the flats and up Lazy 
 Bay, which runs in more than a mile to the SK., and has, on the south- 
 em shore near its head, <!liffs of gypsum 30 fee*' high. 
 
 Tides —It IS high water, full and change, in Wallace Hh 'bor at lOh. 
 30m.; spnugs rise 8 feet, neaps 5 feet. The rate of the tidal streams 
 is greatest in the entrance of the harbor, and there it does not excee<l 
 1^ knots during the summer months; whilst outside, in the Ship Chan- 
 nel, it is usually from IJ to one knot. The ebb, however, may be 
 somewhat stronger in spring after the melting of the winter snows. 
 
 Oak Island is low, wooded, and about a mile long, having Jerry 
 Island, small and wooded, a long ^ mile to the westward of it, and on 
 the north side of Fox Harbor, just within Mackenzie Point. 
 
 Fox Harbor— Within or southward of Oak Island a bay runs in 
 to the westward about 2 miles, to Mulliu Point, which separates Wal- 
 lace Harbor from Fox Harbor. Fox Harbor runs in 3 or 4 miles to the 
 17 W., with a channel through flats of tenacious red clay and weeds, 
 which are nearly diry at low water. There are 3 or 4 fathoms water in 
 this channel ; but a depth of 8 or 9 feet is all that can be carried over 
 the bar at low water in ordinary spring tides. 
 
 The Coast' — Mackenzie Point is separated from Oak Island by sand 
 bars and a guUy i>r boats, nearly dry when the tide is ont. From Mac- 
 kenzie Point to Pugwash Point the coast is unbroken, and for the most 
 part composed of clay and sandstone cliffs, of the height of 50 feet, 
 from which the land rises tO' the summit of a ridge 150 feet high. 
 
 Pt^fMraah Reef extends^ mile northwestward from Pngwash Point,- 
 and dries out about half that distance. There are rocky patches, with 
 11 and 12 feet water, ^ mile off the point to the northward, and others 
 farther to the eastward^ a full mile outfroni the shore; moreover, there 
 is uneven rocky ground, with a less depth than 4 fathoms, 2 miles off- 
 shore, which renders it unsafe for a stranger in a vessel of large draft 
 to go within the depth of 5 fathoms. 
 
 Light. — The lighthouse on Fishing Point, a square building, 44 feet 
 high, and painted white, exhibits at an elevation of 48 feet a fixed 
 light, showing red seaward and white toward the harbor. It shonid 
 be visible 8 miles. 
 
 Pugwash Road, in the entrance of Pngwash Bay, affords excellent 
 anchorage, in from 16 to 19 feet at low water, with sand and clay bot- 
 tom, being sheltered by Phillip Bar and Lewis Beef from westerly and 
 by Pugwash Beef from easterly winds. This anchorage is exposed 
 between NNW. and NNE., but the shallow water outside prevents any 
 sea from coming in sufficient to endanger a vessel during tbe summer 
 months. 
 
 Directions. — To run for Pugwash Boad from the northward, the 
 vessel being in not less than 5 fathoms water, bring the English church 
 
 M0!^iihiL.: 
 
90 
 
 NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT — SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 iv 
 
 steeple at Pugwash so as to be seeii oyer and just within the west 
 extreme of the low cliff of Fishing Point (the east point of the bay), 
 bearing S. 36° E. (S. 13° E. mag.). 
 
 Run toward those marks, taking care not to open out the church in 
 the least to the westward of the point until Bergeman Point (the south 
 point of entrance of the Phillip River) bears S. 34° W. (S. 56° W. mag.), 
 or until the depth decreases to 3A fathoms at low water. The vessel will 
 then be close off the NW. end of Pugwash Reef, and must steer south 
 (S. 22° W. mag.) for i| mile, when she will be in from 16 to 19 feet at 
 low water, with clay bottom. 
 
 Anchorage. — Directly in the line Joining Bergeman and Pugwash 
 Points, and with Fishing Point N. 85° E. (S. 73° E. mag.), distant nearly 
 * mile. This is the best anchorage ; but vessels may lie ^ mile farther in 
 to the southward, or close off the bar, in 14 feet at low water. Still 
 farther in, the bay is all shoal, excepting the narrow channel, which 
 curves round its eastern side and leads to the harbor. 
 
 To run for Pugwash Road from the eastward, the vessel being in 
 more than the low- water depth of 5 fathoms, bring Bergeman Point to 
 bear S. 34° W. (S. 50° W. mag.), and steer for it until the church opens 
 out to the westward of Fishing Point, when immediately alter course 
 to the south (S. 22° W. mag.), and having run nearly f mile, anchor in 
 the same berth as before directed. 
 
 Pugwash Harbor, at the head of the bay and entrance of the river 
 of the same name, is small but quite secure, and has more than suffi- 
 cient depth of water for any vessel that can pass the bar, on which the 
 depth is 14 feet at low water in ordinary spring tides. The bar is 
 about i mile within the entrance of the bay, and a crooked channel, 
 from 100 to 200 yards wide, and through flats of sand and weeds for the 
 distance of one mile, leads from it to the harbor's mouth. No directions 
 would avail for this channel, and the assistance of one of the able pilots 
 of the place is indispensable, and will be readily obtained in answer to 
 the usual signal. 
 
 ^ Pi^gwash.— The town of Pugwash, with its wharves and small wooden 
 FlJnglish church, stands on the east side of the entrance of the harbor. 
 Immediately within there is a fine little landlocked basin, with a depth 
 of nearly 7 fathoms, in which vessels lie moored in security, to take in 
 cargoes of lumber that are brought down the river. 
 
 Water.— There is no good watering place at Pugwash, the supply 
 being from wells, or from springs which are frequently dry in summer. 
 
 Pugwash River, immediately within the harbor, extends into a small 
 lake IJ miles long and one mile wide, in which there are several 
 small islands and peninsulas. The channel through the lake, and be- 
 tween flats of mud and weeds, nearly dry at low water, is ftom 100 to 
 200 yards wide, and has 2^ to 6 fathoms water in it. On the western 
 side the narrow channel of Limestone Creek leads to quarries of 
 limestone, unfit for building, but which supply Prince Edward Island 
 
T 
 
 thin the west 
 t of the bay), 
 
 the church in 
 lint (the south 
 oGoW.uia},'.), 
 rhe vessel will 
 st steer south 
 to 19 feet at 
 
 and Pugwash 
 distant nearly 
 mile farther in 
 ^ water. Still 
 bannel, which 
 
 asset being in 
 eman Point to 
 I church opens 
 y alter course 
 nile, anchor in 
 
 je of the river 
 
 ore than suffl- 
 
 on which the 
 
 The bar is 
 
 oked channel, 
 
 weeds for the 
 
 !7o directions 
 
 le able pilots 
 
 in answer to 
 
 small wooden 
 
 f the harbor. 
 
 with a depth 
 
 ty, to take in 
 
 )b, the supply 
 
 y in summer. 
 
 8 into a small 
 
 are several 
 
 lake, and be- 
 
 B from 100 to 
 
 a the western 
 
 quarries of 
 dward Island 
 
 BAY VERTE. OT 
 
 as well as the neighboring country with lime. The river continues 
 navigable for small vessels about 2 miles above the lake and for boats 
 tt. 1 distance of 7 miles from its entrance. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Pugwash at lOh. 30m.; 
 springs rise 7 feet, neaps 4 feet. The rate of the tidal streams, which 
 is greatest in the entrance of the harbor, does not exceed 2 knots, unless 
 it may be the ebb in the springs after the melting of the winter's 
 snows. In Pugwash Itoiid it seldom exceeds a knot. 
 
 Phillip River enters the sea immediately to the southward of Lewis 
 Head, and between the latter and Bergeman Point. Its mouth is | 
 mile wide, but a dangerous bar of sand and stones stretches across it, 
 so as to leave only a narrow and tortuous (channel of 8 feet at low 
 water, through which the new vessels, built up the river and brought 
 down light, are taken with difiSculty on their way to i'ugwash, where they 
 take in their cargoes, and where also the lumber and produce brought 
 down this river are taken to be shipped. Within the bar a depth of 12 
 feet at low water can be carried up the river for 5 miles, and there are 
 in some places 4 and 5 fathoms; the channel, between flats of mud and 
 weeds, being, in some parts, not more than 40 or 50 yards wide. Boats 
 can easily ascend about 9 miles, at which distance the tiue ends, and 
 there is a slight rapid. 
 
 Lewis Reef extends 2^ miles NNE. from Lewis Head. Its outer part 
 is'composed of detached rocky patches, on which there are from 14 to 
 18 feet water, with a greater depth between them ; but the inner part 
 is shallow, and has as little as 6 feet water at 1^ miles from the shore. 
 
 Coast — From Pugwash and Phillip Biver to Cold Spring Head, the 
 south point of entrance of Bay Verte, a distance of 10 miles, there is 
 no place of use tc shipping. 
 
 Bay Verte is 9 miles wide across its entrance, from Cold Spring 
 Head, Nova Scotia, to Indian Point, New Brunswick, but contra<;ts to 
 the breadth of 2^ miles near its head. It is 11 miles deep, and sepa- 
 rates the two provinces just named, their boundary continuing across the 
 isthmus from the head of Bay Verte to Cumberland Basin, a distance 
 of about 11 miles. There is no harbor in Bay Verte, which is completely 
 open to easterly winds, as well as very shallow near its head, where 
 flats of mud and weeds dry out % mile from the shore. 
 
 In the western corner of the bay is the Oaspereau^ River, a small 
 stream only fit for boats. 
 
 There are thriving settlements on either side of Bay Verte, and espe- 
 cially at its head, where extensive tracts of meadow land have been 
 reclaimed by diking. 
 
 Tignish River is the most considerable stream in Bay Verte, which 
 it enters on the south side near its head. It ban only 3 feet depth of 
 water, in a very narrow channel, when the tide is out, and it is 
 Approached by a narrow channel, carrying 3 to 7 feet, through flats of 
 mud and weeds, which dry out a mile from its mouth. The river is crossed 
 
 't, 
 
92 
 
 NOETHUMBEBLAND STKAIT — SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 by a bridge 2^ miles up from its eutrance, foUowiug the wiiidings of 
 tlie river; and about 3 miles farther up the tide is limited iu its ascent 
 by Toby's mill. Tlie spring tides rise 9 feet and the neap tides 5 feet. 
 
 Marine Transport Rail^vay. — A ship railway is proposed su;ros8 
 Chignecto Isthmus, 17 miles wide, separating the Bay of Fuudy from 
 the headwaters of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and connecting Nova 
 Scotia and New Brunswick. Ships up to 1,0(>0 tons burden, instead of 
 sailing round the stormy coast of Nova Scotia, a distance of 700 miles, 
 will be raised by hydraulic lifts upon an immense iron cradle resting 
 upon wheels, and then hauled across the isthmus. The rai ray will 
 lessen by 500 miles the distance between St. Lawrence ports and New 
 York, Boston, and Portland. 
 
 Nothing doing on the railway in 1893, or since that date. 
 
 Light. — At 35 yards from the north extreme of Cold Spring Head 
 is a white square lighthouse with a red lantern, 36 feet high, from 
 which is shown a fixed white light, 60 feet above the sea, which should 
 be visible 13 miles. 
 
 Spear Shoal, having a patch of rock with 10 feet least water near 
 its east end, and from 15 to 1 8 feet in other parts, is a bank of sand 
 and stone, resting on sandstone, about a mile long, in an east and west 
 direction, and ^ mile broad. From the shoalest part Gape Spear bearb 
 N. 56° W. (N. 34° W. mag.) IJ miles and Indian Point N. 2° W. (N. 
 20° E. mag.) 2^ miles. The lead gives little warning in approaching 
 this dangerous shoal from the eastward, on which side there are from 
 3J to 4^ fathoms close-to ; but vessels will avoid it by coming into no 
 less water than 4^ fathoms, as they pass to the southward of it. There 
 are 3^ fathoms between it and Gape Spear. 
 
 Heart Shoal, about a mile westward of the Spear Shoal, and S. 14° 
 W. (S. 36° W. mag.) IJ miles from Cape Spear, has 9 feet least water 
 and 15 feet between it and the shore; but it lies within the 3-fathom 
 line of soundings. 
 
 Laurent Shoal, of rock and sand, with 16 feet least water, is about 
 f mile long by half that breadth. From the shoalest part, Gape St. 
 Laurent bears N. 57° W. (N. 35° W. mag.) 2f miles, Ephraim Island 
 N. 70° W. (N. 48° W. mag.), Indian Point N. 40° E. (N. 62° E. mag.), 
 and Cold Spring Head S. 5° W. (S. 27° W. mag.). This shoal is also 
 bold on the east side, where there are 4^ fathoms close-to. 
 
 Aggermore Rock, with 18 feet least water, and bearing N. 28° E. 
 (N. 50° E. mag.) 2f miles from Cold Spring Head, is, like the Laurent 
 Shoal, merely one of the shallowest points of an extensive rocky bank, 
 which is thinly covered with mud and sand, and which extends out 
 from Cape St. Laurent and Ephraim Island, in a SE. direction, so as 
 to leave a deep channel about 2 miles wide between it and Gold Spring 
 Head. At low water not more than 19 feet could be safely reckoned 
 npon in running between the Aggermore Kock and the Laurent Shoal, 
 or between the latter and the Ephraim Banks extending off the north- 
 ern shore. 
 
TORMENTINE REGF8. 
 
 ^ 
 
 windings of 
 iu its ascent 
 ) tides 5 feet. 
 [)osed iu:ross 
 Fuudy from 
 lecting Nova 
 Ml, instead of 
 of 700 miles, 
 iradle resting 
 ) rai vay will 
 arts and New 
 
 Spring Head 
 it high, from 
 which should 
 
 DirectionB. — Vessels bound up the Bay Verte should keep the Nova 
 Scotia coast aboard, running; up in 6;^ and 7 fathoms water till they 
 'arrive off ('old Spring Head, where at the distance of about li miles 
 from tlie shore they will find the water deepen to 8 or 9 and even nearly 
 to 10 fathoms, as they pass to the southward of the banks and shoals 
 which have been described. After passing Cold Spring- Head about 3 
 miles the depth of water decreases to less than 5 fathoms, and con- 
 tinues to shoal gradually, with mud and sand bottom, to the head of 
 the bay. The Boss Si)it, which extends 5 'uile from the south shore 
 between Boss and Jackson Points, and 3^ miles to the NW. from Cold 
 Spring Head, is dangerous, as it dries out to its edge, and is so steep-to 
 that there are 17 feet water close to its outer point. Vessels should be 
 careful not to go into less water than 3^ fathoms until they are past this 
 sand spit. Farther up the bay there is nothing in the way, excepting 
 two patches of stone with 3 and 5 feet water at the distance of ^ and 
 J mile northward of Tignish Head. 
 
 ist water near 
 bank of sand 
 east and west 
 »e Spear bear^ 
 
 N. 2° W. (N. 
 
 approaching 
 there are from 
 oming into no 
 
 of it. There 
 
 •al, and S. 14° 
 
 ^et least water 
 
 the 3-fathom 
 
 [rater, ia about 
 
 part, Cape St. 
 
 phraim Island 
 
 62° E. mag.), 
 
 shoal is also 
 
 j-ing N. 28° E. 
 le the Laurent 
 rocky bank, 
 extends out 
 lirection, so as 
 Cold Spring 
 lifely reckoned 
 |jaureut Shoal, 
 off the north- 
 
 NEW BRUNSWICK. 
 
 Tormentine Reefs are extremely dangerous, and are rendered doubly 
 so by the strong tides. They extend off Indian Point rather more than 
 3 miles to the eastward, and there is rocky ground with 4 fathoms fully 
 a mile farther oflf shore. The part of these roofs which dries at low 
 water is very small, and bears N. 85° E. (S. \'6° E. mag.) 2^ miles from 
 Indian Point. It lies about 300 yards to the southward of the line join- 
 ing Cape Spear and the south side of Ephraim Island, and the whole 
 of that island open to the southward of Cape St. Laurent will lead more 
 tlian a mile to the southward of it. The only sufficient guides, there- 
 fore, are the lead and the chart. • 
 
 Caution. — Vessels running through Northumberland Strait at night 
 or at any time without a commanding breeze should not approach this 
 reef from any direction between north and east, nearer than 9 fathoms 
 water, for the flood tide sets over it to the southward, in Bay Verte, 
 at the rate of 3 knots, causing a great rippling over the part that dries, 
 and generally indicating its position. Nearly midway between the dry 
 part of the reef and Indian Point there is a patch of rocks with 7 feet 
 at low water. Small craft carry a depth of 2^ fathoms at low water 
 between that and Indian Point, and often take shelter under the latter 
 in northerly winds; but large vessels wishing to do the same must run 
 around outside the whole of the reef, and will find the soundings in the 
 chart a sufficient guide. 
 
 Directioiui.— To run through the 2^fathom channel between Indian 
 Point and dry part of the Tormentine Beefs, bring Indian Point and 
 Oape Spear in one, bearing S. 45° W. (S. 67° W. mag.), and run toward 
 them until the east extreme of Oape Tormentine touches the west side 
 of the outer Jonrimain Island, bearing N. 45° W. (N. 23° W. mag.); 
 then alter course and run S. 45° E. (S.23°E. mag.) with the last-named 
 
i 
 
 94 NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT— WEfiT SHORE. 
 
 „,ark8 on astern, until tbe water deepens to 5 fathoms at low water, 
 wli«n the vessel will be to the southward of the reefs. 
 
 clpTT^^^ntine is a name sometimes applied to the whole and 
 soSeSLsTmSv.rent points of the great headland which forms the 
 rterextremity of X Brunswick within the gulf, -^ ;»»-^ -P^ 
 rates Bay Verte from the rest of Northumberland Strait; but it s 
 here restricted to the comp.iratively high central point, to wh «^ t^« 
 inhabitants alno seem to confine it; and, again, in conformiy with the 
 usace as well as for precision of description, the names of Indian Point 
 and cape Jonrtmain have been adopted for the sontheru and northern 
 
 extremities of this promontory. . t i i «r...™= 
 
 cape Jourimain, the north extreme of the Jourimain Islands, forms 
 the XemeTSit of land to vessels running through Northnmberland 
 Strait either from the eastward or westward. It bears S. 83o E. (S 
 eiol'mag' 6i miles from Oape Bnnn; and there is good -chorage 
 in te^ay between them, in 5 fathoms sandy bottom, and in winds 
 f^om the ESE. round south, to west. The islands are connected 
 t^J^tl er and with the mainland, by sand bars and marshes ; but still 
 JSfyt.pea^^^^^ inlands when seen from a distance suflftcient to sink the 
 sand bars below the horizon. 
 
 Jourimain Shoals are extremely dangerous to vessels running at 
 uighr^hout their leads going; they commence at Peacock Cove off 
 Xh there is a patch of 3^ fathoms, at 2 miles off shore '^^-7^-^^ 
 from Cape Jourimain U miles NW., and there is a patch of 4 fathoms 
 13 mUes NNW. from the same point. They are of sandstone, thnly 
 and partially covered with sand, and their SE. point, a narrow ridge 
 wUh only 6 feet at low water, and distant 1? miles from the shore, is 
 The most dangerous, because the boldest, part of the shoals. It should 
 TtTe appro'ached'nearer than the depth of 9 fathoms -the nighty 
 Tme; but farther westward the shoals may be neared with proper 
 caution to C fathoms at low water. .,11 «„♦-«« 
 
 iTht-The lighthouse on the east end of Jourimain Island, octago^ 
 uaTTaped, 45 feet high, and painted white, exhibits at an elevation of 
 72 feet a flashing white light, showing a flash every ten seconds, which 
 shouW be visiblf seaward 14 miles, from S. 76° E. (S. 54° E. mag.) toN. 
 
 ^^iTch^iatl-sSwardof the Jourimain Shoals and between them 
 andthe T«tine Reefs there is good anchorage with westerly winds 
 ?n from 5 to 6 fathoms, the bottom being of sand, with f y -^derneath^ 
 Ice and Lifeboats!-A building has been erected for the ice boats 
 usSfoTthe mail service between Cape Tormentine and Cape Traverse; 
 X for the lifeboat stationed at this point. The building is immedi- 
 at^y north of the railway track at Cape Tormentine wharf and close 
 
 *'^wCpier.-ietween Tormentine Reefs and Jourimain Shoals, 
 at limiles northward of Indian Point, the railway pier of the .New 
 
BHEDIAC BAT. 
 
 95 
 
 t low water, 
 
 le whole and 
 Bh forms the 
 I which sepa 
 ait; but it is 
 to which the 
 lity with their 
 ' ludiau Point 
 and northern 
 
 Islands, forms 
 >rthumberlaud 
 , S. 83° E. (S. 
 ood anchorage 
 , and in winds 
 are connected 
 rshes; but still 
 lent to sink the 
 
 lels running at 
 pacock Cove, off 
 ). They extend 
 ch of 4 fathoms 
 mdstone, thinly 
 a narrow ridge 
 om the shore, is 
 oals. It should 
 ns iu the night- 
 red with proper 
 
 a Island, octago- 
 t an elevation of 
 1 seconds, which 
 4° E. mag.) to N. 
 
 ad between them 
 ,h westerly winds 
 clay underneath, 
 for the ice boats 
 i Cape Traverse; 
 lldiug is immedi- 
 wharf and close 
 
 fourimain Shoals, 
 pier of the New 
 
 Brunswick and Prince Edward Railway projects from the coast for 
 about ^ mile seaward over the shoal which borders the shore. The 
 railway goes to Sackville, where it Joins the Intercolonial Railway. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Jourimain Island at 9ii. 
 30m. ; springs rise G feet, neaps 3 feet. 
 
 Little and Great Shemogne Rivers, westward from Cape Bruin, 
 are only fit for boats and very small vessels, having narrow and intri- 
 cate channels over shifting bars of sand. 
 
 Anchorage. — There is good anchorage, in 5 or 6 fathoms, sandy bot- 
 tom, off these rivers in the bay between Cape Bruin and Cape Bald, 
 the former bearing from the latter S. 76° E. (S. 53° E. mag.) nearly 
 12 miles. 
 
 Caution. — In the distance just named the coast is free from danger, 
 the shoal water extending only about ^ mile off shore; and a vessel 
 may safely approach at night to the depth of 6 fathoms at low water. 
 But farther to the eastward greater caution will be requisite, on account 
 of the dangerous shoals commencing oft' Peacock Cove, which is in the 
 bay between Cape Jourimain and Cape Bruin. 
 
 Cape Fillet Chiirch, 1^ miles south west ward of Cape Bald, has a 
 square tower, and is a conspicuous mark from seaward. 
 
 Kouchibouguet and Abouchagan Rivers, in the sandy bay between 
 Cape Bald and Bouleaux Point, and C^ miles eastward of Shediac, are 
 small, and can only be entered by boats at high water. 
 
 Cape Bald, a sandstone cliff, 40 feet high and 11 miles eastward of 
 Shediae Island, is bold and may safely be approached by the lead to 
 the depth of o fathoms; but off Bouleaux Point a reef extends more 
 than a mile from the shore. 
 
 Shediac Bay is 6^ miles wide from Bouleaux Point (Birch Point) 
 to Shediac Point, a low sandstone cliff, and about 5 miles deep. On it^ 
 north side will be seen the church and village of Upper Grandigue, 
 and along the head of the bay, within the island, the village of Shediac, 
 with its small church. There is less than 3 fathoms water in the greater 
 part of this bay; it is therefore unsuited to large vessels, and it is 
 rendered dangerous to strangers by shoals. 
 
 On Shediac Island there are two conspicuous trees, ^ mile northeast- 
 ward of the beacon leading lights; these trees show in misty weather 
 when the beacons are not visible. 
 
 Medea Rock is very small, with 6 feet least water; there are 3 and 
 4 fathoms water around it at the distance of 200 yards, excepting to the 
 southward, in which direction there are several rocky patches, with 12 
 feet water, between it and the shore, which is nearly 1'^ miles from it. 
 Tills dangerous rock lies 400 yards within the line joining Shediac and 
 Cocagne Points. 
 
 Zephjrr Rock is also very small, with 9 feet least water, and lies 
 rather more than a mile almost west from Medea Bock. It is a long 
 mile from the SE. point of Shediac Island, which is the nearest pan uf 
 
wmmmmm 
 
 96 
 
 NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT — WEST SHORE. 
 
 the shore. There are from 14 to 22 feet of water between Medea and 
 Zephyr Kocks, but the best channel is to the NW. of them both. 
 
 Buoys. — A can buoy, painted red and black in horizontal stripes, is 
 moored in a depth of 8 feet, 100 yards northward of the shoalest part 
 of Medea Kock ; it may be left on either hand by vessels of less than 
 
 12 feet draft. 
 
 A can buoy, painted black and red in horizontal stripes, is moored 
 in 18 feet water, 200 yards westward of Zephyr Eock ; it may be passed 
 on either hand. 
 
 Clearing Marks. — The marks for clearing Medea and Zephyr Kocks 
 are the leading lights and beacons on Shediac Island, and on the rail- 
 way wharf, Chene Point, which lead in 13 feet least water to the railway 
 wharf. Grandigue church in line with north extreme of Shediac Island, 
 bearing N. 53° W. (N. 31° W. mag.), leads westward of Zephyr and 
 Medea Eocks. 
 
 Cooagne Point can not be distinguished by a stranger, but Cassie 
 Point lighthouse, bearing westward of S. 28° W. (N. 6° W. mag.), leads 
 eastward of Medea Eock. 
 
 Shediac Harbor is the easiest of access on this part of the coast, 
 being the only on^ which a vessel in distress can safely run for, as a 
 harbor of refuge. It is superior to Oooagne and Buctouche in the 
 depth of water over the bar, and it is also much more extensive within 
 than the latter; the space in which shipping may be moored, in from 
 
 13 to 16 feet at low water, being % mile long and from 300 to 600 yards 
 wide. The depth that can be carried in under ordinary circumstances, 
 by a good pilot, is 14 feet at low water and 18 feet at high water, ordi- 
 nary spring tides; and the bottom in the channel is of mud and sand, 
 as it is also within the harbor. 
 
 The harbor is unsafe with the northeasterly gales of autumn, instances 
 having occurred when all vessels, whether at anchor or moored to the 
 wharf, were driven on shore; but, except on these rare occasions, it is 
 a safe harbor. 
 
 A swell may be felt in the harbor at high water in a NE. summer 
 gale, yet it is never sufficient to endanger a vessel with good anchors 
 and cables. Even in the bay just outside the bar, a well-found vessel 
 would ride safely in any moderate gale for the summer months. 
 
 The harbor lies between the south point of Shediac Island and Ohfene 
 Point (Point du Oh6ne), the latter bearing from the former S. 45° E. 
 (8. 230 E. mag.) f mile. From Ohfine Point a long wharf extends, on 
 which the railroad from Moncton terminates; a sandy bar also runs out 
 1,600 yards to the northward, and is dry for neatly half that distance 
 at three-quarters ebb. It is this bar, together with the shoal farther 
 out, o£f the SE. point of Shediac Island, which renders the harbor so 
 secure. 
 
 The wharf at Oh6ne Point has been enlarged by the addition of 
 another pier, making with the old pier a safe dock, and from the latter 
 
 ««*«. 
 
SHEDIAC HARBOR. 
 
 9T 
 
 in Medea and 
 11 both, 
 tal stripes, is 
 slioalest part 
 B of less than 
 
 »e8, is moored 
 [uay be passed 
 
 Zephyr Kocks 
 id on the rail- 
 to the railway 
 ihediac Island, 
 if Zephyr and 
 
 er, but Cassio 
 IV. mag.), leads 
 
 t of the coast, 
 ly run for, as a 
 Btouche in the 
 ctensive within 
 loored, in from 
 to 600 yards 
 circumstances, 
 igh water, ordi- 
 |mnd and sand, 
 
 bumn, instances 
 moored to the 
 occasions, it is 
 
 k NE. summer 
 good anchors 
 ^11-found vessel 
 souths. 
 
 1 and Oh^ne 
 Itmer S. 45° B. 
 larf extends, on 
 lir also runs out 
 that distance 
 [e shoal farther 
 the harbor so 
 
 Ihe addition of 
 1 from the latter 
 
 a wharf has been extended eastward, alongside which veMScls must 
 discharge their ballast. 
 
 The entrance between the north point of the bar and the edge of 
 the shoal water otf the island is the narrowest part of the channel 
 and only 250 yards wide, between the 12-foot lines. 
 
 Sliediao is a port of entry. 
 
 Tides. — The tides in Sliediac Bay are extremely complicated. The 
 establishment, at the only full and change period observed, was Oh. 
 Om. The highest tides occur at full and new moon, and rise 4 feet 
 above the lowest water. At other times the rise of tide is about 3 feet. 
 The low water occurs at intervals varying from one to 18 hours after 
 high water, and ranging from 3 inches to 4 feet, without any apparent 
 law. The streams generally are weak. ' 
 
 Pilots. — Pilotage is compulsory in Shediac Harbor. 
 
 Ice. — Shediac Bay is generally frozen over from the first week in 
 December until the end of April, being completely closed between 
 those dates. The first vessel arrives from sea about April 30 and the 
 last one leaves about December 8. 
 
 Buoys. — A black can buoy has been moored on the northern end of 
 the shoal south of Zephyr Bock and northward of Ohene Bank, and 
 near the line of Shediac Island beacon lights; the buoy lies in 17 feet at 
 low water. A red can buoy is moored, in 13 feet at low water, 200 
 yards to the northward of the line of the leading lights on Shediac 
 Island, with the hotel S. 8° W. (8. .30° W. mag.) It^^ miles. 
 
 The red can buoy at the intersection of the line of the leading lights 
 on the railway wharf with that of the leading lights on Shediac Island 
 is moored westward of the former and northward of the latter. It 
 must be left on the starboard hand entering the harbor in turning 
 from one line of leading lights to the other. 
 
 Three spar buoys, painted red, were moored westward of Chene 
 Bank, and immediately westward of the line of the railway wharf 
 leading lights, Gh£ne Point, in line in 1885. 
 
 Lights. — The beacons on Shediac Island are white, square towers UIO 
 feet apart N. 81° E. (S. 77° E. mag.) and S. 81° W. (N. 77° W. mag.), and 
 exhibit 30 and 52 feet above high water fixed white lights, which should 
 be visible 11 and 12 miles. 
 
 The leading lights at Shediac north channel are fixed red lights, G02 
 feet apart, 8. 11° W. (8. 33° W. mag.) and N. 11° E. (N. 33° E. mag.); 
 elevated respectively, 32 and 28 feet above high water, and visible 7 
 miles. They are exhibited on iron masts 20 and 28 feet high, with 
 white sheds at their base, on the northernmost part of Chene Point 
 (front light). 
 
 The leading lights at Shediao Harbor are exhibited on the Govern- 
 ment wharf, NW. end, and Gh6ne Point, south railway \7harf. Tlie 
 lightft are dxed white, and are shown from masts with :-'jetls. They 
 should be visible 7 miles. The rear light is about 031 feet 8. 15° W. 
 1151 7 
 
i 
 
 1^ 
 
 1 
 
 98 
 
 NORTHUMBERLAND 8TRAIT WEST RHORK, 
 
 The front light is eh'vated 32 
 
 (8. 37'^ W. mug.) from the frout light, 
 feet iiiul the rear 38 feet. 
 
 Shediac ViUage (locally known m The Cape) is on the southeastern 
 shore of Shediac Bay. The village contains 'four churches, the most 
 conspicuous from seaward being the Episcopal and Roman (Jatholic, 
 which are surmounted by spires and stand at the eastern end of the 
 village. The Methodist also has a spire, and is situated in the middle, 
 while the Presbyterian, a white building with a square tower, is built 
 near the western end of the village. Westward of Scoudouc River is 
 a Baptist church, a yellow building with a small tower, but, like the 
 Cape church, it is not visible from seaward. 
 
 Scoudouc and Shediac Rivers, in the SW. and NW. corners of 
 Shediac Bay, respectively, are Small streams navigable for boats for a 
 few miles to sawmills at the head of the tide. There are bridges 
 across each of these streams near their mouths, where there are oyster 
 
 beds. 
 
 Cbene Point (Point du OhCne) is a terminus of the Intercolonial 
 Railway, and the entrepot of trade to Prince Edward Island. A small 
 village has been built at Cht-ne Point, with a conspicuous hotel which 
 is surmounted by a tower and tlagstaft'; the place is much resorted to 
 for bathing in the summer mouths. 
 
 Water is very scarce at Shediac; it may be bought from a con- 
 tractor. At high water it may be obtained with difficulty from Scou- 
 douc River, but it is not very good. 
 
 SuppUes of all kinds may be obtained at Chene Point. 
 
 Coal.— About CO tons of coal are usually stored at Ghene Point by 
 the railway department, but any quantity can be procured from Pict^iu 
 
 in about one day. 
 
 Charges.— Pilotage, $ 1.50 per foot (compulsory) ; harbor master s fee, 
 $4; health visit, $5; tonnage dues, 2 cents per ton. 
 
 Trade.— The exports consist of lumber, salmon, potatoes, and oats. 
 
 Repairs.— There are no means of repairing vessels at Shediac. 
 
 Telegraph and Railways.— Chene Point is in telegraphic commu- 
 nication with all parts of Canada and the United States. It is con- 
 nected with Halifax, St. John, and Quebec by the Intercolonial Railway, 
 and, during the season of navigation, with Prince Edward Island by a 
 
 daily steamer. ^. „. j- 
 
 Orandigue Bank, with from 14 to 18 feet water, extends off Shediac 
 Point 2 miles, having the least water near its outer edge. This extensive 
 rocky bank is dangerous to vessels of large draft, which, however, will 
 pass outside it if they do not approach the shore nearier than the depth 
 of 5 fathoms at low water. 
 
 A rocky bank, with 10 feet least water, lies ESE. from the north 
 extreme of Shediac Island. 
 
 Light— From a square white tovrer, 27 feet high, erected on Oassie 
 Point, is exhibited a revolving white light every half minute. The 
 lifrht is 47 feet above high water, and should be visible 14 miles; 
 
8HEDIAC HARBOR. 
 
 9» 
 
 eli'vated 32 
 
 )utliea8tern 
 !8, the most 
 ,n Catholic, 
 end of the 
 the middle, 
 wer, is built 
 ouc River is 
 mt, like the 
 
 V. corners of 
 
 r boats for a 
 
 are bridges 
 
 re are oyster 
 
 Intercolonial 
 lud. A small 
 J hotel which 
 !h resorted to 
 
 i from a con- 
 ;y from Scou- 
 
 u'ue Point by 
 I from ricti^u 
 
 r master's fee, 
 
 )e8, and oats. 
 Shediac. 
 [aphic commu- 
 $8. It is con- 
 inial Hallway, 
 rd Island by a 
 
 is oft" Shediac 
 
 Chis extensive 
 
 however, will 
 
 than the depth 
 
 l-om the north 
 
 |;ted on Oassie 
 minute. The 
 L4 miles; 
 
 Anchorage. — There is good anchorage under Slu^liac Point in XW. 
 winds, in 17 or 18 feet, nidd bottom. 
 
 Directions. — Vessels approaching Hhediat; Harbor sliouhl, for the 
 first time, take a pilot; if one can not be obtained, tlie following direc;- 
 tions will lead in by day or night, but no other route than the one indi- 
 cated should be attempted : 
 
 The light on Cassie l^oint having been sighted, the center of the bay 
 should be steereil for and the lights or beacons on Shediac Island 
 brought in line, bearing S. Sr^ W. CS.IT^ W. mag.), faking care to 
 keep Oassie Point light bearing westward of N. IVJ'^ W. (N. 10° W. 
 mag.) until that leading mark is on. 
 
 Keep the Shediac Island lights or beacons in line until near the 
 northern red buoy, when the vessel's courso should be altered to the 
 southward in time to bring the leading lights or beacons on the railway 
 wharf in line, bearing S. 15'^ W. (S. 'M° W. mag.), just before reaching 
 the red buoy. This mark will lead up to the wharf; but if an anchorage 
 is sought by day, bring the cliflt" of Cape Brftl*' in line with the end of 
 the grass ott' CM'ue Point, bearing S. 78'^ E. (S. r>CtO E. mag. i, then steer 
 westward and let go the anchor; by night, proceed for rather more than 
 i mile with the railway wharf leading lights in line S. 15^ \V. (S. 'M° W. 
 mag.), and then anchor slightly eastward of that line. 
 
 Vessels from the northward may bring Chene Point range in line S. 
 11° W. (S. 33° W. mag.), and steer in on this range, passing west- 
 ward of Zephyr Kock until the Shediac Island range comes on, when 
 ])rocoeil as before directed. A place, locally known as the Deep Hole, 
 with 19 to 20 feet water, is ^ mile southwestward of the western red 
 buoy, on the mark of the wharf lights in line; vessejs anchor there to 
 complete their cargoes or to wait until the tide is high enough to enable 
 them to leave. The water shoals rapidly eastward of Deep Hole, to 10 
 and 11 feet on Chene Bank. 
 
 The beacons on Shediac Island are ditticult to distinguish from any 
 great distance, and those on the railway wharf, from which the inner 
 leading lights are shown, are often hidden by the masts of vessels lying 
 there. 
 
 The harbor is much more extensive for vessels of light draft than 
 has been mentioned, although encumbered by biillast heaps, and ves- 
 sels drawing 7 or 8 feet may be taken through the bay within the island 
 to the wharf at the village. 
 
 Cocagne Harbor has its entrance to the southward of Oocagne 
 Island, and between it and Eeiiouard Point, the latter being formed of 
 reddish sandstone cliffs 50 feet high. It is a very small harbor, and 
 the channel over the bar of sand, gravel, and sandstone is narrow and 
 crooked, with 10 feet at low or 14 feet at high water m ordinary spring 
 tides. Within the bar there are from 2i to 4 fathoms, in a very narrow 
 channel, for a distance of about ^ mile. Farther in the bay is shallow, 
 with oyster beds and mud flats, covered with from 4 to 6 feet water. 
 
100 
 
 NOKTHUMUEKLANI) STRAIT — WEST HIIOKK. 
 
 To enter thiH harbor, tliie weatber aud ii good pilot are absolutely 
 neet'Hsary. 
 
 Cocagne River enterM the head of the bay ^ mile Houtliward of the 
 church. It iH croHMt>d by a bridge JuHt within its entrance, and is uavi- 
 gable by boatH lor several miles. The shores of the river and bay are 
 well settled by fan d lies engaged in agriculture, together with lumbering 
 and shipbuilding to a lindted extent. 
 
 Buctouche Road, oft' the entrance of the Buctouche Kiver, aud in 
 the widest part of the (;haunel within the Outer Bar, is <iuite safe for a 
 vessel with good anchors aiul cables, the ground being a stilt' tenacious 
 clay, and the Outer Bar i)reventnig any very heavy sea ft'om coming 
 into the anchorage. It is here that vessels of too great draft of water 
 to enter the ri\ er lie moored to take in cargoes of lumber. In approach- 
 ing this auchorage there is nothing in the way of vessels that do not 
 draw too much water to pass the Outer Bar, excepting the North Patch ; 
 but larger vessels will tiud more water (not less than H\ fathoms) by 
 approaching Arom the northward, according to the following directions: 
 
 Lights. — There are two leading lights at 3 miles north of Dixon 
 Point, on the south side of the entrance to Buctouche Kiver. 
 
 The lights are fixed, white lights, elevated 41 and 30 feet above high- 
 water mark, and should be visible 12 and 11 utiles, respectively. Both 
 the lights are exhibited from white square towers; the western or 
 high light tower is 34 feet high, and the eastern one, which is on the 
 extreme of the point, 30 feet high. They bear from each other N. 19° 
 W. (N. .'jTo W. mag.) and 8. 79'^ B. (S. 57° E. mag.), distant 1,050 feet. 
 
 Two lighthouses are erected on Church (Indian) Point, on the north 
 side of Buctouche River, bearing N. 48° \V. (N. 2(1° W. mag.) and 8. 
 48° E. (8. 26° E. mag.), distant 1,980 feet from each other. 
 
 The southern light is a fixed white light, 23 feet above high water, 
 and should be visible 9 miles upon the bearing of the lights in line. 
 
 The northern or high light is a fixed white light, 53 feet above high 
 water, and should be visible when in line with the low light 12 miles. 
 
 Both lighthouses are small white square towers, 23 feet high, with 
 red roofs. 
 
 Directions. — Bring Buctouche steeple to bear to the southward of 
 8. 08° W. (west mag.), aud run inshore with it on that bearing, in order to 
 pass to the northward of the 2s'orth Patch. In running in, if the weather 
 be fjivorable, Cocagne steeple will be observed to open out to the west- 
 ward of Cocagne Island, so as to be seen between the latter and the 
 mainland; the course must be continued till the steeple comes in line 
 with the extreme of Dixon Point, which is a small, low, and rocky 
 peninsula of the mainland, 2^ miles to the southward of Buctouche 
 8audbar. Alter course immediately, running with Cocagne steeple and 
 Dixon Point in line, bearing 8. 5° W. (8. 27° W. mag.), and they will 
 lead close inside the Outer Bar and clear of a small shoal, which lies 
 bet^yeen it aud the shore, and on which there are not less than 2| 
 
 Bi 
 
BUCTOUCHK RIVER. 
 
 tm 
 
 ab8«lut«'ly 
 
 yard of tlio 
 iiul is navi- 
 nul bay are 
 I lumbenug 
 
 iv»ir, and In 
 te safe for a 
 ift" tenacitma 
 Tom coming 
 aft of water 
 In approach- 
 
 tliat do not 
 iJortb I'atcb; 
 
 fathoms) by 
 I g directions: 
 rth of Dixon 
 
 t above high- 
 
 tively. Both 
 
 e western or 
 
 icli is on the 
 
 other N. 79° 
 
 int 1,050 feet. 
 
 on the north 
 
 mag.) and S. 
 
 r. 
 
 e high water, 
 lits in line. 
 it above high 
 ;ht 12 miles. 
 set high, with 
 
 southward of 
 ^ng, in order to 
 
 if the weather 
 lut to the west- 
 latter and the 
 
 comes in line 
 |ow, and rocky 
 
 of Buctouche 
 rne steeple and 
 
 and they will 
 loal, which lies 
 It less than 2^ 
 
 fathoms. Take c^are not to hi, it tlic steeple in behind Dixon Point, as 
 the voHHel runs along the Hand bur, and imniediiitely aftf^r Huctimche 
 steeple opens out to the wostwaid of the Hnuill sainly islet whicii forms 
 the HW. i)oint of Hnctouche P:indbar, two white liglithonseH on the 
 mainland rome in lino N. TO"^ W. (N. 57'"' W. mag.), the vessel will he in 
 the best berth for anelioring. 
 
 Anchorage. — Anchor with the white lighthouses in line, bearing X. 
 79° W. (N. o7'"' VV. nuig.), and (!ocagne Kteeple open iibout its own 
 breadth to the eastward of I >ixon Point, in 3'^ or 4 fathoms at low water, 
 and with excellent holding ground. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Buctouche at 7h. Ora,; 
 springs rise i feet, neaps 2 feet. 
 
 Buctouche River enters the sea through the shallow bay within 
 the Buctouche Sandbar. The two white lighthouses by day, or lights 
 by night. Just mentioned, as pointing out the best anchorage in the 
 roadstead, are intended to lead m over the bar of sand and tiat sand- 
 stone, in the greatest depth, namely, 8 feet at low and 12 feet at high 
 water in ordinary spring tides; and when the two lights <m Church 
 (Indian) Point come in line N. 48° W. (N. 2(io W. mag.), steer from them, 
 and it will lead to the anchorage within the bar or on through the luir- 
 rows off (iiddis Point. Within the bar is a wide part of the channel, 
 in which vessels may ride safely in 2^ and '.\ fathoms over mud bottom; 
 off Giddis Point the channel becomes as difficult, narrow, and shallow 
 as at the bar. But the channel is so narrow, intricate, and encumbered 
 with oyster beds that written directions are useless, as the assistance 
 of a pilot is absolutely necessary to take a vessel safely into the river. 
 It is in its course through the bay that the Buctouche is so shallow and 
 intricate; higher up its channel is fi>ee from obstruction, and in some 
 places has 5 fathoms of water. 
 
 Having crossed the bar, a vessel may ascend about 10 miles farther, 
 and boats 13 or 14 miles, to where the tide water ends. One mile above 
 Buctouche church there is a bridge, but it is so constructed as to per- 
 mit the vessels which are built higher up the river to pass. There is 
 also a bridge over the southern and smaller branch. 
 
 The country on either side of the Buctouche is considerably higher 
 than at Eichibucto, the ridges attaining an elevation of about 200 feet 
 above the sea. The banks of the river are well settled, and the clayey 
 soil is very fertile. There are saw and grist mills at the head of the 
 tide. A few vessels are built in the river annually, and several visit 
 it for lumber; but it is a place of no great trade. 
 
 North Patch of rocks, with 12 feet least water, is small, with 5 fath- 
 oms close outside of it. It lies 2 miles off shore on the NE. point of 
 the Outer Bar of the Buctouche, with Cocagne steeple and the NW. 
 extreme of Cocagne Island in line, bearing S. 8° W. (S. 30° W. mag.), 
 the south end of Buctouche Sandbar S. 33° W. (S. 65° W, mag.) and 
 Buctouche steeple seen over the sand bar S. 70° W. (N. 82° W. mag.). 
 
102 
 
 NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT— WEST SHORE. 
 
 fix 
 
 i 
 p 
 
 Vessels will pass outside of it, if they do not come into less than 5 
 fathoms at low water. 
 
 Outer Bar of Buctouche River is a long ridge of sandy and rocky 
 ground, carrying 24 to 3| fathoms of water, and extending from North 
 Patch 7 miles, nearly to Cocagne. 
 
 Richibucto Head. -Off Richibucto Point, which is the SE. extreme 
 of the south beach, and 3J miles from the mouth of the Richibucto, a 
 reef of sandstone extends off shore for a mile from the high-water mark, 
 and continues 2 or 3 miles farther southward, to Richibucto Head, which 
 is of sandstone and clay cliffs, 50 feet high. 
 
 From Richibucto 1 oint, the SE. extremity of the Buctouche Sandbar 
 bears S. 22° E. (south mag.), and is distant 14J miles. There is nothing 
 requiring notice in the bay between them, excepting the small Chock- 
 pish River, affording shelter for boats at high wat«r. 
 
 Light— On Richibucto Head stands a square white tower, 50 feet 
 high, exhibiting at 70 feet above high water a fixed white light, which 
 
 should be visible 14 miles. . . r. • ^^ 
 
 Richibucto River is inferior only to the Lliramichi, either m the 
 distance to which it is navigable or in the depth of water over its bar. 
 It is annually visited by a considerable number of vessels for cargoes 
 of lumber. There are flourishing and rapidly increasing settlements on 
 its banks, as well as on those of its principal tributaries, the Aldouin, 
 the St. Nicholas, and the Molus or Molies Rivers. The population are 
 engaged in agriculture, lumbering, and shipbuilding; but they do not 
 prosecute the fisheries. Traces of coal are reported to have been found 
 in the sandstone, which forms the substratum of this and of all the 
 neighboring country. 
 The Aldouin enters on the northern side, about 2 miles within the 
 
 entrance of the river. 
 
 The entrance of the Richibucto is about 700 yards wide; it lies be- 
 tween two s«.T.''. >^ar8, several miles in length, called the north and south 
 beaches, on which there are sand hUls as high as 30 feet. Immediately 
 within the entrance there is a wide expanse of mud and weeds, nearly 
 dry at low water, excepting the channel of the river. On the north- 
 ern side, a shallow bay leads, within the north beach, to tke lagoons, 
 whilst on the south side, within the south beach, lies French Island, 
 and still farther to the SE., French Creek and Low Village, where there 
 is a church, visible in some directions from the sea. Within the wide 
 part just mentioned the breadth of the Richibucto is rendered irregular 
 by numerous bays on either side. Just below the town it is above 800 
 yards wide, but contracts to 300 yards If miles farther up, after which 
 it expands again for a considerable distance, and is nowhere less than 
 100 yards broad, nearly to the end of the navigation, although the 
 channel between mud banks, nearly dry when the tide is out, is much 
 narrower. Low cliffs of sandy clay are frequent on either side of the 
 river; but the adjacent country, although undulating, is everywhere of 
 
 li i l iBii ii T i « i <g « 
 
 i i ^ »WiM'rt' i iitmii i iB[irf( ii Wiaif««i «i i i «ti» i i 
 
T 
 
 RICHIBUCTO. 
 
 103 
 
 ) less than 5 
 
 dy and rocky 
 ig from Nortb 
 
 B SE. extreme 
 Bichibucto, a 
 h-water mark, 
 ;oHead,whicb 
 
 jucbe Sandbar 
 lere is notbing 
 a small Cbock- 
 
 tower, 50 feet 
 ite ligbt, wbiob 
 
 L, eitber in tbe 
 ter over its bar. 
 sels for cargoes 
 y settlements on 
 as, tbe Aldouin, 
 I population are 
 but tbey do not 
 have been found 
 and of all the 
 
 liles witbin tbe 
 
 wide; it lies be- 
 north and south 
 It. Immediately 
 id weeds, nearly 
 On tbe nortb- 
 to tbe lagoons, 
 Frencb Island, 
 [age, where there 
 Iwitbiu tbe wide 
 ludered irregular 
 |u it is above 800 
 up, after wbicb 
 Avbere less than 
 m, altbougb tbe 
 . is out, is mucb 
 ^itber side of tbe 
 is everywhere of 
 
 very small elevation, not exceeding 80, or at the utmost 100, feet above 
 the sea. 
 
 The Bicbibncto is navigable for boats nearly to tbe head of the tide, 
 being a distance of about 22 miles, following the stream, the general 
 direction being S W. Any vessel that can pass the bar may be taken 
 about 13 miles up tbe river, the depth in the channel varying in that 
 distance from 3 to 9 fatboms, over mud bottom. Smaller vessels may 
 ascend to witbin 2 or 3 miles of tbe bead of tbe tide, where tbe river 
 is quite shallow and rapid at low water. 
 
 Richibucto. — About a mile higber up, on the same side as the 
 Aldouin, stands the town of Richibucto (Liverpool). It has a church, 
 a chapel, courthouse and jail, etc., being the capital town of the county 
 of Kent. There is a church 1^ miles above the town, and opposite to 
 it, on the southern side of the river, a shipbuilding establishment, 
 together with a village of Micraac Indians, who are employed as labor- 
 ers and choppers. 
 
 The United States is represented by an sigent. 
 
 Lights. — The leading lighthouses erected to supersede the day bea- 
 cons on South Beach, Bichibucto Biver entrance, bear from each other 
 8. 39° W. (S. 61° W. mag.) and N. 39° B. (N. 61° E. mag.), distant 326 
 feet. The low lighthouse, 33 feet high, square, and painted white, 
 exhibits at 40 feet above high water a fixed white light. 
 
 The upper lighthouse, 43 feet high, an open frame square tower, and 
 painted white, exhibits at 44 feet above high water a lixed red ligbt. 
 
 These lights should be visible 12 miles; and kept in a line bearing 
 S. 39° W. (S. 61° W. mag.), lead through the channel and over the bar 
 at the river entrance. 
 
 The lights are moved to suit the bar. 
 
 The Bar of the Bichibucto is extremely dangerous, especially to large, 
 deeply laden, and dull sailing vessels outward bound in tbe fall of the 
 year. Taking advantage of the highest spring tide, and sailing at high 
 water, if the wind becomes unsteady or too ligbt, they .ire almost cer- 
 tain to be thrown ashore by the ebb tide, on the southeastern part of 
 tbe bar; and should a NE. gale occur, to be destroyed before they can 
 get off again. To take a ship in with a leading ;7ind and flowing tide 
 is attended with no other difficulty than that which arises from the 
 narrowness of the channel ; but in all cases the assistance of a pilot 
 is absolutely necessary, since the bar is subject to occasional changes 
 from the effect of heavy gales. The bar extends from the north beach, 
 for 2 miles to the eastward, parallel to the south beach ; there is a rock 
 in tbe eastern part of it, but the remainder is of sand, dry at low water. 
 
 No part of this bar extends to seaward so much as a mile from the 
 lighthouses, and it may be safely approached by the lead to 6 fathoms 
 water at any time of tide; but for the purpose of anchorage 9 fathoms 
 is a better depth, the bottom being there of fine brown and gray sand, 
 affording far better holding ground than farther inshore. The situa- 
 
 
 ..j^ti^^ 
 
104 
 
 NORTHUMBEELAND STRAIT WK8T SHORE. 
 
 tion of the narrow channel over the bar (IJ miles eastward from the 
 river's mouth) is indicated by the two white lighthouses on the south 
 beach and a large red buoy moored off in 3f or 4 fathoms at low water, 
 with the two lighthouses in line, distant not quite a mile. 
 
 The depth of water over the bar is 9 feet at low water, or 13 feet at 
 high water in ordinary spring titles, and is gradually becoming deeper; 
 and there is not a continuously greater depth for the lirst mile in from 
 the red buoy, the channel being from 100 to 180 yards wide between the 
 2fathom lines, excepting at the turn to the westward, which is the nar- 
 rowest part, and only 80 yards broad. Farther in the channel expands 
 in breadth to about 370 yards, increasing in depth to 3i fathoms; it then 
 shoals to 2J fathoms and contracts again to only 100 yards wide at the 
 north beach, where the depth is 5 fathoms, and the stream of tide 
 strongest, being about 2^ knots. About ^ mile within the north beach 
 the channel widens for a short distance to 400 yards, and has 3 to 4 
 fathoms water in it, with mud bottom. The depth increases farther in, 
 and is nearly 9 fathoms in some places. 
 
 Pilota.— The branch pilots of Kichibucto River are able, inteUigent, 
 and attentive to their duties. They keep a good lookout for vessels 
 from the beach at the mouth of the river. 
 Pilots are necessary. 
 
 Directions.— Having made the lighthouse on Richibucto Head, look- 
 out for the red buoy, and keep outside of it, in not less than 5 fathoms 
 water, until it and the two lighthouses come in lint., bearing about 8. 
 390 W. (S. 61° W. mag.); then steer in close past the buoy, keeping 
 the two lighthouses exactly in line, and looking out for the small red 
 buoys, which are placed along the southern edge of the bar, and must 
 be left on the right hand going in. Having run in about J mile with 
 the two lighthouses in line, the vessel will be within 400 yards of the 
 south beach, and the small red buoys along the south or inner side of 
 the bar will be seen to come in one with each other. Haul up 
 immediately, passing about 40 yards to the southward of the buoys. 
 
 Having run to the west (N. 68° W. mag.), between the bar and the 
 south beach, about 1^ miles, the channel becomes again very narrow, 
 and is marked by small buoys on either side, red on the starboard hand, 
 black on the port; but as these buoys might not be readily made out 
 by a stranger, bring the SW. point of the north beach to bear N. 67° 
 W. (N. 450 W. mag.), and steer for it, observing that the channel, which 
 is then only 100 yards wide, passes close to the north beach. As soon 
 as the vessel is abreast of this edge, steer to the SW. for J mile, when 
 there will be plenty of room to anchor in quite a secure harbor. The 
 small red buoys just mentioned are merely pieces of wood painted red, 
 and placed at convenient distances, according to the judgment of the 
 
 pilots. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, fUIl and change, at Richibucto River at 3h. 
 30m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2J feet. 
 
KOUCHIBOUGUAC BAY AND RIVER. 
 
 105 
 
 rd from the 
 )U the south 
 t low water, 
 
 »r 13 feet at 
 iiing deeper; 
 mile in from 
 between tlie 
 sh is tbe nar- 
 luel expands 
 loms; It then 
 s wide at the 
 ream of tide 
 ) north beach 
 d has 3 to 4 
 les farther in, 
 
 ,e, intelUgeut, 
 it for vessels 
 
 Headjlook- 
 lau 5 fathoms 
 •ing about S. 
 »uoy, keeping 
 jthe small red 
 >ar, and must 
 t J mile with 
 I yards of the 
 inner side of 
 er. Haul up 
 
 the buoys, 
 e bar and the 
 _ very narrow, 
 arboard hand, 
 idily made out 
 ■o bear N. 67° 
 shannel, which 
 ach. As soon 
 r i mile, when 
 
 harbor. The 
 •d painted red, 
 dgment of the 
 
 to River at 3h. 
 
 On the day of the full moon in July, 1839, there was only one lii^h 
 water, at 3h. 30m. a. m., and one low water, at 4 p. m. But toward tbe 
 time of neap tides, two high waters in 24 hours became apparent fur a 
 few days. There would seem to be two interfering tides, presenting 
 phenomena which it would require accurate and long-continued obser- 
 vations to explain. The rate of the tides in the river is from 1^ to 2 knots. 
 
 Kouchibouguac Bay is nearly 20 miles wide from Kichibucto Head 
 to Sapin Point. Its shores are exceedingly low, with sand bars and 
 beaches inclosing extensive and shallow lagoons, through which the 
 river Hows to the sea. Tlie shoal water (depths not exceeding 3 fath- 
 oms) extends off shore to a considerable distance in the northwestern 
 part of this bay, and there is foul ground, with as little as 3 fathoms 
 water, more than 2 miles out to the eastward from the mouth of the 
 Kouchibouguac River. Northeast gales send a heavy swell into the 
 bay, so that it will be prudent not to get embayed tliere, especially at 
 night or in a dull-sailing vessel. 
 
 Kouchibouguacsis River becomes rapid, shallow, and consequently 
 unnavigable above tbe point reached by the tide. It has saw and 
 grist mills and settlements on its banks. Of its two outlets through 
 the sand bars, the most northern, 3 miles southward of the Kouchibou- 
 guac, is only fit for boats, the channel leading to it through the lagoon 
 having become nearly filled up with sand and weeds. 
 
 Tbe river, after entering the lagoon and running for some distance 
 toward this outlet, turns to the southward, and continues its course 
 within the sand bar for a distance of 3 miles to the southern and main 
 outlet, which is called Big Cove, and is 6 miles south of the Kouchi- 
 bouguac and 3 miles north of the Richibucto River. The depth by a 
 narrow channel over the shifting bar of sand is or 10 feet at high 
 water in spring tides. There are 3 fathoms just within the sand bars, 
 firom one to 3 fathoms through the lagoon, and 2 or 3 fathoms for sev- 
 eral miles up the river. There is a communication by boats at high 
 water through the lagoons and within the sand bars, not only between 
 the Kouchibouguac and Miramichi Rivers, but also southward to Rich- 
 ibucto and northward nearly to Marsh River, 15 miles. 
 
 Kouchibouguac River, after flowing for more than a mile through 
 an extensive lagoon, nearly dry at low water in spring tides, enters the 
 sea by an outlet through sand bars about 9 miles SW.' from Bapin 
 Point. Its bar of sand not infrequently shifts in heavy easterly gales, 
 and the channel is at all times narrow and intricate. 
 
 A depth of 9 feet at high water and spring tides could be carried in 
 over the bar at the time of the Admiralty survey in July, 1839. 
 
 Large ships, which are occasionally built in this river, are taken out 
 Mght, and towed by a steamer to be fitted at Richibucto or Miramichi. 
 The banks of this river are well settled, and there is a saw mill at the 
 head of the tide. 
 
 The Tides rise fi-om 2^ to 4 feet, flowing about 8 miles up the river. 
 
1 
 
 106 NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT— WEST SHORE. 
 
 and affording a depth of from 2 to 3 fathoms through a very nam,w 
 and crooked channel, for a distance of 5 miles in from the bar. It was 
 high water at the full and change, in July, at about 4 a. m., but the 
 "diurnal inequality," belonging to two interfering tides, caused the 
 
 n. m. tide to nearly disappear. „ . ^ •*, . i„„ 
 
 Sapin Point is south H miles from Escuminac Point, with alow 
 
 shallow shore between. . 
 
 Sapin Ledge, of sandstone, and with 12 feet least water, is very dan- 
 gerous Ivinrdirectly in the way of vessels running alongslu.re. It 
 fhouM no be approached nearer than the depth of 9 fathoms m the 
 Stime, and at all times it should be remembered that the 5-fathom 
 Une of soundings is distant from it only about 400 yards. The ledge is 
 14 miles long, tast and west, and about i a mile wide between the 
 3 fathom lines, and its eastern or outer extremity bears S. 1 ° E. (S. (. 
 W. mag.) 6 miles from the lighthouse on Escuminac Point, and east 
 (S. «7o E. mag.) 2^ miles from Sapin Point. There is a depth of 3i 
 fathoms between it and the last-named point. 
 
a very narrow 
 
 e bar. It was 
 
 a. m., but the 
 
 )H, caused tbe 
 
 nt, with a low 
 
 «r,i8 very dan - 
 klougsliiJre. It 
 fathoms in the 
 it the Sfathom 
 I. The ledge is 
 e, between the 
 S. 17° E. (S. (P 
 Point, and east 
 a depth of 3^ 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND-NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT-NORTH SHORE. 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1066.) 
 
 Prince Edward Island is rendered extremely irregular by large 
 bays, inlets, and rivers, which penetrate the island so that no part of 
 It IS distant more than 7 or 8 miles from navigable water. Its shape is 
 an irregular <!rescent, concave toward the gulf, the northern shore form- 
 ing a great bay, 91 miles wide and 2ii miles deep, out of which the set 
 ot the tides and the heavy sea render it very difficult to extricate a 
 ship when caught in the NE. gales, which frequently occur toward the 
 lall ot the year, occasionally blowing with great strength, and at such 
 times proving fatal to many vessels. 
 
 In the interior of the island the most elevated ridges do not exceed 
 400 or at the utmost 500 feet above the sea, and the land is in general 
 much lower, especially near the coast, the prevailing feature being 
 undulating, and the alternation of hill and dale and inlet forming very 
 pleasing scenery. * ' 
 
 Prince Edward Island is part of the Dominion of Canada, but has a 
 provincial government for administering local aflfairs. The seat of the 
 local government is in Charlottetown. 
 
 Climate.— The climate is less severe than in Lower Canada- not 
 quite so cold m winter nor so hot in summer, being tempered by the sea 
 breezes; but, on the other hand, the advance of spring is checked by 
 northerly winds from the gulf, driving down ice, which sometimes fills 
 the strait as late as the middle of May, so that instead of the sudden 
 outbreak of vegetable litfe which is observed in Canada, it is here fre- 
 , quently retarded till the month of June is well advanced, and there is 
 seldom any settled warm weather much before July. 
 
 Fogs—The most important advantage of the climate to the seaman 
 IS the rare occurrence of the dense fogs which so frequently embarrass 
 him in other parts of the gulf, and which in Northumberland Strait are 
 seldom seen. It is worthy of remark that the prevailing SW. wind of 
 summer, which in the Bay of Pundy is generally accompanied by thick 
 tog, parts with its moisture in passing over the heated land of Nova 
 hcotia, and becomes a hot dry wind off its northern coast. It becomes 
 tempered in its passage over the water of the strait, heated and dried 
 again m some degree in passing over the island, but acquires a^ain its 
 moist and foggy character long before it reaches the coast of Labrador, 
 and not infrequently before it arrives at the Magdalen Islands. 
 
 107 
 
 
 
108 
 
 PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND SOUTH COAST. 
 
 Produce and Trade.— The inhabitants are almost exclusively 
 engafjed in agriculture and the breeding of horses and sheep. 
 
 The export trade of the island consists chiefly of agricultural prod- 
 uce, small quantities of lumber being also sent away. The fisheries 
 are prosecuted on the north shore. There are factories for canning and 
 preserving fish and meat. 
 
 The population in 1891 amounted to 109,078. 
 
 SOUTH COAST OF I'EINCB EDWARD ISLAND. 
 
 The Coast to the westward of Cape Bear (the 8E. point of the 
 island) to White Sands is formed of sandstone clift's, which are in some 
 places 40 feet high, without beach or landing, except at (luernsey Cove, 
 and from wliich the shallow water does not extend beyond 700 yards 
 except near Cape IJear. 
 
 Cape Bear will be known by the large rock, 12 feet high, which lies 
 close under its cliff's of red sandstone; and Murray Head, a mile 
 farther to the northward, by its forming the extreme northeastern 
 point of the cliffs, where they turn abruptly to the westward toward 
 Murray Harbor. 
 
 Bear Reef runs out to the eastward, from between Cape Bear and 
 Murray Head, J mile, to the depth of 3 fathoms, and one mile to 5 
 fathoms, and is composed of sandstone and large stones. There is but 
 little water over the greater part of this extensive and irregularly 
 shaped reef, which has 7 or 8 fathoms close to its edge, and is there- 
 fore dangerous to vessels rounding the cape at night or in foggy 
 weather, when they s'.iould not approach nearer than the depth of 10 
 fathoms, either to the eastward or southward of the reef. 
 
 Leading Marks.— There are no close leading marks for passing 
 eastward of this reef, but Panmure Head and Terras Point in line, 
 bearing N. 15° W. (N. 8° B. mag.), clear it at the distance of one mile 
 in that direction; at nigirt the light on Panmure Head must be kept 
 open of Terras Point. Gueriisey Point kept well open southward of 
 Black Rock Point will lead to the southward. 
 
 Light— The lighthouse, which stands on the headland of Cape Bear, * 
 is a white, square building, 46 feet high, with dwelling attached. A red 
 light, revolving every i minute, is exhibited at an elevation of 74 feet. 
 It should be visible 12 miles. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at Capr Be^r at 9h.; 
 springs rise 6 feet, neaps 3 feet. See Tidal stream, page 153. 
 
 Water.— At 700 yards southward of Murray Head there is a fine 
 little stream of fresh water worthy of notice, because there are so few 
 places on the island where a large ship can readily water. Boats can 
 land there in westerly winds, when vessels will find good anchorage 
 under the head. 
 
 Fishermans Bank is of sandstone, thinly covered with stone, gravel, 
 and broken shell. Within the depth of 10 fathoms it is 3 miles long 
 
t exclusively 
 leep. 
 
 niltural prod- 
 Tbe fisheries 
 r canuiug aud 
 
 point of the 
 ch are in some 
 uernsey Cove, 
 ond 7(K) yards 
 
 igh, which lies 
 
 Head, a mile 
 
 I northeastern 
 
 itward toward 
 
 3apeBear and 
 one mile to 5 
 There is but 
 nd irregularly 
 , and is there- 
 t or in foggy 
 lie depth of 10 
 f. 
 
 ks for passing 
 Point in line, 
 ice of one mile 
 . must be kept 
 1 southward of 
 
 I of Oape Bear, * 
 tached. A red 
 btion of 74 feet. 
 
 •■■ BeiT at 9h.; 
 
 )153. 
 
 there is a flue 
 
 ;here are so few 
 
 ;er. Boats can 
 
 rood anchorage 
 
 th stone, gravel, 
 is li miles long 
 
 FI8HEBMANS BANK— WOOD ISLANDS. ]09 
 
 fr^m /tn^T.?^" ^^^? """^^ ^''^^^^ ^'^^ ^^« ^^'"""^ "^'^tral part, with 
 from 4 to r. fatlioms at low water, covers scarcely half that space. From 
 
 f^H ^f Cf W mag.) 7^ miles; and there is another patch with 5 
 
 ^0 fathoms between this bank and Bear Reef, and in every Uher direct 
 t.on around it from 15 t« 20 fathoms. It is very darigeroL to ve els 
 of large draft when there is a heavy sea running, and should not tben 
 be approached nearer than the depth of 13 fathoms, which in most 
 
 stuTo" water!" ' '"'''*''" ''^'' "°^ ""'^ '''''' ^'^^^ * '"''« f-"" 'I 
 The steeple of the English church at Georgetown, in line with Pan 
 
 Black Hock and Guernsey Points, ^ and 2 miles, respectively 
 
 rth'r T^ "'.'^T ''"""' ''^^' *^^ ^'^^^^ ^"^'"^^ -l^-ve water S 
 oflf their cliffs as a so has Oape Bear; but the rock off the cape is muclJ 
 higher than the others, its summit being about 12 feet above the sea at 
 bighwater whilst Black Rock is only 7 feet, and the other stilMower 
 h«rr? ^^f J^ * settlement, receiving its name from the sandy 
 beach of a small bay, 4^ miles 8 W. of Cape Bear. There is a sandspit 
 there, just covered at low water, which affords some shelter to boats 
 and a sandy shoal extending J mile off shore. ' 
 
 The edge of this shoal is so steep and the water near it so deep that 
 the lead gives no warning; but if Black Rock Point (the extreme to 
 the eastward) be kept open to the southward of Guernsey Point (the 
 west side of Guernsey Cove), it will lead to the eastward of the shoah 
 
 ftsstZrdge." '"''''""" ""• ^«° ^•(^^- ^3° E-g.), lead along 
 
 From White Sands to Little Sands, 6 miles to the westward, the sand- 
 stone cliffs are 40 to 50 feet high aud quite bold. 
 
 Wood Islands, 9 miles westward of White Sands, are now only in 
 part covered with timber. They are two small islets, and with their 
 connec mg sand bars are 1,400 yards in length, parallel to the shore, 
 frZ "? ?*^ "*'* ^'^^^""^ '*^"* * "»"«• The eastern or larger islet 
 
 IITJ ! ^"^ *",'^ *^^"* ^^ ^*"* ^'^^' '^^^y both present cliffs of 
 sandstone to seaward, and are united to the shore by a long sand bar at 
 their western extremity. The space between the islets and the shore 
 forms a secure boat harbor, having an entrance from the eastward, but 
 It IS all nearly dry at low water. • 
 
 The Anchorage to the eastward of the islands, within the distance 
 
 ?Ll? i!' ? V ^ ^"?' **^P"' from 3 to 9 fathoms, is good in NW. winds, 
 Indian Rocks breaking the sea. ' 
 
 Light-The lighthouse on the south point of Wood Island is a souare 
 building 40 feet high, with dweUing attached, and exhibit at ancle 
 vation of 80 feet a fixed white light, which should be visible 15 miles. 
 
 i.mm 
 
110 
 
 PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND — SOUTH COAST. 
 
 «# 
 
 ,1 
 
 
 Indian Rocks, considering them to be bounded by the deptli of 3 
 fathoms, occupy a space U nnles in length, Pa-llel to t - «ho.e b.. 
 tween Wood Islands and Bell Point, and f, mile in breadth. They are 
 of sandstone, dry to a considerable extent at low wa^r, «" ^ ITJ 
 southern edge is 1 J miles oif shore. The SE. point ot the Woo.l Islands 
 noJ brought'to bear to the eastward of N. 45o E. (N «Ho E. mug^, w.ll 
 lead to the southward of their SE. extreme, which hears S. 34o \\ . (S. 
 570 W. nmg.) nearly a mile from the west end ^I *]»« ^"f^^f «,"^^' 
 MacDougall and Pinette Points in one, bearing N. 41o W. (N. 18 W. 
 mag.), will lead i mile westward of the westi-rn extreme, which bears 
 from Bell Point S. 34° E. (S. U^ E. mag.) 1? miles; but Pmette Point 
 can not always be distinguished. f ^^ , . „ 
 
 Caution -The Wi*nt of sutticient leading marks, and the deep water 
 80 close to the southward, would render these rocks ..xcee.lingly dan- 
 gerous by day as well as by night if there were not nearly always 
 breakers or a rippling to be seen on the part which dries. In standing 
 toward them at night, if Wood Islands light is not seen, observe tha 
 there are 10 fathoms within i mile of their southen. ed-e, and that U 
 fathoms is near enough to their SE. extreme and 10 ftttlumis to thoir 
 SW. point, taking care not to get between the latter and the Bell Point 
 Keef, where there are also 10 fathoms. 
 
 There is a channel between the Indian Rocks and the shore more 
 than A iuile wide, and carrying from 4 to 16 fathoms water; but it is of 
 no us"o to shipping, the soundings being irregular, with rocky or 
 gravelly bottom and strong tides. , . ^, 
 
 Leading Marks.— The extreme of the land to the eastward and the 
 inner side of the Wood Islands in one will lead in between the lieli 
 Point Reef and the rocks, and clear their northern <dge m 5 fathoms; 
 and the line of Stewart and Bell Points in one, bearing N. 63° W. (^. 
 40° W. mag.), passes along the NB. side in 3 fathoms; the former of 
 those points must therefore be shut in behind the latter to pass between 
 the rocks and the Wood Islands. «. ^ j. t, ■ „ 
 
 Buoy.-A whistling buoy is moored in 10 fathoms off Indian Rocks. 
 The buov is red and lies with Prim Point lighthouse N. 47° W. (N. 24° 
 W mag.) and Wood Island lighthouse N. 53° B. (N. 76° B. mag.). 
 
 Tides —The tidal streams are strong in the deep water just outside 
 the Indian Rocks, frequently running at the rate of 3 knots per hour. 
 It is high water, full and change, at 9h. 45m. nearly; springs rise 6 
 
 feet, neaps 4 feet. . ._ 
 
 BeU Point, a mile SE. of Stewart Point, is a clift of sandstone 40 
 feet in height. The shallow water is continuous from the Rifleman 
 Reef to this point, from which it extends a mile to the 3-fathom line, 
 having 9 or 10 fathoms close to its edge. 
 
 Rineman Reef, of sandstone, extends 2 miles westward from Stewart 
 Point On the extreme outer point of this reef, in 3 fathoms, the hght 
 on Prim Point bears N. 51o W. (S, 28o W. mag.) 8 mUes. Just witain 
 
the depth of 3 
 » the »hoie bii- 
 dth. They are 
 Iter, aiul their 
 ; Wood Ishuuls, 
 f3 E. mujf.), will 
 'R S. 340 W. (S. 
 Wood Islands; 
 W. (N. 18° W. 
 ne, which bears 
 t Pinette Point 
 
 the deep water 
 xeeeilingly daii- 
 t nearly always 
 >8. In standing 
 en, observe that 
 Ige, and that 1 J 
 fathoms to thoir 
 id the Bell Point 
 
 the shore more 
 ater; biit it is of 
 , with rocky or 
 
 lastward and the 
 >etween the l?ell 
 Ige in 5 fathoms; 
 ug N. 63° W. (N. 
 is; the former of 
 p to pass between 
 
 )ff Indian Rocks. 
 !f , 470 W. (N. 240 
 JG° B. mag.)- 
 ater just outside 
 3 knots per hour. 
 y, springs rise 6 
 
 f of sandstone 40 
 ■om the Rifleman 
 ;Ue 3-fathom line, 
 
 vard from Stewart 
 fathoms, the light 
 liles. Just within 
 
 RIFLEMAN REEF — PINETTE HARBOR. ^ j 
 
 tliis point of the reef there are 8 feet water, and halfway between that 
 and the shore only o fo.t, while between those and ether shallow 
 patches there are 12 feet at low water. »»aii.m 
 
 ,i«f« "**?""~;''^*' ''®'^' "■'■«^'»''"- «"'"Hli"g« off Rifleman Reef, and the 
 deep water close to it (16 fathon.s within less than ^ n.ile, while he e 
 sa n,uch less depth farther out), render it one of the grea est dan ers 
 in<f wlr M^'f ^'^'f-''^^- l>-nng<,f the lig„ts',.n Prin. S 
 
 greatly assist vessels ,n avoiding it, bnt at all tin.es, either by night 
 or by day ami especially in thick weather, it shouli be approached 
 with care There are no leading marks to clear its west extre . e, which 
 than fa^n'T f--^«'/'»t the soundings give better warning h^e 
 ^an farther to the southward. The wooded point within and opposite 
 Wood Island ,n one with Black Point, the extreme to the eastward 
 bearing east (S. G7o E. mag.), Just clear tl.e sonti.ern side of the rS' 
 but the safest plan, when approaching it from the southward, wilH e 
 
 I .r T" '*' **•* "•^'""'"« «^" ^''« ''""1 t« the eastward apnea s 
 within tl^e Wood Islands, bearing N. 81° e. (S. 7(io e. mag.), v^ tC 
 vessel will be 1^ miles from the reef. 
 
 When standing toward the reef at night, take care that the light on 
 Prim Point is not brought to bear to the westward of N. 450 W (N '> " 
 mag.). If the light is not seen, a close attention to the soundings can 
 alone insure safety. It must be borne in mind, in standing across 
 the strait from the southward toward the reef, that after having nd 
 upward of 20 fathoms toward the southern shore, the soundinjfs will 
 decrease to between 11 and 9 fathoms for several miles, and 1 1"; s« 
 den y increase again to from 1 4 to 10 fathoms. When the vessel arrives 
 at this deep water she will be less than a m^le from the reef, and if she 
 ventures across it to 10 fathoms she will be only 000 yards fvoru its edge! 
 nfrbnl R^^e'. ^h'cl';^ only flt for boats, is 3 miles SE. from Pinette 
 entX a 'n^^e." "'^'^ ™°« ^^ ^""^'^"^^^ ^^^"^' ^*« ^^^ P^-t of 
 Pinette Harbor, 4 miles eastward from Prim Point, has only 2 feet 
 at low water over its rocky and exceedingly dangerous bar It is 
 therefore, flt only for small schooners, although itTas from 3 t^ 2 
 fatlK.ms m its narrow channel, which runs in several mill through 
 1., «f n r** r"'*'' ^'^ ^* ^"^ ^*^^' «°d then divides into sev 
 and tt p"" ?r«f ''; '^^' ^^' '' "^^'•^y ^ °^"« ««* fr«"» tl'e entrance. 
 ?n1 1, «*^f ^^^'« r«««l^ to ^onWe that distance, their outer point 
 
 S^LftTth'''^'^'"^* ''"^^•'*^°*'" ^«y«°*l *»»«""« joining Prim 
 Point, and the extreme to the southeastward. There are only 9 feet 
 
 water just within this point, and only 3 feet at no great distance the 
 bottom being rock. These shoals are, therefore, very dangerous a.ul 
 shouldnotbeapproached nearer than thelow-waterdeUofTSom^^ 
 
112 
 
 PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND — SOUTH COAST. 
 (H.O. Chart No. 1WJ8.) 
 
 Hillsborough Bay, having in it the principal harbor and capital 
 town, and, being the outlet of an extensive inland navigation, is the 
 most important aH well as the largest of any in Prince Edward Island. 
 
 Lights— Prim Point— The lighthouse on Prim Point, the BE. i»oint 
 of Hillsborongh Bay, is conical, 55 feet high, and white. It stands at 
 100 yards within the 8W. extreme of the point, and exhibits, at an 
 elevation of 6« feet, a tixed white light, which should be visible 12 
 miles. It is of the greatest use to vessels, especially when approaching 
 ftom the eastward, guiding them, by its bearing, cleai of the Rifleman 
 and Pinette Shoals, and enabling them to enter the bay in the darkest 
 
 "'naBxard Point leading lights are both fixed red liglits, visible 
 
 through a small arc on each side of the line of direction when in one. 
 
 The front or lower light is elevated 46 feet, and should be /isible 8 
 
 miles 
 
 The light is shown from a square whiti? building, 47 feet high, with a 
 brown roof, standing on Haszard Point, 35 feet ftom the coast. 
 
 The back or high light is 126 feet above high-water mark, and should 
 be visible 12 miles. The lighthouse building is in all respects similar 
 to the front onej it is in rear of the farm buildings on Bellevue farm, 
 at 2,244 feet N. 20° E. (N. 43° E. mag.) from to« other. 
 
 St Peters Island.— On the south side of St Peters Island, an inter- 
 mittent white light is exhibited at 70 feet above high water, from a 
 square white building, 38 feet high. 
 
 The light is visible between S. 62° W. (S. 85° W. mag.) through north 
 to S. 56° E. (8. 33° E. mag.) for 10 miles. 
 
 Blockhouse Point— The lighthouse on Blockhouse Point, west side 
 of entrance to Charlottetown Harbor, is a square tower, 42 feet high, 
 painted white, and exhibits at an elevation of 56 feet a fixed white 
 light, which should be visible 12 miles. 
 
 Brighton Beach.— Two red fixed leading lights are exhibited on the 
 eastern side of York Jtiver. 
 
 Both lights are shown from skeleton towers with their southern faces 
 closely slatted so us to make conspicuous day marks, and surmounted 
 by wooden lanterns. The towers are painted whit« and the lanterns red. 
 The outer (southern) towei', placed on the NW. corner of the break- 
 water, is 40 feet high; and the light, 41 feet above high-water mark, 
 should be seen over a .small arc on each side of the alignment 7 miles. 
 The inner tower is ao feet high and stands on the old Asylum grounds, 
 42.5 yards N. 23° W. (north mag.), of the outer tower. The light is 77 
 feet above high-water mark, and is visible, over a small arc on each side 
 of the lights in line, 9 miles. 
 
 Note.— These lights are maintained during the season of general 
 navigation, and at such times in winter as any steamers are running to 
 Charlottetown. 
 
 i .iHiiiiiaiii 
 
nilXSIJOKOUOH HAY. 
 
 113 
 
 md capital 
 tioii, is the 
 ard Island. 
 ,e 8E. point 
 It stands at 
 libits, at an 
 le visible 12 
 upproaching 
 D\io Rifleman 
 I the darkest 
 
 ghts, visible 
 
 wln/n in one. 
 
 be .'isible 8 
 
 t high, with a 
 
 coast. 
 
 :k, and should 
 
 spects similar 
 
 Jellevue farm, 
 
 land, an inter- 
 water, from a 
 
 through north 
 
 joint, west side 
 
 ., 42 feet high, 
 
 a fixed white 
 
 shibited on the 
 
 I southern faces 
 ad surmounted 
 tie lanterns red. 
 J of the break- 
 th-water mark, 
 
 Inment 7 miles, 
 aylum grounds, 
 [rhe light is 77 
 lire on each side 
 
 Ison of general 
 are running to 
 
 Buoys. — Oil rntiMJii); (Miarlottt^town lliirlior, iimI buoys must be left 
 on stilrlioiinl iind l>lii«-k buoys on port liiiiKJ. 
 
 Caution. — Tlu' iMioys in this liurhur iin- li<>(|m>iitly out of position; 
 tlu'rcloic in «'I»'iir \v«'iitli(>i use tlic IciHlin^ uimI cU-aiin^' niiiiks. 
 
 East Side of Channel. — Prim l'(»iiit, is low. wiili rlills of sinidstonc 
 10 to 1.*) t't>t't liigli, and iiMy 1>(> rocogiiizod b\ tlio li;;litliousu. I 'rim 
 IslaiiH. wliit'li has also lo\v clitTs, is distant I 1 miit's XK. Iroin t\u' 
 extremity ol tiic point, ami is niiitod to its uorlli side by .sand beafiii's, 
 imlosiii^ inai'shy ponds. 
 
 Prim Reef, of samlsioiii', runs out to tlio wcstwanl, both from tlic 
 island and the point, so as to foini a IoiK(m1 n-cf, nitli very uih-vcii 
 .sonmliiifjs; its western point, in li fatlionis, is west ..' miles from I he 
 liglitlKMisu, and the other point SW. by W, 1 1 mile.s: hut if the reef is 
 (•oiisi(UM<'d as bonmb'd hy the dejith of ."> fathmns. it is much more 
 extensive, leaehiii;^ out to the distaii>e of .'5 miles. 
 
 Buoy. — A luioy, paintj'd red, mariis the western extreme of I'rim 
 Keefs; it lies LJ,',, miles from I'rim Point li<;htlionse. 
 
 Clearing mark. — The old Scotch ehiireh. formerly a eleaiinjj mark 
 for this reef, has lu'eii snjierseded by a new jjiaystone e<liliee with a 
 spile, to the southward of the old building:. Tliis color prevents it 
 from beiiifj seen as far as Prim I'eef, but it may he used as aeleariiiK' 
 mark for Fitzroy Kock by beir^i kept just open west of Ibittery Point; 
 therefore, the red buoy on the extrenuty of Prim lieef and the lead 
 must b(! the main dependence, the sound iiiffs, combined with the bear 
 mix of the lijjht, beiufj amply sufficient for roiiiuling tiie reef, as will be 
 seen in the chart. 
 
 Governor Island, lyiiip: in the middle of llillsliorou^h Bay, is low, 
 in great part wooded, based upon sandstone, and has dangerous shoals 
 round it on all sides. 
 
 Governor Shoals, extending from (lovernorlshiud to the SW., and 
 adding greatly to the daiificis of the navigation, reipure especially to 
 bo noticed. Stretching out from the west eyd of the island, the sand 
 stone reef Is dry at low water for the tirst i mile, and has less than .'J 
 fathoms for an equal distance farther; after which rocky and irregular 
 soundings continue to the west extreme of the shoals, in 5 fathoms, 
 distant 2 miles from the island. 
 
 Buoy. — A bell buoy is moored in 4 fathoms, 200 yards within the west 
 extreme of the shoals. 
 
 Fitzroy Rock, with 20 feet least water, lies about 200 yards to 
 the eastward of t he above buoy, and was considered the principal dan- 
 ger off" the ishind until the discovery of the much more dangerous 
 rocky patches which are scattered over these shoals farther to the 
 southward. 
 
 Of these patches, the Huntley Rock, bearing S. ~>^ E. (S. 18° W. mag.), 
 13 miles from the west end of Governor Island, has the least water, 
 namely, IL' feet at low water: but there are others, with from 17 to 22 
 '115 1 8 
 
114 PRINCE KDWARn ISLAND— BOUTH COAST. 
 
 feet water, h« f«r out as L'i milen, and the SW. extreme of the Kl.oals 
 i„ 5 fatl.o...H \H .listuut 3i mileK from the island. The new ScoteU 
 church, which .nay be known by ItH spire, and Battery I'oint bearing 
 JJ 70 W (N 1«^ 10. niaj,'.), leads along and clears the west side ot tue 
 Governor Sl'ioals in r> fathoms, excepting the small portion of the west 
 extreme to the westward of the buoy. 
 
 On the eastern side of the channel into Charlottetown Harbor, to 
 the northward of (lovernor Island, the shallow water is continuous, 
 from Sea Trout Voiut, at the entrant^e of the harbor, to Governor 
 Island, there being only a passage for boats or small craft between 
 that island and the land north of it. The edge of the bank, in 5 fath^ 
 oms, runs to the south from Sea Trout Point to abr.-ast the Spithead 
 buoy; conse.,uently parallel, in this part, to the bank on the opposite 
 side, leaving a channel with 7 to lli fathoms water, and eituer A imle 
 or i mile wide, according as It is conceived to be bounded by the 5 
 or ;Vtathom line of soundings. , . ^, 1 « 
 
 Sauaw Shoal, with 10 feet least water, approaches close to the edge 
 of the bank where it is most steep. Battery and Sea Trout Points in 
 one bearing N. 2;P E. (north mag.), form an excellent mark for this 
 si.le of the channel, leading along the edge of the bank, in 44 fathoms 
 least water, from near Sea Trout Point to i mile beyond the Spithead 
 buoy on the opposite si.le; but it had better not be followed farther to 
 the southward in a large ship, although smaller vessels may do so, 
 until (iovernor Island and Gallows Point are tondiing, bearing m mind 
 that it tinally leads over the reef off the west end of the island. 
 
 West Side of Channel.-St. Peters Island, lying off the western 
 point of entrance to Hillsborough IJay, is rather more than 3 miles in 
 circumference, and of very moderate height, having cliffs of red clay 
 and sandstone. ;5.> Ceet high, along its eastern shore. There are several 
 farms on either side, but the central parts of the island are thickly 
 wooded. It is .joined to Rice Point, the western point of the bay, by 
 
 sands dry at low water. 
 
 Shallow water extends off this island H miles to the SW. and south, 
 but the soundings, deepening out gradually, attord ample guidance m 
 that part. Farther eastward St. Peters Shoals become much more 
 extensive, stretching out 3^ miles NE. by E. from the NE. point ot the 
 island For the first 2 miles of that distance, St. Peters Spit of san 
 dries out, affording shelter to St. Peters Road which is fit only for small 
 vessels, having only from 9 to 12 feet at low water. The Spithead, a 
 rocky shoal, with 8 feet least water, lies off the end «f SJ; ^^^^^^ ^pit 
 and extends to within 4 mile of the east extreme of the St. Peters Shoals, 
 where the Spithead buoy is moored in 3 fathoms. 
 
 Caution— The 5-fathom edge of the bank, forming the western side 
 of the channel into Charlottetown Harbor, trends northward 24 miles 
 from the Spithead buoy to about 20(? yards off Blockhouse Point, at 
 the entrance of the harbor. The edge of the St. Peters Shoals may 
 
3= 
 
 CHARLOTTKTOWN HARHOR. 
 
 115 
 
 of the Hhortls 
 B new Scotch 
 'olnt, benrlng 
 ,gt side of the 
 ,u of the west 
 
 m\ Unrbor, to 
 is c()Jitimioiw» 
 , to Governor 
 craft between 
 »ank, in 5 fath- 
 t the Spithead 
 >n the opposite 
 1 eitlicr h ini^« 
 aniU'd by t\ie 5 
 
 ilose to the edge 
 Trout Points in 
 t mark for this 
 k, in 44 fathoms 
 nd the Spithead 
 ilowed farther to 
 isels may do so, 
 (bearing in mind 
 
 10 island. 
 
 ott" the western 
 than 3 miles in 
 
 jUrta of red clay 
 Irhere are several 
 jland are thickly 
 
 ,t of the bay, by 
 
 L> SW. and south, 
 Inple guidance in 
 jome much more 
 NE. point of the 
 Iters Spit of sand 
 fit only for small 
 The Spithead, a 
 ,f St. Peters Spit, 
 St. Peters Shoals, 
 
 the western side 
 nthward 24 miles 
 Ickhouse Point, at 
 leters Shoals may 
 
 be safely followed by the lead in .'» fathoms as far in as the Spithead 
 buoy; alter wliicOi the bank becomes steep, and must be approached 
 with caution inn large vessel. 
 
 Trout Rock, with 7 feet least water, lies 400 yards within the edge 
 of tlie bank, and a long ^ mile from IMockhouse Point. 
 
 Charlotteto^Tn Harbor is 000 yards wide at entrance, between the 
 cliflts of S«'a Trout and Hlockhcuise Points; but shallow water, extend- 
 ing from both shores, reduces the iiavigable width of the channel, reck- 
 oning from the depth of •'! fathoms, to abont loO yards; and as the 
 shoals are very stcei), it would rerjiiire to be well buoyed before a ship 
 of large draft could beat in or out with safety. (Jlitls of red sandstone, 
 from 10 to 'M) feet high, form the shores on either side, the land rising 
 gradually from them in undulations, and being partly cultivated and 
 partly wooded. A liglitiumse and signal post stand on Blockhouse 
 Point, the west point of entrance. The next point of clitt" on the west 
 side of entrance is Alchorn Point, and at the distance of ^ mile from 
 the lighthouse are the remains of Andierst Fort, on the hill, 'Xi feet above 
 high water. On tlie same side, north of Alcliorn Point, is Warren 
 Cove, and, lastly, Canseau Point, 1.^ miles from the lighthouse. 
 
 Canseau Spit extends off Canseiiu Point 700 yards, and will be 
 cleared by keeping tlie lighthouse just open, clear of Alchorn Point, 
 observing that the extremes of the cliffs of Blockhouse and Alchorn 
 Points in one lead over the point of the shoal in 1(5 feet at low waj;er. 
 
 Canseau Spit Buoy, painted black, marks the eastern extreme of 
 Canseau Spit. 
 
 On the eastern side of the entrance and leas than a mile within Sea 
 Trout I'oint is Battery Point, with its shoal, the latter running out 400 
 yards and having on its extreme point a red buoy, moored in 3 fathoms 
 at low water. Outside that dei>th, on either side, the water deepens 
 abruptly, and there are 12 fathoms in the middle of the channel. The 
 belfry of St. Dunstan college, in line with the flagstaff at Government 
 house, leads clear of the shoal oft' Battery Point in 10 fathoms and at 
 the distance of 120 yards. 
 
 Three red piles mark the shallow ground off Battery Point (August, 
 1877). 
 
 Middle Q-round. — Within the harbor, in addition to the flats of mud 
 andjWeeds extending oil" shore, there is Middle Ground, with 17 feet 
 least water. When on this 17-foot patch the west turret of the tower 
 of the Wesleyan chapel (built of brick and the turrets crowned with 
 high skeleton work) is just shut in with the edge of the Eomau Cath- 
 olic church tower. 
 
 The lunatic asylum, just open eastward of the end of the railway pier 
 at Charlottetown, bearing N. 37° E. (N. 60° E. mag.), leads southward 
 and eastward of Middle Ground. 
 
 Immediately within Battery and Canseau Points, which are the inner 
 points of entrance, the channel expands into a fine harbor, having depth 
 
116 
 
 PRINCE EDWARD IST.AND SOUTH COAST. 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 t 
 
 ami space sufficient for any number and description of vessels. Tn sail- 
 ing in, York Eiver will be seen running in to tlie northwestward, the 
 Hillsborough River stretching away to tlie NK. as far as the eye can 
 reach and I":niot liiver running in to the southwestward. Tlie conflu- 
 ence of the streams of these three rivers between Canseau Spit and the 
 mouth of York River forms the Three Tides, where there is excellent 
 anchorage, used occasionally by laden vessels preparing for sea, the 
 usual anchor'ige beiug ott' the wliarvcs of the town, where the channel 
 is 550 yards wide and carries nearly 10 fathoms water. 
 
 Of the three rivers which unite in the harbor, the Hillsborough is the 
 largest, being navigable for vessels of large drait lor 7 or 8 miles, and 
 for small vessels 14 miles above Charlottetown, where there is abridge 
 L' miles from the head of the river. There is a ptu'tage of less than a 
 mile across from the Hillsborough near its head to Savage Harbor, on 
 the north coast of Prince Edward Island. York River, the smallest of 
 the three, is crossed by Poi)lar Island bridge, 2^ miles from its month. 
 Elliot River may be ascended 4 or 5 miles by large vessels and 9 or 10 
 miles by small craft and boats. The shores of all three rivers are 
 settled, and the counti-y generally fertile. 
 
 Charlottetown, the <;apital of Prince Edward Island, is advanta- 
 geously situated on the north bank of Hillsborough River, a short dis- 
 tance within the entrance, and at the point where the deepest water 
 approaches nearest to the shore, the wharves, however, still requiring 
 to be 240 yards long to reach the edge of the channel. The city is well 
 laid out, with spacious squares and wide streets at right angles to each 
 other, and contains several fine buildings. 
 
 The provincial building occupies the center of the public S(iuare,aud 
 is flanked on either side by the law courts and post-oifice, both sub- 
 stantial brick structures. The market house, a large wooden building, 
 with a belfry at the west end. is west of the post-office, while St. Paul's 
 church, a wooden building with a spire, occupies the east end of the 
 square. The Presbyterian church, a handsome stone building, is at the 
 NW. end of the toN.n; and a convent, built of brick, with a small belfry 
 at the top, is conspicuous from the harbor. The Romau Catholic ca the- 
 dral, a wooden building with a large guilt cross at the top of the spire, 
 and bishop's palace, of stone, near it, also show prominently. West of 
 the town stands Government house. The lunatic asylum, a fine build- 
 ing of stone, with a high tower, stands just north of Falcon Point. 
 The railway station is at the east end of the town, and may be known 
 by the wharf in connection with it, on Avhich stand large chocolate- 
 colored warehouses. St. Dunstou college stands on a hill 150 feet 
 high, 1^ miles to the northward of the town. 
 The United States is represented by a consul and vice-consul. 
 Population.— In 1S91 there were 11,374 inhabitants. 
 Telegraph.— Charlottetown is in telegraphic communication witli 
 the principal towns and ports in Prince Edward Island, also with 
 Canada and the United States. 
 
 ^-m^itr^-tii^m'-^rri}-- 
 
r. 
 
 essol.'!. Tn sail- 
 liwestward, tlio 
 as tlie oye can 
 (1. Tlie t'oiitlu- 
 au Spit iiiul the 
 ere is excellent 
 iig for sen, the 
 ere the channel 
 
 Isborou{>h is the 
 or 8 miles, and 
 here is abridge 
 e of less than a 
 'age Harbor, on 
 , the smallest of 
 from its mouth. 
 isels and 9 or 10 
 liree rivers are 
 
 nd, is advanta- 
 A^^er, a short dis- 
 e deepest water 
 r, still requiring 
 The city is well 
 it angles to each 
 
 iblic S(iuare, and 
 oiiice, both sub- 
 TOoden building, 
 , while St. Paul's 
 
 east end of the 
 uilding, is at the 
 til a small belfry 
 1 Catholic cothe- 
 top of the spire, 
 aeutly. West of 
 am, a fine build- 
 )f Falcon Point. 
 [I may be known 
 
 large chocolate- 
 i a hill 150 feet 
 
 ice-consul. 
 
 munication with 
 ;sland, also with 
 
 CHARLOTTETOWN. i^y 
 
 Summerside on the s.m«-!.«-„.f,...„ ^ ,' '''^ iraverse and 
 
 England. "*-'^* '^^^^'" <'o»inHmication with 
 
 nml token off ,.l„u J ' ' ,,, ' ' '?•' "' "■''"■''"■'' ""» »«l'"<im.,-8 
 
 a.Kl L.5 feet at lu,-,, wat:t;;n,"„ir,!Jt " "'" '' ''■^' '" ""' ™'» 
 
 as tanks. TI.e.o ia „„ im„ f„r„,lry ' " ''""'" """^ 
 
 atTJ^ni: t'iCrif iL-'lt::'^- ■" ^;;'":'— nar.o. 
 ably lMlh,ei„.e,l by tlio wlial, ,„ S . ,-? ' '■''° '^ ''""'i''«- 
 
 ..ave ..ise., H feet'a,,,. .^a « ar.ij.^fl rSe»t;:'t"Z T' ^""^' 
 extraonlinary eases. The n„™ „»■ ti t'"™ " I«-t, but tlie.-!e are 
 
 tteir st,eaa,s e„uti„,^a ,:,,"' 'air ,,f";' i "" " """'»' "'"""• ?"" 
 water by tl,e ..here, ™,„i ' ,;'° ,f 'tl,"" "°"'' f ""■ '"s'' "'"1 low 
 
 tow„,ana.ik,,„.si„t,ee;tt,r:':vi''ir '" ■' ■""■" °« "» 
 
 There is eonsi.leraWe diurnal inequality in hei»l,t „f ti.e ,i,i . . , ■ , 
 bowever prineipally aflfeets low-water level, m,te the , , ! ' 
 
 "i^'^ u chrttr'^v'^- "™ "-'^^ f- ".X,iX:i;'°'° 
 ie„'t:i'a;^::lx;T'° "^ '"^■"'^■-"^'v.n,, »„» ,::r;e»,e, 
 
 c"C« ''''pL",™.';" '1"""""' """" f°™ Cbarlottetewn. 
 
 banat^?;;;:;' ;-::reZ:;t:?l'!:;;:;:^f„rr' '''^";^ 
 
 Dix,c«o« from the E,stw.rd,_Ves»els bennd to Charlottetown 
 
 ■rHiWiillltBMWaiMillllilllllllliiMiiM,;. 
 
p 
 
 I 
 
 118 PKINCE EDWAED ISLAND— BOOTH COAST. 
 
 buoy on tbe wosterB «''''■•■"« ""^'^o'wN . 5o K. mag.) m thick 
 tl,e coarse acmsB «'r*'''y ™'' *; ^„„ai " ou tto »o«tben, edge of 
 weather, the object beu.g to f "» =»"°*™«^°"^ ^ t„ tue northeast- 
 the ba„k o« St. l-«'«7„l^l™^r '^..f^^nufrFLroy Bock, where 
 
 ri:err;:::i:i;ro«'«;otoor..a,,d^ 
 
 ''trre7ayt,ac,.,r.ea.^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 p,a„eca„.,otbe-n,:u,d ™ 
 
 steer ^.3' W. (>..itl l.. i"*g.)> ,.,„",,,,. gi,„,i|».' If the spire 
 
 bei„s set to the "-'"^V^hTt ^1^ -^for clearing Prim 
 „t the Scotch church (which 13 Hie '«»"" « ,^,.i jt 
 
 Keef ) can he made ont before arrm g u^MUm^ >• ^^^ 
 
 i„ ,i„ewi.h ''•'''';'?''°''"^J':'"',^:^ttal rout are touching, and 
 
 ->" »■• "■" 7'" 'oT,"!' i;;;;^,!",;:;;') witti e «ood tide, or n. 270 e. 
 
 steer now ^. ^>^ l'^- (^^- -^» ^^- "'''fe de of Government lumse 
 
 (N. 500 E. mag.) with the e^>b' vmtil e we^t s de of C o ^^^ ^^^ 
 
 and Battery Point -"-J';^,^" ^^^ '^ng We not to open out any 
 .,on alter he «^^ 
 
 n,ore than J'^J^,' . .tld b«.,y, which having passed, continue running 
 eastward ot ^lie bpitheac ou y, , lighthouses (day bea- 
 
 on the same leadu.,- mark und Bngh^^on Be ^ ^^^^^ ^.^^ ^^^^ 
 
 cons) are in line bearnig N. 2.P ^^ . ( "^^^ "'^^^^^^ Blockhouse Point 
 west of the buoy o.» liattery l'""!\«^« ' ^"^^ ^;:o k (S. 11° W. mag.), 
 comes nearly on with A^choru^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ^:SieI S^iC^ACtrSc ^ylum is .iust open eastward of ^^ 
 
 Zof the railway pier at ^'-l^J^:;:;;^;;^^ o/^^ nSdle i^und 
 ,„ag.); thisniarklcads southwanUuumstNw do ^,^^,^.^„„,,„t 
 
 r^-3:rr^rt35.^g.^i)™~ 
 ii::rter<^ron'^Mf:-iir^s::^e^^^^^^^ 
 
 +,. „ +-^„ leftdinir liKhtB on Hoszard Point m 
 
 . The best markB for a stranger "^ *^; /^/j/^j^^^ B^rfgtton Beach are in line 
 line N. 20O E. (N. 43^ E. mag.). ""*" *J.\ .73,l"°the latter line. The Haszard 
 N. 230 w. (north ,nag.), tak.ng c^J* "«;^^ " J" The ««-«-«''•* ^«»*'* " "^'"'^^ 
 lightb in line lead rather close to litzn.j ivoiK. 
 
 hidden by trees. 
 
CHAKLOTTETOWN DIRECTIONS. 
 
 119 
 
 ,an Keef by 
 ag tlio ligUt 
 o W. mag.), 
 lioms water; 
 
 ings. 
 
 being in "ot 
 8t of the red 
 )ue mile, and 
 ag.) in thick 
 hern edge of 
 le uortlieast- 
 Bock, wliere 
 ere tlie vessel 
 
 shown on tbe 
 bovc directed, 
 ings, to avoid 
 If tlie spire 
 clearing Prim 
 buoy, bring it 
 ) E. mag.), and 
 toucbing, and 
 sll buoy will be 
 
 ae,orK27oK. 
 ^ernment bonse 
 js. CP E. mag.), 
 ) open out any 
 will lead to tbe 
 nitiniie running 
 lousea (day bea- 
 \ mark will lead 
 lockbouse Point 
 ■i.lloW.mag.), 
 )> at nearly 200 
 eiistward of tbe 
 ;7o E. (N. 60° E. 
 Middle (1 round 
 eep Government 
 3 E.) unr.il either 
 'rioithmag.)or 
 ^df^o of the trees 
 
 -u Hiiszaid Point in 
 
 m Beach are in line 
 
 line. The Haszard 
 
 ior'» house is nearly 
 
 at Brighton bearing N. 23° W. (north mag.) ; either of these murks 
 should then be kei)t on till the belii-y of St. Dunstan college ia in line 
 with the flagstafif at Government house, which leads west of the buoy 
 on Battery Point Shoal, when proceed as before. These marks lead 
 through a slightly better part of the channel than the former; but the 
 houses on May Point are not easy of recognition by a stranger. 
 
 In a small vessel the turret of the Bomau Catholic college can not 
 be seen more than 400 yards to the northward of the buoy off Battery 
 Point on account of the trees. 
 
 Caution. — In entering Charlottetown, care must be taken not to con- 
 fuse a conspicuous building to the westward of Government house 
 either for Government house itself or the Whitehouse on May Point. 
 
 From the Westward. — Approaching from the westward with a fair 
 wind, bring Governor Island and Pownal Point to touch bearing N. 58° 
 E. (N. 81° E. mag.), and run for them until the thin spire of the Scotch 
 church comes in sight, and in line with Blockhouse Point, bearing N. '.i° 
 W. (N. 20 E. mag.), when steer N. 33° E. (N. 56° E. mag.) or N.27o E. 
 (N. 50° E. mag.), according a^ it may be flood or ebb tide, until Gov-, 
 emment house ia just open west of Sea Trout Point, bearing N. 17° W. 
 (N. 0° E. mag.), and then proceed as before directed. 
 
 If the leading marks can not be made out, follow the soutlieni and 
 eastern edge of the St. Peters Shoals in 5 fathoms up to the Spithead 
 buoy, and then proceed as before directed. 
 
 With Beating Winds little difficulty will be experieiured, if atten- 
 tion be i)aid to the soundings oa the chart and to wliat has been said 
 of the Prim Beef and the Governor Shoals. On approaching the narrow 
 part of the channel, the buoy, or the leading marks, will point out the 
 position of the Fitzroy Bock, the vessel making short boards off" and on 
 .the edge of the St. Peters Shoals, until more than a mile within it: 
 after whicli (and in addition to the lead), the west side of Government 
 house and Battery Point in one will show when to tack in the board to 
 the westward, until well within the Spithead buoy, and Battery and 
 Sea Trout Points in one will do the same on the east side of tlie chan- 
 nel until the vessel arrives close otV the entrance of the harbor. It has 
 been already remarked that more buoys would be re<iuired before a 
 vessel of large draft could safely beat in and out through the entrance, 
 and even in smaller vessels it is necessary to be well acquainted with 
 the place, and to be constantly on the guard against, the flawing and 
 unsteady wind wliich so commonly prevails there. 
 
 At Night the buoys would require to be seen for the salety of large 
 saiHiig vessels. 
 
 Keep the white light on Blockhouse Point on a N. (»° W. (X. 17° E. 
 mag.) bearing when approaching from seaward until Haszard lights 
 are in line N. 20° E. (N. 43° E. mag.); the lights kept so, lead to tlie 
 bell buoy, marking the Fitzroy Bock, jiass to the westward of the buoy, 
 and when Brighton Beach lights come in line bearing N. 23° W. (north 
 
 I 
 
120 
 
 PKINC E EDWARD ISLAND — SOUTH COAST. 
 
 iDag.). stt'fi'- 'lo'" tli«'» ""^>^ '*^'''''«* Causeau Point, wlien the course 
 slM.nld be altered for tbc anchorage, the course being .judged by the 
 
 town liffhts. 1 X rti 
 
 Wreck —The wreck of two steamers sunk in the channel to l^liar- 
 h.ttft.)wn,".'ast of Alchorn Point, form a danger to navigation; their 
 position is marked by a barrel buoy, which may be passed to the west- 
 
 '' Anchorage.-The best anc^horage ground will be found off the Ferry 
 Pi,.r on tlH' town side, and in the tall of tl.e year it is advisable to moor 
 
 N \<:. and SW. * , ^ „.,, . 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at the head of llillsbor- 
 
 ou-li Uiver at llh. ; springs rise 10 feet, neaps 8i feet. 
 
 Squaw Bay— The eastern part of Hillsborough Bay being out of 
 
 the principal line of navigation, is bnt little frequented by shipping. 
 
 ( Ml this account, and also because it abounds with dangers, so that no 
 
 directions would avail, the services of competent pilots there would be 
 
 iiidispensable. • 
 
 Anchorage— Northeast of Governor Island, under shelter of the 
 slioal at its east point, and off the mouth of the shallow Squaw Bay, 
 tlieie is good anchorage for small vessels in from 9 to 12 feet with mud 
 
 bottom. , . . ,, 
 
 Powiial (Pownell^ Bay require, but a brief notice, being shallow 
 iuul oi.en ... westerly winds; it affords shelter to small craft and boats 
 near its liead, which dries extensively at low water, 
 
 fallows Point, sei.aratiiig Pownal and Orwell Bays, has a long reef 
 oi sandstone and extensive shoals off it, on which are scattered rocks 
 covered with only a few feet of water. These shoals extend m the 
 direction of Governor Island 2 miles, and also a long mile toward I rim 
 I'oint. There is, moreover, a detached shoal, with 13 feet least water, 
 be-iriii"- S 73'^ W. (N. 84° W. mag.) 2 miles from Gallows Point. 
 
 Orw'ell Bay, leading to Orwell, Vernon, and Seal Rivers, is 2 miles 
 wide at its entrance, between Gallows and Buchanan Points; the latter, 
 on the southern shore, being 5 miles within or to tl.e eastward of Prim 
 Point. In proceeding in from Prim Island toward Orwell, the shallow 
 water extends to greater distances from the shore, until at last it 
 stretches nearly halfway across the mouth of Orwell Bay. Its edge 
 in 3 fathoms is there U miles out from the cliffs and has a rock upon 
 it with feet least water, which bears N. 79° W. (N. 50" W. mag.) a 
 hmg mile from Buchanan Point, and south (S. 23o W. mag.) IJ miles 
 from Gallows Point. Between the shoals .Uist mentioned and those 
 which stretch over to the southward from Gallows Point, the channel 
 is SOO yards wide and carries nearly 5 fathoms water, becoming shal- 
 lower and narrower within the bay until off Mclnnis Point (U miles in 
 from the entrance on the northern shore) it suddenly contracts to less 
 tlian 200 yards in breadth, and decreases in depth to 14 or 15 feet at 
 low water* in spring tides. This is the bar which would require to be 
 
n the course 
 (Igt'd by the 
 
 mel to Ohar- 
 gatioii; their 
 1 to the west- 
 
 otr the Ferry 
 isable to moor 
 
 il of riillsbor- 
 
 beiug ont of 
 
 by shipping. 
 
 srs, so that no 
 
 bere wouUl be 
 
 shelter of the 
 ' S(iiiaw Bay, 
 feet witli mud 
 
 being shallow 
 raft and boats 
 
 has a long veef 
 cattered rocks 
 extend in the 
 e towiird Prim 
 let least water, 
 s Point. 
 vers, is 2 miles 
 nts; tlie latter, 
 itward of Prim 
 till, the shallow 
 lutil at last it 
 Hay. Its edge 
 las a rock upon 
 5G" W. mag.) a 
 , mag.) IJ miles 
 jned and those 
 lit, the channel 
 becoming shal- 
 )int (li miles in 
 iontracta to less 
 14 or 15 feet at 
 Id require to be 
 
 Esa-: 
 
 ORWKLl, BAY — CRAPAUD ROAD. 
 
 121 
 
 biioyed, as would a]s„ the channol, which becomes only n little wider 
 within the deptli at the same time increasing t<, 7 or 8 lathoms between 
 steep shoals on either side. 
 
 Just within China Point (on the northern shore and 2 miles within 
 the bar) ,s the confluence of the OiM-ell and Vernon liivers, and there 
 vessels may lie landl.,cke<l, thj channel being 170 yards wide and 
 carrying 5 fathoms wifr between mud Hats dry at low water. N'essels 
 can ascend more than a mile np the Orwell and \'ernon L'ivers, and new 
 vessels are brought down the latter with the tide from a much greater 
 
 Istnloe nf n . r'^'n^ "'^^t''"^*-'^ -«*!' ^y^ter beds at the 
 dLstanceof It miles trom China Point, and their channels higher up 
 become very shallow and narrow, the Orwell being „ni(o dry at low 
 ^ater, as is also Seal Kiver, which enters the Vernon from the north- 
 
 Light-At Orwell a fixed red light, visible 8 miles, is shown fn.m a 
 square, white lighLnouse. 22 feet high, on Brush Wharf. The lij-ht is 
 28 feet above high- water mark. 
 
 (II. <). Chart No. 1066.) 
 Coast-From St Peters Island to Marie Head, a distance of 9 miles 
 to the westward, the coast is straight and unbroken, and may be 
 
 delZl n '"'.'"''^'^^'r "^'"'"•^ ''^'''' ^'««-'«- '■>' "-"1 that that 
 depth IS o<-casionally with.ii 4()(» yards of shallow water, extending in 
 8o:iie places H mile from the shore 
 
 Marie ^ead has a reef running out from it nearly a mile, which 
 81 uuld no be approached nearer than the depth of .-, fithonus. Sal lo 
 Cm e west of Marie Head, is nearly dry at low wafer, ami crossed by 
 a bridge one mile liom its entrance. 
 
 Inman Rock with 4 feet least water, lies near the outer point ..f this 
 ree , south H mile from Brockelby Head, and has from J3 to 1!) ice t of 
 water around it. Large vessels should not approach it nearer than the 
 low-water dei)th of 4A lathoms. 
 
 Koad and Brockelby Piver are situated. It has clay clilfs, 1.5 feet high, 
 based npon samlstone, which runs <nit a mile to the southward, formb.g 
 
 nig Lrapaud from the eastward. 
 
 Crapaud Road is a small but secure anchorage off the mouth of 
 
 th?i.t!i "" ?r''' •'^'"^^^^r*^" "'« ^'-^^^^rn p.ut of Tryon Shoals and 
 tht land. Ihe space in which vessels may ride in from 12 to 15 feet it 
 low water is about i mile long and 400 yards wide; but the anchora-e 
 for simUl craft in from 7 to feet is more extensiv; continuing ne U- 
 a mile farther to the westward in a narrow channel .v cove in the sands 
 
 point ot Tryon Shoals and the shallow water off the shore to the east- 
 ward is only 180 yards wide, and carries feet at h.w-watei spWng 
 
.^' 
 
 
 'I 
 
 •1 
 
 122 PR.NCE EDWARD I8UA»D-«0«TH COAST. 
 
 Brockelby River is all cl.y ..t io« ^ ^^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ 
 
 winding channel through nmd rtats, J^^^ ^^^.^ ,„ the height of 250 
 
 bridge, n miles ^-^ ^^;^ ^'^ .^^^ neighboring country i« 
 
 feet from the eastern ba.ik ot this rner 
 
 Half a imle N. -'.P ^ • <"°""' 1,).^ „„ter from a »indo« .« a 
 
 the soatl, e.W...e of tl,e bluH, a„. «\'*'"» »,;^f„„^^ „°er a .mall 
 
 mast 30 feet above l.i«l. water, aoil visible about 
 
 arc ill tbe .liveetiou of ''■» '"''''"^ ''J^^- ,, ^^ 50 feet above MrU water 
 
 and painted white '''* 'l'V,^°;,";,- e,hibit..d from a iwst on Palmers 
 
 An Aaa«»»4>'-'\^:f 'j;:rd, fon, tbe outer «xe,l w.,i.» 
 ftharf, aoutU (S. W' w. ma„.) - . high water, and 
 
 light which leads over the bar. " '! 1" '^ J. ,„hite) leading light 
 vrsible 2 miles. This light, ... '■"''""'*" J' °°X (N. 23o E. mng.), 
 
 fr„°ir?i,f "5:rl"e of'r tl.er.v .0 the to,, of the basement window 
 by the full width of the tower .^ ^^ ,,^4^^ 
 
 ;:r:^u^::::^-^S^iit:rtrt.aistri^ 
 
 leading lights in line, bearing N. f Jll^lll'l^^,^^ l^ the leading 
 buoy, similarly painted, is ^^'^^Zt^thnoyl small cask buoy 
 lights in line, distant i mile from the tirsl Duoy. 
 Silted black and xvhite, in vertical stripes, lies N 76 W. (. 
 mag.) 1 mile from the northern of the above buoys. 
 
 iii^^^^m'AAi 
 
CRAPAUD HARBOR — DIRECTIONS. 
 
 123 
 
 b ill it, and 
 J, wbicU has 
 close to the 
 
 inhabitants, 
 very narrow, 
 iscend to the 
 heigbtof250 
 II g country is 
 
 ige, liend of 
 i high (with A 
 ion of 41 feet, 
 
 louse, a fixed 
 a window in a 
 on. The light 
 
 uft" lifjht, i8 on 
 d light from a 
 BS over a Hmall 
 
 ,vo high water, 
 the direitioii of 
 lag.) from Paul 
 irer 27 feet high, 
 
 ,0Bt on PaUuers 
 Iter fixed white 
 high water, and 
 te) leading light 
 f. 23° K. niag-)^ 
 I road. 
 
 amond, reaching 
 ivsement window 
 
 own is a slatted 
 •ainted white, the 
 the house. This 
 
 uds. 
 
 n vertical stripes, 
 
 ilso witli Crapaud 
 
 lag.). A smaller 
 
 :k of the leading 
 
 small cask buoy 
 
 6o Wi (N. 53° W. 
 
 DlrectionB. — To enter Cra])aud Harbor, vessels should bring the 
 two old ligiit.T (which will be known hereafter as "Leards range," 
 and are both fixed white) into alignment, and keep them in one on a 
 N. 23° W. (north mag.) course until the lights of Wriglits range are 
 in alignment when they shouhl follow this range N. (m° W. ( N. 42° W. 
 mag.) until the red light on Palmers wharf is in alignment with the 
 front light on Leards range. Tliese two in one will lead in from the 
 blrck buoy, at the entrance to the dredged cut, through the cut to the 
 wharves, but strangers entering at night are advised to anchor iu the 
 road at this last described turning point near the blai^k buoy, as they 
 will be in good anchorage inside the shelter of Tryon Bhoals, while it 
 is not safe to attempt the dredged cut at night. 
 
 No sea of consequence ever comes into this anchorage, the sands 
 outside being covered only to a depth of a few feet at high water, and 
 the shallow water to the eastward, off Inman. Point and Brockelby 
 Head, overlapping the entrance. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Crapaud Boad at lOh.; 
 springs rise 8 feet, neaps 6 feet; there is, therefore, a depth of from 15 
 to 17 feet at high water in the entrance or on the bar of the road. Tlie 
 tidal streams are weak and irregular; in general, their rates do not 
 exceed J a knot at the anchorage, but they K(unetimes amount to 1^ 
 knots for a short time along the edge of the shoals and in the entrance. 
 
 Tryon Shoals, of sand upon sandstone, dry out 1^ miles off shore 
 between the Brockelby and Tryon Rivers, and their 8 W. extreme, in 3 
 fathoms, is south 2^ miles from Tryon Head. At ^ mile NNE. from the 
 SW. point of the shoal there are only 2 feet water over rocky bottom, 
 and at twice tliat distance the sands are dry at low water. Tiie SW. 
 point is steeper than any other part of these shoals, having 4^ fathoms 
 close-to; but there is, nevertheless, sufficient warning by the lead, since 
 the depth of 5 fathoms is nowhere less distant than ft mile from their 
 edge. 
 
 There is, moreover, an excellent leading mark, namely. Cape Traverse 
 and Carleton Head, in line, bearing N. 49° W. (N. 2G° W. mag.), which 
 clears the SW. point of the shoals iu 5 fathoms, and at a distance of a 
 long ^ mile. 
 
 Caution. — Farther eastward, these shoals may be safely apiiroached 
 to any convenient deptli by the lead, which should never be neglected 
 when in their vicinity, for the tides round the island meet off them, 
 causing variations iu the strength and set of the streams, which it 
 would require long-continued observations to understand or account 
 for. The stream of ebb out of Verte Bay frequently sets over toward 
 these shoals, so that a vessel standing along the land with a scant 
 southerly wind will often find herself dropping to leeward toward them 
 much faster than her usual amount of leeway would lead her to expect. 
 
 Buoy. — A whistling buoy, painted red, is moored south westward of 
 Tryon Shoals, in a position with Crapaud outer lighthouse bearing 
 N. 25° E. (N. 48° E. mag.), distant 4 miles. 
 
124 
 
 prin(;e edwakd island — soi;th coast. 
 
 Tryon River, between Tryou Head and Birch Foiiit, is appi'.ached 
 by a very Uiirrow channel tiiroufili the western side of Tryon Shoals. 
 There is a foot water over the bar of this channel at low water in spring 
 tides, but the, dei.th increases t() 11 or 12 feet for a short distance 
 within, and tlien the channel becomes still narrower, windinj; through 
 tlats of sand, mud, and weeds to the bridge, a distance of nearly .? miles, 
 following the channel. Small schooners enter the Tryon, with the 
 assistance of the tidi', which rises from C to S feet; and there are nour- 
 ishing farms on each side of the river. 
 
 Cape Traverse, Carleton Head, Sea Cow Head.— The points 
 b«aween these headlands are formed of red sandstone and clay elitts, 
 with coves between, affording shelter and landing for Imats, and also 
 anchorage for small i raft with the wind off the land or in fine weather. 
 The shallow water does not extend beyond iiOO yards ofi" either of these 
 headlands, but m the bays its .'J-fathom edge is sometimes twice that 
 distance from the shore; and as the line of 5 fathoms is sometimes quite 
 close to it, the general rule for vessels at night should be not to approach 
 nearer than the depth of 7 fathoms. In the old charts a shoal with .i 
 fathoms water is shown oft' ("arletou Head, but a diligent search proved 
 that it has no existence. 
 
 Between Tryon Head and Cape Traverse are tlnee coves, namely, 
 Cumberland, Augustin, and Provost, which are separated by points of 
 cliff and are dry at low water. 
 
 Light.— The liglithouse ou Sea Cow Head, or Salutation Point, a 
 white octagonal building, GO feet high, exhibits at 8S feet above iiigh 
 water a fixed white light, which should be visible 15 miles. 
 
 Bedeque Bay.— Prom Sea Cow Head to Cape Kgmont the course 
 is N. 71° W. (\. 480W. mag.) and the distance 14.^ miles. A bank 
 of comparatively shoal soundings commences at tlie latter and termi- 
 nates at the former headland, (uirving to the southward, so as to extend 
 to the distance of M miles offshore; its southern edge, in 5 fathoms, 
 forms an excellent guide for vessels at all times; but if of large draft, 
 they should be careful of venturing within that depth, since there are 
 only '.i\ fathoms, with rocky bottom, in one part. 
 
 Bedeque Harbor, in the bay to the northward of Sea Cow Head, 
 runs in to the eastward between Indian Head and Phelan Point; the 
 former, the south point of entrance, will be easily distinguished, being 
 faced by sandstone cliffs 25 feet high, and rising to double that height 
 a short distance back from the shore, whilst the other is comparatively 
 low and wooded. The lloman Catholic church eastward of Pheian 
 Point is very conspicuous and forms a good mark from the ofBng. 
 The entrance between these points is H miles wide, but Indian Spit, 
 which dries out A mile from the hea«l, and the shallow water off the 
 opposite shore leave oidy a narrow channel into the harbor. Indian 
 Island is a mile within the entrance, having no passage southward of 
 it, and Island Shoal extending from it 800 yards in the opposite direc- 
 tion. The channel passes northward of this shoal, and then turns to 
 
iipin'tju'hed 
 •yoii 81i(ials. 
 ter ill spviiig 
 ort distimce 
 liiifj: tliroiijjjli 
 jiiily.'? miles, 
 111, with tlie 
 ere me lloiiv- 
 
 -The points 
 (I (.'liiy dills, 
 ats, aiKi also 
 fliie weatlier. 
 itlier of these 
 !8 twice that 
 aetiines quite 
 t to appro ii eh 
 shoal with ."5 
 earcli jiroved 
 
 Dvcs, iianiely, 
 I by points of 
 
 tion Toint, a 
 }t above iiigh 
 s. 
 
 lit the course 
 k's. A banl; 
 ter and terini- 
 as to extend 
 in 5 fathoms, 
 )f large drsift, 
 ince there are 
 
 ea Cow Head, 
 an Point; the 
 fuished, being 
 le that height 
 comparatively 
 ird of Pheian 
 jin the oiling, 
 t Indian Spit, 
 
 water oflf the 
 irbor. Indian 
 \ southward of 
 opposite direc- 
 
 then tarns to 
 
 BBDEQUE n\KM()R — SUMMEUSIDE. 125 
 
 the southward, witliin or to th,. - ^tward of tlie island, where vessels 
 may lie quite iiiiidlockcd in .". fathmns water. 
 
 A dei.t Ii ..!• I'O JW't at low water, ordiimry spring tid.-s, can be carried 
 into t!.e j.iirbor, and, since the tides rise from r, to 7 feet, ilieie is water 
 enou«|, lor vessels <,f large dratt; but the channel is jender.Ml so intri- 
 eat^e by the island Shoal and Middle CJround, wliicii lies a little farther 
 out on the opiKisito side of the channel, that no directions w.ml.l ena- 
 ble a stranger to enter this harbor .itl.ont great risk of ac<i(ient 
 
 Summerside, a town of considerable size, is on the north side ot 
 Bcdequ. Harbor. Several wharves extend from the town, t.. one of 
 which the railway n.i.s. This hitter may be di.ti.gni.shed by thelic^l.t 
 tower on a storehouse n.-ur the extreme. A large hotel hxs been built 
 on Indian Jslaiid,and communication is kept with the town bv a steam 
 terry. There were L',s,s;5 inhabitants in IS'.U. 
 The Tiiited States is represented by a «-oiisular agent 
 Coal -There are usually 1,0(»() tons in stock, exclusive of the amount 
 stored by the railway dejiartment. Vessels of less than 20 feet draft 
 can coal alongside th." railway wharf; coal can be lightered to larger 
 vessels m the harbor, the lighters being loaded in bulk. The railway 
 department has usually about 1 ,100 tons in stock. 
 
 Lights.-The liglit at Summerside railway wharf is exhibited from 
 the root of a shed ;}0 feet high. It is a lixed red and white light, ;5.{ feet 
 above high water, and should be visible 10 miles. It shows red in line 
 ot range, white over head of wliarf. 
 
 A lixed red light is exhibited 'j mile N. 70o E. (S. 87o i:. mag ) from 
 the light on railway wharf. The light is shown at an elevation of (i.l 
 feet, and should bo visible 8 miles. The tower, 50 feet high, is square 
 \)ainted white, open framework, with front face boarded. 
 The lights in line lead up to the railway wharf. 
 Indian Spit -A white octagonal lighthouse, 42 feet high, has been 
 built on Indian Spit, from which is exhibited at 48 feet above hiirh 
 r'!v "t.fL^'f "^^'* '^'^^"'^ '^'*"^«' ^-i*^ a Sveen sector, between N. mo 
 
 ThiT- If f' Zf^ '"-i '"'*^ ^^- ^^° ^' "^'^S')' '^^^^ Miscouche Shoals. 
 The light should be visible 13 miles. 
 
 Buoyage.— A black buoy is moored oflthe southern extreme of Mis- 
 eonche Spit; it lies with Indian Head bearing N. 03° E. (N. 80° e. mag) 
 and Sea Cow Head lighthouse S. 50° E. (S. 27o E. mag.), distant 3/^ 
 miles. Indian Sp.t buoy is a can buoy, painted red; Middle Groun 
 buoy 18 painted black, and Island Shoal buoy is a can buoy, painted 
 
 The north side of the channel opposite Island Shoal is g nerally 
 marked by a stake with a bush on the top. 
 
 Ice.-Tbe harbor is usually frozen over about December 11 and is 
 clear of ice abont April 10, being completely closed between tho-s^ dates. 
 The first vessel arrives about April 24, and the last one leaves about 
 December 11. 
 
 Directions.-As the assistance of a pilot is indispensable to enter 
 
 ■Bsa 
 
^H 
 
 126 PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND— SOUTH COAST. 
 
 Hedeuuo Harbor, it would be advisable to anchor i" t^« ;>»y "7?!^; 
 tead ut lun ii one is obtained. The anchorage in the roads e^l 
 in- feet at low water, sand and clay bottom, is quite sate dnnn, the 
 ".^^ermonM I, altho'ugh open to 8W. win.ls, the shallowness <,t the 
 wate in I the land at the distance of several n.iles preventing any v er> 
 rea:y H a from conun, in." Should, however, any extrj^chnj^^^^ c ir^ 
 cun.s'lances render .t expc.licnt to attempt ^^'^^^'^^'^^'^''^t^^;^;^ 
 best n.ode of proceeding would be to run along the 8E. and cas . n 
 edueof the Miscouche Shoal, and in the low-water ^l«lf' «\1^ ' ;^;' 
 ^^il Indian Point light is reached; leave the »'ft.md buoy to star 
 b ard and when the light is abaft the beam, haul in N .8o E. (S. 79 
 E i until the range lights are in one. The two reu 'jf «^P ' 
 lh,e N T«P E. (8. 870 E. mag.) lead up to the radway whuit in not less 
 than iVLtt low water. Vessels wishing to pass and clear the ml- 
 ^ thl" will have to leave the two lights on the port bow atter 
 ftrrivinir opposite llolmans wharf. 
 
 ft V ssel be approaching from the eastward with an ea«teriy - md 
 Sea Cow Head may be safely rounded at the distance of 500 jards, 
 Gr il^r 1 ead nay be passed at twice that distance, and then the edge 
 of e halbw wa er off Salutation Cove may be safely followed by the 
 M till I dhu. Head is approached, where the shoal becomes very 
 X! as Is taso Indian Spil, which, however, can frequently be seen, 
 
 '•^^^ :;;Z:^^;^^om «. westward can steer t-ani «- ^-l^ 
 as soon as lidian Spit white light is opened, and alter leavng U on 
 Jhe starboard hand, the lights on the railway wharf will guide. \ es- 
 !els outside the light, working in or out, should tiu.k immediately the 
 
 ^Jllrrnff tl^lu Indian Island the harbor is divnied n^ 
 two arms of which the northern, Wilmot Eiver, has only 2 or 3 feet 
 water in it and is obstructed by oyster beds and crossed by a bridge 
 2 mile from the island. Vessels can ascend the southern arm 1^ miles 
 LCdthe'sland ; the channel then becomes obstructed b^^^^^^^^^ 
 so as to leave only an intricate channel carrying 4 teet a ^^''^l. 
 At U miles higher up, on the s.»uth shore, is Popes wharf, i nule above 
 w lidiTllis aim, which is ..ailed Dunk Eiver, divides into wo narrow 
 and shalhnv channels, crossed by bridges at the distance of a mile. 
 
 Tides -It is high water, full and change, at Greens wharf, on the 
 north shore of Bedeque Harbor, at lOh. 15m. ; springs .ise 7 feet, neaps 
 
 ■' Miscouche Bank dries out f- li miles from Miscouche Point, and 
 exS°?f nines southward to the depth of 3 fathoms, sheltering the 
 ro^stea^ in Bedeque Bay, outside Bedeque Harbor, from wester y 
 ;" ds. ih^^ northern extremes of Indian Point and Indian Is and in 
 one bearing 1^. 05o E. (N. 88° E. mag.), clear the south point of the spit 
 l^^^U feet wlter, but the lead will be a sufficient guide when a greater 
 depth 18 required. . 
 
 fmgBmmmmmtn 
 
8UNBURY COVK — KOMONT HAY. 
 
 127 
 
 l)ay or roftd- 
 lie roaclsteiul 
 te during tbe 
 iwneas <>t' tlie 
 ting liny very 
 tordinary clr- 
 le harbor, the 
 I. and ea»t«'rn 
 )t\i of 18 feet, 
 
 buoy to star- 
 ISO E. (S. 790 
 ■lights kept in 
 urf in not less 
 
 clear the rail- 
 >ort bow after 
 
 I easterly wind, 
 i of 500 yards, 
 1 then the edge 
 followed by tbe 
 1 becomes very 
 uently be seen, 
 
 ard the harbor 
 iv leaving it on 
 ill guide. Ves- 
 inmediately the 
 
 p is divided itito 
 only ii or 3 feet 
 sed by a bridge 
 jin arm 1;^ "dies 
 1 by oyster beds, 
 et at low water, 
 arf, i nide above' 
 into two narrow 
 ice of a mile. 
 IS wharf, on the 
 /ise 7 feet, neaps 
 
 ouche Point, and 
 18, sheltering the 
 )r, from westerly 
 
 Indian Island in 
 (point of the spit 
 
 e when a greater 
 
 Sunbtiry Cove, 9 miles to the eastward of Cape Kginont, is an exten-. 
 sive plut'e, but nearly dry at low water, excepting a narrow channi'l 
 through the Hats only fit for boats or very small «-raft. Miscoucho 
 Point is the eastern point of this cove; and Miscouclie ciiurch will be 
 seen to the XNE. of it at the distance of 2 or .3 miles inland. 
 
 Fifteen Point — The church and village at this point stand near the 
 shore i^ miles to the westward of Sunbury Cove, and can be seen at great 
 distances, either from the eastward or westward. The liomaii Catholic 
 church may bedistinguished by the body of the building and spire being 
 white, the roof light brown; a small white nave with a black top is also 
 attached. A tall white beacon stands a little to the eastward. At the 
 extremity of the point, one mile to the eastward of the (;hnrch, there 
 is a low rock above water, (railed the Little Dutchman, and shaUow 
 water to the distance of a long mile oft' shore; the depth then increases 
 to near 4 fathoms for 2 miles farther otl', and then decreases again to 
 34 fathoms over sandstone bottom not far from the edge of the b.iuk, 
 the church bearing from the shallow part nearly N. 23^ W. (north 
 mag.) 3 miles. 
 
 Cape Egmont is a remarkable headland with cliff's of sandstone 50 
 feet high. About 2 miles to the northward of it will be seen the Dutch- 
 man, an isolated rock 30 feet high, and lying 200 yards from the shore. 
 The cape itself is quite bold to the southward, but to the westward 
 there is shallow rocky ground <J mile oft' shore, and which should not bo 
 approached nearer than the depth of 6 fathoms. 
 
 Light. — On the extremity of Cai)e Egmont is a square, white light- 
 house with dwelling attiUihed. 
 
 The light is a fixed red light, 72 feet above high water, and should be 
 visible 10 miles. 
 
 Egmont Bank, of fine red sand, and with 4 fathoms least water, is 
 very narrow and 2A miles long SE. and XW. Its northern end 1 tears 
 S. 88° W. (X. GO" W. mag.) 5 miles from Cape l-^gmont; its southern 
 end S. 59° W. (S. 82° W. mag.) -1 miles from the same headland, and 
 there are as mucrh as 8 fathoms and a clear channel between it and 
 the cape. 
 
 Egmont Bay is formed between Cape Egmont and West Point, 
 wliich is distant 17 jniles. It is 8 miles deep, and attords excellent 
 anchorage, with off"shore winds, in from 4 to 7 fathoms, over sand and 
 clay bottom ; but vessels should not anchor in less than 5 fathoms any- 
 where excepting on the NW. side of the bay, because there is rocky 
 ground, with only 3^ fathoms water olfthe river at its head, lying. just 
 within the 5-fathom line, and iic a distance of 3 miles from the shore, 
 whilst along the eastern shore 5 lathoms would be too near the edge of 
 the shoals. 
 
 The eastern side of Egmont Bay should not be approached to a less 
 depth than 5| fathoms In a large vessel, for the shallow water oft' Rock 
 Point and the bar of St. Jacques extends a mile from the shore. The 
 church of St. Jacques is conspicuously situated 5 miles to the uorth- 
 
 iSrOSSSU 
 
12S lltlNCK KDWAUl) ISLAND— SOUTH COAST 
 
 ward or (^ape K«.noMt. ImvinR tl.. F.v.M,hor Anulian s..ttU..neutalonjr 
 
 its sawmills, A mih- fnn.. it in tluM,,.i.,.s,r.' di.vctiun. llisc n.,1 i, 
 
 .1 , wi.i. .■ n-d roof; tin- tow.r, wirl. a „<n-H,.. attad.ed, is im.n.d 
 
 ; 1,;, and forn,s a very usHul landn.arU. Ualdin.and 1 -vc^r, shaH. w 
 
 and running in t.. tlu- Houllnvanl al..mt - n.il.-s, is about halfNNaj 
 
 :: V : U.e .inucl. and Ca... K,n.<,nt, a,n<l has san<l hills on .ts w.s 
 
 „, „„,..,. point of cntran.e. Kron. thos., sand hilln a sand bar, dry at 
 
 ,ow wat.^-, .xtnuls 8 or 4 ndh-s to th. northward paral -1 ;;^';; ^;;- 
 h,. vin-^ very narrow clnunuds throuKlMt, whu-h ar. sa.d to sh t at tunes 
 
 , . : heavy wes.erly «ah.. At the tin.e of the Adnuralty Hurvey 
 uin<.ipa channel was pointed out by two sn.all beacons on the 
 s In.ve about a n.ile to the southward of the ehureh. I he eourse n 
 w h those bea.ons in one, was 8. T.o K. ^S. o:P K. n.a,.,, t-'"'"^^-^ 
 to the southward w.thin the bar into a harbor for small -';-';;;'; 
 r, feet in it at U)W water, and esteudinK to the ...tranee ol llaldnnand 
 
 '' fi'm re :vm\ l>.r.ival Kivers, at the head ..f the bay, are (mly uaetul 
 to boats and very sundl eratt, having a depth of only 4 to 7 eet a low 
 water, and bein,- approaehed by exeeedingly ^^'^^^ ^'t^^f^^ 
 ,„annels throu.M. thtts of sand, clay, and oyster beds, wheh aie dr> m 
 'art at low water, and extend 1 .\ nules Iron, the sinn e. IM.e tales tiow 
 about r> miles up these rivers, betvN een low a..<l marsliy banks. 
 
 On the northeru shore of the bay, Brae and Wolf H.vers are sandy 
 i)laces dry at low water. „, 
 
 Tide3.--lt is high water, full and change, in Kgn.ont Bay at 3h., 
 
 sorines rise 4 feet, neaps 2 feet. 
 
 West Point.-The lesteru point of Prince Edward Island cons.sts 
 ofYri hills VI feet high. Excepting in the direction of the spit, the 
 shallow water does not extend far from it. 
 
 Buoy -The whistling buoy formerly olf North Point has been 
 
 moved to a i.osition oif West Point. The buoy is pan.ted red and 
 
 narked WEsi Point Buov, Canada, in white letters It is moored 
 
 in 13 fathoms of water, !| mile west of the middle of the outer shoal 
 
 wiUi WerPoint lighthouse bearing S. 57° E. (S. 34° E. mag.), distant 
 
 ^\"s.^4s uoing south should leave the buoy on the port hand. 
 
 T^s-It is high water, full and change, at West Point at H ^onrs; 
 sminirs rise 4 feet, neaps 2 feet. ^ . ^. • j„ 
 
 'Anchorage.-There\8 good anchorage under West Pent m winds 
 from between north and e.ist, in 4 fathoms, line sandy t>ottom. 
 
 Light -The lighthouse on West Point (with a keeper's dwe bug 
 atS^l), a squaie building, 07 feet high, and pai.^ed in broad hor - 
 zontal bands id and wlute, exhibits, at (U) feet above high water, a 
 revolving light, showing one red and three white flashes everyone and 
 on.^1 nninnt^s. the tltshes attaining their greatest brilliancy every 
 twe. ty tw.. and one-half seconds; the light slu.uld be visible 13 mdes. 
 
 ■■mum 
 
WEST POINT, SPIT, AND KK.KF 
 
 129 
 
 tMllUlltllloll^ 
 
 lUMiiit'S. with 
 lis I' Min li i** 
 I, is piiiiitnl 
 iver, Hliiillow 
 out liiillVay 
 s (HI it^ wi'Ht 
 I Imr, <liy »t 
 to the short', 
 shift at times 
 iriilty survey 
 neons oil tho 
 h« eonrsc in, 
 turning; short 
 liooiuMs, with 
 ,f Iliihliniiiiid 
 
 It' only uactnl 
 o 7 feet at h>w 
 an<l intrifiite 
 hicli iiie dry in 
 riie tides tlt>w 
 [)anks. 
 nn-s are sandy 
 
 it Hay at 3h.; 
 
 shmd consists 
 )f the spit, the 
 
 oint has been 
 tinted red and 
 It is moored 
 he outer shoal, 
 ,. mag.), distant 
 
 t hand. 
 Dint at 6^ hours; 
 
 rointin winds 
 )ottoni. 
 
 ■per's dwelling 
 1 in broad hori- 
 e liigb water, a 
 !S every one and 
 brilliancy every 
 visible 13 miles. 
 
 West Spit — The west spit of sand upon sandstoiu', (covered in 
 some parts with only a few feet of water, runs out from West I'oint.'J 
 miles U) the N\V. and then trends NH. within West Ueef, so that the 
 latter overlaps it at the distance of A mile. There is a '-cnldesac" 
 between the spit and th«- shore, open to the northward, and in which 
 thei-o are from ti to 4 fathoms water. The only way to avoid getting 
 into this opening, or witliin West Ueef, when running from the north 
 ward, is not to approaeh the island nearer than the low-water depth 
 of 11 fathoms. 
 
 West Reef is a naiTow and rooky ridge, 4 miles long, with irregular 
 soundings from '2^ to 'f fathomH. The least water, iii feet, is near the 
 middle of the reef, and there are 18 feet near its southern extreme, 
 which bears from West Point N. 74° W. (N. 51° W. mag.) 3^ miles, and 
 is distant 2^ miles from the nearest part of the shore. Its northern 
 end is 3^ miles off shore at the highest part of the clitfs between Mc Wil- 
 liams Cove and Cape Wolfe. 
 
 There are no leading marks for this reef, and as there are 13 fathoms 
 in one part close to its outer edge, it is very dangerous to ships round- 
 ing West Point, and can only be certainly avoided at night or in thick 
 weather by following the edge of the bank of soundings off the main- 
 land in 9 or 10 fathoms, which will lead past it at the distance of 3 
 miles to the westward. There is .■% passage within the reef, between it 
 and the West Spit, but it is narrow, with irregular soundings and 
 strong tides, and should therefore never be attempted in a large vesHcl. 
 
 Tides. — The strength and direction of the tidal streams about West 
 Beef are very irregular, being influenced by winds, varying also with 
 the time of tide and probably with the age of the moon. In the deep- 
 water channel, passing close on the outside of West Reef, the rate of 
 the stream sometimes amounts to 2^ miles per hour, causing a heavy 
 sea when running against the wind. 
 
 The West Coast of Prince Edward Island, from West to North 
 Points (33 miles), is unbroken and formed of red-clay and sandstone 
 cliffs, with intervening saidy beaches, attbrding landing for boats in 
 fine weather. There are several ponds where boats can be secured', 
 such as North and South M.nimegash, Black, and Nail Ponds, but their 
 outlets, through sandy beaches, are all nearly dry at low water and of 
 no use to vessels. The shallow water runs out to considerable dis- 
 tances ofP various parts of this coast, and, as a general rule, for large 
 ships it should not be approached nearer than the depth of 11 fathoms 
 at night or in thick weather. 
 
 Off Nail Pond and Nail Head, 6 miles SW. by S. of North Point, 
 shallow water extends out 2 miles from shore. 
 
 Minimogash Reef is a ledge of ro(;ks, nearly dry at low water and 
 
 nearly a mile in length, parallel to the shore, from which its outer edge 
 
 is distant ^ mile. It lies directly off the sandy beach and across the 
 
 outlet of North Minimegash I'ond, which is 15 miles from North Point. 
 
 1151 9 
 
F 
 
 1 1' 
 
 'H 
 
 
 i"« 
 
 
 130 PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND WEST COAST. 
 
 There are 2^ fathoms of water between the reef and the shore, and 
 vessels have in one or two instances been moored there during the 
 lummer months to take in cargoes of lumber, but it is a very unsafe 
 
 ^'iTghts -Two leading lights are exhibited at Minimegash. When in 
 line, they lead to the outer end of the north breakwater 
 
 The oLr light is shown from a mast 25 feet high with a white shed 
 at its base, situated on a sand hill about 500 feet southward o^ the 
 breakwater. The light is fixed, showing red seaward between the 
 bearinffs of N. 20o E. (N. 43° B. mag.) through east to S. 250 E. (». Z 
 E mag covering the whole of Minimegash Keef, and white from S. 
 250 E. (S. 2o K 1^.) to S. 3lo W. (S. 54° W. mag.). It is 30 feet above 
 the sea, and should be visible 5 miles. .^^ „„t 
 
 The inner light is a fixed white light 45 feet above high-water mark 
 and visible 8 miles through a small arc on each side of the direction of 
 Zt Hghts in line. It is shown from a mast 35 feet high with a white 
 shed at its base, situated on Rix Point 8. 19° E. (S. 4° W. mag.) from 
 the outer light, distant about one mile. u^qvqn,«. 
 
 Tides.-It is high water, full and change, at Mmiraegash at 3h. 30m., 
 
 snrinffs rise 5 feet, neaps 3 fe^jt. , ^v. .i 
 
 ^ection8.-Vessels approaching Minimegash from the southward 
 should stand along the coast within the red sector of the outer light, 
 and having passed through it, should bring the leading lights in line, 
 which kept so, lead to the outer end of the north breakwater. 
 
 Aiichorage.-With oiishore winds, there is good anchorage for small 
 vessels, in 3 fathoms water, neap a spar buoy about J mile NW. from 
 the north breakwater. 
 
 North Point is of low red cliffs. It has a reef extending from it te 
 thf northward and eastward 1* miles to thedepth of 3 fathoms; more- 
 over, rooky and irregular soundings from 6 to 7 fathoms continue for 
 sive al mUes farther out to the NE., causing at times a dangerous 
 breaking sea, and terminating in a small patch of ^o^ks on which there 
 is little more than 4 fathoms in low spring tides, and which bears from 
 North roint N. 21° B. (N. 44° E. mag.) 4* miles. Fishermen report the 
 existence of a shoal of 3^ fathoms, which breaks in bad weather about 
 TmUes NxXE., which is most probably the 4-fathom patch Vessels 
 should therefore always give this reef a wide berth in thick weather 
 or at night, and this the soundings on the chart will enable them to do, 
 it is therefore only necessary to add that it is most steep on the west 
 side, where there are 10 fathoms at the distance of * mi e. The inner 
 Trtof the reef dries out ^ mile from the point, affording shelter to 
 fishing schooners which shift from side to side as the wind changes 
 
 Lieht -The lighthouse, on the extreme of North Point, is octagonal, 
 60 fSt high, painted white, and exhibits at 80 feet above high water a 
 revolving white light every minute; the light should be visible 14 
 miles. 
 
 • 'wm^ 
 
;he shore, and 
 
 sre during the 
 
 a very unsafe 
 
 ash. When in 
 
 h a white shed 
 thward of the 
 a between the 
 S. 25° E. (S. 2° 
 white from S. 
 is 30 feet above 
 
 igh-water mark 
 
 the direction of 
 
 »h with a white 
 
 W. mag.) from 
 
 ash at 3h. 30m.; 
 
 the southward 
 the outer light, 
 ig lights in line, 
 :water. 
 [lorage for small 
 
 mile NW. from 
 
 luding from it to 
 fathoms; more- 
 )ms continue for 
 les a dangerous 
 s on which there 
 Fhich bears from 
 srmen report the 
 ,d weather about 
 patch. Vessels 
 n thick weather, 
 lable them to do; 
 steep on the west 
 mile. The inner 
 )rding shelter to 
 wind changes. 
 )int, is octagonal, 
 (ove high water a 
 lid be visible 14 
 
 MURRAY HARBOR. 
 BAST COAST OF PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND. 
 
 131 
 
 Bear Cape and Reef— Pishermans Bank. (See page 108.) 
 
 ^h^n^^."^"'.^"*' *" exceedingly dangerous bar of sand, over 
 which 10 feet can be carried at low water in ordinary spring tides- 
 but strong easterly winds send in so heavy a sea as to render it at 
 tunes impassable, a line of breakers extending then completely across 
 iear^72f m'SIef ""^^ ^^^"^ northward to Cody Point, a distance of 
 
 •?w7^'":^° ^^^ ^"*^'' ®*^^® '^^' "'® ^^"^ » ^"oy is moored in 3 fathoms. 
 With the xvhite beacon on Old Store Point (the sandy south point of 
 entrance) in line with the black bail on the white gable of the Transit 
 barn beanng S 54° w. (S. 77° W. mag.). The barn stands on the 
 southern shore of the harbor f mile within the entrance, and when in 
 ime with the beacon leads in through the deepest water (1860). There 
 18, moreover, an inner buoy in the fairway i mile within the outer one 
 and which IS intended to enable vessels to run in, when hazy weather 
 prevents the leading mark from being seen. 
 
 Lights.-The front light, on the edge of the sand bar, south side of 
 Murray Harbor, is a fixed white light, exhibited at an elevation of 33 
 feet visible 8 miles. The lighthouses are scjuare white buildings, the 
 front one 30 feet and the back one 40 feet high. 
 
 The rear light, exhibited at 57 feet above high water, is also fixed 
 
 Tft ^r^^w ^?i^.?"''' ^^" "^'^'^' «"« ™^'« *^P'^rt' ^^^' fro'" each 
 other S. 540 W. (8. 77° W. mag.) and N. .540 E. (N. 77° E. mag ) 
 
 Directions.-Proceeding in from the bar, the channel into Murrav 
 Harbor, between sandy shoals extending from the shore on either side 
 contracts gradually in breadth to 120 yards, and expands again to 400 
 yards withm the entrance. The depth also gradually increases after 
 crossmg the bar to 6 fathoms, as the vessel passes close to the steep 
 sandy beach of Old Store Point, on which the beacon stands. 
 
 To run m, with the aid of the chart, look out for the outer buov 
 or, being m not less than 5 fathoms, bring the white beacon and the 
 
 « «.. w r *^® ""^'^^ ^*^''^ ""^ *^*^ 'r^a»«it barn in line, bearing 
 S. 640 W (S. 770 W. mag.), and keep them so exactly until the vessel 
 arrives about 300 yards from the beacon, when haul a little to the 
 northward, so as to pass Old Store Point at the distance of about 50 
 
 ^^By night, the leading lights in line, show the channel to the outer 
 
 Ti5cs.-It is high water, fhll and change, in Murray Harbor at 9h 
 6m. ; springs rise Gi feet, neaps 3J feet. 
 
 Anchorage.-Anchor within Old Store Point, or to the west of it, at 
 any distance not exceeding J mile, because farther in the channel 
 which passes to the southward of all the islands becomes very intricate 
 and would be diiiicult to follow without a pilot. The depth in the 
 
 • m 
 
 *~'""^~'™*'^-1 l nm i 'in ii 
 
132 
 
 PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND EAST COAST. 
 
 it 
 
 i i 
 
 
 I- 
 
 anchorage recommended is from 3 to 5 fathoms, with saud and clay 
 bottom, and a tide of 2 knots. 
 
 The entrance of Murray Harbor, between Old Store Point and the 
 long sandy spit which runs ont S8W. from Cody Point, is more than 
 A mile wide, but it is all nearly dry at low water, excepting the chan- 
 nel already described. Within this entrance the harbor is of great 
 extent, containing Ave wooded islands, and several rivers or sea creeks 
 on either side, besides the main inlet, Murray River, which is much 
 larger than the rest, and navigable 6 miles from the entrance, or nearly 
 to the dam which has been constructed across it near its head. There 
 are flourishing settlements all around, the principal one being at South 
 River, where the English church, distinguished by its steeple, will be 
 seen on the southern shore 2 miles within the entrance of the harbor. 
 
 Graham Ledge.— At 4^ miles north firom Murray Head is Graham 
 Point, from which Graham Ledge runs out one mile to the depth of 5 
 fathoms and 9 mile to 3 fathoms. The shallowest part of this ledge, 
 with 6 feet least water, bears N. 45o E. (N. 68° E. mag.) 800 yards from 
 the extremity of the point. Tliere is also a rocky shoal one mile farther 
 to the northward, which runs out % mile firom between Terras and 
 Smith Points, and foul ground with from 4 to 5 fathoms at low water 
 extends off the latter IJ miles. The soundings are very irregular off 
 this part of the coast, between Graham Point and Panmure Head, 
 varying from 13 fathoms, mud, to 5J fathoms, rock, until beyond 3 miles 
 from the shore. _„ , 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1077.) 
 
 Cardigan Bay is SJ miles wide between Panmure and Boughton 
 Islands. It affords good anchorage in from 6 to 10 fathoms, mud 
 bottom, with winds offshore, but winds from NE. to south send in a 
 
 heavy sea. ., 
 
 Georgetown Harbor, sometimes called Three Rivers, is on the 
 western side of Cardigan Bay, 3 miles within Panmure Head, which 
 is 9 miles northward from Cape Bear. It is the finest harbor m the 
 southern part of the gulf, excepting Oharlottetown, having depth of 
 water and space sufiBcient for large ships. The rise of ordinary spring 
 tides being only 5 feet is a great disadvantage as compared with Ohar- 
 lottetown Harbor, but, on the other hand, the ice does not, m general, 
 form in it so soon in the fall by several weeks, and also breaks up 
 earlier in the spring, so that vessels can enter later and leave it earlier, 
 which is an important advantage in a climate where the navigation is 
 closed by ice for so long a portion of each year. 
 
 Georgetown, the capital of Kings County, is well situated on the 
 northern shore of the harbor, just to the eastward of Gaudm Point. 
 Its streets are wide and at right angles. The principal buildings are 
 the two churches (the northern church has a steeple and the southern 
 church a tower) and the courthouse. 
 The United States is represented by a consular agent. 
 Population.— There are about 1 ,1 n(» inhabitants (1897) 
 
u(l .and clay 
 
 >iut and the 
 8 more than 
 ng the chan- 
 c is of great 
 >r sea creeks 
 lich is much 
 ice, or nearly 
 lead. There 
 ing at South 
 seple, will be 
 the harbor, 
 d is Graham 
 le depth of 5 
 )f this ledge, 
 10 yards from 
 e mile farther 
 1 Terras and 
 at low water 
 ' irregular off 
 nmure Head, 
 eyond 3 miles 
 
 nd Boughton 
 'athoms, mud 
 ith send in a 
 
 rs, is on the 
 1 Head, which 
 harbor in the 
 ving depth of 
 rdinary spring 
 red with Ohar- 
 ot, in general, 
 Iso breaks up 
 save it earlier, 
 I navigation is 
 
 tuated on the 
 Oaudin Point. 
 I buildings are 
 d the southern 
 
 0- 
 
 
 GEORGETOWN. 
 
 133 
 
 t^^u^^^^f"^!"'''^^ *" ^"'^^ "^ '"Pt''*«^ ""'^y be obtained at Oeorge- 
 
 Vessels of less than 24 feet draft can coal alongside the railway 
 wharf. In the summer months, with short notice, coal can be bro S 
 alongside in schooners of 30 to CO tons. orougJit 
 
 sto^ck! '*"''*^ department has generally about 550 tons of coal in 
 
 f«3«\*^f ^ ""? Railway.-Georgetown is connected with Charlotte- 
 town by telegraph and railway. "anoue 
 
 Communication—There is steam communication with Pictou once 
 
 the close of ordinary navigation, by a steamer specially constructed 
 for breaking through ice. This vessel is usually unable to make tlie 
 
 trer ors^r"^^-^ " ^^^"^ '^^--^ *^'-^ - ^y^ 
 
 P^ The lighthouse on Panmure Head, the east extreme of 
 auTeil >, '' / irT ^^^f "^\»>"!Wi°g, 50 feet high, painted white, 
 
 ref/Xcfpe^'^J^r^'' "''' '^^* ^^^" ^'" ^™ ^^'^' ^^^^ *^e 
 Panmure l8land.-Panmure Island is about 2 miles long by one mile 
 b^^oad, m great part wooded, and has cliffs of red sandstone 40 feet h^gh 
 along Its northeastern shore. It is joined to the land to the sout Wd 
 by a narrow sand bar always above water, and more than a mife^n 
 length. Within this bar is StMarys Bay,and farther westward Stur 
 
 I W :? t.^e"2nTh f "'' '^'i*'"^ '^^"^"^ ^ «'^"^°^- entrance t^te 
 ^W.ot the .8 and, between Panmure Spit and the shoal ott' Grave 
 
 fZ"-^^, „r,"5;rr -'-' -"-"• ■"« -*" " "»- -«- 
 
 Panmure ShoaL-Panmure Shoal extends § mile off the northern • 
 
 We of hirr '.'''"^r^'' ^"""'^'" «P*^' ""^'^^ f— the western 
 Sw J «Mn Ti'' •'^'*^'*' ^'y ""^ ^°^ ^^ter, equally as far to the 
 NVV from Billhook Point, the NW. extreme of the island. The buoy 
 «m king Its northern edge is a black can buoy, and a black sp^ bZ 
 marks the shoal extending eastward from Grave Point 
 
 Cardigan Shoal, stretehing to the south and east from Cardigan 
 Point, which separates Cardigan lliver from the harbor, is an exteSve 
 
 ^';,i;v'ri-;-C;-ii#p,i« 
 
 "°'*''*^'"-^''"-'- Tiir-iiTrtwfi¥tijj»iiiiLi... 
 
t • 
 
 p 
 
 134 PKINCK EDWARD ISLAND— EAST COAST. 
 
 sl,oal Of sandstone; th. least water on it is 4 feer, and it l.asonly « feet 
 allow water 'i mile ont from the shore. At L'(U> yards larti.er out there 
 are 3 fatboms. Buoys, m; pape 135. *• .i.« rarrliLmn 
 
 In a direct line from the onter to the inner buoy ot t^« ^*^'';^«;" 
 Shoal there is not less than 34 fathoms, and the southern edtie ot he 
 sioal 5 fathoms may be followed by the lead fro.n the one to tl.e 
 other From the iune. buoy the western e<lf?e of the shoal trends 
 t nhward to within ...O yards of the ^<^^^,;^^^l^l^ ""*«^ 
 anchorage, in 4* fathon^s mud bottom, between it an.l the Knoll. 
 
 TheKnoU. a%n,all sandy shoal, probably based upon sandstone and 
 wUhO feet least water, lies just outside the entrance of Ge<ugetown 
 e bor, :^ diltly u/the Ly of its navigation To enable^essels 
 to beat in and out, a red buoy has been placed on ,ts SW ■ ^^^lerne 
 
 Th^mcap Shoal runs out from the Thrun.cap (which is a small 
 wooSTnd clilfy islet Joined to the eastern point of entraiu.e ot George- 
 town Harbor by a sand bar) 6()0 yards in a southwesterly direction. 
 S sh vi, whicl. iH of sand, and dry at low water to 2(K) yards from 
 the buoy, completes the shelter of the harbor, preventing any sea of 
 PonseoHence fnmi rolling in. Buoy, nee page I3.j. 
 
 The Bnttance to Georgetown Harbor between the Thrumcap and St. 
 AiTd'rtw S" Uie souUiwestern shore is H ^^;^^'^^^:^^r^:^ 
 diminish the breadth of the chauuel to 450 yards, and it is still nai- 
 tZrl t e Knoll, where it is scarcely 400 yards; whilst farther mit 
 stiTl between the oUigan and Panmnre 8hoals, it ,s mile con^de 
 ing t to be bounded by the depth of 3 fathoms on each side Withm 
 thrThrumcap the northern shore of the uarbor forms a bay ? mile 
 ,^de the NW. point of which is Gaudin Point, having a sandy spit 
 
 '"ltLTaV^4^;:^^^^ ^-^-town Harbor 
 
 for largrvefsels is between this spit and the Thrumcap Shoal, with 
 Doct^rPoint touching Brudenell Island, and the shore end of the pier 
 S a [«e with the square tower of the English church, good holding 
 Iron d, xnud; but smaller vessels may anchor farther withm he bay 
 Td wm tind 2^ fathoms within the distance of 200 yards from the whai- 
 
 ^'fietweeT'the Gaudin Spit and Aitkins Point the channel of the 
 harboHs only 350 yards wide, between the 3 fathom Unes, and carries 
 64 Mhoms water ; but it expands again immediately, affording excellent 
 • atchoi^e all the way to Brudenell Point, one mile above the town. 
 lS -The lighthouse on St. Andrew Point, Georgetown, a square 
 buiS 34 feet high, painted white, exhibits at an eleva ion of 50 feet 
 a fixed ^ght, which slows red to seaward and white mside the harbor 
 L'ween N 210 E. (N. 45° E. mag.) and N. 69o W. (N. 45o W. mag.), 
 
 which should be visible 8 miles. , ,. , ^ , 4.^a 
 
 The back light on Westaway's farm is a white fixed light, elevated 
 
 62 feet, and should be visible in clear weather from a distance of 12 
 
IS only Ofeet 
 ler out there 
 
 he Cardifjan 
 edfie of the 
 le one to the 
 shoal trends 
 g the onter 
 Knoll. 
 
 mdstone and 
 Georgetown 
 nable vessels 
 . extreme. 
 :h is a small 
 iceofGeorge- 
 rly direction. 
 M) yards from 
 iig any sea of 
 
 imcap and St. 
 [)ut the shoals 
 it is still nar- 
 st farther out 
 nile, consider 
 side. Within 
 I a bay f mile 
 ; a sandy spit 
 
 etown Harbor 
 ap Shoal, with 
 eind of the pier 
 , good holding 
 ithin the bay, 
 from the whar^ 
 
 jhannel of the 
 les, and carries 
 rdiug excellent 
 ,^e the town, 
 jtown, a square 
 ation of 50 feet 
 side the harbor 
 ioo \v. mag.), 
 
 light, elevated 
 , distance of 12 
 
 GEORGETOWN HARBOR. 
 
 J 
 
 miles when in line with the light on St. Andrew Point 
 Shows also across the harbor to (ieorgetown 
 
 Bulvil- T^'r^-'' ""^T"' '^ "•"" ^'■'''" ^^- ^^"^^''^^ Point light. 
 
 Buoyage—rhe buoy marking the northern edge of Panmure Sho«l 
 IS a black can buoy, an<I a bla<,k spar buoy n.arks the hoi ex 'em^n j 
 eastward from Grave Point »uo.us, extending 
 
 CaXnShri.'""'^ -rk, respectively, the SE. and SW. sides of 
 
 A red can buoy marks the SW. edge of the Knoll 
 ^^A small cask buoy, painted red, marks the western e,ige of Thrumcap 
 
 A buoy, ,,ainted red, is moored southward of Gaudiu Point md « 
 buoy, luiinted black, is n.oored northward of Aitkin^ Point ' 
 
 excentirof Z *^'''\"^^ 'V'' ""•* '' '^^ "^^^'^''^^'^ «--««»' with the 
 exception of those marking Panmure and Knoll SlH.als 
 
 Caution. -Too much reliance must not be placed on the bnnvs n« 
 they are Irequently out of position ""•^^' ""^ 
 
 andTs d^aTofT'n' ''"'^"v' '' "^'^^'^^^^ro'^^n over about December 26, 
 aiTtrth'e rufotipH, "" "'^ ^""^ '" ''''"' '''' '"'^^'"^ «^ •^— ^ 
 
 manifest that a competent pLt, acquarerwit^^^^ '^^^^^^^^^^ 
 etc would be required to beat a large ship in or out. ' 
 
 Observe that, in addition to the aid afforded by the buoys the leul 
 ing lighthouses in line, or the lighthouse on St. indrew PoTnt tp on 
 
 ri.:;T^ otT/t:/;;-^^' -7 ^;^^t-- west of the nghtho- 
 oeai ng ^ m W. (N. o6o W. mag.), leads m between the Panmure and 
 Cm^igan Shoals nearly in midchannel, until Brudenell islet ad Doc" t 
 Point^come ,n one, bearing N. 54o W. (N. ;}0o w. mag.>, when the last 
 named objects kept touching lead into the harbor 
 Approaching from the Bantward, pass Boughtou Point th^ m? 
 
 o. i« W N. 730 W. mag.), and looking out for St. Andrew Point lurht 
 house, which will be a little on the starboard bow. As soln a7the ts 
 sel arrives within one mile of Panmure Islands, bring Te lighthouses 
 
 ueuung JM. Ml w. ^s, 60° W. mag.), and steer for tliem. When Pnn 
 cZ "Irl ?™' Pol-tcome m one, the enteral bWy on the 
 Moulil be in 7 or 8 fathoms water. At the same time, the inner red 
 belTotthrf fT".' '"?'""' '•""^°" ""''-"^sLa.sLS 
 ^nrra'h^'Lttre:"'""' ■-"--- -P»"-ly.-d «. thedi. 
 
 £a»iffiaiWiKaaMaEMtfUi» 
 
136 
 
 PRINCR EDWARD ISLAND EAST COAST. 
 
 
 Cuiitinue to run toward the lighthouse (passing between the last 
 named buoys) until the vessel has approached within about ^ mile of 
 St. Andrew Point, when Brudenell Islet and Doctors Point will be seen 
 (up Brudenell River to the NW. of the town) touching and bearing 
 N. 54° W. (N. .30° W. mag.); the vessel will then be near the black spar 
 baoy oft' Grave Point, and the red buoy on the SW. edge of the Knoll, 
 and also the one on Thrumcap Spit, should now be seen ; run toward 
 Brudenell Islet and Doctors Point touching, which will lead about 200 
 yards to the SW. of the two red buoys, until the steeple of the north- 
 ern church is seen well to the NW. of the tower of the southern church, 
 or until the latter bears about north (N. 24° E. mag.), when haul toward 
 it, and choose a berth in from 6 to 3 fathoms over mud bottom. 
 
 Approaching from the Southward, round Panmure Ledge by the 
 lead in 7 fathoms, or by keeping Murray Head open to the eastward of 
 Graham Point till the north side of Panmure Island bears as far to the 
 westward as N. 86° W. (N. 61° W. mag.), when the vessel may haul in 
 to the northwestward, following the northern edge of the Panmure 
 Shoal until the leading marks can be made out, and broaght in one, as 
 before directed. If it should so happen that, ft'om thick weather, or 
 other cause, this mark can not be seen, the northern edge of the Pan- 
 mure Shoal may safely be followed by the lead, in 6 fathoms, to within 
 A mile of the buoy, when the shoal becomes too steep to be safely fol- 
 lowed farther. In like manner the southern edge of the Cardigan Shoal 
 may be followed, from the outer buoy to the inner buoy on its SW. 
 extreme, as already remarked; and the vessel may either bring up, 
 in the outer anchorage, i mile within the latter in a line toward the 
 Thrumcap, or proceed into the harbor, as may be expedient. 
 
 Caution. — Give Wheeler Bar a wide berth, as it is steep-to. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Georgetown Harbor at 
 8h. 40m., by the mean of the morning and evening tides, the latter 
 l>eing generally the latest by about an hour in the summer months; 
 springs rise 5 feet, neaps 3^ feet. The rate of the tidal streams does 
 not exceed ^ knot. 
 
 Brudenell and Montague Riven, which unite their streams at 
 Brudenell Pomt, to the westward of Georgetown Harbor, require only 
 a brief notice. The former, the northernmost of the two, is navigable 
 for largo vessels to Brudenell Islet 1^ miles up, and for small craft and 
 boats about 3 miles farther, to the head of the tide. Vessels of consid- 
 erable burden can ascend the Montague nearly to the bridge, a distance 
 of 4 miles, and boats about a mile farther, to where tlie tide ends. The 
 fresh-water streams at the heads of those sea creeks are mere brooks. 
 
 Cardigan River, which, with the other two just noticed, has occa- 
 sioned Georgetown and harbo* to be called Three Rivers, is much the 
 largest of the three, being navigable for large vessels to the distance of 
 5 miles above Cardigan Point; and smaller vessels can ascend it \i miles 
 farther, or to within ^ mile of the head of the tide, where the fresh 
 
 -<^NK 
 
f 
 
 CARDIGAN RIVER HOUGHTON RIVKR. 
 
 137 
 
 111 the last 
 t J mile of 
 nil be seen 
 ttd bearing 
 black spar 
 ' the Knoll, 
 ran toward 
 d abont 200 
 f the north- 
 lern church, 
 haul toward 
 torn. 
 
 jedge by the 
 eastward of 
 as far to the 
 may haul in 
 he Panmure 
 rht in one, as 
 k weather, or 
 e of the Pan- 
 ms, to within 
 [be safely fol- 
 irdigan Shoal 
 Y on its 8W. 
 ler bring up, 
 e toward the 
 )nt. 
 »p-to. 
 
 wn Harbor at 
 
 .J, the latter 
 
 liner months; 
 
 streams does 
 
 r streams at 
 jt, require only 
 ., is navigable 
 all craft and 
 . jIb of consid- 
 jge, a distance 
 jiideends. The 
 e mere brooks, 
 jced, has ocea- 
 ns, is much the 
 
 distance of 
 
 jend it 2 miles 
 [here the fresh 
 
 water is insignificant in quantity. This river, wliicli enters Cardigan 
 Bay on the NE. aide of Cardigan Point, is rendered somewhat diflicult 
 of entrance by the MacPhee Shoal and tlie Maitland Flat, which are 
 very steep, and contract the navigable channel to 400 yards. 
 
 Light — Cardigan River light is fixed, and at an elevation of 43 feet 
 shows green seaward and white io the northeastward across the river; 
 it should be visible 8 miles. 
 
 The lighthouse, 32 fet* hi"' lonsists of a square whitft tower, and 
 is close to the shore j .«or»/ . ince above South 1 '■':, wharf and 
 below Morrison Beach. 
 
 Directions. — Vessels entering the river should stand to the north- 
 ward into Cardigan Bay until Paumure Head light bears S. 13° E. 
 (8. 11° W. mag.) and Cardigan Eiver light N. 09° W. (N. 45° W. 
 mag.) ; they should then steer toward Cardigan Biver light, keeping 
 it on the port bow and nothing to the northward of N. 69° W. (N. 46° 
 W. mag.), thus clearing MacPhee (or Horseshoe) Shoal on the south 
 side of the river entrance and Maitland (or Campbell) Point Shoal on 
 the north side. When Cardigan Biver white light is opened, safe 
 anchorage off the south ferry ship has been reached. 
 
 Boughton Island, at the north entrance to Cardigan Bay, is united 
 on the NE. side to Bruce Point by a dry sand bar one mile in length, 
 and is divided into two parts, of which the southern, ^ mile long, is 
 joined to the remainder by a double bar of sand and shingle inclosing 
 a large pond. Boughton Ledge runs out at this bar to the distance of 
 1,200 yards to the eastward, and has rocks near its outer extreme which 
 always show. Boughton Point, the SK. extreme of tlie island, is a 
 cliff of red sandstone 30 feet high, and has a rock, which dries, off it, 
 and shallow water to the distance of ^ mile. Rocky and irregular 
 soundings, 4 to 5 fathom's, run out to the eastward still farther, and 
 therefore a vessel of large draft, at niglit or in thick weather, should 
 not round the point in a less depth than 9 or 8 fathoms. 
 
 Off the west side of the island a bank, with from 3 to 6 fathoms, 
 extends 1^ miles, and farther westward there are dangerous shoals, 
 which, together with the Boughton Spit and the Mosquito Sands, extend 
 along the north shore of Cardigan Bay ueariy to Maitland Point at the 
 entrance of the Cardigan. 
 
 Off Boughton Sand Bar and Brice Point the shallow water extends 
 % mile, and in Boughton Bay the line of 3 fathoms is a mile out from 
 the shore. 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1066.) 
 
 Bonghton or Q>rand Ri^er, 5 miles north from Boughton Point, has 
 a dangerous bar of sand one mile out from its entrance, and over which 
 6 feet, at low-water ordinary spring tides, can be carried in a very nar- 
 row channel marked out by three buoys. The outer buoy is moored in 
 3 fathoms, the next in 2 fathoms, and the inner one in 11 feet, the 
 
.jtam 
 
 138 
 
 PRINCE EDWAKD ISLAND— EAST COAST. 
 
 bar of feet being between tbe ]a»t two (1860). The buoy» are taken 
 up at tbe end of tbe navigable Heason. 
 
 At a sbort distance within tbe inner bnoy, the Hands on each .side 
 are dry at low water, and the channel generally can be seen all the 
 remainder of the way to the entrance, where it jjasses close ronnd 
 the northern {Mint of the long sand bar which stretches across from 
 the sontiiern shore to within 350 yards ol' lianks Point, where there 
 is a wharf and a ferry. 
 
 Inimediati ly within the entrance the inlet is a mile wide, but the 
 channel is divided, narrow, and intricate, and marked out by stakes 
 between sandy shoals for about one mile; after which it is clear, wide, 
 and has from 3 to 5 fathoms water in it, to the Narrows, 3 miles from 
 the entrance. Boats can ascend 3 miles farther, or to the brnlge. There 
 are settlements on e.ich side of this extensive inlet, which if it were not 
 for the shallow bar would be a fine hiirbor. 
 
 In Boughton Bay the Hue of 3 fathoms is a mile out from the shore. 
 
 Tides. — It is high Wiiter, full and change, at thc^ Perry wharf, 
 Boughton Kiver, at 8h. -tOni. ; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 2j^ feet. The rate 
 of the tides in the entrance is 2 knots. 
 
 Little River, Fortune River, RoUo Bay, and Colville Bay and 
 River, occurring in order in proceeding along the coast to the north- 
 ward, are tide inlets nearly barred up with sand, and having small 
 streams at their heads; they are places only fit for small craft aud 
 boats, having from 3 to o feet over their bars at low water. 
 
 Colville River, in Colville Bay, between Souris Head and Swanton 
 Point, and distant i-5 miles NNE. of Boughton Point, is the most 
 important, being the place where the produce of the more eastern 
 parts of the island is principally shipped. Colville Bay atlbrds good 
 anchorage with offshore winds, and the settlement of tSouris and the 
 church will be seen on its eastern shore. 
 
 Sharp cliffy headlands and points of red sandstone separate the bays 
 in wuicb these rivers are situated, tlie clifts being from 25 to 50 feet 
 high, and the shallow water oft" them not extending beyond the distance 
 of 000 yards, excepting at Eglington Point (separating Fortune Bay 
 from Eglington (Jove), where the reef is very shallow for the lirst 800 
 yards out from the shore, and continues 1,200 yards farther with from 
 3 to 4| fathoms over rocky bottom ; butthis is within the line adjoining 
 Howe Point and Souris Head, and therefore out of tbe way of vessels 
 running along the coast. 
 
 Souris is a large village 60 miles NE. by rail from Charlottetown. 
 It has a wharf with three large fish-curing stores on it. The eastern 
 entrance is marked by a red flagstaff, and three black buoys mark the 
 passage up the river for small craft. In 1881 the population numbered 
 700. The chief industries are shipbuilding and the fisheries. In 1882 
 the depth of water alongside the breakwater was about 14 feet. 
 
 Tbe lioman Catholic church is an excellent landmark; iSouris Head 
 
)ys are taken 
 
 on eiicli side 
 seen all the 
 I close round 
 » across from 
 , where there 
 
 vride, but the 
 »ut by stakes 
 18 clear, wide, 
 , 3 miles from 
 ridge. There 
 if it were not 
 
 'om the shore. 
 Ferry wharf, 
 feet. The rate 
 
 ille Bay and 
 
 ; to the north- 
 having small 
 
 [lall craft and 
 
 er. 
 and Swauton 
 
 t, is the most 
 more eastern 
 
 y affords good 
 
 touris and the 
 
 arate the bays 
 m 26 to 50 feet 
 ud the distance 
 f Fortune Bay 
 r the first 800 
 ther with from 
 i line adjoining 
 I way of vessels 
 
 Charlottetown. 
 t. The eastern 
 )Uoys mark the 
 ition numbered 
 leries. In 1882 
 14 feet. 
 k; Souris Head 
 
 80UR18 — KA8T POINT. 
 
 139 
 
 Ind b!."e';' """"' "^''^ *'''^' ^''^«' *^« ^^-' "«- 't is red sandstone, 
 
 The United States is represented by a consular agent. 
 1 ^ ™f V'"*^ markka on the <..hart), (..ailed by the /i.shermen the ri,„r 
 
 A Shoal patch having 10 fathoms water on it lies S 47o e rs -no 
 
 iriiirirr "™" '^'--'^ ""■«' »■■" «--w.,r5;o"w.':„,i; 
 
 1 'f*— '^^'l® ^"J''^^'' '« "sually frozen over about January 7 and tl.« 
 dls" Piewt: "' '^'"•' f ^ ' ' '* *^ «*^'"P>«*«'^ closed b Jt;;: th se 
 Tl«L«f ^^7^'.^*' departure depending on the prevailing win.ls 
 
 eaf;m.*t;;ll"wf/"^\* «°*"'' *''^""' '*'^ ^"''^^ ^outheastwarcl of the 
 eastein beak water at Souris, stands a s.juare tower, 15 feet hi..., 
 
 Son ot slfS It "; '■ m ^ "'^f ^'^^^' "^"^ *« exhibited at I e^.: 
 won ot »o teet; it .should be visible 15 uiil<'8 
 
 BrtalwateT"^ "^'^ '' " "^'^''''"^ "" "'^ ^"'«^ ^""^ "^^ ««-!« East 
 The light is fixed red, elevated 21 feet, and visible i\ miles from .li 
 points seaward. The lantern is hoisted on a mast. 
 
 to^he Ifd nl7' "' ■ "f "' *'' breakwater, and will be used similarly 
 to the old light, carried away, until a proposed new block is added to 
 
 wil.rbuir'"'''' breakwater. When a more permanciirst^ur: 
 
 The Coast to the eastward of Coh ille Bay is bold and free from dan 
 ger, excepting Hervey Reef, which extends 800 ylTZ^r^^Z 
 Pom , and has on it the Shallop Rock, which always shows Herve^ 
 
 east^r'noinl Of C ''t'"' ''^^' ^"^ ""^ ^'« ^--" ^y its bef .g t e 
 
 S sand h lis mZ n' '"/''*'' ^'^^^^ "^^ '""^^ remarkable^and 
 nign Sana hiHs. At Basin Head, one mile farther NE., the cliffs ter 
 
 Z^^T'v . r^^'".' ""** sandy beach form the shor;\ early ai the 
 
 n is r tTr ' " '"'""' '' "^'"'^ ' •""««• ^'^ this distance Eat 
 Lake 18 all that requires notice. It is a shallow and narrow pond 
 within the sand bars, extending from Basin Head to within 2 IC of 
 East Point, and having a narrow outlet (2 miles from the head) which 
 8 nearly dry at low water. Boats and small craft entefit for p^,^^ 
 the coui^ry being well settled along its northern shore. ^ ' 
 
 Bast Pomt-The eastern point ot Prince Edward Island is a rliftnf 
 
 mile to the depth of 3 fathoms, and not quite a mile to 5 fatliom ' 
 
 '•' - M i suf rnmn a ildi'iUen'X f tn >v 
 
140 
 
 PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND EA8T COAST. 
 
 
 § 
 
 lit 
 
 •fit 
 
 m 
 
 There is frequently a great rippling off the point, but the reef does not 
 extend farther than has been stated. Northward uf the rwt' the sound- 
 iug decreases gradually to 8 fiithoms, after which it Hhoals rapidly. 
 The depth of 20 fathoms is as near as a vessel should approacli when 
 the land or light can not be seen at night or in foggy weather. 
 
 Caution im necessary when navigating in the immediate neighbor- 
 boo«l of East I'oint, as the tidal streams are induenced by strong winds, 
 and therefore are reported to be irregular both in direction and velocity. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at East Point ftt 8h. 30m.; 
 springs rise 3^ feet, neaps 2 feet. 
 
 The tides run at the rate of 2^ knots between tne north end of 
 Milne Bank and the .point, but are not nearly so strong farther to the 
 westward. 
 
 Light. — The lighthouse on East J'oint stands within 07 yards of the 
 eastern extreme and 83 yards fVom the south shore of East Point; the 
 dwellings, painte<l whit«, with brown roofs, are 50 yards in rear of the 
 lighthouse; the buihUng is octagonal, 00 feet high, painted white, and 
 exhibits, at an elevation of 100 feet, a revolving white light every three 
 minutes, which should be visible 15 miles between the bearingu of S. 58° 
 E. (S. 34° E. mag.), through west, and N. 49° E. (N. 73° E. mag.). 
 
 Pog Horn. — During thick or foggy weather a horn will give a blast 
 of about eight seconds during every half minute. 
 
 The fog-signal building is ]>ainted white, with a brown roof, and 
 stands 33 yards- eastward of the lighthouse. 
 
 These two buildings in Hue indicate nearly the outer extreme of East 
 Point Keef. 
 
 Anchorage. — The anchorage is not good to the northward of East 
 Point, the ground bemg either loose or rocky , but to the southward of 
 it there is good riding with northerly winds as far as the East Lake 
 outlet, in a moderate depth of water, and over a bottom of red sand. 
 
 Milne Bank, if considered to be bounded by the depth of 10 fathoms, 
 is 5^ miles long, north and south, and 1| miles bread, the bottom being 
 of sandstone, thinly covered here and there with red sand. The sound- 
 ings are irregular, between 6 and 9 fathoms, over the northern part of 
 the bank; but toward the southern end, and close to the outer edge, 
 there is a shallow part, 1^ miles in length, on which there are less than 
 5 fathoms; and it is here that the least depth is found, namely, 4^ 
 fathoms at low water, in spring tides. This shallowest part of the 
 bank lies between SK. by S. and iSSE. from East Point, and is distant 
 from it 44 to 5^ miles. 
 
 The extreme south end of this bank, in 10 fathoms, bears 8. 24° E. 
 (south mag.) 0^ miles from East Point, and the north extreme N. 88° E. 
 (S. G8° E. mag.) 2 miles. Between the northern part of the bank and 
 Bast Point there are from 10 to 11 ^ fathoms, red-sand bottom, the 
 deepest water being close to the bank. The eastern or outer edge of 
 the bank is steep- tu, there being from 12 to 15 fathoms close to it, and 
 
I'KIN* E EDWARD I8LAND NORTH COAST. 
 
 141 
 
 ef does not 
 
 the wountl- 
 
 ilrt rapidly. 
 
 roach when 
 
 ler. 
 
 e neighbor- 
 
 ,roiigwi»*l8» 
 .nd velocity. 
 atSh. ;«)m.; 
 
 lorth end of 
 arther to the 
 
 yards of the 
 
 St Point; the 
 
 n rear of the 
 
 ed white, and 
 
 »t every three 
 
 finga of S. 68° 
 
 I. mag.). 
 
 ill give a blact 
 
 jwn roof, and 
 
 ctreme of East 
 
 liward of Kasi 
 e southward of 
 the East Lake 
 
 of red sand. 
 1 of 10 fathoms, 
 e bottom being 
 tl. The sound- 
 orthern part of 
 the outer edge, 
 re are less than 
 lud, namely, ^ 
 eat part of the 
 ;, and is distant 
 
 bears S. 24° B. 
 ttreme N. 88° E. 
 of the bank and 
 ind bottom, the 
 or outer edge of 
 8 close to it, and 
 
 there is ft'e(iuently a great rippling along it, cansed by tlie abrupt oppo- 
 sition which it presents to the flood tide from the NK. The sea is v^ry 
 heavy here, and also oft" the point, in strong NIO. giiies. 
 
 NUHTH (OAST OF I'RINOU EDWARU ISLAND. 
 
 The great bay formed by the nortlieru coast of Prince Edward Island, 
 and the difticulty of beating a ship ont of it in heavy and long-contin- 
 ued NE. gales has been already mentioned. That ditflculty setnis to 
 be caused by an acceleration in the rate of the current so frequently 
 found running past Cape Ga8p(3, Bonaventure Island, and the Miscoa 
 Banks, and which doubtless continues farther south ; or it may arise 
 from an extension of that general set to the southward so often expe- 
 rienced by vessels crossing from the Bird Islands toward Auticosti 
 or Gape Hosier, and which has been observed to be increased by strong 
 NE. winds, as might have been iuf*-rred from the great rise of water 
 which they cause in all the southern imrts of the gulf. 
 
 The set of the tidal streams may also at times be very unfavorable 
 to a vessel under the supposed circumstances, for the stream of flood is 
 known to set to the southward into the bay, in conformity with the 
 progress of the reflux tide wave, Arom North Point southeastward to 
 St. Peters, whilst farther eastward the tide which comes from the NE., 
 from between the Magdalen Islands and Gape Breton, also sets toward 
 the shore, especially near East Point. 
 
 The reflux course of the tide wave on this coast has been inferred 
 from observations made during the Admiralty surveys of all the har- 
 bors, from which it appears that the time of high water on the full and 
 change days becomes later in succession, in proceeding southeastward 
 from North Point to Gascumpeque, Malpeque, Grenville Bay, Bustico, 
 Tracadie, and St. Pet«r8. At St. Peters the time of high water, full 
 and change, namely, 8h. 40m., is rather later than at East Point; and 
 as there is also a considerable increase in the ^iso uf Ihe tide, there 
 seems reason to conclude that the two tide waves meet somewhere 
 about this harbor, the westeru being 12 hours older than the eastern 
 wave. 
 
 With the exception of a few places off the bars of the harbors, the 
 anchorage is, generally speaking, very bad all along the northern shore 
 of the island, the bottom being of red sandstone, thinly covered occa- 
 sionally with sand, gravel, and broken shell. 
 
 The harbors are all of the same character, having narrow entrances 
 between sand bars, with dangerous bars of sand at various distances 
 from the shore. They are only fit for small vessels, with the exception 
 of Richmond Bay and Gascumpeque, and even those could not be safely 
 run for in bad weather, and with a heavy sea running, at which times 
 the breakers on their bars extend quite across, leaving no visible chan- 
 nel. New vessels are built in these harbors almost every year, the 
 smaller for the Newfoundland trade, and besides the coasting schooners 
 
I 
 
 li:^ 
 
 t;* 
 
 51' 
 
 ^S f 
 
 saMH 
 
 149 PKINCK EDWARD ISLAND— NORTH COABT. 
 
 for prcMluce, American tlHhlng Hchooners frequently call at the.n for 
 wood and water, or shelter c. the approach of bad weather. 
 
 tL Corst froui East Point to St. Peter Bay, a distance of .« miles 
 in unbrSceTfonned of redsandstone cliffs, with occasional patches of 
 ^v^dXac at the mouths of small streams, where boats can land o„>y 
 Tm^ weather or offshore winds. Surveyor Inlet will not now admit 
 
 '' S«ir;wl' ^oe; :;;ttend beyond n miles any Where oft; this 
 division the coast, and there are in general 10 fathoms water w^^" 
 one mile of the shore, the bottom being of sandstone, and the anchor- 
 
 '^Cpa^Xrrgenerally called St. Peter Bay, runs in 7 miles ^ 
 thflTtwrrd "ha depth in some parts of 3 fathoms; nevertheless, .t 
 fornra harbor lly for small vessels, there being only 9 feet at ordinary 
 hTgTwatT^^^^^^ its bar of sand, the outer edge of which, m 3 fathoms, 
 
 '' l;:^Z^l^i^i^ harbor on the SW. side 3 miles in from the 
 Jra^e and is n«' igable for boats to the same distance in and, where 
 thrplerwhirsteady the floating bridge, prevent farther ascent 
 tLc are ^eral smaller streams on the same side of the harbor and 
 at its beadSt. Peter River, which, like the rest, becomes a mere brook 
 
 '*Th: sJl: oi't^^htrbor are well settled, and there is a church on 
 
 In^toZnelor v^^^^^^ n^Ues to the eastward; after which there are 
 ^o more Wgh sand hills to Surveyor Inlet, within 4 miles of East Point. 
 
 There is a railway station at St. Peter. 
 
 The two lights in one lead over the bar at the mouth of St. ^eter Kay, 
 
 ,nr,, t,^^ the eastward immediately within the entrance, so that alto- 
 getheMtt a wy dangerons place for a stranger to attempt, or .ndeed 
 
 ""^^r^Z^Z eZXn the we-t side of the ehan,«. ^ 
 stiver Harbor 8. 13° E. (8. 11° W. mag.) and N. 13= W. (N. 11» B. 
 fnag H'^S feet apart, exhibit fixed white lights, elevated, respectively, 
 
 ^^CTgh^H^htout: 33 feetwgh, is s,aare and white, near the end 
 ofTe brtkwater. The low one is 33 feet high; it is a square, white 
 frame, and stands on the sand beach. 
 The inner light is shifted as the bar alters. 
 
lit them for 
 
 p. 
 
 of ;J3 miles, 
 
 ,1 patches of 
 
 lu hind only 
 
 t now admit 
 
 rhere oft' this 
 water within 
 I the anohor- 
 
 in 7 miles to 
 vertheleHH, it 
 jt at ordinary 
 in 3 fathoms, 
 
 (8 in from the 
 inland, where 
 rtlier ascent, 
 e harbor, and 
 a mere brook 
 
 i a church on 
 lite steeple to 
 mbered 1,299. 
 of sand hills, 
 ibove the sea, 
 liich there are 
 of Bast Point. 
 
 St. Peter Bay, 
 e west side of 
 set at ordinary 
 
 ere is a sharp 
 s, so that alto- 
 mpt, or indeed 
 
 the channel to 
 ' W. (N. 11° E. 
 d, respectively, 
 
 B, near the end 
 a square, white 
 
 8AVA0P: HAKHOR — TRACJADIR. 
 
 143 
 
 TIde«.-rt Ks hiKh water, full and .imnRe, in St. Peter Harbor at 8h. 
 30m. ; Hprinss rise 4 feel , nnipn ^ fcet. The rate of the tide Htreams in 
 
 /knotir''^ ""'' ^"^ ^^' ^*^*"'" "'"'^'"' *" "*'*'''^'*^ ''""^' ^""^^ "' ''™'' 
 Savage Harbor, at 3 niiles westward of St. Peter, has only U feet at 
 
 low water over itn bar, and is therefore only Ht for boats or ;ery small 
 trait. The <,hur.h here is a ifoo<l lan.lmark. .lust westwanl of its 
 entrance there is some (U)mparatively shallow water, 4+ fathoms, over 
 rocky bottom, at the distance of a long mile from the shore. The 
 distance across from the head of this harbor (which run: inland .{ miles) 
 to the head of the Hillsborough River is less than on^ mile, and thc-e 
 IS a road across. «^"« o 
 
 Lighta—The two leading lights are fixed white lights, .hown on 
 masts respec ively I'O and 25 feet high, with brown sheds at their ■ .se 
 
 The outer l^ht on McEachern's farm near the western edge of the 
 inner shore of the harbor is elevated 22 feet from high water The 
 outer light is liable to be moved. 
 
 The inner light stands 110 yards S. 29o E. (8. 5o E. mag.) fn n iue 
 outer one, and is 30 feet above high water. b / " < «» 
 
 Both lights are visible 5 miles. 
 
 Directiona-The lights in line lead to the black and white striped 
 bnoy moored ... 12 feet water just outside the bar. Vessels entering 
 nnist open the l.ghts about a point on the starboard bow after passing 
 th.8 buoy until the inner fairway buoy is reached, whence the clannel 
 
 flig stiker- ^'- '' ""' "'''-' "^ ^"'-^^^ ^"^ ''' -^- ^'■^'•'*' 'o the 
 Tracadie Harbor, or Bedford Bay, is miles fron. Savage Harbor 
 I 8 en ranee , sat the wester.. extren.ity of a remarkable rai.oe of sand 
 hills 50 or 60 leel high. The bar of sand, which sh-Ys occ.a.;ionally in 
 heavy ga^s, extends out 3 mile from the entrance. .... has a varying 
 depth of from 6 to 9 feet over it at low water i,. a chan.,el only 80 yards 
 wide at the time of the s,irvc;y. Th. place, therefore, is J.ly fit for 
 small vessels, and even they require the assist,,; ce of buoys a..d favor- 
 abe weather to take the bar with safety. Tho harbor is 3 miles wide 
 withm the sand bar and carries 2^ fathoms water; it sends off a branch 
 to the westward called Winter Cove, and rn.is in 4 or 5 miles to the 
 southward, approaching at its head to within 1^ miles of the Hills- 
 borough River, to which there is a good road across. 
 There is a railway station at Tracadie. 
 
 Tr^'^J*""'^'^''.^ lighthouses erected on the west side of channel to 
 iracadie Harbor are white square structures, 28 and 21 feet hitrh 
 exhibiting fixed red lights, elevated, respectively, .32 and 40 feet above 
 high water, both visible 8 miles. 
 
 chann^Twfts.''' ^'^''^" '" '' '"""^'^ "' ""^ '''^' " **^""^ "•^^^'^«' ^' ^^« 
 
 ' 
 
 
,:.> 
 
 
 144 
 
 PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND NORTH COAST. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at the entrance of Tracadie 
 Harbor at 7h. ; springs rise 3J feet, neaps 2 feet. These heights vary 
 according to the direction of the wind. The rate of the tide streams 
 yi the entrance is about 2 knots. 
 
 Directions. — The lights in line lead past the buoys, leaving the buoy 
 outside the bar on the starboard baud, the buoy inside the bar on the 
 port hand, and the red spar buoy on the westernmost bend of the 
 channel on the starboard hand. 
 
 The channel is intricate and liable to change in any storm, conse- 
 quently strangers should not attempt the entrance with any wind on 
 the shore, nor under any circumstances if drawing more than 5 feet. 
 
 Cape Stanhope, on which there is a sand hill 30 feet high, ^ mile 
 to the eastward of the entrance of Little Bastico and 9 miles to the 
 SE. from Cape Turner, has a dangerous reef running out from it | mile 
 to the depth of 3 fathoms and one mile to 5 fathoms. On some parts 
 of this reef there is only one foot of water, at ^ mile from shore. 
 Between Cape Stanhope and Cape Turner the coast forms a curve or 
 bay, in which ire the entrances of the Knstico Hairbors, and where the 
 Sfathom edge of the shallow water is seldom less than } mile off shore. 
 Farther out the holding ground is bad, being of red sandstone, with an 
 occasional thin covering of sand. 
 
 Lights. — Cove Head leading lights, 75 yards apart, are a little to the 
 westward of Stanhope Head. The lights are exhibited on masts 27 and 
 17 feet high. 
 
 The front light is fixed white, elevated 18 feet from high- water mark, 
 and visible 3 miles. The light is close to the edge of the sand beach at 
 the entrance to the harbor. 
 
 The back light is fixed white, 25 feet above high-water mark, and 
 visible 3 mUes. 
 
 The position of the lights is changed to suit alterations in the chan- 
 nel, which has only 3 feet at low water. 
 
 Little Rustico Harbor has its narrow sandy entrance on the west- 
 ern side of Cape Stanhope, with a depth of only 2 feet over its shifting 
 bar. It is therefore only fit for boatb '>r very small vessels, the rise of 
 tide being the same as at Graiicl Rustico. This shallow place extends 
 for several miles within the sand bars, and is divided by Black Point 
 into Petersham and Stanhope Cc^es, which have small brooks at their 
 heads and are navigable for boats 3 miles. 
 
 Grand Rustico Harbor has two narrow sandy entrances on either 
 side of Mc Auslin Island, and which are distant 3 and 5 miles, respec- 
 tively, to the SB. of Cape Turner. Although vessels of 200 or 300 tons 
 are occasionally built here and floated light over the bars in fine 
 weather, yet it is a place only tit for small vessels, for its shilling bars 
 of sand are extremely dangerous, having a varying depth of 4 to 6 feet, 
 and extending out J mile from the shore, at which distance there are 
 3 fathoms at low water. The line of deepest water over each of these 
 
of Tracadie 
 leiglits vary 
 tide streams 
 
 ing the buoy 
 
 le bar ou tbe 
 
 bend of the 
 
 storm, conse- 
 
 auy wind on 
 than 5 feet. 
 >t high, 4 mile 
 9 miles to the 
 i fi-om it i mile 
 Ou some parts 
 le from shore, 
 rms a curve or 
 
 and where the 
 I mile off shore, 
 idstone, with an 
 
 re a little to the 
 on masts 27 and 
 
 igh-water mark, 
 le sand beach at 
 
 rater mark, and 
 
 ions in the chan- 
 
 jtnce on the west- 
 over its shifting 
 [essels, the rise of 
 low place extends 
 by Black Point 
 brooks at their 
 
 Ltrances on either 
 U 5 miles, respec- 
 [of 200 or 300 tons 
 Ithe bars in fine 
 |r its shifting bars 
 ]Bpthof4to6feet, 
 distance there are 
 fv-er each of these 
 
 RICHMOND BAY. 
 
 145 
 
 bars is pointed out by two buoys, the positions of wbicli are changed as 
 occasion requires. 
 
 Hunter and Wheatley Rivers, navigable for boats 5 miles, with Winter 
 Greek between them, run into this shallow place, which extends 5 miles 
 along the coast within the sand bars of McAuslin Island and Brackley 
 Point. 
 
 There are extensive settlements here. The two churches on the 
 western side of Winter Creek will be recognized by their steeples. 
 Coming from the eastward these churches do not open out very soon, 
 but the harbor may be recognized by the remarkable hummocks in its 
 vicinity. There is also a small chapel at the settlement of New Glasgow, 
 on the western side of Hunter Biver, but it can not be distinguished 
 from the sea. 
 
 Lights. — The high lighthouse at the west side of entrance to Grand 
 Bnstico is a white, square building, 35 feet high, exhibiting a fixed 
 white light, elevated 40 feet, and visible 8 miles. 
 
 The low light is a fixed red light, shown from a mast 20 feet high, at 
 22 feet above high water; the light should be visible 5 miles. 
 
 The lights bear S. 49° W. (S. 72° W. mag.) and IS. 49° E. (N. 72° E. 
 mag.) from eaeh other, distant 75 yajrds, and are visible from S. 67° E. 
 (S. 44° E. mag.) through south to north (N. 23° E. mag.). The outer 
 or low light is subject to alteration to suit the channel. 
 
 Beacon. — A white beacon has been erected on the outer end of the 
 breakwater to more clearly indicate its position, but it can not be other- 
 wise used as a guide. It consists of a mast 25 feet above the deck of 
 the pier, with a diamond-shaped slatted beacon at its head. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Grand Bustico Harbor 
 at 6h. 40m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2 feet. The rate of the tide 
 streams in the entrance is 2 knots. 
 
 Directions. — The two leading lights in line lead to the Bar Buoy. 
 After passing this, vessels entering must open the lights, leaving the 
 range on the starboai'd aide. 
 
 Vessels of 8-feet draft can only enter the harbor at high water and 
 in moderate weather. 
 
 Cape Turner is the highest cliff on the island, being of red sand- 
 stone and conglomerate, 120 feet high. It is 8^ miles E. by S. from Cape 
 Tryon, Greuville Harbor lying between. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Cape Turner at 6h. 
 10m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2 feet. 
 
 Q-renville Harbor has its entrance at the northwestern extremity 
 of a long range of sand hills, the highest of which is 55 teet above 
 high-water mark. The entrance of this harbor is ^ mile wide, and 
 carries 3 fathoms water, but it is nevertheless only fit for small vessels, 
 in consequence of its dangerous and shifting bar of sand, over which, 
 at the time of the survey, only 5 feet at low water could be carried in 
 a very narrow channel indicated by two buoys. The bar extends out 
 1151 10 
 
 1 
 
 
146 
 
 PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND — NORTH COAST. 
 
 li- 
 
 !j mile from the entrauce, and the shallow water one mile, at which dis- 
 tance there are 5 fathoms over sandy bottom. 
 
 Within the entrance the harbor is 3 miles wide, branching into two 
 principal and many smaller creeks, with small brooks at their heads. 
 The principal two of these, namely, Stanley and Mill Elvers, are navi- 
 gable for small craft and boats to the head of the tide, a distance of U 
 or 7 miles. There are increasing settlements and a fertile country 
 around the harbor, the principal settlement being New London, where 
 the English and Scotch churches are situated on the western shore, 1^ 
 miles within the entrance, the former being distinguished by its steeple. 
 
 Lights. — The inner lighthouse on the beach, west side of entrance to 
 Grenville Harbor, is a white tower, with dwelling attached, 35 feet high, 
 and exhibits, at an elevation of 45 feet, a fixed red light; this lighthouse 
 is 500 yards S. 21° W. (S. 44° W. mag.) from the outer lighthouse. 
 
 The outer lighthouse is on the outer end of the breakwater on the 
 west side of (Jrenville Harbor entrance. The upper part of the tower 
 is painted white; the posts and framework below are brown. The light 
 is a fixed red light. 
 
 The lights are visible through an arc of about 110 degrees between 
 Sims Point on the west and the sand hills on the east side of the har- 
 bor, and should be visible 7 miles. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Grenville Harbor at 
 Ch. 10m. by the mean of the morning and evening tides,- the morning 
 tide being the earlier and highest during the summer months. Ordinary 
 springs rise 3^ feet, neaps 2 feet, unless increased by easterly winds. 
 
 Directions.— The lights kept in line bearing S. 21° W. (S, 44° W. 
 mag.) lead in the best water over the bar, but the inner light must be 
 opened eastward of the outer light when abreast of Sims Point, to 
 avoid the rocky ledge off that point. 
 
 Caution. — Strangers should not attempt to enter the harbor without 
 a pilot, and the lead is required, especially off Sims Point. 
 
 Cape Tryon, IJ miles NW. of Grenville Harbor, is a remarkable cliff 
 of red sandstone, 110 feet high. The coast between Cape Tryon and 
 Bichmond Bay is nearly straight, and free from detached dangers; but 
 the shallow wat'^r runs out a considerable distance, and a large ship 
 should not approach nearer than the depth of 7 fathoms. 
 
 Richmond Bay is of great extent, running in about 10 miles to the 
 southward, and crossing the island to within 2^ miles of the waters of 
 fiedeque Harbor. It contains seven islands and a great number of 
 creeks or rivers, some of which are navigable lor vessels of consider- 
 able burden, and all of them by small craft and boats. Grand Biver, 
 which is the principal inlet, can be ascended in boats to the bridge, a 
 distance of 7 or 8 miles. 
 
 There are fine settlements at Grand Biver, and also at Port Hill, in 
 the NW. part of the bay within Lennox Island, and where several 
 vessels load every year. Thero is an Indian church and settlement on 
 
 u. 
 

 MALPEQUE HARBOR. 
 
 147 
 
 whicli dis- 
 
 g into two 
 leir heads. 
 s, are navi- 
 stance of 
 ile country 
 idon, where 
 rn shore, 1^ 
 J its steeple, 
 entrance to 
 35 feet high, 
 is lighthouse 
 tthouse. 
 yater on the 
 of the tower 
 n. The light 
 
 rrees between 
 'e of the har- 
 
 lle Harbor at 
 > the morning 
 hs. Ordinary 
 terly winds. 
 W. (S. 44° W. 
 light must be 
 lims Point, to 
 
 larbor without 
 
 it. 
 
 emarkable cliff 
 
 ipe Tryon and 
 
 1 dangers; but 
 
 d a large ship 
 
 10 miles to the 
 ■ the waters of 
 •eat number of 
 )l8 of consider- 
 Grand River, 
 [o the bridge, a 
 
 It Port Hill, in 
 where several 
 settlement on 
 
 Lennox Island, but it can not be seen from the sea. Tbere are also 
 large" settlements at the head of the bay, where the churches of St. 
 Kleanor and Miscouche are seen on the ridge which separates its waters 
 from those of the Straits of Northumberland. 
 
 Ice. — The bay is usually frozen over about December 15, and the 
 harbor ice breaks up about April 1. At that date tield ice drives the 
 harbor ice back, and the ice does not disappear until May 1. The bay 
 is completely closed from about December 10 to May 1. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Richmond Bay at fih ; 
 springs rise 3 feet, neaps 2 feet. 
 
 Malpeque Harbor, which is within the eastern entrance of Rich- 
 mond Bay, has 12 feet over its outer bar .at low water and 15 feet at 
 high water in ordinary spring tides, together with depth and space 
 enough within for a large number of vessels. 
 
 A competent pilot, or a chart on a large scale, could alone enable any- 
 one to navigate a ship through the various channels and inlets of this 
 bay. The following remarks and directions will, therefore, be confined 
 to the principal harbor in its entrance. 
 
 The principal entrance to the harbor is to the southward of Billhook 
 or Fish Island, and between it and Royalty Sand, which dries out a 
 long h mile from Royalty Point. The ground is good, in the usual 
 iiiu'horage. Just within this entrance, the bar outside preventing any 
 son from coming in, and the Horseshoe Slioals sheltering them from 
 wesferly winds down the bay. The other entrance, to the NW. of 
 Billhook Island, is called the West Crully, and is so narrow and intri- 
 cate as to be only fit for boats or very small craft, although it has a 
 depth of {) feet over its dangerous bar of sand, which is IJ miles out 
 fr(»m the shore. There will be no probability of this being mistaken 
 f(»r the main entrance, even if the buoys are gone, if it be remembered 
 that the main or ship channel is to the SE. of all the sand bars, includ- 
 ing Billhook Island, and between them and the red sandstone cliffs of 
 Cape Aylesbury, the SE. point of the bay. 
 
 Malpeque, which has given its name to the harbor, is one of the 
 oldest settlements on Prince Edward Island, and, with its church, an 
 excellent landmark, and the Roman Catholic college, with its two spires 
 to the eastward, stand on the neck of land between Darnley Inlet and 
 March Water, 2^ miles south from the entrance of the bay. 
 
 Railway. — There is a railway station here. 
 
 Supplies. — Abundance of fresh provisions may be obtained at Mal- 
 peipie, but water can only be procured from wells (1860). 
 
 Lights. — Two leading lights are exhibited at Darnley Point, eastern 
 side of entrance to Malpeque Harbor. 
 
 The front or low light is a fixed red light, 40 feet from high water, 
 and should be visible 7 miles. 
 
 The rear or high light, S. 10° W. (S. 33° W. mag.), 447 yards from 
 the front light, is a fixed red light, elevated 65 feet, visible 7 miles. 
 
148 
 
 PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND — NORTH COAST. 
 
 1«-'^ 
 
 
 The lights are showu from opeu framed towers painted white, and 25 
 feet high. 
 
 The lights can be seen between the bearing of 8. 43° W. (8. 66° W. 
 mag.) to along the North Bar at the entrance. 
 
 The lights decrease in power as the line of range is departed from, 
 and when not in range must be used as guides to small boats only. 
 
 Two Axed green lights, visible 3 miles from a range for Darnley 
 fiasin. The front tower is on the west side of the basin and south of 
 the entrance. The rear tower is 380 feet 8. 14° E. (8. 9° W. mag.) ftom 
 front tower. In line they lead in with 4 or 5 feet low water. Strangers 
 should not attempt the entrance. 
 
 Malpeque Leading Lights. — The main light is exhibited from a 
 square, white lighthouse, 46 feet high, on Billhook or Fish Island, 
 north side of entrance to Malpeque Harbor. The low light is shown 
 from a white open framework building, 22 feet high, 8. 86° E. (8. 63° 
 E. mag.) 100 yards from the main light. They are fixed white lights, 
 elevated, respectively, 50 and 18 feet above high water, visible 12 and 6 
 miles. The lights in line show the channel over the bar. The outer 
 light is liable to be moved to suit shifting of the channel. 
 
 Buoy. — A buoy, painted black, with N. P. in white letters, is moored 
 in 4 fathoms northward of the bar iit entrance to Richmond Bay. 
 
 Ice. — The harbor does not close until field ice drifts in, abont Jhe 
 middle of January, and opens only when the field ice disappears, about 
 the middle of May. It is completely closed from about February 1 to 
 May 1. The first vessel arrives about the middle of May, and the last 
 one leaves about the middle of December. 
 
 The Bar of Malpeque Harbor runs out eastward 2^ miles from Bill- 
 hook Island, and then turns to the southward, so as to join the shore to 
 the eastward of Cape Aylesbury. It is of sand thinly and irregularly 
 spread upon sandstone, the rock being in many places quite bare. It 
 is exceedingly dangerous in bad weather, when all signs of a channel 
 are obliterated by heavy breakers. The northern part of the bar, for 
 1^ miles out eastward from Billhook Island, is very shallow, there being 
 ii) some places only 4 feet at low water; but the extent of this shallow 
 part is well shown by a good cross mark, namely, the church at Malpeque 
 and Darnley Point in line, bearing S. 10° W. (8. 33° W. mag.). 
 
 The narrowest part of the ship channel Just within, or to the west- 
 ward of the above-named cross mark, is 200 yards wide, and carries 4 
 fathoms water. The inner bar of sandstone, and with 19 feet at low 
 water, is ^ mile farther in, and has in general a buciy upon it. 
 
 Directions.— Darnley Point lights in line, 8. 10° W. (8. 33° W. mag.), 
 lead to the black can buoy at the eastern passage over the bar, entrance 
 to Mal/oque Harbor. Vessels entering should bring the lights in line 
 outside the bar and steer in, keeping them in line until Billhook Island 
 lights are in line N. 86° W. (N. 63° W. mag.); then alter course to the 
 westward, keeping the Billhook Island lights in line as far as the mid- 
 channel buoy, above which the course is marked by the harbor buoys. 
 
 an 
 is 
 
 riv 
 dis 
 ale 
 is i 
 
 >4>l;.' 
 
 ''^^^-r.-^r^-r 
 
 '•^■i«s«ii«,4iA*B*«>as(hK«8S 
 
 ffl@EffiJ 
 
 Ssawjiitsfeai^atiji ' iM^smiS^^Ai 
 
MALPEQUE HARBOR — CASCUMPEQUE BAY. 
 
 149 
 
 Ite, anrt 26 
 
 (8. 66° W. 
 
 irted from, 
 ts only, 
 or Darnley 
 nd south of 
 .mag.) from 
 Strangers 
 
 ited from a 
 Fisb Island, 
 rbt is sbown 
 6o B. (S. 63° 
 white lights, 
 Able 12 and 6 
 r. The outer 
 
 ers, is moored 
 nd Bay. 
 in, about -he 
 appears, about 
 February 1 to 
 ir, and the last 
 
 liles from Bill- 
 in the shore to 
 nd irregularly 
 quite bare. It 
 IS of a channel 
 of the bar, for 
 )w, there being 
 of this shallow 
 chatMalpeque 
 
 . mag.). 
 
 or to the west- 
 
 e, and carries 4 
 
 19 feet at low 
 
 »on it. 
 
 ^.33oW.mag.), 
 le bar, entrance 
 ae lights in line 
 Billhook Island 
 [er course to the 
 far as the mid- 
 Larbor buoys. 
 
 Cantion. — The bar has shifted since the survey of 1845, and the 
 buoys are not to be depended on. Strangers should not attempt to 
 cross the bar without a pilot, or examination if compelled to enter the 
 harbor without. 
 
 Anchorage. — Vessels may anchor outside the bar in from ."> to 7 
 fathoms, sand bottom, to wait for a pilot; and in the event of the wind 
 or tide failing, the anchorage is considered tolerably safe between the 
 inner bar and the entrance, and probably is so witli any wind that would 
 prevent a vessel from running in, but the holdinjj^ ground is not good 
 there, and should only be trusted in line summer weather. Within the 
 harbor the bottom is of sand and clay, and a vessel may choose any 
 depth from 3 to 10 fathoms, the deepest water being close otf the point 
 of the Royalty Sand, the shoal water being marked by a can buoy. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and chancre, in Malpeque Harbor at 
 6h. ; springs rise 3 feet, neaps 2 feet, but the rise is so irregular that 
 it would not be safe to count u^xtn a rise of more than 2 feet on any 
 particular day. Northeast winds cause high tides, westerly winds pro- 
 duce the contrary effect. The morning tides are the highest during 
 the summer months. The rate of the tides is strongest in the entrance 
 and off the point of the Royalty Sand, running in spring tides 2^ knots. 
 In the ship channel from the entrance to the bar the rate is li} to 2 
 knots. Within the bay the tides are in general much weaker, seldom 
 amounting to one knot. 
 
 Coast — From the principal entrance to Richmond Bay the coast 
 trends NW. 20 miles to Cascumpeque Harbor, the intervening shore 
 being formed exclusively of sand bars and sand beaches, from which 
 the shallow water extends % piile to 3 fathoms and one mile to 5 fath- 
 oms. In the above-named distance there are two openings through 
 the sand bars, Conway and Cavendish Inlets, which afford shelter to 
 boats and are distant 11 miles and 7 miles, respectively, from the light- 
 house at Cascumpeque. 
 
 Boats can enter Richmond Bay by Conway Inlet, passing to the 
 westward of Lennox Island at high water. 
 
 Lights. — The leading lights at Conway Inlet, north side of entrance, 
 are exhibited from white buildings, 30 and 20 feet high and 66 yards 
 apart. The lights are fixed white, at an elevation of 26 and 16 feet, 
 and should be visible 10 and 8 miles. The position of the outer light 
 is altered to meet changes in the channel. 
 
 Cascumpeque Bay is of great extent, and broken into inlets or 
 rivers which penetrate the country in a variety of directions and to the 
 distance of many miles. The chart must be referred to for these, and 
 also for the boat communications within the sand bars, when the tide 
 is in, southward to Richmond Bay and northward to Kildare River. 
 
 Cascumpeque Harbor, sometimes called Holland Harbor, is known 
 by the remarkable high sand hills 3^ miles to the southward of its 
 entrance; these are the remains of a range of sand hills formerly known 
 
 :,-j„t,0ini 
 
 
ii) 
 
 V 
 
 •^ 
 
 > 11" 
 
 !l 
 
 iP 
 
 4 
 
 160 PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND— NORTH COAST. 
 
 a«the seven SisterB, and are 50 feet high. There are no high sand 
 liills to the northward of the harbor. v,„t.ween two sand bars 
 
 The entrance to this harbor is \»« f -^'^^/Z^^^' .^^'j^'J^Xer which 
 
 pass close to the «««th^*'"d"^- ^ . ... ^^^^^ ^nd between sand cov- 
 The channel, from ^^^-J.e^^^ ,f o^al' ^ide, and affords tolerable 
 
 anchorage m from -i to ^s mtuu j^^ 
 
 just outside the entrance, where the ««°d ""J^ W^ in the sand 
 water There is a second entrance into the bay, the Deacn m 
 
 C^Mc. was at ..t e«^;*^„^^%tn rfnirfn-^LC 
 
 ward of the harbor. . ^ g ^ Island is 
 
 •r --i.* Th« liifhthouse erected on the ow. pari, m oi»u«j 
 Light-The "g^;^'^'*''*;*' , , ., y i^t i8 exhibited at an elevation 
 
 rrr"irrrr"ler"or<.Utaoc» «f .. ».... TM, 
 rrorttt„rorbt:ruC''tl.e »«... ».<. of t^. next wha.f .a^t 
 
 "^^htZiWlng .tand. o» a st«et of th. village, 1,100 f«>t 8. 72" W. 
 
 ?h:t^; a;d a dlamond..(,aped day bea«,- at the head of each n-ast, 
 
 %t?r™:ri"r„CNE. p.rt of savage ^^^^^ 
 feet Wgr The light is 3o feet above high water and should be visible 
 
 ' Cbt'k ml^t :LrL feet S. 350 W. (8. 58o W .ag ) .W,m *e 
 J„t o^e and fs 20 feet high. The Ught is 45 feet above h.gh wate, 
 
 "irr It" tgh LtT^ *:rH;:rOascn.pe,ne na^bo. 
 Tides.— it 18 nigu >v<t , ^ . ^^j. ^gguiar, 
 
 ::r.S;LTrt ™^:hfbt;::^"g;rt'er is an that can be safely 
 
CA8CUMPEQUE HARBOR. 
 
 l&l 
 
 ligh sand 
 
 sand bars 
 ver which 
 B8 li miles 
 rater, in a 
 issels must 
 
 sand, 'iov- 
 ds tolerable 
 berth being 
 s dry at low 
 in the sand 
 y HE. gale, 
 into the bay, 
 to the south- 
 
 ady Island is 
 b an elevation 
 I miles. This 
 
 lor. 
 
 J2 feet above 
 
 shown from a 
 bea«on, which 
 
 ,xt wharf east 
 
 , and visible 6 
 ^ted on a mast 
 ries a slatwork 
 
 Ifeet S. 72° W. 
 
 Isavage Island, 
 The lights are 
 a small hut at 
 of each mast, 
 
 aland, and is 22 
 lould be visible 
 
 mag.) from the 
 Lve high water 
 
 Impeque Harbor 
 
 , is not res«la'*» 
 Ut can be safely 
 
 reckoned upon on any particular day, unless in 'strong easterly winds, 
 v«iiich cause a nab of a foot or more in all the harbors of this coast. 
 
 Note. — It must also be observed that the rise given is always that of 
 the best tide in the 24 hours, and that the morning spring tides are the 
 highest during the summer months. It frequently happens at or near 
 the springs that the evening tides rise only a few inches, and some- 
 times they entirely disappear, causing single day tides for a short time, 
 as at Bichibucto and Shediac. 
 
 The morning spring tides are also the earliest during the summer 
 months, as, for instance, at Cascunipeque beacon at the full and change, 
 in July, when the morning high water occurred at 4h. Ii2m. and the 
 evening tide at (»h. 58m., the mean being 5h. 40m., as given above and 
 in all other similar cases. 
 
 At or near the neaps the two tides of the same day become nearly 
 equal in time and rise for a short time. There is reason to believe that 
 the diurnal inequality of the tides ceases for a time soon after the 
 equinox, and that it is reversed in winter, but the ice has hitherto pre- 
 vented observations during that season. These remi<rk.s apply to all 
 the harbors of this island and of the neighboring provinces; their 
 importance to vessels seeking refuge and taking the dangerous bars in 
 bad weather will be evident. The rate uf the tidal streams in the 
 entrance of Oascumpeque Harbor is in general 1^ knots, but frequently 
 over 4. 
 
 Ice. — The harbor is usually frozen over about January 3 and is clear 
 of harbor ice about April 6, being completely closed between those 
 dates; field ice drifts in about January 4 and disappears about May 10. 
 The first vessel arrives about April 28 and the last leaves about 
 December 20. 
 
 Directions. — As the bars of Gascumpeque Harbor shift so much, a 
 pilot would be indispensable to a stranger visiting it. 
 
 Vessels iipproaching Oascumpeque Harbor stand along the shore 
 until they bring the Savage Island range lights in one. They then 
 keep the alignment S. 35° W. (8. 58° W. mag.), until the red range 
 lights near the wharves are brought in one; these lead S. 72° W. (N, 
 85° W. mag.), directly up the harbor. 
 
 The large black can buoy moored outside the bar will be found in 5 
 fathoms of water, a short distance south of the alignment of the Savage 
 Island range lights. At the intersection of the Savage Island range 
 and the Wharves range the red cask buoy marking Maloues Point is 
 moored. There avo 11 feet at low water on the bar in the alignment of 
 Savage Island range lights. 
 
 In strong easterly gales the bar is covered with a continuous line of 
 heavy breakers. 
 
 The best landmark in this neighborhood is the Roman Catholic church 
 at Tignish, the lofty spire of which is distinguished before any other 
 feature of the coast from the eastward and is visible also to vessels ou 
 the west side of North Point. 
 
-I tw 
 
 '.'ifj : 
 
 ''ii'i: 
 
 152 
 
 PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND— NORTH COAST. 
 
 Anchorage. — There is good anchorage off the bar in fine weatner in 
 6 or 6 fiithoniM, Hand bottom. Within the entrance the harbor han 
 plenty of water and a clear channel, which, after running in one mile 
 to the westward, tnniH to the southward within Savage Island and 
 between it and Hill Point, where there is a wharf at which vossels gen- 
 erally loa<l (1860). 
 
 Alberton, a small town, rising in importance, is on the west shore of 
 Ca8ciunpe(|ue Harbor. There is a wharf here in connection with the 
 railway. The churches, courthouse, and buildings generally are of 
 wood and painted white. There were 900 inhabitants in 1881. 
 
 The United States is represented by a consular agent. 
 
 Tignish River. — From Cape Kildare to the north point of Prince 
 Edward Island, II miles north, there is little requiring notice, except- 
 ing Tignish River, with only 2 feet of water in its narrow sandy entrance 
 at low water, and affording shelter to fishing boats ; and where also there 
 Is a Ashing village and two churches, the new one of brick (standing 
 a mile to the eastward of the old one) forming with its spire one of the 
 best landmarks on the island. About a mile northward of the entrance 
 a rocky ledge runs off' 1^ miles, with no more than 3 fathoms on it at 
 low water. 
 
 The shallow water extends the same distance off Cape Kildare, which 
 is a cliff of red sandstone 30 feet high, with the land about it red and 
 surmounted by clumps of trees; and generally it must be borne in 
 mind that there are rocky and irregular soundings, between 3 and 5 
 fathoms, all along this part of the coast, frequently extending nearly 
 2 miles off shore. 
 
 Lights. — Leading lights at Big Tignish Biver entrance. 
 
 The high light, a ilxed white light, is shown from a square building, 
 painted with black and white horizontal bands. The lighthouse is 
 33 feet high, and stands on the beach at the inner end of the north 
 breakwater pier. The light is 35 feet above high water, and should 
 bo visible 11 miles. 
 
 The low light is a fixed red tight, elevated 18 feet, and visible sea- 
 ward 5 miles. It is hoisted on a pole 14 feet high, placed on the outer 
 end of the north breakwater pier, to indicate the position of the pier- 
 head. The light bears 9. 73° E. (S. 50° E. mag.) from the high light, 
 distant 620 feet. 
 
 The low light is for the convenience of fishing boats and light- 
 dratt vessels only. When the lights are in line they lead between the 
 breakwaters. 
 
 North Point and Light— <S!e« page 130. 
 
 at 
 for 
 W 
 am 
 
 NOSTHUMBEBLAND STRAIT. 
 
 A ftill description of Prince Edward Island and of the opposite 
 coasts of Nova Scotia and New Brunswick having been given, it now 
 only remains to offer a few general remarks respecting Northumberland 
 Strait. There are few places in which such precision of knowledge is 
 
 fil, 
 
NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT. 
 
 153 
 
 refttner in 
 arbor lia» 
 a one mile 
 Bland and 
 :388el8 geu- 
 
 )8t sbore of 
 n with the 
 ally are of 
 il. 
 
 t of Prince 
 ;ice, except- 
 dy entrance 
 re also there 
 ik (standing 
 e one of the 
 the entrance 
 jms on it at 
 
 ildare, which 
 ut it red and 
 be borne in 
 ireen 3 and 5 
 nding nearly 
 
 are building, 
 ghthouse is 
 of the north 
 and should 
 
 id visible sea- 
 on the outer 
 n of the pier- 
 he high light, 
 
 its and light- 
 between the 
 
 the opposite 
 given, it now 
 orthuniberland 
 f knowledge is 
 
 more requisite than in this strait, which presents a confined navigation 
 16() miles in length, and which, at Gape Turnientine, the narrowest 
 part, is but 7 niiles from .shore to shore, and only .'>^ miles wide, if only 
 i:he navigable breadth is reckoned between the shoals. 
 
 The description of the dangers and of the soundings have been made 
 very full in consequence, and the times of high water and the rii^e <^ 
 the tides in the various harbors, together with the strength of the tJidn 
 streams in their entrances, have also been given; but the tides of the 
 strait are so peculiar that it will be both interesting and useful to add 
 a general view of the courije of the tide waves, an<l of the strength and 
 direction of the streams which they occasion. 
 
 To this will be added briefly the mode of proceeding recommended 
 to be adopted in a vessel running through the strait in a dark night or 
 in thick weather when the soundings alone can safely guide her. 
 
 Tidal Streams. — It will be convenient to divide the strait at Cape 
 Tormentine into two nearly equal portions, distingui-shed by the differ- 
 ent set of their tidal streams and by dift'erent tide waves, which, advanc- 
 ing from opposite directions, meet in the central part of the strait. 
 The course of these waves appears to be as follows: The ]>rincipal tide 
 wave, after entering the gulf between Cape Breton and Newfoundland, 
 sends off, laterally, waves to the SW., on either side of the Magdaleu 
 Islands. The first of these, the eastern wave, coming from between 
 those islands and the western shore of Cape Breton Island, arrives at 
 the eastern entrance of the strait soon after 8 o'clock, and proceeds to 
 the westward, making high water later in succession from east to west 
 as far as Pictou, which it reaches at 10 hours. At the same nominal 
 hour, but 12 hours later, the other or western wave arrives at Gape 
 Tormentine, having been retarded by the loug detour which it has 
 taken to the northward and westward of the Magdalen Islands and 
 by the great extent of comparatively shallow water which it has passed 
 over in its subsequent progress to the SW. This ware makes high 
 water later in succession at places along the eastern coast of New 
 Brunswick, as we proceed to the southward, and after entering the 
 strait from NW. to SE., contrary to the course of the other or eastern 
 wave. 
 
 Thus it is high water, full and change, at Miscoa at about 2^ hours; 
 at Escuminac Point and the North Point of Prince Edward Island, 
 forming the western entrance of the strait, soon after 4 hour.s ; at the 
 West Point of Prince Edward Island at 6 hours; at Shediac at 8 hours, 
 and at Cape Tormentine at 10 hours. 
 
 When, therefore, the eastern wave arrives between Pictou and the 
 Wood Islands, the western part of the preceding tide wave arrives 
 between Cape Tormentine and Cape Traverse. They then meet and 
 combine to make high water at the same hour, namely, 10 hours, or a 
 little later in the harbors, all over the central portion of the strait from 
 Pictou to Cape Tormentine, causing also an amount of rise of the 
 tides everywhere more than double, and in some of the harbors nearly 
 
 <^., 
 

 ■I 
 ^^1 
 
 ii 
 
 m 
 
 ■'Iff: 
 
 IM 
 
 NORTHUMBERLAND 8TBAIT. 
 
 three tiuies m great as that which occurs at either entrance of the 
 strait. 
 
 The direction of the tidal streams corresponds generally, and in fine 
 weather, with the progress of the tide wave, but is disturbed occasion- 
 alliF by strong winds. The eastern flood streani enters the strait from 
 lOe NR., running at the rate of 2A knots round the east point of Prince 
 tll\vard Island, but is mucii weaker in the oiling and over toward the 
 southern shore. It runs round Cape Bear, and with an increasing rate 
 along the land to the vrestward; is strongest in the deep wafer near 
 the land, and runs at its extreme rate of .'t knots close past the Indian 
 Rocks and Kifienian Reef. Losing strength as it proceeds farther to 
 the NW., it is quite a weak stream when it meets the other Hood stream 
 off the Tryon Shoals. 
 
 This eastern flood stream is not so strong along the southern or Nova 
 Scotia shore, unless it be in the Caribou Channel for a short space near 
 the Caribou Beef; and it is weak, not generally exceeding ^ knot, in 
 the middle of the strait. 
 
 The other or western flood stream comes from tiie northward, along 
 the west coast of Prince Edward Island, sweeping round West Point, 
 and running strongest in the deep water near West Reef, where its 
 rate is 2^ knots. Over toward the New Brunswick shore its rate sel- 
 dom exceeds 1^ knots, and this is its average speed as it pursues its 
 course to the SE., until near Cape Tormentine, where the strongest 
 part of the stream runs near the Jourimain Shoals, and thence to the 
 southward round and over the dangerous Tormentine Beefs with a 
 great ripple, and at tlu; rate of 3 knots. 
 
 Aficr passing these reefs, part of it curves round to the SW. with 
 decreasing strength, and unites with the other flood stream in Verte 
 Bay, whilst the remainder is lost in the central part of the strait. The 
 ebb stream, generally speaking, pursues a contrary course to the flood, 
 and at nearly the same rates. 
 
 From this account of the tidal streams, it appears that a fast sailing 
 vessel, under favorable circumstances, might enter the strait with the 
 flood, and, arriving at Cape Tormentine soon after high water, there 
 take the ebb, and thus have the stream with her, with but slight inter- 
 ruption from one end of the strait to the other. Or, a vessel beating 
 with the flood might so time her arrival at the same point as to be 
 able to continue her voyage in the same direction with the ebb. 
 
 The tulal streams were observed in general to change their directions 
 soon after it was high water or low water by the shore; but not infre- 
 (juently there were exceptions to this which it would be diflicult to 
 account for with certainty. Strong winds in the gulf greatly influence 
 the strength and direction of the streams in the strait, as well as the 
 height to which the tides rise; moreover, as the two tide waves which 
 meet in the central parts of the strait are 12 fiours diflerent in age, 
 so they are in consequence of unequal heights, owing to the diurnal 
 
 "mM 
 
I 
 
 NORTHUMBERLAND 8TRAIT. 
 
 165 
 
 ranee of the 
 
 , and in fine 
 lecl occasion 
 I strait from 
 nt of Prince 
 r toward the 
 •reasing rate 
 p water near 
 st the Indian 
 i8 farther to 
 • flood stream 
 
 ;hern or Nova 
 irt space near 
 ing 4 knot, in 
 
 ;hward, along 
 
 I West Point, 
 
 eef, where its 
 
 re its rate sel- 
 
 it pursues its 
 
 the strongest 
 
 thence to the 
 
 Reefs with a 
 
 the SW. with 
 ream in Verte 
 le strait. The 
 je to the flood, 
 
 t a last sailing 
 strait with the 
 h water, there 
 ut slight inter- 
 vessel beating 
 point as to be 
 ;he ebb. 
 
 their directions 
 ; but not infre- 
 be diflicnlt to 
 ■eatly influence 
 , as well as the 
 e waves which 
 ifferent in age, 
 to the diurnal 
 
 inetiuality, each of them being aUernately and in turn the higliest, 
 and probably occasioning the stronger stream. 
 
 But it would reiiuire a long series of siinnltaueous observations at 
 ditferent points, and continued through tlie diflerent seasons of the 
 year, to reduce to order or to explain satisfactorily the seeming irregu- 
 larities thus produced. Nevertheless, enough remains of general occur- 
 rence during the summer months which it is higlily useful for the 
 seamen to ivuow, and which has been stated in const leuce. 
 
 Directions. — V'essels bound to Miramichi and tlie i>orts in North- 
 umberland Strait to the westward of Cape Tormentine, after entering 
 tlie gulf (m either side of the Island of St. Panl, usuallj' pass to the 
 southward of the Magdalen Islands, and round North Point of Prince 
 l-^dward Island. The reef off this last-named point is exceedingly dan- 
 gcnms, and the lead should be kept constantly going when approaching 
 it at night or in foggy weather, bearing in mind the probability of hav- 
 ing been previously set to the southward in crossing from the Magdalen 
 Islands, especially if the wind has been from the northward. 
 
 Under the same circumstances, after rounding North Point, the course 
 should be shaped well to the westward, so as to insure clearing West 
 Keef, which should be passed by the lead, running along the edge of 
 the bank off the New Brunswick shore. Proceeding southeastward, 
 after having passed West Reef, the lead will atlbrd sufBcient guid- 
 ance along either shore, reference being had to the soundings on the 
 chart, until the vessel is near the narrow part of the strait at Cape 
 Tormentine. 
 
 Then, if bound farther eastward, the shore of Prince Edward Island 
 should be preferred, the lights and soundings on that side being quite 
 sufficient to guide the vessel past Carleton Head, Cape Traverse, and 
 more particularly Tryon Shoals, if the irregular tides of the latter and 
 the frequent set of the ebb stream toward them be remembered. The 
 tides, however, in this narrow part of the strait are not very strong 
 along the Prince Edward Island shore, off which the anchorage is good 
 in the event of the wind failing, whilst on the opposite side there is 
 deep water and very strong tides close to Jourimain and Tormentine 
 Reefs. 
 
 If the wind be adverse, or scant from the southward, with the ebb 
 tide running, a stranger had better not attempt this narrow i>assage 
 at night or when the land can not be seen. Under such circumstances, 
 it IS recommended to anchor to the westward of Cape Tormentine till 
 daylight or a change of tide renders it less hazardous to proceed. 
 
 Vessels bound to ports in the eastern division of the strait enter 
 the gulf either through the Gut of Oanso or by the Island of St. Paul. 
 In the iirst case, the bearing of the light at the northern entrance of 
 the Gut will guide them up to Cape St. George, from which, if bound 
 to Pictou, there will be no difficulty in running along the land to the 
 westward, if due attention be paid to the soundings in the chart, and 
 
'L 
 
 1^1 
 
 ll ' 
 
 
 i 
 1 c 
 
 'I; 
 
 150 
 
 NORTHUMBERLAND STRAIT. 
 
 afterwards to the bearing of Piotou Island and PIctou Harbor lights. 
 If tlie weather be thiok, or the light not seen, beware of the reef oft 
 the cast end of Piotou Island, which shonld not then be ai)proa«!hed 
 nearer than the depth of 10 fatiioms, especially if the Hood tide be 
 running. 
 
 Vessels approaching from St. Paul Island, and entering the strait at 
 East Point, should not approach the latter nearer than the depth of L'O 
 fathoms in thick weather. If the night be clear, the lights on Sea Wolf 
 and Chetican Islands, East Point, and Cape St. (ieorge will be of service. 
 
 Cape Bear and its reef should not be rounded in less than 15 fathoms, 
 under the same circumstances, regard being liad to the light on Pan- 
 mure Head, and then, if bound anywhere to the westward of Piotou, the 
 vessel should be kept more over toward Piotou Island and the southern 
 shore, where the soundings will guide her, till Indian Kecks and Rifle- 
 man Reef are passed. The lights on Prim Point and Wood Island will 
 greatly assist in passing the last-named danger, after which the lead 
 will again afford sufiBcient guidance along the Prince Edward Island 
 shore, past Tryon Shoals, and through the strait to the northwestward. 
 
 On the opposite or Nova Scotia shore, westward of Piotou, the 
 principal dangers to be avoided are Middle Shoals, between Piotou and 
 Island Caribou, Amet Island and Shoals, and Waugh Shoal. The 
 approach to all these is sufficiently indicated in thick weather by the 
 soundings, and therefore a constant use of the lead and a careful ref- 
 erence to the chart will enable the intelligent seaman to pass them at 
 all times in safety, and also to conduct his vessel to any of the harbors 
 of this coast, where pilots may readily be obtained. 
 
arbor lights, 
 the reef oft 
 tvpproa<!hed 
 
 iood tide be 
 
 the ntrait at 
 5 depth of L'O 
 on Sea Wolf 
 tie of service. 
 1 15 fathoms, 
 ght on Puu- 
 )f Pictoa,the 
 the sontheru 
 ks aud Bifle- 
 d Islaud will 
 licb the lead 
 [ward Islaud 
 rth westward. 
 
 Piotou, the 
 m Fiotou aud 
 
 Shoal. The 
 tather by the 
 a. careful ref- 
 pass them at 
 f the harbors 
 
 J|K3S3Sa»|.- 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 OCLF OF 8T. LAWRENCE, WEST COAST-MIUAMICHI BAY TO OASPfi BAY. 
 
 NEW nUUNSWICK. 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. in!».) 
 
 Bscnmiaac Point, the SK. point of Miramichi Boy, is of peat unon 
 a very low sandstone cliff, and is wooded with spruce trees whTrh i^Z 
 a very dark ground for the white lighthouse ou^ endTL i so T 
 picuous that it can be seen at tin.es from a distance «t 3 or 14 m ,es" 
 It .8 so difficult especially for a stranger, to distinguish one poh of 
 this low coast ti-om another, that this lighthouse is very uefu to 
 vessels bound t« Mivamichi, and making the land ftom sea It In 
 pomts out the position of the dangerous Escumrnac uZ ^''" 
 
 lig^tru'^ro%he'3'faf "'' ' ;r"'%^ *'" "-^heastward from the 
 water ' *"** ^* '"''"' *« ^ ^**»^""^« »t low 
 
 B«oy.-A black can buoy has been moored at the outer edce of tl.« 
 shoa ground off Escuminac Point in 5 fatho.ns water'wTthlcu^aae 
 .ghtijouse bearing S. 19o w. (S. 42o w. mag.), 2^ miles. """'"' 
 
 reiegraph.— There is a telegraph station at Escuminac Villno-A af 
 about 3i miles westward of Escuniinac light. ""'"""""^ ^'"»^«' ** 
 
 Light-The lighthouse on Escuminac Point, an octagonal tn.... 
 painted white, and 58 feet high, exhibits, at anVevaJlTf ?i It a 
 fixed white light, which should be visible U miles. ' 
 
 «n^?* '''^histle.-The steam whistle, 300 feet west of the lighthouse 
 
 ZnTT^/""''''' '" '""''^ "^ '^^^y -««*her will be sounded for "' 
 seconds'duration, with silent intervals of twentynine seconds 
 agnals.-There is a telegraph and signal station at the lighthouse 
 Miramichi Bay is nearly 14 miles wide from Escuminac pS t^ the 
 
 Tmo:;: to^irf "' ^t'^ ^^^ '^ ""'«« '^-p ^-- ihit rectos 
 
 pir ^ ^ . T" ^''^'^''*'^ of the Miramichi, between Fox and 
 
 sandt^l rt'. ^""^ ^"^ *« '"™^'' ^y - senucir^ular range of low 
 sandy .slauds, between which there are three small Dassa^es Ji nZ 
 
 Severallobster factories have been built between Escuminac Point 
 and Escuminac Village, the most conspicuous at Herring Covf and 
 
 157 
 
158 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 i#. 
 
 
 Winter Portage, distant one and li miles, respectively, from Escuminac 
 lighthouse. 
 
 The Roman Catholic church, west of Escuminac Village, has a square 
 tower, and is a conspicuous object from the eastward when north of 
 Escuminac Point. 
 
 Lights. — At rather more than a mile eastward from Huckleberry 
 Gully the N"W. or outer beacon light at Preston Beach is exhibited 
 from a white beacon; the SE. or inner beacon light is exhibited from 
 the east side of a white barn, which is made conspicuous by a black 
 band painted down the center of the roof. 
 
 The lights are fixed white; the front light is 52 tv t and the back o;ie 
 66 feet above high-water mark; each light should be visible 10 miles. 
 
 In line, the lights lead in the best water across the bar, and to the 
 Lump buoy; the day mark for the same purpose is the black band in 
 line with the outer beacon bearing S. 40° E. (S. 17° E. mag.). 
 
 Huckleberry Islanu is 33 feet above high water and one mile long. 
 Fox Gully, between Huckleberry and Fox Islands, and Huckleberry 
 Gully are almost dry at low water. They are both only lit for boats or 
 very small craft, and the channels leading from them to the westward, 
 up a bay of the main within Huckleberry Island, or across to the French 
 River and village (where there is a wooden church not easily dis- 
 tinguished from a barn), are narrow and intricate, between flats of 
 sand, mud, and erlgrass, and with only water enough for boats. 
 
 Buoy. — A black spar buoy in 2 feet water marks the entrance to 
 Huckleberry Gully. 
 
 Fox Island, 3^ miles long, is narrow and partially wooded ; it is 
 formed of parallel ranges of sand hills, which contain embedded drift 
 timber, and have evidently been thrown up by the sea in the course of 
 ages. These islands are merely sand bars on a large scale, and nowhere 
 rise higher than 60 feet above the sea. They are incapable of agricul- 
 tural cultivation, but yet they abound in plants and shrubs suited to 
 such a locality, and in wild fruits, such as the blueberry, strawberry, 
 and raspberry. Wild fowl of various kinds are also plentiful in their 
 season, and so also are salmon, which are taken in nets and weirs along 
 the beaches outside the island, as well as in the gullies. 
 
 Lights. — At the NW. end of Fox Island, three fixed white lights are 
 exhibited from three masts, 40, 38, and 28 feet high, with white sheds 
 at their bases. The liglits should be visible 8 miles. 
 
 No. 1 light is 1,830 feet from the NW. jioiut of the island, and is 47 
 feet above high-water mark. 
 
 No. 2 light is 1,051 feet S. 73° E. (S. 50° E. mag.) from No. 1, and is 
 46 feet above high- water mark. 
 
 No. 3 light is 954 feet S. 43° W. (S. 66° W. may.) from No. 1, and is 30 
 feet above high-water mark. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 lights in line lead into bid Horseshoe Channel. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 3 lights in line lead through Portage Island Channel. 
 
 Nos. 2 and 3 lights in line lead to the upper buoy of Horseshoe Shoal. 
 
MTRAMICHI BAY. 
 
 159 
 
 m Escuminac 
 
 , has a aquare 
 Then north of 
 
 Huckleberry 
 h is exlubited 
 xliibited from 
 >us by a black 
 
 a the back o:ve 
 ible 10 miles, 
 bar, and to the 
 black baud iu 
 
 nag.). 
 
 L one luile loug. 
 id Huckleberry 
 ■ lit for boats or 
 tlie westward. 
 sstotheFrencli 
 not easily dis 
 >etweeu flats of 
 "or boats, 
 tbe entrance to 
 
 y wooded; it is 
 
 embedded drift 
 
 in the course of 
 
 lie, and nowhere 
 
 pable of agricul- 
 
 shrubs suited to 
 
 ry, strawberry, 
 
 plentiful in their 
 
 and weirs along 
 
 white lights are 
 with white sheds 
 
 island, and is 47 
 rom No. 1, and is 
 m>'o.l,andi8 30 
 
 Channel, 
 and Cbannel. 
 Horseshoe Shoal. 
 
 Swashway Range Lights. — Two white square skeleton towers, with 
 horizontal slat work seaward and sheds at their bases, are erected on 
 the east side of Fox Island. 
 
 A fixed white light is exhibited from the top of each tower, showing 
 over a small arc on each side of the line of range. 
 
 The front tower is 1 A miles from the south end of the island, on ground 
 e feet above the sea and 100 feet back from the coast line. The tower 
 is 40 feet high aud the light 47 feet above high-water mark, and should 
 be visible 12 miles. 
 
 The back tower is 1,220 feet S. 81° W. (N. 76° W. mag.) from the front 
 one. It is 71 feet high. The light is 72 feet above high-water mark, 
 and should be visible 14 miles. 
 
 These lights in line lead from the deep water of the outer bay through 
 the Swashway, with (in 1891) nowhere less than 2^ fathoms water, to 
 the buoys in the ship channel. 
 
 Portage Island is 4^ miles long, narrow, low, and pfirtly wooded 
 with small spruce trees and bushes. Portage Island has extended con- 
 siderably southward. Several conspicuous houses have been built ou 
 the island, the most prominent a lobster factory, with dwellings attached, 
 on the east coast, about 1^ miles from the south extreme of the island; 
 also a similar group of buildings on the west coast, at the same dis- 
 tance from the north extreme. The island shows from a distance in 
 three parts, composed of clumps of trees 61 feet high, with marshes 
 between. 
 
 Light. — The lighthouse on the SW. end of Portage Island, 42 feet 
 high, and painted white, exhibits at an elevation of 45 feet a fixed white 
 light. The light should be visible 12 miles. 
 
 Miramichi Bar commences from the SE. end of Portage Island, and 
 extends across the main entrance, and parallel to Fox Island, nearly (i 
 miles "^E. It consists of sand, and has not more than one or 2 feet of 
 water over it in some parts at low spring tides. Near Portage Island 
 there is water enough over it for small vessels, and there is a still 
 deeper part near its SE. end, called the Swashway. 
 
 Both the Lump and Spit are steep shoals, but between them a A'essel 
 may run along, or even work on the SW. side of the channel in 4 or 3 
 fathoms by the lead. 
 
 On the opposite or NE. side of the channel the bar is extremely steep. 
 The spit of Fox Island is gradually extending out. 
 
 Horseshoe Shoal consists of sand and gravel, and is of great extent. 
 The least water on it is 3 feet, and it Is separated from the shoal 
 on the inner side of Portage Island by a narrow and intricate channel, 
 which is seldom or never used. 
 
 Inner Bar.— ^To tlie southward, the Horseshoe is separated from the 
 shoal which Jionnects Fox, Egg, and Vin Islands by the very narrow 
 Ship Channel (over the Horseshoe or Inner Bar), which is only 400 
 yards, having a depth of 18 feet at low water (in 1885). 
 
^11 
 
 isi: 
 
 i/ii :■■ 
 
 ,K( 
 
 4*ii' 
 
 
 160 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWBENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 Caution. — Too muuU reliauce must not be placed ou the buoyage, as 
 it is subject to alterations. 
 
 Pilots. — Pilotage is compulsory in Miramichi Bay and Biver. Pilots 
 are generally to be met with in the entrance of the bay, though their 
 district extends eastward to Magdalen Islands, southward to Kouchi- 
 bouguac River, and westward to Miscou Point. 
 
 Light —The lightvessel, a schooner, between Fox and Portage Islands, 
 exhibits at an elevation of 35 feet a fixed red light, which should be vis- 
 ible 8 miles. This vessel is often out of position after heavy weather. 
 
 Buoys. — A black spar buoy lies in 17 feev water at the eq>stern 
 entrance to the channel, near Portage Island, for small vessels between 
 the bars, and a red spar buoy is moored in 19 feet in the same channel, 
 at the SW. side of the outer part of the bar. These buoys are nearly 
 on the line of the SW. and NE. beacons, near the north point of P'ox 
 Island. 
 
 Bar buoy, '^ can buoy, painted black and white, in vertical stripes, 
 and numbered one, is inoored in 22 feet water, at the south extreme of 
 the outer bar, with Escuminac lighthouse bearing S. 75° E. (S. 52° E. 
 mag.), distant 6^ miles, and south extreme of Huckleberry Island 8. 
 20° W. (S. 43° W. mag.). Close south of this buoy there is a depth of 
 32 feet, the western limit of a deep channel from seaward. 
 
 Lump buoy, a can buoy, painted black and numbered 2, is moored in 
 16 feet water on a shoal between the 8E. extreme of the bar and Fox 
 Island, and lies N. 43° W. (N. 20° W. ::;ag.), 1,800 yards from Bar buoy. 
 A black spar buoy lies a short distance northward of Lump buoy. 
 
 A can buoy, painted red and numbered 3, lies in 29 feet water N. 
 34° W. (N. 11° W. mag.), about IJ miles from Bar buoy, and at the 
 SW. angle of the bar, northward of the Swashway. The water shoals 
 rapidly to 11 feet northward of this buoy. 
 
 Spit buoy, a can buoy, painted black and numbered 4, is moored in 
 18 feet water at the east extreme of a shoal extending one mile from 
 the northern end of Fox Island, and lies with Portage Island light- 
 house bearing N. 40° W. (N. 17° W. mag.), distant about IJ miles, and 
 NW. extreme of Fox Island S. 59° W. (S. 82° W. mag.). 
 
 A can buoy, painted red and numbered 5, ia moored in 18 feet water, 
 bearing S. 8()0 W. (N. 71° W. mag.), distant 1 f\; miles from Spit buoy, 
 and at the eastern edge of the inner bar. Three buoys similar to No. 5, 
 numbered, respectively, 6, 7, and 8, mark the channel southward of 
 Horseshoe Shoal, Nos. 6 and 7 being northeastward and No. 8 south- 
 westward of the lightvessel. They are moored in 18, 21, and 20 feet 
 water, respectively. 
 
 A can buoy, painted red and numbered 9, is moored in 23 feet water 
 at the SW. extreme of Horseshoe Shoal. 
 
 Three spar buoys, painted black, lie southeastward of Grandoon 
 Island : the two eastern buoys are in a depth of 16 feet, and the western 
 one in 19 feet. 
 
 eb« 
 
 ext 
 
MIBAMICHI BAY. 
 
 161 
 
 buoyage, as 
 
 ver. Pilots 
 hough their 
 I to Kouchi 
 
 tage Islands, 
 hould be via- 
 avy weather, 
 the eastern 
 jsels between 
 lame channel, 
 ys are nearly 
 point of Fox 
 
 i'tical stripes, 
 ith extreme oi 
 5 E. (S. 52° E. 
 erry Island S. 
 e is a depth of 
 
 d. 
 
 2, is moored in 
 e bar and Fox 
 rom Bar buoy, 
 imp buoy, 
 feet water N. 
 oy, and at the 
 le water shoals 
 
 4, is moored in 
 one mile from 
 e Island light- 
 it 1 J miles, and 
 
 u 18 feet water, 
 
 from Spit buoy, 
 
 similar to IJlo. 5, 
 
 southward of 
 
 d No. 8 south- 
 
 21, and 20 feet 
 
 in 23 feet water 
 
 ■d of Grandoon 
 and the western 
 
 Grandoon buoy, a can buoy, painted red and numbered 10, is nioorod 
 in 25 feet water 400 yards southeastward of a shoal extending from the 
 shore eastward of Oak Point. 
 
 Anchorage. — There is good anchorage, iu 4 or 5 fathoms, between 
 the Horseshoe and the southern end of Portage Island, where vessels 
 may safely anchor during the summer months. 
 
 Within the buoy, on the SW. extreme of the Horseshoe Shoal, is the 
 usual place where vessels, bound to sea, anchor, to wait for a wind or 
 high tide, to enable them to cross the inner bar. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Portage Island light- 
 house at 4h. 45m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 1^ feet, and neaps range 
 J foot. Easterly winds cause the highest tides and northwesterly 
 winds the lowest. 
 
 It is high water, full and change, at Miramichi Bar at 5h. 30m.; 
 spring rise 5 feet, neaps 3 feet. 
 
 From observations made during the survey of 1886, the flood stream 
 was found to flow strongest through Ship Channel toward Portage 
 Island, whence it divided, a strong stream that runs southward along 
 the west coast of that island meeting the flood stream there. The 
 stream then decreases in strength and distributes itself generally over 
 Miramichi Bay, the greatest velocity being observed in the channel 
 south of Horseshoe Shoal, and between that shoal and the Portage 
 Island. 
 
 Southward of Horseshoe Shoal the ebb stream runs in the direction 
 of the channel straight to seaward, its velocity gradually diminishing 
 as the bay is reached. It is joined by a stream running down the west 
 side of Portage Island, which deflects it sligiitly to the southward. 
 The stream down Ship Channel is not very strong, and rv.ins in the line 
 of that channel. There is scarcely any ebb strtiam ea- ; > ard of the 
 Bar buoy. 
 
 The greatest velocity of tidal stream ascertained near IvUrainichi Bay 
 was 2^ miles an hour. 
 
 At the anchorage south of Portage Island the ohb stream makes 
 about an hour after high water, and runs 7 hours, whilst tho flood 
 stream begins about IJ hours after low water, and runs 5J hours, with 
 about ^ hour slack water between each tide. 
 
 DirectionB. — The bar of Miramichi should never be attempted by a 
 vessel of large draft, or by persons not thoroughly acquainted with it, 
 without a branch pilot; but in case of emergency proceed as follows: 
 Observing, first, that if the lighthouse on Escumiuac Point has been 
 sighted too late in the day to run in before dark, the vessel must stan J. 
 off and on till daylight, coming into no less than 12 fathoms water, 
 especially with an easterly wind. 
 
 In heavy easterly gales in the fall of the year, especially during the 
 ebb tide, there is a dangerous and heavy-breaking sea on the banks 
 extending from Fox and Huckleberry Islands, which has in several 
 1151 11 
 
162 
 
 aULF OF ST, LAWRENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 'I t> 
 
 
 instances proved fatal to vessels, rendering them unmanageable, so 
 that they have been cast ashore on the islands. 
 
 To avoid this difficult part, the Swashway is used by the pilots as 
 being more direct with vessels of suitable draft. 
 
 Escuminac Point, having been made, should be rounded in 5 fathoms 
 by day and 10 fathoms by night, or at distances of 2^ and 4 miles, 
 respectively; thence steer for the Bar buoy, which should be passed 
 close-to on its south side, and immediately alter course to bring tlie 
 beacons or lights at Preston Beach in line, bearing 8. 40° E. (S. 17° E. 
 mag.). 
 
 Keep the Preston Beach beacons or lights in line until the Swashway 
 beacons or lights are also in line, bearing S. 81° W. (N. 76° W. mag.); 
 then steer N. 54° W. (N. 31° W. mag.) for 3 miles, which will lead to 
 the Spit buoy. Continue that course until the lightvessel at the inner 
 bar bears S. 72° W. (N. 85° W. mag.), when the spit off Fox Island will 
 be cleared, and a course may be steered for No. 5 buoy, at the eastern 
 edge of the inner bar. With a long vessel, buoys 5, 6, and 7 should be 
 brought in line before reaching No. 5 buoy, and then to obtain the 
 deepest water in the channel, 18 feet, vessels should pass quite close to 
 the buoys and on the south side of them. From No. 7 buoy steer for 
 No. 8 buoy, and thence for No. 9, at the southwestern extreme of Horse- 
 shoe Sh(;al. From No. 9 buoy steer N. 82° W. (N. 59° W. mag.) to the 
 eastern extreme of Oak Channel, passing 600 yards northward of the 
 southeastern spar buoy. Not more than 16 feet at low water will be 
 found over the flats southeastward of Oak Channel. There are only 15 
 feet for a short distance in the direct line from No. 9 buoy to the south- 
 eastern spar buoy, but the mud is so soft that with a strong fair wind 
 vessels can force their way when drawing 2 feet more water than the 
 apparent depth. 
 
 From the eastern end of OaK Channel the course is S. 50° W. (S. 73° 
 W. mag.) to Grandooii buoy, passing close north of the northwestern 
 spar buoy; or if the spar buoy be seen steer for it, and then for Gran- 
 doon buoy. Pass close southward of Grandoon buoy, and then alter 
 course to S. 72° W. (N. 85° W. mag.) until Oak Point beacons are in 
 line, bearing N. 30° E. (N. 53° E. mag.) ; keep these beacons in line 
 astern past Musselbed buoy, and up to Narrows buoy. 
 
 The mark, Black Brook mill chimney, on St. Andrew Point, open 
 north of the trees on Sheldrake Island, now leads over 13 feet water 
 only, and Sheldrake Island lights in line over 15 feet. The shoal south, 
 westward of Sheldrake Island has apparently extended. 
 
 Black Brook mill is on St. Andrew Point, and has a large chimney, 
 which shows plainly from Grandoon buoy. 
 
 The Inner Bay of Miramichi is of great extent, being about 13 
 miles long from its entrance at Fox Island to Sheldrake Island (where 
 the river may properly be said to commence), and 7 or 8 miles wide. 
 The de])th of water across the bay is sufficient for vessels that can 
 cross the Inner Bar, 
 
 Ha 
 
 S. 
 
 fori 
 
 roiJ 
 
 niii 
 
 Thi 
 
 tbel 
 
 oi)e 
 
 a])] 
 
 suf 
 
 harl 
 
YIN HARBOR 
 
 163 
 
 igeable, so 
 
 le pilots as 
 
 a 5 fatboms 
 nd 4 miles, 
 I be passed 
 bring the 
 
 5. (S. 17° B. 
 
 e Swasbway 
 JO W. mag.); 
 will lead to 
 L at tbe inner 
 IX Island will 
 t tbe eastern 
 i 7 sbould be 
 to obtain tbe 
 quite close to 
 )uoy steer for 
 eme of Horse- 
 r. mag.) to tbe 
 tbward of tbe 
 water will be 
 jre are only 16 
 ^ to tbe soutb 
 •ong fair wind 
 ?ater tban the 
 
 50O W. (S. 73° 
 I northwestern 
 bben for Gran- 
 and tben alter 
 beacons are in 
 leacons in line 
 
 Bw Point, open 
 r 13 feet water 
 :be sboal soutb. 
 
 [large chimney, 
 
 being about 13 
 J Island (where 
 
 Ir 8 miles wide. 
 
 lessels that can 
 
 Sgg taa/R. Via T¥^iff<^" are on the soathern side of the bay; the first 
 small, low, and swampy, the other much larger, being 2^ miles long, 
 and for the most part thickly wooded. 
 
 Vin Harbor is southward of Yin Island, and must be approached 
 round its west end, which is nearly 4^ miles firom the north point of 
 Fox Island. It is quite sheltered from all winds, and has plenty of 
 water for tbe largest ships that can enter tbe Inner Bay. Th< harbor 
 is a bay of the island, f mile wide and 600 yards deep. 
 
 The long sandy Vin Spit and shoal of the main runs out northward 
 nearly to the line joining the sandy i)oints of the harbor, but leaves a 
 narrow channel to the eastward, which continues for about 2 miles, and 
 may be considered as a prolongation of the harbor in that direction, 
 or toward French Elver Point. 
 
 French River is small and shallow and has a village. Fox Gully is 
 difficult to recognize; there is, liowever, a conspicuous clump of pine 
 trees on French River Point. The space to the eastward of the line 
 joining Egg Island and French River, and in the bay to the southward 
 of the latter, is occupied by ilats of sand, mud, and eelgrass. 
 
 Lights. — On the SW. end of Vin Island are two fixed white leading 
 lights, to enable vessels seeking shelter to clear the point of the shoal 
 lying off the island. The front light is 30 feet above high- water mark, 
 and should be visible in the range for 10 miles. 
 
 The back light is N. 33° B. (N. 56° E. mag.), distant 1,222 feet from the 
 front one, is 42 feet above the sea, and should be visible 10 miles. 
 
 Both lights are hoisted on masts with sheds painted red at their base, 
 tbe front mast being 25 teet and the back one 30 feet above the ground. 
 
 Anchorage. — Anchor near the center of the harbor in 10 or 11 
 fathoms, mud bottom. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Vin Harbor at 5h. 45m. 
 Springs rise 5 feet, neaps 3 f«et, but the rise is at all times uncertain, 
 neap tides sometimes not ranging above a foot and spring tides not 
 above 2 feet. It must also be remijmbered that the a.m. tides rise 
 higher in general by 2 feet than the p.m. tides in the beginning of 
 August. 
 
 Directions. — A pilot will readily be procured to take a ship into Vin 
 Harbor ; if unable to get one, with the assistance of the chart steer 
 S. 50° W, (S. 73° W. mag.) from the SW. buoy of the Horseshoe 
 for about 3 miles, keeping the lead going, and then to the southward 
 round the SW. end of Vin Island, at a distance not less than J mile, 
 until tbe leading lights are in line bearing N. 33° E. (N. 56° E. mag.). 
 The vessel will then be to the southward of the shoal extending from 
 the SW. end of the island. Steer toward them, keeping the high light 
 open to the right of the low one, and on shoaling the water when 
 approaching the sandy SW. point of the island, sheer to the southward 
 sufficiently to give it a berth of 150 yards as the vessel rounds it into 
 harbor. When past the point, do not go to the southward of the line 
 
164 
 
 OULF OP ST. LAWRENCE WEST COAST. 
 
 L 
 
 sV^ 
 
 joining the sandy points of the harbor, or she will be on shore on the 
 sandy shoal which extends off the mainland opposite. 
 
 Vin Bay is more than 3 miles wide and nearly as deep. Quart 
 Point, its western point, is a low cliff of sandstone with high trees, 3j^ 
 miles from the west end of Vin Island. There is good anchorage in the 
 eastern part of this bay in 3 fathoms, mad bottom, and about f mile to 
 the westward of the island. The western side of the bay id shallow. 
 In its SW. corner is Blacic Biver, into which 9 feet can be carried at low 
 water through a narrow and difficult channel, and the river has 3 
 fathoms in it for some distance within the entrance. 
 
 Vin River ako runs into this bay 2^ miles to the southward from 
 the SW. point of the island. It is a smaller rive'' than Bliu^k Biver, 
 having only 6 feet at low water in its entrance. There is a small church 
 on its eastern shore a short distance within its entrance, and farms on 
 either side, where supplies may best be obtained. The be,st Materin."' 
 place will also be found at this river; but it is difficult to obtain large 
 supplies of good water in so flat a country near, the isea. There is a 
 tolerable road from Yin Biver to Chatham, the principal town on the 
 Miramichi Biver. 
 
 Cheval Point, west nearly 3 miles from Quart Point, is sandy, with 
 a remarkable clump of high trees upon it. 
 
 Immediately to the westward of Cheval Point is the shallow^ Napan 
 Bay and Biver, which boats can ascend for several ri/'^es, or as far as 
 the tide reaches. Above that point the river, whic-^ is small, runs 
 through a fertile and well-cultivated valley, extending westward in 
 rear of the town of Ohathan». 
 
 Middle Ground is a long sandy bank, w.tti less than 2 fathoms 
 water, which stretches down thd center of the estuary fiom Cheval 
 Point, and extends from it 2J miles to the rortbeastward. 
 
 Sheldrake Island lies off Napan Point, at the distance of rather 
 more than f mile. It is low, swampy, partly wooded, and has two 
 buildings on its eastern side, which were formerly used as a cholera 
 hospital. The island is ^ mile long by | mile wide, and is separated 
 from the north shc^ by ■ ^ hannel ^ mile wide, but with only one or 2 
 feet in it at low WB';er. ShalUw water extends far oft" this island in 
 every direction — wt'srward to Bartib' ,ae Island and eastward to Oak 
 Point. It also sweops round to the south and SE., so as to leave only a 
 very narrow channel between it and the shoal, which tills Napau Bay, 
 and trending away to the eastward past Cheval Point, forms the Middle 
 Ground already mentioned. 
 
 Zdghts. — The two lights on the north side of Sheldrake Island are 
 hoisted on masts 500 yards apart. They exhibit, at an elevation of 46 
 and 35 feet above the sea, fixed white lights. The high light should 
 be visible 12 miles and the low one 10 mile^. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Sheldrake Island at 6 h. ^ 
 springs rise 5 feet, neaps 3 feet. 
 
 m- 
 
MIRAMICHI BAY. 
 
 166 
 
 ore on the 
 
 ep. Quart 
 ;h trees, ^k 
 orage in tbe 
 ,ut ^mileto 
 id sballow. 
 irried at low 
 river baa 3 
 
 thward from 
 Bliuk River, 
 small church 
 ,nd farms on 
 iQst Materin."- 
 , obtain large 
 i. There is a 
 town on the 
 
 is sandy, with 
 
 hallow Napan 
 
 S8, or as far as 
 
 18 small, runs 
 
 westward in 
 
 lau 2 fathoms 
 y fiom Cheval 
 
 ance of rather 
 , and has two 
 d as a cholera 
 ,d is separated 
 b only one or 2 
 
 this island in 
 istward to Oak 
 
 to leave only a 
 ills Napau Bay, 
 
 rms the Middle 
 
 Irake Island are 
 I elevation of 46 
 igb light should 
 
 i© Island at 6 h. ; 
 
 Murdoch Spit and Murdoch Point are two sandy points on the 
 south shore, ^ mile apart, with a cove between them, and about a mile 
 SW. of Sheldrake Island. The entrance of Miramichi Biver is ^ mile 
 wide between these points and Moody Point, which has a small Indian 
 church upon it,' and is the east point of entrance of Bartiboque River, 
 a mile west from Sheldrake Island. 
 
 Above Murdoch Point 1^ miles, and on the same, or south side of the 
 river, is St. Andrew Point, showing as the extreme of the land from 
 Sheldrake Island. Both these points were wooded at the time of the 
 survey in 1837, and used as leading marks. 
 
 Bartiboque River is | mile wide at the entrance, between Malcolm 
 and Moody Points, but contracts to 300 yards a short distance within, 
 where a wooden bridge is thrown across. Bartiboque Island lies in the 
 entrance of the river, and has steep banks or clay clift's on every side, 
 and is nearly joined to the shore to the northward by a sandy spit. 
 The narrow ch*»nnel into the river passes close to the east end of the 
 island, and has not more than 4 feet in it at low water. 
 
 Lights. — The two lighthouses at Grant Beach, Bartiboque, are white 
 sheds with masts, 34 i^et high, and bear from each other east (S. 67° E. 
 mag.) and west (N. 67° W. mag.), 433 yards apart. They exhibit from 
 an elevation of 140 and 120 feet fixed white lights. These are leading 
 lights, and should be visible 10 miles. 
 
 Oak Point. — Returning back to the eastward along the north shore, 
 the first point requiring notice is Oak Point, nearly opposite Cheval 
 Point, and distant from it 2 miles to the northward. The eastern part 
 of this point has dark-colored sandstone cliffs about 12 feet high, and 
 forming an extreme point, with a beacon on it. It is used as a leading 
 mark with the white beacon which stands N. 34oE. (N. 57'' E. mag.) 
 at § mile from it on the shore of the bay. The latter beacon is lofty and 
 large, and shows so conspicuously on the dark background of the woods 
 that it can be easily seen on a fine day from Fox Island. 
 
 Lights. — From a mast 28 feet high, with a white shed at its base, to 
 the NE. of, and fron. a similar mast with sh^d erected on Oak Point, 
 fixed white lights are exhibited, elevated, respectively, above high water 
 48 and 43 feet. These lights bear from eacli other N. 32° K. (isr. 55° E. 
 mag.) and S. 32^ W. (S. 55^' W. mag.), distant 000 yards, and point when 
 in line tr« the Narrows Buoy. The lights should be visible 10 miles, 
 
 Qrandoon Island, low and marshy, and difficult to distinguish from 
 tbe mainland till very near. It is NE. 2^ miles from Oak Point and 3J 
 miles north from Quart Point. Farther eastward, along the northern 
 sboif^ of tb« Inner Hay, are Burnt church and the Indian village, and 
 sbmU river of tJie ««iBe name; also Hay Island and tlie villages of 
 Upper and Loww ?*^r«ac'. There is a clear channel with 3^ ; i 2^^ fath- 
 oms water in it to the norniiwtird of the Horseshoe and the shoals of 
 Portage Island, a« tiar northci»8tw,"rd as J mile ft"om Hay Island, where 
 a narrow channel it^ads out tc sea through the NegUfW! Gully. 
 
166 
 
 GULP OP ST. LAWRENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 \m 
 
 Lights. — Two fixed white leading lights have been established on 
 Hay Island, to enable vessels when seeking shelter to avoid the shoal 
 extending from the east end of that island. 
 
 The outer light is exhibited on a mast 15 feet high. It is elevated 
 23 feet, and should be visible 10 miles. At the base of the mast there 
 is a small red shed. 
 
 The inner or high light is shown at 3U feet above high-water mark, 
 and should be visible 11 miles. It is exhibited from a white, square 
 wooden tower 21 feet high, 210 feet from the outer light. 
 
 Miramichi River may be said to commence at Sheldrake Island, for 
 below that point the Inner Bay, with its low ami widely receding shores, 
 bears no resemblance to a river. At its entrance the country begins 
 to rise into gentle undulations, terminating in steep banks and clitfs of 
 sandstone, which in some places attain a height of 50 feet above the river. 
 The settlements, too, increase in number and extent, and soon become 
 continuous on either side, dotted here and there with steam sawmills. 
 
 The Miramichi is navigable up to Beaubere Island by any vessel that 
 can cross the Inner Bar. Written diiections, however, will not much 
 avail above Sheldrake Island, not only on account of the contracted 
 nature of the navigation, but also because there are few leading marks 
 of a permanent nature which could be certainly recognized by a stran- 
 ger. Directions, too, are not requisite for this inland navigation, for 
 which pilotage is compulsory, and there are a number of well-qualified 
 pilots. 
 
 The buoys to the westward of the St. Andrew Banks have been 
 removed and stakes substituted, black to the northward, red to the 
 southward. 
 
 Ice. — From observations taken each year from 1830 to 1885, the aver- 
 age date of the opening of navigation at Chatham is April 20, and of 
 the close December 5, the river being completely closed between those 
 dates. Ao Portage Island navigation opens about a week earlier and 
 closes about a week later than at Chatham. 
 
 The first vessel arrived on May 12 and the last left on November 26 
 in 1885. 
 
 Leggat Shoals lie nearer the north than the south side of the river, 
 and at the time they were surveyed had 12 feet upon them »t low water; 
 but this depth is said to vary, and also ui)on the banks of Ht. Andrew, 
 in consequence of old trees, logs, and other lumber lodging upon them. 
 The same cause is said to render the depth up certain to the southward 
 of these shoals, where there is a wider channel (1860). The channel at 
 the stake on the NW. extreme of the shoals has 6 fathoms water in it, 
 and is nearly 200 yards wide between the Leggat Shoals and a shoal 
 bank which extends o£f the north shore. On the point of this shoal off 
 the north shore there is anothei- stake, which will be seen at i^ mile S. 
 53" W. (S. 76° W. mag.) from the former. Vessels must iiass close to 
 the northward of the first of these stakes and close to the southward 
 
 mil 
 
CHATHAM NEWCASTLE. 
 
 167 
 
 Dlished oD 
 I the shoal 
 
 ,B elevated 
 mast there 
 
 rater mark, 
 lite, square 
 
 ) Island, for 
 liug shores, 
 ntry begins 
 and cliffs of 
 (ve the river, 
 joon become 
 im sawmills, 
 y vessel that 
 ill not much 
 e contracted 
 lading marks 
 d by a stran- 
 ivigation, for 
 (^ellqualifled 
 
 :8 have been 
 d, red to the 
 
 885, the aver- 
 ril 20, and of 
 )etween those 
 >k earlier and 
 
 November 26 
 
 e of the river, 
 at low water; 
 )f 8t. Andrew, 
 ng upon them, 
 the southward 
 Che channel at 
 ns water in it, 
 lis and a shoal 
 jf this shoal off 
 »en at i mile S. 
 . pass close to 
 the southward 
 
 of the second, which is 2 miles above the Bartiboque Biver. The river 
 is clear of detached shoals from the stakes last mentioned to Middle 
 Island, which, together with its shoal, coutiues the ship channel to the 
 north side of the river, where the shore is so bold that there are 7 or 8 
 fathoms close to the sandstone cliffs until the vessel is off the Giliuour 
 Mills and Cove, nearly opposite the west end of Middle Island. 
 
 Middle Island is rather smaller than Sheldrake Island, from wliich 
 it is distant 5^ miles; and there is no channel to the southward of it 
 at low water. There is nothing in the way of vessels from Gilmour 
 Mill to the wharves ao Chatham. 
 
 Lights. — The beacon lightliouse on the north side of Middle Island, 
 painted white, exhibits at 44 feet above high water a fixed white light, 
 which should be visible 12 miles. 
 
 A fixed red light is exhibited from a liglitliouse on Limekiln Bank 
 on the north side of the river below the town of Newcastle. 
 
 The light is 87 feet above high water, and should bo visible miles. 
 
 The liglithouse is a wliite square tower, 23 feet high, with a red roof. 
 
 Chatham, the principal town on the Miramichi, and containing, in 
 1883, about 5,762 inhabitants, commences ^ mile above Middle Island, 
 and extends along the south shore for 1^ miles to the westward. It is 
 conveniently situated for shipping, having 6 to 8 fathoms water close to 
 its wharves. It is a straggling but increasing town, and contains 
 some handsome buildings, among others a college and hospital. 
 
 Quarantine. — Chatham is a minor quarantine station. There is a 
 seamen's hospital here. 
 
 Tugs may be obtained firom Caatham by signal to Escnminac light- 
 house, but there is no regular charge. 
 
 Telegraph and Railways. — Chatham is in telegraphic communica- 
 tion with all towns of the Dominion of Canada and the United States, 
 and is directly connected by the Intercolonial Bailway with Halifax, 
 St. John in New Brunswick, and Quebec; also by a direct railway with 
 Fredericton, New Brunswick. 
 
 Douglastown, on the northern shore, about 1^ miles above Chatham, 
 is a much smaller place, containing 400 inhabitants. It is prettily sit- 
 uated on a rising ground, and has sufficient water at its wharves for 
 large vessels. The most remarkable building is the Marine hospital, 
 built of stone. There is a shipbuilding establishment 1^ miles above 
 Douglastown on the same side of the river, and opposite to it on the 
 »H>utb-side shore is the church of St. Paul. 
 
 Newcastle, 2 miles farther up the river, and on the north shore, is 
 the county town, containing the courthouse and jail. Standing on' an 
 a 5clivity which rises to the height of 100 feet at J mile from the river, 
 and commanding a view over the lower ground westward and south- 
 ward to Beaub^re Island and Nelson town, and down the river to Chat- 
 ham, a distance of nearly '> miles, Its situation is as beautiful as could 
 have been iwJected, while at the same time it is not unfavorable for 
 
.1 
 
 168 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 'I. 
 
 u 
 si: 
 
 
 llfif 
 
 
 mercantile iJiirposea, tho channel of the river opposite if bring J mile 
 wide, clea. of shoals, and 6 or 7 fathoms water close to the »^harves of 
 the town. 
 
 Nelsontown, the last village within tlie navigable waters of the 
 Miramiclii, is a straggling place with 200 inhabitantH, and possessing 
 a large wooden cliurch, which stands on the south shore opposite the 
 ea«t end of I'.ciiub^re Island and 1^ miles above Newcastle. 
 
 Water and Supplies. — The Rurface water is quite fresh, on the ebb 
 tide, at (Mi;ithnni. Supplies of any kind can be procured at Chatham 
 or NewcuHtle. 
 
 CoaL — About 1,000 tons of coal are usually kept in store at Chatham, 
 and abmit 200 tons at Newcastle, but any quantity can easily be 
 obtained at short notice by Intercolonial Railway from Springhill or 
 Picton. 
 
 Trade. — The chief exports from Chatham and Newcastle are timber, 
 deals, palings, salmon, lobster, and extract of hemlock bark for tanning. 
 
 Repairs. — There is neither dock nor slip in Miramichi River, but at 
 Chatham there is a wharf for heaving down vessels in need of repairs.' 
 
 Beaubtoe Island, l^ miles long and | mile wide, has steep clay 
 banks, based on sandstone, and rising to about 20 feet above the river. 
 
 The Miramichi ia easily navigable to this jwint by any vessels that 
 can cross the Horseshoe or Inner Bar. There are some parts of the 
 <"lij.)mel above Chatham where there are only 2J fathoms, and which 
 woald h^vve to be avo.ded by a largie vessel at low water, but there is 
 only one detiched shoal, which has feet least water, and lies less than 
 halfway across from the south shore, S. 28° W. (S. 51° W. mag.) from 
 the hospital at Douglastown. 
 
 Tides. — It is. high water, full and change, at Beaub^re Island at 6h. 
 30m.; aprings rise 6 feet, neaps 4 feet. 
 
 The usual average rate of the ebb tide is 2 knots and the iiood one 
 knot in this part of the river. The ebb in some places rahs 2^ knots, 
 and in <^he spring of the year is said to be still stronger. In July and 
 August, when the observation ft were made, excepting for 2 or 3 days 
 at neap tides, the morning tides rose 2 or 3 feet higher than the 
 evening tides, and were of longer duration by one or even 2 hours 
 at a time. But this is much influenced by winds, and consequently by 
 no means regular. The mean length of the flood tide is 6h., and of the 
 ebb 6^h. The duration arid length of the tidal streams are also influ- 
 enced by the winds, but in general they continue in the channel about 
 ^ hour after it is high or low water by the shore. 
 
 Northwest and Southwest Arms. — At Beaub^re Island the two 
 great arms of the Miramichi meet. The Northwest Arm is mnch the 
 larger, as respects the tidal water, although the Southwest Arm is 
 considered the main branch, being of greater length, and discharging 
 more water. The Northwest Arm would be navigable for large vessels 
 to Shilelah Cove. 7 miles above Beaubere Island, as there is sufficient 
 
 ru 
 ne 
 
MIRAMICHI BIYER. 
 
 160 
 
 oing i mile 
 »vharves of 
 
 tors of the 
 
 possessing 
 
 pposite the 
 
 , on the ebb 
 at Chatham 
 
 at Chatham, 
 ,n easily be 
 Jpringhill or 
 
 e are timber, 
 L for tanning. 
 River, but at 
 id of repairs.' 
 IS steep clay 
 ove the river. 
 ' vessels that 
 I parts of the 
 18, and which 
 , but there is 
 lies less than 
 V. mag.) from 
 
 Island at 6h. 
 
 the tlood one 
 •uhs 2i knots, 
 In July and 
 r 2 or 3 days 
 ;her than the 
 
 even 2 hours 
 nsequently by 
 6h., and of the 
 
 are also influ 
 
 channel about 
 
 Island the two 
 is much the 
 thwest Arm is 
 nd discharging 
 )r large vessels 
 ere is sutBcifent 
 
 depth of water, if the channel were buoyed or staked in the narrow 
 parts, which are not more tiian 10() yards wide. Above Shilelnh Covo 
 there are from one to IJ fathoms water, in intricate and narrow chan- 
 nels, between shoals of mnd and low marshy islands, all the way to the 
 rapids, wliich How in narrow channels between meadow islands. There 
 the tide ends, and the water becomes quite fresh 13 miles from Beanbcre 
 Island, and 39 miles from the entrance of the inner bay at Pox Island. 
 
 The Southwest Arm is not navigable for \»vs< "ssels, as not more 
 than 6 or 7 feet at low water, spring tides. n be carried through 
 between Beaubi^re Island and the mainhu nd • ven above that 
 
 shallow part, although there is often mori' thai fatiioms water, yet 
 the channel is too narrow and intricate for aii> vt ry small vessels. 
 The arm is about ^ mile wide for the first T) miles, or up to Barnaby 
 Island; after which it varies ft-om 2(K) to 400 yards up to che rapids, 
 12 miles from Beaubere Island. Both shores of this arm are settled, 
 and many of the farms appear to be in a flourishing condition. 
 
 Tides. — The tide, which ends at tlie rapids, was observed to rise 2 
 feet there, and it was high water on the day of the full moon at about 
 8 hours; as it was also at the foot of the rapids in the Northwest Arm. 
 
 Negnac Gully, between the sand bar of the same name and a small 
 one to the SW., is nearly 400 yards wide and carries 2 fathoms water; 
 but a sand bar, of the usual mutable character, lies off it with 7 feet 
 over it at low water. Within the gully a narrow channel, only fit for 
 boats or very small 'craft, leads southwestward up the Inner Bay. 
 The shoal water extends 1:^ miles off this gully, but there is excellent 
 warning by the lead here and everywhere in this bay. Shoals, nearly 
 dry at low water, extend from the Neguac Gully to Portage Island, a 
 distance of f mile. 
 
 Buoys. — A can buoy, painted red, is moored in 4 fathoms at the 
 entrance to Negnac Gully. A similar buoy is nioored northwestward 
 of the first buoy, to show the direction of the channel. 
 
 LightF. — The lighthouse on the NE. side of Neguac Gully is a square 
 building, 30 feet high, and painted white; it exhibits at 32 feet above 
 high water a fixed white light, which should be visible 11 miles. 
 
 The front light is a fixed red light, shown from a mast with white 
 shed at its base. 
 
 The mast stands 900 feet S. 12° E. (S. 11° W. mag.) from the main 
 light, and the alignment guides to the buoy marking the crossing of the 
 outer bar; also gives the middle of the channel and clears the south 
 and north bars. 
 
 Lo'wer Neguac. — The wharf at Lower Neguac is a crib- work block, 
 with about 8 feet water at the end of it, which is connected with the 
 shore by a roadway supported on temjwrary trestles. The roadway 
 runs NNW. and is 1,050 feet long to high-water mark, where it ends 
 near a fishhonse and a store. 
 
 Lights. — A square tower, painted white, surmounted by a red lantern, 
 
 .■;-M!i*'--'-'.^-.- 
 
170 
 
 OULF OP ST. LAWRENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 
 
 aud •');{ feet luKh, staiuls on the beuuli. The Mgbt is a llxod white ligh^ 
 32 feet above liighwater mark, and shouUl be visible 10 miles. 
 
 A mast with oval siat-\« urk day mark attached, shed at base, is on 
 the Olid of the wharf, S. 50-^ E. ;8. L'7^ E. mag.), 1,080 feet from the 
 preceding light. A fixed red light is shown from it at an elevation of 
 25 feet, which should be visible 8 mileH. The rear light is only visibht 
 over a small arc on each side of the alignment. 
 
 Neguac. — A church with a spire has been built at Neguac Village, 
 about 2 j miles northwestward of Negnac lighthouse. There is a post- 
 oilice. Population about 150. 
 
 Burnt Church Village has extended westward; a large white store 
 at the west end, and a long white barn a short distance inland, are the 
 most prominent buildings there. Population, 200. 
 
 Remarks. — Since the examination of Miramichi Bay in 1857, the 
 bars have altered very little in their general direction aud depth, but 
 the chaunel for small vessels close to Portage Island has become blocked, 
 whilst the deep-water channel close westward of that island has 
 extended considerably northward, and some of the shoals have been 
 deepened by dredging. 
 
 Blackland Point, the north point of Miramichi Bay, is low aud 
 swampy, with steep and black peaty banks, and there is a communica- 
 tion round it for boats w bin t e sand bars from Tabusintac lagoon 
 into the Inner Bay of Mi: amichi. 
 
 (H. O. (hart No. 1079.) 
 
 Tabusintac River. — Tabusintac Gully is about 300 yards wide at 
 high water, and has a shifting bar of sand, over which 6 or 7 feet could 
 be carried at low water when it was surveyed, and 11 or 12 feet at high 
 water in spring tides. The entrance of the Tabusintac River from the 
 lagoon inland is 3 miles to the northward of the gully, and can be seen 
 over the sand bars. There is plenty of water in this river when once 
 over the bar; 2 and 3 fathoms is the depth in the channel through th.; 
 lagoon, and there is as much as 4 and 5 fathoms in some parts of the 
 river; but the channel is too narrow and intricate for anything larger 
 than boats or very small vessels. The tide flows 10 miles up the river, 
 through an undulating country, and occasionally between steep banks 
 of sandstone, which rise to about 100 feet above the sea. There are 
 settlements on either shore, and there is a church on the south bank 1^ 
 miles up from the lagoon. 
 
 Salmon are taken in considerable quantities in the Tabusintac. There 
 are lobsters, oysters, and other shellfish in the lagoon; and codfish 
 come in upon the coast early in the season, and are fished for upon a 
 small scale. 
 
 Raft Qully. — There is an entrance into the lagoon through liaft 
 Gully, C miles to the northward of Tabusintac Gully, but it is nearly 
 blocked up with sand. Barreau Point lies about midway between Baft 
 and South Tracadie Gullies. 
 
 ..'.WiiM 
 
 m 
 
 ^*N 
 
d white light, 
 
 liles. 
 
 sit base, is ou 
 
 feet from th« 
 
 u elevation of 
 
 8 only visible 
 
 siiuac Village, 
 liere is a poht- 
 
 r 
 
 i;e white store 
 ulaiul, are the 
 
 jT in 1857, the 
 ,ud depth, but 
 ;coine blocked, 
 at islaud has 
 oals have been 
 
 ay, is low and 
 t a coinmuuica- 
 lusintac lagoon 
 
 yards wide at 
 1 or 7 feet could 
 
 12 feet at high 
 River from the 
 md can be seen 
 river when once 
 uel through th ! 
 »nie parts of the 
 anything larger 
 ies up the river, 
 een steep banks 
 sea. There are 
 e south bank 1^ 
 
 jusintac. There 
 »on; and codfish 
 ished for upon a 
 
 >n through Raft 
 , but it is nearly 
 ray between Raft 
 
^ . ^ 
 
 f 
 
 'i 
 
 V 
 
 V] 
 
 
 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 1.0 
 
 ■ 50 
 
 1.1 
 
 1.25 
 
 ■lUU 
 
 l'^ III 1.6 
 
 Wir ,.. 
 
 Hiotographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4S03 
 
 i>t»i«fiiiiiii*i*a-i. 
 

 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 <« 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 T 
 
 
 la 
 
 * 
 
 w 
 
 
 w 
 
 I 
 
 n( 
 
 i 
 
 en 
 
 i 
 
 tr 
 
 
 se 
 
 
 ap 
 
 
 th 
 
 
 th 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 W€ 
 
 
 (N 
 
 
 th< 
 
 1 ! 
 
 re< 
 ^1, 
 
 A] 
 bel 
 
 37 
 
 an( 
 
 ing 
 
 ligl 
 ligJ 
 
Mmm 
 
 TKACADIE RIVER, 
 
 171 
 
 fh JJT *'^"'/^ somewhat larger, but in other respects similar to 
 the Pokemouche, which is about 10 miles farther north. It has a chnrch 
 and vnlage on the south side of its entrance from the lagoon inland, 
 which can be seen over the sand bars ; the church bears S. 32° W (S 56o 
 
 w" Tv^rno^w ''^^ *"''"" *^^ "''''**' '''"'^ principal gully, instead of N. 80° 
 W. [N. 56° W. mag.), as at Pokemouche, which will help to distinguish 
 the one from the other. Both rivers supply a considerable quantrty of 
 pme timber and deals. "^ 
 
 The North Gully of Tracadie is at present the principal entrance to 
 
 !i!r7w °"? ^^^*'""' *^""'''^'' ''^'''^' ^^^ "^«r flows in a narrow 
 channel between flats of sand, mud, and weeds. There are several huts 
 and stores at the entrance to this gully, which is 300 yards wide at 
 high water; but, like all the rest of this coast, has a shifting bar of 
 sand oft it, causing the depth, breadth, and directions of the channel 
 tovary so frequently in heavy gales as to render all instructions for 
 entering It useless. In the entrance of the gully, and sheltered by the 
 
 T?Z o '""fl rf ^' ™*-^ "^ '"^^^'""'^ "' ^^^"^ ^ ^ t« 3 fathoms water. 
 There are 2 and 3 fathoms in the channel of the river opposite the vil- 
 lage, but that can only be reached by passing through the lagoon, 
 where the channel in one part is so shallow that boats can only pass 
 when the tide is in. ^ ^ 
 
 At 2 miles to the southward of the North Gully is the Old Gullv 
 now nearly blocked up with sand, but which was formerly the principal 
 entrance. South Tracadie River, which discharges its waters, af?er 
 traversing a lagoon, by South or Little Tracadie Gully into the Lea, is 
 separated trom the Korth Tracadie by a point of the mainland which 
 approaches near the sand bars, but still leaves a communication within 
 them from one lagoon to the other. There are huts and fish stores at 
 the entrance of this gully, and settlements at the entrance of the river 
 Within the sand bars which inclose the lagoons of Tracadie there is a 
 weiisiieJtered boat or canoe navigation for 8 or 9 miles. 
 
 /^T^'iu^®""'^ ""^"^ *'*" ^"°y '^ °^«<*^^d on the outer edge of the bar 
 (North Tracadie) at the point where vessels should cross it and pick nv 
 the hue of the range lights. To mark the channel over the bar, three 
 red spar buoys have been placed at the turn on the north side of the 
 channel, and a black spar buoy and a red can buoy on the south side. 
 A red spar buoy is also moored on the east point of the sand bar inside 
 the gully southwestwardly from the main light tower. The channel is 
 between this buoy and the lighthouse. 
 
 „„^*8hte-North Oully.-North Tracadie light is a fixed whit« light 
 37 feet above high water, and visible 11 miles. It is used as a coast 
 and beacon light. The lighthouse, 33 feet high, is a square white build- 
 ing on the point on the south side of North Gully entrance. 
 
 A fixed white light, visible 6 miles, is used with the above as a range 
 light, and marks the channel in; the channel is a shifting one, and the 
 light IS moved as the channel shifts. , u tuo 
 
 ■■■I ' 
 
 %>i., 
 
 
172 
 
 GULP OF ST. LAWRENCE WEST COAST. 
 
 A 
 
 Caution. — Nothing larger than fishing boats should attempt to enter 
 the gnlly by night, and no stranger must attempt the entrance with- 
 out a pilot. 
 
 South Gully. — The leading lighthouses on the north side of Traca- 
 die, South Gully, bear from each other IT. 51° W. (N. 27° W.mag.) and 
 S. 51° E. (S. 27"^ E. mag.), distant 276 feet. 
 
 The upper lighthouse, a square tower, painted red, exhibits at an 
 elevation of 20 feet a fixed red light. The lower lighthouse, an open- 
 framed tower, painted white, exhibits at an elevation of 20 feet a fixed 
 white light. 
 
 These lights should be visible in clear weather from a distance of 8 
 miles. Vessels crossing the bar (8'H) yards wide) from seaward should 
 keep the lights in line. 
 
 Qreen Point, which separates the lagoons of North Tracadie and 
 Pokemouche, has a rocky shoal extending oflF it ^ mile to the depth of 3 
 fathoms .and IJ miles to 5 fathoms at low water. 
 
 Pokemouche (Pocmouche) River, after traversing a shallow and 
 extensive lagoon, enters the gulf by a gully through the sand bars about 
 200 yards wide. A shifting bar of sand outside generally leaves a nar- 
 row channel with 4 or 5 feet in it at low water into the gully, and there 
 are from 9 to 12 feet for some distance within. 
 
 Tides. — The spring tides rise 5 feet; and in fine weather large 
 schooners can be taken in by a native pilot. 
 
 Pokemouche (Pocmouche).— On the south side of the entrance of 
 the river from the lagoon inland, and If miles from the gully, there is 
 a church, village, postoffice, and sawmill. The inhabitants, 300 or 400 
 in number, live by fishing, a very limited agriculture, and lumbering. 
 
 Lights. — The lighthouse at Pokemouche Gully is a square building, 
 37 feet high, painted white, with a keeper's dwelling attached, and 
 exhibits at an elevation of 36 feet a fixed green light, which should be 
 visible 8 miles. 
 
 A fixed red light is hoisted on a pole, 23 feet high, arranged to slide 
 on a tramway so that it may be moved to suit c; es iu the channel. 
 The light is elevated 25 feet, and is visible 5 miiv the line of range 
 and in the channel in entering the gully. It is 'iio .eet from the green 
 light, and when the two lights are in line they lead to the mid-channel 
 buoy which indicates the outside entrance to the channel. 
 
 Buoys. — An iron buoy, painted in black and white vertical stripes, 
 moored in the middle of the outside entrance. 
 
 A black can buoy on the port side of the channel opposite the south 
 beach. 
 
 A black spar buoy on the port side where the river turns from the 
 eastward inside the north beach. 
 
 A spar buoy, painted red on the starboard side, marking the point at 
 the same turn. 
 
 Shippegan Qully, 5J miles NE. of the Pokemouche, with its bar of 
 sand, its rapid tide, and dangerously heavy surf, occasioned by easterly 
 
apt to enter 
 ranee with- 
 
 le of Traca- 
 r.mag.) and 
 
 libits at an 
 ise, an open- 
 I feet a fixed 
 
 listance of 8 
 ward should 
 
 'racadie and 
 16 depth of 3 
 
 shallow and 
 id bars about 
 leaves a nar- 
 ly, and there 
 
 eather large 
 
 e entrance of 
 uUy, there is 
 ta, 300 or 400 
 id lumbering, 
 lare building, 
 ttached, and 
 ich should be 
 
 mged to slide 
 
 the channel. 
 
 line of range 
 
 om the greeu 
 
 mid-channel 
 
 rtical stripes, 
 
 site the south 
 
 irns from the 
 
 the point at 
 
 irith its bar of 
 ed by easterly 
 
 SHIPPEGAN GULLY MI8C0U GULLY. 
 
 173 
 
 gales, is 20 miles from the north point of Miscou. The oar of sand, 
 which dries in part at low water, shifts in heavy gales; but there is 
 generally a channel with 4 or 5 feet in it at low water, and the tide 
 rises from 3 to 5 feet, according as it may be neap or spring tide. The 
 3-fathom edge of the slioal Wi> cer outside the bar is § mile oif shore, 
 after which the depth increases rapidly. 
 
 The passage over the bar and into this gully is difticult and dangerous 
 to strangers. 
 
 Buoys. — The gully is buoyed with red and black buoys. 
 
 Lights. — The lighthouse on the NE. side of the southern entrance of 
 Shippegan Gully is a square building, 30 feet high, painted white, and 
 exhibits at an elevation of 32 feet a fixed white light, which should be 
 visible 11 miles. 
 
 On Indian Point«are two leading lights for entering Shippegan Gully. 
 The inner light is a fixed white light shown on a mast at an elevation 
 of 39 feet, and is visible 11 miles. 
 
 The outer light is a fixed red light, shown on a mastr 28 feet above 
 high water, and should be visible 4 miles. 
 
 The inner mast is 35 feet high and the outer one 25 feet, each having 
 a shed at its base. 
 
 The lights are 148 yards apart, and bear from each other N. 56° W. 
 (N. 32° W. mag.) and S. 56° E. <S. 32° W. mag.). 
 
 These lights when in line indicate the deepest water over the bar, 
 and lead up to a red buoy which has been placed outside the bar at the 
 entrance to Shippegan Gully ; after passing which, vessels should keep 
 the lights in line until nearing a black can buoy moored with the lights 
 in line inside the bar; thence the channel inward is buoyed in the 
 usual manner. 
 
 Miscou Gully, about 13 miles northward of Shippegan Gully, only 
 admits boats at high water. 
 
 Light. — At Sandy Point, on the north-side entrance to Miscou Gully, 
 a fixed white light is placed to mark the entrance. The light is 45 feet 
 above high water, and is visible 7 miles. The light is shown from a 
 mast, 25 feet high, with a wooden shed at its base standing upon a low 
 crib-work pier, all of which is painted white. 
 
 Birch Point — About 1^ miles to the southeastward from North Point 
 of Miscou is Birch Point, a steep cliff of sandstone, about 10 feet high, 
 and which will be easily recognized by the white birch trees, which are 
 higher there than in any other parts near the shore. A reef of stones 
 and sand extends there ^ mile out from the shore. The soundings in 
 the chart will enable the mariner easily to avoid the' shoal off" North 
 Point, either by night or by day. There is good anchorage on either 
 side of it; under the North Point in from 5 to 10 fathoms, in southerly 
 winds, and off the lighthouse on Birch Point, in from 3^ to 6 fathoms, 
 in westerly winds, the bottom being of sand, which holds sufliciently 
 well for offshore winds. 
 
 I 
 
174 
 
 GULF OF 8T. LAWRBNCE WEST COAST. 
 
 ;\ 
 
 Light — The lighthouse on Birch Point, an octagon-shaped building, 
 74 feet high, and painted red, exhibits a revolving white light, showing 
 four bright rays every seventy-five seconds, with intervals of fifteen 
 seconds between their points of greatest brilliancy, followed by an inter- 
 val of thirty seconds, during the greater part of which the light will be 
 eclipsed; the light thus completing a revolution in IJ minutes, is of the 
 greatest assistance to vessels rounding this low island at night, and 
 especially to the numerous fishing schooners which frequent Miscou 
 Harbor. It is 79 feet above the level of high water, and should be visi 
 ble 14 miles; it is seen from the westward over the island. 
 
 Peg VThistle.— The steam whistle 107 yards east of the lighthouse 
 on Birch Point will in thick, foggy weather or snowstorms be sounded 
 twice in each minute : First, a blast of five seconds' duration, with an 
 interval of twenty-five seconds; then a second blast of five seconds, 
 with an interval of twenty-five seconds. 
 
 Signal Station. — There is a signal station at Birch Point, and the 
 lighthouse is connected with Shippegan by telephone. 
 
 Coast. — There arc no detached shoals along this coast, so that it may 
 be safely approached to 10 fathoms water in the nighttime and to 6 
 or 5 fathoms in the daytime. Nevertheless, shoal water extends to a 
 considerable distance from the shore in several places, as, for instance, 
 off the east side of Miscou, where, at Wilson Point, 2J miles to the 
 northward of Miscou Gully, a sandy shoal extends a mile out to 3 
 fathoms water; a depth of 5 J fathoms was obtained by H. M. S. Spar- 
 tan at a distance of 3 miles east of the lighthouse; therefore give 
 Wilson Bank a berth of 2J to 3 miles. Off Miscou Gully, 7 miles to 
 the southward of the north point of Miscou, the shoal water extends 
 § mile, and 4 or 5 miles farther to the southward, off the low sandstone 
 cliffs of Shippegan Island, there are rocky patches with little more than 
 2 fathoms upon them, and nearly a mile off shore. Still farther to the 
 southward, along the coast of Shippegan Island, and 6 miles to the 
 northward of Shippegan Gully, there is another similar patch at nearly 
 the same distance from the shore. 
 
 Miscou Banks extend about 22 miles to the northeastward of 
 Miscou, and the soundings upon them will afford full and sufficient 
 guidance for a vessel approaching this part of the coast. The shoalest 
 parts of the banks will be found on an PNE. line of bearing from the 
 lighthouse on Birch Point, whereon, for the first 6 miles off shore, there 
 are only from 5J to 8 fathoms on a rocky bottom, after which the water 
 deepens rapidly, there being from 12 to 17 fathoms, with red sand, rock, 
 and shell for the next 9 miles, at the end of which it deepens to 20 
 fathoms; at 7 miles farther, with deipths between 20 and 30 fathoms, 
 over red sand, gravel, shell, and broken coral, is the edge of the bank, 
 where the depth increases rapidly to above 40 fathoms, and the sound- 
 ings change to mud. 
 
 The northern edge of the banks, in 30 fathoms, is 7 or 8 miles to the 
 
d buildiug, 
 at, sbowiiig 
 is of fifteen 
 by an iuter- 
 igUt will be 
 [68, is of tbe 
 ; night, and 
 lent Miscou 
 ould be visi- 
 
 B lighthouse 
 
 be sounded 
 
 ;ion, with an 
 
 Ive seconds, 
 
 jint, and the 
 
 ,o that it may 
 ime and to 6 
 • extends to a 
 , for instance, 
 
 miles to the 
 nile out to 3 
 [. M. S. Spar- 
 herefore give 
 i miles to 
 
 rater extends 
 (ow sandstone 
 more than 
 
 farther to the 
 miles to the 
 
 itch at nearly 
 
 fheastward of 
 
 ind sufficient 
 
 The shoalest 
 
 }ing from the 
 
 \S shore, there 
 
 lich the water 
 
 sand, rock, 
 
 leepens to 20 
 
 |d 30 fathoms, 
 
 of the bank, 
 
 Ind the sound- 
 
 8 miles to the 
 
 mum 
 
 CHALEUR BAY. 
 
 175 
 
 northward of the ENE. line of beariug from the lighthouse on Birch 
 Point, and passes the north point of Miscou, at the distance of 4 miles, 
 into Ohaleur Bay, thus affording excellent guidance to vessels. These 
 banks continue to extend off tbe coast to tbe southward, but with more 
 regular soundings and a greater general depth than in tbe part to 
 which the name of Miscou Banks has been applied. 
 
 Chaleur Bay (Bay of Chaleurs) is the largest bay in the gulf, being 
 25 miles wide from Miscou Island to Gape d'Espoir, but tbe entrance is 
 more generally considered to be at Macquereau Point, from which tbe 
 north point of Miscou Island is distant 14^ miles. Tbe depth of tbe 
 bay from Miscou to the entrance of the Itestigoucbe River is about 75 
 miles. 
 
 Tbe northern shore of tbe bay is of moderate height, bnt an irregular 
 range of hills of considerable elevation is everywhere visible a few 
 miles back from tbe coast, tbe predominating features of which are 
 red cliffs of sandstone and shale, with intervening shingle and sand 
 beaches. Trap rocks and limestone are occasionally met with also, but 
 more sparingly. Tbe southern or New Brunswick shore is, generally 
 speaking, much lower, and for tbe most part composed of similar rocks; 
 bnt between Garaquette and Batburst the cliffs of red sandstone rise 
 to a height of 200 feet above tbe sea. Tbe sandstone either belongs to 
 or is very nearly connected with tbe coal formation, fossil vegetable 
 remains of which, as well as thin vein's , of bituminous coal, being not 
 infrequently met with. There are numerous settlements all around 
 tbe bay, and tbe several harbors, roadsteads, and rivers are frequented 
 by numbers of vessels engaged in the lumber trade and tbe fisheries. 
 
 Tbe climate is warmer and tbe weather in general much finer within 
 this bay than it is outside in tbe adjacent parts of tbe gulf. Tbe fogs, 
 which prevail so much with southerly winds on Miscou Banks, seldom 
 enter tbe bay, although rain and mist accompany easterly gales here as 
 elsewhere. 
 
 The navigation is by no means difficult, for although there are some 
 dangerous shoals, yet there is everywhere good warning by tbe lead. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in the entrance of Chaleur 
 Bay at 2h. ; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 3 feet. Tbe tidal streams are 
 regular within tbe bay, and seldom amount to the rate of one knot per 
 hour; but outside, off its mouth, and especially on Miscou Banks, the 
 currents and tidal streams are so irregular, both in strength and direc- 
 tion, that nothing definite can be said of them, and their dangerous 
 effects upon tbe course of vessels can only be guarded against by tbe 
 constant use of the deep-sea lead and attention to tbe soundings. 
 
 Directions at Night and in Fogs. — Vessels bound for Chaleur Bay 
 and approaching its entrance on a dark night or in foggy weather should 
 not attempt to make Macquereau Point, which is so bold that there is 
 little or no warning by the lead, but should strike soundings on tbe 
 Miscou Banks, which extend nearly 22 miles to the eastward of Miscou 
 
 ^ . '. 
 
176 
 
 GULF OV ST. LAWRENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 Island. A cautious lookout should be kept for the numerous fls ung 
 schooners which are generally riding on the banks and the ..nrtheru 
 edge of the latter, being followed in 30 fathoms of water, w.l. safely 
 conduct vessels past the north point of Miscou, at the distance of 4 
 miles, and form a sure guide up the bay. . . ,, .. . 
 
 The bank of soundings off the north shore is also sufficiently wide to 
 Kuide vessels everywhere within Macquereau Point ; nevertheless, on a 
 dark night and in bad weather, vessels had better not approach the 
 shore much nearer than the depth of 30 fathoms in any part of the bay 
 to the eastward of Carlisle Point. The soundings are generally of sand 
 and shell on the banks, while in the central P^rts of the bay black and 
 brown mud prevail, with depths between 30 and 50 fathoms Within, 
 or to the westward of Carlisle Point and the opposite bay of Nipisighit, 
 the depth decreases to less than 30 fathoms, but there is still sufflcieut 
 warning everywhere by the lead quite up to the head of the bay. 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1217.) 
 
 Miscou Flats and Miscou IslaneL-The S-fathom edge of the 
 Miscou Flats is fully H miles off to the IS W of Goose 1^*^^!^^*^ "«^ 
 and there are not more than 3 fathoms at the distance of 2i miles from 
 the same point. These flats, which are of sandstone, continue 4 or .» 
 miles NE. of Miscou Harbor, and near their northern termination there 
 is an opening in the trees which extends across the island, and which 
 has been mistaken by vessels, at night or in foggy weather, either for 
 the harbor or the gully, according as they were west or east of the 
 island. There is moderately good anchorage during the summer sea^ 
 son with this opening S. 52° E. (S. 28o E. mag.) in 10 to 11 fathoms It 
 is easily distinguished, very useful in pointing out a ves^eFs POSi*^«°' 
 and especially to clear Miscou Flats when working out with a light 
 breeze and flood tide. The remainder of the shore is tolerably bold, 
 with steep sandy beaches, which surround the north end of the island, 
 where several stores and huts of the fishermen will be seen along the 
 shore The north point is distinguished by a green mound, or grassy 
 sand hill, and the shallow water does not there extend to more than i 
 mile off shore; but immediately to the eastward of the point and front- 
 ing the outlet of a small lagoon, where there are several f l»mf «t«J!f 
 and huts, a sandy shoal commences and stretches off a mile to the NE. 
 At that distance from the shore there are 3 fathoms of water, but it is 
 more than 2i miles out to the Sfathom edge of the shoal. 
 
 Miscou Harbor, frequently called Little Shippegau by the flsher- 
 men, lies between Miscou and Shippegau Islands, and just within the 
 sandy spit at the SW. extreme of Miscou, where the space of deep 
 water, from 4 to 6 fathoms, lorming the haxbor for large vessels, is 400 
 Trdswide and upward of a mile inlength. The harbor for small craft 
 fs more extensive, with 2 and 2^ fathoms water and also a narrow 
 channel extending eastward through the flats of mud and weeds to 
 
 wm 
 
■ous flailing 
 he iitntlieru 
 , wil safely 
 istai'ce of 4 
 
 jntly wide to 
 rtheless, on a 
 approach tbe 
 ,rt of the bay 
 jrally of sand 
 lay black and 
 ms. Within, 
 ofNipisigbit, 
 still sufflcient 
 the bay. 
 
 a edge of the 
 ,ke lighthouse, 
 f 2i miles flroni 
 continue 4 or 5 
 rmination there 
 and, and which 
 Lther, either for 
 or east of the 
 he summer sea- 
 11 fathoms. It 
 sssel's position, 
 Lit with a light 
 tolerably bold, 
 d of the island, 
 seen along the 
 ouud, or grassy 
 to more than 4 
 point and front- 
 [al fishing stores 
 mile to the iJE. 
 water, but it is 
 
 lal. 
 
 i by the fisher 
 just within the 
 i space of deep 
 re vessels, is 400 
 for small craft 
 . also a narrow 
 id aud weeds to 
 
 MISCOU HARBOR. 
 
 within a mile of Miscon Gully, wliicli bouts ciui only enter at high 
 water. The bottom within tlie harbor is soft mud; in tlio chauiiol, 
 just outside the entrance, sand, and between the slioals, farther out, 
 sandstone. 
 
 Lights. — A fixed white light, elevated 38 feet ami visible miles, is 
 shown from a maat at Herring (Harper) Point at the western entrance 
 to Miscou Harbor. The mast is 25 feet high, and has a wooden shed at 
 its base standing upon a low crib- work pier; the whole structure is 
 painted white. 
 
 At Goose Lake, on the west side of Miscou Island, a white light, 
 revolving every minute, is exhibited at 40 feet above high water, from 
 a square lighthouse, 28 feet high, with a dwelling house attached, aud 
 painted white. The light sliould be visible 10 miles. 
 
 Sandy Point Light — See page 173. 
 
 Signal Station. — There is a signal station at Goose Tiake; the light- 
 house is connected by telephone with Shippegan. 
 
 Directions. — Miscou Channel, leading to the harbor, between the Mis- 
 cou and the Shippegan Flats, is in one part only 350 yards wide, between 
 shoals so steeiJ that there is not the sliglitest warning by the lead. In 
 short, none other tlum small vessels should attempt this harbor with- 
 out having first buoyed the channel or secured the assistance of a com- 
 petent pilot. A vessel of 12 feet draft may, however, run in with the 
 assistance of the chart and the following brief directions : 
 
 If to the eastward of the harbor, cross the Miscou Flats to the SW., 
 at the distance of 3 miles off shore, in no less than 4 fathoms water; if 
 to the westward, follow the northern edge of the Shippegan Flat, in 4 
 or 5 fathoms. In either case, open out the NE. extreme of the trees of 
 Shii)pegan Island, just clear of the SW. extreme of the trees of Miscou 
 Island, or keep the former in one with the extreme of the sandy spit at 
 the SW. end of Miscou Island, the latter being preferable if it can be 
 made out. These marks will bear a little to the eastward of S. 09° E. 
 (S 45° E. mag.). Steer for them until the water shoals to less than 4 
 fathoms, which will be on a point of the Miscou Flats. Sheer to the 
 SW. for about 4 mile, or so as to deepen the water to 4 and 5 fathoms; 
 then steer S. 64° E. (S. 40° E. mag.), or for Pandora Point, a wooded 
 extreme of Shippegan, J mile within Pecten Point, which is the sandy 
 south point of entrance of the harbor. 
 
 In running this course the vessel will cross a bay in the Miscou Flats 
 in 4 and 5 fathoms. If the soundings deepen to more than the latter 
 depth at low water, sheer to the eastward, for the object is to keep on 
 the Miscou and least dangerous side of the channel, and that will be 
 effected without difficulty by the lead, since there are 8 and 9 fathoms 
 in the channel. After running a short mile toward Pandora Point, 
 the points on the north side of Shippegan will be observed to come in 
 one, bearing S. 49° W. (S. 73° W. mag.), and about the same time a 
 high sand hill, on the sand bars at the head of the harbor, will come on, 
 1151 12 
 
 
 ',1 
 
178 
 
 GULP OP ST. LAWRENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 with the bigh-water extreme of the sandy spit of Miscou hcarliip S. 
 83'^ E. (S. 59'^ E. mag.)> The vessel will now be at the narrow i)art of 
 the channel, and must follow the edge of the Miscou I'Mats by the lead, 
 in from 4 to G I'athom.s, sheering to tlu! eastward the inntant the dejith 
 is more than the latter, and to the westward when less than the former. 
 The general direction of tlie course will be still toward Pandora Point, 
 until the points on the SE. shore of Miscou within the harbor open out, 
 when the vessel will be in safe anchorage, although outside the entrance. 
 If wishing to proceed farther, haul up for tlie high sand hill on tlie 
 sand bars already mentioned, and when within the sandy jtoint, steer 
 for the gully for a short distance, choosing a convenient berth. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Miscou Harbor at 2h. 
 30m. ; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 3 feet. The tides appeared to set fairly 
 in and out of the harbor, at a rate seldom amounting to a knot. 
 
 Shippegan Flat is an extensive shoal of sandstone, thinly and par- 
 tially covered with sand, and having in some parts not more*than 3 feet 
 water. When on this 3-foot patch, Grasse Point bore S. 10° W. (S. 43'^ 
 W. mag.) and Mya Point S. 86° E. (8. (>2o B. mag.). It is the most 
 northern of the Shippegan Shoals, and extends 2^ miles off" the north 
 side o^the island, separating the* channel leading to the harbors of 
 Caraquette and Shippegan from that which leads into Miscou Harbor. 
 There is good warning by the lead all along its northern side, which 
 may be safely approached to 6 fathoms in a large, and to 3 fathoms in a 
 small vessel. 
 
 PokesueAie Shoal is an extensive flat of sand extending 2 miles 
 to the northward and eastward from Pokesuedie Island, and having 
 only 6 or 7 feet water over the greater part of it. Caraquette steeple 
 and the sandy SE. extreme ot Oharaquette Island in line, bearing S. 
 66° W. (west mag.), lead over its north point in 2 fathoms at low water; 
 and if the steeple be kept halfway between the extreme of the sandy 
 point and the extreme of the trees on the same island, the north i)oint 
 of the shoal will be cleared in 4^ fathoms; but as both the sandy 
 point and the trees may change in the course of years, those marks 
 should not be relied on without previous examination. 
 
 Light — Great Pokesuedie Island lighthouse is a square tower, 34 feet 
 high and painted white, on the 'SE. extreme of the island. The light 
 is fixed white, elevated 41 feet, and visible 11 miles. 
 
 Shippegan Sound, formed by Pokesuedie Island and the mainland 
 on the west, and by Shippegan Island on the east, is an extensive 
 place. On the western side, within Pokesuedie Island, is Simon Inlet, 
 the best harbor in the sound. Within its entrance, between Marcelle 
 and Brul6 Points, the anchorage is quite landlocked, with water suffi- 
 cient and space enough for vessels of large draft. On the opposite or 
 Shippegan side are the bays of Alemek and Little Alemek. The latter 
 is a shallow place, but has good anchorage off its mouth. The former, 
 which is most to the Houthward, and by far the larger, bay of the two, 
 
 1 
 
8HIPPE0AN FIARHOR. 
 
 170 
 
 bearing S. 
 nw part of 
 lytlielead, 
 ; the tlfii»th 
 tlie former, 
 lora Point, 
 ir open out, 
 »e entrance, 
 hill on the 
 point, steer 
 rtli. 
 irbor at 2h. 
 
 to set fairly 
 IV not. 
 
 nly and par- 
 re«thau 3 feet 
 )oW.{S.43^ 
 
 is the most 
 )ff the north 
 le harbors of 
 scou Harbor, 
 n side, which 
 i fathoms in a 
 
 iding 2 miles 
 [, and having 
 luette steeple 
 [le, bearing 8. 
 at low water; 
 of the sandy 
 le north i)oint 
 ith the sandy 
 [, those marks 
 
 , tower, 34 feet 
 kd. The liglit 
 
 the mainland 
 an extensive 
 |s Simon Inlet, 
 Feen Marcelle 
 water suffi- 
 the opposite or 
 tk. The latter 
 The former, 
 Ly of the two, 
 
 is an oxcollcMit harbor, wiHi .'J and 1 fathoms water, and secure in all 
 winds. There is a churcli and vii1aK(« at the h(>ad of this bay; and on 
 Alexander Point, its north point, .stands an (\stablishnu>nt and wind- 
 mill. There is a bar of sand and mud lixtendin^ across the sound fnrni 
 Aloxatader Point to nruh'i Point, which limits the depth that can be 
 carried into Alemck Hay to 2A fathoms and into Hhippe|i;an Harbor to 
 24 fathoms at low water. 
 
 Shippegan Harbor. — On the mainland, nearly oppo.site tlie south 
 point of Alemek Bay, there is a windmill on Hernacho Point, the sandy 
 north point of Basse Bay, which is small and shallow. On the south 
 point of this bay, '^ mile to the southward of the windmill, stands the 
 church and village of Shippegan; and off them is Shippegan Harbor, 
 which is a narrow channel with 2i to 4 fathoms water, and between 
 shoals of mud ami eelgrass nearly dry at low water. This narrow 
 channel continues 2^ miles beyond the church, terminating at Shippe- 
 gan (luUy, the southern entrance of tlie sound. The gully is used by 
 shallops and fishing boats. The tide is generally extremely rapid in it, 
 and tliere is often a heavy surf on its bar of sand, wiiich dries in part 
 at h)w water, leaving a channel with only 4 or .'> feet water. Shippegan 
 Harbor is quite secure in all winds, and it is there that the greater part 
 of tlie vessels wliich visit, the place for timber lie moored. The Avater- 
 ing ])lace is at a small stream in Basse Bay, a short distance to the 
 westward of the church. 
 
 Ice. — The sound is usually frozen over ab^ut December 1, and clear 
 of ice -ibout May 10, being completely closed between those dates. 
 The first vessel arrives, from sea, about May 21, and the last one leaves 
 about November 13. In 1870 field ice drifted into Shipjiegan Sound 
 on May 14, and did not disappear until June 4. 
 
 Buoys. — Bla<;k and red buoys mark the channel. 
 
 Lights.— See page 173. 
 
 Shippegan Channel, leading into the sOnn<l from the northward, is 
 dilficnlt. The water is deep, but the passage is narrow and crooked, 
 and without leading marks. For 3 miles the breadth of the channel 
 between the Pokesuedie and Shippegan shoals, which are exceedingly ■ 
 steep, is only ft-om 4 t« ^ mile. The whole distance from Shippegan 
 Flat to Shippegan church is nearly 9 miles, and the navigation is diffi- 
 cult all the way. No directions which could be given would enable a 
 stranger to take a large vessel into the sound without very considerable 
 risk of getting on shore; but a vessel not drawing more than 12 feet 
 may be taken in by the lead in fine weather and with the assistance of 
 the buoys, if in position, and the chart. 
 
 Directions. — Bring Marcelle and I'okesuedie Points in one, bearing 
 S. 1° E. (S. 230 W. mag.), and steer for them. After passing the west 
 end if the Shippegan Flat the depths will be 9 to 7 fathoms in the chan- 
 nel, but they will decrease as the vessel ajiproaches the Pokesuedie and 
 Oaraquette Shoals. As soon as the depth is o fathoms, alter course to 
 
180 
 
 GULP OP ST. LAWUENCK — WKHT COAST. 
 
 I 
 
 8 T)^ K (S. 11^ I'-, mag.), or «»» us may be necessary t«> f.-llow the eiist- 
 eru side of the rokoHuwUo SIkhU in that «lci»tli, until (^iira.inetttusU't.ple 
 is optMi clear to the southward of the sandy Si:, extreme of Caraqaette 
 Island. She will then bo at the entrance of the narrow part ot the 
 channel between the Pokesuedie and Shippcfjan Shoals, and it the wnul 
 be from the eastward she had better haul over to the weather side into 
 T) fathoms water and foUov that depth alon- the edfje of tiie Shipi.eRan 
 Shoals by the lead, as befon'; but if the win.l be from the westward, 
 follow the cdKe of the I'okesuedie Shoal in the same manner. The 
 mode of proceeding whi.h has just been recommended would prevent a 
 vessel from mistakii.fr the si.le of the channel which she misht be on, 
 and from which the greatest dan-er of running on shore would arise. 
 The depth of water in the channel varies from <J to 1>, and in one place 
 to 12, fathoms over sandy bottom, but changing to clay and mud as the 
 vessel advances into the sound. 
 
 Tides —It would re(inire a much longer experience than was attortlea 
 by the few weeks employed in the Admiralty survey to become fully 
 acduainted with tiie set of the tides in the entrance of the Shippegau 
 and ( aracMiette Channels, where they doubtless change with the time 
 of tide and other circumstances. The rate of the tides, however, sel- 
 dom e\(ee.led a knot even in the channels, where, of course, they are 
 stronger than elsewher.'. In Shippegau Harbor the streant was very 
 regular in Hue weather, running in at the gully and to the northward, 
 through the sound into Chaleur Bay, from about half ebb to half Hood 
 bv the shore, and in the reverse direction, or to the southward, from 
 about half flood to half ebb. It is high water, full and change, in 
 Shippegau Harbor at .Mi. 4Jm., which is about an hour later than at 
 Caraquette and Paspebiac; springs rise 5J or feet, neaps 3 feet. 
 
 Caraquette Island is of sandstone, low and wooded, and 1-^ miles 
 long in a direction nearly parallel to the coast. Sandy points extend 
 fi-om both ends of the island toward the mainland, or to the southward, 
 so as to form a bay, in which there is landlocked anchorage for vessels 
 not drawing more than l.> feet water. The island rises from an exten- 
 sive bank of Hat sandstone, partially covered with sand, and which, 
 commencing at Mizzenette Point, extends to the eastward parallel to 
 the coast all the way to the entrance of Shippegau Sound, a distance 
 
 of 8 or 9 miles. ^ , i i n*- 
 
 There is no passage for vessels between Caraquette Island and Miz- 
 zeiMJtte Point 3 miles west; only a narrow channel for boats on the 
 
 side next the island. ^, t , , i * 
 
 Light— The lighthouse on the west end of Caraquette Island, a white 
 squaJe tower, 43 feet high, on keeper's dwelling, exhibits, at an elevation 
 of 49 feet, a fixed white light, which should be visible 14 miles. 
 
 Caraquette Shoal extends 44 miles to the northeastward of the 
 island from which it dries out occasionally in very low tides to the dis- 
 tance of 2 miles, and is shallow in every part. From its east end, Oara- 
 
 4 
 
;)\v th« eiist- 
 
 part «»t' tlio 
 il if the wind 
 
 hor »i»l« lilt" 
 « Sliippt'Kiiii 
 
 10 westward, 
 lanner. The 
 iild prevent a 
 initjht be on, 
 , would arise. 
 I in one place 
 lid mud as the 
 
 11 was afforded 
 , become fully 
 tlie Shippegau 
 
 with the time 
 , however, sel- 
 jurse, they are 
 reant was very 
 the northward, 
 )h to half flood 
 mthward, from 
 ,nd change, in 
 r later than at 
 apa 3 feet. 
 I, and I'i miles 
 points extend 
 the southward, 
 •age for vessels 
 from an exteu- 
 pd, and which, 
 ard parallel to 
 iund, a distance 
 
 island and Miz- 
 )r boats on the 
 
 I Island, a white 
 , at an elevation 
 
 14 miles. 
 
 tastward of tlie 
 
 I tides to the dis- 
 j east end, Oara- 
 
 w 
 
 CAKMlVKTi'V) HAUnOR. 
 
 181 
 
 qnotte stoeplo and the HK. extrente of tlie trees of Oiiraqnotte Island 
 are in line, hearing S. «».P \V. (8. 87'^ VV. niag,)« ii"d Hhippegan steeple 
 and Pokesuedie Point bearing S. L'(r H, (H, 1 W. mag.). Tlie hist- 
 iiained murivs in line lea<l to the eastward of this shoiil in l\ fathoinH at 
 low water, but a larg(( vessel requiring a great <lepth of wiit«'r would 
 have to pass farther to the eastward, by keeping Miircelie and I'oke- 
 Huedie Points in line, bearing S. 1° E. (S. 2;P W. mag.). 
 
 Caraquette Channel, between the Pokesuedio and ('anKpiette 
 Siioals, forms tl*e iMitranee to the harbor of Caraipiette for a distance 
 of I'i miles, and has W!it4!r enough for vessels of large draft; but it is 
 crooked and only 450 yards wide between very steep slioala, and without 
 sullleient leading mavks; hence it becomes a very ditllcnit channel. 
 
 Caraquette Harbor nmy be said to (commence immediately within 
 or to the westward of Pokesuedie Island, extending westward between 
 the mainland and the Cara(|uetto Shoal and Island. The church at 
 Caraquette will be seen standing (conspicuously on the ridge nearly 
 opposite to Mizzenette Point, and the houses and fish stores of Lower 
 Caraquette nearly opposite to the island. In the eastern part »»f the 
 harbor, immediately within Pokesuedie, the depth is ."> and <» fatlio'us, 
 and there is not less than 3A fathoms till within ^ mile «>f the 8E. point 
 of the island. Between the island and the main, the ciiannel is only 
 2.')0 yards wide and carries only 2.^ fathoms water ; but farther west- 
 ward it increases to ^ mile and 4i fathoms water, and is there sheltered 
 by the Mizzenette Sands, which dry at low water nearly across to the 
 island. The bottom is of mud within the harbor and of sand in the 
 entrance, or Caraquette Channel. 
 
 Caraquette Bay extends 4 or 5 miles to the southweatward of Miz- 
 zenette Point, being all shoal water except the narrow channel of the 
 harbor and terminating in the two shallow rivers, the South and the 
 North, in the mouths of which there are oyster beds. The best water- 
 ing place is at a small stream which descends the steep banks at Upper 
 Caraquette, near lirideau Point. 
 
 Although this is an excellent harbor for vessels of moderate draft, 
 and even capable of attbrding anchorage to much larger vessels, it 
 is, nevertheless, an exceedingly dangerous place to a stranger. The 
 approach to it is between shoals extending several miles from the shore, 
 and there are neither beacons, buoys, nor competent pilots (1860); 
 hence, although 4 fathoms can be carried in at low water sufficiently 
 far for vessels of large draft to be anchored in safety in that depth, yet 
 it would not be prudent even for vessels of a moderate draft to attempt 
 this harbor unnecessarily, nor unless the circumstances of wind and 
 weather be very favorable, with a flowing tide, and her boats ahead. 
 Under such favorable circumstances the passage into the harbor will 
 be attended with little risk to small vessels prudently conducted, and 
 having the assistance of the plan in addition to following the directions. 
 
 Ice. — Caraquette Harbor is usually frozen over about December 11, 
 
M2 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 and clear of ice about May 8, being completely closed between those 
 dates. The first vessel arrives from sea ubout May 12, and the last 
 one leaves about November 25. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Garaqnette Harbor at 
 2h. 4(»m. ; springs rise 6 feet, neaps 3 feet. 
 
 Directions. — If bound from the east yard, having brought the en- 
 trance of Miscou Harbor to bear to the eastward of S. 24° E. (south 
 mag.), stand in toward it to 8 fatho'as water; then run to the westward 
 in that depth until the KE. extreme of the trees of Shippegan Island 
 opens to the southward of the SW. extreme of Miscou Island, bearing 
 S. 65° E. (S. 41° E. mag.) when, if the weather be clear, Garaquette 
 steeple will be seen in line with the north extreme of Garaquette Island, 
 bearing S. 51° W. (S. 75° W. mag.). From thence steer for Blanchard 
 Point, the wooded NW. extreme of Pokesuedie Island, which may or 
 may not be made out, as it will be on with the mainland and distant 7 
 or 8 miles. Do not approach the Shippegan Plat nearer than the 
 depth of 7 fathoms; and having run about 3^ miles, Marcelle Point, the 
 wooded SE. extreme of Pokesuedie Island, will be in line with Poke- 
 suedie Point, which is the sandy east extreme of tte same island. 
 
 These points in line, bearing S. 1° B. (S. 23° W. mag.), will lead west- 
 ward of the west extreme of the Shippegan Flat. Steer for these 
 points in line until Garaquette steeple comes in line with the SE. 
 extreme of the trees of Garaquette Island, bearing 8. 63° W. (S. 87° 
 W. mag.), immediately after which, or when the north extreme of Ship- 
 pegan is in line with the south extreme of Miscou, bearing N. 74° E. 
 (S. 82° E. mag.), steer toward Blanchard Point, bearing 8.37° W. (S. 
 61° W. mag ). Having run not quite 1 J miles toward Blanchard Point, 
 Shippegan steeple will come in linj with Pokesuedie Point, bearing 
 S. 24° E. (south mag.), and at the same time, or immediately after- 
 wards, Garacpiette steeple will be in line with the sand^ SE. extremity 
 of Garaquette Island, bearing S. 66° W. (west mag.). 
 
 The vessel will now be within the entrance of the Garaquette Ghan- 
 nel, between the Oara(iUette and Pokesuedie Shoals, and must haul to 
 the westward immediately for Garaquette steeple, keeping it carefully 
 in line with the sandy SE. extreme of Garaquette Island, until the wind- 
 mill on Alexander Point (Shippegan Island) is in line with Pokesue- ' 
 die Point, bearing S. 47° E. (S. 23° E. mag.), when the course must 
 instantly be changed td S. 40° W. (S. 64° W. mag.). The vessel will 
 now be about to pass through the narrowest and most difficult part of 
 the channel, and the course must be strictly attended to and the lead 
 kept going on both sides. If the water shoals to less than 4 fathoms 
 after the vessel has run upon this course from i to ^ mile, it will be on 
 the Pokesuedie side, and she must therefore steer to the northward a 
 little, or into 5 fathoms, and then resume the S. 40° W. (S. 64° W. 
 mag.) course again until Garai^uette steeple comes in line with the cliff 
 of Brideau Point, bearing S. 71° W. (N. 85° W. mag.). Alter the 
 
CARAQUETTE HARBOR. 
 
 183 
 
 between those 
 2, and the last 
 
 lette Harbor at 
 
 jrought the en- 
 S. 24° B. (south 
 to the westward 
 liippegan Island 
 Island, bearing 
 lear, Caraquette 
 iraquette Island, 
 er for Blanchard 
 1, which may or 
 nd and distant 7 
 nearer than the 
 ircelle Point, the 
 : line with Poke- 
 same island, 
 r.), will lead west- 
 Steer for these 
 ine with the SE. 
 8. 63° W. (S. 87° 
 extreme of Ship- 
 searing N. 74° B. 
 ■ingS.37oW. (S. 
 Blanchard Point, 
 ie Point, bearing 
 nmediately after- 
 dj SB. extremity 
 
 Caraquette Ohan- 
 and must haul to 
 jeping it carefully 
 id, until the wind- 
 iue with Pokesue- 
 
 the course must 
 The vessel will 
 »8t diflicult part of 
 id to and the lead 
 
 ss than 4 fathoms 
 
 mile, it will be on 
 ■o the northward a 
 
 Oo W. (S. 64° W. 
 line with the cliff 
 
 nag.). Alter the 
 
 course again immediately tlie last-named marks come in line, and steer 
 for them for || mile; then sheer to tho southward a little, so that the 
 steeple may be seen a little within and over the extremity of the point, 
 or in line witli the store ui>on it; keep it so until the cliffy points on the 
 NE. side of Caraiiuette' Island are all shut in behind the east point of 
 the island, and it will have led clear of the' south extremity of the Car- 
 aquette Shoal. The vessel will now be in safe anchorage, and a berth 
 may be chosen at ])lea8ure with the assistance of the chart, and in from 
 4 to 2^ fatiioms at low Avater. 
 
 ^'essel^ of large draft from the westward should pass outside of 
 Fisherman Ledge, not going to the southward into a less depth than 6 
 fathoms at low water until Marcelle and Pokesuedie Points come in 
 one, bearing S. 1° E. (S. 23° W. mag,); they should then haul in upon 
 those leading marks, eud proceed as before directed. A small vessel 
 may pass through Fisherman Channel guided by the leading marks 
 and the remarks which are given relating to Fisherman Ledge and 
 Mizzenette Ledge. She need not run so far to the eastward as a large 
 vessel, but as soon as Shippegan steeple comes in line with Pokesuedie 
 Point, bearing S. 24° B. (south mag.), she may haul in upon those lead- 
 ing marks, which will take her over the tail of Caraquette Shoal in 3 
 fathoms; and as soon as the steeide of Caraquette comes in line with 
 the sandy SB. extreme of Caraquette Island, bearing S. 66° W. (west 
 mag.), she must steer for them and proceed as before directed. A 
 person acquainted with the appearance of the objects given as leading 
 marks will find little ditficulty, when the weather is favorable for seeing 
 them, in following out these directions. Perhaps Brideau Point will 
 be the most diflBcult to make out, but it is well described in the chart, 
 and the conspicuous store upon it and the small bay on its east side 
 will assist in pointing it out to strangers. 
 
 Fisherman Ledge is a detached, bed of rocks, with 10 feet least 
 water, lying to the northward of the Caraquette Shoal and separated 
 from it by Fisherman Channel, which is one mile wide and carries from 
 4 to 7 fathoms water. This dangerous ledge, vvhich lies more in the 
 way of vessels than any other in Chaleur Bay, is 1^ miles long and ^ 'aile 
 wide between the 3-fathom lines. There are no marks for it. Its 
 northern edge is distant 3 miles from Caraquette Island, and its east 
 and west ends bear north (2J. 24° E. mag.) from the corresponding points 
 of the island. The points of cliffs at (Jreat Anse and Donax Point in 
 one, bearing S. 77° W. (N. 79° W. mag.), lead through Fisherman 
 Channel, which, however, has not been examined very closely, and can 
 not in any case be recommended to vessels of large draft. 
 
 Mizzenette Ledge of rocks, with 5 feet least water, bears ]S'. 45° 
 W. (N. 21° W. mag.) IJ miles from the west end of Caraquette Island, 
 and a vessel will pass to the northward of it, in 3^ fathoms, by keeping 
 Donax Point just open to the northward of Mizzenette Point, bearing 
 S. 83° W. (N. 73° W. mag.). These marks will also lead to the east- 
 
184 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 1i 
 
 ward along the northern edge of the Oaraquette Shoal until they strike 
 Scollop Patch, which has 14 feet least water over a rocky bottom, 
 and on which the NW. extreme of Caraquette Island and Caraquette 
 steeple are in line, the SE. extreme of the island bearing S. 4^ W. (S. 
 28^ W. mag.), distant nearly 2 miles. The marks for clearing the 
 northern edge of the Caraciuette Shoal, to the eastward of Scollop 
 Patch, and in 3 fathoms water, are the south extreme of Miscou Island 
 kept plainly open to the northward of the north point of Shippegan 
 Island, bearing N. 77° E. (S. 79° E. mag.). But those marks are low 
 and distant, and often not well defined, therefore they should not be 
 trusted alone; neither will they be required if the northern edge of the 
 shoal be not approached nearer than the depth of 4 ftithoms at low 
 water. 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1067.) 
 
 The Coast, which for the most part is of high sandstone cliffs, is 
 very low near Mizzenette Point, and about 3 miles to the westward of 
 that point, where the sandy cliffs end, the shoal water extends to J 
 mile from the shore; but in general it does not extend to more than 
 half that distance, and the coast may everywhere be approached by 
 the lead to 10 or 12 fathoms with care, the greater depth being quite 
 near enough at nighttime. There are settlements all along the coast, 
 and villages and fishing establishments at Great Anse and Pokeshaw. 
 Great Anse, where there is a church, is 8 miles and Pokeshaw 11 miles 
 westward of Mizzenette Point. There are small bays at both places 
 where boats find shelter, and a small river at Pokeshaw. 
 
 Norton Shoal, carrying 3 fathoms water, and lying J mile off shore, 
 one mile to the westward of Norton Point and 9 miles eastward of the 
 Nipisighit, is the only danger in the way of vessels along the coast 
 from Mizzenette Point to Bathurst Harbor, a distance of 29 miles. 
 
 Bathurst Harbor, at the mouth of the Nipisighit River, is 400 yards 
 wide at the entrance between Carron and Alston Points, which are of 
 sand, with several stores and other buildings upon them (1800). 
 
 The lighthouses on Carron Point kept in line will lead in through the 
 narrow channel over the bar in 7 feet at low water, or in 14 feet at high 
 water in the best spring tides. The distance from the outside of the 
 bar in 3 fathoms to the entrance of the river is U miles; and for the 
 whole of that distance the very narrow channel is between sandy 
 shoals, nearly dry at low water, and extending from either side of the 
 rivet's mouth. 
 
 Within the entrance there is an extensive and well-sheltered basin, 
 nearly 3 miles long and 2 miles wide, but nearly all dry at low water, 
 excepting the channels of the four rivers, which, after uniting their 
 streams below Bathurst, flow through it to the entrance, forming by 
 their junction what is called the Main Channel. On the eastern side 
 of Ahe basin there is an islet called the Indian or Bathurst Island. 
 Half a mile to the westward of the town, and across the mouth of the 
 
 P 
 
 L 
 
WM 
 
 V irjRST. 
 
 il tbey strike 
 cky bottom, 
 
 I Caraquette 
 S. 4'^ W. (S. 
 cleiiring the 
 (l of Scollop 
 liscou lalancl 
 )f Shippegaii 
 ark a are low 
 liould not be 
 
 II edge of the 
 bhoms at low 
 
 stone cliffa, is 
 5 westward of 
 exteuda to J 
 to more than 
 .>proaclied by 
 li being quite 
 »ng the coast, 
 lid Pokeshaw. 
 ahaw 11 miles 
 t both places 
 
 mile oft" shore, 
 stward of the 
 oiig the coast 
 ' 29 miles, 
 r, ia 400 yards 
 I, which are of 
 (18C0). 
 
 in through the 
 14 feet at high 
 outside of the 
 sa; and for the 
 etween sandy 
 lier aide of the 
 
 leltered basin, 
 ' at low water, 
 ' uniting their 
 ce, forming by 
 le eaatern side 
 i-at Island, 
 e mouth of the 
 
 185 
 
 Middle and North Rivers, is x^etei- Point, with its cliun^h and villatre 
 and on the north side of that point the Teteagaucl.e River enters a bay 
 on the NW. aide of tlie basin. Tliese streams are all unnavigable for 
 any distance. Even the Nipisighit, which is by far the largest, and a 
 very coiisiderabl, river, ceases to be navigable U miles above Bathurst, 
 where the tide ends and rapids begin. 
 
 Bathurst—The town of Bathurst is well situated at the head of the 
 basin, 2J miles within the entrance, and on the point of land which 
 divides the Nipisighit River from the Middle and North Rivers The 
 salmon fishery is carried on extensively. There is a seaman's hospital 
 at Bathurst. '■ 
 
 The United States is represented by a consular agent. 
 
 Communication.-Bathur8t is in commuuic^ation with all parts bv 
 the Intercolonial Railway and Telegraph Company. • 
 
 Lights—Stonehaven lighthouse, on the bank at the shore end of the 
 breakwater at Grindstone Point, is a square tower, 37 feet high, and 
 painted white. The light is a fixed red light, 88 feet above high-^ater 
 mark, and should be visible 15 miles. This light, besides being a 
 general coast light, indicates the position of the breakwater, which 
 aftords shelter to small vessels. 
 
 On Salmon (Belloni) Point is exhibited a fixed white light at 30 feet 
 above high water, visible from the bearing of N. 67o E. (east maff ) 
 
 mile" ''"'^ "^ ^" '^° ''^- ^"'^"' '""^•^' ^^'''^ '^""'''^ ^^ ^'^'ble !o 
 
 The lighthouse is 22 feet high, square shaped, and painted white. 
 
 li.hl« .Tf% '/^i,? ^' *''' *^' ^^' ««!«» there are two leading 
 lights, 356 feet apart. The outer lighthouse, 34 feet high, and painted 
 
 To mir ' ^' "" '""' '^"^' ""'^^ ^"'"' ^ ^"^^ white lightJ^isVble 
 The inner lighthouse is square shaped and painted with red and white 
 
 s npes; It ex ubits at an elevation of 43 feet a fixed red light, which 
 
 should be visible 14 miles. ' 
 
 Buoys.-There is an outer buoy in 7 fathoms water at about J mile 
 
 northeastward of the Outer Bar buoy. * 
 
 Anchorage.-In the entrance between the sandy points, or rather 
 just outside ,t, there are 3 and 4 fathoms water; and here vessels Z 
 
 : ^eiZ; % *''V" ''t"' ^'^'^^"•^ ^^ "- ^- -^ '^^ -ndy shol 
 o either side Some of the smaller vessels load within the entrance. 
 
 and some of the larger ones complete their loading outside the bar 
 
 wl^re the anchorage, m 6 or 7 fathoms, muddy bottpm, ia con .idered 
 
 safe .1. the summer months, although the NE. gales send n a heavy sea 
 
 A depth of 14 feet at high water in spring tides can be carr^dTip to 
 
 places where vessels may lie afloat and load in 14 feet at low water. 
 «i ^^?*«;-T'^«r« '"-e Sood pilots for the Nipisighit River, ar-d no one 
 should attempt the bar without one, excepting in case of necessity. 
 
 "■*.., 
 '•'u. 
 
186 
 
 GULP OF ST. LAWRENCE WEST COAST, 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at Bathurst at 3h. 15m.; 
 springs rise 7 feet, neaps 4 feet. The rate of the tides in the main 
 channel is about 2 knots and over the bar about li knots. The stream 
 sets fair in and out and over the bar. 
 
 BeUedune Point is about 17 miles from Alston Point, and the 
 extreme seen from it is low and sandy, and has shoal water off it to the 
 eastward 3 mile. About halfway between these points, on the west- 
 ern shore of Nipisighit Bay, is the church and village of Rochette. The 
 whole of this coast is low, and composed of sandstone, limestone, and 
 trap rocks. The shoal water generally extends to ^ mile from the shore, 
 and vessels of large draft had better not stand nearer than the depth 
 of 10 fathoms, especially at night, unless it be in the head of the bay, 
 where they may safely approach the sandy beach to 7 or fathoms. 
 ' Lights.— The lighthouse, named Petite Rocher, on Elm Tree Point, a 
 square building, 31 feet high, painted white, exhibits at an elevation of 
 36 feet a fixed white light, which should be visible 12 miles. 
 
 A fixed white light is exhibited from a mast, 28 feet high, on Little 
 Belledune Point, at an elevation of 38 feet, and should be visible 11 
 miles. The mast has a white shed at its base. 
 
 Heron Island, 13 miles westward of Belledune Point, is of moderate 
 height, wooded, and with red sandstone cliffs at both its NW. and SE. 
 points. Shoal water extends off tiiis point to i mile. The island is i 
 miles long, parallel to the coast, and there is good anchorage in the 
 channel between it and the mainland; but the channel is rendered 
 narrow and difficult by shoals, which extend a great distance out on 
 
 either side. 
 
 Heron Channel.— At the western end the channel is only 400 yards 
 wide, with 3 fathoms water in it. It becomes wider to the eastward, 
 and the depths are 4 and 5 fathoms ; but there the dangerous Heron 
 Rock lies, nearly in mid-channel, and consequently right in the way of 
 vessels. When on this small rock, which has G feet least water, and 4 
 or r> fathoms all around it, the SE. extreme of Heron Island bears N. 44^ 
 E. (>^. 07° E. mag.) about one mile, and a rock lying (iOO yards NNW. 
 of Beaver Point, and almost always above water, S. 07° W. (west mag.) 
 700 yards. This latter rock, which lies on the edge of the shoal oft" the 
 mainland, is quite bold; and a vessel, by sailing within the distjince of 
 300 yards of it, will pass to the southward of the Heron Rock, as she 
 will also to the northward, by running along the southern edge of the 
 shoal off the island, in 3 fathoms at low water. But this is an intricate 
 and dangerous channel for a vessel of any size, and requires the aid of 
 
 a good pilot. 
 
 Anchorage.— Vessels occasionally anchor, for the purpose of load- 
 ing wi*.h timber, in the bay of Nash River, in 4 fathoms, mud bottom, 
 where they are much exposed to easterly winds, but the ground is so 
 good that they ride safely during the summer months. At this anchor- 
 age the east point of Heron Island bears N. 37° W. (N. 14° W. mag.) 2J 
 miles and Black Point N. 68° W. (N. 45° W. mag.) one mile. 
 
RESTIOOUCHE RIVER. 
 
 187 
 
 itSli. 15m.; 
 a tbe iiiaiu 
 The stream 
 
 nt, and the 
 off it to the 
 m the west- 
 ihette. The 
 lestone, and 
 ra the shore, 
 n tbe depth 
 I of the bay, 
 fathoms. 
 Tree Point, a 
 I elevation of 
 
 iS. 
 
 igh, on Little 
 be visible 11 
 
 8 of moderate 
 NW. and SB. 
 he island is 4 
 borage in the 
 si is rendered 
 stance out on 
 
 >nly 400 yards 
 Ithe eastward, 
 gerous Heron 
 in the way of 
 |t water, and 4 
 ,d bears N. 440 
 
 yards NNW. 
 (west mag.) 
 |e shoal off the 
 il»e distiince of 
 
 Rock, as she 
 |rn edge of the 
 
 is an intricate 
 
 ires the aid of 
 
 lirpose of load- 
 , mud bottom, 
 ground is so 
 it this anchor- 
 to W. mag.) 2J 
 kile. 
 
 The shoal water extends off Fowler Point a mile out to the 3-fathom 
 line of soundings. There is also good anc^liorage in 4 fiithoms, nuid 
 bottom, to the westward of Heron Island, and nearly midway between 
 it and the Oharlo River. This river will only admit boats. 
 
 Light. — The lighthouse on the east side of Heron Island is a square 
 building, 20 feet high, painted white, exhibiting at an elevation of 06 
 feet a fixed white light, wliich should bo visible 15 miles. 
 
 Maguaclia Point, on the north shore of Chaleur Bay, of red-sand- 
 stone cliffs, is the NE. point of entrance of the Restigouche River. 
 , Restigouche River, front its entrance at Maguacha l^oint, varies in 
 breadth for the first 17 miles from 1^ to 3 miles. At that distance 
 Campbellton is situated on the southern or New Brunswick sliore, and 
 at the foot of a remarkable conical mountain called the Sugar Loaf. 
 Between Oampbellton and Indian Point, on the northern shore, the 
 breadth of the estuary is only ^ mile; but it expands again to 1^ miles 
 at its head, just below the islands. At Indian Point, a mile above 
 Campbellton, the navigation for shipping ends, there being only 12 
 feet in a narrow channel at low water ; but small craft may ascend 
 through very narrow passages, on either side, carrying from 6 to 9 feet 
 water, to within f mile of the head of the estuary, where the Besti- 
 gouche River, properly so called, enters it through narrow channels 
 between the islands, 21 miles from the head of Chaleur Bay. 
 
 Off Loup River, which enters a bay from the northern shore 2 miles 
 below Campbellton, there is a shallow part of the channel called the 
 bar, over which there is not more than 13 or 14 feet at low water; but- 
 the tide, which rises from to 9 feet, enables vessels of moderate draft 
 to ascend to Campbellton, off which they may moor in from 3 to 3J 
 fathoms at low water. Vessels of about 18 feet draft may ascend at 
 all times of the tide nearly to Oak Point, which is about 14 miles up, 
 and within a mile of the bar ; and larger ves-els might proceed 10 miles 
 up, or nearly to Guarde Point, with assistance of buoys and a good 
 pilot. 
 
 The charts and directions will enable the seaman to take his vessel 
 in as far as Dalhousie Harbor, or the anchorage oft' Fleurant Point; 
 but to proceed farther up, the services of a pilot should be engaged, for 
 there are no good leading marks beyond the above places, where the 
 shoals become too steep for the lead to give sufficient warning, and the 
 channels too narrow for a large ship. 
 
 Anchorage. — The most convenient anchorage for men-of-war, or 
 other vessels visiting the Restigouche for supplies of wood or water, is 
 off Fleurant Point, on the northern shoi'e, and about 2 miles to the north- 
 ward of the Harbor. There a vessel can weigh in all winds and at all 
 times of tide; and no other directions are necessary than to anchor 
 anywhere off" the point in 6 or 7 fathoms of low water. There is a toler- 
 ably good watering place at a brook i mile to the westward of the 
 point, and a little farther westward the Mussel Bank, a dangerous reef, 
 extends out from the high cliffs, nearly halfway across the estuary. 
 
 
utifmmmtK 
 
 188 
 
 GULF OF 8T. LAWRENCE WEST COAST. 
 
 Bonami Rocks.— The entrance of the Eeati{joiiche River, between 
 Mnjjnacha Point and the Uonami Rocks, is nearly 2 miles wide. The 
 rocks are steep and high, and so rough and broken that a stranger 
 would be led to expect danger on their side instead of on the opposite, 
 where the steep red clitt's of Maguacha Point give the usual, although 
 in this case deceptive, iuuications of a clsar channel. 
 
 The extreme point of the lionanii Rocks may be safely passed at 400 
 yards, but shallow water extends from the rocks to Bonami Point, from 
 which a reef runs i mile, and the shoal continues from it to Dalhousie 
 
 Island. 
 
 Light— The lighthouse on Bonami Point is square, 33 feet high, 
 painted white, and exhibits from an elevation of 49 feet a fixed white 
 light, which should be visible 13 miles. 
 
 Maguacha Spit, of sand and stone, with only 6 feet at low water, 
 runs out nearly a mile SW. from Maguacha Point, toward the Bonami 
 Rocks, thus occupying fully half the channel. To clear the SW. 
 extreme of this steep and dangerous spit, keep the highest summit of 
 the Scaumenac >Iountaius open SW. of Dalhousie Island, for the sum- 
 mit of the mountain and the south side of the island in one, bearing 
 N. 68° W. (X. 45° W. mag.), lead over the extreme end of the spit in 
 3^ fathoms. The eastern side of the spit will be avoided by not entirely 
 shutting in the south extreme of the Carletou Mountains behind the 
 east side of Maguacha Point. 
 
 Buoy.— A buoy lies westward 200 yards from the end of Maguacha 
 Spit, which also serves to mark the quarantine ground. (It is ditticult 
 to keep this buoy in position.) 
 
 Dalhousie (Douglas) Island, 400 yards long, is high aud rocky, 
 round backed, and wooded, and joined by a shoal which dries to the low 
 point of Dalhousie. On that point there are large storehouses belong- 
 ing to the town of Dalhousie, which, with its church, will be seen on 
 the side of a hill to the SW. of the island. Six hundred yards west- 
 ward of Dalhousie Island (locally known as Douglas Island) there is a 
 small rocky islet, at the extremity of a narrow sandy spit, forming the 
 western side of the small and shallow bay of Dalhousie. The shallow 
 water extends from the islet to the island, and the timber ships lie 
 moored along its edge, in G or 7 fathoms muddy bottom, directly off the 
 town. By keeping just outside these deep water is obtained. This is 
 Dalliousie Harbor, which is quite secure in all winds. 
 
 Dalhousie Harbor may be approached in two ways, either through 
 the direct but narrow channel between the Middle Ground and Dal- 
 liousiie Island, or round to the northward and westward of the Middle 
 Orouiid, which last, although it involves the necessity of passing over 
 a Hat of 3 fathoms at low water, is the route usually taken, because of 
 tliere being plenty of room there, whereas the channel first mentioned 
 is only 300 yards wide. The narrow channel has, however, the advau- 
 (etge of good leading marks, and carries G fathoms water. 
 
rer, between 
 wide. The 
 t a stranger 
 the opposite, 
 lal, although 
 
 >as8ed at 400 
 i Point, from 
 ;o Dalhousie 
 
 i3 feet high, 
 a, fixed wliite 
 
 it low water, 
 the ISouaini 
 3ar the SW. 
 st summit of 
 for the sum- 
 oue, bearing 
 of the spit in 
 y not entirely 
 s behind the 
 
 of Maguacha 
 (It is difficult 
 
 li and rocky, 
 •ies to the low 
 ouses belong- 
 11 be seen on 
 [ yards west- 
 nd) there is a 
 :, forming the 
 The shallow 
 iber ships lie 
 irectly oft' the 
 ined. This is 
 
 iither through 
 ind and Dal- 
 >f the Middle 
 passing over 
 sn, because of 
 ■st mentioned 
 er, the advan- 
 
 DALHOrSIE HARnOR. 
 
 189 
 
 Montgomery Island is tlie name applied to the northern termination 
 of the peninsula from which the railway wharf springs, about (JOO yards 
 westward of Daliiousie Islaml. 
 
 Middle G-round, separated from Dalhousie Island by the narrow 
 channel .just mentioned, is 1,100 yards long and 8(»0 yards wide, it 
 consists of sand and stone, Avith 6 feet least water, and is ,'orv -tciep on 
 its eastern side, where a buoy is placed near its NE. point. There are 
 no sutticient leading marks, but beacons might be easily so placed on 
 the shore as to clear it on every side. The main channel between this 
 shoal and tlie shore to the northward and eastward is more than ^ mile 
 wide, and in some places there are 15 ftithoms water. The rate of the 
 tide, which is stronger there than elsewhere, does not exceed 2 knots. 
 Caution.— Middle Ground is reported to have slioaled and to have 
 extended nearly 200 yards to the southward, and the channel to have 
 deepened nearer to Dalhousie Island. 
 
 Ice— Tlie harbor is usually frozen over about December 5 and clear 
 of ice about April 1."), being completely closed between tliose dates. 
 The first vessel arrives from sea about May 14, and the last one leaves 
 about November 11. 
 
 Lights.— A fixed white light is shown from a square lighthouse, 
 painted white, and 22 feet high, on the east extremity of Dalhousie 
 (Douglas) Island. The light is 30 feet above high water, and should 
 be visible 6 miles. It shows in an easterly direction down the river 
 and northwesterly across it. 
 
 On the extremity of Dalhousie railway wharf a fixed white light is 
 exhibited from a square lighthouse, 34 feet high, which projects through 
 the railway shed and has a white lantern. The light is 30 feet above 
 high water, and visible 9 miles. 
 
 The light is visible when in line with Montgomery Island light bear- 
 ing S. 430 E. (S. 200 E. mag.) and northward of that bearing. 
 
 A fixetl white light is exhibited on the summit of Montgomery Island 
 at an elevation of 34 feet, and should be visible when bearing S. 43° E 
 (8. 20° E. mag.) miles. 
 The lighthouse is squani, 22 feet high, and painted white. 
 The above two lights are 29(5 feet apart, and kept in line bearing 
 8. 430 E. (8. 200 E. mag.) leud to the railway wharf. 
 
 Anchorage.- The best a,nchorage in Dalhousie Harbor is in 6^. or 7 
 fathoms, wJ.th Dalhousie Island and Bonami Point in lino. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, in Dalhousie Harbor at 
 3h. 10m.; Hprings rise 9 feet, neaps 6 feet. The rate of the tidal 
 streams in the entrance does not exceed 2 knots. 
 
 Dalhousia is the chief town of Rescigouche County, and in 1891 had 
 a population of 2,354 inhabitants. 
 It has a trade in lumber and preserved salmon and lobsters. 
 Communication.— The Intercolonial Railway has a station at Dal- 
 housie, and there is a telegraph office. 
 
 
 ."^i^Ull^iS^^J^ 
 
190 
 
 OULF OP 8T. LAWRENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 Pilots ciiii be had at Dalhonsio for the river. 
 
 Supplies.— I'' resli jtrovisioiis are to be obtained at Dalhousie. 
 
 Campbellton, 1« miles WSW. fiojn Dalliousie by rail, in the north- 
 ermn«)8t town of New Brnnswick. It has a trade in lumber and fish. 
 
 The United States is represented by a consnhir agent. 
 
 Lights.— The leading lighthouses at Campbellton are s(iuare wooden 
 towers, 2L' feet high, painted white, the outer on a pier near the railway 
 wharf, the inner on Mottats Wharf, an<l from them at an elevation of 
 24 feet are exhibited fixed white lights. These lights should be visible 
 
 miles. 
 
 Tides.- It is high water, full and change, at Campbellton at 4h.; 
 springs rise 10 feet, neaps 7 feet. 
 
 Directions.— When within a mile or two of Maguacha Point, bring 
 the marks on for clearing the Maguacha Spit; namely, the highest 
 summit of the Scaumenac Mountains open to the SW. of Dalhousie 
 Island. Stand in upon this mark until the depths are or 8 fathoms 
 on the New llrunswick shore, which will be when the Bonami Rocks 
 are about SSW., and are distant about i mile; then haul to the north- 
 ward, so as to keep in that depth until Laliuie Point (the extreme 
 point to the westward on the New Brunswick shore) comes just open to 
 the northward of Dalhousie Island and of the islet and rocks to the 
 westward of it bearing S. 80o W. (N. 77^ W. mag.); then, if wishing 
 to enter the harbor by the narrow channel to the southward of the 
 Middle Ground, steer S. 80° W. (N. 77^^ W. mag.) xipon those leading 
 marks until near Dalhousie Island, which leave to the southward at a 
 distance of 200 yards, and the vessel will pass safely into the harbor. 
 If wishing to take the more roomy route to the northward of the 
 Middle Ground, instead of steering S. 80o W. (N. 77° W.mag.) for Lalimo 
 Point, as soon as it opens to the northward of the island, sheer over to 
 the NE. until the soundings are 8 fathoms, and follow that depth round 
 to the northward and westward until Dalhousie church opens out to 
 the westward of the island bearing 8. 10° W. (S. 33° W. mag.); then 
 steer S. 07° W. (west mag.) up the estuary, until Dalhousie church 
 appears midway between Dalhousie Island and the islet to the west- 
 ward of it, bearing S. 12° E. (S. 11° W. mag.). Steer now for the 
 church, taking care not to bring it to bear to the southward of S. 12° E. 
 (S. 11'= AV. mag.); or, with the two churches in line, the vessel will pass 
 over the extensive 3fathora flat, to the westward of the Middle Ground, 
 into the harbor. 
 
 With beating winds, in ihe board to the northward, toward Tracadi- 
 gash Spit, that danger will be avoided by keeping Dalhousie Mountain 
 open to the southward of Maguacha Point. W>.stward of the spit 
 vessels may stand in to fathoms water, but there will be no use in 
 standing in to Oarleton Bay out of the strength of the tide. On the 
 Heron Island side, observe that the highest summit of the Scaume- 
 nac Mountains and the southern side of Dalhousie Island touching, 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 1^ 
 
is the north- 
 )er and tish. 
 
 iiare wooden 
 
 • the railway 
 
 elevation of 
 
 lid be visible 
 
 llton at 4h.; 
 
 Point, bring 
 the highest 
 i)f Dalhonaie 
 or 8 fathoms 
 jnanii Bocks 
 to the north- 
 ;the extreme 
 J Just open to 
 rocks to the 
 II, if wishing 
 award of the 
 hose leading 
 uthward at a 
 o the harbor, 
 liward of the 
 g.)for Lalimo 
 sheer over to 
 t depth round 
 opens out to 
 . mag.); then 
 lousie church 
 t to the west- 
 now for the 
 •d of S. 12° E. 
 iissel will pass 
 iddle Ground, 
 
 prard Tracadi- 
 ]sie Mountain 
 (I of the spit 
 be no use in 
 tide. On the 
 ' the Scanme- 
 and touching, 
 
 rAHI.KTON ROAD. 
 
 tm 
 
 clear the shoal water to the northwanl of Ileioi. Isl„nd in 4 fatlioms- 
 tack, therefore, in the board to tlio southward ^^■\wn the mountain 
 (•omes in line witli the northern side of the island, or bv the lead in 
 (. fiithoms. The vessel will be clear of the reef off ti..; west end of 
 Ileron Island when the Charlo River bears southward of south (S 2;P 
 \V.nia«:.),and may then stand to the southward into 1 fathon.s, as 
 long as the east side of Maguacha Point does not bear to the east- 
 wanl of N J lo k. (N. 340 K. mag.) ; after which she should tack in the 
 board to the southward in 7 fathoms, because the flat of from L'A to 3A 
 hithouKs .n Kel Bay becomes rather steep as she approaches the 
 Bonami Rocks. 
 
 Bonami Itocks may be approached to 7 fathon.s (,f water, and when 
 they bear S. .%o W. (S. 79° W. mag.) the vessel will be within the point 
 of the Maguacha Spit, which must be avoided by means of the leading 
 marks already given. From Bonami Rocks to Dalhousie Island she 
 may stand in on the board to the SW. into 8 fathoms, but she should 
 go no nearer to the east side of the Middle Ground than 10 fathoms 
 and that w,th great care, for it is very steep; its northern side may be 
 approached to 9 fathoms. On the board toward the northeastern shore 
 she may stand in to 9 fathoms between Maguacha Spit and Yacta 
 
 n^n^ f ^^^fTT' ^^' ^ ''^'y ^^^P ^^""'''^ «« *t to the distance 
 ot GOO yards NW. of Yacta Point she can safely stand to the north- 
 ward into fathoms all the way to Fleurant Point. 
 
 QUEBEC. 
 
 Carleton Road-This name has been given to an excellent and 
 capacious anchorage safe in all winds. It is east of Maguacha Point 
 and on the west side of Tracadigash Point, which consists of sand, 
 inclosing a shallow lagoon capable of admitting boats or very small craft 
 at high water On the northern shore 6f this lagoon stands the church 
 and village of Carleton, the latter extending to the westward to the 
 shore of the bay where the sand beach of the lagoon joins the mainland. 
 A small str<?am, with a bridge across it, there enters the NW. corner 
 of the lagoon and one mile farther westward, near the commencement 
 of the clay cliflfs, another small stream will be seen, which is the water- 
 ing place. Immediately in rear of the village the Carleton Mountain 
 
 the lulls of the range trending from it both to the northward and west! 
 ward for many miles. 
 
 In 1882 a wooden pier was built, and steamers drawing fl feet water 
 could go alongside. There was 14 feet water at the head of the pier. 
 
 Light-The lighthouse on Carleton Point, 28 feet high, and painted 
 white, exhibits, at an elevation of 32 feet, a fixed white light The 
 light should be visible 12 miles. 
 
 Anchorage.-Ve8sels may anchor anywhere in from 5 to 6 fathor... 
 remembering that although the sandy beach of Tracadigash Point is 
 
 Mm 
 
■fHM 
 
 192 
 
 flULK OK 8T. LAWRENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 quite bold on the west side within the spit, yet shoal water extends off 
 the niainhiiid nearly A mile. The best berth, especially with easterly 
 winds, is in 5^ fathoms, mud, with TracadiKash Point bearing S.-W^ K. 
 (8. 15^ E. nniK.), Carleton steeple N. 78o E. (8. 79o E. mag.), and the 
 wateriuR plm^o N. .$7" W. (N. U^ W. mag.). 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full aud chauge, at Oarletou Toint at 3h.j 
 springs rise feet, neaps l feet. 
 The tides are weak in (Jarletou Road, seldom exceeding one knot. 
 Buoy —A red cau buoy has been placed in 21 feet at low water, to 
 mark the southern extremity of Tracadigash Spit. 
 
 Directions.— Tracadigash Spit, of sand, and running out jj mile S\V. 
 from the sandy point of the same name, is the only danger in the way 
 when approaching the anchorage in Carleton Koad from the eastward. 
 Observe that Maguacha Point and the summit of Dalhousie Mountain 
 in line, bearing S. 83° VV. (N. 74° W. mag.), pass close to the extremity 
 of the spit in 3 fathoms. Therefore, to clear it keep the moimtaiu well 
 open, or at night go no nearer than 10 or 9 fathoms water. As soon as 
 Carleton steeple comes in line with the 8W. extreme of Tracadigash 
 Point, bearing N. 33° E. ( N. 'A'P E. mag.), the spit will have been passed, 
 and the vessel may haul in to the northward, going no nearer than 7 
 fathoms till the point bears to the southward of N. 07° E. ^east mag.). 
 Cascapediac Bay is of considerable extent, being 13 miles wide 
 aud 5 or miles deep. At its head is the Cascapediac Itiver, a consid- 
 erable stream, but which can only be entered by boats, in consequence 
 of the extensive shoals of sand and mud, which dry out 2 miles from its 
 entrance, and occupy all the head of the bay. lilack Point, bold and 
 rocky, and rising 400 feet above the sea, is the eastern point of the bay. 
 The shoals commence about 1^ miles to the northward of Black Point, 
 and at Indian Point, on the east side of Little Kiver, they extend out 
 to the westward nearly IJ miles, shelteriug the anchorage from SE. 
 winds. 
 
 Duthie Point, the east point of entrance of the Cascapediac River, 
 bears M. 51° W. (N. 27° W. mag.) 5 miles from Black Point. One mile 
 eastward of Duthie Point, and in the bay between it and Little River, 
 stand the church aud village of Richmond. 
 
 The Settlements on the western side of the bay are mostly of French 
 Canadians and Acadians, and they extend alongshore all the way from 
 theciver to Tracadigash Point, which is the west poiut of the bay. In 
 rear of the settlements the Carleton Mountain range will be seen 2 or 
 3 miles back from the shore. 
 
 Anchorage.— The anchorage in (Cascapediac Bay, where the timber 
 ships moor in 3 fathoms, is off Uichmoud Village, with Duthie Point 
 bearing N. 24° W. (north mag.) i mile. Vessels may anchor farther 
 out in 4, 5, or 6 fathoms, but they will not be then so well sheltered 
 from easterly winds. 
 Buoys.— There are two black buoys in the anchorage oft" Richmond j 
 
PAHPEHIAC MAY. 
 
 193 
 
 • t'xteiuls otl 
 itli easterly 
 
 ig,), ivnd the 
 
 I'olnt ttt3U.; 
 
 ouo knot, 
 ow water, to 
 
 It i mile SW. 
 er in tbe way 
 the eastward. 
 isie MouJitaiu 
 the extremity 
 uountaiu well 
 •. As soon as 
 r TracadisasU 
 e been passed, 
 nearer than 7 
 W. ^east mag.)' 
 13 miles wide 
 iver, a consiil- 
 n consequence 
 ! miles from its 
 oint, bold and 
 int of the bay. 
 f Black Point, 
 ley extend out 
 rage from SE. 
 
 pediac River, 
 (int. One mile 
 d Little Eiver, 
 
 [)8tly of Frencb 
 the way from 
 »f the bay. In 
 ill be seen 2 or 
 
 lere the timber 
 Duthie Point 
 
 anchor farther 
 well sheltered 
 
 I oft" Richmond; 
 
 one in 3 fathoms water, 1.^ miles S. .{2^ W. (S. 50^ VV. mag.) from Dutliie 
 Point, the other apparently on the end of the spit running off from 
 Indian I'oiiit. 
 
 Directions. — In running for this anchorage from the eastward, 
 observe that the marks for the southwestern or outer edge of the shoid 
 off Indian Point (already mentioned as sheltering the anchorage from 
 SK. winds) ure Red Point a little open to the southward of lliack 
 Point, bearing S. 72*^ E. (8.48^ E. mag.). Keep these marks, therefore, 
 well open as the vessel runs to the westward with the lead going, and 
 go no nearer the shoal than the depth of 5 or 4 fathoms, until the churcth 
 bears N. .'33° E. (N. 57° E. mag.); then haul boldly in, steering directly 
 for the church until the vessel is at the anchorage already i>ointed out. 
 
 Bonaventure Point, 1(> miles SE. of Itlack Point, is formed by a 
 low red sandstone cliff, with a thin superstratum of sand and clay con- 
 taiuing tertiary shells. The Honaventure liiver, with only 2 feet over 
 its bar at low water, together with the village of the same name, and 
 church, with tall spire and red roof will be seen in the bay 2 or 3 miles 
 to the northward of the point. A rocky shoal extends off this point 
 to the westward fully a mile, and continues round the bay to the north-' 
 ward and westward nearly to Red Point, a distance of 7 or 8 miles. 
 
 In the bay between Red and Black Points, and T) miles NW. of the 
 former, is the small Oaplin River, remarkable only for a reef which lies 
 off its mouth ^ mile from the shore. 
 
 Anchorage. — There is good anchorage under Bonaventnre Point, 
 with easterly winds, in U fathoms, mud bottom, with the point bearing 
 S. 74° E. (8. 50° E. mag.), the church N. 27° E. (N. 51° E. nmg.), and 
 the entrancie of the river N. Gl° E. (N. 85° E. mag.), IJ miles. 
 
 Paspebiac Bay. — Carlisle Point, the west entrance point of the bay, 
 is 5 miles east of Bonaventure Point. Paspebiac has an excellent 
 roadstead, and is the principal fishing establishment iu Chaleur Bay. 
 A triangular point of sand and shingle beach, inclosing a lagoon, 
 extends out from the mainland to the distance of a mile, and has on its 
 west side several buildings, together with numerous huts belonging to 
 the fishermen. On the west side of the sandy point, and close to the 
 cliffs, the lagoon has an outlet, which has a rough bridge across it, and 
 will admit boats at high water. In rear of this the mainland rises irom 
 the edge of dark-red sandstone cliffs. 
 
 New Carlisle, the county town, with its jail and courthouse, stands 
 on the ridge in rear of Carlisle Point. Paspebiac Point is 3^ miles 
 from Carlisle Point, and the roadstead is between them, but much 
 nearer the former. In this excellent and convenient anchorage vessels 
 are sheltered from the west, round north and ea.st, to SE.; and although 
 it is completely open to the SW. winds, which send in a very consider- 
 able swell, yet the ground is so good that vessels ride here moored all 
 through the season without accident. 
 
 At Paspebiac the United States is represented by a consular agent. 
 1151 13 
 
 ^^^SU^a^^.'. 
 
 M'^ 
 
Mi 
 
 mmf^ 
 
 194 OUI-F OF 8T. LAWRENCE— WKBT COAflT. 
 
 Supplle..-At Paspobia.-, tUeie is an exeell.'ut wateiinK place at a 
 8tn.am wl.U.,1, will be neen falling from tl.e ditV. Jnst to th. wentwanl ..f 
 the cM.tlet .,f tho laKOon. Supplies of all kinds ...ay be obtamed here, 
 
 but to a limited extent. ^ks-- 
 
 Li«ht.-'ri.e liKl.tl.ouHe, 1 K) yards ..orth of the axtrcn.ity of Panpeba^ 
 Snit is white, r,4 feet hijjh, aud exhibits at a., elevation ot 50 leet a 
 nx^i 1 U 1 iht; the light should be visii 1. 1. ...iles. The lig^^t shows 
 ml over the anchorage between east (B. Oflo K. .nag.) and 8. 4oO h. 
 
 ^^'InchoxZe'-'rU^ »'«8t anchorage is in « fathoms, <day bottou., with 
 mtL tlagstatr, the most easter.. one a.ljaceut to the sto.e w th a g.ee., 
 vm nda, atd Siigle Tree Pob.t (the extre.ne to the eastward seen over 
 Z s^dv »o...t) in line, beari..g N. OOo E. (east .nag.), a,.d the extre«..ty 
 o t ; a.X ii"t, 8. '^70 K. (S. 43o E. ,nag.). A sandy spit exte..ds 
 under water rather more tha.. A mile southwestward from the sandy 
 point and ..early as far southward. 
 
 Buoy.-A red buoy is moored at thi^ western extreme of the shoal 
 extondbig southwestward from Paspebiac Spit. 
 
 Diections.-From the eastward, whe.. the vessel has passed Nou- 
 veUe Kiver and is approaching within 2 or . miles of l^-peb.ac Po^^^^^^^^ 
 keep the sunm.it of l)a..iel Hill open to the so.ithward of Nouyelle 
 Point bearb.g N.41»o E. (N. 73o E. mag.), until tho easter...no8t church 
 s ee,'. we ope., to the westward of the south extremity of the sm.dy 
 oiut ,.orth (N. 240 E. mag.). Then steer for Carlisle Po.nt, keep.ng 
 irieargol..g till Le Bonteliiers store is on with the above mentioned 
 
 ^'^ sleer i.. ..ow lor the anchorage, taki..g care not to open out the same 
 ehurch to t e westward of the store until Single Tree Point (the extreme 
 to the westward) is well shut in beh.nd the sandy point, when he ves- 
 Tel^'lbe w. h. . the spit, and a berth .nay be chosen by thelea.1, or 
 by a bearing oi the l.ghthouse, at or near the position already pointed 
 
 """ihere is nothing in the way when approaching this anchorage from 
 the westward, but ... standing out from it with a westerly wind, and 
 esueda iv witi a lee tide, the marks for clearing the spit to the west- 
 ward 1st be carefully amended to. The above «l--^^.f -^^ "ot be 
 leiied out to the eastward of Le Boutelliers store until Single Tree 
 Poi .1 is well open to the southward of the sandy point; nor should the 
 vessel belrup'to the eastward of 8. 24o E. (south mag.) before Darnel 
 Hill comes open to the southward of Nouvelle Point. . ^ , „ 
 
 NouveUe River. 5 miles eastward of Paspebiac Point, has only 2 
 fee^ovlr ts bar^t low water, and will be known by the fish stores and 
 ragelo.! the sandy beach on the east side of it« -f-- ^^^« J-^- 
 em side is formed by Nouvelle Point, which is a high chft of red sand- 
 
 ''port Daniel is a fine bay, open to the eastward and about 1^ miles 
 
 j,;,^j^3g^S,^,e»we***»rffe5W*«*»*^^ 
 
PORT DANIEI, — NEWPORT. 
 
 195 
 
 ; ])liic»i at ft 
 kvestwartl of 
 taiued liere, 
 
 if Pa8i)el)iac 
 of 50 f«ct a 
 , light sllOWH 
 lul a. 45° E. 
 
 bottom, \vith 
 with a gr<'«» 
 m\ weoii over 
 the extretiiity 
 ' spit extends 
 BUI the saudy 
 
 5 of the shoal 
 
 H passed Nou- 
 spebiac- Point, 
 d of Nouvelle 
 irninost church 
 y of the sandy 
 Point, keeping 
 )ove mentioned 
 
 )n out the same 
 
 [ut (the extreme 
 
 , when the ves- 
 
 by the lead, or 
 
 ilready pointed 
 
 mchorage from 
 terly wind, and 
 Ipit to the west- 
 should not be 
 ^il Single Tree 
 nor should the 
 r.) before Dauiel 
 
 loint, has only 2 
 le fish stores and 
 Ince. The west- 
 ^liff of red sand- 
 about Ih miles 
 
 wide, anil deep. In the northern coiner of the Iniy. >t mile witliiii White 
 Point, which is high and of white liin tone, a snuill river enters the 
 bay thnmgh a sandy beach after deHcemliuK '•* valley between wooded 
 hillH. There are ninny houses and Htores near t he entrance of the river, 
 which will only admit boats at IiiKh water, bein^ nearly dry when the 
 tide is out. 
 
 A shoal extends ^ mile from the shore all around the port from West 
 Point to White Point. West Point Is of craggy gray limestone, with a 
 high and remarkable semi-isolated rock at its 8H. extremity; on its 
 north side there is a small cove and a good landing for boats. Dauiel 
 Hill, about one mile westward of West Point, and rising 400 feet above 
 the sea, is remarkable as the highest land close to the shore on this 
 part of the coast. It serves to point out the situation of Port Daniel, 
 as does also Reddish I'oint, which often appears like an island close to 
 the shore. 
 
 The points in order westward from Mai'quereau Point, and between 
 it and the river, are Keddish Point, Pillar Point, and White Point, 
 which will all be easily recognized, the (irst and last by their color and 
 the other by a remarkable ro<'k close oti' its extremity. The ground is 
 not good ontside the line joining West and Pillar Points. 
 
 Supplies of wood and water n»ay be t)btained at Port Dauiel, but 
 fresh provisions an^ not i)lentiful. 
 
 Anchorage. — The best anchorage in Port Daniel is in or 7 fathoms, 
 mud or clay bottom, in the line between West and White Points, with 
 the entrance of the river N. 28° W. (N. 4^ W. mag.), and Reddish 
 and Macquereau Points in one, bearing N. 74° E. (S. 82° E. mag.). 
 Strong SE. winds roll in a heavy swell, but there is no difficulty in 
 getting out on their approach, for the ])oints are all bold, and in 
 standing out or in, vessels may safely pass West Point at 400 yards. 
 
 Macquereau Point, 7 miles eastward of Port Daniel, is of bohl and 
 dark-colored craggy rocks. It is also wooded, and rises to about 200 
 feet above the sea. 
 
 Light — The lighthouse on Macquereau Point is a scpiare building, 27 
 feet high, painted white, exhibiting at an elevation of 50 feet an alter- 
 nating light, showing flashes of red and white every minute, which 
 should be visible 12 miles. 
 
 Fog Signal — A hand horn answers signals from vessels. 
 
 Telegraph Station. — There is a signal and telegraph station at Mac- 
 quereau l*oint. 
 
 Newport, 6 miles north of Macquereau Point and 3i miles SSW. 
 from Great Pabos, is another fishing place, where a small vessel or two 
 may be moored (under shelter of a shoal and at some risk) to take in 
 fish during the summer months. 
 
 Light. — A fixed white light is shown from a lighthouse in the middle 
 of an island off Newport Point. The light is elevated 3(5 feet, and should 
 be visible 12 miles. The lighthouse, 27 I'eet high, is a square pyramidal 
 building, painted white, surmounted by a stjuare lantern. 
 
im 
 
 GULP OF ST. LAWRENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 I 
 
 Grand and Little Fabos are fishing places fit only for boats or 
 veiy small craft. There is but a foot of water over the bar of the latter 
 at low tide, and ordiJl?^'»i'T'ngs do not rise over 5 feet. Great Pabos, 
 ■which is a similar but much larger place, had 4 feet over its bar at low 
 water when it was surveyed, but the depth and situation of the very 
 narrow channel change with easterly gales. 
 
 Grand River, 7 miles westward of Gape d'Espoir, is a considerable 
 stream, but has only 2 feet at low water over its bar. There is a vil- 
 lage and a considerable fishing establishment there, and immediately 
 ■westward of the river a shoal extends fully i mile out from the shore. 
 
 Light. — Grand River light is txhibited from a lighthouse erected on 
 the eastern side of the entrance. The light is a fixed red light, ele- 
 vated 52 feet, and should be visible seaward and up the river 8 miles. 
 
 The lighthouse, 43 feet high, is an hexagonal building, painted white, 
 with iron lantern, painted red. 
 
 The light is intended to guide into the river as well as for a coast 
 light. 
 
 Fog Signal. — A hand horn answers signals from vessels. 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1109.) . 
 
 Cape d'Espoir, the NE. point of Ghaleur Bay, consists of red sand- 
 stone dill's, without beach, and is of moderate height. 
 
 Lignt.— The lighthouse on Gape d'Espoir, a square building 43 feet 
 high, and painted white, with a red roof, exhibits, at an elevation of 90 
 feet, a revolving white light every J minute, which should be visible 
 15 miles. 
 
 Fog Signal — A hand horn answers signals from vessels. 
 
 Telegraph Station.— There is a signal and telegraph station on Gape 
 d'Espoir, 
 
 Leander Shoal, lying SE., distant rather more than 1^ miles from 
 Gape d'Espoir, is about ^ mile in diameter, and has 16 feet least water 
 on one spot, which is very ditScult to find. It is a rocky shoal, and 
 there is a clear passage between it and the cape. White Head, in 
 line with the inner or NW. end of Perc6 Bock, leads just outside of 
 the shoal. From half to the whole of the Perc6 Bock shut in behind 
 White Head will lead clenr between the shoal and Cape d'Espoir. 
 
 Buoy. — A can buoy, painted red, is moored in 4 fathoms water in 
 the center of Gock Gove, the first beach north of Gape d'Espoir, to 
 indicate the limit of fishing nets and to prevent vessels from injuring 
 them by anchoring Inside it. 
 
 Bonaventure Island, 400 feet high, has bold and perpendicular 
 cliffs of red sandstone and conglomerate on all sides except the west. 
 These ulifTs, in some parts, attain an elevation of 250 feet above the 
 sea, and their ledges and fissures are the habitation of innumerable 
 gannets. From the west side, shoal water extends ^ mile, and there is 
 anchorage in 15 fathoms between it and White Head, but the riding is 
 
ly for boats or 
 >ar of the latter 
 Great Paboa, 
 iv its bar at low r 
 tion of the very 
 
 \ a considerable 
 There is a vil- 
 md immediately 
 from the shore. 
 lOUse erected on 
 sd red light, ele- 
 the river 8 miles. 
 ,g, painted white, 
 
 eU as for a coast 
 
 essels. 
 
 isists of red sand- 
 
 -e building 43 feet 
 an elevation of 90 
 
 should be visiblo 
 
 ressels. 
 
 ph station on Cape 
 
 lan IJ miles from 
 16 feet least water 
 a rocky shoal, and 
 White Head, in 
 ds just outside of 
 3ck shut in behind 
 ■lape d'Bspoir. 
 fathoms water in 
 Cape d'Bspoir, to 
 issels from injuring 
 
 and perpendicular 
 b» except the west. 
 I25O feet above the 
 ._ of innumerable 
 mile, and there is 
 fd, but the riding is 
 
 PERCE BAY — MAL BAY. 
 
 197 
 
 insecure and lieavy in consequence of the swell, which, in bad weather, 
 rolls round the island. The channel betM'eeu Bonaventure Island and 
 Perec Rock is about 1^ miles wide, and free from danger. 
 
 Light. — On White Head, the south extreme of Perc<'! Bay, stands a 
 lighthouse, a square building, 29 feet high, and painted white, which 
 exhibits, at an elevation of 149 feet, a fixed white light, which should 
 be visible 13 miles. 
 
 Fog Signal. — A hand horn answers signals from vessels. 
 
 Percd Rock is 288 feet high, precipitous all round, and bold to sea- 
 ward. It is narrow, and about ^ mile long, and is rendered remarkable 
 by a large hole whi<'h has been niade through it by the waves, and 
 through which a boat can pass at high water. 
 
 Perc6 Bay is comprised between this rock and White Head. Perc6 
 Reef, ^ mile SW. of Perc6 Rock, extends 800 yards from the shore. 
 Small vessels engaged in the fisheries anchor on eitlier side of this reef, 
 with winds off the land, but it is a dangerous i)lace, and not to be 
 recommended for large vessels. From White Head to Perec Rf)ck is 
 locally known as South Beach and the first small bay northwestward 
 of Perc6 Rock as North Beach. 
 
 Buoys. — A can buoy, painted black, is moored in 17 fathoms off South 
 Beach, and a can buoy, painted red, is moored in the same depth oif 
 North Beach. These buoys are intended to mark the outside limits of 
 fishing nets. Vessels, therefore, should not go or anchor inside them. 
 
 Perc6, a considerable village with a church, and a population in 1891 
 of 1,800, principally engaged in the fisheries, occupies the shores of the 
 bay, and Perce Mountain, or, as it is sometimes named. La Table Ron- 
 lante, rises immediately from it to the height of 1,230 feet above the 
 sea. This mountain is very remarkable, and can be seen at sea from a 
 distance of 40 miles. A reef connects Perc6 Rock with Perc6 Point, 
 and off the NE. side of the latter small vessels anchor with westerly 
 winds. 
 
 Tides. — There is generally a regular stream of flood and ebb, of 
 about one knot, between Bonaventure Island and the mainland, the 
 flood stream running SW. round Cape d'Bspoir and up Chjileur Bay, 
 and the ebb in the contrary direction. Two or 3 miles outside, or to 
 the eastward of Bonaventure Island, the current will often be found 
 running to the southward out of the St. Lawrence. 
 
 Mai Bay is between 5 and 6 miles wide by 4 miles deep, and entirely 
 open to the SB. On its SW. side, and under the Perc<5 Mountains, 
 there are magnificent perpendicular cliffs 660 feet above the sea. Its 
 NB. side has low cliff's of sandstone, with occasional beaches. A fine 
 broad sandy beach extends across the head of the bay and incloses a 
 shallow lagoon. A considerable river and several small streams dis- 
 charge their waters into the lagoon, which has an outlet in the NW. 
 corner of the bay called tlie Tickle, admitting boats at high water and 
 in fine weather. There is anchorage all round the shores of Mai Bay^ 
 
 
 i 
 
198 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 i 
 
 but as a heavy sea and thick fog often precede a SB. gale, and render 
 it difficult for a vessel to beat out, it can not be recommended. An 
 open cove or small bay is formed on the NE. side, in which a vessel can 
 be occasionally moored close to the shore and in 3 fathoms water; but 
 this is of no use for the general purposes of navigation. 
 
 American Bank, on which H. M. S. Northampton found a depth of 
 7J fathoms, is reported by the local fishermen to have a least depth 
 of 5 fathoms. This bank is situated with Cape Gasiw lighthouse bear- 
 ing F. 52° \V. (N. 26° W. mag.), distant 11 miles, and Cape d'Espoir 
 Lighthouse S. 54° W. (S. 80° W. mag.). 
 
 Q-asp^ Bay.— reter Point, the south point of Gasp6 Bay, is of low 
 sandstone and thickly covered with the white houses of the fishermen. 
 Flat liock, lying about 800 yards off the point, is small, low, and of 
 sandstone. There is a clear channel between the island and the point, 
 but no good anchorage; for although vessels occasionally anchor to the 
 northward of the island, yet the ground is so foul that there is great 
 danger of losing an anchor from its hooking the rocks. 
 
 The bay contains an excellent outer roadstead off Douglastown, a 
 harbor at its head, capable of holding a numerous fleet in perfect safety, 
 and a basin where large ships might be hove down and refitted. 
 
 Light— On the summit of Flat Kock stands a sqnare lighthouse, 50 
 feet high, and painted white, from which at an elevation of 77 feet is 
 exhibited a revolving red light every thirty seconds, visible 10 miles. 
 Fog Signal— A hand horn answers signals from vessels. 
 Cape G-aspd is a remarkable headland, of limestone, having on its 
 NE. side a magnificent range of cliffs, which rise from the sea to the 
 height of «)92 feet. Flowerpot Rock lies close off the SE. extremity of 
 the cape; it is alw.iys visible, the sea washing over it only at high 
 water. It is sometimes named " Ships Head," at others " Old Woman," 
 by the fishermen, and is so bold that vessels may haul round it into 
 Gaspt' Kay within the distance of J mile. Boats may pass between it 
 and the cape when there is no surf. The limestone of Cape G»sp6 dips 
 to the SW., so that the cliffs within the bay are very much lower than 
 those on the outside of the cape. 
 
 Light— On Cape Gaspc^, at an elevation of 355 feet, is exhibited a 
 revolving white light every minute, showing three flashes, with intervals 
 of fifteen seconds between their points of greatest brilliancy, followed 
 by an interval of thirty seconds, during the greater part of which the 
 light is eclipsed. The light should be visible 26 miles. The building, 
 46 feet high, is a lighthouse and dwelling combined, the square tower 
 rising from the middle of the south face of the structure, the walls of 
 which are white and the lantern red. 
 
 Fog Signal.— In thick or foggy weather, or during snowstorms, a 
 cotton powder cartridge is fired every twenty minutes. A hand horn 
 
 is in reserve. 
 
 Southwest Coast— The SW. shore of Gasp^ Bay from Peter Pomt 
 to Douglastown, a distance of 12 miles, presents a succession of pre- 
 
t 
 
 tiid render 
 ided. All 
 vessel can 
 vater; but 
 
 a depth of, 
 Bast depth 
 lonse bear- 
 le d'Espoir 
 
 jr, is of low 
 ! fishermen, 
 low, and of 
 1 the point, 
 ichor to the 
 ere is great 
 
 glastown, a 
 ifect safety, 
 itted. 
 
 jhthouse, 50 
 of 77 feet is 
 ,e 10 miles. 
 
 aviug on its 
 e sea to the 
 extremity of 
 Illy at high 
 Id Woman," 
 ound it into 
 s between it 
 J G»8p6 dips 
 1 lower than 
 
 exhibited a 
 ith intervals 
 icy, followed 
 )f which the 
 lie building, 
 iquare tower 
 
 the walls of 
 
 owstorms, a 
 A. hand horn 
 
 Peter Point 
 )Ssion of pre- 
 
 GASP^ BAY. 
 
 199 
 
 cipitous headlands, rising to the height of 200 feet above the Bei*. The 
 shoals extending out into the bay are too steep for the lead to give 
 warning. 
 
 Douglastown, with a population of 1,468 in 1891, is a village of 
 fishermen and farmers, standing on the rising ground at the south side 
 of the entrance of the St. John River. The water is deep in the outer 
 parts of the bay, being from 30 to upward of GO fathoms, over mud 
 bottom; but on approaching Douglastown the depth decreases regu- 
 larly to the anchorage. 
 
 Cape Haldimand, 2 miles northward of Douglastown, is a bluff 
 point of clitf, and the southeastern termination of the range of hills 
 which separates the harbor, basin, and Southwest Arm from the valley 
 of the St. John Biver. 
 
 Water may be obtained by ascending the St. John Biver to the 
 islands, a distance of 2 miles. In the spring of the year there is often 
 a depth of 9 feet in the entrance of this river, which is between two 
 points of sand, and there are 12 feet in the narrow channel for some 
 distance within. At the islands the river becomes shallow and rapid. 
 
 Anchorage.— The roadstead o£f Douglastown is extensive; vessels 
 may anchor in any part of it and in any depth from 6 to 11 fathoms, 
 over sand and clay bottom, but the best berth is in 7 fathoms, off the 
 entrance of the St. John Biver. The riding is much less heavy in 
 southeasterly winds than might be expected, and, as the ground is 
 excellent for holding, a vessel may safely anchor here during the 
 summer months. 
 
 Northeast Coast. — At Grande Greve, 3^ miles within Gape Gaspd, 
 the ridge of land dips and narrows, so that there is a portage across it, 
 leading to the settlements at Cape Bosier. On the NW. side of the 
 portage a range of mountains commences, and chey continue along the 
 SE, side of Gaspu Bay and Northwest Arm till they are lost to view in 
 the interior of the country. Opposite to Gaspe Basin they rise to the 
 height of 1,505 feet above the sea. 
 
 The NE. side of Gaspd Bay is thickly covered with the houses of the 
 fishermen for a distance of 5 miles within Cape Gasp^. A church has 
 been built at 2^ miles within the cape; and another stands close to the 
 sliore of a cove 2^ miles farther northward. There is anchorage with 
 good holding ground, but in not less than 17 fathoms, except within ^ 
 mile of the shore, abreast of St. George Cove, Grande Greve, and Little 
 Gaspe. The word "cove" is, however, inappropriately applied to any 
 part of the shore between Grande Greve and the cape, for though there 
 are fishing establishments, there are no coves whatever. This side is 
 bold and free from danger in every part, with the exception of Seal 
 Bock, which is the only detached danger in the bay. 
 
 Seal Rock is 6J miles within Cape Gasp^, one mile SE. by E. from 
 Cape Brul(^, and ^ mile off shore. The length of this reef between depths 
 of 3 fathoms and in a direction parallel to the shore is ^ mile, and its 
 breadth 4 toUq- The least water ou it is 4 feet, and there is a depth of 
 
200 
 
 GULF OP ST. LAWRENCE — WEST COAST. 
 
 3J fathoms between it and the shore. When on the outer edge of the 
 rocks, Cape Brul6 is in line with the next clitt'y point up the l)ay, bear- 
 ing N. 00° W. (N. 340 W. mag.), and this only mark is suflirient for the 
 safety of vessels working, for the rocks are out of the track with fair 
 winds. 
 
 (11. O. Chart 1167.) 
 
 Gasp6 Harbor.— From Cape Haldimand, Sandy Beach Point extends 
 northward and forms Gasp^ Harbor. It is a low and narrow point of 
 sand, convex to seaward, on which side the water deepens gradually 
 from high-wate" mark to the depth of 3 fathoms a distance of nearly ^ 
 mile. On the inside it is as bold as a wall. The water deepens imme- 
 diately outside of 3 fathoms all along the outside of Sandy Heacli Point, 
 and also off its north extremity, so that it is both dangerous and diflS- 
 cult to beat in or out of the harbor at night, the lead giving little or no 
 warning. 
 
 The population of Gasp(5 in 1891 was 1,460. 
 
 The United States is represented by a consul. 
 
 Llghtvessel.— Off the extiemity of Saudy Beach Point is moored a 
 lightvessel, which exhibits two lights, namely, on the foremast a fixed 
 red light, 29 feet high, and on the mainmast a fixed white light, 37 feet 
 high. The lightvessel is painted red, with the word Light-ship on 
 her sides. The red light is visible G miles and the white light 10 miles. 
 
 Fog Signal — A hand horn answers signals from vessels. 
 
 The Peninsula, nearly one mile northward of Sandy Beach Point, 
 is a low sand, covered with spruce trees. 
 
 Between the shoal water in the bay eastward of the Peninsula and 
 that which extends from the extremity of Sandy Beach Point is the 
 narrowest part of the entrance to the harbor, which is 850 yards wide 
 between depths of 3 fathoms, and has a depth of 11 fathoms in the 
 center. Within Sandy Beach Point— that is, in Gaspo Harbor— the 
 shelter is complete from all winds; the bottom is mud, and the depth 
 nowhere exceeds 11 J fathoms. » 
 
 Gaspe Basin.— The harbor is divided into the Northwest and South- 
 west Arms. The Northwest Arm has deep water for nearly 3 miles 
 above the Peninsula, and continues navigable for keeled boats about 3 
 miles farther, where the Dartmouth River enters the arm between 
 Marsh and Meadow Islands. 
 
 Southwest Arm.— The entrance of Southwest Arm is about 300 
 yards wide, and between two sandy points, but the navigable channel, 
 which is buoyed, is contracted by shoals on either side tt> about 120 
 yards; and 27 feet of water can be carried in mid channel. The deep- 
 water part of Southwest Arm, which continues for ^ mile within the 
 entrance, is named Gaspe Basin; it has a depth of from 5 to 9 fath- 
 cms, over a mud bottom, and is sufficiently capacious to hold a great 
 number of vessels. Boats can ascend Southwest Arm by a narrow 
 channel, between shoals, about 3 miles, as in Northwest Arm, and the 
 
 %Hrm 
 
idge of the 
 5 bay, bear- 
 ient for the 
 ;k with fair 
 
 )int extends 
 •ow point of 
 rt gradually 
 of nearly J 
 »pen8 irame- 
 Jeach Point, 
 us and diffl- 
 £ little or no 
 
 ; is moored a 
 
 ;mast a fixed 
 
 light, 37 feet 
 
 light-ship on 
 
 ght 10 miles. 
 
 ■I. 
 
 ieach Point, 
 
 eninsula and 
 Point is the 
 yards wide 
 ;hom8 in the 
 Harbor— the 
 nd the depth 
 
 5t and South- 
 
 arly 3 miles 
 
 ioats about 3 
 
 arm between 
 
 is about 300 
 able channel, 
 to about 120 
 The deep- 
 
 e within the 
 1 5 to 9 fath- 
 
 hold a great 
 by a narrow 
 Arm, and the 
 
 OASrK HARnOR. 
 
 navigation, for all bnt canoes or flat-bottom boats, is terminated by 
 shallow channels. Above this part of the river it becomes contracted 
 and rapid, and the wpter fresh. 
 
 A small rivnlet in the bay, on the inside of the south point of the 
 entrance of Oasp^ liasin, is the most convenient watering place in the 
 harbor. Most of the families, as well as those of Northwest Ann and 
 the harbor generally, are farmers, bnt several of them are also engaged 
 in the whale fishery, which they prosecute in small schooners. The cod 
 fishery is carried on by the people of the bay outside. 
 
 Buoys. — The following buoys are moored in Gaspe P>asin : A black 
 buoy at the extreme of GaspiS Spit; a red buoy, on ballast ground, 600 
 yards from Arnold Bluff; a red buoy at the south extreme of the shoal 
 oft" that bluff, and a red buoy to mark a sunken wharf J mile westward 
 of O'Hara Point. 
 
 These buoys are removed on the approa<;h of winter and replaced 
 in the spring of the year. 
 
 Lights. — From a scpiare lighthouse, 37 feet high, and painted white, 
 erected on O'Hara Point, the north entrance point to Southwest Arm, 
 is exhibited, at an elevation of 38 feet, a fixed red light, which should 
 be visible 7 miles. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water in Gaspd Basin, full and change, at 2h. 40m. ; 
 ordinary springs rise 5 feet and neaps 3 feet; extraordinary springs 
 rise 7 feet. There are regular but weak streams of flood and ebb in 
 the entrances of the harbor and basin. In the bay the streams of the 
 tides are so irregular that nothing certain can be said respecting them. 
 They are, however, usually almost imperceptible, excepting near the 
 shore, and even there they are so weak as to be of little or no (tonse- 
 quence to a vessel. 
 
 Ice. — The harbor is usually frozen over about December 10, the 
 entrance not until December 25, and is clear of ice about May 10, being 
 completely closed between the last two dates. The first vessel arrives 
 from sea ab<mt May 11, and the last one leaves about December 6. 
 
 Directions. — On the NE. side of Northwest Arm there is a wooded 
 point with low clay cliff', 2'^ miles above the peninsula. This point 
 appears as if it was the extreme on that side, when seen over the end 
 of the peninsula from a vessel approaching the entrance of the harbor, 
 and is named Panard Point, which, so seen, is the mark for the north- 
 ern extreme of the shoal off" Sandy Beach Point, oft" which, as before 
 remarked, a lightvessel is moored. 
 
 Keep Sandy Beach Lightvessel on a N. 54^^ W..(N. 28° W. mag.) 
 bearing iintil within one mile of the vessel, and passing close north of 
 her, steer into the harbor when the lightvessel bears S. 71° E. (S. 45° 
 E. mag.). 
 
 Caution. — The current down the St. Lawrence runs strongly past 
 Cape Oasp6 over toward Flsit Kock, especially during the ebb stream, 
 which often increases its rate to 2 knots, and this should be remembered 
 
 
 . iiMwnwMiiatrtmiirt wi ^ 
 
202 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE WEST COAST. 
 
 by vessels making Ga8p6 Bay with a uortUerly wind. This current, 
 when it meets the swell which so often prevails from the soutti and SE., 
 causes a high, short, and breaking sea all along the coast from above 
 Cape Rosier to Cape Gasp^, and extending across the entrance of Gasp^ 
 Bay. When the wind is light, a vessel becomes quite unmanageable 
 in this sea, and it is extremely dangerous to be caught in it, close to 
 the shore, by a light breeze on the land. 
 
 The soundings oif this part of the coast will prove of great use to 
 vessels running up in foggy weather. 
 
 In the prolongation of the line of Cape GaspiS, nearly, there are 
 several rocky patches frequented by the fishermen. They all lie in the 
 same direction from Flowerpot Kock, SE. The first is a small patch 
 with 8 fathoms least water, the second has 16 fathoms, and the third 
 10 fathoms. Their distances from the rock are | mile, 1 J, and 13 miles, 
 respectively. There is deep water and irregular soundings between 
 them, and the last mentioned is on the banks of soundings which have 
 been already alluded to. 
 
 Winds. — In fine summer weather there is often a sea breeze blowing 
 right up Gasp^ Bay from about 9 a. m. until sunset. At such times 
 there is generally a light land breeze at night down the arms, which 
 often extends for several miles out into the bay. In the outer part of 
 the bay, however, it will generally be found to be calm, even at times 
 when a fresh breeze is blowing outside Cape Gaspe and Peter Point. 
 The wind at sea on such occasions is generally from the SW. 
 
 
 sti»™™ 
 
Chis current, 
 utli and SE., 
 t from above 
 nee of Gasp^ 
 imanageable 
 n it, close to 
 
 great use to 
 
 ly, there are 
 all lie in the 
 i small patch 
 ind the third 
 and 13 miles, 
 ings between 
 s which have 
 
 *eeze blowing 
 Lt such times 
 I arms, which 
 outer part of 
 jven at times 
 Peter Point. 
 
 m. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 ST. LAWKENCE RIVER-SOUTH SHORE-CAPE GASPE TO GREEN ISLAND. 
 
 QUEBEC. 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1109.) 
 
 Coast— The bold and high coast between Cape Gasp^ and Cape 
 Chatte, a distance of 117 miles, will recjuire only a brief notice, as it is 
 free from danger— with the exception of Serpent Reef— and destitute 
 of harbors. The mountains everywhere approach the shore, which is 
 steep and rooky, displaying cliffs, often of great height, and without 
 beach. After heavy rains, waterfalls, which are not to be seen at other 
 times, descend from great heights, and small bays, with sandy beach 
 and rapid streams at their head, occur occasionally; yet these features 
 are not generally so strongly marked as to enable a stranger to make 
 out one part of this coast from another with facility. 
 
 Caution.— Along the coast between Cape Ga8p6 and Cape Chatte 
 the water is everywhere too deep to afford sufficient warning by the 
 lead for the safety of vessels. The shore along its whole extent, 
 excepting in some of the bays, is of highly inclined slate and gray- 
 wacke rocks, which would cut through a vessel's bottom in a very 
 short time; and such is the nature of the country that those who might 
 escape to shore would run a great risk of perishing from want before 
 they could reach a settlement. 
 
 Cape Rosier, If. by W., 6^ miles from Cape Gasp^, is low, and of 
 graywacke and slate rocks. The shoal water does not extend off it 
 above ^ mile, but in the bay, If miles southward of it, there is a reef, 
 which extends ^ mile from the shore, oft" a conspicuous church. Vessels 
 may find shelter under Cape Rosier from NW. winds, but the ground 
 is not very good, and the easterly swell that frequently rolls in renders 
 it a dangerous anchorage. There are fishing establishments on the 
 cape and in its vicinity. 
 
 Light— The lighthouse on Cape Rosier is a circular tower of white 
 stone, 112 feet high. It exhibits at an elevation of 136 feet a fixed 
 white light, which is visible 17 miles. 
 
 Pog Signal- A horn is sounded ten seconds in every minute, with an 
 Interval of fifty seconds between each blast, in thick weather or during 
 snowstorms. If the horn be out of order, a whistle is sounded at the 
 same intervals. 
 
 Signal Statioa— There is a telegraph and signal station at this 
 lighthouse. 
 
 203 
 
 nmii^i^K'S^M 
 
204 
 
 ST, LAWRENCE RIVER — SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 i^ 
 
 QrifiBn Cove and River are 6^ miles northwestward of Cape Rosier. 
 A small bay here affords shelter to the boats of the llsherraen, whose 
 housos willbe seen around it. There are from 2 to 3 fathoms water in 
 this bay, over sandy bottom. 
 
 Supplies.— This bay is of no use to shipping, except to obtain sup- 
 plies of water, wood, and occasionally fresh provisions. 
 
 Great Fox River, llj miles northwestward from Cape Rosier, is a 
 mere brook, which enters a small bay about f mile wide and i mile 
 deep. Off ea«!h point of the bay there are reefs, which diminish the 
 breadth of the entrance to less than J mile, and afford shelter to 
 boats, and to small schooners, in from 2 to 2^ fathoms, over a bottom 
 of flue dark sand. Round the head of the bay there is a line sandy 
 beach. Outside the reefs, li^hich extend only a short distance to sea- 
 ward, there are 15, 18, and 24 fathoms, over a bottom of sand and 
 broken shell, at the distance of J, ^, and one mile, respectively. 
 
 Buoy.— A buoy, painted black, is moored in 7 fathoms water in the 
 middle of the bay, off Great Fox River, to indicate anchorage ground. 
 Vessels should not go inside this buoy, as fishermen lay their nets out 
 
 to that limit. 
 
 Supplies.— In fine summer weather a vessel might anchor off Great 
 Fox River and obtain water, wood, and supplies of fresh provisions; 
 but it is otherwise of no use to shipping. This coast is now generally 
 inhabited, and the settlements are increasing in numbers. A large 
 stone church has beer, erected at Great Fox River. 
 
 Serpent Reef, the only danger on this coast, extends one mile east- 
 ward from Serpent Point, its outer extreme, in 3 fathoms, being 'i mile 
 off shore, and N. 48° W. ($1. 22° W. mag.), 3^ miles from Great Fox 
 
 River. 
 
 Buoy.— A can buoy, painted black, is moored in 6 fathoms water ott 
 this reef, and about one mile from the shore. Vessels should pass 
 northward of the buoy. 
 
 (H, O. Chart No. 1110.) 
 
 Fame Point— Light— A square lighthouse, 50 feet high, and painted 
 white, with one black horizontal band, is erected on Fame Point, about 
 11 miles westward of Great Fox River, from which is exhibited, at an 
 elevation of 200 feet, a fixed white light, varied by red flashes every 
 twenty seconds, which should be visible 20 miles. 
 
 Signal Statioa— There is a telegraph and signal station at this 
 
 lighthouse. 
 
 areat Pond (Grand fitang) is a small creek which affords shelter 
 only to boats, and will be known by the houses and stages of the fish- 
 ermen. The creek is 16 miles northwestward from Great Fox River, 
 and here, as well as in every othei- cove along this coast to the west- 
 ward, are seen the houses of the fishermen, by which the bays are so 
 distinctly marked that a ship's position in clear weather may easily be 
 determined by bearings of them, and of the beacons on the coast. 
 
Cape Hosier, 
 erraen, whose 
 lonis water in 
 
 to obtain sup- 
 
 le Rosier, is a 
 ie and i wile 
 I diminish the 
 ord shelter to 
 over a bottom 
 s a line sandy 
 istance to sea- 
 Q of sand and 
 ctively. 
 
 as water in the 
 liorage ground. 
 ■f their nets out 
 
 ttchor off Great 
 esh provisions; 
 J now generally 
 ibers. A large 
 
 s one mile east- 
 is, being ^ mile 
 •om Great Fox 
 
 bhoms water off 
 jls should pass 
 
 igh, and painted 
 Point, about 
 jxhibited, at an 
 kd flashes every 
 
 I station at this 
 
 affords shelter 
 ages of the flsh- 
 ^eat Fox River, 
 t)ast to the west- 
 
 the bays are so 
 ler may easily be 
 li the coast. 
 
 MAGDALEN RIVER MOUNT LOUIS RIVER. 
 
 205 
 
 Frigate Point is nearly midway between Fame Point and Cape 
 Magdalen. It may be recognized by » c(*ns])icuou8 waterfall west of 
 tiie point. 
 
 Magdalen River, the next place worthy of notice, is 25 miles ft-om 
 Great Pond, in a westerly direction. The mouth of tiiis river is on the 
 NW. side of a sandy bay, and close under Capo Magdalen, which is 
 rocky, with cliffs of moderate height, and juts out a very short distance 
 from a range of hills which forms the coast line. A reef of rocks, 
 which is dry in part at low water, extends froju Cape Magdalen about 
 400 yards SE., parallel to the coast, and shelters the entrance of the 
 river from northerly winds. The river is 30 yards wide at the entrance, 
 with a depth of 7 feet at low water. Within, for a short distance, there 
 are 10 feet over a clean bottom of fine sand. Farther up, the river 
 becomes shallow and rapid. At spring tides, 13 feet water can be 
 carried into this river, which is occasionally visited by schooners of 
 30 to 80 tons; they warp in when the sea is smooth and the weather 
 fine. The bay is not deep, being merely a gentle curve with a sandy 
 beach for about one mile 8E. of the river. Vessels may anchor here 
 in 7 fathoms over a bottom of sand, fine gravel, and broken shell, at % 
 mile l^om the sandy beach. The shelter is from west, round by south, 
 to east, but it is only a flne-weather anchorage, which may be of use 
 to vessels wanting wood and water, 
 
 A shoal with 3 fathoms water on it lies S. 73° E. (S. 47° £. mag.), one 
 mile nearly from Cape Magdalen and 550 yards from the nearest land. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, off Magdalen River at 
 Ih. 15m. Ordinary springs rise from 6 to 8 feet, and neaps from 3 to 4 
 feet. 
 
 On two occasions a regular alternation of the streams of flood and 
 ebb was observed. The flood extended about 1^ miles from the shore, 
 running one knot, and at the line of junction with the almost constant 
 downward current there was a strong ripple. 
 
 Cape Magdalen — ^Light.— ^On Cape Magdalen stands a lighthouse, 
 an hexagonal wooden building, 54 feet high, painted white, with one 
 vertical black stripe, which exhibits, at an elevation ot 147 feet, an 
 alternating light showing red and white alternately at intervals of two 
 minutes. The red light is visible 15 miles, and the white 20 miles. 
 
 Fog SignaL— During thick weather or in snowstorms a steam whis- 
 tle will give blasts of eight seconds' duration, with intervals of twenty- 
 two seconds between the blasts. 
 
 Signal Station. — There is a telegraph and signal station at this 
 lighthouse. 
 
 Pleureuse Point is 12 miles westward of Cape Magdalen. 
 
 Mount Louis River, 4 miles westward of Pleureuse Point, is a 
 much smaller stream than Magdalen River, being 20 yards wide at the 
 entrance, and capable only of admitting a small boat at low water. 
 There are 7 feet in the entrance at high water, and for a short distance 
 within. 
 
 , !^mmtxiSiJ^i»MmsiS>iiiiiii*iii'«'^»ie.', 
 
i:f- 
 
 206 
 
 HT. LAWRENCE HIVER — SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 Till' siiiiill bay, with c siuxly Itt'iich at its IumkI, into which this river 
 rtows, \h oil*' mile wide, iiiul iii'iuly "^ mile deep. Vessels iimy anchor 
 ill it duriufj Hue weather, in from H to H\ fnthoins, mud bottom, nearer 
 the west than the east side. Tlie holding ground ih excellent; but 
 8in<!e a vessel ought not to be more than GOO yards from the west side 
 of the bay, there is not much room to work out, and therefore it would 
 be dangerous for a vessel to be caught there by a wind on the land. 
 Small veasels, having occasion to stop for a few hours for wood or 
 water, nniy safely anchor there in line weather, and will find shelter iu 
 southerly winds. 
 
 .Mount Louis Kiver may be thus recognized. In a vessel off this 
 part of the coast, four well-marked openings will be seen in the high 
 land iu a space of 10 miles. The easternmost opening is Grande Matte 
 or IMenreuse Kiver, the next westward is Mount Louis Kiver, and the 
 two others Pierre and Claude Rivers; none of them afford good anchor- 
 age excepting Mount Louis. 
 
 Martin River— Light— At the entrance of Martin Kiver stands » 
 lighthouse, a square building, 54 feet high, painted white, with two 
 black horizontal bands, and attached to the keeper's dwelling. From 
 the lighthouse is exhibited, at an elevation of 125 feet, a fixed white 
 light, which should be visible 17 miles. 
 
 Si^al Station.— There is a telegraph and signal station at this light- 
 bouse. 
 
 St An"** Mountains. — Westward of Cape St. Anne rhe mountains 
 begin to recede a little from the shore and to diminish in height. There 
 is, however, another range of mountains in the rear of the coast, named 
 St. Anne or Shickshoc Mountains, which can be seen from 80 or 90 
 miles, under favorable circumstances; and their highest peak, which is 
 about 14 miles behind Cape Chatte, rises 3,973 feet above the sea. 
 
 St Anne River, 4.J miles westward of the high cape of the same 
 name and 1(» miles eastward of Cape Chatte, can be entered by small 
 schooners at high water. The entrance is difficult to a stranger. A 
 large rock above water divides it into two very narrow channels, 
 through which a rai)id current almost always runs. It flows into the 
 sea through the sandy beach o{ a bay which affords very indifferent 
 anchorage, the depth of water being too great, excepting at a less dis- 
 tance from the shore than would be considered prudent for any but 
 small vessels. 
 
 Supplies of provisions can in general be obtained, and also at Chatte 
 Kiver. 
 
 Chatte River, 2J miles eastward of Cape Chatte, enters between 
 large bowlders a small sandy bay, affording no anchorage for large 
 vessels, and admits small schooners with difficulty at high water. The 
 east point of this bay, 2 miles eastward of the river, is a low spit with 
 a reef off" it ^ mile. Small coasting schooners occasionally anchor 
 under it in westerly winds. 
 
 a«aCTWWW«wwi)itai«sMi»r«aiai>«>aa*^ 
 
CAPE CHATTR — MATANR RIVEIl. 
 
 207 
 
 [ch this liver 
 ^ nuiy anclior 
 )ttoin, nearer 
 xtelleut; but. 
 the west side 
 (fore it would 
 
 on the land. 
 
 for woiid or 
 lud sHelter iu 
 
 ressel off this 
 n in the high 
 Grande Matte 
 lliver, and the 
 1 good anchor- 
 liver stands » 
 hite, with two 
 irelling. From 
 ;, a fixed white 
 
 on at this light- 
 
 riie ifloun tains 
 height. There 
 e coast, named 
 from 80 or 90 
 peak, which is 
 B the sea. 
 )e of the same 
 tered by small 
 
 stranger. A 
 rrow channels, 
 
 Hows into the 
 irery indiflerent 
 ig at a less dis- 
 >nt for any but 
 
 1 also at Ghatte 
 
 snters between 
 jrage for large 
 gh water. The 
 a low spit with 
 ioiially anchor 
 
 Cape Chatt>^, when seen from the eastward or westward, so that it 
 appears tvs the extreme point, can easily bedistiii^iiisliedflteinga round 
 hill separated from, hut of less height than, tiie land heliinil it. 
 
 Light. — On the NK. extremity of ('a|teChatte is a sijiiare li^ihtliouse, 
 ',V2 feet high, and painted white, with two l»la«;k vertieal stripes, which 
 exhibits at 120 feet above high water a revolving white light every 
 h/ilf minute. Tlie light should be visible IH miles. 
 
 Pog Signal. — A cotton powder cartridge will be explo<led every 
 twenty minutes from a position .'{5 yards eastward of Cape Ghatte 
 lighthouse during fogs and snowstorms. 
 
 Signal Station. — There is a telegraph and signal station at this light- 
 house. 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1111.) 
 
 Coast — The coast from Gape Ghatte to Matane is straight, bold, and 
 of the same rocks as that which has been Just described. Although 
 not a high coast, it is still of considerable elevation above the sea, and 
 St. Anne Mountains continue iu the rear of it, at a distance of about 15 
 miles, to their southwestern termination, which is l.j miles south of Gape 
 Balance, the last being 25 miles southwestward of Gape Ghatte. Sev- 
 eral detached hills will be seen farther westward, which are also at a 
 considerable distance from the coast. Two of these have been named 
 the Papu of Matane, though they can with difficulty be made out when 
 bearing S. 20° W. (S. 43° W. mag.). On any other bearing it is still 
 less easy to distinguish them, but they are of no use except to enable 
 a vessel, obtaining a sight of land, to judge how far she is up the 
 estuary. 
 
 Capuchin Cove and another cove on the west side of Gape Michanx 
 attbrd shelter to boats. There are .settlements at Little Matane, a small 
 stream 3 miles eastward of the Matane Eiver. 
 
 Matane River. — The entrance to this stream is 33 miles southwest- 
 ward from Oape Ghatte. The river is reported to have its source iu a 
 lake of considerable dimensions, distant about (iO miles, following the 
 stream, inland. The depth over the bar is usually 4 feet at low-water 
 and 15 feet at high- water springs. The rise of the tides is, however, very 
 irreguliu:, and although there is often 12 feet at high-water neaps, yet 
 there has b6en as little as 10 feet. The depth of water seems to depend 
 so much upon the winds which prevail in the estuary tliat it is iiux)OS- 
 sible to calculate it at any time exactly. Kasterly winds were ob.served 
 to cause high tides, and westerly winds the contrary. The channel is 
 very narrow, and there are several large bowlders iu it, lying on the 
 sand, which diminish the depth 2 feet, and are extremely dangerous 
 when there is any swell. The bar is continually shifting from the 
 efiects of gales of wind, so that no directions can be given for sailing in. 
 
 Pilots. — There are pilots residing here, and no vessel should attempt 
 the entrance without one. 
 
 Buoys. — A can buoy, painted black, is moored in 7 fathoms water 
 
 .,.<St#JM>a!JMS$^<i£!^^S^'>''^^^i^''^~'i^''''^ 
 
■MRMM 
 
 mmm^imm 
 
 mm 
 
 2()H 
 
 8T LAWRENCE RIVEU — SOUTH HHOUE. 
 
 oJV tlio biuik lit Mivt-.io Uivor, at about '^ mile from the Hhore. There 
 are also two huuiH <aii buoyw to mark the entrauce to the river which 
 are Hhiftetl with the «haiiKea iii the sand bankH. 
 
 Bar.— The bar, when it was surveyed, extended in a circular form 
 from the east entrance point, and was met so nearly by another point 
 of sand, extending from the sumll isolated cliff on the west entrance 
 point, as to leave onlv a very narntw channel. The bar dried at low 
 water, and no part of it extended more than «00 yards outside the 
 entrance of the river. Inside the bar the entrauce, between two sandy 
 points, is not more than (JO yards wide, and a rapid current runs out 
 during the ebb tide. There is not room enough for a vessel to lie safely 
 atioat inside, but, nevertheless, considered as a tidal harbor, it is a useful 
 place to coasting schooners, which ground at half tide on a good bot- 
 tom of mud and stone. To a vessel which has lost her anchors, or 
 which has received injury, this river will afford a place of refuge in 
 which she can be safely repaired and refitted. The sandy beach 
 extends about 4 mile eastward of the entrance, and incloses a large 
 space dry at low water, with the exception of tlie narrow and rapid 
 channel of the river, which is full of stones. The tide ascends about one 
 mile to a rapid over a ledge of rocks, above which the stream is swift, 
 shallow, and navigable for canoes, to the lake above mentioned. Land- 
 ing at this river in bad weather in a boat is very dangerous at low 
 water, in conseciuence of the heavy surf on the sand banks at the 
 entrance. 
 
 Lights.— A lighthouse, 39 feet high, at the entrance of Matane Kiver 
 exhibits, at an elevation of GG feet, a fixed white light, which should be 
 visible 14 miles. The lighthouse is a square building, painted white, 
 with a black cross, and with keeper's dwelling attached. 
 
 A fixed white light is also shown from a mast 20 feet high erected on 
 a wharf at the west entrance point of Matane Eiver at an elevation of 
 30 feet J it should be visible 7 miles. 
 
 Signal Station.— There is a telegraph and signal station at this 
 lighthouse. 
 
 Supplies of provisions can usually be obtained at Matane Kiver, 
 which will be easily made out from a vessel, since the entrance shows 
 plainly. The lighthouse on the west side of the entrance and the build- 
 ings and large stone church will also serve to point it out. 
 
 Matane is the name of the seigniory which contained 2,025 inhabit- 
 ants in 1891. The soil is good, and gives good crops of wheat and other 
 
 grain. 
 
 Anchorage.— Outside the bar there is anchorage in 5 fathoms ^ mile 
 off shore, and in 10 fathoms a little farther out, the bottom being of sand 
 and clay. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, in Matane Eiver at 2h. 
 15m.; ordinary springs rise 11 feet, and neaps 7 feet. 
 
 Little Metis Bay, 22 miles southwestward from Matane, is small. 
 
LITTI.K AND ORAND METIS BAYS. 
 
 209 
 
 ore. There 
 liver which 
 
 ircular form 
 iiother point 
 dst entraufM 
 hied at h)W 
 
 outsido the 
 ill two Handy 
 ent runs out 
 1 to lie safely 
 , it is a useful 
 1 a good bot- 
 i- anchors, or 
 
 of refuge in 
 
 sandy beach 
 iloses a large 
 )w and rapid 
 nds about one 
 ;reani is swift, 
 ioned. Land- 
 gerous at low 
 
 banks at the 
 
 Matane liiver 
 
 iiich should be 
 
 ainted white, 
 
 igh erected on 
 tu elevation of 
 
 itatiou at this 
 
 Hatane Ittver, 
 Intrance shows 
 
 and the build- 
 It. 
 
 2,025 inhabit- 
 Iheat and other 
 
 I fathoms i mile 
 I being of sand 
 
 Kiver at 2h. 
 
 itane, is small. 
 
 and divided into two rocky <;oveH, which are open to tlie eastward, and 
 dry at low water. Tln> coast from Matane to Metis is low, rocky, 
 wooded, unbroken, and my be approached with euro by the lead, the 
 bank of soundings becoming gradually wider to the westward. 
 
 Little Metis Uiviu', a small stream, is at the head of the southern 
 cove. There are several buildings and a llshing establishment on 
 Metis Point, the outer extreme of the bay. A reef, which is bohl on 
 the north side, and has some of its rocks always above water, extends 
 from this point nearly ^ mile eastward, and "uables small vessels to 
 remain at anchor, in :< fathoms, over mud bitttou), with the wind as far 
 northward as NW. In this berth vesse'.s lie midway between the 
 eastern end of the reef and a large Itound liock near the shore on the 
 SE. side of the bay. Larger vessels may anchor farther out in '> or ({ 
 fathoms water, but not in the stream of the reef, where the ground is 
 foul and rocky. 
 
 The east end of the reef may be passed by the lead in 4 fathoms, or 
 with Kound Kock bearing H. <»7° K. (S. 4'>° E. mag.), but vessels of 
 large draft had better not bring it to bear eastward of S. 46° E. (S. 23° 
 K. mag.). This rock, which lies about lA miles east (H. 68° E. mag.) 
 from the reef ott' the outer point of the bay, will serve to point out 
 Little Metis to a stranger. It can not be mistaken for Grand Metis 
 with the charts, since there is no resemblance in the shapes of the 
 bays. Neither place can be easily made out from a greater distance 
 than 6 or (» miles, because the points are very low. 
 
 Metis Point — Light — On Metis Point stands a square lighthouse, 
 40 feet high, and painted white, with red roof, which exhibits, at iwi 
 elevation of 50 feet, an alternating light showing red and white alter- 
 nately every minute, which should be visible 13 miles. The keeper's 
 dwelling is attached to the lighthouse. 
 
 Signal Station. — There is a telegraph ' and signal station at this 
 lightboase. 
 
 Grand Metis Bay is separated from Little Metis Bay by Metis 
 Point. Grand Metis Biver, a small stream 5 miles southwestward of 
 Little Metis, is near the west end of the bay, and is nearly dry outside 
 of the very narrow entrance at low water. The bay is rather more 
 than 3 miles wide, and | mile deep; but it is all shoal. Small vessels 
 may anchor in 3^ or 4 fathoms, under its east point, close to iae edge 
 of the shoal water, and in tolerable shelter from winds along the ^oast, 
 but there is no shelter for shipping. Nevertheless, vessels lie here all 
 the summer months for the purpose of taking in timber. They are 
 usually moored in 6 fathoms, at low water, over mud bottom, and with 
 the river bearing about south (S. 22° W. mag.) 1^ miles. In this posi- 
 tion they are ^ mile from the 3-fathom edge of the shoal water which 
 extends from the shore, and as they are outside of the line joining the 
 points of the bay, they are exposed to the prevailing winds along the 
 coast, and must ride very heavily at times. There is, however, seldom 
 1161 14 
 
 1./- 
 
 
 ' wj'VitNtsyifWfftfT'ftf^t^*"'"^**^*^''*— ^' ' 
 
vpn 
 
 mmm 
 
 MPPi 
 
 210 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER — SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 i'! 
 
 much sea with these wiuds so close in shore, and the northerly winds 
 seldom blow strong until September. This is a dangerous anchornge 
 after the commencement of that month, but at other times, and iu fine 
 weather, vessels may safely anchor anywhere off the bay in from 6 to 
 12 fathoms, the bottom being everywhere good, and plenty of room to 
 get under way. 
 
 Cock Cove affords good anchorage for schooners, in 3 fathoms at 
 low water, well sheltered from the winds along the coast. The summit 
 of Mount Oamille bears from the west entrance point of Cock Cove 
 S. 48° E. (S. 26° E. mag.) 8 miles, and will serve to point out its posi- 
 tion to a stranger. 
 
 Buoy. — A can buoy, painted black, is moored in 6 fathoms water at 
 the etlge of the shoal off Cock Point. 
 
 Anchorage. — Vessels of large draft may anchor, in fine weather, all 
 along the coast from Grand Metis Bay to Green Island. 
 
 Father Point, 13 miles from the west entrance point of Grand Metis 
 Bay, is low, and covered with houses. There is a considerable village 
 named St. Anne de la Points au P^re, with a fine church, about ^ mile 
 southeastward of Father Point. 
 
 Light. — A square light tower, 52 feet high, and painted white, with 
 one black horizontal band, is erected on the extremity of Father Point. 
 It exhibits, at an elevation of 48 feet, a revolving white light every 
 twenty seconds, which is visible 12 miles. 
 
 Fog Signal. — In thick weather, or during snowstorms, a cotton pow- 
 der cartridge will be fired every twenty minutes, and a gun will be fired 
 in answer to signals for a pilot. 
 
 Signal Station. — There is a telegraph and signal station at this 
 lighthouse. 
 
 Ice. — The river has never been known to freeze over at Father Point. 
 Drifting field ice usually arrives about December 9, and disappears 
 about April 2; there is rarely any heavy ice until the end of Decem- 
 ber, and always a channel of open water, either on the north or the 
 south side of the river, according to the prevailing wind, a light air of 
 6 or 7 miles velocity being strong enough to drive the ice to mid-chan- 
 nel. The river is often clear of ice for a month at a time in winter, and 
 is partly clear for about half that season. There is less ice than usual 
 at Father Point whenever the " ice bridge " forms at Quebec. The first 
 vessel arrives at Father Point from sea al/out April 24, and the last one 
 leaves about November 28. 
 
 Rimouski Road. — The eastern point of Barnaby Island is nearly 3^ 
 miles SW. from Father Point, and between them is the anchorage or 
 road of Rimouski, where vessels ride throughout the summer to take iu 
 cargoes of lumber. They lie moored iu 4 or 5 fathoms at low water, with 
 excellent holding ground, and sheltered from W. by S., round by south, 
 to ENE. The best-sheltered berth is with the pier bearing S. 22° E. 
 (south mag.), in 4 fathoms at low-water spring tidss, over mud bottom. 
 
RIMOUSKI. 
 
 lortberly winds 
 rous anchorage 
 nea, and in fine 
 lay in from 6 to 
 enty of room to 
 
 in 3 fatboms at 
 it. The summit 
 it of Cock Cove 
 lint out its posi- 
 
 t'athoms water at 
 
 ■ 
 
 fine weather, all 
 
 d. 
 
 it of Grand Metis 
 isiderable village 
 ircb, about i mile 
 
 binted white, with 
 y of Father Point, 
 white light every 
 
 ms, a cotton pow- 
 a gun will be fired 
 
 al station at this 
 
 ir at Father Point. 
 J, and disappears 
 ;he end of Decem- 
 the north or the 
 ;ind, a light air of 
 le ice to mid-chau- 
 jme in winter, and 
 less ice than usual 
 iQuebec. The first 
 14, and the last one 
 
 I Island is nearly 34 
 is the anchorage or 
 I summer to take in 
 , at low water, with 
 5., round by south, 
 . bearing S. 22o E. 
 , over mud bottom. 
 
 Small vessels can anchor farther westward in 3 fathoms at low water, 
 with the east end of the rocks, oft' the eastern point of Barnaby Island, 
 bearing N. 80° W. (N. 58° W. mag.) I mile. Tlie reef does not extend 
 above J mile off the eastern point of Barnaby Island, and may be 
 passed by the lead in 4 fathoms. A landing pier has been built at 
 Rimouski, 2,150 feet long, and having at its end a depth of 8^ feet at 
 low-water springs. 
 
 Rimouski — The European mails are landed and shipped at Kimou- 
 nki, special trains running with them to and from Quebec and Halifax 
 by the Intercolonial Railway. Both mails and passengers are trans- 
 Siiipped by a steam tender, the mail steamer stopping about 2 miles 
 from the pier. The anchorage off Rimouski is not good. 
 
 CoaL — Only sufficient coal for the supply of the tender to the mail 
 steamer is kept at Rimouski, but at St. Flavie, distant 18 miles north- 
 eastward on the Intercolonial Railway, a supply of about 1,600 tons is 
 kept in stock for the use of the railway. 
 
 Railway and Telograph. — From Rimouski to Quebec the various 
 villages are connected with Quebec and Halifax by the Intercolonial 
 Railway, which runs along the right bank of the St. Lawrence at the 
 average distance of one mile inland from the villages. There is also 
 telegraphic communication with all existing lines either from the rail- 
 way stations or from t>ft>i;es in the villages. From Rimouski eastward 
 the Intercolonial Railway recedes from the coast, running through the 
 valley of Metapedia River to Campbellton, at the head of Ghaleur Bay. 
 
 Barnaby Island is 3^ miles long and very narrow. It is low, par- 
 tially wooded, and inhabited, and is composed of slate and graywacke 
 rocks, like all the coast and islands on this side of the estuary. In the 
 interior of the island there is a long pond of fresh, but not good, water, 
 which last mnst be obtained from Rimouski River. 
 
 The channel between the island and Rimouski is dry at low water. 
 There is a depth of 7 to 12 feet through it at high watery according as 
 it is neap or spring tide, but at no time should a vessel drawing more 
 than 8 feet attempt this passage, since there are rocks and large stones 
 here and there, and also fish stakes. 
 
 The church of Rimouski, the college and convent, eastward of the 
 river, and many houses, will be seen directly opposite the island. 
 
 Off the outside of Barnaby Island there is a shoal with 3 fathoms 
 water over it, extending out fully § mile, and the reef off" its western 
 end runs out in the direction of the island more than | mile. Between 
 the western end of the island and the mainland there is a large high 
 and bare rock, which is distant from the island about § mile. 
 
 Barnaby Road. — Midway between the SW. points of Barnaby 
 Island and Bare Rock there are 2 fathoms at low water, over muddy 
 bottom, in Barnaby Road, which affords good anchorage to small vessels 
 in all but westerly winds. Rimouski church in line with the eastern 
 end of the roclt will lead over the tail of the reef off the west end of 
 Barnaby Island, and into this anchorage. 
 
212 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE BIVEB — SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 Old Bic Harbor, 7J miles soiithwestward of Baniaby Island, dries 
 at low water, and has" many rocks in it. Two round and high rocky 
 islets, named Bicoques, will be seen extending westwai-d of its east 
 point, and diminishing the breadth of the entrance to § mile. 
 
 Midway between these rocky islets and the west point of the harbor, 
 small vessels may anchor in Old Bic Uoad in 3 fathoms at low water, 
 with muddy bottom, and with the point bearing S. 70° VV. (N. 89° 
 W. mag.), distant i mile. To run into this anchorage from the NW., 
 keep the western of the two rocky islets its own breadth open eastward 
 of the west point of the harbor, and this will clear the eastern rock of 
 Arignole Reef, which is the only danger in the way. 
 
 Arignole Reef, one mile westward from Old Bic Harbor, is composed 
 of two rocks lying across the mouth of the shallow Arignole Bay. The 
 western rock is i mile long and very narrow; its west end is always 
 above water, and is only i mile from the rocks on the eastern side of 
 the cape. The eastern rock is small, covered at high tides, and i mile 
 from the other rock. There are 5 or 6 fathoms water between these 
 rocks, which are bold to the northward, and vessels might pass between 
 them and the mainland by keeping close to them, were it ever necessary 
 to try so dan}i:erous a passage. 
 
 Cape Arignole is 10 miles southwestward from Barnaby Island, and 
 the summit of the high land of Bic, 1,230 feet above the sea at high 
 water, lies S. 29° W. (8. 4«o W. mag.) 2^ miles from the JTW. extremity 
 
 of the cape. 
 
 Ba-Ha Bay, on the 8W. side of Cape Arignole, aftords excellent 
 anchorage, in easterly winds off its entrance, in 4 fathoms at low wat«r, 
 and farther in for small vessels in 3 fathoms; but it is sMom used, 
 because the equally safe and more roomy anchorage undef Bic Island 
 is justly preferred. 
 
 Bic Island lies directly off Cape Arignole, at the distance of nearly 
 24 miles, and is about 3 miles long, without including the reefs, in a 
 direction parallel to the coast and a mile broad. Its shores are of slate 
 rociks; it is thickly wooded and uninhabited. It is about 150 feet high. 
 
 Beacons.— On the SW. end of Bic Island are three wooden beacons 
 painted white. The beacon in the form of a sugar loaf and the western 
 beacon in the form of a reversed cross, in line, lead westward of North- 
 west Reef, and the cross beacon in line with the diamond-shaped beacon 
 lead on to Alcide Rock. 
 
 Water.— Supplies of water can only be obtained fi-om the bay 
 between the east and SE. points of Bic Island, and not always there in 
 dry seasons; and from a stream on the west side of a small bay of the 
 mainland, 4 miles westward of Cape Arignole. 
 
 Bicqnette Island, lying ^ mile northward of Bic, is i mile lonp, i 
 mile broad, and about 100 feet high above the sea. 
 
 Light— The lighthouse, near the center of Bicquette Island, is a cir- 
 cular, white, stone tower, 74 feet high, from which, at an* elevation of 109 
 
Island, dries 
 I high rocky 
 d of its east 
 lile. 
 
 f the harbor, 
 at low water, 
 o W. (N. 89° 
 om theNW., 
 pen eastward 
 istern rock of 
 
 ", is composed 
 )leBay. The 
 snd is always 
 astern side of 
 BS, and k mile 
 )etweeu these 
 pass between 
 iver necessary 
 
 l)y Island, and 
 le sea at high 
 rW. extremity 
 
 jrds excellent 
 
 ; at low water, 
 
 sildom used, 
 
 derBic Island 
 
 ance of nearly 
 the reefs, in a 
 res are of slate 
 b 150 feet high, 
 ooden beacons 
 ad the western 
 ward of North- 
 shaped beacon 
 
 fi^om the bay 
 ilways there In 
 nail bay of the 
 
 ^ mile lonf?, ^ 
 
 Island, is a cir- 
 alevation of 109 
 
 BICQUETTE CHANNEL. 
 
 213 
 
 feet, is exhibited a white light which revolves every forty-flve seconds 
 and IS visible 17 miles. ' 
 
 Fog SignaL— A steam horn, 17 yards northward of the lighthouse 
 gives blasts of ten seconds' duration, with intervals of fifty seconds 
 between the blasts, during fogs and snowstorms. If the horn be out ot 
 order » similar signal will be given from a building 33 yards eastwar.l 
 ot the lighthouse. 
 
 Northwest Reef— Several large rocks above water extend ^ mile 
 east and SE. of Bicquette Island, and diminish the breadth of the 
 channel between it and Bic Island to little more than ^ mile. Oft' the 
 SW. end of Bicquette Island, in a SW. direction, there are two large 
 rocks always above water, and a third which covers at high water- 
 these he nearly in a line, and extend to the distance of one mile froin 
 the island. 
 
 Northwest Reef of Bicquette Island is the greatest danger, lying U 
 miles from the west end of the island. In approaching the reef from 
 the westward, the north extremity of Cape Arignole should not be shut 
 in behind the SW. point of Bic Island. The beacons on Bic Island in 
 line also lead clear. 
 
 This reef is composed of two rocks about 300 yards long, and which 
 just cover at high waterj both it and Bicquette Island are bold to the 
 northward. There is deep water all along the line from the north side of 
 Bicquette Island to this reef, and also between the latter and the rocks 
 to the SE. of It, but these are dangerous passages, which ought not to 
 be generally tried, though it is useful to know of their existence in case 
 ot emergency. 
 
 Bicquette ChanneL— There are no leading marks for running 
 through, but It may easily be done with the assistance of the charts in 
 case of necessity. The southwestern reef off Bicquette Island is most 
 m the way, and there are also two small round rocks on the Bic Island 
 side, 400 yards off shore, and bearing nearly S. 21o B. (south mag.) from 
 the west end of Bicquette Island. 
 
 To avoid the first of these dangers, do not bring the south extremity 
 
 V rio T^ f **** ®^- ^'^* ""^^ Bicquette Island to bear eastward of 
 N. 60° E. (N. 710 E. mag.); and if the north side of Bic Island, near 
 Its east end, is not brought to bear northward of N. 65° E (N 86° E 
 mag.), the second will be cleared, which, however, always shows, except- 
 ing in very high tides. These directions are, however, insufficient with- 
 out the chart, which must be carefully consulted, for this is an intricate 
 and dangerous place. The best time to run through is at low water, 
 when all the dangers show, and a vessel, keeping in mid-channel 
 between them, will have from 9 J to 6 fathoms, with irregular soundings 
 and foul ground occasionally. 
 
 Southeast Reef extends from the SE. point of Bic Island nearly 
 1| miles, in an easterly direction. The outer part of this reef is formed 
 of three rocks lying in a straight line, and always above water. The 
 
214 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER — SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 1 1 ■ 
 
 r 
 
 two easternmost are the largest, and are nearly joined together, whilst 
 the westernmost of the three is deta<lied, so as to leave a channel 
 through the reef 300 yards wide, with a depth of 5 fathoms water. 
 
 Vessels of large draft should not attempt to pass between the'se 
 rocks, or between them and Bic Island, for the tidal streams are rendered 
 irregular by the uneven bottom, and there is much foul ground about. 
 Small schooners can pass on either side of the westernmost rock, keep- 
 ing close to it, if they pass to the westward. The shoal water does not 
 extend beyond 200 yards from the east end of Southeast Reef; the 
 rocks above water are bold, both on their north and south sides. The 
 inner part of the reef, extending under water from the SE. imnt of 
 Bic Island, reaches farther southward than the direction of the rocks, 
 and must be avoided by not bringing the south side of Bic Island to 
 bear southward of S. 60° W. (S. 81° W. mag.). 
 
 Northeast Reef is a small patch of black rocks, which shows at 
 low water, lying N. 34° E. (N. 050 E. mag.) 800 yards firom the NE. 
 point of Bic Island. To pass eastward of this reef, keep both the rocky 
 islets on the east side of Old Bic Harbor open eastward of Southeast 
 Reef, bearing nothing eastward of S. 49° E. (S. 28° E. mag.). 
 
 TVest Grounds of Bic are an extensive flat of slate, which partly 
 dries at low water. The outer point of these ground^, in 3 fathoms, 
 lies nearly f mile S. 64° W. (S. 85° W. mag.) from the 8W. point of the 
 island, and they may be approached by the lead, as nearly as the depth 
 of 6 fathoms, at low water. 
 
 Alcide Rock, lying S. 25° W. (8. 46° W. mag.) nearly 3$ miles tirom 
 the SW. point of Bic Island, has no connection with that island; but as 
 it is extremely dangerous, and lies much in the way of vessels passing 
 through Bic Channel, it is noted here. It is a small rock, about 6 feet 
 long and 2 feet wide, with 4 feet on it at low water. It rises from a 
 small rocky shoal 200 yards long, parallel to the coast, and about half 
 as wide, which is so Iwld all around that there is no warning whatever 
 by the lead. From the NW. extremity of Cape Arignole the rock bears 
 S. 64° W. (S. 85° W. mag.) 5 miles; and it is rather more than I5 miles 
 from the shore to the southward. Two of the white beacons on Bic 
 Island— one in the form of a reversed cross and the other in a diamond 
 form— in line, lead directly on Alcide Rock; and the two white beacons 
 on the south shore of the river, about 6 miles westward of Cape Arig- 
 nole — one of which is of a diamond shape and the other of a sugar 
 loaf— in line, also lead on the rock. These beacons, therefore, should 
 be kept open of each other. Vessels will be in no danger from it if 
 Mount Camille be not entirely shut in behind Cape Arignole. 
 
 Buoy.— A can buoy checkered black and white is moored in 9 fathoms 
 
 close northward of Alcide Rock with the beacons on the south shore in 
 
 line and the white diamond-shaped beacon at the west extreme of Bic 
 
 Island just open north of the beacon in the form of a reversed cross. 
 
 Anchorage.— There is excellent anchorage under either end of Bio 
 

 TIDES. 
 
 215 
 
 n 
 
 sther, \vhil8t 
 e a channel 
 } water, 
 tween theiSe 
 iire rendered 
 ound about, 
 t rock, keep- 
 kter does not 
 it Keef; the 
 sides. The 
 3E. iM>int of 
 )f the rocks, 
 iic Island to 
 
 ch shows at 
 •om the NE. 
 )th the rocky 
 of Southeast 
 
 nrhich partly 
 a 3 fathoms, 
 , point of the 
 as the depth 
 
 )f miles from 
 }land; but as 
 ssels passing 
 , about 6 feet 
 ) rises firom a 
 id about half 
 ing whatever 
 he rock bears 
 than If miles 
 jacons on Bic 
 in a diamond 
 rhite beacons 
 »f Cape Arig- 
 er of a sugar 
 refore, should 
 ;er from it if 
 lole. 
 
 d in 9 fathoms 
 jouth shore in 
 Ktreme of Bic 
 ersed cross, 
 ler end of Bio 
 
 Island, and also between it and the mainland, according to the wind; 
 and vessels which may be met by an easterly wind Iiad better anchor 
 than attempt to beat down the estuary in the long and foggy nights of 
 the fall of the year. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at Bic Island at L>h. loin.; 
 ordinary springs rise 14 feet, and neaps 8.^ feet. The tide dows 5h. 
 50ni., and ebbs 6h. .'Um. 
 
 Westward of Bic Island the first of the Hood comes from the NE., 
 but there is but little stream of flood in neap tides between Bic Island 
 and the south shore of thp river, excepting close to the latter. In 
 spring tides it runs through the channel at the average rate of 1^ knots, 
 being strongest near the mainland. It also runs between Bic and 
 Bicquette Islands, but the stream extends only a very short distance 
 outside the latter island. 
 
 The stream of flood continues its course close along the mainland, 
 passing inside, and also very close outside, of Bazade, Basque, and 
 Apple Islands, but nowherr extending a sufficient distance oft' shore to 
 be of use to ships beating to the westward much below (Jreen Island. 
 That part of the stream of flood which passes farther out toward Bic 
 Island, and also that which passes between Bic and Bicquette Islands, 
 runs at its fnll rate only until at half flood, after which it becomes 
 gradually weaker, turning to the NW., round the west end of the 
 island, and finally to the north and NE. toward the end of the tide. 
 
 The stream of flood becomes weaker and of less duration as you pro- 
 ceed to the westward of the islands. Halfway between Bic and the 
 Bazade Islets there is slack water for about an hour at the end of the 
 ebb, after which a weak flood makes during the first quarter of that tide 
 at the rate of i knot; and this is succeeded by the eddy flood at tlie 
 rate of 1^ knots, or 2^ at the edge of the bank of soundings, which 
 comes from the westward, running in the same direction as the ebb 
 during the remainder of the flood tide. 
 
 From these remarks it will be seen that vessels will make little way 
 to the windward against a westerly wind on the bank of soundings 
 between Bic and the Bazade Islets, and indeed all the wav t(» (iieen 
 Island. 
 
 The set of the latter part of the flood to the northward past the west 
 end of Bic Island should be remembered by vessels weighing from the 
 western anchorage, or approaching the island with light winds, espe- 
 cially in the night or thick weather. 
 
 The first of the ebb sets oflf shore, or from the southward, and this is 
 more particularly remarkable at the eastern anchorage, but it only lasts 
 for a very short time, after which the stream runs fairly between the 
 islands, and along the coast to the eastward, for the remainder of the 
 tide. Its rate, in westerly winds, varies from 2 to 2.^ knots, according 
 as it is neap or spring tide, but it does not run so strongly in easterly 
 winds. 
 
216 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER — SOUTH SHORE. 
 
 Bank of Soundings. — The cbart will show how extensive the Hoiith 
 bank of soundings is, both northeastward and sonthwestward of Bio 
 and Bicquette Islands, and the assistance which the soundings on it 
 may afford to vessels at night, or in fogs, will be evi<lent. 
 
 There is anchorage on this bank in 10 or 12 fathoms, with good hold- 
 ing ground, all along the south coast from Bic Island to Green Island. 
 
 Caution. — The coast of the mainland between Bic Island and liaznde 
 Islets is high and rocky. With the exception of Alcide Rock, it is free 
 from danger to small vessels, which may stand close in ; but vessels of 
 large draft should not stand in farther than 7 fathoms at low and 9 
 fathoms at high water, because of a long ridge of rocky ground, extend- 
 ing 5 miles NE. from the northeastern of Razade Islets, with 17 feet 
 least water near its eastern end. To clear every part of this ridge, 
 keep Basque Island its own breadth open northward of the north 
 eastern of Razade Islets. 
 
 Razade Islets are two large rocks about ^ mile long; they are low, 
 bare of trees, and IJ miles apart. The NE. islet is 1^ miles from the 
 mainland to the southward. There is no passage for vessels between 
 them and the south shore. 
 
 Basque Island, 5 miles SW. from the northeastern of Razade Islets, 
 is 1^ miles long, parallel to the coast, and 400 yards wide. Its greatest 
 height above the sea does not exceed 100 feet; it is rocky, partially 
 wooded, with a house at the west extreme. There is no passage for 
 ships between it and the south shore, from which it is distant 2 miles. 
 
 Near the SW. end of the island a sandy spit, extends J mile south 
 ward. Close off the end of this spit there is a long and narrow hole 
 with 4 or 5 fathoms in it at low water, in which small craft may be 
 secured. 
 
 Shoal water extends ^ mile northward of Basque Island, and there 
 is a reef of rocks to the westward of its western point. On the western 
 extremity of this reef, and about 1,200 yards from the island, is a round 
 rock which shows at half tide. 
 
 Apple Island, SW. 2| miles from Basque Island, is formed by one 
 principal and several smaller rocks, the whole covering a space one 
 mile long parallel to the coa«it by 300 yards wide. It is 30 or 40 feet 
 above the sea at high water, without any trees, and 2^ miles from the 
 nearest point of mainland. There is no passage for ships between it 
 and the south shore, but its north side is bold-to, there being 4 fathoms 
 at the distance of 200 yards. 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1112.) 
 
 Green Island, at its northeastern end, has a long and narrow point 
 of rocks, always above water, and extending more than ^ mile from the 
 trees toward Apple Island, which lies 2f miles NE. from it. Half this 
 distance toward Apple Island is occupied by reeffe of slate which dry 
 at low water. In the remainder there are a few feet of water, afford- 
 
-» 
 
 GREEN ISLAND AND REEF. 
 
 217 
 
 e the south 
 ^anl of Bic 
 idiiigs on it 
 
 1 good hoUl- 
 roen Island, 
 and Kaznde 
 ick, it is free 
 it vessels of 
 it low and 9 
 md, extend- 
 with 17 feet 
 f this ridge, 
 f the north 
 
 ;hey are low, 
 les from the 
 sels between 
 
 ;azade Islets, 
 Its greatest 
 
 !ky, 'partially 
 passage for 
 
 tant 2 miles, 
 mile south 
 
 narrow hole 
 
 craft may be 
 
 and there 
 the western 
 id, is a round 
 
 >rmed by one 
 a space one 
 30 or 40 feet 
 es from the 
 
 )8 between it 
 ng 4 fathoms 
 
 narrow point 
 mile from the 
 t. Half this 
 te which dry 
 nrater, aflPord- 
 
 mg a passage lor very small schooners, which run in between (Ireen 
 Island and the main at high water; a line of shoal water is continuous 
 from each of these islands to the other, and it may be safely approached 
 ATitli care to 7 fathoms at low or 10 fathoms at high water, as may 
 also the islands. 
 
 Light —A polygonal tower, 56 feet high, and painted white, stands 
 on the north point of Green Island, nearly 2 miles from the eastern, 
 extremity of the rocks, above water, off its east point. It exhibits, at 
 an elevatior of 47 feet above high water, ;„ fixed white light, which can 
 be seen 13 miles in clear weather. Behind the lighttower, at about \ 
 n)ile, and bearing S. 43° E. (S. 23° E. mag.) from it, there is a white 
 beacon for leading clear of the tail of Red Islet Keef, and southwest- 
 ward of the lighthouse is a triangular beacon to mark the position of 
 Red Islet Bank lightvessel. 
 
 Fog Signal — A cotton powder cartridge is exploded every twenty 
 minutes during fog and snowstorms. 
 
 Green Island Reef, which is e.xtremely dangerous, extends from the 
 lighthouse northward 1^ miles, to the depth of three fathoms. From 
 the NE. extremity it trends, with a serrated outline, E. by N., till it 
 joins the shoal water connecting Green and Apple Islands. The NW. 
 side is straight, running SSW. from its NE. extremity, to the shore 
 close westward of the lighthouse, off which it extends only 400 yards 
 WNW. Its shape is therefore irregularly triangular, and the rocks 
 on it dry at low water, nearly J mile out from the high-water mark. 
 
 On the eastern side, this reef may be safely approached to the depth 
 of 7 or even 6 fathoms at low water, but on the north and west sides 
 there is no bottom with the hand lead until close to it. Half a mile 
 west of it there are between 20 and 30 fathoms water, and at one mile 
 NW. of it no bottom, with 40 fathoms of line. 
 
 To avoid Green Island Reef in the daytime' and clear weather, keep 
 the summit of the high land southward of Gape Arignole (or the high 
 land of Bic) open northward of Basque Island. 
 
 Anchorage. — There is excellent anchorage in westerly winds under 
 Green Island Reef, and it is the general rendezvous of vessels waiting 
 for the flood to beat through between Green Island and Red Islet. 
 But as the first of the flood comes from the northward, and sets on the 
 shoals, vei£sels had betier not anchor with the light bearing westward 
 of S. 29° W. (8. 49° W. mag.), or in less than 7 fathoms at low water. 
 With that depth, on that bearing, they will be 2^ miles from the light, 
 one mile from the eastern edge of the reef, and the same distance ftom 
 the shoal water to the southward. If they wish still more room, they 
 may choose their berth in 9, 10, or 11 fathoms, and will find a bottom 
 of stiff mud in either depth. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Green Island at 2h. 
 45m. ; ordinary springs rise 16 feet, and neaps 9^ feet. At the anchor- 
 age northward of Green Island the first of the flood was observed to 
 
 H 
 
218 
 
 ST. JjAMWXmX KTVER — BOUTH SHORE. 
 
 couie from the northward; the vessel then tended gradually round, 
 with her head to the NE., east, and SB. at the end of the tide. The 
 vessel i'outinued to go round with the lirst of the ebb, which came from 
 the southward off the shoals, to the SW., west, and NW., which latter 
 point was reached at about 4 hours ebb; and she continued with her 
 head in that direction, from which the stream came, until near the end 
 of the tide. The vessel then began to tend again, with her head to 
 theuc Ji and NE. as before, going completely round the compass in 12 
 hours. It was never entirely slack water, the stream continuing to run 
 more or less during the whole time. The rate of the ebb was 3 knots, 
 and that of the Hood 2 knots. This occurred in quite a calm day. 
 
 ITote.— The description of the river above Green Island is continued 
 in Chapter X. The north shore of the gulf will now be described from 
 Belle Isle Strait westward. 
 
 
 l^i 
 
lually round, 
 
 iie tide. The 
 
 ch came from 
 
 , which latter 
 
 lucd with her 
 
 near tlie end 
 
 her head to 
 
 K>mpa88 in 12 
 
 inning to run 
 
 was 3 knots, 
 
 aim day. 
 
 I is continued 
 
 escribed from 
 
 chaptp:r viir. 
 
 REMARKS ON BELLE ISLE STRAIT-GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE NORTH 
 COAST-BELLE ISLE STRAIT TO ("APE WHITTLE. ' 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 581", ) 
 
 Belle iBle lies at the Atlantic entrance to the Strait of Belle Isle 
 It is about 9i miles long, NE. and SW., and 3 miles wide, including 
 Lark Island, close to its west side. It is composed of a range of hills 
 bare of trees, and which rise to the height of 680 feet above the sea! 
 These hills are principally of granite, alternating with clay and slate 
 and their steep sides dip into the sea in every part, except at the Ne! 
 extreme of the island, where two low points converge so as to form a 
 narrow creek, named Black Joke Cove, which shelters very small fish- 
 ing vessels during the finest months of summer. Shelter may also be 
 obtained in Lark Harbor, under Lark Island, and in Valley Cove at 2* 
 miles SW. of that island; but none of these coves are considered safe 
 early in spring or late in autumn, because of the heavy swell which rolls 
 into them from the eastward. 
 
 The south side of Belle Isle aflfords no anchorage, and there is liardlv 
 a creek where a boat might find shelter. 
 
 A small rocky bank, with 5 fathoms least water, is reported to exist 
 about 5 miles NW. by N. from the NE. extreme of Lark Island. 
 
 Rock.— A rock upon which the sea breaks heavilvlies with the SW 
 extreme of Belle Isle bearing S. 31° B. (S. r.o w. mag.), distant * mile! 
 It was estimated to have 9 feet water over it, and is probably identical 
 with the dangers repo..<jd in 1881 by the steamer Ontario. 
 
 Lights.— The lighthouse erected on the sonth part of Belle Isle is a 
 white circular tower, 59 feet high, and exhibits, at an elevation of 470 
 teet and between S. 76o W. (N. 68o W. mag.) and S. 70° E. (S. 34o b 
 mag.), a fixed white light, which is visible 28 miles. • 
 
 In consequence of this light (from its great height) being frequentlv 
 obscured by fog, another light is exhibited from a square white light- 
 house, 31 feet high, situated below the old lighthouse. 
 
 This light is a fixed white light, elevated 137 feet, and should be 
 visible 1< miles in all directions, except where intercepted by the high 
 land of Belle Isle. .r gu 
 
 i 
 
 i'. 
 
 
 f 
 I 
 
 fl' 
 
 M 
 
 219 
 
220 
 
 DELLK ISLE STRAIT. 
 
 Fog Signal— From a point near the upper lighthouse an explosive 
 bomb, ."hich will explode at a distance of about ".(K) feet in a southerly 
 direction, high in the air, will bo fired at intervals of twenty minutes 
 during fog or snowstorms. 
 
 Vessels in tiio iii'mediate vicinity may also hear a dull report, caused 
 by the charge tha. throws the signal into the air preceding the loud 
 
 report. 
 
 Provision Depot —There is a depot of provisions at the lower light- 
 house for shipwrecked mariners. 
 
 Northeast Ledge dries at low- water springs, and lies H Iniles N. by 
 E. from the NE. point of Belle Isle; there is deep water in the channel 
 
 between. 
 
 Strait of Belle Isle.— The eastern entrance of the Strait ot Belle 
 Isle, between York Point and Cape Bauld, is 26 miles wide, the latter 
 point bearing from the former S. 43° E. (S. 7° E. mag.), but the nar- 
 rowest i)art of the strait is southward of Amour Point, in Forteau Bay, 
 where it is only 9^ miles wide. The western entrance of the strait, 
 between Greenly Island and F6rolle Point, is nearly 21 miles wide, 
 the point bearing from the island 8. 11° E. (S. 24° W. mag.). 
 
 Onter Soundings.— During summer and autumn the route from Great 
 Britain to Quebec through the Strait of Belle Isle is much frequented 
 by steamers, and the bank of soundings lying eastward distant 28 miles 
 from the north point of Belle Isle affords a valuable means of ascer- 
 taining the position of a vessel in foggy weather when approaching from 
 the eastward. 
 
 The least water yet found on this bank is 80 fathoms, mud, with 
 105 to 181 fathoms, sand, between it and the bank which stretches 
 eastward from Belle Isle. 
 
 The Soundings in the strait of Belle Isle are not so irregular but 
 that they will afford assistance to a vessel at night, or during the fogs 
 which BO frequently prevail. The deepest water is on the Labrador side, 
 as, for instance, from York Point to Red Bay, where, however, it is 
 interrupted by the shallow water off Wreck Bay. It is also deep on 
 that side, from Pin ware to Forteau Bay, inclusive; but the line of deep 
 water is not direct, nor continuous through the strait, and it is still 
 more perplexing that there is as deep water within 2 miles of the dan- 
 gerous Flower Ledges on the Newfoundland side, opposite Forteau Bay, 
 as in any part of the strait. The depth of water varies in different parts 
 from between 60 and 70 to 20 fathoms, and the nature of the bottom is 
 as various as the depths, being sometimes of rock, and at others of sand, 
 broken shell, pieces of coral, or gravel. 
 
 Tides and Currents.— The flood and ebb streams at Cape Bauld 
 
 continue running NW. and SB. inshore 3 hours after high and low 
 
 water; and at 6 to 7 miles NE. of the cape they continue running 5 
 
 hours after high and low water by the shore. 
 
 At Cape Norman the inshore streams run 2 hours after high and 
 
II explosive 
 II southerly 
 ity minutes 
 
 [)ort, causetl 
 II g the loud 
 
 ) lower ligbt- 
 
 ; liiiles N. by 
 1 tbe cbannel 
 
 rait of Belle 
 le, tbe latter 
 but tbe »ar- 
 Forteau Bay, 
 of tbe strait, 
 L miles wide, 
 
 Bo- 
 te from Great 
 ;b frequented 
 stant 28 miles 
 pans of ascer- 
 :oacbing from 
 
 as, mud, witb 
 licb stretches 
 
 irregular but 
 iring the fogs 
 Labrador side, 
 lowever, it is 
 
 also deep on 
 le line of deep 
 and it is still 
 es of the dan- 
 
 ForteauBay, 
 dift'erent parts 
 
 tbe bottom is 
 )tbers of sand, 
 
 t Cape Bauld 
 high and low 
 lue running 5 
 
 ifter high and 
 
 TIDES AND CURRENTS. 
 
 221 
 
 low water by the shore, and in the center of the strait the streiini runs 
 4 hours after high and low water. 
 
 Oft' Fortean and Sandy Bays the streams turn with the high and low 
 water on shore, and turn (luickly; in tbe center of the strait the stream 
 rniiH one hour later. These streams, however, are not constiint. 
 
 The dood comes from tiie northward along the coast of Labrador and 
 also from the SE., from Gape Bauld to Cape Norman. The latter stream, 
 there is reason to believe, is often turned oft' t«» the northward by ( 'ape 
 Norman, and the same thing takes place at (Ireen Island, on t\w New- 
 foundland side, toward Greenly Island on the (>i)p()site side of the strait. 
 There is, moreover, at times a stream running from the SW. for several 
 days together along the west coast of Newfoundland. This stream 
 occasionally sets from Porolle Point obliquely across the strait toward 
 Forteau Bay. Sometimes, and especially with NH. winds, the current 
 runs directly in an opposite direction along tbe west coast of New- 
 foundland tVom F^rolle Point past liich Point. 
 
 The current has the following characteristics in the summer season, 
 as shown by observations throughout the months of July and Septem- 
 ber, 1894: 
 
 The current is fun-lamentally tidal in its nature, and under normal 
 conditions turns regularly witb the tide, and runs cast and west with 
 nearly equal velocities. The conditions are normal in moderate weather 
 and during the prevalence of moderate westerly winds. At such times 
 the current attains a velocity of about 2 knots iier hour in each 
 direction. 
 
 During heavy winds, especially when easterly or westerly in direc- 
 tion, the current which runs with the wind becomes stronger than the 
 current against it; and eventually the current may become continuous 
 in the same direction as the wind. It may thus run in the one direc- 
 tion for two or three days at a time. The greatest velocities of the 
 current which were observed during heavy winds were 3^*^ knots per 
 hour from the east, and 2^ knots per hour from the west. 
 
 There is little appreciable difference in the current at the opposite 
 sides of the strait, except that toward the north side it may be a little 
 stronger or more persistent in the one direction. 
 
 While normal conditions* prevail the difi'erence of flow in the two 
 directions is in favor of a greater inward flow from tbe east. Also the 
 actual flow throughout the year, when the influence of the wind is 
 included, appears to be greater in the inward direction from the east 
 than outward from the west. 
 
 The presence of icebergs in the strait and the temperature of the 
 water have also a relation to the predominant direction of the current; 
 but they can not be relied upon as aft'ording an indication of its actual 
 direction at the time. 
 
 From the above characteristics, it is dearly possible for a vessel to 
 overrun her reckoning in either direction through the strait. Also, ves- 
 
 '11 
 
 u 
 
222 
 
 BELLE ISLE 8TRAIT. 
 
 i^l 
 
 ;» 
 
 »el8 entering tbiouKh the strait must not assume that the cnrrcnt is 
 no(!e8sariIy in their favor in making the run weMtwartl to round tlie 
 eastern end of Auticoi^ti, as tlie ohHervatious show that it is possible 
 for tlio set in the strait itself, and also in the northeastern end of the 
 Gulf of Ht. Lawrence, t«) be against them on that course. 
 
 Navigation of the Strait in Fogs. — From these remarks it will 
 plainly appear that the navigation of the Strait of Belle Isle is 
 attended with great danger in dark or foggy nights, during which no 
 vessel should attempt t« run through. On such occasions, therefore, 
 it would lie prudent to anciior in one of the bays on the north side of 
 the strait, rather than to continue underway. 
 
 A sailing vessel bound in to the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and running 
 with an easterly wind, will, however, find no place lit for that purpose 
 until arriving at the indifferent anchorage of Pinware, for Red Bay 
 can not be entered by a large vessel with an easterly wind. 
 
 Loup May is the first good anchorage under such circumstances, and 
 there the vessel would be so far advanced in her passage through the 
 strait that it would not be worth while to stop, since everything 
 might be easily cleared in the remaining short distance. But with a 
 SW. wind, at the approach of night, and appearance of fog, a vessel 
 * bound out through the strait to the eastward had better stand off and 
 on under easy sail, tacking by the deep-sea lead from the Newfoundland 
 side till morning, if not farther to the eastward than Ferolle Point. If 
 farther advanced, it would be better to make Forteau Bay before dark, 
 and anchor there for the night. In light winds or calms, during dark 
 nights or foggy weather, it is better to bring up with a stream anchor 
 anywhere in the strait rather, than to drive about with the tides, with- 
 out knowing whither, but then a lookout must be kept for drifting ice- 
 bergs. 
 
 Fogs occur with all southerly and easterly winds, and they are 
 frequent likewise with SW. winds; it is only when the wind is from 
 between the north and west that clear weather can be safely reckoned 
 upon. 
 
 Ice._The prevalent current from the northward comes ^om between 
 Belle Isle and the coast of Labrador. It is often at the temperature of 
 freezing point, bringing many icebergs into the strait and frequently 
 carrying them as far as Natashqnan, on the north shore of the Gulf of 
 St. Lnvrence. Some of these icebergs ground in deep water, whilst 
 others are continually changing their i)ositions. They are much more 
 numerous in some seasons than in others; 200 icebergs and large pieces 
 of ice were counted in the strait in the month of August one year, 
 while there Avere not above half a dozen to be seen in the same month 
 in the following season. 
 
 The strait is generally open to vessels from the latter part of June 
 to the first part of November. 
 
he curroiit is 
 u round tlie 
 it 18 iM)SHil)lo 
 n eiul of tlie 
 
 lurks it will 
 ielle Isle in 
 iUg which no 
 18, therefore, 
 north Hide of 
 
 and running 
 that pur|>08e 
 for Bed Kay 
 I. 
 
 istanceN, and 
 I through tlie 
 9 everything 
 But with a 
 fog, a vessel 
 itaud off and 
 ewfoundland 
 He Point. If 
 r before dark, 
 , during dark 
 tream anchor 
 e tides, with- 
 r drifting ice- 
 
 »nd they are 
 wind is from 
 fely reckoned 
 
 Qrom between 
 )inperatare of 
 nd frequently 
 if the Gulf of 
 water, whilst 
 •e much more 
 d large pieces 
 ist one year, 
 B same month 
 
 part of June 
 
 GULP OP 8T. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 228 
 
 OULF OF SI. I.AWHENCK. 
 Qt'EHEC. 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. IIOB.) \ 
 
 General Observations.— The (ioast of the gulf, which will form the 
 8ub.ie(!t of this chapter, lies between Oreenly Island and South Makers 
 Ledge, near Cape Whittle, a distance of 1L*8 miles. 
 
 The mariner is reminded that in shaping a course along the coast the 
 variation of the compass alters half a point within the limits of tliis 
 chapter, for which alteration due allowance should be made. Attention 
 should also be given to the soundings. 
 
 There are several detached banks lying parallel to the coast at the 
 distance of several miles. They are very irregular, and there is in 
 general much deeper water between them and the north shore, and also 
 southward for a great distance, or until the opposite coast of Newfound- 
 land is approached. 
 
 Currenta and Icabexga.— In navigating along this coast, the current 
 in through the Strait of Belle Isle must be taken into consideration, 
 and it should also be remembered that in addition to the permanent 
 dangers of the coast drifting icebergs are firequently to be met with. 
 There is a weak stream of flood tYom the eastward inshore and among 
 the islands and an equally weak ebb stream in the contrary direction, 
 but both are much influenced by the winds. 
 
 Aspect of Coast— The coast between Greenly Island and Cape 
 Whittle is exceedingly dangerous at night or in fogs, and even in day- 
 time and fine weather it requires the intimate knowledge, possessed by 
 the flshennen, of the position of every ledge or a good chart on a large 
 scale to navigate along it with safety. The mainland and islands are 
 of granitic rocks, bare of trees excepting in the heads of bays, where 
 small spruce and birch trees are met with occasionally. When not 
 entirely bare, the mainland and islands are covered with moss or scrubby 
 spruce bushes, and there are man.v ponds of dark bog water frequented 
 by waterfowl and flocks of the Labrador curlew. The mainland is 
 broken into inlets and bays and fringed with islands, rocks, and ledges, 
 which frequently rise abruptly to wiibin a f^yv feet of the surface from 
 depths so great as to afford no warning by the lead. In some parts the 
 islands and rocks are so numerous as to form a complete labyrinth, in 
 which nothing but small egging schooners or shallops can find their 
 way. 
 
 In general the mainland does not exceed the height of 500 feet above 
 the level of the sea and is often very much lower, as are all the islands 
 excepting Great and Little Mecattina. These two high islands, the 
 High Land of Mecattina, 085 feet above the sea, and the Bradore Hills, 
 are all very remarkable, and serve to point out to a vessel her position 
 
 % 
 
 ', ¥ 
 
 
 •-J*»*ii »« ^' WW^<W i*<i»« ^^ 
 
224 
 
 CLIMATE PRODUCTIONS. 
 
 Vf 
 
 i f 
 
 from great diHtauces at sea. Bradore Hills are three contigaous roand- 
 backed mountaius situated inland 4 or 5 miles northeastward from the 
 head of liradore Bay. The NW. summit is the highest, being 1,2G4 
 feet above the sea, and the highest land on this coast. 
 
 Climate.— The climate is very severe, and the dangers are increased 
 tenfold by the fogs which accompany the prevalent southerly winds. 
 It is probable that the mean temperature of the year does not exceed 
 the. freezing point. The ice does not usually leave the coast before 
 June, and young ice begins to form again in the pools and sheltered 
 small bays in September, when frosts are very frequent at night. At 
 midsummer only a very few of the earliest plants were found in flower, 
 the grass had not sprung up, and the moss still retained the brown color 
 of winter. Large masses of snow still occupied the ravines and hol- 
 lows and the shaded northern sides of steep hills. 
 
 In the sheltered bays the temperature is much higher and the fogs 
 less frequent than among the outer islands, whilst at the distance of 15 
 miles inland the water is said to be quite warm in summer and the 
 country thickly wooded with spruce, juniper, birch, and poplar trees 
 which grow in valleys, where the soil is of sandy clay, only the summits 
 of the hills being of bare granite, like the coast. 
 
 Inhabitants and Productions. — There are a few Indians of the 
 Montanes tribe, and a family or two of half-civilized Esquimaux occa- 
 sionally visit the coast from the northward. There are deer (caribou), 
 bear, wolves, foxes, martens, otter, beaver, and Canadian porcupines 
 in the interior, most of which are hunted for their skins by the few 
 inhabitants of the coast.' The Canadian partridge and the ptarmigan, 
 or willow grouhe, are also plentiful. 
 
 The only permanent inhabitants are a few widely scattered families, 
 residing at seal and salmon-fishing and fur-trading establishments, 
 which are visited periodically by small schooners from Quebec. Seal 
 and salmon are very plentiful. The establishments alluded to are at 
 Bradore, Esquimaux Bay, St. Augustin Harbor, Little Fish Harbor, 
 and Etamarau. These are the only places which could be relied on for 
 much assistance by the crews of vessels which might be wrecked upon 
 the coast. There is a family residing on the island between Bonne 
 Esperance and Salmon Bay in summer, and in Old Fort Bay in winter, 
 which might be added to the list. The remaining two or three families 
 are very poor people, who seem just able to make an indifferent liveli- 
 hood by hunting and fishing. 
 
 Codfishery. — Codfish are abundant on the coast, especially to the 
 eastward of Mistanoque. The fishery for them is carried on not only 
 by resident inhabitants, but by schooners which visit the coast every 
 summer. 
 
 Greenly Island (He Yerte) consists of two hillocks joined by a pla- 
 teau between two coves, the northern being 84 feet high and the south- 
 srn 63 feet high. The north shore is bold, but off the soath extreme 
 
ontigaous roand- 
 istward from the 
 best, being 1,2G4 
 
 I* 
 
 ;ers are increased 
 southerly wiuds. 
 does not exceed 
 the coast before 
 }ls and sheltered 
 nt at night. At 
 ) found in flower, 
 i the brown color 
 ravines and hol- 
 
 jher and the fogs 
 ;he distance of 15 
 summer and the 
 and poplar trees 
 only the summits 
 
 J Indians of the 
 Esquimaux occa- 
 re deer (caribou), 
 ;idian porcupines 
 skius by the few 
 id the ptarmigan, 
 
 cattered families, 
 <; establishments, 
 m Quebec. Seal 
 alluded to are at 
 itle Fish Harbor, 
 Id be relied on for 
 be wrecked upon 
 L between Bonne 
 )rt Bay in winter, 
 ) or three families 
 indifferent li veil- 
 especially to the 
 rried on not only 
 t the coast every 
 
 s joined by a pla- 
 gh and the south- 
 le south extreme 
 
 GREENLY ISLAND BRADORK J?AV. 
 
 225 
 
 nnein fsw V ? l^/'if^tand nhoals that together extend i 
 nule in a SW. direction. A large fishing establishment is situated i.i 
 the eastern cove, (ireenly Island is the resort of myria.le of puttin 
 which appear suddenly in June and disappear as suddenly in October.' 
 Light -Ou the southwestern slope of the southern hillock on Gieenlv 
 Island IS an octagonal tower, 78 feet high, with keeper's dwelling 
 attached and the whole painted white. From this tower, at an eleva 
 m^^L r **'^'Vr'!''?l''^ '' '"""'"'"^^ "^'•*' ^bowing white for half a 
 the light .s then eclipsed for one and a half minutes, the revolution thus 
 occupying three minutes. This light is exhibited from April 1 to Decern- 
 ber 1.5 of ea.h year, and should be visible 15 miles in clear weather. 
 
 Fog Sipal.-A horn, about 1,064 feet from the lighthouse, sounds 
 blasts of ten seconds' duration, with an interval of eighty seconds 
 between each blast, during foggy weather and in snowstorms 
 
 N VW Jf^r ^""l^^ T r? ^*'™ ^'*°'* ^' ^^'"^ P**'"*' «bout U miles 
 NNW. of Greenly Island, trends northward fi.r ^ mile to another 
 rocky point, beyond which is Sandy Bay, on the south side of which 
 are a few houses and a small chapel, with a flagstaff near it. 
 
 Perroquet Bank, with 44 fathoms over it, lies S. 68° W rN 770 w 
 mag.) 14 miles from Grand Point. 
 
 nl.ff®"T*«\?r^^*"*' *^^ ^'^^ ^^^^' *^ ***■ «°»'*» «^t«"t' and is faced by 
 cliff on the SW side, which is fairly steep-to. The other sides are fou^ 
 for a distance of 200 to 400 yards. Ifumerous puffin resort here dur- 
 ing the summer months. 
 
 Bradore Bay and Harbor are formed by the shore trending north- 
 
 rj^f 7u r^^ ^^^' ^'^ '^^ ''^^"'^ "^ ^^^^' ''"d other islets and 
 rocks. The bay is not difficult of access in moderate weather but 
 
 IxnotdTt!' f "^'''"'^ ^' '•'""^ ^^*^*' ^« ".e anchorage spa'ce is 
 exposed to the heavy sea that rolls in with southerly winds. Except 
 
 winds, the anchorage is inferior to that of Blanc Sablon to the eastward 
 
 mJr«hv •.?'''*''''''^,f *''" "'^'■^ "^^ ^"' ^""^ ««"« distance, flat and 
 
 TZtl: 7 'T"l '^'^' P"*"^"' ^^y«"** ^^' '^ "«««' ^^ sandstone 
 terraces, to a rocky flat-topped knoll, 297 feet above high water 
 
 r.Jr/«'T'' ^T^^^^^ ^y * Wuff peninsula, run into the northern 
 
 and at 2f miles westward of the peninsula is a large waterfall that is 
 conspicuous from seaward. 
 
 The land westward of the peninsula rises to a chain of bare stony 
 hdls nearly 500 feet in height, behind which are several ponds 
 
 which and the Labrador shore there are narrow and shallow channels. 
 Island of Ledges (Basin Island) is about 54 feet high, and is sepa- 
 rated from the Labrador shore by a channel nearly l,loi yards wWe 
 Off '*Yi^B^if « *''«••« i« - ^^^^ of small islands, wiich are steept 
 
 - i----^ J ae aa ^stfa aaas i Wiiafei&iaaa; - w^ ' w* *ft i i <w w i w <ti 4fc*j..»jjMia »«(^s^^ 
 
 I?' 
 
 if' 
 
226 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 toward the cbaiinel, but between them and t hirge island there are 
 depths Irom feet tx) 3 fathoms water only. Numerous islets and 
 ledges lie ofi" the western and so theru sides, making it dangerous to 
 approach within a distance of 1^ miles. 
 
 Several rocks and shoals lie between Island of Ledges and the Labra 
 dor coast to the northward, all of which break heavily in bad weatl.er, 
 and no vessel should attempt to enter the harbor north of this island 
 under any circumstances. 
 
 Frigate Harbor lies at the NE. extreme of the Island of Ledges, 
 and on its shores are a few houses and fishing stages. The water is 
 sufliciently deep, but the anchorage space is very snuvU. 
 
 The Basin lies southward of Frigate Uarbor, and contains a fishing 
 establishment connected with that at Blanc Sablon. This harbor is 
 suitable for small vessels only. 
 
 Gull Rock, whit;h dries at low water, lies nearly midway between 
 the Labrador shore and the islets off the SE. extreme of the Island of 
 Ledges. Shoal ground extends 100 yards southward from it, and there 
 iH a rock with 6 feet water over it at that extreme. A ledge with 3jj 
 fathoms water on it, and 250 yards in length, extends \ mile southward 
 from Gull Kock, and East Kock, with 4.^ fathoms water over it, lies 
 almost south h mile from it. Greenly Islaml lighthouse, bearing S. 32° 
 E. (S. 3° W.mag.), well open westward of Perroquet Island, leatls 
 southwestward of East Kock. 
 
 Bull Rock, on the western side of the channel to Bradore Bay, lies 
 3o0 yards from the SE. extreme of Island of Ledges, and is 3 feet 
 above high water. From it a shoal extends southward 400 yards, with 
 a depth of 16 feet at the extreme. 
 
 Directions.— Approaching this part of the coast of Labrador from 
 the westward, Bradore Bills, several conspicuous summits attaining an 
 elevation of 1,204 feet, will be easily reitognized. When (ireenly Island 
 with its lighthouse becomes visible, steer for it until Perroquet Island 
 is distinctly made out. Pass i mile westward of it, and keeping 
 Grei.nly Island bearing S. 32^ E. (S. 3° W. mag.) well open of its west 
 extreme, proceed toward Bull Rock, which is easily distinguislwd. 
 Then pass eastward of the chain of islets oft' the east side of Island of 
 Ledges, and if wishing to anchor in Frigate Harbor, stand in between 
 Pigeon Islet, the rockv islet 19 feet higli forming tl»e northeasternmost 
 extreme ot the chain, and Green Island, the next one south. Large 
 vessels, however, should pass northward of Pigeon Islet, taking care 
 to av.id the shoal which extends nearly 200 yards northeastward of it, 
 and an«!hor as convenient. 
 
 . In bad southerly weather a heavy swell rolls in between Gull and 
 Bull Hocks, and vessels would then find better shelter and an anchorage 
 easier of access in Blanc Sablon Bay. " 
 
 Tides.— It is liigh water, full and change, in Bradore Bay at lOh. 3om. ; 
 springs rise 'i'i feet, and neaps rise 2if feet. 
 
and tbere are 
 
 )U.s inlets and 
 
 dangerous to 
 
 md the Labra 
 I bad weatlier, 
 of this island 
 
 ud of Ledges, 
 The water ia 
 
 tains a fishing 
 rhis harbor is 
 
 dway between 
 f the Island of 
 ui it, and there 
 . ledge with 3j| 
 nile southward 
 :er over it, lies 
 bearing S. 32° 
 t Island, leads 
 
 adore Bay, lies 
 , and is 3 feet 
 400 yards, with 
 
 Labra«lor from 
 Its attaining an 
 (Ireeiily Island 
 erroquet laliind 
 i, and keeping 
 •pen of its west 
 distinguislijed. 
 ide of Island of 
 and in between 
 jrtheasterninost 
 ' south. L;u'j>e 
 ilet, taking care 
 beastward of it, 
 
 h^een Gull and 
 11(1 an anchorage 
 
 Jayatl0h.35m.; 
 
 BELLES AMOURS HARHOR 
 
 227 
 
 Aspect of Coast— The country separating Belles Amours. Middle 
 Bay, and Five Leagues Harbor is very remarkable. Low granite on 
 which are ridges of bowlders, with coarse grass and n.oss, extends 
 several miles seaward frcun the range of ste.q> granite liills, 400 or 500 
 feet high, which trend westward from the head of Brad.ne Bay. Tliis 
 low country has a green and alluvial api)earan(e from tlie sea; and it is 
 not until a near approach to it that the shores are seen to be of ro. k 
 and bowlders. 
 
 BeUes Amours Point will be easily recognized, being a mound of 
 bare granite, 00 or 70 feet high, at the SK. extremity of the low penin- 
 sula separating the harbor of -the same name from Middle Bay. 
 
 Belles Amours Harbor.— Stony Point, which is low and green, and 
 Flat Uocks, which lie li miles southeastward of it, form the east side 
 of the channel between them and Belles Amours Point, leading north 
 ward to Belles Amours Harbor, in which a number of vessels may lie 
 <]uite landlocked. 
 
 Shoai— Nearly midway between Belles Amours Point and Flat 
 Rocks lies a rocky patch with KJ feet least water. Between this patch 
 and the point tic. ^ are other patches with 3A fatlioms, which is as 
 nnich water as ci,?. i ■•..nted on through the westein passage. 
 
 Niobe ShoaL— .' u n,. irous shoal lies about 40 ) yards to the south- 
 westward of Flat h _^, on the eastern side of the I'ast Passage, into 
 Belles Amours Harbor. There are 4^ fathoms on the edges of the shoal, 
 with 15 and 11 feet within, and 17 fathoms outside this depth. From 
 this position, the rock inside Harbor l>oint was touching the point. 
 
 The soundings are extremely irregular and the ground foul iu the 
 East Passage. 
 
 Harbor Point is about 1^ miles within Belles Amours Point, and on 
 the west side is a bare granite hill, about 150 feet high, with several 
 beacons of stones upon it, which are erected upon almost every hill, 
 and are said to be for the guidance of travelers iu winter. The shore 
 between these points incloses a large and shallow pond, the center of 
 which 18 within Pond Point. The shoal water extends off on this side 
 300 yards from the high-water mark. Tlie north side of Harbor Point 
 18 of sand, extending (together with a flat which dries at low water) 
 partly across the inner entrance of the harbor. Between this flat and 
 the high and bold rocky shore to the northward the narrowest part of 
 the entrance of the harbor is 200 yards wide, with « ftithoms water in it 
 over muddy bottom. Northward of Harbor Point, about 100 yards,' 
 there is a small rock always above water; at 200 yards farther out in 
 the same direction lies another small rock which dries only at low water 
 There is no passage for vessels of any size between these rocks ami 
 Harbor Point. The entrance is to the northward and westward round 
 these rocks, and between them and the mainland to the northward. 
 On the east side of the entrance the shoal water and large stones 
 extend from Stony Point northward to the point of North Cove, which 
 18 only fit for boats. That side must therefore be avoided. 
 
22S 
 
 GULP OP ST. LAWRENCE NORTH COAST. 
 
 iji 
 
 Water may bo obtained iu the NW. comer of Belies Amours Har- 
 bor, and also from a considerable stream at the head of North Cove, 
 where there are a few trees; but wood for fuel is very scarce on this 
 
 coast. 
 
 Directions.— To enter Helles Amours Harbor by the eastern passage, 
 steer N. 48° W. (N. 13° W. mag.), so as to pass i mile to the westward 
 of the riat Uocks. Continue this course until the east side of Harbor 
 Point is approached within 200 yards; then steer N. 36° W. (north 
 mag.) till the sandy part of the point is opened out, or the vessel is 
 abreast of the rock above water otf it, when she must haul a little to 
 the westward, so as to bring the east side of Harbor Point and Pond 
 Point in one. Keep them in line, in order to round the north extreme 
 of the Hat, until Mark Point (the extreme on the west side within the 
 harbor) comes on with Peak Point (a rocky point in Middle Bay), seen 
 over the low land at the head of the harbor, and bearing 8. 52° W. (8. 
 87° W. mag.). As soon as this mark comes on, haul sharp round to 
 the westward, keeping at a less distance than 200 yards ih.m the high 
 north shore until the vessel is well within the sandy spit, when she may 
 haul to the southward and anchor anywhere, the bottom being of mud 
 and the depth from 5 to 7 fathoms. 
 
 To enter by the western passage, which is preferable with a westerly 
 wind, approach Belles Amours Point on a bearing nothing to the east- 
 ward of N. 32° E. (N. 67° E. mag.), and take care not to shut in Stony 
 Point behind it for fear of Middle Ledges. Pass Belles Amours Point 
 at a distance of 400 yards, and go no nearer the shore on that side 
 until past Pond Point; then proceed as before directed. As soon as 
 the marks come on for hauling into the harbor to the westward, put 
 the helm down and shoot the vessel in as far as she will go ; then let go 
 the anchor and warp in the remainder of the way. It i s only with south- 
 easterly winds that a vessel can sail in. The bottom is good for anchor- 
 ing outside Harbor Point, but not outside 8tony Point. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, tall and change, at Belles Amours Point 
 atOh; springs rise 4i feet and neaps 2J feet. 
 
 Middle Point, which has several rocks oflf it 200 yards westward 
 and southward, lies WSW. rather more than IJ miles from Belles 
 Amours Point. The former is the SW. and the latter the 8E. extreme 
 of the peninsula of low land separating Middle Bay and Belles Amours 
 
 Harbor. ^^ , „ 
 
 Middle Ledges lie southwestward of Middle Point. 8everal of 
 these ledges dry at low water, but the outermost, which is 1,200 yards 
 off shore, has 15 feet least water on it. There is no safe passage 
 between these and the shore. _ 
 
 Five Leagues Point, U miles west from Middle Point, is the SW. 
 extreme of another low but smaller peninsula, separating Five Leagues 
 Harbor from Middle Bay. On this peninsula, f mile N. by E. of the 
 extremity of the point, there is a remarkable isolated and precipitous 
 
^inuurH Har- 
 ■ North Cove, 
 carce on this 
 
 item passage, 
 the westward 
 ide of 1 1 arbor 
 J60 W. (north 
 the vessel is 
 laiil a little to 
 iut and Pond 
 north extreme 
 ide withiu the 
 die Bay), seen 
 ; 8. 5'J° W. (S. 
 ;barp round to 
 from the high 
 when she may 
 I being of mud 
 
 rith a westerly 
 iig to the east- 
 shut in Stony 
 Amours I'oint 
 e on that side 
 1. As soon as 
 westward, put 
 go; then let go 
 Illy with south- 
 ood for anchor- 
 Amours Point 
 
 'ards westward 
 es from Belles 
 he SE. extreme 
 Belles Amours 
 
 ut. Several of 
 1 is 1,200 yards 
 o safe passage 
 
 )int, is the SW. 
 ig Five Leagues 
 N. by E. of the 
 and precipitous 
 
 Mn)nLE BAY — ISTHMUS COVE. 220 
 
 ex':rrnK,r::,! ''''"'•" """"• ^ "-"^ """^ »•»"'. - 
 
 Barrier Reefs extend Ijj miles south westward of the same point 
 but are not .,oi«e.l to it. The south extremes of Middle ad fS 
 An.ours Points in line, bearing N. 66° E. (S. 79° E. .nagt Tead fmZ 
 southward of liaiTier Reefs. ^''' ^ "^® 
 
 Middle Bay is a flue open roadstead, free from all danger, more than 
 one mile wide, ami extends 2 miles t.> the northward. Fof the first mSe 
 
 ^^^Z^'^'r'^'^T^'"''' be approached nearer than 3^' 
 yards, but farther m it is quite bold, excepting in the heads of the coves 
 
 torn M S;. TT '" ''r ''^^ '' '••"•" ' '^ 13 fathoms, over sandy bo -' 
 ton,. Middle Ledge, and Barrier Keefs are the oni; dangers in the 
 
 way of vessels approaching Middle Bay from the east or we^ 
 
 Anchorage. -The usual anchorage in Middle Bay. in easterly winri« 
 js outside of Lsthmus Cove, in 10 fathoms, sand boVtl r.^^^^^^^^^^^^ 
 Cove in westerly winds, and vessels shift from one to tl e other as the 
 wind changes As there are no islands off this bay, and as it s uffi 
 ciently roomy for large vessels to beat in and out, it affords a very con' 
 venient occasional stopping place for vessels. It is Te onh open 
 roadstead on this coast. ^ P®" 
 
 dle^?w^ if r«1 ' h'*" ft '*'* ''^^ "^" ^"*'"« ^'^y^ S '»'•« -ithin Mid- 
 
 ..•^f-^T o^*'"^^""*' ^^® ^*'"* distance farther in, on the same side 
 ot Middle Bay IS Peak Point, high and of granit;. Thl t... L 
 torked, Its south extremity is a ragged, isolated mound or pea u.d 
 
 above wTtfr."'''' "^' ''' '^^"^"^^ '^^ ''' ^^"'•^' ^^^ '« « ^^ ^^^ 
 
 s ESE.of Peak Point. It is a small place, in which two or three tish 
 ng vessels are occasionally moored, un.ler a reef which extends mt 
 the south side of the cove northward towanl Peak Point. Cee 
 affords indifterent shelter with SW. winds, w;,i,.h blow right m vi i! 
 heavy sea. The entrance between the reef and Peak Poi^t iV nh W 
 
 i^':::ti ::^:: "-^ --' - -- ^— -« ^rHOa ;.;: 
 
 To enter Isthmus Cove, Peak Point must be kept close aboar,l uul 
 when he vessel is 1(H) yards past it to the east.ar.rhaul h" V^^^^ 
 rouMd to the southward between the reef and the sho;e T,^ pa" 
 the cove which runs to the northward of Peak Point is quit si o- 
 ^X;!^'Lr rt: -r-^^ narbo^acssthe low ^thmu^^t 
 
 dlJTw ^iTuLT """' """^'l' ''•" «"^™"-'«'>" tl.e west side of Mid- 
 die Baj. Its head ,s separated by a low and swampy isthmus from 
 
 ■^aF .fc^.-^-^t^«>^V^V^-.-^.^-^.-^<^a>..^^.p..w, | ,>,^.y., | j , ,^^^yg,^ 
 
mmm 
 
 mmmsm^'^mm^mm^^iimm. 
 
 ^m'-^^^~i,'f; V' 
 
 230 
 
 GULF OP ST. LAWRiiNCE NORTH COAST. 
 
 M 
 
 Five Leagues Harbor. In the mouth of this cove, in i fathoms, is the 
 auchoiiigo with westerly winds. A shoal with 3 fathoms water on it 
 lies 300 yards southward of the north entrance point of West Cove. 
 
 -Water may be obtained in Isthmus Cove, as well as m the head of 
 Middle Bay, where there are a few small trees. 
 
 Five Leagues Harbor is altogether unfit for anything larger than 
 a schooner of 100 tons; it is ^ mile deep, with 2.^ fathoms water, and 
 is -^ mile nortljwestward of Five Leagues Point. SW. winds roll m a 
 considerable swell, and there would be no lying there if it were not tor 
 the indifferent shelter afforded by Barrier Reefs off its mouth. The 
 channels leading in are about (iOO yards wide, and on either side of 
 Barrier Reefs, either from the southward through Kasteru Entrance, 
 between them and Five Leagues Point, or from the westward through 
 Western Entrance, between them and the shore to the northward. 
 
 Directions.— The course into Five Leagues Harbor, through Eastern 
 Entrance, is north (N. 35o E. mag.), passing 200 yards south westward 
 of Five Leagues Point and its reef. Two small rocks, which just cover 
 at high water, lie southward of the South Point of the harbor, which 
 is a rocky islet joined to the shore when the tide is out. The outer- 
 most of these rocks is 320 yards from the point. Leave them both to 
 the NE., passing between them and the west point of the harbor, which 
 is 400 yards from them. As soon as the vessel is past tiiese rocks the 
 harbor will open to the northeastward, and she must haul into it, pass- 
 ing midway between South Point and a large rock above water, 300 
 yards W. by N. from the point. Anchor in the middle, 200 yards within 
 the entrance; for although there is water enough nearly to the head of 
 the cove, and the anchorage is more secure farther in, yet it becomes 
 too narrow for a stranger, and would require the vessel to be moored 
 
 head and stern. 
 
 To enter Five Leagues Harbor by Western Entrance, being to the 
 westward of Barrier Keefs, stand in to the northeastward till the har- 
 bor is seen to open, bearing nothing northward of N. 45° B. (N. 80° E. 
 mag.). Steer directly for it, and as soon as the vessel is within the 
 western of Barrier Reefs, two ledges will be seen just under water, and 
 several small islets on the side of the mainland. The ledges will be 
 nearly i mile to the northwestward, or on the port hand, but the course 
 will lead within 200 yards of Bis Islet, which is by itself, (luite bold, i 
 mile off shore, about one mile from the entrance of the harbor, and 
 opposite the center of the Barrier Reefs. Pass the west point of the 
 harbor as close as is requisite, continue the course right in, and anchor 
 as before <lirected. 
 
 There is also a channel ^ mile wide between the two Barrier Reefs, 
 but they overlap in such a way as to make it difhcult for a strangei. 
 The two reefs covtu- an extent of i{ miles in a NE. direction. There 
 are parts of o i;-h of them that dry at h)w water, and the sea almost 
 always breaks on them. 
 
 
 < 
 
,thoins, is the 
 s water on it 
 (Vost Cove, 
 u the head of 
 
 g larger than 
 lis water, and 
 ^inds roll in a 
 t were not for 
 mouth. The 
 either side of 
 irn Entrance, 
 ward through 
 wthward. 
 rough Eastern 
 on th westward 
 lich just (jover 
 harbor, which 
 it. The outer- 
 ) them both to 
 ! harbor, which 
 iiese rocks the 
 il into it, pass- 
 ove water, .'500 
 H) yards within 
 to the head of 
 yet it becomes 
 1 to be moored 
 
 !e, being to the 
 rd till the har- 
 o B. (N. 80° B. 
 el is within the 
 ider water, and 
 J ledjjes will be 
 , but the course 
 If, (juite bold, ^ 
 he harbor, aud 
 ist point of the 
 ; in, and anchor 
 
 ) Barrier Reefs, 
 
 , for a strangei. 
 
 rectiou. There 
 
 the sea almost 
 
 SALMON HAY — HONNK K.SPEKAN<'E IIARUOU. 
 
 ?31 
 
 Salmon Bay.— Salmon Islet is VVSW. ;].^ miles from Five I.cagiU'S 
 Point, and lies <;lose to the SH. exfrenu; of (Jaribou Island, off wliich 
 the shoal water extends nearly .SOO yards eastward. Caril)ou Isian.l is 
 l.'2(> feet above the sea, but it can not [u^ distinguislicd from the main- 
 land in a vessel off the coast. I'.etwocn this islan<l and the mainland 
 eastward of it is the eastern entrance to Salmon Hay, 2()(t yards wide 
 but with a depth of only C feet in it at low water. The otlier entrance 
 to this deep bay is from lionne Hsperance Hay nmud northward of 
 Caribou Island. 
 
 There is plenty of water by t. lau. -..Me, and also in tii- h.x, 
 winch runs inland several miles NNE.; Imu. iis a vessel will be already 
 in a harbor befon^ she arrives at the navigable entrance of this bay, 
 further remarks respecting it are not ne<essary. ' 
 
 Caution.— An inspection of tlie chart will" show that s(.undin.^s in 
 moderate depths of water extend suHicicntlv far off shore every^v^lere 
 between the Strait of IJelle Isle and Salmon iiay, to warn a vessel of 
 her approach to the (!oast at night or in fog^'y weatiier. 
 
 Esquimaux Islands.— The mainland has hitherto fi.rmed the coast 
 line, but at Salmon Bay the islands c(mimen<(>. and continue 14 miles. 
 They are of all shapes, sizes, and hei-hts (less than 200 feet), and run 
 m order westward, under the names of l':s(|uimau.\,()ld Fort, and Dog 
 Islands. They are bare of trees, (excepting some of tliose which are far 
 Ml near the mainland. Off these islands, lie many small rocks and 
 ledges, the outermost of which are fully i ,„iles from the nuiinland 
 To attempt to describe all of these islands, or all the channels between 
 them, would be useless; and a good, chart, upon a. large scale, will be 
 far more useful than any written description. 
 
 Whale Island, the southeasternmost of lOscjuimaux islamds, is the 
 southernmost of all the islands; and, in conse^iueiice, shows as the 
 extreme to vessels close in with the coast, either to t\w eastward or 
 westward. It is about 'I mile long and about { mile broad. It does 
 not exceed 100 feet in height in the highest part which is a roun<l hill 
 near the center of tlie island, on which there is a conical beacon 30 
 feet liigh. (Blown down, 1,S!»7.) 
 
 All vessels bound to Bonne Esperance Harbor endeavor to nmke l^his 
 island. Whale Keef, comi)iised of rocks, Ix.th above and under water 
 extends (JOO yards off the south point of Whale Island; but off its north 
 j)oint the shoal water reaches only 70 yards. SoTithwest Led'-e with •) 
 feet water, lies S. 51o W. (S. 85o W. mag.), 7(K) vanls from the SW 
 l)oint; and there are several rocks, dry at lo\y water, h ing I'OO yards 
 oH shore, on the east side of the same point. 
 
 Bonne Esperance Harbor.— FroTn Salmon Islet, the south point of 
 Wl.ale Island bears S. 4r»o W. (S. 790 w. mag.) 4.1 .nilcs. Within this 
 !ine, he the islands whi.h form Bonne Esperance Harbor. Being very 
 steep, and of bare granite, the largest of these islands look much 
 higher than they really are; an effect which is also owing to the eon- 
 
 j*n:^t^»;.,^i^Bw.>*:^i#*i«s 
 
 *>««SMBSKHJia^-i-Wj|(|S^iS(;i«H>r*.a<^i;:-£.^iSiKSJ 
 
232 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH TOAST. 
 
 tiastof the inu<;h lower islands westward of tlu'iii. Tliere are beacons, 
 or ])ile8 of stones, upon almost every suinmit. 
 
 The Main Channel leading to this harbor is between (ioddard and 
 lieacon Islets; Goddard Islet being the westeriiintjst of two low islets 
 joined by a reef to the SW. extreme of Caribou Island. 
 
 Hold Rock, at the end of a reef extending 270 yards ott" the south 
 point of Goddard Islet, is small, always above water, and qHite bold. 
 Goddard R<»ck, whieh is al.so small, and dries only at low water, bears 
 S. 340 E. (south mag.) 700 yards from the sanu^ itoint. These are the 
 only dangers on the eastern side of the channel. On the western side 
 Beacon Islet, which is low, about 250 yards long, and with a pile of 
 stones on its summit, will be seen bearing S. 3S''-' W. (S. 72° W. mag.), 
 nerrly a mile from Goddard Lslet. Tail Islet lies (JOO yards to the 
 south, and Link and another low islet to tlie northward of Beacon Islet, 
 but they are out of the way. To the south westward of Beacon Islet, 
 and distant ^ mile, is Red Head Island, from which Whale Island bears 
 S. 32° W. (S. fir.o W. mag.), and is distant nearly a mile. Fish Islet, 
 a large, low rock, lies south of Red Head Island. 
 
 Within Red Head Island, and lying in a line to the northward, are 
 Cliaiu and Bonne Esperance Islands, the former being two peninsulas, 
 joined together by a narrow stony isthmus, and the latter being 150 feet 
 high and f mile long. Lion Island is ^ mile to the eastward of Bonne 
 Esperance Island, and there is a low islet and a narrow and diflicult 
 3-fathom channel between them. Oft" the east side of Lion Island, and 
 at tl»e distance of KM) yards, lies Whelp Rock, always above water. 
 Between this rock on the west and Goddard and Caribou Islands on 
 the east, may be termed the inner entrance from the Main Clianntjl; it 
 is 900 yards wide, and has from 10 to 13 fathoms water, over rock, sand, 
 and mud bottom. 
 
 Western Side.— Watch Rock, small, and always shows, lies i mile 
 northeastward of Beacon Islet, and at the same distance northward of 
 it and eastward of Link Islet lies Breaking Ledge, wliich just coveis 
 at high water. Tlie only other dangers are two 4-fathom i)atches, tiie 
 easternmost of which (Middle Patch) bears S. 30° E. (S. 4° W. mag.) 
 Ij mile from Beacon Island, and the other (Whale Patch), N. 72° E. 
 (S. 740 E. mag.) 3 mile from the beacon on Whale Island, There is 
 fonl and rocky ground, with from 5 to 10 fatiioms between these 
 patches, which may be avoided by a vessel approaching the liarbor 
 from the westward, by not coming into a less depth than 10 fathoms 
 until the leading marks for hauling into the harbor come on. 
 
 Wood and Water may be had in abundance from tlie mainland, 
 but not from the islands. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Bonne Esperance Har- 
 bor at9h. 15m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 2.^ feet. 
 
 Directions through Main Channel.— Being oil" tlie coast to the east- 
 ward, and with an easterly wind, stand in toward Caribou Island, the 
 
' are Iwacons, 
 
 (ioddat-d and 
 two low islets 
 
 ott' the south 
 id quite bold. 
 r water, bears 
 riiese are the 
 ) western side 
 ^ith a pile of 
 72° W. mag.), 
 yards to the 
 Beacon Islet, 
 Beacon Islet, 
 i Island bears 
 ). Fish Islet, 
 
 orthward, are 
 vo peninsulas, 
 being 150 feet 
 ard of Bonne 
 iv and diilieult 
 >n Island, and 
 above water, 
 on Islands on 
 n Channel; it 
 ver rock, sand, 
 
 >ws, lies ^ mile 
 northward of 
 ill just covers 
 11 ])atches, the 
 \ 4° W. niag.) 
 ch), N. 720 E. 
 ind. There is 
 )etween these 
 iig the harbor 
 m 10 fathoms 
 > on. 
 the mainland, 
 
 speratute II ar- 
 
 ast to the east- 
 m Island, the 
 
 HONNK ESF'ERAXCE IIAKHOR. 
 
 233 
 
 position of which with respect to Whale Island has been pointed out. 
 When at the distance of .i mile from the south side of Caribou, the ves- 
 sel will be in 10 fathoms water, and the south sides of Heacon and Bed 
 Head Isles and the north side of Fish Islet will be seen to come in 
 line, bearing S. (JOo W. (N. 80o W. mag.). Bear up upon this leading 
 mark, or, if not sure of the island, steer S. .Wo W. (west nuig.) witli tlie 
 lead going and a good lookout for Goddard liock. The deptU will be 
 abimt 9 fathoms at low water until the vessel is past that rock, when 
 it will deepen snddenl.v into If) or 10 fathoujs, and she will then be in 
 the channel. 
 
 The vessel must now haul in immediately N. 20° W. (N. 14° E. mag.), 
 and Whelp Rock will be seen right ahead, and in line with the west 
 side of House Islaiul, which is low, has a house upon it, difiicult to be 
 seen, and lies close under the nuunland at about a mile from Lion 
 Island. Run in upon this mark or bearing, ami when past Hold liock, 
 haul a little to the eastward, so as to give the Whelp a berth of 200 
 yards. As soon as the vessel is within this rock, bear up S. n'> W. 
 (N. 090 w. mug.), and run along the inner sides of Lion and Bonne 
 Esperance Islands, passing between the latter and Anchor Island into 
 the harbor, between Bonne Esperance and (;rand Islands, and where 
 the depth is from 12 to IG fathoms, over muddy bottom. 
 
 Being to the westward with a westerly wind, pass the stmth point of 
 Whale Island at .^ mile, steering none to tlie northward of N. 4.->o K. 
 (N. 790 K. mag.), to avoid the 4-fathoni patches, until Whelp Rock and 
 the west side of House Island are brought in line bearing X. 20^^ W, 
 (JSr. 140 E. mag.) ; then haul in upon that bearing, and proceed as before, 
 excepting in case of the wind not being free enough to allow of -)assing 
 between Bonne Esperance aful Anchor Islands, fn this case, a vessel 
 must go round to the northward of Anchor Island, and must not haul 
 up higher than N. 01° W. (N. 27o W. mag.), nor dose in the Whelp 
 Rock with the SW. extreme of Goddard Island until she is past 
 Anchor Reef, which covers at high water, and lies 400 yards to the 
 northeastward of Anchor Island, and is the only detached danger 
 within the bay. 
 
 \Vhelp Rock, in line with the west extreme of Goddard Island, clears 
 the shoal water round this reef at the distance of 100 yards. As soon 
 as Anchor Reef is passed, a vessel may haul to the wiml, and minding 
 that shoal water extends 300 yards northward of Grand Island (the 
 high and large island nevtwestward of Bonne Esperance Island), she 
 may make a tack into tlie harbor or anchor anywhere in the bay, where, 
 although the depth of water is inconveniently gr<'at. yet the bottom is 
 everywhere of mud, and the shelter complete in all winds. In short, 
 tlie whole of Bonne Esperance Hay may be considered as a harboi', in 
 which there is room for a fleet of ships of large size. 
 
 Shallop Channel.— Tiie outer channels into Bonne Ksjjerance Har- 
 bor require only a brief notice. Shallop Channel, between Bonne 
 
 ..<u.^AMK^*.>.aii..^.;^^.--^;AH».^>ri=^,,^^w:i^.....,^ ^ . ^ |--i Y i ' i "iin^ iii ri ii|i l:» iiiii i iii 
 
ipii 
 
 *'^^-'.''^.* 
 
 m 
 
 wmmm 
 
 234 
 
 OULF OF ST. LAWKKNCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 
 !«' 
 
 
 Espomiuu^ aiul (iiand Islaixls, is very narrow, and lias only '2 tiitlioins 
 in it nt low wattM-. It may bo approached t'roiu either side of Wiiale 
 iHland, passiii}^ I-'ish Islet, and then keepinjf the western sides of Red 
 Head, Cliain, and Bonne Hsperanee Islands close aboard into tlio 
 harbor. 
 
 Esquimauz Channel h'ads diretM to the eacttern entrance of ICstpii 
 maiix Hay; it should be ai)pioaclied through Whale (!haniiel, between 
 Whale and Tent Islamls. the latter island beinji the next westward ot 
 the former. Wiiale Channel is '^ mile wide, and has a depth of from 10 
 to I>> fathoms water. 
 
 Tlie course throufjli the center of Whale Channel to the entrance of 
 Esquimaux Channel is N. -to H. (N. .'$8^ K. mag.). Ksqniiiiaiix t'lmnnel 
 is between iJrand and Fair Islands on the east, and Sjiit and Stone 
 Islands on the west; between the inner ishinds (Fair and Stone) is the 
 narrowest part, only loO yards wide, and with o fathoms water. In 
 passing through this, the equally narrow entrance to Es(iuinniii\ Hay 
 will be seen, and the vessel must stand close over to it belbre she hauls 
 to the eastward through Northwest Channel into iSonne Fsperance 
 Hay. Then keeping within 200 yards of the main shore, to avoid the 
 shoal which extends from Fair Island fully halfway across the chan- 
 nel, she should steer for the south side of the small and high Star 
 Island, and ])assing (dose to it, continue her course toward Anchor 
 Island till past the shoal, which extends 400 yards oft" Grand Island, 
 when she may haul to southward into the harbor. Fsquiniaux Chan- 
 nel is the only other besides Main Channel which has water enough 
 for large vessels, but it is too narrow for vessels of ordinary si/e, 
 excepting in cases of emergency. 
 
 West Channel, lying between Spit and Stone Islands (m the (;a8t, 
 and Esquimaux Island proper on the west, has a bar with only' 2 
 fathoms water across from Stone Island to a i)oint on the western side 
 of the east entrance to Esquimaux Bay. 
 
 Esquimaux Bay. — Esquimaux Island lies in the nuaith of I'^ctqui- 
 niaiix Bay. There are many islands outside of it, and it can not be 
 distinguished from the mainland in a vessel off the coast. 
 
 The eastern entrance to Esquimaux Bay is by a very narrow channel 
 between the island and mainland to the eastward. This channel con- 
 tinues for li miles northward, and then opens i^ito a wide space with 
 two islets in it. But if the mainland to the ea.'-tward be followed, it 
 will lead to the entrance of Esquimaux itiver, where a house and trad- 
 ing post will be seen on a sandy ]»oint, backed with spruce trees on the 
 west side, and rather more than 2 miles from Esquimaux Island. The 
 river is navigated by canoes for many miles inland, and abounds with 
 salmon. 
 
 Only small schooners can pass through the narrow channel between 
 Esquimaux Island and the main to the eastward, but there is water 
 enough for larger vessels westward of the island. The chart must be 
 
Bi 
 
 OLD FORT BAY AND CH ANNUL. 
 
 285 
 
 y w t'iithoiiis 
 le of Wliiile 
 lirtes of H(mI 
 '(I into tlio 
 
 ce of Hstiui- 
 nel, Imtweeii 
 wt'stwiinl ot 
 liof troiii 10 
 
 eiitniiice of 
 tjix ('Ir.iiinel 
 t Hiul StOlU! 
 Stoiio) i.s tlioi 
 * water. In 
 uiniiinx itay 
 re Hlie liaiils 
 i K.sporance 
 to avoid tiie 
 <s tlie cliiiii- 
 i) liigli Star 
 ard Anclior 
 rand Island, 
 inianx Chan- 
 ater enough 
 ilinary size, 
 
 on the <;a8t, 
 ^vith only' 2 
 sT^estern aide 
 
 th of I'^rttjui- 
 t can not be 
 
 •row channel 
 channel con- 
 B space with 
 I followed, it 
 iKe and trad- 
 trees on the 
 Island. The 
 bounds with 
 
 luel between 
 ere is water 
 lart must be 
 
 referred to for this route, for it would bequitc^ impossible to convey any 
 intelligible idea of such an intricate navi{,'ati()n tlirou};li such a nnilti 
 tude of isliMids. 
 
 There is a channel with ."{ fathoms water in tiie shallowest pint, 
 and in {jeiieral with a ;ji-eat depth of water, between the islands and 
 the main, from llonno l-lsperance Hiiv to Mistano(pie Harbor; i»iit it 
 can only be shown <»n a chart upon a large scale; no written descrip- 
 tion would be of any avail. 
 
 Old Fort Bay. — Kort H(M!ks arc a number <»f low rocks extending 
 nearly a mile southward from the soutii point of < Hd Fort Island, which 
 is of a very moderat*- height, and about 1.] milea in diameter, l-'rom 
 this island a number of snuiller islands extend northward into tiie 
 mouth of Esquinuiux Hay. There are also a number of .steep and hijyh 
 islands extending north westwiird from Old Fort Islaiul across the bay 
 of the same name. There are deep-water channels leading to Old 
 Fort Bay between the islands last mentioned, but too intricate lor a 
 written description to be useful. 
 
 Old Fort Channel leads in from sea between the Fort liocks and 
 Mermot Islet, and farther in between Old F'ort Island and (Jhannel 
 Island, which last, together with (-rund) Island to the northward, 
 must be kept close aboanl until a vessel is in the wide and open si)ace 
 within the islands and oft' the mouth of Old Fort Bay. This wide 
 opening through the outer i.slands is the only navigable one Ix'sides 
 Whale (Channel. Through it vessels may run in between the islands in 
 the way just mentioned, or westward between the Dog Islands and ihe 
 main ; but this must be left to the chart to explain. In sonu> ]>lace8 
 between the islands there is more than oO fathoms water, and the nearer 
 the main the fewer the ledges. 
 
 Dog Islands.— Northwestward of Mermot Islet is the Kider (Jronp, 
 and westward of them the Dog Islands, surrounded by roitks and 
 innumerable ledges. The southwesternmost of the Dog Islands are 
 very low, but the highest islands next the main, although small, are of 
 cousidorable elevation. There is good anchorage between them and 
 the main, but it cah only be got at easily by running down with a west- 
 erly wind from Shecatica Island, close along the mainland, and in the 
 channel between the latter atul the scattered rocks and ledges which 
 lie oflf it, where there is very deep water the whole way. 
 
 Porpoise Rocks, the southernmost of which is l.| miles from the 
 shore, are three small black nx^ks above watei-, lying S. 78" W. (X. ((8° 
 W. mag.)i 4 mili-s i'lom the outermost of J>og Islands, and an equal 
 distance in the same direction to the I'.oulet. A sunken rock lies- \ 
 nnle westward of the northerinnost rock, and a shoal with 3i fathoms 
 water over it lies || mile N. 42° E. (X. 70° K. mag.) from the southern- 
 most rock 
 
 The Boulet, about 250 yaTds in diameter, is a smooth round islet, 
 green at the top, and about 70 feet iu height. Together with the opeu- 
 
 i 
 
 i w ^itf W fftiWnnwi .'^ 
 
286 
 
 OULK OV 8T. LAWRKNCK — NORTH COAHT. 
 
 luK t«» lx)b8tcr Hiiy, wliicli is N. ;»(P K. (N. 7(r K. un\t£.) 1 j inileH fiom 
 it, it Horvefi to point out tlm position of h v«<»so1 oft' tii« const. Cnili 
 Island is J mile WNVV. from it, and Four IIocUh (within which is Inner 
 Islet) 3 miles WSW. These are the only islets between it and Sheca 
 ti(;a Island; but there are nnwiy r<)(!ks and ledges between tlieni, and 
 also off the Bonlet to seaward. 
 
 Peril Rock, which is very small, dries at half tide, and lies U ndles 8. 
 1-0 H. (S. 2'2^ W. maK.) from the Bonlet, is the outermost and greatest 
 <langer of!" this part of the coast; the sea, however, almost always 
 breaks upon it, and also upon the others which lie between it and Four 
 Kocks. There is m) warning by the hand lead in a|iproaching any of 
 these rocks. 
 
 Rocky Bay, one nule eastward of Lobster Bay, extends NNE. li^ 
 miles, and is about 250 yards wide, between steep and high rociky 
 sliores. There are M fathoms water in its entrance, but the «lepth soon 
 <liminishes to Hi fathoms, and then shoals gradually t(» its head. One 
 mile within the entrance, on the SK. side, there is a house and fish 
 stage at a Hnmll cove in which small vessels anchor in 5 fathoms, mud 
 bottom, well sheltered from all winds. A small stream enters the head 
 ol'this bay. 
 
 Lobster Bay is a narrow inlet extending 4 miles N. by E., and (luite 
 open. 1 1 is about 400 yards wide, between high and steep rocky shores. 
 In the entrance there is a depth of 35 fathoms water, diminishing to 14 
 fathoms halfway up; after which there is anchorage quite to the head, 
 with muddy bottom everywhere, but it is completely exposed to SSW. 
 winds. Several very small streams enter the head of the inlet. There 
 are two small islets close off the east point of the entrance of Lobster 
 Bay; a vessel must pass westward of them in going in. 
 
 Napetepee Bay is a straight and narrow inlet, very similar to Lob- 
 ster Bay. Its entrance is abont 1;^ miles northward of the Four Rocks, 
 whi(!h, together with the Inner Islet just within them, must be leftto 
 the eastward in apj)roaching this bay. In entering Napetepee»Bay a 
 \essel must i)ass 200 yards westward of some rocks above Avater, lying 
 just within the numth of tiie bay. At U miles, within the entrance, 
 tliere is a small islet; pass westward of it, when the east shore nmst be 
 kept close aboard until througli the Narrows. Several small streams 
 run into tliis bay, but the principal stream is on the east side, '<^ mile 
 IVom itis head, and is the outlet of a considerable lake, which can not 
 c.isily be entered by boat excepting at high water. A river abounding 
 with salmon enters this lake. 
 
 Directions. — The three bays just described have no dangers in tbeni, 
 but they are, nevertheless, by no means desirable |)laces for vessels to go 
 into, being so narrow and having such deep water. Besides, a sailing 
 A'essel can not get out of them without a northerly wind, which in the 
 summer n^onths seldom occurs. Tvobster and IJocky Bays are prefer- 
 able to Napetepee, and the safe and proper way of approaching them 
 
 '■ H H ||I_MJ.I 
 

 NAl'ETEPEE MAY — MlSTANfUiUR HAKHOR. 
 
 287 
 
 iiiileH from 
 Diist. Crab 
 icli in Inner 
 nnd ShncH- 
 1 tlieni, and 
 
 » H inihvs S. 
 .ml greatest 
 lONt always 
 it and Four 
 liinji; any of 
 
 Is NNE, 1^ 
 high ro(!ky 
 dei)fh soon 
 head. One 
 86 and fish 
 bhoms, mud 
 rs the head 
 
 ., and <|uite 
 tcky shores, 
 iahing to 14 
 
 the liead, 
 Bd to SSW. 
 let. There 
 
 1 of liobster 
 
 ilar to Lob- 
 ''our Rocks, 
 st be left, to 
 epee«Haj' a 
 rater, lying 
 e entrance, 
 ore must be 
 all streams 
 side, '<^ mile 
 id) can not 
 abounding 
 
 irs in them. ' 
 essels to go 
 s, a sailing 
 hicli in the 
 are prefer- 
 shing them 
 
 is from the westward, with a westerly wind, passing inshore between 
 Sheeatica and the Four Hocks, and then (>iistwar(l close along the main 
 land. 
 
 The Innor Channel, between Uu^ islets an<l the mainland, is m>t 
 less than (MM) yards wide, and the depth «tf water is from Mi to 4.S falh 
 oms, over muddy bottom. This deep water cliannel, elose along the 
 mainland, free from all dangers, continues eastward ail the way to the 
 Dog Islands. Vessels might pass between the latter and the I'lU'imise 
 Hocks in clear weather, when shoal water ((mid be readily seen, and 
 when there is a sea running heavy en(mg]i to break u|ion the ledges, 
 but the other is the safer plan of proceeding. 
 
 Coast— The NK. point of Sheeatica Island lies west 1,', miles from 
 Four Hocks. The njainland from Dog Islands t(t Sheeatica Island is of 
 steep granitic hills (not exceeding 300 feet in height), with deep water 
 close into the rocks, and with only the few small islets and ledges off it 
 which have been mentioned. 
 
 Sheeatica and Mistanoque lie ch)se to the mainland, and would be 
 diHl(!ultt(» distinguish from it if it were not for the Boulet and the 
 opening of Napetepee to the eastward, and the Shag lsl.;t to the south- 
 westward. Sheeatica is the eastern, the smaller, and the higher island 
 of the two, being J mile long and ir>0 feet high. 
 
 Mistano(iue Island, separated from Sheeatica by au uunavigable 
 channel 300 yards wide, is nearly 1^ miles long, parallel to the coast; 
 broken into coves on the outside, and in the highest part 120 feet above 
 the sea. It lies across the entrance to Mistanoque Bay, the mouth 
 of which is about 300 yards wide, with a depth of 23 fathoms in the 
 entrance, expands to the breadth of .5rj() yards within, and runs inland, 
 rather more than 3 miles northward. It is not until a vessel arrives 
 within less than A mile of its head that the depth decreases so as to be 
 convenient for anchoring. The bottom is everywhere of mud; there 
 are no dangers, and wood and water are plentiful. 
 
 Mistanoque Harbor, directly opposite the mouth of ; ■ e bay, is a 
 small bay on the north side of Mistanoque Island, in which the depth 
 is from 15 to 20 fathoms, mud bottom. Vessels may, however, anchor 
 in less water a short distance eastward, between the is' aul and the east 
 point of the bay, where the depth is 12 fathoms, but tie channel is there 
 only 160 yards wide. Vessels must moor in any case. 
 
 Mistanoque Harbor, though small and with inconveniently deep 
 water, is nevertheless a valuable harbor on a coast where good ports, 
 tit for large vessels, are so scarce. The absence of dangers outside, the 
 easy and immediate access, in either of the prevailing winds, in conse- 
 quence of its having two entrances, are advantages possessed by none 
 of the other small harbors to the westward, which may be equal to it 
 in other respects. 
 
 Enter Island lies nearly A mile southwestward of Mistanoque Island, 
 and 100 yards farther is Diver Island, from which a reef of rocks extends 
 
 i 
 
 m 
 
 ^ -yi ;-ii.ii. ^ i,vii itOiKM *s; 
 
iMi 
 
 238 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 1' 
 
 m, 
 
 'a' 
 I' 
 
 l§ 
 
 I 
 
 270 yards southward. Both these islands are low. Northwest of 
 them S«K> yards lies a f>roup of small islands. West Passage to Mista- 
 no(iue liay is between this group and Diver and Enter Islands. 
 
 Directions. — There is nothing immediately outside or oft" Shecatioa, 
 Mistauoque, Enter, or Jiiver Islands, so that no other directions seen. 
 necessary than to run through the center of either passittje which may 
 be preferred. South Passage, between Enter Island and the west shore 
 of MistaniMjue Island, is, however, the best channel, being 800 yards 
 wide, witVi upward of 40 fathoms water in it, and bold to the rocks on 
 either side. On arriving at West Passage, which is about 100 yards 
 wide, with fathoms water in it, give the NW. point of Mistanoque 
 Island a berth of 100 yards or keep well over to the mainland side of 
 the entrance; but as soon as the vessel has entered this narrow chan- 
 nel, keep IMistanoque Island aboard, because there is shoal water ott' 
 the west side of the entrance of the bay to the distan<'e of 00 yards. 
 
 In entering from the eastward. East Passage between Shecatica 
 Island and Four Rocks, which are quite bold, is more than one mile wide, 
 with very deep water; but the NE. point of Shecatica Island must be 
 given a berth of 200 yards until the channel between it and the main 
 opens, bearing S. 78° W. (N. 68° W. mag.), tor there are rocks off" that 
 point to the distance of 00 fathoms. The XW. point of Shecatica 
 Island (on which there is the hut of a seal fisherman) must be kei)t 
 close aboard, within the distance of 20 or 30 yards, for there is shoal 
 water across a very small bay of the main opposite to it. The channel 
 here being only 60 yards wide and having only 3 fathoms water in it, 
 this East Passage is only fit for small vessels. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Mistanoque Harbor at 
 lOh. 30m. ; springs rise feet and neaps 3 feet. 
 
 Shag Islet, bearing S. 44° W.(3. 78° W. mag.), 7A miles from Mista- 
 noque, is the best guide for making the latter fiom the westward, as the 
 Boulet is from the eastward. Shag Islet is small and high, with a 
 round peaked hill looking green in the middle. There are many rocks 
 off to the eastward of this islet, the outermost of which, distant from 
 the islet 2 miles, is Shag Rock. 
 
 Coast. — The coast between Mistanoque and Oape Mcattina is broken 
 into large bays and inlets, between large islands of moderate height 
 above the sea, and partially covered with moss. Many smaller islands, 
 islets, and rocks are inter8i)ersed, and outside all the coast is lined with 
 sm all ■ slets, rocks, or ledges, in groups, or scattered here and there. The 
 greatest difficulty is to pass safely through between the last, for within the 
 islands, in most of the channels and wide spaces between them, as well 
 as in the bays of the mainland, there is a great depth of water, amount- 
 ing in one or two jjlaces to 50 or GO and often exceeding 30 fathoms. 
 In these deep-water channels and bays, which are so intricate as to 
 prevent any attempt at a written description, small rocks are not nearly 
 so numerous as they are outside, and are for the most part above water. 
 
 From Shecatica Bay to Ua-IIa Bay the mainland does not ai)pear, as 
 
 im£ 
 
p. 
 
 Northwest of 
 isage to Mista- 
 sliinds. 
 
 ' oft" Shecatica, 
 irectious see'u 
 *tje which may 
 
 the west shore 
 mtg 800 yards 
 to the rocks on 
 bout 100 yards 
 of Mistanoque 
 liulaiid side of 
 s narrow chau- 
 shoal water off 
 
 of 00 yards, 
 reen ShecatiiJii 
 1 one mile wide, 
 [sland must be 
 t and the main 
 i rocks off that 
 t of Shecatica 
 ) must be kei)t 
 ' there is shoal 
 . The channel 
 ims water in it, 
 
 Kjue Harbor at 
 
 les from Mista- 
 estward, as the 
 d high, with a 
 ire many roeks 
 h, distant from 
 
 ittina is broken 
 oderate heiglit 
 smaller islands, 
 ast is lined with 
 md there. The 
 t, for within tlie 
 in them, as well 
 water, amount- 
 ing 30 fathoms. 
 • intricate as to 
 save not nearly 
 irt above water. 
 s not appear, as 
 
 CUMnEKLAND HARBOR PORT ST. AUGUSTINE. 
 
 239 
 
 the islands, great and small, and of diffen-nt heightsabove thesea, arc 
 so numerous and so near together that tlie coast can not he <listin- 
 guished till a vessel is among them. 
 
 Cumberland Harbor, the entrance to which is between (Jumberland 
 Island on the east and Dukes Island on tlie west, is known by a hiyh iiill 
 on the mainland about 10^ miles NNVV. from tlie entrance. Tliat hill 
 is the highest in the neigliborhood, and resembles a castle at the top, 
 having steep cliffs like walls. The islands forming the harbor are of 
 moderate height, the easternmost making in two round hills. This is 
 an excellent harbor, the best and easiest of access on the -coast, (lood 
 water can be had in plenty on the east side of the harbor, but for wood 
 you must go ui> Shecatica Bay, which lies 3 or 4 miles northeastward 
 of the harbor, and runs inland to the northward many miles. 
 
 Directions.— Cumberland Harbor should be approached from be- 
 tween Shag liock and Three Rocks. There is no danger in the way 
 but what appears above water, excepting a small rock lying S. L'3o K. 
 (S. 11° W. mag.), rather more than 4 mile from tiie west point of 
 entrance, which is about 400 yards wide. As soon as the vessel is within 
 its outer points, haul over to the west sfde, and run along it to the 
 inner point on that side, which is N. 52° W. (N, 18° W. mag.) about ^ 
 mile from the outer east point of entrance. As soon as she arrives 
 there she m.iy haul to the eastward and an(;hor anywhere in from 7 to 
 liO fathoms of water over good ground. 
 
 Sandy Harbor, on the southern shore of bandy Island, is a safe 
 harbor, with good ground. 
 
 Water.— There is no wood to be had in Sandy Harbor, but plenty of 
 water. 
 
 Directions.— On approaching Sandy Harbor there are two ledges 
 nnder water to be avoided. The first of these bears S. 56° W. (west 
 mag.) from Shag Rock, and S. 34° K. (south m&g.) from Shag Island, 
 being distant from the latter one mile. The second bears S. 43^ E. (S. 
 !)o E. mag.), nearly a mile from the east side of ICgg Rocks, and S. Gfi^ 
 W. (N. 80° W. mag.) from the .summit of Shag Island. A small reef with 
 shoal water extends J mile from Shag Island toward this ledge, leaving 
 a deep channel between more than |J mile wide. The course through 
 the center of this channel, direct for the SW. extreme of Duke Island, 
 is N. 40° W. (N. 6° W. mag.). 
 
 To enter this liarbor, pass to the eastwaid of lOgg Rocks and keep 
 tlie SW. extreme of Duke Island, which bears N. 10° E. (N. 44° E. 
 mag.) more than 4 mile from Egg Rocks, aboard on going in. A small 
 rock will then be seen above water to the northwestward, lying over 
 toward the east side of the entrance of the harbor. Pass on either side 
 of that rock, and then steer in for the harbor, there being nothing in the 
 way but what appears. 
 
 Port St. Augustine is a little harbor in which small vessels may 
 moor. It has a very narrow and intricate entrance, and is lit for small 
 craft only. The approach to it is westward of St. Augustine Chain, 
 
 « 
 
 
 rt» ii--t 'rt*- > '4«4iaiM a-^ w ti iaf f •«MtM»Q«w>d£A^'k, « 
 
 ,-Jl- 
 
 ,*] 
 
240 
 
 GULP OP HT. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 which is a chain of small islets, the outermost of which is a rouml 
 smooth rock, with a high bhick rock ^ mile westward of it. Between 
 these last-named rocks there is a ledge, which shows at one-third ebb. 
 The passage is on either side of this ledge, and then northward along 
 the west side of St. Augustine Chain, but it deserves no further 
 description. 
 
 St. Augustine River. — The south extremity of St. Augustine Chain 
 bears S. 56° W. (S. 89° W. mag.) about 7 miles from Shag Island. 
 Between them lies Square Channel, the largest between the islands, 
 toward the mainland. The channel is too intricate for description, but 
 15 miles up it in a WNW. direction is the entrance of St. Augustine 
 River. 
 
 St. Augustine River is a stream of (considerable length, and empties 
 into a bay full of rocky islands. Its mouth is full of shifting sand 
 banks. Schooners anchor in St. Augustine Harbor, outside the river, 
 3 miles below the Hudson Bay Company's post. The river is formed of 
 two branches — the NW. branch and the NB., or main river, which 
 receives the tributary river, ^ux Mouches. At the latter end of June 
 salmon ascend the main river to a distance of 80 miles above the first 
 rapids. The Aux Mouches is also visited every fall by a large number 
 of fish resorting thereto ibr the purpose of spawning. Both branches 
 are easily ascended in fiats or canoes, but the river sometimes falls very 
 low in summer. There is plenty of wood at this river. 
 
 Eagle Harbor, in Long Island, has room and depth enough for large 
 ships within, but the entrances are too narrow for anything but small 
 vessels. The east passage, between the islets which form the hai'bor 
 and Long Island, bears about N. 12'^ W. (N". 21° E. mag.) 2^ miles from 
 Fox Islands, and is the best and deepest, but has only 3 fathoms water. 
 This part of the coast is dangerous, being lined with small low islets 
 and rocks, both above and under water, and nothing but a chart upon 
 a large scale would enable anyone to find Eagle Harbor. The approach 
 to it, however, is on either side of Fox Islands, which are SW. by W. 
 about 14 miles from St. Augustine Chain. 
 
 Ha-Ha Bay. — Seal Point is the west entrance point of Ha Ha Bay. 
 The islands to the eastward contract the channel into this bay to the 
 breadth of about J mile, but there is plenty of water, and no danger 
 but what appears above water. The best channel is close along the 
 mainland, between Seal Point and Round Islet, leaving all the islets 
 and rocks to the eastward. The bay runs in north about 8 miles, with 
 a depth of water exceeding 60 fathoms in one part, and there are many 
 good anchoring places, but it is entirely out of the way of vessels. 
 
 Fish Harbor. — At 4^ miles NE. ^ N.irom Boule Islet, at the north 
 extreme of Great Mecattina Island, is a small cove of the mainland 
 running in to the south westward, with an islet covered with wood, 
 called Wood Island, lying off' its entrance. There is a passage on 
 either side of Wood Island, but that northward is the best, there being 
 
 .*] 
 
GREAT MECATTINA ISLAND. 
 
 241 
 
 is a round 
 t. Between 
 e-third ebb. 
 iward along 
 
 no further 
 
 istine Chain 
 hag Island, 
 the islands, 
 jriptiou, but 
 . Augustine 
 
 ind empties 
 lifting Band 
 le the river, 
 is formed of 
 'iver, which 
 end of June 
 ove the first 
 irge number 
 til branches 
 es falls very 
 
 igh for large 
 ig but small 
 1 the hai'bor 
 i miles from 
 homs water, 
 ill low islets 
 , chart upon 
 he approach 
 SW. by W. 
 
 Ha Ha Bay. 
 R bay to the 
 I no danger 
 e along the 
 .11 the islets 
 \ miles, with 
 re are many 
 vessels, 
 it the north 
 le mainland 
 with wood, 
 passage on 
 there being 
 
 a ledge in the bay southward of the island, part of which, however, 
 always shows, and a rock with 3 feet least water, S. 62° E. (S. 29o W, 
 mag.), nearly i mile from the east point of Wood Island. In the cove 
 there are 7 or 8 fathoms, with good ground and room to moor. It is, 
 however, only fit for small vessels. Both wood and water may be 
 obtained. There is no danger but what appears in approaching this 
 harbor from either side of Great Mecattina Island excepting the ledges 
 which have been mentioned. 
 
 Oreat Mecattina Island, about 3J miles long and 3 miles wide, is 
 rather more than 2 miles from Red Point, the nearest part of the main- 
 land to the westward. The central part of the island is the highest, 
 and rises about 500 feet above the sea. The granitic hills of this island 
 are fissured in a remarkable manner by empty basaltic dikes travers- 
 ing the island, in a north and south direction, from one side to the 
 other. These features, together with the position of the island, in rela- 
 tion to the High Land of Mecattina, 5 miles westward from it, distin- 
 guish this island from any other land in the gulf. 
 
 The Boule is a high and round islet, nearly Joined to the NW. point 
 of Great Mecattina Island. There is a small rock above water close oft 
 it westward, and about ^ mile in tae same direction a patch of rocks 
 with about 4 fathoms least water. Round Head, on the SW. side, is a 
 high peninsula, connected to the island by a low isthmus. An islet 
 and small rock, at J and one mile, respectively, lie off the SE. point of 
 the island. Treble Hill Island lies ENE., about 3 miles from the center 
 of the island; Flat Island lies SE. by B. ^ E., 3 miles from the SE. 
 point, and the two Murr Islets lie S. by W., about 4 miles from the same 
 point of the island. These islets are about J mile apart, of considerable 
 height, flat at the top, and precipitous all round. Treble Hill and Plat 
 Islands are quite bold all round, and so also are Murr Islets, which 
 swarm with sea fowl. Murr Rocks are two small and low rocks above 
 water, lying about i mile SE. from the southern of Murr Islets. A 
 ledge on which the sea generally breaks lies 5T. 22° E. (N. 55° E. mag.) 
 more than J mile from the eastern of Murr Rocks. ' 
 
 Beacoa— A beacon, pyramidal in shape, surmounted by a cone, with 
 a vane, the Avhole 34 feet high, and painted white, has been erected on 
 Flat Island. 
 
 Island Harbor is a cove one mile deep, and about 400 yards wide 
 between Bluflf Head, the high NE. point of Great Mecattina Island, 
 and the Boule. This harbor is sheltered from easterly winds by a cluster 
 of small islets and rocks, lying oft' its mouth, and leaving a safe pas- 
 sage on either side of them. If the east passage is used, keep Bluflf 
 Head aboard, and if the west passage, pass between the cluster just 
 mentioned and a small rock by itself, lying J mile west of it and 200 
 yards from the shore of the Great Mecattina. The anchorage is near 
 the head of the cove in from 14 to 20 fathoms water over good ground, 
 and both wood and water may be had. 
 1161 16 
 
 :»<;s-«>f«'>^>»^--->^l-JE<MbVVU«iari^-V»*' 
 
s 
 
 242 
 
 GULP OF ST. LAWRENCE NORTH COAST, 
 
 Mecattiaa Harbor is a small but safe harbor between Mecattina 
 Island and the mainland, being only about 06 yards wide in the western 
 entrance, and about 1.'50 yards wide within. In a vessel of any size it 
 is therefore necessary to moor head and stern and with hawsers to the 
 shore. The depth within is and 7 fathoms over good ground, but only 
 3 fathoms at low water can be carried in through either entrance. 
 
 In the small bay between Mutton and Mecattina Islands, wherein is 
 the western entrance, there is no anchorage in conse(|uence of the great 
 depth of water; but there is no dsinger in the way, and it is only neces- 
 sary to keep in the middle to pass safely through the narrow western 
 entrance. The eastern entrance is rendered difficult by a reef of rocks 
 under water running across it northward from the north part of the 
 island, and should only be attemi)ted in fine weather, unless by those 
 who are well acquainted with the place. Strangers in fine weather 
 may anchor outside, between the east end of the island and the main, 
 and send a boat in to examine the channel. 
 
 Wood and TVater may be obtained in Mecattina Harbor. 
 
 O-ull Islet lies N. 67° E. (S. 80° E. mag.), nearly a mile from the NE. 
 end of Mecattina Island, and there is no danger between them ; but if 
 a vessel approaching Mecattina Harbor from the eastward wishes to 
 pass between Gull ^^\et and the main, she must keep cither the one or 
 the other aboard, in order to avoid the ledge, with 3 feet least water, 
 which lies nearly halfway between them. 
 
 Portage Bay, on the east side of Gape Mecattina, runs in about 1^ 
 miles to the nortliward, between steep and high hills, fissured like Great 
 Mecattina Island, and there is a rapid river at its head. The deep 
 water, with space for a vessel to anchor, extends only about 400 yards 
 within the entrance, and there is a snug cove on the east side for small 
 vessels. 
 
 Portage Harbor is formed by a small and moderately high islet in 
 the mouth of Portage Bay, lying over toward the east side. In this 
 harbor vessels of considerable size might find shelter in time of need, 
 although it is inconveniently small for general use, like most of the 
 harbors on this coast. 
 
 Directions. — The passage into Portage Harbor, eastward of the islet, 
 is fit only for very small vessels. The western entrance is about 200 
 yards wide, and Las from 6 to 8 fathoms in it. There is still more 
 water within, over muddy bottom. But approaching this harbor in a 
 vessel of large draft, there are two ledges with 15 feet least water to be 
 avoided. They lie in the line from the south extreme of Cape Mecat- 
 tina to the western entrance of Mecattina Harbor. The northernmost 
 of these ledges bears S. 28° E. (S. 50.W. mag.), about 800 yards from 
 the west end of Mutton Island, and the other N. 22° E. (N. 55° E. mag.), 
 ^ mile from the south'>rnmost Seal Rock, which lies near the shore on the 
 east side of Cape Mecattina, and about § mile north from its south 
 extremity. Shoal water extends about 200 yards off the Seal Eocks 
 eastward, but Mutton Island is quite bold. 
 
fmmm&ff^ 
 
 m Mecattina 
 1 the western 
 )f any size it 
 iwscrs to the 
 iiud, but ouly 
 itrance. 
 8, wherein is 
 ) of the great 
 is only ueces- 
 rrow western 
 reef of rocks 
 1 part of the 
 less by those 
 line weather 
 Q(l the main, 
 
 bor. 
 
 from the NE. 
 them ; but if 
 urd wishes to 
 ler the one or 
 t least water, 
 
 s in about 1^ 
 'ed like Great 
 i. The deep 
 )ut 400 yards 
 iide for small 
 
 ' high islet in 
 side. In this 
 time of need, 
 3 most of the 
 
 :d of the islet, 
 is about 200 
 is still more 
 s harbor in a 
 st water to be 
 Cape Mecat- 
 northernmost 
 ►0 yards from 
 , 55° E. mag.)) 
 e shore on the 
 'om its south 
 e Seal Eocks 
 
 1 
 
 CAPE MECATTINA. 
 
 243 
 
 Cape Mecattina is a long and remarkable promontory of the main- 
 land, and of moderate height for some distance from its extremity; but 
 about 3 miles northward it rises to the height of 085 feet. The highest 
 part of what is named the High Laud of Mecattina, which rises directly 
 in rear of Mecattina Harbor, can not be less than 700 feet above the 
 sea, and is the highest land upon this coast from Bradore Bay west- 
 ward to the vicinity of Miugau Islands. The granite of this promontory 
 is traversed, from SW. to NE., by those enormous basaltic dikes which 
 have been mentioned as occurring in Great Mecattina Island. They 
 cut completely through the promontory into Portage Bay, ascending 
 again on the eastern side of the latter, till they arc lost to view beyond 
 the summits of the hills. In Dyke Island several of them are empty 
 as low down as the surface of the sea, dividing the island by immense 
 open fissures in such a way as to distinguish it from all others in the 
 neighborhood. There is a small islet less than 200 yards from the end 
 of the poiut with no channel between. Entrance Island, about 400 
 yards in diameter, lies nearly 400 yards farther out. Dyke Island is 
 400 yards farther ott" in tlie same direction, and is composed of two 
 islands at high water, but there is no passage even for a boat between. 
 It isabout 1 ,C00 yards long, 800 yards wide, and about 150 feet high above 
 the sea. At a mile from the south point of Dyke Island lie the two 
 Outer Kocks. Tliey are above water, and there are several rocks and 
 ledges, and no safe passages between them and the island. 
 
 All these islands and rocks lie nearly in a line SE. by E. from the 
 SE. extreme of the promontory, from which Outer Rocks are distant 
 2)s miles. The northern of Murr Islets, which is the nearer of the two, 
 is 2.} miles from Outer Eocks, and there is a clear and deep channel 
 between, the depth of water exceeding SO fathoms. Vessels bound to 
 Mecattina Harbor either pass by this channel or through between the 
 islands, for there is a safe passage on either side of Entrance Island. 
 The channel between Entrance and Dyke Islands is the best, and has 
 13 fathoms water in it. The shoal water extends about 100 yards oflf 
 the east side of the former of these islands, but the latter is quite bold. 
 
 The Coast from Cape Mecattina to Cape Whittle is as dangerous as 
 can well be imagined to a stranger falling in with it at night or in thick 
 weather, and even to those who are quite acquainted with it the navi- 
 gation is not without much difficulty. There have been instances of ves- 
 sels, after beating about the gulf with adverse winds and bad weather, 
 in the fall of the year, being wrecked upon it, as was clearly indicated 
 by the quantity of wreck almost everywhere to be found on the islands. 
 
 The distance from Cape Mecattina to Cape Whittle is 55 miles, but 
 the line between them passes 7 or 8 miles within the outer islands and 
 rocks, so that it would be necessary to steer S. 47° W. (S. 79° W. mag.) 
 from Murr Eocks to pass outside St. Mary Eeefs, which are the outer 
 dangers off the coast. 
 
 The depth of water immediately off, and even within, the outer 
 islands and rocks is in general very great, often exceeding 70 or 80 
 
 
 I 
 
 -I 
 
244 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 fathoms, so that there is no waruintj by the lend; but at 12 or 15 miles 
 oflf shore there are occasional banks of sand and gravel, with from 30 to 
 SO fathoms water. The outer islands are entirely bare of wood, but 
 there are more trees on the mainland than in parts farther NE., indi- 
 cating a slight improvement in the climate to the southwestward. 
 
 Little Mecattina Island is nearly 7^ miles long and about 3 miles 
 wide. De Salaberry Bay, on its west side, cuts it nearly in two parts. 
 All outside the narrow isthmus, namely, two-thirds of the island, is 
 high and remarkable land, which can be seen from a great distance out 
 at sea long after the other islands have disappeared below the horizon. 
 The highest hill on the island is about 570 feet above the sea. The 
 part of the island within the isthmus is a low and mossy swamp, rest- 
 ing on sand, with isolated ridges and mounds of granite piercing 
 through it here and there. Within the island, to the north and west, 
 are extensive flats of sand, with bowlder stones and small rooky islets. 
 
 Little Mecattina River discharges its waters through these flats 
 by several shallow channels, the largest of which flows into Aylmer 
 Sound to the westward, and the shallowest into the Bay of Books to 
 the eastward of the island. The latter channel has only 3 feet in it at 
 low water, so that it is possible to wade across it and from the island 
 to the main when the tide is out. Little Meccattina Island, having 
 thus no channel between it and the main for vessels, and scarcely even 
 for boats at low water, may be considered as forming the SW. side of a 
 large bay. The promontory of Mecattina forms the NE. side of this 
 bay, which is filled with islands and rocks innumerable, among which 
 no vessel could find her way, and where it is possible to lose oneself 
 for a time in a boat. 
 
 Fin Rocks lie nearly 250 yards off Whale Head, the south extreme 
 of Gore Islands, and bearing N. 54° E. (N. 86° E. mag.) 5J miles from 
 Antrobus Point, a small peninsula at the east extreme of Little Mecat- 
 tina Island. Westward of Fin Bocks, at 2 and 3 miles, respectively, lie 
 Herriot Isles and Single Bock, with two or three sunken rocks close to 
 it. Between these and Little Mecattina Island there is a large open 
 bay, the head of which is called the Bay of Bocks. Antrobus Point is 
 the SW. point of this bay, and has a ledge off it 200 yards to the south- 
 ward, which is the only danger off the south side of Little Mecattina 
 Island. 
 
 Little Mecattina Cove, on the east side of Little Mecattina Island, 
 about J mile northward of Antrobus Point, is § mile long, and from 140 
 to 280 yards wide, between high, bold, and precipitous rocks. It has 10 
 fathoms water in the entrance, and there are 17 fathoms over mud 
 bottom within. It is open to the NNE., but as the islands are only 
 distant 3 miles in that direction, there is no doubt that a vessel well 
 moored would be quite safe in it. The SE. point of entrance is called 
 Cove Point, and is quite bold. 
 
 Water may be obtained at the head of the cove. 
 
2 or 15 miles 
 ;h from 30 to 
 )f wood, but 
 er NE., indi- 
 stward. 
 pbout 3 miles 
 ill two parts, 
 he island, is 
 distance out 
 the horizon. 
 lie sea. The 
 swamp, rest- 
 lite piercing 
 th and west, 
 rooky islets, 
 h these flats 
 into Aylmer 
 of Books to 
 t feet in it at 
 m the island 
 land, having 
 carcely even 
 \W. side of a 
 , side of this 
 bmong which 
 I lose oneself 
 
 nth extreme 
 ^ miles from 
 Liittle Mecat- 
 pectively, lie 
 ocks close to 
 i large open 
 bus Point is 
 to the south- 
 le Mecattina 
 
 ttina Island, 
 ind from 140 
 s. It has 10 
 IS over mud 
 ids are only 
 a vessel well 
 ace is called 
 
 -^«iiii« 
 
 HARE HARBOR. 
 
 245 
 
 Hare Harbor, also on the east side of Little Mecattina Island, has 
 depth and room enough fp- largo veast'ls, but has several rocks and 
 ledges in it, which render it difficult for strangers. As it opens to the 
 southeastward, the prevailing winds are favorable for siiiling in, and 
 are generally accompanied with a smooth sea in the entrance. It is 
 only when the wind is well to the southward that there is any swell, 
 and even then it never rolls into the harbor so as to att'ect a vessel. 
 
 Directions.— To enter Hare Harbor, steer N. 3^ E., (X. 3oo E. mag.), 
 m as to pass Antrobus Point and Cove Point at )( mile. When the 
 vessel has run f mile past Cove Point, sue will be close to the eastern- 
 most of the two Cat Eocks, which are above water, about 400 yards 
 apart. At 300 yards northward of the easternmost rock, lies Staff" 
 Islet, about 150 yards in diameter, off" which there is a rocky patch dry 
 at low water, about 200 yards to the eastward. This can always be seen 
 from the rigging, but there is also a ledge, with 2 fathoms least water, 
 320 yards N. 34° E. (N. 66° E. mag.) from the NE. extreme of the islet. 
 On this ledge the SE. extreme of Eden Islands and the small and high 
 Nob Islet are in line, the latter bearing from the former N. 22^ E. 
 (N. 540 E. mag.) li miles. These are the only dangers on tlie jiort 
 hand, or on the side of Little Mecattina Island ; and to the eastward the 
 nearest dangers will be more than a mile from the course. 
 
 When the vessel has run on the N. 3° E. (N. 35° E. mag.) course 
 one mile past Cove Point, Staff" Island will be abeam on the port hand, 
 and ought not to be nearer than J mile. From this position the entrance 
 of the harbor will be seen bearing N. 39° W. (N. 7° W. mag.) one mile. 
 It can not be mistaken, because there is no other channel through which 
 a person can see clear into the harbor from that position. The entrance, 
 about 340 yards wide, and with 20 fathoms water in it, is between Daly 
 and Price Islands, and the only other channel is between the latter and 
 Eden Islands. Care must be taken not to take that channel by mis- 
 take, for a vessel would hardly get safely in that way, because of the 
 numerous ledges. Daly Island, forming the west side of the entrance, 
 lies close to the shore, with only a boat channel between, which can not 
 be seen through from outside. 
 
 When the entrance bears N. 65° W. (N. 23° W. mag.), hanl direc'ly 
 in for it, leaving Eden Islands, and also Price Island, to the eastward, 
 giving the south extreme of the latter a berth of not less than 60 yards. 
 Daly Island, on the port hand, or to the westward, is quite bold. About 
 340 yards within the entrance on the east, or Price Island side, the small 
 Watch Eockwill be seen above water, and farther in a very small islet. 
 This last is Bold Islet, about ^ mile within the entrance, 160 yards W. 
 by S. from the north end of Price Island, and quite bold. On the west 
 side, bearing N. 32° W. (north mag.) 400 yards from the east extreme 
 of Daly Island, lies Safe Rock, very small, above water, and quite safe 
 on its east side. 
 Nearly midway between Safe Eock and Bold Islet lies Eag Ledge, 
 
 i 
 
 i;i 
 
 ' !• 
 
246 
 
 GULP OP ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 which Just dries at low water. This is tlio principal danger in the way, 
 but it (!an almost always be seen from the rigging, and there is a clear 
 channel on either side of it, 300 yards wide, and with from 12 to 15 
 fathoms water in it. The western channel, however, is the best; and 
 the course from the center of the entrance to it, so as to pass withiu 
 100 yards of Safe Kock, is N. 3(;o W. (N. 4° W. mag.) If mile. 
 
 When within these dangers tlie anchorage must be chosen by 'the 
 lead, for there are several patches of rock with from 4 to fathoms, 
 although the bottom is in general of mud, with from 9 to 14 fathoms 
 water. In doing this, however, there is one more danger to be avoided. 
 Foul Rock, a 2 fathom patch, lying N. 32° W. (north mag.) 1,200 yards 
 from the SW. point of Price Island. Until within this rock, therefore, 
 a vessel should keep more than halfway over from the islands forming 
 the east side c^ the harbor, toward its western shore. She may if 
 requisite run in nearly ^ mile farther than this patch, and anchor east- 
 ward of Cluster Point, which consists of some low small islets and 
 rocks extending from Little Mecattina Island, this position being the 
 most secure in the harbor. 
 
 With an Easterly Wind. — When bound for Hare Harbor with an 
 easterly wind, steer S. 58° W. (west mag.), so as to pass ^ mile south- 
 ward of Fin Kocks. Having run 2J miles upon this course after Fin 
 Rocks were abeam. Scale Rock (a 2-fathom ledge) will be 800 yards to 
 the northward, and Tail Rocks, off Herriot Isles, will be distant J mile. 
 When the vessel has run one mile farther on the same course. Single 
 Rock will be seen, small and just above water, J mile on the starboard 
 beam, provided thei'e has been no tide or current. At any rate, the 
 rock will be seen, which has no other above water near it, being § mile 
 southwestward of the nearest of the rocks off Herriot Isles. 
 
 Tliere is nothing in the way westward of the line from Single Rock 
 to Eden Islands, excepting Cat Rocks, above water, and Staff Islaud 
 and its ledges lying close to the shore of Little Mecattina Island. On 
 the contrary, there is a flue open bay, with plenty of room for large 
 vessels to beat, and a depth in many places exceeding 50 fathoms. 
 Single Rock, however, must not be approached nearer than J mile- 
 because of three sunken rocks around it at the distance of 300 yards, 
 and with C feet, 2 and 3 fathoms of water upon them, respectively. As 
 soon as Single Rock is made out, and is brought abeam steering S. 58^ 
 W. (west mag.), haul in to the northwestward by degrees, so as to place 
 the vessel A mile westward of the rock, when the entrance of the har- 
 bor will bear If. 55° W. (N. 23° W. mag.) with nothing in the way; and 
 the vessel may be steered directly for it, and proceed as before directed. 
 
 Rocks. — All the bay within, or northeastward of Eden Islands, as 
 well as eastward of the line from them to Single Rock, is dangerous, 
 being full of sunken rocks and shoal rocky patches, springing np 
 through great depths of water. . 
 
 Supplies. — There is a good watering place in the small cove on the 
 
 w j nwM.i ie wtw '* ^ . } ** I' T, " ) 
 
er in the way, 
 lere is a dear 
 rom 12 to 15 
 che best; and 
 
 pass within 
 lile. 
 
 ihosen by 'the 
 to fathoms, 
 to 14 fathoms 
 bo be avoided, 
 :.) 1,200 yards 
 »ck, therefore, 
 lauds forming 
 She may if 
 
 1 anchor east- 
 all islets and 
 ion being the 
 
 arbor with an 
 ^ mile south- 
 irse after Fin 
 I 800 yards to 
 iistant ^ mile, 
 sourse, Single 
 the starboard 
 1 any rate, the 
 , being § mile 
 les. 
 
 Single Eock 
 . Staff Islaud 
 
 I Island. On 
 jom for large 
 ; 50 fathoms, 
 than ^ mile; 
 of 300 yards, 
 ectively. As 
 teering S. 58^ 
 so as to place 
 ee of the har- 
 fche way; and 
 ifore directed. 
 )u Islands, as 
 is dangerous, 
 springing up 
 
 II cove on the 
 
 AYLMEK SOLND. 
 
 247 
 
 west side of Hare Harbor, and wood may also be obtained in various 
 place,',. There is usually a couple of men either in the entrance of 
 Littlti Mecattina River or near Little Mecattina Cove, but they do not 
 remain .firing the winter. There are plenty of blue and cloud berries, 
 etc., on tl»e bills of Little Mecattina Island. 
 
 (H. O. CImit No. 1108.) ^ 
 
 Aylmer Sound.— The SE. shore of Little Mecattina Island, extend- 
 ing from Antrobus Point 3 miles 8W. to Gape .Mackinn^tn, the SK. 
 point of Aylmer Sound, is high and bold, with remarkable beaches of 
 white bowlder stones occasionally. There is a long cove close to the 
 eastward of Cape Mackinnon, but it is of no use to vessels. Aylmer 
 Sound is formed by Little Mecattina Island on the east and Harrington 
 Islands, together with the mainland, on the west, and is navigable 
 about 4 miles N. by W. from Cape Mackinnon. Cai>e Airy, the mmth 
 extreme of Harrington Islands, is SW. 5 miles from Oape Mackinnon; 
 but farther in, that is, from Paynter Islands to Craig Point, the breadth 
 is only 2 miles, and so it continues as far as it is navigable. Paynter 
 Islands are small and are 4 miles northward of Cape Airy, close to 
 the mainland. 
 
 Aid and Close Islets. — There is no danger on the west side of Ayl- 
 mer Sound but what appears and is close to the shore; but on the east 
 side there are two small islets, the outermost of which. Aid Islet, bears 
 N. 70° W. (N. 3SO W. mag.), and is a little less than a mile from Cape 
 Mackinnon, and is 800 yards olT shore. The other. Close Islet, lies 
 about halfway between the cape and Aid Islet, and about 200 yards 
 off shore. 
 
 Spray Reef, small, awash at low water, and bold all round, is WSW. 
 1^ miles from Cape Mackinnon. This is the only danger in the entrance 
 of the sound that can not always be seen, and vessels had better pass 
 to the westward of it because the passage between it and Aid Islet has 
 not been sounded. 
 
 Doyle Islands are four in number, but they appear from sea as two 
 only. The two westernmost islands are very low, and close together, 
 being.joined at low water. The two easternmost are of moderate height, 
 and also close together. Their east point bears N. 10° W. (^. 22° 
 E. mag.) 2 miles from Craig Point, which is the SW. extreme of Little 
 Mecattina Island, one mile from Cape Mackinnon. There are several 
 small rocks and ledges in the channel between these islands, and also 
 between them and Crescent Point WNW. of them; so that the only 
 safe passage is eastward of the islands, and between them and the 
 ledges which lie across the mouth of De Salaberry Bay. This passage 
 is i mile wide, with 18 to 23 fathoms water in it, the east side of the 
 islands being quite bold. 
 
 Lou Road. — From the north point of the easternmost of Doyle 
 Islands, Boot Point (the south entrance point of Louisa Harbor) bears 
 
 I 
 
248 
 
 GULP OF HT. LAWKKNCE — NOKTH COAST. 
 
 N. 13^ K. (N. 4r.o E. mas.), and is distiint 1,LMI0 yiinls. Within or to the 
 nortliwanl of DoyU? Islands, Ix'twcM-n them and LouLsa Harl»or, there 
 Ik a flue ifMnny roadstead, named Lon Uoad, in which vessels may 
 choose their anchorage in from 12 to 1 fathoms over muddv l)ottoni, 
 the soundings decreasinjj {fradually westward from tlu" line. join inj,' the 
 easternmost of Doyle Islands and Hoot I'oint, over to Crescent Point, 
 a distance of alxnit one mile. This roadstead is lionnded on the north 
 by banks of sand and stones dry at low water, wliicli extend acrross 
 from Dickson Islands, forming the ^' W. side of Louisa Harbor to ('res- 
 eent Point. It is through these banks that Little Mecattina River 
 discharges most of its waters. 
 
 Louisa Harbor is about 400 yards wide at the entrance. The itoints 
 of entrance are (luitc bold, and the best anchorage is :\m yards within 
 them, in I fathoms, and in the southern part of the harbor. The 
 harbor is open to the southward. 
 
 Directions.— The oidy directions for sailing into Louisa Ilarbor, or 
 iuto Lou Hoad between it and the Doyle Islands, are to keep the east- 
 ern side of the latter aboard, to avoid the ledges lying across the 
 entrance of De Salaberry Bay. When once inside of the island there 
 is nothing in the way, so that a vessel may either anchor in the road or 
 run into ( lie harbor as convenient. In the sonnd outside of the Doyle 
 Ishinds the oidy thing to be guarded against is Spray Keef. There are 
 irregular soundings with as little as 11 fathoms over rocky bottom here 
 and there, but in general the depth is from 19 to 2.} fathoms, with rock, 
 sand, and mud bottom. The ground can not be trusted until within 
 Doyle Islands. 
 
 Harrington Islands extend northward 4 miles, from Cape Airy to 
 the maiidand, tliere being no channel within them. They are high 
 islands, the higlu st being estimated at .5.50 feet above the sea. Between 
 the outer and largest islands there is indiHerent anchorage and deep 
 water, but the channels leading to it are narrow, and too intricate for 
 any directions to avail. It is a very dangerous place, and useless, 
 excepting t<. small vessels intimately acquainted with the coast. 
 
 Black Reef, bearing from Cape Airy S. 16° E. (S. 16° W. mag.), 2 
 miles, is composed of low black rocks above water, about 300 yards in 
 diameter, bold, but with very irregular soundings around it^ varying 
 from 6 to 70 lii thorns over rocky bottom. 
 
 M^jor Reef, awash at low water and very small, liears S. 70° W. 
 (N. 78° W. mag.), 1 J nules from Cape Airy. 
 
 Netagamu Islands, WSW., 4^ miles from Cape Airy, are small, 
 with a remarkable mound on the largest of them. Between them and 
 the Harrington Islands there is a bay of the mainland with clay cliffs 
 ard sandy beach at its head and innumerable small rocks across its 
 m uth. 
 
 Netagamu River.— The entrance to this river is IJ miles NW. from 
 Netagamu Islands, and may be known by the sandy beach, backed with 
 
 -t •:'*!^ 
 
thill or to the 
 lliirlxtr, tliere 
 1 vchsi'Ih may 
 u(ld\ liottoiu, 
 iicjoiiiiii^r tiie 
 t'scciit Point, 
 on th(^ north 
 ixtt'iid across 
 irbor to (hes- 
 cattina River 
 
 . The itointB 
 yards withiu 
 harbor. The 
 
 la n arbor, or 
 ieep tlie east- 
 ig across the 
 ) ishiiid there 
 III the road or 
 
 of the Doyle 
 if. There are 
 f bottom here 
 lis, witii rock, 
 
 until within 
 
 Cape Airy to 
 liey are high 
 i;\. Between 
 ige and deep 
 intricate for 
 and useless, 
 coast. 
 
 ' W. mag.), 2 
 300 yards in 
 i it^ varying 
 
 irs S. 70° W. 
 
 y, are small, 
 en them and 
 bh clay cliffs 
 ks across its 
 
 58 NW. from 
 backed with 
 
 ST. MARY ISLANDS — MIUDLK ISLANDS. 
 
 249 
 
 a tliick growth of spruce trees, on citlier side of tlm entrance. It is a 
 huge Hticam with <leep water in the narrow ciitraiice, and also within 
 close up to the falls, which descend perpendicularly m feet, on either 
 side of an island, and into a basin ), mile wide. These falls, which are 
 U miles from the entrance, can be partly seen fnmi the sea when they 
 bear N. L';}^ E, (N. 55'^ E. mag.). A Hemicin^ular bar of sand, '.Iry at 
 low water, with the exfception of a narrow channel with .{ feet water in 
 it, extends one mile out from the entrance, ami is extremely dangerous 
 to boats because of the heavy surf. The current in this riv» «i rapid, 
 and the bottom of the channel is rock, but small schooners may be 
 secured on the eastern side, one mile within the entrance, where there 
 are two huts, the temporary residence of salmon flshermen durin;,' the 
 season. The hills of the mainland, 4 or n miles westward of this river, 
 are rather higher than is usual on this coast, rising to the height of 400 
 or 500 feet above the sea. 
 
 St. Mary Islands lie « miles off the mainland, and their NE. extreme 
 bears S. .370 W. (S. (;8- W. mag.), 10 miles from Cape Airy. There are 
 two of those islands so close together that they may be considered as 
 one narrow island about 3 miles long. Their lieight is 200 feet above 
 the sea; they are of bare steep granite, and bold all round. 
 
 Cliff Islands lie ^ mile W. by N. from the SW. i)oint of St. Mary 
 Islands. There is a ledge which shows south of them. Clift" Islands 
 are one round and steep island ^ mile in diameter, with several small 
 islets and rocks close southwestward of it, and deep water between 
 them all. Between these and Boat Islands there is a safe channel A 
 mile wide. 
 
 Boat Islands, a cluster of small islands close together, lie WSW 
 2^ miles from the SW. point of St. Mary Islands. They occupy a space 
 of 13 miles in a SW. direction by about J mile wide. 
 
 Middle Islands are a chain of islands, nearly joined at low water 
 with several small islets adjacent. The westernmost island is 2\ miles 
 long and 150 feet high. The whole group covers a space of 3^ miles in a 
 SW. direction, by about one mile wide. There is a good anchorage in 
 10 or 12 fathoms between the westernmost island and two smaller 
 islands northward of it; but it is too small for large vessels and too 
 intricate for description, and can only be approached from the eastward. 
 
 Middle Islands lie IJ miles from the main, and there is no safe chan- 
 nel between, in consequence of the numerous islets and rocks. Between 
 these islands and Boat Islands there is a safe channel, nearly one mile 
 wide. In all these channels the soundings are irregular and the ground 
 Ibul. In some places there are only 15, whilst iu others there are 40 or 
 50 fathoms water. 
 
 Tender Reef, small and awash at low water, lies X. 50° W. (N. 19° 
 W. mag.) nearly one mile from the northernmost of St. Mary Eeefs 
 and S. 410 W. (S. 72o W. mag.) 1| miles from the SW. extreme of Boat 
 Islands. 
 
f 
 
 wm 
 
 % 
 
 h 
 
 
 250 
 
 GULF OP 8T. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 Bt. Mary Reefs, tho inoHt dun^roroiis oiV the coiiMt, are four Icdp^oH 
 JuHt under water, on Bonio of which tho Hca always l>reakH. From tlio 
 iiorthenuDOHt to the flonthernnioHt ledge th«^ diHtance in one mile, and 
 tho latter lies S. 40° N. (S. 71° W. mag.) 2.^ miles from the SW. of tlie 
 Boat Islands. 
 
 Southwest Islands are a group of small islets, of which the western- 
 most is high and round. There is a patch of 113 fathoms lying '2 miles 
 Honthcaotward of St. Mary Reefs, and another of 8 fathoms nearly ns 
 far southwestward of them. 
 
 Channels. — There are irregular soundings and deep water around 
 and between all these rocks and islets, but no warning by the hand 
 lead. There is a clear channel between Tender lieef and Southwest 
 liilands, and also between St. Mary Reefs and Boat Islands; at least 
 there is nothing with so little water as 3 fathoms, since the sea often 
 breaks in that depth, and it must have been seen. 
 
 Watagheistic Island and Sound.— Watagheistic Island is a large 
 and hilly island 3 miles long by more than 1^ miles wide. It is much 
 broken into coves, and lies in the mouth of a large bay of the mainland, 
 from which it is difficult to distinguish, in a vessel at sea. Wata- 
 gheistic Sound is a secure harbor between the harbor and the main- 
 land. The eastern entrance is narrow and intricate, but the western 
 entrance is J mile wide; and although tliere are several rocks and 
 ledges in it, yet it may be safely sailed through, with proper care and 
 the assistance of the chart. Between the east end of Watagheistic 
 Island and Cliff" Islands are many islets, rocks, rind reefs, which it would 
 be useless to enumerate, so that it will be sufficient to remark that Cove 
 Island, whi(;li is the largest of them, is J mile in diameter, and sur- 
 rounded with rocks and ledges. It is NW. 4 miles from the north point 
 of St. Mary Islands, and there are thickly scattered rocks, both above 
 and under water, all the way from it to Netugamu Islands, 6J miles 
 northeastward. 
 
 Caution. — If it were not that cases sometimes occur in which a 
 secure anchorage is indispensable to the saf(>ty of a vessel, directions 
 would not be given for Watagheistic Sound, which can not be reached 
 ■without passing through 7 miles of dangerous navigation. The follow- 
 ing brief directions are given, with the cauti«m that their use must be 
 accompanied with a good lookout from tlie rigging, for it is impossible 
 to be certain that every ledge has been found in .such a place. 
 
 Directions for Northern Entrance. — Being to the southwestward 
 with a westerly wind, a vessel may either pass between Tender Reef 
 and Southwest Islands, and farther eastward between Middle and Boat 
 Islands, or she may run down outside St. Mary Reefs, and then haul in 
 to the northward between Boat and Cliff" Islands, which is the safer 
 route, and the one for which the following directions are given : Being 
 then in mid-channel between Boat and Clifif Islands, steer N. 21° W. 
 (N. 10° E. mag, ), and that course will lead close to Bold Rock, N. 57° E. 
 
 ^S^TP 
 
h:9fs: 
 
 WATAOHKlSTfC SOUND. 
 
 251 
 
 i fonr ledpeH 
 H. From tlio 
 )ne niilo, and 
 e SW. of tlie 
 
 the western- 
 lying '2 miles 
 oas nearly an 
 
 vater around 
 by the hand 
 d Southwest 
 nds; at least 
 the sea often 
 
 md is a large 
 . It is much 
 ;he mainland, 
 sea. Wata- 
 id the main- 
 t the western 
 al rocks and 
 per care and 
 VVatagheistic 
 hich it would 
 rk that Cove 
 iter, and sur- 
 e north point 
 s, both above 
 nds, 6^ miles 
 
 : in which a 
 el, directions 
 )t be reached 
 The follow- 
 :* use must be 
 is impossible 
 ace. 
 uthwestward 
 
 Tender Reef 
 Idle and Boat 
 
 then haul in 
 1 is the safer 
 'iven: Being 
 ser N. 21° W. 
 ck, N. 57° E. 
 
 (N. SS-^ E. mag.), \ mile from tlio NK.jMiint of Midtlle Islands. Center 
 Keef, which always shows, hmrs X. ir, > 10. (N. 7'^ K. may.), \.\ miles 
 from Bold Uock, and there is a dear channel between them, Itjit not 
 between Bold Uock and Middle Islands. 
 
 If the vessel passes eastward of Bohl Kock at about ~\ mile, as soon 
 as she has passed that rock alter course to \. 41° W. (X. I.P W. mag.), 
 and when slie huA run 2'1 miles she will be midway between Black 
 Ledge and Bare Uocks, the latter bearing from the former X. liT^ E. 
 (N, C80 E. mag.), 1^ miles. Do n(»t g<> near this ledge, which has not 
 been sounded oft". Alter course now to N. .I'^ W. (X. 2('P l], mag.), 
 passing westward of all the islets to the northwestward (»f Cove Island, 
 and when the vessel has run If mile.s, Beacon Islet will be seen (close to 
 the SE. extreme of Watagheistic Island, an<I with a smaller islet \ mile 
 westward of it) ^ mile ahead. Run past this islet sufliciently far to 
 avoid a reef and 3-fathom ])at(!h, which together extend 800 yards 
 NNE. off it; then haul in X. 54° W, (X, 2;P VV, mag.), giving the islet 
 a berth of full ^ mile, when the deiiths will be 10 or 12 fathoms. 
 
 When the vessel has run A mile from the time Beacon Islet was 
 abeam, a deep bay will be observed in the XE. side of Watagheistic 
 Island. Steer for tlie narrow channel between the north entrance 
 point of this bay and two small islets which lie nearly 300 yards NNE. 
 of it. As soon as she arrives at these islets, another deep cove will be 
 seen in Watagheistic Island, with an islet nearly filling up its mouth. 
 Steer to pass close eastward of this islet, and then westward for the 
 channel between Watagheistic Island and the islands to the northeast- 
 ward which extend across to the mainland in that direction, with the 
 exception of a very narrow 3 fathom channel. Keep in the middle of 
 the channel, inclining toward the west or the Watagheistic Island side. 
 The channel is at first only about 170 yards wide, but it soon expands to 
 320 yards, with a depth of 15 fathoms in the middle over mud bottom, 
 where the vessel may anchor in great security. After she has i»assed 
 the reef off Beacon Island there is nothing in the way by this route, 
 the islands being quite bold. 
 
 If wishing to run through into Upper Sound, beware of a reef which 
 lies across the mouth of the channel at the distance of 300 yards. As 
 there is no safe channel northeastward of Cove Island, a vessel can not 
 approach this anchorage with an easterly wind without first beating up 
 along the SE. side of Watagheistic Island, after she has passed between 
 Bare Rocks and Black Ledge, so that in that case the southern entrance 
 to Watagheistic Sound is to be preferred. 
 
 Directions for Southern Entrance.— With an easterly wind, a 
 vessel may either sail in from sea through the same channel as before, or 
 eastward of St. ]\Iary Islands, which is quite safe. Being to the east- 
 ward, steer for the XE. point of St. Mary Islands, which may be passed 
 at the distance of 400 yards, and then, bringing it astern, steer from it 
 S. 88° W. (X. 01° W. mag.), and Center Reef, which must be looked out 
 
 ,1 
 
 ,,*' 
 
252 
 
 GULF OV ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 for, will be abeam at J mile to the northward when 2J miles has been 
 run from the NE. point of St. Mary Islands. The reef is bold all round, 
 and it may be passed on either side at 400 yards, but southward of it is 
 to bo 'preferred 
 
 Continue the S. 88° W. (N. 61° W. mag.) course for one mile past the 
 reef, then haul up N. 47° W. (N. 10° W. mag.); and when the vessel 
 has run ,i miles Seal Islands, forming the north point of Boussier Bay 
 (full of islands), will bear 8. 59° W. (west mag.), distant g mile. The 
 channel to the westward between Watagheistic Island and the main- 
 land will now be open, and two small islets will be seen, nearly in its 
 center in line, bearing S. 7;° W. (N. 72^ W. mag.). The nearest of 
 these islets will be distant about IJ miles. They are J mile frc i each 
 other, and quite bold ; but bear in mind that exactly in the line from 
 the one islet to the other, and TuO yards N. 77° E. (S. 72° E. map.) from 
 the eastern of them, is Kettle Rock, very small, and just covered at 
 low water. This rock lies exactly in a line from Seal Islands to the 
 point of a shoal cove of Watagheistic Island, which is open to the 
 westward; there is a rock awash 160 yards southward of the west 
 entrance point of this cove. The channels on either side of Kettle 
 Bock, which is quite bold, are each J mile wide, and have from 20 to 
 2G fathoms water in them. Having brought the islets in line, the ves- 
 sel has only to avoid Kettle Bock, running in S. 77° W. (N. 72° W. 
 mag.) on either side of it, and the two islets westward of it, and then 
 hauling up to the northwar,' under the SW. end of Watagheistic 
 Island, where she may anchor in from 17 to 20 fathoms over mud 
 bottom, with plenty of room, no dangers anywhere near her, and well 
 sheltered from all winds. 
 
 From both the anchorages a vessel with the chart may sail into 
 Upper Sound northward of Watagheistic Island, which is navigable 
 throughout for large vessels, with a convenient depth of water, and 
 good ground for anchoring. 
 
 Wood and Water may be had there in abundance; and in Hamelle 
 Harbor, at the northeastern extremity of the sound, a hunter and 
 salmon tisher resides, and there is another in Boussier Bay. 
 
 Anchorage. — There is no good anchorage on the route to, or outside 
 either entrance to, Watagheistic Sound, the soundings being irregular, 
 ■with deep water and generally foul ground. The breakers on every 
 side, on so many rocks and ledges, make the place look, as it really is, 
 extremely dangerous. 
 
 Etamamu River. — Between Middle Islands and Wapitagun, the 
 mainland is broken into coves, and lined with islets and rocks innumer- 
 able, among which nothing but a very small vessel, well acquainted 
 with the coast, could find her way. There is nothing tijere worthy of 
 notice, excepting Etamamu River, which enters a bay open to the south- 
 ward full of islets and rocks. The river, consisting of a succession of 
 rapids, is generally narrow; it, however^ widens in several places, form- 
 ing lakes, with still, deep water. 
 
miT 
 
 ST. 
 
 ^ miles has been 
 is bold all round, 
 outbward of it is 
 
 )ne mile past the 
 when the vessel 
 of Boussier Bay 
 ant § mile. The 
 d and the m<aiu- 
 jen, nearly in its 
 The nearest of 
 I mile frc i each 
 
 in the line from 
 2° E. raa{».) from 
 
 just covered at 
 1 Islands to the 
 I is open to the 
 ard of the west 
 r side of Kettle 
 have from 20 to 
 
 in line, the ves- 
 
 W. (N. 72° W. 
 cl of it, and then 
 of Watagheistic 
 ;homs over mud 
 ar her, aud well 
 
 t may sail into 
 ich is navigable 
 h of water, and 
 
 aud in Hamelle 
 , a hunter and 
 Bay. 
 
 ite to, or outside 
 being irregular, 
 jakers on every 
 i, as it really is, 
 
 Wapitagun, the 
 
 1 rocks innumer- 
 well acquainted 
 tijere worthy of 
 )en to the south- 
 
 ' a succession of 
 ral places, form- 
 
 WAPITAGUN HARBOR. 
 
 253 
 
 Trading Post— At the mouth of this river there is a trading and 
 salmon- fishery post, at which two men reside all the year. 
 
 South Makers Ledge is a small rock which is never entirely covered 
 when the sea is smooth. Its whole extent, above and under water, 
 is 250 yards east aud west by 100 yards north and south, and there is 
 no danger near it excepting a patch of 4 fathoms, bearing from it 
 S. 60° E. (S. 35° E. mag.), and distant 400 yards. The soundings are 
 very irregular round this ledge. It bears from Cape Whittle S. 78° E. 
 (S. 47° E. mag.) G^ miles. 
 
 Cormorant Rocks lie directly between Cape Whittle and South 
 Makers Ledge, leaving a channel between those rocks and the ledge 
 nearly 2f miles wide. There is no danger excepting the elates of Cor- 
 morant Bocks, one of which, with 4 fathoms, stretches 750 yards 8.27° 
 E. (S. 4° W. mag.) from the southeasternmost Cormorant Rock ; another, 
 N. 34° B. (IS. 65° E. mag.) from Nest Eock and S. 78° E. (S. 47° E. 
 mag.) from Slime Rock (the NE. Cormorant), f mile from each, with 
 only 2 fathoms, and a 2-fathom patch which bears N. 7° E. (N. 38° E. 
 mag.) J mile from Slime Rock. There is no channel between Cormorant 
 Rocks, or between them and Lake Island. 
 
 "Wapitagun Harbor.— Mistassini, or the Great Stone, is a remarka- 
 ble block of granite lying on the SE. extreme of the Outer Wapitagun 
 Islands. It resembles a mortar, especially when seen from the SW., 
 and has been called The Gun by the fishermen. It serves as an excel- 
 lent guide to East Passage into Wapitagun Harbor, the entrance to 
 which is 3 mile northeastward of it, and N. 22° W. (N. 9° E. mag.) 3^ 
 miles from South Makers Ledge, Outer Wapitagun Islands, which are 
 of bare granite, about 70 or 80 feet high, are so close together and so 
 overlap that they appear like one island. They completely shelter the 
 harbor, which is a long and narrow channel running NE. and SW. 
 between them and Wapitagun Island, which is next northward of them. 
 West Passage of the harbor is 2 miles south westward from the Mistas- 
 sini, and N. 60° W. (N. 29° W. mag.) 4 miles from South Makers Ledge. 
 
 It is about 160 yards wide, and there are parts of the channel, 
 between islets within East Passage, which are not more than 120 yards 
 wide. The harbor is nowhere more than 280 yards wide, excepting 
 where there are small bays; so that although the depth of water is 
 more than sufficient for large vessels, yet the navigation is so intricate 
 that this harbor is not fit for those of a greater burden than 150 or 
 200 tons. 
 
 Water. — There is water to be had on Lake aud Wapitagun Islands; 
 but for wood the boats must proceed through the islands to the main- 
 land, northward from the harbor about 3 miles. 
 
 Directions.— The position of East Passage into Wapitagun Harbor, 
 between Outer Wapitagun Islands and others to the northeastward, 
 has been pointed out, aud in approaching it from the southward with 
 an easterly wind there is nothing in the way. There is a rock and 
 ledge which show on the west side of the entrance. Keep, therefore, 
 
 
 m 
 
wr^S'iS'i- 
 
 254 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE NORTH COAST. 
 
 IJ 
 
 the eastern sule aboard, steeriug in ]S". 6(5° W. (N. S^c W. mag.). Three 
 small islets will be seeu j^ mile witliiu the entrance, and northward of 
 them a cove in Wapitagun Island extending westward round a steep 
 rocky point, which has a small sunken rock close oft" it to the east- 
 ward. There is safe anchorage in 2i ftithoms in this cove, but if wish 
 iug to run into the harbor, leave all three islets to the southward, pass- 
 ing close to them, and then bear up southwestward, between them and 
 the steep rocky point of the cove just mentioned. This is the safer 
 passage; the other, southward of all three islets, is only GO yards wide, 
 and has, besides, a ledge in the way, which can only be avoided by 
 having a trusty person in the rigging, which is necessary at all times, 
 in entering this and similar harbors. 
 
 To enter "Wapitagun Harbor by West' Passage, and with a westerly 
 wind, attend to the following directions, remembering that a lookout 
 for the ledges from the rigging is absolutely necessary, even with the 
 best of charts : Eun down between Cormorant Rocks and South Makers 
 Ledge, and then haul in K 31° W. (north mag.), so as to pass at least ^ 
 mile eastward of the easternmost of Cormorant Eocks, which will be 
 readily known from Ifest Eock, covered with birds and stained white 
 by them, being about 240 yards westward of it. Look out now for the 
 small Two-fathom Ledge, which lies 800 yards NNE. of this rock, which 
 leave also to the westward ; and having passed it, haul up westward a 
 little, so as to pass not less than 600 yards eastward of Slime Eock 
 (the northeasternmost of Cormorant Eocks), in order to avoid the 
 other Two-fathom Ledge, which bears from it N. 8° E. (N. 39° E. mag.) 
 4 mile. 
 
 Having passed close eastward of this ledge, steer directly for the 
 islet in the channel, between the SW. extreme of Outer Wapitagun 
 Islands and Cormorant Point, taking care not to haul up higher than 
 N. 60° W. (N. 29° W. mag.), to insure passing eastward of Long Ledge, 
 which lies midway between Slime Eock and Cormorant Point, and on 
 the line joining the SW. end of the islet steered for, and the high east 
 end of Lake Island, which, therefore, must not be opened westward of 
 the islet. Having passed Long Ledge, bring the west end of the islet 
 to bear N. 31° W. (north mag.), and steer for it, looking out for the 
 7-foot ledge, lying 300 yards southward from the SW. extreme of Outer 
 Wapitagun Islands, which should not be approached nearer than 400 
 yards until the ledge is passed. 
 
 The patch which lies 2-40 yards SSW. of the islet is quite bold, and 
 will be avoided if the islet be not brought to bear eastward of N. 31° 
 W. (north mag.). When the vessel arrives within 400 yards of the 
 islet, and the harbor begins to appear open to the northeastward, bear 
 up quickly for the entrance, leaving the islet northward of the vessel. 
 When once Avithiu the entrances, the rocks are bold and the water 
 smooth, and an anchorage may be chosen anywhere, the general depths 
 being from 16 to 20 fathoms. The best berth, however, is in a small 
 
 CT-jg^js^jT I inli if ■ li niMH* " m 
 
lag.). Three 
 northward of 
 )uud a »teep 
 
 to the east- 
 !, but if wish- 
 ihward, pass- 
 ien them and 
 
 is the safer 
 [) yards wide, 
 ) avoided by 
 at all times, 
 
 ;h a westerly 
 lat a lookout 
 !ven with the 
 South Makers 
 ass at least ^ 
 ivhich will be 
 stained white 
 t now for the 
 s rock, which 
 ? westward a 
 :" Slime Bock 
 to avoid the 
 39° E. mag.) 
 
 ectly for the 
 ' Wapitagun 
 ) higher than 
 
 Long Ledge, 
 'oint, and on 
 he high east 
 
 westward of 
 1 of the islet 
 ? out for the 
 erne of Outer 
 irer than 400 
 
 ite bold, and 
 ard of N. 31° 
 yards of the 
 kstward, bear 
 )f the vessel, 
 nd the water 
 sueral depths 
 is in a small 
 
 WAPITAGUN HARBOR. 
 
 255 
 
 bay on the south side of the harbor, 1,200 yards within West Passage, 
 in 7 fatlioms. The bottom within the harbor is everywhere of mud,' 
 but outside it is all rocky, with irregular soundings. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, in Wapitagun Harbor at 
 lOli. 30m.; ordinary springs rise 5 feet, neaps 3 feet. The flood from 
 the eastward and ebb from the westward usually run past the entrances 
 of the harbor, at a rate varying from h to one mile; but both streams 
 are much influenced by the winds. 
 
 
 
 'h 
 
 |!} 
 
IK' ' ■-'■ ^)^'k_._ 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 GTILF OF ST. LAWRENCE, NORTH SHORE, CAPE WHITTLE TO POINT 
 
 DES MONTS. 
 
 QUEBEC. 
 (H.O. Chart No. 1108.) 
 
 Aspect of Coast. — From Cape Whittle, Natashquan Point is 62 
 miles uearlj' west. With the exception of the first 13 miles eastward of 
 Natashquan Point, where the shore is of sand, this coast is of granite, 
 which rises into steep hills and ridges, with rounded summits, having 
 between them morasses and stagnant ponds. The mainland is seldom 
 higher than 200 feet, even at the heads of the bays, and it diminishes 
 in height toward the sea, as do also the innumerable small islands, 
 IslctM, and rocks which fringe the coast, and which in some parts 
 extend fully 5 miles from the nearest point of the mainland. The 
 islands are bare of wood, and so, also, is the main, excepting up the 
 bays or where sandy tracks occur, which are always covered with a 
 thick g/ovvfh of spruce, with occasional birch and poplar. 
 
 Seen from the distance of 12 or 15 miles, this coast presents an out- 
 line so little diversif5ed that it is nearly impossible to distinguish one 
 pBtt (ff it from another; and it is only when a vessel approaches within 
 3 or 4 miles of the outer rocks that its broken and dangerous nature 
 becomes apparent. 
 
 Soundings. — Tlie outer rocks, both above and under water, are so 
 bold that there is no warning from the use of the hand lead; but there 
 are soundings with the deep-sea lead In moderate, but irregular, depths 
 off every part of this coast. These deep-water soundings are too irreg- 
 ular to admit of a concise description ; the chart, therefore, must be 
 referred to with the remark that they are sufficient to warn a vessel of 
 her approacli toward danger at night or in fogs, since these depths do 
 not amount to siO fathoms at any less distance than ' miles from the 
 outei locks. . 
 
 Tides. — The tides are weak, irregular, and influenced both in their 
 strength and direction by the winds. 
 
 Whittle Rocks are the outermost of the many sm.all rocks above 
 and under water lying oft' to the southward and westward of Cape 
 Whittle; tlcy are two half tide rocks, and are 2iJ miles from the cai)e. 
 
 All these jocksare steep, with from 20 to 40 fathoms water between 
 them ; small fishing and egging schooners find their way among them, 
 being guided by the eye. 
 
 256 
 
 s'/is A^.i-i .iir:sfitv^*^;B«^ 
 
I TO POINT 
 
 :»oint is 62 
 eastward of 
 of grauite, 
 lits, having 
 d is seldom 
 ; diminislies 
 lall islands, 
 some parts 
 iland. The 
 ting up the 
 Bred with a 
 
 }nts an out- 
 inguish one 
 ches within 
 'ous nature 
 
 ater, are so 
 . ; but there 
 liar, depths 
 re too irreg- 
 re, must be 
 I a vessel of 
 i depths do 
 es from the 
 
 Dth in their 
 
 rocks above 
 -rd of Cape 
 n tlie cai)e. 
 ter between 
 mong them, 
 
 i 
 
 COACOA( HO HAY. 
 
 257 
 
 Wolf Bay, the .u-st inlet westward of Cape Whittle, is or 7 miles 
 deep. There is plenty of wat«^r in its intricate channels, and few 
 dangers that do not show, bnt a number of rocks and ledges extend 
 across its mouth from Cape Whittle to Wolf Island, and are so scat- 
 tered about that directions wonld not be of the least use. 
 
 ■ Wolf Island may be easily recognized, being higher and larger than 
 
 ■ tlie outer islands usually are off this part of the coast. It is about •} 
 mile long, and ap])ears as two hills, which are about loO feet high. 
 
 Outer Islet is small, low, and lies about one mile southward of Wolf 
 Island. It is the outermost of a chain of islands which extends 4 or 
 r> miles from the point of the mainland, dividing Wolf and Coacoacho 
 Bays. It lies 7 miles W. by S. from Cape Whittle. 
 
 Beacon.— A conical beacon, 30 tVet high and painted wiute, has been 
 erected on this islet. 
 
 Coacoacho Bay is the only place affording anchorage to large ves- 
 sels upon this part of the coast. Jt is not at all difficult of entrance, 
 although the number of islets and rocks in every direction makes it 
 appear so. There is an excellent harbor in the head of the bay, called 
 the Basin, and another, formed by an arm running into it, and named 
 Tertiary Shell Bay, is equally safe. Farther out than these harbors 
 the bay is more than I mile wide, and quite sufficiently sheltered from 
 the sea for the safety of any vossel with good anchors and cables. 
 
 Q-range Rock is the southeastern most of three dangerous ledges 
 lying off the entrance to Coacoacho Bay. It is the shallowest part of 
 a narrow ridge of rocks about >i mile long in a SW\ direction, and is 
 only shown by breakers when there is a heavy sea running. From the 
 least water on it, 15 feet, Outer Islet lies 1 ,i miles N. 3° E. (N. 34o e, 
 mag.) ; and from its southwestern end, in 3 fathoms, the same islet bears 
 N. 7° B. (N. 38° E. mag.) 1 J miles. 
 
 South Breaker, which also shows only in heavy weather, lies S. 75° 
 W. (N. 74° W. mag.) 2 miles from On*er Islet and N. (^o W. (N. 30° 
 W. mag.) 2 miles from Grange Kock. It has less than 12 ffiet of water 
 on it, and is near the northeastern end of a ridge of rocks, which ex- 
 tends from it f mile SSW., with 1(5 feet water near its outer exti-eiuity. 
 
 Southwest Breaker, with only 3 feet water on it, lies N. 62° W. 
 (N. 31° W. mag.) 2^ miles from South Breaker, and S. 59" W. (west 
 mag.) 2^ miles from Audubon Point. There are clear channels between 
 these ledges. 
 
 Directions.~To enter Coacoacho Bay by the most direct channel 
 between Grange Bock and South Breakei, proceed as follows: Being 
 not less than 3 miles from Outer Islet, bring it to bear between N. 18^ 
 E. (N. 490 E. mag.) and N. 52° E. (N. 83o E. mag.), and steer for it until 
 the vessel is within Grange Kock and South Breaker, or until Outer Islet 
 is distant not more than one mile, when the rocks which lie about A 
 mile northward of the islet will bo plainly seen. Pass westward of 
 those rocks, at ^ mile, and when abreast of them, a chain of low rocks 
 1151 17 
 
 I 
 
 ji 
 
 |l 
 
 111 
 
 Jf 
 
 S^i^^iiVflSfii^- 
 
■MMl 
 
 258 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 Ifp 
 
 which project SW. from Emery Islaud will be seeu right ahead. Briiij;' 
 the point of this chain to bear N. 7° E. (N. 38° E, mag.), when it will 
 appear in line with the extreme i)oint of the mainland on the NW. side 
 near the head of the bay. 
 
 Steer in upon tins leading mark or bearing until the vessel is past 
 some rocks which lie about A mile irora the east side of the Audubon 
 Islets, These rocks, which are dry at low water and can always be 
 seen, must be left on the port hand. When up to the Emery Eocks 
 the buy will be seen open right ahead and clear of danger, excepting 
 Milne Reef, which is partly dry in low tides, and extends nearly ^ mile 
 out from the low rocks, its outer end lying nearly in a line from Terti- 
 ary Voiiit fo Crocodile Islet on the west side of the bay. To pass to 
 the westward of it, keep Audubon Point shut in behind Milne Point 
 and ♦ • "codile Islet. The best berth is on the western side of toe bay, 
 } niiii! ^ ichln Crocodile Islet, in 9 fathoms mud. 
 
 In ruiiuing for Ooacoacho Bay from the westward, a vessel may 
 eitler I'^ss between Southwest and South Breakers by bringing the 
 huier f)T NE. end of Wolf Island to bear N. 58° E. (S. 89° E. mag.), and 
 Stef ii'jg i!>v it; or by bringing Outer Islet to bear nothing eastward of 
 N. 52- E. (^^.85^ E. mag.), and running toward it, until she is within 
 less than one mile, when she may haul in for Emery Hocks, as before 
 directed. 
 
 Tertiary Shell Bay has nothing in the way excepting a small rock 
 above water ^ mile within the entrance, which must be left on the stf».r- 
 board hand. This bay is not more than 200 yards wide h mile from the 
 entrance, but it becomes wider within, with from 5 to 11 fathoms water 
 over mud bottom, and is there quite landlocked. 
 
 Basin. — In running in for the Basin, keep the NW, side of the bay 
 aboard until the vessel is within J mile of the island in the head of the 
 bay; then sheer over to the eastward, toward that island, to avoid a 
 shoal of bowlder stones which extend nearly 400 yards off the west side 
 of the bay. The channel between this shoal and the island is only 200 
 yards wide, but deep enough for large vessels. Give the island a berth 
 of 100 yards, leaving it to the eastward. As soon as she is past the 
 inner end of the island, haul to the west'vard into the mouth of a small 
 bay, and the water will soon sho- ; o 8 r; thorns, muddy bottom, where 
 she must anchor, and will be quiti. sheltered from p' ^ry wind. 
 
 Coacoacho River flows throM:?!) a wide and shallow channel full of 
 bowlders, and discharges the waters of a large lake, to which boats 
 can ascend with the tide. Its shores are wooded with spruce trees, and 
 water may be obtained near the western side of the entrance. 
 
 Tides. — There is very little stream of tide in Coacoacho Bay, but a 
 weak and irregular stream of flood and ebb sets through and between 
 the islands. It is high water, full and change, at lOh. 30m.; ordinary 
 springs rise 5 feet, and neaps 3 feet. 
 
 Olomanoshsebo River. — The coast, for the first 12 miles westward 
 
 -^ jfaiyi g w iwn 
 
lead. Briii^- 
 when it will 
 ;lie NW. side 
 
 essel is past 
 he Audubon 
 u always be 
 Smery Eocks 
 jr, excepting 
 learly ^ mile 
 e from Terti- 
 To pass to 
 Milne Point 
 > of the bay, 
 
 vessel may 
 bringing tlie 
 S. mag.)- and 
 
 eastward of 
 ihe is within 
 ks, as before 
 
 a small rock 
 b on the stw- 
 nile frow the 
 ithoms water 
 
 [e of the bay 
 .' head of the 
 (1, to avoid a 
 bhe west side 
 d is only 200 
 sland a berth 
 3 is past the 
 th of a small 
 )ttom, where 
 ind. 
 
 lannel full of 
 which boats 
 ice trees, and 
 ace. 
 
 Bay, but a 
 and between 
 m.; ordinary 
 
 les westward 
 
 WA8HSHEIXOOTAI HAY KKGASHKA B.\Y. 
 
 259 
 
 of Coacoacho, is formed of innumerable i.sh?t.s and rocks to Oloinano- 
 sheebo, or Paint River, which is called also by the Canadians "La 
 Romaine." This is a considerable river, falling 20 feet over granite 
 into tlie head of a bay 4 miles deep, but ho slioal that boats can scarcely 
 enter it at low water. There is a trading i)ost of the Hudson Bay Com- 
 pany on the east side near the falls, neither of which can be seen from 
 the sea, being hidden by the islands; but the ])lace may be known by 
 the low sandy alitts, thickly wooded with spruce trees, on either side of 
 the entrance of the bay. The tide flows 2 miles up the river. 
 
 Treble Islet and Loon Rocks lie to the south westward, the latter 
 at tlie distance of 6 miles from the above bay. Loon Rocks, which can 
 always be seen, are 3 miles from the nearest point of the mainland, and 
 are the outermost danger otf this part of the coast. 
 
 Washsheecootai Bay, 10 miles westward of Olomanoaheebo River, 
 is 2i miles wide, and has off its entrance several rocky small ledges 
 whi(!h make it difficult of entrance. Cloudberry Point is the west 
 entrance point of this bay, and is formed by the mainland. The east 
 entrance point of the bay is formed by small rocks and islets. At 3 
 miles within Cloudberry Point the bay contracts to a very narrow inlet, 
 having several rocks and islets in it, and from 4 to 2^ fathoms water 
 over muddy bottom for the first 4 miles up; after which it becomes 
 sli allow for 4 miles farther, to the falls of a considerable river, where 
 there is a trading post and salmon fishery of the Hudson Bay Company. 
 
 A rock, with 6 feet water on it, lies S. 79° E. (S. 49° E. mag.) 1 ,^o niiles 
 from Cloudberry Point. A conical beacon, 25 feet high , has been erected 
 on an island at the head of Washsheecootai Bay, which bearing N, 14^ 
 E. (N. 44^ E. mag.) leads into the bay clear of all shoals and westward 
 of the before-mentioned rock. 
 
 A rock is reported as lying 1^ niiles S. 8° W. (S. 38' W. mag.) of 
 I'loudberry Point. 
 
 This inlet is completely open to winds from southward and westward, 
 and affords scarcely any shelter for the first 5 miles witliin Cloudberry 
 Point. Vessels of considerable burden might riuil shelter in it in time 
 of need, but it is too intri(!ate ii, place for the general purposes of navi- 
 gation, or for any written directions to be of avail. 
 
 Musquarro River, wiiere there is a Hudson Bay Company trading 
 and fishing post, is 3 miles within the west point of a bay full of small 
 islets and rocks. This river becomes rapid a short distance within the 
 entrance, and is useless excepting to boats or very small schooners. It 
 will be known by the iiouses which are ou the east side of the entrance, 
 and also by a remarkable r-eti and precipit<^us ridge of grtinite, about 
 I'OO.feet higk and abtmt 2 miles westward of the river. 
 
 KefpHhka Bay. — Theri- .-^re several low bare rucks and i. Ves which 
 always show ^ mile off Curt^w Point, which is 4J miles westward of 
 Musquarro River and is the wist entrance point of Kegashka Bay. 
 
 This hay, between Curlew and Kegii*\ka Points, is 3 miles wide and 
 
■»-*--_ 
 
 260 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 Is* 
 
 1^ mile!* deep, lu the western half of the bay there are several small 
 islets, too wide apart to atl'ord much shelter from the sea. It is only 
 iu the NW. eorner of the bay, within Kegashka Point, that a vessel 
 can be secure from southerly winds. There is room there for several 
 small schooners,. but for only one vessel of any size, and she must be 
 moored with open hawse to the eastward, with a third anchor on shore 
 to the SW., BO as to be able to haul in close under the point when it 
 blows hard froDi the southward. The depth of water within the islets 
 is from, 4 to 6 fathoms over tine sandy bottom. 
 
 Kegashka Point is formed by an island separated from a rocky 
 peninsula by a very narrow channel, dry at low water. Both the island 
 and peninsula are distinguished by being partly covered with spruce 
 trees. There are also a few spruce trees on an islet, f mile westward 
 of the point; and as no other islands on this part of the coast are 
 wooded, the bay may be recognized by that circumstance. There is 
 a fine sandy beach and low sandy cliffs in the NW. corner of the bay, 
 and there are also similar clifl's for about a mile westward of the 
 isthmus above mentioned. This sandy tract is densely wooded with 
 dwarf spruce, another circumstance which serves to distinguish this 
 bay and is the origin of its name, which signifies impenetrable woods. 
 Green Island is of low granite, covered with grass, and is the outermost 
 and largest islet sheltering the bay, being about 600 yards in diameter, 
 and f mile eastward of Kegashka Point. There are several small islets 
 and rocks within, and also eastward of Green Island, and one small 
 and low black islet between it and the inner part of Kegashka Point. 
 
 Wood and Water may be obtained without difficulty in the western 
 part of Kegashka Bay, where there were several Canadian families, 
 consisting in all of 50 persons, in the year 1868. Their houses are visible 
 from the sea. They have ganh-ns and keep sheep and cattle, and they 
 also prosecute the fishenea and winter liunting. 
 
 Directions. — The safest channel into Kegashka Bay is between the 
 low Black Islet and K«igashka Point, and is .340 yards wide; it carries 
 7 fathoms water, and is (juite clear. V^^hen coming from the westward, 
 give the south ex*re*nity of Kegashka Point a berth of J mile, or go 
 no nearer than the depth of 8 fathoms; then run along the east side of 
 the point, which is quite bold, leaving all the islets on the starboard 
 hand. A distance of | mile on a X. 9^ E. (N. 39° E. mag.) course will 
 lead to the narrow chaouel before mentioned, between Black Islet and 
 the inner end of Kegashka Point. Haul round the latter to the north- 
 westward, at the distajice of 100 yards, and when within it uot more 
 than the same distance, aochor in 5 fathoms, and secure tne vessel by 
 mooring. 
 
 When approaching Kegashka Bay from the eastward, give the low 
 and small islets off Curlew Point a berth of 1^ miles to avoid the ledges 
 off them, which dry at low water; then steer so as to pass outside of 
 Green Island, going no nearer than 200 yards. Continue on that course 
 
kkc;asi{ka river — natash<vuan point. 
 
 2r,l 
 
 several small 
 %. It is only 
 that a vessel 
 re for several 
 she mast be 
 shor ou shore 
 poiut when it 
 hiu the islets 
 
 rom a rocky 
 )th the island 
 with spruce 
 iie westward 
 he coast are 
 ce. There is 
 sr of the bay, 
 ;ward of the 
 wooded with 
 tiugnish this 
 brable woods, 
 he outermost 
 i in diameter, 
 il small islete 
 id one small 
 shka Point. 
 1 the western 
 lian families, 
 les are visible 
 btle, and they 
 
 between the 
 le; it carries 
 [le westward, 
 i mile, or (fu 
 e east side of 
 he starboard 
 .) course will 
 ick Islet and 
 to the north - 
 
 it not more 
 tie vessel by 
 
 give the low 
 lid the ledges 
 ,88 outside of 
 m that course 
 
 fill the inner or NE. extremity of Kegashka Point bears N. 30'^ W. 
 (north mag.), which will be rather more than li^ miles from the ledges 
 off Curlew Point; thon haul in, and pnss between tlie point and the 
 westernmost islet, as before directed, giving the south side of that islet 
 a berth of ut least 2(K> yards. 
 
 Kegashka Bay has this advantage, that there are no ledges or other 
 dangers ott'its entrance; so that a vessel is no sooner outside Kegashka 
 Point than she has a clear sea before her. 
 
 Kegashka River, alfordiii;^ shelter only for boats, is li miles west- 
 ward of Kegashka Bay. It has falls 4(1 leet high and a fishing station 
 of the Hudson Bay Company one mile within its entrance; neither the 
 falls nor the house can be seen from the sea. 
 
 Natashquan Point. — At 2.^ miles westward of Kegashka Kiver, fine 
 sandy beaches, in front of sandy cliffs, 70 or 80 feet high, and a country 
 thickly wooded with spruce trees, commence and continue 13J miles to 
 Natashquan Point. It is a sandy promontorj^, the most southern point 
 on the north coast of the gulf to the eastward of the Seven Islands. 
 
 Natashquan Cod Banks. — Parallel to the coast from Musquarro 
 Point to Natashquan Point, and at distances varying from (5 to 11 miles, 
 there are banks of sand, gravel, and broken shell, on which the depth 
 of water is between 24 and 40 fathoms. Codfish are often caught in 
 abundance upon these banks. 
 
 Caution.— Buisseau Eock lies 8 miles S. 72° W. (N. 78° W. mag.) 
 from Kegashka Point. It has only 2 feet water on it, and lies in line 
 between Natashquan and Kegashka Points, and' nearly li miles south- 
 ward from the entrance of a small ..^'-eam named Long River. A 
 vessel will avoid it by not going nearer to the shore than the depth of 
 17 fathoms. 
 
 Another rocky shoal with 24 feet least water is reported to lie about 
 2 miles S. 7° W. (S. 37° W. mag.), from the SW. extreme of Curlew 
 Point. 
 
 Cod Bank, a small shoal with little more than 4 fathoms on it at low 
 water, over gravel bottom, lies about a mile southward of Natashquan 
 Point. 
 
 (H.O. Chart No. 1109.) " . 
 
 Aspect of Coast— Prom the south extreme of Natashquan Point 
 to Collins Shoal, the outer danger oft' St. Genevieve Island, the easteru- 
 inont of Mingan Islands, the distance is 52 miles. The coast included 
 ill this distance is low near the sea, rising a short distance back into 
 uiouudu »iid ridges, but nowhere exceeding 400 feet in height. It is 
 eotniK>se<i of [Ffimary rocks, with the exception of a sandy tract at 
 Agwani.s and Nabesippi Rivers. The sandy tracts are always thickly 
 wooded with spruce trees, and the country generally is here less bare 
 than it is farther eastward. 
 
 The coast is broken into numerous coves and small bays, affVirding 
 shelter everywbei' to boats, and occasionally to very small schooners. 
 
 .^J 
 
262 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 I i>' 
 
 k 
 
 I 
 
 
 Tlie small and bare islets and rocks are inniunerablo along it, but 
 nowhere extend farther out from the points of the mainland thai. 1! 
 miles. 
 
 When there is a heavy sea running, all these dangers show, or they 
 can be seen from the inHstheiid in clear weather; but under other cir- 
 cumstances, the depth of 20 fathoms is as near to them as a vessel 
 ought to approach, that depth being in nimy places not more than one 
 mile from the outer le(lj;c8. 
 
 The banks ii sand, gravel, and broken shell, which extend off this 
 coPiStfor many milt's, ,ind the deei)- water channel between them and 
 Anticosti, have been already mentioned on pa ,c 22; and the soundings 
 upon t fm are too irregular to admit of any other than the general 
 descripiion there given of them. Reference must be made to the charts, 
 in which the various depths and naiureof the bottom are given in such 
 a way as can not fail to be of great assistance to vessels navigating this 
 channel. 
 
 Currents and Tides. — The current down along the coast in westerly 
 winds seldom exceeds A knot, and is usually much less; so that a vessel 
 can always make way to windward in moderate weather. 
 
 In shore there are weak tidal streams too irregular to be depended 
 upon. It is, however, important to remark that the flood draws 
 strongly into Natashqnan River and the bay off Little Natashijuan 
 River, while the ebb sets strongly off" Natashquan Point to the 8E. and 
 causes a very l.cavy S(ia urson the banks off it, in southerly winds. 
 
 On approachiuj' 8t. Genevievi, a strong indraught of the flood 
 toward the channel, bet veen that island and the main, will be experi- 
 enced, and the ebb will be found setting strongly out in the contrary 
 direction ; that is, to the Sli. The rate of these streams seldom exceeds 
 a mile per hour. 
 
 (H.O. Chart, No. 1108.) 
 
 Natashquan River enters the sea on the west side of the Natash- 
 qnan Point, and 3 miles northwestward from its south extremity. The 
 mouth of the river, between low sandy points, is fully one mile wide, 
 but nearly the whole of this space is occupied by a low sandy island, 
 having narrow channels on either side of it. The northern channel is 
 nearly dry at times, but the southern one has a depth of 6 feet at low 
 water, and from 9 to 11 feet at high water, according to neap and 
 spring tides. There is the same depth within, and small schooner.s 
 may lie alongside the steep sandy bank, where the houses of the Hud- 
 son Bay Company's post stand, on the south side of the river, ^ mile 
 within the entrance. The bar of sand, on which there is usually a 
 heavy surf, extends out f mile, and is exceedingly steep to seaward, 
 where 20 fathoms will be found within J mile. Codfish are taken in 
 great numbers off this bar in the mouth of June, and the river abounds 
 with salmon. 
 
 Above the trading post che rivev is full of sand banks, dry at low 
 water, and only navigable for boits for a few miles tr the first raiuds. 
 
■tt. 
 
 i^l 
 
 LITTLE NATASHQUAN HARHOR, 
 
 263 
 
 bloDg it, but 
 laud thai. :: 
 
 [low, or thty 
 
 ier other cir- 
 
 as SI vessel 
 
 3re than one 
 
 end oft' this 
 n them and 
 16 soundings 
 the general 
 o the charts, 
 ;iven in such 
 ^igatiug this 
 
 t iu westerly 
 ;hat a vessel 
 
 be depended 
 flood draws 
 Natashcjuan 
 the 8E. and 
 f winds. 
 »f the flood 
 ill be experi- 
 ;he contrary 
 dom exceeds 
 
 the Natash- 
 ■emity. The 
 e mile wide, 
 andy island, 
 n channel is 
 6 feet at low 
 :o neap and 
 .11 schooners 
 of the Hud- 
 river, ^ mile 
 is usually a 
 to seaward, 
 are taken in 
 iver abounds 
 
 8, dry at low 
 first r{ii)ids. 
 
 Tlie sandy beach continues northward for li^ miles from the entrance, 
 terminuting at the mouth of a small stream, named Little Natashquan 
 liiver, which admits boats only at high water, and which is close east- 
 ward of the harbor of the same name. 
 
 Little Natashquan Harbor, formed by a number of islets and 
 rocks, is only fit for vessels not exceeding 100 tons. The entrances, of 
 wliich there are two, formed by a reef of rocks in the center, are not 
 more tliau 180 yards wide between reefs, the extent of which under 
 water can not be seen, because the water is discoloro<^ -y the dark 
 streams of the neighboring rivers. 
 
 The depth that can be carried in at low water by i t annel is 
 
 3 fathoms, and 5 fathoms by that which is between 1 1 i eef and 
 
 the islets on the east side. The space within therei .. i vessels 
 
 can ride in from 3 to 5 fathoms, over sand and mml bottom, is only J 
 mile in diameter. The anchorage is protected by the main and islets 
 from all winds excepting the SSW., in which direction thei'e are reefs 
 of rocks, some parts of which are always above water. In a strong SW. 
 wind, some sea comes over these reefs at high water, but never enough 
 to endanger a vessel during the summer months. There are several 
 rocky patches, with from 2,^ to 3 fathoms off" the harbor's mouth ; these, 
 with the want of space to work in, and the difficulty of getting out with 
 the prevailing southerly winds of summer, render this place of little 
 use for the purposes of navigation ; but it is a valuable harbor for the 
 fishermen, whose schooners of from 30 to 100 tons are well suited to the 
 size and nature of the place, which is contiguous to excellent fishing 
 ground, and affords every facility for drying fish. The harbor should 
 not be entered by a stranger without a pilot. 
 
 Population. — There were 365 inhabitants resident iu this locality in 
 1891. The majority of the people live on the eastern side of Little 
 Natashquan River, where there is also a Roman Catholic church. There 
 is an establishment on the north shore of the liarbor. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and chatige, in Little Natashquan Har- 
 bor at llh.; springs rise 5 feet, and neaps 3 feet. 
 
 Directions. — The entrance of Little Natashquan Harbor lies 4 miles 
 NNW. from the southern entrance of Natashquan River, and a vessel 
 being oft" the bar of that river in 20 fathoms, should steer N. 3° E. (N. 
 330 E. mag.) nearly parallel to the sandy beach. When she has run 
 rather more than 3 miles, and has decreased her dei)th to 12 fathoms, 
 she will be about ^ mile from, and will see, the islets and rocks which, 
 commencing at the termination of the sandy beach, lie oft' the entrance 
 of Little Natashquan River, and form the east side ot the entrance to 
 the harbor. The westernmost of the islets is much larger than those 
 which lie farther SE. between it and the termination of the sandy 
 beach. Bring the SW. point of that island to bear N. 3° E. (N. 33^^ E. 
 mag.) in 12 fathoms water, and the southeasternmost of the rocks at 
 the termination of the sandy bcacli will bear N. 53° l-^. (N. 83^ E. mag.). 
 
 From this position, by ascending the rigging for the purpose, the reef 
 
m 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 m 
 
 2(;4 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWREN<"E — NORTH COAST. 
 
 ft 
 
 r- 
 
 
 j-S8 
 
 m 
 
 will be mtid« tmt on the west side of the liaihor, which extoiulH ratlu'r 
 moio thuii i mile soiithwartl liom a rather hi^h and round-backed isk't 
 oi gray granite, with a wooden cross upon it, whicih can be seen 2 miles. 
 ThJH islot, named Keacon Islet, will bear N. 14^ W. (N. lO'^ K. mag.) 
 from the position above indicated, and Central Ueef, some part of wliich 
 is always above water, will be seen between it and the islets and the 
 jtoiiit of the main, whicli, together, form the east side of the harlxir. 
 Steer N. 14^ \V. (N. Kjo e. ,i„ig.) for Ik-acon Islet, until abreast of the 
 outer ])art of the n-ef to the westward, wliich will be distant a little 
 more than liOO yards, and the vessel will be in about 7 fathoms Avater. 
 
 Alter the course now sufficiently to the eastward to pass on that side 
 of Central Keef which may be preferred, giving its rocks above water 
 a berth of 200 yards, if the west channel is taken. Central Iteef is 
 quite bold to the southward, and also on its east side, so that it may 
 be approached within 40 yards when entering by the east channel; but 
 bear in mind, in hauling round its north and NE. ends, that it extends 
 140 yards under water from the rocks, which always show, toward the 
 center of the harbor. The best berth to anchor in is nearly in the 
 center of the harbor, in 4 fathoms}, sanA and mud bottom. 
 
 Sphinx Rock, with 9 feet on it at low water, lies with the beacon on 
 Beacon Islet bearing N. 30° W. (north mag.). 
 
 H. M. S. Mnbe in 1809 touched on -i rock with 15 feet water on it, 
 which may be considered as an exteneic of i itral lleef; it lies about 
 120 yards from the north rock (above wuer) of Central Reef, in a NW. 
 direction, and on the direct lino befw.-in that rock and the south end 
 of Beacon Island; 18 and 20 feet v ru found close to the rock. 
 
 (II. O. Cbart No. 1109.) 
 
 Washtawooka Bay, 5 miles westward of Little Natashquan, is full 
 of small islets, rocks, and ledges, alTordiug shelter to shallops and 
 boats. It is an intricate and dangerous place, and may be known by 
 Shag Islet, a large black rock lying off it, and farther out than the 
 rest, being 1.} miles S. 65° E. (S. 25o E. mag.) from the projecting point 
 of the main. 
 
 Agwanus River, 10 miles westward of Little Natashquan Harbor, 
 is a large stream, having rapids and falls U miles from the entrance, 
 which is narrow, and has only feet in it at low water. There is no 
 bar, but many small rocks, both above and under water, extend l.i 
 miles oif its mouth, and render the approach extremely dangerous". 
 The east entrance point is of rock, the other of sand, and there is a 
 small i.slet ^ mile from the mouth of the river. From 9 to 12 feet can 
 be carried np to this islet, above which the river expands into a basin, 
 i mile wide, and carrying 5 fathoms close up to the foot of the rapids. 
 There is a sandy beach for 1^ miles eastward of this river, and also 
 we.-<tward of it to I^abesippi Eiver. 
 
 Nabesippi River, .i miles from Agwanus Kiver, enters the sea at tht- 
 extremity of a saudy point. It is much smaller than Agwanus Kiver, 
 
 i 
 
 
tlMUlH rutluT 
 ■backed islt't 
 Hcon 2 miles. 
 lO'^ E. ma},'.) 
 lartof wliicli 
 ilets and the 
 
 the liurbor. 
 )reaHt of the 
 taut a little 
 ;liom8 water, 
 on that side 
 above water 
 tral Keef ia 
 
 that it may 
 ihannel; but 
 it it exteuds 
 , toward the 
 early in the 
 
 le beacou ou 
 
 water on it, 
 it lies about 
 ef, in a NW. 
 le south end 
 Qck. 
 
 quan, is full 
 hallops and 
 e known by 
 lit than the 
 acting point 
 
 lan Harbor, 
 le entrance, 
 rhere is no 
 ', extend l.J 
 dangerous, 
 d tliere is a 
 12 feet can 
 ito a basin, 
 the rapids, 
 r, and also 
 
 le sea at the 
 luus Itiver, 
 
 i 
 
 f 
 
 ■^^^^f^m^^^ms^^ms^^^S^s^e^ssssmmsss 
 
 ^ij^m^^i^ffj!^' Ksf.'s 
 
 ,^ 
 
r^ 
 
 
 
 •ttei— ,ii..„. 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 1.0 
 
 I^IM 12.5 
 
 w 
 
 u&m 
 
 m 
 
 Sim ■ 
 
 I.I 
 
 lit 
 
 14.0 
 
 II 
 
 1.25 
 
 1.4 
 
 2.2 
 2.0 
 
 1.6 
 
 
 
 
 
 A" 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 ■ ft »wftiiWh > [ 'f iBeK.iUifc!w> 
 
CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHIVI/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
PASHASHEEBOO BAY MINGAN ISLANDS. 
 
 265 
 
 On tlie west bank, a short 
 
 and will only admit boats in iine weather 
 
 distance within the entrance, stands a house and store, the trading 
 
 ])08t of the llvidson Bay Company, which can be readily seen from the 
 
 sea. 
 
 Fashasheeboo, Mushkoniatawee, and Washatnagunashka are 
 
 small bays, full of small islets and rocks, which render their entrances 
 so difficult and dangerous that directions would not be of the least 
 avail. They are occasionally, but not often, entered by small coasting 
 schooners intimately acquainted with the coast, and none but those who 
 know every rock and ledge could either distinguish them or take a 
 vessel in. The first named is o])cn to the southward. The second, 
 less intricate than the other two, is 400 yards wide, with 5 fathoms 
 water in the entrance and within; it is open to southerly winds, but is, 
 nevertheless, tolerably secure for small craft, which may lie close tothe 
 rocks. The third is 1^ miles wide, with a chain of rocks above and 
 under water across its mouth, not large enough or close enough to afford 
 much shelter, yet too close and too numerous for a vessel to find her 
 way through without great diflBculty and danger. There is a depth of 
 3 fathoms in the entrance, and 4 and f) fathoms within. 
 
 "Watcheeshoo, 18 miles west of the Nabesippi Kiver, is a hill of 
 granite, 127 feet high, and bare of trees. It is a peninsula, but appears 
 like an islet, higher than the rest, when seen in a vessel from a distance. 
 There is a fishing post of the Hudson Bay Company in a cove among 
 the rocks, to the westward of it. Watcheeshoo and Saddle Hill, which 
 is 374 feet high above the sea, serve to point out to a vessel her posi- 
 tiou off' the coast. The latter is 6 miles inland from the former in a 
 northerly direction. • 
 
 Quetachoo-Manicouagon and Feashtebai are two contiguous 
 bays, 4 miles westward of Watcheeshoo. The first, which is the east- 
 ernmost, is 2i miles wide, and carries from 3 to 14 fathoms water, but 
 so full of rocks and ledges as to be useless, excepting to the smallest 
 schooners; it is open to the south westward. The other is a much 
 smaller bay, capable of affording shelter only to boats, and open tothe 
 southward. 
 
 Appeetetat Bay is full of rocks ; of no use to vessels, because of the 
 ledges under water off" its entrance, and also within. 
 
 The Mingan Islands are estimated nowheie to attain an elevation 
 exceeding 300 feet above the sea, and are in general much lower. They 
 possess very little soil, but nevertheless are thickly wooded with spruce, 
 birch, and poplar on the side toward the mainland; though toward the 
 sea barren tracts often occur, composed either of bare limestone, or of 
 banks and ridges of limestone gravel. 
 
 The Coast of the mainland, from Mingan Biver to St. John Eiver, is 
 of sand and clay, low and thickly wooded, and with a fine sandy beach. 
 Farther eastward the shore is sometimes of granite, and at others of 
 limestone, the lattc:' r(;ck lying immediately over the former. Mount 
 
266 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 St. John, 1,416 feet higJi, is the highest point of the mainland in this 
 neighborhood. There are other hills rising 1,000 feet above the sea, 
 about 18 miles farther eastward, but or 7 miles back from the sea, and 
 nearly opposite Quarry Island. With these exceptions, the main is low, 
 and it is particularly so abreast the eastern islands, where the hills are 
 far back in the country. 
 
 Wood and Water can readily be obtained from the principal of 
 Mingan Islands; wild berries are abundant in their season, and so are 
 different kinds of wild fowl ; quadrupeds are scarce, but there arr plenty 
 of seal upon the limestone reefs, and a few codfish ott" the coast. 
 
 Tides. — The tides are not strong among Mingan Islands, never 
 exceeding one knot, except in very narrow channels. They are often 
 rendered irregular by the winds, but in line settled weather there is a 
 constant alternation of the streams of flood and ebb between the islands 
 and the main, and also within the distance of 2 or .'5 miles from the 
 southern shores of the islands. 
 
 St. Q-enevieve Island, the easternmost, is about 5 miles in circum- 
 ference. Its NE. point is a bluff headland, the termination in that 
 dnection of the highest part of the island, which is about 200 feet above 
 the sea, and slopes irregularly down to the southward. 
 
 Mount St. Genevieve, 332 feet above high water, is an isolated table 
 hill on the mainland, about one mile inward and 2J miles from the NE. 
 point of the island. This mountain and the high NE. point of the 
 island distinctly point out from the sea the position of the channel 
 between the island and the main. 
 
 Saints and Bowen Rocks are two patches of rocks which render it 
 necessary to approach St. Genevieve Island with caution. 
 
 Saints Bocks are two low and bare rocks, lying rather more than J 
 mile southward of St. Genevieve. There is a chan'nel with 5 fathoms 
 water, but with foul gpround, between tlitem and the island ; and reefs 
 under water extend fr-m each cf them fully 600 yards. 
 
 The Is W. Bowen liock, with 3 feet least water, lies -i\ miles X. 78° E. 
 (S. 73° E. mag.) from East Sair d with the south side of the latter 
 in line with the center of Wesi t. 
 
 The SE. Bowen Kock, wich (J .eo. least water, lies S. 08° E. (S. 39° E. 
 mag.) § mile from the NW. Bowen Rock and S. 87° E. (S. 58° i:. mag.) 
 1§ miles from East Saint, which is just open northward of West Saint. 
 
 These very dangerous rocks lie nearly in a line from the SE. point of 
 St. Genevieve Island, at the distances of li^ and 2 miles, respectively. 
 There is deep water between and close to them, and also for rather 
 more than one mile southward of them and Saints Rocks. The sound- 
 ings are here extremely irregular, varying from 4 to 6 fathoms, rock, to 
 43 fathoms, sand, sometimes in a single cast of the lead. The whole of 
 this dangerous part should be avoided by vessels. 
 
 Hunting Island, the next westward of St. Genevieve Island, is low, 
 thickly wooded, broken into many coves, and is fringed with small 
 
nland in this 
 ibove the sea, 
 a the sea, and 
 le main is low, 
 e the hills are 
 
 ! principal of 
 •n, and so are 
 ere uro plenty 
 coast. 
 
 slanris, never 
 'hey are often 
 tier there is a 
 en the islands 
 lies from the 
 
 les in circum- 
 ation in that 
 iOO feet above 
 
 isolated table 
 from the NE. 
 point of the 
 
 f the channel 
 
 hich render it 
 
 more than J 
 ith 5 fathoms 
 id; and reefs 
 
 tiles X. 78° E. 
 ) of the latter 
 
 5 E. (S. 3J)o E. 
 . 58°^':. mag.) 
 f West Saint, 
 e SE. point of 
 
 respectively. 
 
 Iso for rather 
 
 The sonnd- 
 
 loms, rock, to 
 
 The whole of 
 
 [slaud, is low, 
 d with small 
 
 ST. GENEVIEVE HARBOR. 
 
 207 
 
 islets and rocks on all sides, except toward the mainland. Wood and 
 Gun Islands lie 1^ miles oif tlie SW. point, leaving no passage between, 
 and having reefs extending from them 000 yards southward. They 
 are both low, and the latter is bare of trees, but covered with grass 
 and ])eat, in ^hich innumerable puffins burrow and rear their young. 
 
 Garde Rock, always above water, lies rather more than one mile 
 southward of the middle of the soutliern coast of Hunting Island; it 
 would be highly imprudent for any ship to attempt a passage between 
 it and the island, as there are many ledges scattered along the southern 
 side of the island, and Garde Eock is itself the termination of a long 
 ridge of sunken rocks. The southeastern end of the island is likewise 
 beset with several reefs, some of which extend g mile southward. 
 
 Collins Shoal, a. small patch of rocks, with 12 feet least water, lies 
 23 miles from the SE. point of Hunting Island. From this dangerous 
 shoal the east point of St. (Jenevieve Island is just open eastward of 
 W^est Saint, bearing N. 9° E. (N. 38° E. mag.), and the north point of 
 Wood Island is in line with the south side of Garde Eock, bearing N. 
 730 W. (K 440 w. mag.). 
 
 Caution. — Between Collins Shoal and the reefs off the SE. point of 
 Hunting Island the soundings are irregular, from 4 to 17 fathoms over 
 rocky bottom, and vessels should not pass between them. 
 
 St Genevieve and Betchewun Harbors.— The tirst of these har- 
 bors is between St. Genevieve Island and the mainland, and the second 
 between Hunting Island and the main. Both are excellent harbors, 
 not difficult of access or egress with the assistance of the chart, and 
 are fit for large vessels. 
 
 "Wood and Water may be obtained, the latter from small streams, 
 either on the main or on the islands. 
 
 Directions. — There are two channels leading to these harbors, 
 namely, East and Saints Channels. East Channel is the best with 
 easterly winds, and may be used with moderate westerly winds during 
 the flood tide by vessels not too large to work in such narrow channels, 
 but they must be careful in their boards to the northward, especially 
 in that toward Ledge Point. 
 
 By East Channel — To enter by the East Channel, bring the NE. 
 point of St. Genevieve in line with Indian Point (a low wooded point 
 of th«3 main, ibrming the east point of Pillage Bay), bearing N. 61° W. 
 (N. .32° W. mag.). Eun in with this mark on, and it will lead J mile 
 northeastward of the Bowen Eocks. 
 
 When the SE. point of St. Genevieve and the West Saint come in 
 line, steer a little tothe northward, so as not to go too near a flat shoal 
 which extends nearly COO yards from the NK. side of St. Genevieve. 
 Give the NE. point of St. Genevieve a berth of 200 yards. Anchor in 
 10 lathoms, mud bottom, halfway between it and Anchor Island, close 
 oft' the XW. point of St. Genevieve. 
 
 Caution. — The distance across frcjm the NE. point of St. Genevieve 
 
 I 
 
 1'' i 
 
268 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 to tlie main is about a mile, but the navigable breadth of the entrance 
 is reduced to ^ mile by the rocks and shoal water otl" Ledge Point. 
 The shoiil water extends from Ledge Point, directly across Pillage 
 Bay, to Partridge Point, and a vessel must not approach these shoals 
 nearer than 7 fathoms. 
 
 Betchewun Harbor. — If wishing to proceed to Betchewun Harbor, 
 pass to the northward of Anchor Island, w) ich is quite bold on that 
 side. The north point of Hunting Island is a clifty mound, with a cove 
 on its eastern side. It is quite bold, and a vessel must pass close to it 
 to avoid the shoal oflf Partridge Point, which extends J mile southward, 
 and diminishes the navigable breadth of the entrance to 700 yards. 
 When in the entrance, a low islet will be seen in the center of the har- 
 bor ; steer for it and anchor with it bearing S. 69° W. (N. 82° W. mag,) 
 and distant ^ mile. The depth of water in the harbor is from 9 to 18 
 fathoms, over mud bottom. 
 
 By Saints Channel. — To enter these harbors by Saints Channel, 
 bring the west points of St. Genevieve and Anchor Islands in line, bear- 
 ing N. 28^ W. (N. 1° E. mag.), at not less than 5 miles from the former, 
 to 'oe sure that the vessel is outside of Collins Shoal. Run in upon this 
 leading mark until the north sides of the two Saints come in line, bear- 
 ing N. 74° E. (S. 77° E. mag.). The east sides of Mount Partridge and 
 of Hunting Island (or rather, of an island joined to it at low water) 
 will come in one at the same time, bearing N. 60° W. (N. 31° W. mag.) ; 
 Steer upon this last-named leading mark (to avoid a reef which extends 
 650 yards from the SW. point of St. Genevieve) until the east side of 
 Mount St. Genevieve, seen over the sandy SE. point of Anchor Island, 
 comes in line with west i)oint of St. Genevieve Island, bearing north 
 (N. 29° E. mag.). Thence by steering N. 31° W. (N. 2° W. mag.) it will 
 lead in through the center of the channel between St. Genevieve and 
 Hunting Islands, and the vessel may either proceed to St. Genevieve 
 or Betchewun Harbors. 
 
 The directions just given for Saints Channel will lead a vessel in 
 between the dangers oft St. Genevieve and Hunting Islands in not less 
 than 20 fathoms water, and she will not have a less depth until she is 
 in as far as Anchor Island. The breadth of the channel between the 
 shoal water off Saints Bocks and the shoals off the SE. point of Hunt- 
 ing Island is nearly one mile. It diminishes to ^ mile between the 
 reef oft* the SW. point of St. Genevieve Island and the east end of 
 Hunting Island, which is the narrowest part of the channel. Within 
 this narrowest part, the ground becomes good for anchoring, as it is 
 everywhere between St. Genevieve and Betchewun Harbors. Indeed, 
 so little sea comes in that the whole space may be considered as a 
 harbor capable of holding a great number of lossels of large draft. 
 
 There is an inner harbor at Betchewun, westward of Low Islet, but 
 from thence there is no channel, excepting for boats, to pass out to the 
 westward between Hunting Island and tlie main. 
 
rUFFIN KAY TRILOBITE ]UY. 
 
 269 
 
 ;he entrance 
 ledge Point, 
 ross Pillage 
 these sboals 
 
 nin Harbor, 
 )old on that 
 with a cove 
 38 close to it 
 » southward, 
 > 700 yards. 
 r of the har- 
 2ow.niag,) 
 from 9 to 18 
 
 ts Channel, 
 in line, bear- 
 1 the former, 
 in upon this 
 n line, bear- 
 trtridge and 
 I low water) 
 ° W. mag,); 
 lich extends 
 east side of 
 chor Island, 
 aring north 
 nag.) it will 
 nevieve and 
 I. Genevieve 
 
 a vessel in 
 s in not less 
 until she is 
 between the 
 ut of Hunt- 
 )etween the 
 east end of 
 el. Within 
 ing, as it is 
 •s. Indeed, 
 idered as a 
 ?e draft, 
 w Islet, but 
 s out to the 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, in Betchewun Harbor at 
 llh. aoni.; ordinary springs rise 5 feet, and neaps .'{ feet. 
 
 The tidal streams between St. Genevieve and Hunting Islands and 
 the mainland are much influenced by the winds; but their rates sel- 
 dom amount to one knot at any time, and are usually much less, 
 excepting through the shallow and narrow channel at the west end of 
 Betchewun Harbor, where there is at times a complete ra])id. 
 
 Charles Island, the next westward of Hunting Island, is .'J miles 
 long, parallel to the coast, and 1^ miles wide. It is about 200 .feet 
 high, bold, and free from shoals; but at } mile SSE. from its east point 
 there is a patch of rocky ground on which no less than 5 fathoms have 
 been found, but which had better be avoided by vessels of large draft. 
 
 FufBn Bay.— The east point of Charles Island is west nearly 2^ 
 miles from the west point of Gun Island, off the S\V. extreme of Hunt- 
 ing Island. The former of these points is quite bold, and so is the 
 latter to the NW., but a reef extends 400 yards SSW. from it. 
 Between them is the entrance to Pultiu Bay, which is open to south- 
 erly winds. Within the east point of Charles Island, and midway 
 toward Shoal Cove, there is good anchorage in 7 fathoms, mud bottom, at 
 400 yards from the island; but SE. winds send in a considerable swell. 
 In the NE. corner of this bay is the narrow entrance (between shoals 
 off" Bagg Point and Hunting Island) to Ragg Bay, which has tolerable 
 anchorage in its NW. part, but has very deep water on the side toward 
 Hunting Island, and is separated from the western part of Betchewun 
 Harbor by the shoal and narrow channel for boats between the island 
 and the main. 
 
 Charles Harbor, between Charles Island and the main, though very 
 narrow, is quite secure, and deep enough for large vessels, but its 
 entrances are only 160 yards wide. Within, the harbor expands to J 
 mile wide by $ mile in length, parallel to the shore. Both entrances 
 have a depth of 7 fathoms, but a vessel must pass over 4 fathoms if 
 she enters from the eastward, through PuflBn Bay. The depth within 
 the harbor is from 4 to 6^ fathoms, Avith mud bottom. 
 
 Tides. — Strong winds occasionally cause the tides to run at the rate 
 of 2 knots in the entrances of the harbor, but in general there is only 
 a weak stream with either tide. 
 
 Trilobite Bay.— Whale Island, lying J mile from the east side of 
 Ammonite Point, and with shoal water between, is g mile westward of 
 Charles Island. Both islands are bold and cliffy, and Trilobite Bay is 
 between, with excellent anchorage, well sheltered from all but southerly 
 winds. The only danger to be avoided when working into this bay is 
 Ammonite Reef off' Ammonite Point, which includes a small islet, and 
 extends ^ mile off shore to the southward. The mark to clear this reef 
 when running along the coast is to keep Gun Island open southward of 
 Charles Island, and when hauling in from the westward into Trilobite 
 Bay keep the NW. point of Charles Island well open soutliward of 
 Whale Island. 
 
 irli 
 
 I, 
 
r 
 
 270 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 Directions.— To enter Cliarles Harbor from Puffin Bay, bring the 
 NE. point of Charles Island, which is high and clitty, to bear X. 75° 
 W. (X. 4(5° W. uiag.)» tiien steer for it and gi\ it a berth of abont 300 
 yards as the vessel hauls round it to the westward into the harbor. 
 
 To enter from Trilobite Bay, give the NW. point of Charles Island a 
 berth of between 120 and 280 yards as the vessel hauls ronnd it into 
 the harbor. All the way from the eastern narrow entrance into Charles 
 Harbor there is a broad zone of shoal water, which curves round paral- 
 lel to tlie mainland till it. joins Whale Island, and nearly lills up all the 
 NW. part of Trilobite Bay, rendering the entrance oftheliarbor too 
 narrow for convenient or general use. 
 
 Clearwater Point, 2 miles westward of Ammonite Point, is low, 
 and the shoal water does not extend more than J mile otf it to the 
 southward. 
 
 The Coast between Clearwater and Es(|nimaux Points forms a large 
 bay, along which there are high and conspicuous clitt's of sand and 
 clay that distinguish this part of tlie coast to a vessel at sea. Shoal 
 water extends a cotisiderable distance from the shore all round this bay. 
 and abreast Sea Cow Island the 3-fathom line of soundings is a mile 
 out from the sandy beach. 
 
 Clearwater Shoals.— 1^ miles S. 65° W. (X. 86° W. mag.) from 
 Clearwater Point lies a rocky 3-fathom shoal, and there are three 
 others with 2 to 3 fathoms lying to the northward of the first, and in 
 a line from the point, toward Walrus Island, the outer and westernmost 
 of them being rather more than 2 miles from the point. To pass out- 
 side these siioiils, at the distance of v^ mile, keep tiie south i)oints of 
 Gull and Fright Islands in one, bearing X'. 83° W. (N. 54^ W. mag.) 
 
 Sea Cow and Walrus Islands lie about 4 miles west from Clear- 
 water Point. They are steep and precipitous, excepting to the south- 
 ward, in which direction the reef off Sea Cow Island extends J mile, 
 and that of Walrus Island 400 yards. 
 
 Sea Cow Channel. — There is a clear channel named Walrus west- 
 ward of Sea Cow and Walrus Islands, and also between them and the 
 Clearwater Shoals. This latter channel, named Sea Cow, is 1;^ miles 
 wide, and, although not as good as the Walrus, may be 'used in pro- 
 ceeding to Esquimaux Harbor from the eastward by running upon the 
 leading mark which has been given for clearing the shoals to the west- 
 ward of Clearwater Point, until the XE. extremes of Esquimaux and 
 Walrus Islands come In one. Then steer for the NE. side of Sea Cow 
 Island and haul round it at not; less than 400 yards to the northwest- 
 ward for the east entrance of the harbor. 
 
 Green Island, small, low, and covered with grass, with reefs stretch- 
 ing north and south nearly 600 yards, but bold to the east and west, 
 lies nearly one mile west from W^alrus Island and ^ mile east from 
 Esquimaux Island. 
 
 Gull Island lies SW. by W. one mile from Green Island, which it 
 
KSQUIMAUX ISLAND AND HARHOR. 
 
 271 
 
 ly, bring the 
 boar X. 75° 
 of ab(»nt 300 
 e harbor, 
 rles Island a 
 ronnd it into 
 I into Charles 
 round paral- 
 ills np all the 
 e harbor too 
 
 •oint, is low, 
 off it to the 
 
 orms a large 
 of sand and 
 ; sea. Shoal 
 ind this baj'. 
 iigs is a mile 
 
 mag.) from 
 re are three 
 tlrst, and in 
 western ?no8t 
 To pass out- 
 th points of 
 W. mag.) 
 ; from Clear- 
 to the south- 
 Bnds f mile, 
 
 V^alrus west- 
 hem and the 
 , is 1^ miles 
 ised in pro- 
 ng upon the 
 to the west- 
 uimaux and 
 of Sea (3ow 
 B north west- 
 
 eefs stretch- 
 8t and west, 
 le east from 
 
 nd, which it 
 
 resembles, except inj; that it is rather smaller. It is A mile southward 
 of the SE. point of Esquimaux Island, but there is no passage for slii|>8 
 between them. The south point of Ciull Island is bold, and may safely 
 be passed at 400 yards. 
 
 Esquimaux Island, '^ miles long, parallel to the coast, and 1;^ miles 
 wide, is 200 cr 250 feet high toward its north side, sloping to the south- 
 ward. From its SW. point a shoal extends toward Fright Island, which 
 also has a shoal stretching toward Esfjuimaux Island. The channel 
 between these, leading northward toward Esquimaux Harbo-, is nearly 
 800 yards wide, with deep water, but as there are no leading marks for 
 it, and the reefs ou either side are extremely dangerous, it can not be 
 recommended. 
 
 Fright Island is nearly one mile from the SW. point of Esquimaux 
 Island, and about g mile long, in a northerly dire.;tioii ; it is bold to the 
 southward, on which side vessels may pass at 200 yards, but reefs 
 extend COO yards off it to the eastward, and also off its XE. and XW. 
 points. 
 
 Quin Island lies a short ^ mile north from Fright Island; it is 
 nearly 1:^ miles long, in a nortlierly direction, and its shores are bold, 
 with the exception of (^uin Eeef, extending J mile west from its north 
 point. 
 
 Fright Channel is deep, but only 400 yards wide between Quin 
 Island and the reefs off Fright Island. It can not be recommended, 
 but might be used in case of necessity by hauling up to the east of 
 Xiapisca Island till the south end of Quin Island comes in one v"th 
 the south side of the cove in Esquimaux Island, bearing N. 85^ E. (S. 
 (Mjo E. mag.), then steering so as to pass close round the south point of 
 Quin Island, which is quite bold. 
 
 Quin Channel is the best for vessels approaching Esquimaux Har- 
 bor from the westward. The depth in this r ininel is from 5 to 7 
 fathoms, over rocky, gravelly, and sandy bottuii- The shoal water 
 extends only to the distance of 200 yards from the island, but off Toiute 
 des Morts, and the small islets to the westward of it, the reefs extend 
 400 yards southward. 
 
 Esquimaux Harbor lies between Esquimaux Island and the main- 
 land. Esquimaux Point, having the entrance of a small river on its 
 west side, consists of sand, and is quite bold to the southward, although 
 shoals extend from it across the bays on either side. The north and 
 NE. points of Esquimaux Island are also bold, and may be passed at 
 the distance of 140 yards by large vessels. The depth within this 
 secure harbor is from 6 to 15 fathoms, over a sandy bottom. The space 
 in which vessels may anchor is nearly 1^ 'miles long, and the average 
 breadith is 800 yards. 
 
 Wator.—Supplies of good water may be proctired from the river as 
 Esquimaux Point, or from small streams on the island, and wood it 
 plentiful. 
 
 ■-3531^^.^ 
 
272 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 i. \. 
 
 SirectionB. — Uriel <lirectionH liavo been ahea<ly given for Sea Cow, 
 Friglit, and (^>uin Cliaunels, leading to Esquimaux Harbor. The beat 
 channels from the eastward and westward will now be described. 
 
 By Walrus Channel.— Walrus Gliannel, between Walrus and Oreen 
 Islands, is the best with easterly winds. It is ^ mile wide, with 8 
 fathoms least water, and it is only necessary to give either island a 
 berth of 400 yards to be clear of all dangers. Heing 2 or 3 miles out- 
 side of these islands, bring the NE. point of l*iS(|uimaux Islan<l to 
 appear about halfway between the two islands above mentioned as 
 forming the channel, and it will bear about N. 29° W. (north mag.). 
 Steer for it, and, giving it a berth of 200 yartls, haul round it to the 
 northwestward into the harbor, and anchor in the depth and position 
 which have been recommended. 
 
 By NiapiBca«Channel. — Niapisca Channel is the best with westerly 
 winds. Passing in to the northward, between >'iapi8ca and Fright 
 Islands, it leads to the entrance of Quin Channel, and thence eastward 
 to the harbor. The dangers to be avoided in this channel, besides the 
 reefs off Fright and Quin Islands, are the reefs of flat limestone extend 
 ing A mile out from the south and SE. points of Niapisca Island. 
 Between those points a remarkable group of flowerpot rocks will be 
 seen standing on the limestone just above high-water mark. From the 
 east point of the island, which is the south point of a bay, another reef 
 extends J mile NE. by N., but there is ample space between these reefs 
 and Fright Island, the channel being over one mile wide in the narrow- 
 est part, with 30 to 40 fathoms water. 
 
 In running for this channel from the westward, the leading mark for 
 clearing the south reef of Niapisca Island by more than 400 yards is 
 the NW. point of Fright Island in line with the SE. end of Quin Island. 
 Do not, therefore, oi)en those islands clear of each other until Moniac 
 Island {2i miles NNW. from Niapisca Island) is brought in sight to the 
 eastward of Niapisca Island. Having done so, haul in through the 
 channel, steering N. 3° W. (N. 26° E. mag.), and when Moutange Island 
 (next westward of Moniac Island) opens northward of Niapisca Island, 
 the vessel will be clear of the reef off the east point. 
 
 Haul up now, if necessary, to clear Quin Reef, until the north point 
 of Esquimaux Island is not only open northward of Quin Island, but 
 also till the north point .of Sea Cow Island is open northward of 
 Esquimaux Island. Run in between Quin Island and the main, with 
 the last-named marks Just open, and Ahey will lead about 400 yards past 
 tlie north point of Quin Island. 
 
 It must be borne in mind tliat the mark for the shoals off Pointe des 
 Morts, and the small islets westward of it, is the north and NE. points 
 of Es(iuimaux Island in line, bearing S. 74° E. (S. 45° E. mag.); if a 
 vessel opens them before she is as far eastward as Quin Island she will 
 be ashore. 
 
 Ha\«ng passed Quin Island, continue th& course toward the north 
 
 
1 
 
 « 
 
 or Sea Cow, 
 The best 
 aribetl. 
 iH and Green 
 ?ide, witli 8 
 ler islaiul a 
 3 miles out- 
 X Island to 
 entioned as 
 lorth mag.), 
 nd it to the 
 lud position 
 
 itli westerly 
 and Fright 
 ce eastward 
 besides the 
 tone exteud- 
 isca Island, 
 ocks will be 
 . From the 
 another reef 
 1 these reefs 
 the narrow- 
 
 ng mark for 
 too yards is 
 ^uin Island, 
 ntil Moniac 
 sight to the 
 :hrough the 
 aiige Island 
 )isca Island, 
 
 north point 
 Island, but 
 rthward of 
 main, with 
 > yards past 
 
 Pointe des 
 NE. points 
 mag.); if a 
 ind she will 
 
 the north 
 
 NIAPI8CA ISLAND LARGE ISLAND. 
 
 273 
 
 point of Esquimaux Island, and haul round it southeastward into 
 Esquimaux Harbor. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and cluingu, in lOsquimaux Harbor at 
 about Uh. 3<)m., and the rise at springs is <( feet, mid at neaps tU ft'ct. 
 
 The tides usually run at the rate of about one knot through Ksqiii- 
 maux Harbor, the flood coming round ChMvr Water Point from the east- 
 ward, and passing to tliu wostwanl between Quiu Island and the main. 
 The eblv flows in the contrary dircdion. 
 
 The tidod also draws in between Fright and Niapisca Islamls, and 
 the ebb sets out thr«>ugh the same channel. Uut these streams are 
 much influenced, both in tlieir rate and duration, by the winds, and the 
 ebb is much accelerated by westerly winds in K8<iuiinaux Harbor, run- 
 ning there at times fully 2 knots. 
 
 Niapisca Island, rather more than 2 miles long, NNVV. and 8SH., 
 is only partially wooded, and has three principal hills, not exceeding 
 2UU feet high. 
 
 Quanry Island, nearly 2^ miles long, parallel to the coast, and about 
 the same height as Niapisca Island, is separated from the latter by a 
 channel nearly 800 yards wide, with a small islet in it, but no safe pas- 
 Siige for shipping, because of a shoal in the bay to the southward, and 
 of a reef which stretches beyond the small islet. Other reefs also 
 extend ^ mile from the west side of Niapisca Island, and from the south 
 and SE. side of Quarry Island. , 
 
 Quarry Cove is on the north side of Quarry Island, and if mile north' 
 westward of the east end of the island. It is about ^ mile wide and 
 800 yards deep, with 22 fathoms water in the entrance, shoaling gradu- 
 ally to 5 fathoms with mud bottom close to its head. The islands itud 
 shoals along the mainland are only 3 miles northward of this cove, 
 which thus becomes completely landlocked though a very small har- 
 bor. No other directions are requisite than keeping the west side 
 nearest on board in entering, and to anchor near the center in or 10 
 lathoms. 
 
 Water. — Good water may be obtained from a small stream in the 
 SW. corner of (Juarry Cove. 
 
 Quarry Channel. — There is a clear channel between Quarry and 
 Large Islands, which is the next westward. The only directions neces- 
 sary are to bring the channel to bear N. 8° W. (N. 21° E. mag.), and 
 then run in, keeping in its center until ^ mile within the SW. point of 
 Quarry Island, after which that island may be kept close aboard, as 
 the remainder of the channel, 1^ miles, is quite bold on that side, while 
 the shoal water extends 300 yards from Large Island, The flood runs 
 slowly in through this channel, and the ebb as slowly out. 
 
 Large Island is thickly wooded, and its highest part about 200 feet 
 
 above the sea. lieefs of flat limestone extend off its south and SW. 
 
 points nearly f mile, and the mark for the south point of these reefs, in 
 
 2 fathoms, is the south points of Niapisca and Fright Islands in one. 
 
 1151 18 
 
 I 
 
 IS 
 
274 
 
 aULF OF 8T. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 On its west Hide, a iiiilo to the northward of its SW. point, thero are 
 many tiower|K)t and arcbiMl rocks, Htaudin^f on the tint limestone above 
 the proHent high-water mark. 
 
 Middle Reef lies JuHt within the line joining the south points of 
 Large and Mingnn Islands and 2 miles westward of the former. A part 
 of this reef is always above water, but it is not (SO yards in diameter, 
 though the shoal around iti s ^ mile long and .^ mile wide. From the 
 Nl'i, side of this reef, in I fathoms, the east sides of the two Birch 
 Islinids are in one. 
 
 Large Channel, between Middle Keef and Largo Island, should be 
 used by a vessel proceeding to Mingan Harbor with an easterly wind, 
 and in doing so tiie <mly thing necessary to be observed is that the 
 reefs extend westward off the shore of Large Island, from 400 to <tOO 
 yards, as far in as the Flowerirat Columns, after which the island 
 becomes bold. There is little or no warning by the lead on the Large 
 Island side, but Middle Keef may be approached to the depth of 13 
 fathoms, which, on the east side, is more than ^ mile from it. 
 
 Farther in. Birch Islands form the west side of this channel, at nearly 
 2 miles from Large Island. The east side of Outer Birch Island is quite 
 bold, and the shoal water extends only 300 yards ott' the east end of 
 Inner Birch Island. 
 
 The channel between the two Birch Islands is GOO yards wide, but 
 the ground is all foul, and not more than 4 fathoms could be carried 
 through by a stranger. 
 
 Outer Birch Island is about one mile in diameter and about 300 
 feet in height, and it has a remarkable flowerpot rock on its SW. point. 
 
 Inner Birch Island is rather larger. Its NW. point is long and low, 
 extending ^ mile westward from the body of the island, with a curve to 
 the SW. Off this point there is a reef extending J mile westward, and 
 having 12 fathoms within the distance of 200 yards from the extreme. 
 
 Hulk Rock. — At ^ mile SW. from the same point there is a small 
 low islet, close to the south point of which stands a very remarkable 
 rock, named Hulk Itock, from its resemblance to the hulk of a wrecked 
 vessel. The reef, of flat limestone, dry at low water, which connects 
 this islet and rock to the low west point of Inner Birch Island, extends 
 600 yards SW. from the rock, and also 400 yards westward. 
 
 Middle Reef Channel, between Outer Birch Island and Middle 
 Reef, is almost one mile wide, with a depth of 30 fathoms, and the shoal 
 water extends only 300 yards from the SE. point of the former; but 
 there is a dangerous reef off the SW. side of Outer Birch Island, 
 extending § mile from the shore. 
 
 Tides. — The flood stream sets out to the S W. between Birch Islands, 
 and also between them and Middle Beef. 
 
 Birch Channel, between Birch Islands and Mingan Island, is the 
 best by which to proceed to Mingan Harbor with westerly winds. It 
 is 3 miles wide, and all deep water. 
 
oint, thero are 
 ineatono above 
 
 lonth pointH of 
 >riner. A part 
 Is ill diameter, 
 de. From the 
 the two Birch 
 
 and, Hhouhl be 
 easterly wind, 
 ved is that the 
 torn 400 to (JOO 
 ich the ishiud 
 1 on the Large 
 le depth of 13 
 m it. 
 
 iriinel, at nearly 
 Island is quite 
 he east end of 
 
 ards wide, but 
 )uld be carried 
 
 and about 300 
 I its SW. point. 
 B long and low, 
 with a curve to 
 westward, and 
 fn the extreme, 
 here is a small 
 sry remarkable 
 k of a wrecked 
 yhich connects 
 [sland, extends 
 ird. 
 
 d and Middle 
 
 s,and the shoal 
 
 lie former; but 
 
 Birch Island, 
 
 Birch Islands, 
 
 I Island, is the 
 )rly winds. It 
 
 MINOAN ISLAND MONIAC ISLAND. 
 
 275 
 
 Mingan Island, 4i mih'S to the westward of tlie Outer Birch Island, 
 is abcMit HM» feet in ht'lKht an«l bare of trees. The shoal water docs not 
 extend above «MM» yanls i»lf its south point, but to the HVV. and west 
 the reels, including tlie isletx, run out nearly 1,L'00 yartls. The island 
 is bold on its north and east sides. 
 
 Mingan Patch lies S. 11° W. (8. 4(P \V. nuig.)- 3i ">'•♦'« *'<"" ^he 
 south point of Mingan Island, and with the SK. point of the Outer 
 Birch touching the north point of Large Island; it is a patch of nx-ky 
 ground with fathoms water on it, yet there is a heavy swell upon it 
 at times. 
 
 The Porroquets, the westernmost of Mingan Islands, are four snmll 
 islets, low, and bare of trees. The northwestornniost is liigiicr than 
 the others, surrounded by clitt's, and has a superstratum of peat on 
 Its Hat summit, in which great numbers of puflius burrow and rear 
 their young. 
 
 The two easternmost of these islets have a reef of flat limestone 
 extending !J mile southward. There is also a shoal A mile northward 
 of tham, and a narrow channel between them and the oilier two, but 
 of no use to vessels. The northwesternmost islet has shoal water oft' it 
 to the distance of i mile, both eastward and westward, but a vessel 
 may pass northward of it, at 400 yards, in 14 or 15 fathoms water. 
 
 Light. — On the summit of the northwesternmost of tlie Perroquets 
 stands a square lighthouse, painted white, and 55 feet high, with dwell- 
 ing attached, from which is exhibited at an elevation of 87 feet a 
 revolving white light every thirty seconds, and visible 15 mdes. 
 
 The light is obscured by Mingan Island between the bearings of 
 8. 890 W. (N. 62° W. mag.), and N. 09° W. (N. 40° W. mag.). 
 
 Perroquet Channel, between the Perroquets and Mingan Island, 
 is li miles wide, and with depths varying from 30 to 40 fathoms in the 
 center. Both the Hood and ebb set out thnmgh the channel, the 
 former to the 8VV. and the latter to the southward. 
 
 Mingan Channel— All the islands just described, from Niapisca 
 Island, are bold and free from danger on their north sides, so that 
 Mingan Channel, which lies between them and the main, is safe 
 thrnufjhout. 
 
 Moniac Island, on the mainland side of this channel, is less than J 
 mile in diameter, and lies nearly abreast Niapisca Island, from which 
 it is distant about 2h miles. Moutange Island, IJ miles farther west- 
 ward, is about 1^ miles in diameter, and off a bay full of small islets, 
 and in which there are several small rivers. It is directly abreast 
 Quarry Island, at the distance of 2^ miles. These islands, Moniac and 
 Moutange, are J mile from the nearest point of the main, but shoals 
 within and between them are nearly dry at low water. 
 
 1 he shoals do not project above 600 yards southward of these islands, 
 but there is rocky ground, with irregular soundings between 4 and 10 
 fathoms out to the distance of a mile to the southward of them both, 
 
 11 . 
 
mm 
 
 m^^m^w^^^^swms^mm^ 
 
 276 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST, 
 
 80 that a vessel beating in tlie Miiijjau Channel had better not stand 
 over to the northward beyond IJ miles from the northern shores of the 
 onter islands, or into less than 10 fathoms. 
 
 Long Point, NNW. of Mingan Islaiii', and on which is a fishing 
 establishment, consists of sand, and there is a fine beach from thence 
 eastward as far as Mingan Harbor, inclusive. A sandy shoal extends 
 oflf the shore, immediately westward of Long Point, to within one mile 
 of the PerroquetP There is often a great ripple off this shoal, caused 
 by the flood stream being turned off by Long Point toward the SW. 
 This channel may be conveniently used in going to* Mingan Harbor 
 with A northerly wind. 
 
 Sand Lark Reef, lying 3 J miles westward of Moutauge Island, 
 and rather more than a mile from tbe mainland, is small and low, but 
 always above water. There is a clear channel with deep water on all 
 sides of it, but there is a rocky patch, with 5 fathoms water, 1^ miles 
 from it, on a line toward the south side of Moutange Island. This 
 shoal water has not been particularly examined, and should therefore 
 be avoided. 
 
 Harbor Island is of limestone, about 100 feet in height, bold toward 
 Mingan Harbor, but shelving and shoal to the southward J mile from 
 shore. The length of the island is 2 miles, its greatest breadth does 
 not amount to ^ mile, and it is thickly wooded. 
 
 Mingan River. — The mainland recedes from the island in the eastern 
 part of the harbor, which would, in consequence, be exposed to easterly 
 winds if it were not for a sandy shoal, dry at low water, which extends 
 400 yards out from the entrance of the Mingan River. This river is 
 only capable of admitting boats at high water, and its mouth is opposite 
 the east end of the island. 
 
 Mingan Harbor. — The eastern entrance between the sandy shoal 
 and the island is 400 yards wide, the western entrance between the 
 mainland and the island is nearly as wide, the whole breadth in both 
 entrances being in deep water. The space within, in which vessels 
 may anchor in safety, is about a mile long by rather more than J mile 
 wide, with plenty of water for large vessels, over a bottom of fine sand. 
 
 Directions. — In approaching Mingan Harbor from the eastward, 
 bring the north or inner side of Harbor Island to bear N. 72° W. (N. 
 43° W. mag.), and the houses of the Hudson Bay Company's post ought 
 then to appear open fully their own breadth to the northward of the 
 island. Steer for those houses so open, leaving the east end of the 
 island 300 yards to the southward, and taking care to keep Sandy Point, 
 at the western entrance of the harbor, shut in behind the north side of 
 the island, for when they are in one the vessel will be on shore on the 
 sandy shoal ott" Mingan River. After the east end of the island is 
 Ijassed, run along its north side at the distance of 200 yards, and choose 
 a berth anywhere near the center of the harbor, in from 9 to 13 fath- 
 
 oms, sand bottom. 
 
T. 
 
 Btter not stand 
 11 shores of the 
 
 ch is a flshlng 
 ch from thence 
 ' shoal extends 
 nrithin one mile 
 8 shoal, caused 
 sward the SW. 
 tlingan Harbor 
 
 aitauge Island, 
 tU and low, bnt 
 ep water on all 
 water, 1^ miles 
 ) Island. This 
 hould therefore 
 
 :ht, bold toward 
 ard 4 mile from 
 t breadth does 
 
 d in the eastern 
 osed to easterly 
 , which extends 
 . This river is 
 oath is opposite 
 
 he sandy shoal 
 ce between the 
 t)readth in both 
 I which vessels 
 lore than J mile 
 om of fine sand. 
 I the eastward, 
 r N. 72° W. (N. 
 my's post ought 
 )rthward of the 
 east end of the 
 >p Sandy Point, 
 he north side of 
 on shore on the 
 )f the island is 
 irds, and choose 
 im 9 to 13 fath- 
 
 ST. JOHN 1IVER. 
 
 277 
 
 When running for the harbor from the westward, run in toward the 
 sandy beach of the mainland at J mile westward of the island until 
 Sandy Point comes in one with the face of the clay cliffs to the east- 
 ward of the Hudson Bay Company's houses, bearing N. 71° E. (S. 80° 
 E. niag.), or until the depth is 11 fathoms. Eun upon this mark along 
 the beach and give Sandy Point a berth of 100 yards as the vessel 
 passes into the harbor, and choose a berth as before directed. 
 
 Mingan Harbor is quite secure in all winds, and, like Esquimaux 
 Harbor, it has this great advantage, that vessels can enter or leave it 
 either with easterly or westerly winds. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Mingan Harbor at Ih. 
 16m. ; springs rise (J feet, and neaps 4 feet. 
 
 Soundings. — The banks of soundings, which extend off Mingan 
 Islands toward Anticosti, have been already mentioned on page 22, 
 and it is only necessary to add that their southern edge, in .")0 fathoms 
 water, is no less than 5 miles from the islands, and that the banks 
 become wider, or extend farther off, to the westward. There is much 
 greater depth of water in some of the channels between the islands 
 than there is on these banks, as will be seen by the chart. 
 
 Coast. — From Long Point a broad beach of fine sand reaches to St. 
 John River, and the chart'will show that an irregular band of shoal 
 water lies outside of this beach, at a distance of f mile. 
 
 (H.O. Chart, No. 1110.) 
 
 St John River. — This large stream empties on the northern shore 
 of the gulf, at 6^ miles NW. by W. from the Perroquets. It is occa- 
 sionally frequented by fishing schooners early in the season, and the 
 boats of the Gulnare ascended it 6 miles, following tte winding of its 
 channels, with a dei)th varying from one to 3 fathoms at low water. 
 The tide flows no farther than the distance just mentioned, where the 
 river becomes too rapid to be navigated by other than canoes or flat- 
 bottomed boats. The course of the river, for several miles up from the 
 entrance, is between high cliffs of stratified sand and gravel over clay, 
 with small sandy islands occasionally. The country, on either side, is 
 covered with a thick growth of small 8pruv;e trees. At the entrance, 
 between the clay cliffs on the west and a sandy point on the east side, 
 the river is 260 yards wide. The breadth increases to nearly ^ mile 
 immediately within the entrance, and then decreases again gradually, 
 being nowhere less than 200 yards wide in the first 6 miles. 
 
 There were two log houses on the west bank, i mile within the entrance, 
 where a party of men •occasionally resided to fish for salmon; and ves- 
 sels may lie close to them in 2 fathoms at low water. 
 
 Bar. — An extensive bar of sand, ^ mile out from the entrance, shifts 
 witii every gale of wind, and has seldom more than 3 or 4 feet over it at 
 low water; at high water there are 7 or 10 feet on the bar, according as 
 it may be neap or spring tide. Southerly and westerly winds cause so 
 heavy a surf as to render the bar impassable. 
 
 !^ 
 
278 
 
 GULP OF ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 Anchorage.— There is goo»l anchorage outside tlie bar, which may 
 be safely approac^ied by the lead, the sonndings decreasing gradually 
 from 20 to 3 fath(ims over sand and flay bottom, the greater depth 
 being at 2^ miles and the lesser at ^ mile from the mouth of the river. 
 Tides— It is high water, full and change, at the entrance ot ht. 
 John River at lb. 20m.; ordinary springs rise 7 feet, and neaps 4 feet. 
 Aspect of Coast.— The coast between Magpie and Trout liners is 
 con.posod of primary rock rising immediately from the sea in steep, 
 although o^ten rounded, hills, which are either bare or partially wooded 
 with sn.all trees of the pine species. The hills in front, or next to the 
 sea seldom exceed 200 or 300 feet in height; but others, a short dis- 
 tance back from the shore, form a range of greater elevation, varying 
 from 500 to 700 feet, and nowhere exceeding 1 ,000 feet. 
 
 The appearance of this coast from a vessel is slightly undulating, 
 bold, and unbroken, presenting features so little diversified that it is 
 very difficult to make out one part of it from another at or b miles 
 olf shore; but upon a nearer approach, the mouths of the rivers, taken 
 in connection with the features of the neighboring land, will in genera 
 supply distinguishing characters, by which the situation of a vessel 
 may be ascertained. . 
 
 Local Magnetic Disturbance of the Compa8B.-The black oxide 
 of iron, besides being a constituent mineral in the granitic rocks of 
 this coast, is found abundantly in nests and veins, particularly in the 
 vicinity of SawbiU River. Its magnetic action on the needles of com- 
 passes on shore is such as to cause the variation obtained by them to 
 vary from 14o to 29o west. While sounding in the boats a similar dis- 
 turbing influence on the compass has been sensibly felt, but diminishing 
 or increasingas the water deepened or shoaled. In the GM'nare, at 2 
 or 3 miles from the shore, or within the contour line ot 50 fathoms, the 
 error from this causenever exceeded half a point, and at 5 or 6 miles 
 it became insensible. . 
 
 Caution.-This coast is not by any means so bold as it appears from 
 a distance, for there are many rocks along it both above and under 
 water, several of which are very dangerous, and nearly a mile from the 
 shore. Strangers should not approach the shore between Magpie and 
 Bason Rivers nearer than the depth of 20 fathoms. Still greater cau- 
 tion becomes necessary between the last-named river and St. Charles 
 Point where 40 tathoms is as near as a large ship can approach with 
 prudence, for that depth in several places will be found within a mile 
 
 °* Mount St. John, an isolated saddle-backed hill, 1,416 feet above the 
 se-i is N by E. 11 miles from the entrance of the St. John River. 
 
 Coast-Between St. John and Magpie Rivers the coast consists of 
 white cUtts with a superstratum of sand, which is fast consolidating 
 into sandstone by means of the red oxide of iron furnished by numer- 
 ous small streams. 
 
MAGPIE BAY — SHALLOP BIVER. 
 
 279 
 
 r, which may 
 iig gradually 
 ;reater depth 
 of th<5 river, 
 trance of St. 
 neaps 4 feet, 
 rout Rivers is 
 sea in steep, 
 •ti ally wooded 
 or next to the 
 s, a short dis- 
 ation, varying 
 
 y undulating, 
 sifled thi>t it is 
 at or 8 miles 
 e rivers, taken 
 will in general 
 ou of a vessel 
 
 he black oxide 
 luitic rocks of 
 iculavly in the 
 leedles of com- 
 iied by them to 
 s a similar dis- 
 »ut diminishing 
 e Oulnare, at 2 
 50 fathoms, the 
 at 5 or G miles 
 
 it appears from 
 ove and under 
 a mile from the 
 5en Magpie and 
 till greater cau- 
 md St. Charles 
 I approach with 
 id within a mile 
 
 6 feet above the 
 ahn River, 
 ioast consists of 
 «t consolidating 
 ished by numer- 
 
 Magpie Bay is H miles wide between St. .John Itiver and Magpie 
 Point. There is good anchorage, with winds ott the land, in the bay, 
 and vessels may stand in to 7 fathoms at low water in every part of it, 
 but southerly and westerly winds roll in a very heavy sea. 
 
 Magpie River, the entrance to which is nearly in the center of 
 Magpie liay and ~> miles W^NVV. from St. John liiver, is a large and 
 rapid stream, with several rocks above and under water ott' its cast 
 entrance point and j^ inile ott' shore. 
 
 The entrance of this river, between steep rocks, is only 00 feet wi<le, 
 and the ebb tide rnslies out of it in a torrent 5 fathoms deep. At .'{00 
 yards within this narrow entrance the river falls about 30 feet over 
 granitic rocks. There are from 7 to 9 feet at low water over the bar 
 outside. Tiie river is of no use either to vessels or boats. 
 
 A rock with 3 tathoms water on it is reported to lie one mile from 
 Magpie Jiiver. 
 
 llather more than :f mile westward of Magpie Kiver, and nearly J 
 mile ott' shore on the west side of Magpie Bay, there is a rocky shoal on 
 wlii(rh the sea almost always breaks at low water. 
 
 Ridge Point lies 3jV miles W. by S. Irom Magpie Point. 
 
 Four-fathoms Ridge, a long and narrow ridge of rocky ground, 
 with from 4 to G fathoms at low water, extends 4i miles westward from 
 Ridge Point across a rocky bay, wherein there is one large and several 
 snniU rocks above water. The western side of this rocky ground is 
 nearly one mile southward of Thunder Point. There is a very iieavy 
 sea upon this ridge at times, and it then becomes dangerous to large 
 ships. There are 20 fathoms water close outside it in some parts, and 
 30 fathoms is quite near enough to its west end. 
 
 Sawbill River, in the bay between Sheldrake and Ore Points, may 
 be distinguished by the clay cliffs immediately within the entrance and 
 by the peculiar hills on either side of it, which are barren and of gray 
 feldspar, thickly studded with small round mounds. 
 
 This river aft'ords shelter to boats and small coasting craft, but it 
 can only be entered in very line weather in consequence of the heavy 
 surf. It has scarcely any bar, but tiie entrance, at the western 
 extremity of a long and narrow spit of sand which extends across the 
 n)«)nth of the river, is very narrow, with depths of from 4 to 11 feet in it, 
 according to low or high water, in ordinary spring tides. At high 
 water neaps there is seldom more than 9 feet. The same depth con- 
 tinues only for a very short distance within the entrancte. 
 
 Cod Bank, of sand, gravel, and broken shell, on which codfish 
 abound, lies 9 miles SE. from the entrance of Sawbill River, and the 
 depth is upward of GO fathoms between it and the shore. 
 
 Shallop River, 7A miles farther westward, att'ords shelter only to 
 boats, and can only be entered when there is no surf. There are several 
 rocks, both above and u;ider water, oft' this river, and also off Sandy 
 River, a small stream about 2i miles, farther westward The outermost 
 of these rocks lies fnlly ^ mile from shore. 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
mmm 
 
 280 
 
 GULF OP ST. LAWRENCE NORTH COAST. 
 
 Manitou River, U miles west of Shallop Kiver, is the largest on 
 this coast, excepting the St. John and Moisie Rivers, and may be readily 
 distinguished from a vessel several miles off the coast by two remark- 
 able patches of clay cliff, one of which is close eastward and the other 
 about one mile westward of its entrance. 
 
 Directions.— To enter this river keep close along the rocky west side 
 of Manitou Point, leaving on the port side the sandy spit close within 
 it, which stretches out from the sandy west point of the entrance. The 
 channel is always in this position, but it is more or less deep and wide, 
 according to the season and the winds which may have recently pre- 
 vailed. In general, the channel fs about 60 yards wide, '. ith a depth of 
 5 feet in it at low water and 12 feet in spring tide^'. Strong southerly 
 and westerly winds cause a heavy surf and render the entrance 
 impracticable. A short distance within the entrance there are 9 feet 
 at low water, deepening gradually to a fathoms at the first rapid, one 
 mile up the river. 
 
 Water will be found at a small stream on the western shore a short 
 distance within the entrance. 
 
 Anchorage.— There is good anchorage off Manitou River. Vessels 
 may safely anchor in fine weather with the wind off shore, having the 
 entrance of the river bearing N. 21° B. (N. 49° E. mag.) 1^ miles, 
 where they will have 15 fathoms over mud bottom and be more than 
 one mile distant from Manitou Point, the nearest point of the shore. 
 
 Small vessels may anchor farther inshore westward of the bar, and 
 in the bay between Manitou and Buch an Points; for the soundings 
 decrease regularly in toward the shore, with sand and clay bottom^ and 
 there is no other danger but a small rocky shoal which bears S. 65° E. 
 (S. 37° E. mag.) nearly a mile from Buchan Point, and is about J mile 
 
 off shore. 
 
 Buchan, Fall, and Hotteurs Rivers fall in cascades into the sea or 
 close to it, and thus serve to point out to a vessel her position off the 
 coast; and there is, moreover, a remarkable white patch close to the 
 westward of Buchan River. 
 
 Bason River, 10$ miles west of Manitou River, has a spit of large 
 stones extending about 300 yards out from its east point of entrance. 
 The entrance is very narrow, with a varying depth, which is less or 
 more according to the prevalence or infrequency of the SW. winds; but 
 there is in general enough water for very small coasting craft or large 
 boats. There are rapids J mile within the eiitranc*;. 
 
 Cape Cormorant, li miles to the westward of Bpson liver, is a 
 small peninsula, on the inner side of which there are •" ' huts of a 
 trading post always occupied, and which can not easily i -"en from 
 
 the sea. 
 
 Blaskowitz Point lies 5$ miles westward from Cape Cormorant. 
 Between them are Cormorant Islets, joined to the shore at low water, 
 and not readily distinguishable from the mainland. 
 
e largest on 
 
 ay be readily 
 
 two remark- 
 
 md the other 
 
 jky west side 
 ; close within 
 itrance. The 
 (ep and wide, 
 recently pre- 
 ith a depth of 
 ng southerly 
 the entrance 
 ire are 9 feet 
 rst rapid, one 
 
 shore a short 
 
 ver. Vessels 
 e, having the 
 ^g.) 1^ miles, 
 )e more than 
 f the shore. 
 ' the bar, and 
 he soundings 
 y bottom, and 
 ears S. 65° B. 
 } about J mile 
 
 ito the sea or 
 osition off the 
 1 close to the 
 
 I spit of large 
 it of entrance, 
 liich is less or 
 W. winds; but 
 : craft or large 
 
 [>!i .liver, is a 
 ^^ '. huts of a 
 / i.- -»eu from 
 
 pe (Cormorant. 
 B at low water. 
 
 MOISIE BAY AND RIVER. 
 
 M 
 
 Connorant Reef, which is small and dangerous, lies off Cormorant 
 Islets, and about a mile from the shore. It has 12 feet least water and 
 bears S. 08° W. (N. 8jO W. mag.) 3 miles from Cape Cormorant. When 
 on the inner edge of the reef, Blaskowitz and St. Charles Points are in 
 line, bearing 8.84^ W. (N. 09° W.mag.), so that vessels approaching 
 this part of the coast should keep the hitter point well open. 
 
 The Coast between Cape Cormorant and St. Charles Point is broken 
 into coves, two of which are nearly a mile deep, full of rocks, and afford 
 shelter only to boats. The shore is here fringed with rocks both above 
 and under water, and should not therefore be made too free with. 
 
 St. Charles Point will readily be known by the cove on its eastern 
 side, and by the trending of the land on the west side northwestward 
 toward Trout River. 
 
 St. Charles Reef, lying off St. Charles Point, is extremely dangerous, 
 being so bold that there is no warning by the hand lead, and very little 
 with the deep-sea lend. It is composed of a great number of rocks near 
 to each other, but having a considerable depth of water between them. 
 Some of them always show, but the outermost patches are always cov- 
 ered. The last lie rather more than ^ mile southward from the southern 
 extreme of St. Charles Point; and the reef continues to the flrst cove, 
 1^ miles northwestward of the point, but does not there extend so far 
 oft' shore as off" the point itself. 
 
 CautioQ.— Vessels lieating to the westward should take care not to 
 be becalmed westward of St. Charles Reef, lest the heavy swell from 
 the SW., so frequent on this coast, should heave them toward the reef, 
 for the water is too deep to anchor until close to the breakers. 
 
 Moisie Bay intervenes between St. Cliarles Point and Moisie River. 
 Trout River, a small stream, is in the center of this bay and 6^ miles 
 NW. from St. Charles Point. Here the rocky shores terminate and the 
 bold sandy beacli. which extends 6^ miles SW.to the Moisie River, 
 commences. 
 
 Seal House Cove, on the east side of Moisie Bay and 2^ miles from 
 St. Charles Point, affords shelter only to boats. There are two log 
 houses there, which are occasionally occupied as a fishing and trading 
 
 post. 
 
 The granitic hills, which leave the shore at Trout River, continue 
 inland until they join the ridges in rear of Seven Islands Bay. Between 
 the hills and the sea there is an extensive tract of low sandy country, 
 thickly wooded. 
 
 Moisie River empties on the east side of Moisie Point, which is the 
 southern extremity of the sandy country just mentioned. It io larger 
 than St. John River, discharging a great quantity of water in the spring 
 after the melting of the winter snows, and bringing down from the 
 interior great quantities of sand, which so obstruct its wide and shal- 
 low channel in the first 2^ miles from the sea that boats can not ascend 
 at low water. 
 
 i' ' 
 
 M 
 
v .. :y< ii i ii 
 
 282 
 
 GULF OP ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 The river becomes sliallow ini mediately within tlie entrance, expand- 
 ing into ft wide phu-e full of sand bars at low water. In the above 
 named distance from the sea, the breadth of the river decreases from 2J 
 miles to ^ wile, and at the end of that distance the sand bars cease. 
 The river has then a clear channel, with a depth of 9 feet water, 
 between steep sandy shores or cliffs for one mile farther, where its 
 breadth is 4 mile. The traders report that Hat-bottomed boats can 
 ascend 18 or 20 miles to the flrsfc rapids, following the stream. The 
 bar, which is of sand, dry at half tide, extends nearly ^ mile southwest- 
 ward from the long, low, and narrow east entrance point, and nearly 
 parallel to the east side of the west entrance point. 
 
 The entrauce of the river between this bar and the west point is from 
 the SSW., and continues for the distance of 1,200 yards with a breadth 
 of 4 mile, and a depth varying with the seasons and the winds which 
 prevail; those from the southward and eastward having a tendency to 
 block up the channel. It is supposed that there is seldom a less depth 
 than 9 feet at low water, the same as inside, close under the west 
 entrance point, which is the only place where a small vessel can find 
 shelter, close to two log houses occasionally employed as a salmon 
 fishery by the people of the Hudson Bay Company. The shelter here 
 is extremely imperfect in gales of wind from the southward and east- 
 ward, which send in so heavy a sea that, after breaking completely over 
 the bar and across the entrauce, it still retains power enough to seri. 
 ously affect a small vessel. 
 
 Tides.— At the entrance of Moisie Eiver it is high water, full and 
 change, at Ih. 30 m. ; ordinary springs rihe from 5 to 8 feet. 
 
 Moisie Shoal.— Although the bar of the Moisie lliver is so bold that 
 there are 50 fathoms water at the distance of f mile from it to the SE., 
 yet the shallow water continues from it 3^ miles southwestward past 
 Moisie Point, in such a manner as to form an extensive triangular 
 sandy shoal with from IJ to 3 fathoms on it at low water. 
 
 Moisie Rock, near the south extremity of Moisie Shoal, and with 
 3 feet least water, lies 2j| miles S. 53° W. (S. 80° W. mag.) from Moisie 
 Point, and nearly If miles from tlie shore. This is an extremely dan- 
 gerous shoal, being as bold as a wall. There are 25 fathoms water 
 alongside its southern edge, and upwards of 30 fathoms at 400 yards 
 off. It can generally be seen in fine weather from the change in the 
 color of the water, and from heavy breakers when there is much sea 
 running. 
 
 There is no close leading mark for avoiding this shoal so that the 
 only direction that can be given to a vessel standing toward it is to 
 tack when the northern side of Mauowiu Island comes in line with the 
 southern point of Great Boule Island; she will then be one mile from 
 the edge of the shoal, and in upwards of 30 fathoms water. 
 
 East Rocks, which are low, bare of trees, and always above water, 
 lie in Boule Bay between Moisie Shoal and Boule Islands. Vessels 
 
SEVEN ISLANDS AND KAY. 
 
 283 
 
 ce, expand- 
 1 the above 
 ises from 2J 
 bars cease, 
 feet water, 
 ', where its 
 I boats can 
 ream. The 
 ) southwest- 
 and nearly 
 
 )oint is from 
 ■,h a breadth 
 nnds which 
 tendency to 
 a less depth 
 er the west 
 sel can find 
 18 a salmon 
 shelter here 
 d and east- 
 ipletely over 
 ugh to seri. 
 
 ,ter, full and 
 
 so bold that 
 t to the SE., 
 stward past 
 e triaugular 
 
 al, and with 
 from Moisie 
 .remely dan- 
 thoms water 
 It 400 yards 
 lange in the 
 is much sea 
 
 so that the 
 yard it is to 
 line with the 
 le mile from 
 r. 
 
 ibove water, 
 ids. Vessels 
 
 ought not to stand into this embayed place, since there is generally a 
 heavy southerly swell rolling in, which would render it difficult to beat 
 
 out. , .... 
 
 Seven Islands are high and steep, of primary rocks, very Ihinly 
 wooded, and can be made out from a distance of about L'O miles, being 
 unlike anything else in the gulf. The easternmost of these are (Jreat 
 and Little Boule Islands, the former of which is tiie highest ot all. its 
 summit being 0»r. feet above high water. Next, westward, and pinaHel 
 to these two, are Little and Great I'.asque Islands; the Hist named being 
 the outer island. Great Basque Ishind is noo feet high. Maiuwin and 
 Carousel Islands he S\V. of Basque Islands; Manowm Ishird is 4o7 
 feet high; Carousel Island, the southernmost, is much low<r. West 
 Bocks lie between Manowin Islam! and the peninsula whicl, forms the 
 west entrance point of Seven Islands Baj. They are too small and 
 low to appear as the seventh island ; but the ])eniiisula has that appear- 
 ance when seen at a distance from sea, being higher than any ot the 
 islands, and 737 feet above high water. 
 
 Light— The lighthouse on Carousel Island, a square building .iyteet 
 high, with dwelling attached, is painted white, with one red horizontal 
 ' baud. At an elevation of 100 feet a tixed white light is exhibited, which 
 should be visible 20 miles. , , , „ 
 
 Caution.— The narrow passes between the Bonle Islands, the Basque 
 Islands, between Manowin and Carous'^1 Islands, and between Manowin 
 Island and West Rocks, require no further notice than to remark 
 that the tide sets strongly toward and through them, the flood to the 
 west and the ebb to the eastward, a circumstance that should be 
 attended to when becalmed at night, or when tacking in their entrances. 
 The first and last of these channels have water enough for large ships; 
 but the one is subject to sudden and baffling flaws of wind round Boule 
 Islands, and the other is rendered intricate by rocks which nearly cover 
 
 at high water. , x, • 
 
 Seven Islands Bay.— The relative situations of Seven Islands, their 
 size, and the breadth of the channels between them, will be best seen 
 from the charts. They are so placed as to completely shelter the bay 
 within them, which is 23 miles wide at the entrance, between Chass6 
 Point the east end of the peninsula, and Sandy Point, which is opiw- 
 site the northern end of Great Bascpie Island. From the entrance 
 Seven Islands bay extends about 6 miles northward and westward, 
 being so nearly landlocked as to resemble a lake, sufficiently extensive 
 for large fleets to lie in safety. The bottom is of clay, and there are no 
 shoals, excepting the mud banks, which fill up the northern part of 
 
 A fine, broad, bold, sandy beach extends 3 miles northwestward from 
 the east entrance point of the bay to the entrance of the principal river, 
 near which stands the Hudson Bay Company's trading post. The 
 houses at this post can not be seen from the outer parts ot the bay, 
 
|l-|i|A! 
 
 284 
 
 GULP OF ST. LAWRENCE — NOKTH COAST. 
 
 but there is a wooden store on the beach, off which vessels usually 
 anchor. 
 
 Water can be obtained ft'om this river at high tide. 
 
 Anchorage.— The best berth for a vessel of large draft is with Sandy 
 Point and the north side of Little Boule Island in line, and Chass^ 
 Point in line with the west side of the West Ko«!k8. The NW. extrem- 
 ity of the sandy beach near the entrance of the river-will then be about 
 north; the vessel will be in 9 fathoms at low water, over clay bottom, 
 nearly one mile from the sandy beach to the eastward, and nearly } 
 mile from the 3-fathoni edge of the shoals, which occupy the northern 
 part ol the bay. Smaller vessels may lie closer to the shore, in 6 fath- 
 oms at low water, which is as near as any vessel ought to anchor. 
 
 In this anchorage there is a considerable swell with a strong south- 
 erly Wind, but never enough to endanger a vessel, although sufficient 
 to prevent boats from landing. Those that may wish to lie qnite 
 smoothly may anchor in the SW. part of the bay, in 13 fathoms, soft 
 clay bottom, where they will be quite landlocked. 
 
 Channels into Seven Islands Bay.— There are threat channels lead- 
 ing into Seven Islands Bay, namely, East, Middle, and West Channels. 
 
 East Channel, between Great Basque Island and Sandy Point, may 
 be approached from, between Bonle Islands and East Bocks or from 
 between Boule and Basque Islands, both routes being entirely free 
 from danger. It is seldom used, having a rock in its center, which is 
 covered only in high tides. A reef, with from 6 to 9 feet of water, 
 exte!ids ^ mile eastward of this rock. The passage on either side of 
 it is wide and has from 13 to 15 fathoms. Vessels should only attempt 
 it with a fair wind, and should keep within 200 yards of Basque Island, 
 or as near tt) Sandy Point; the latter is preferable. 
 
 Middle Channel (which is also the principal and best) is upward of 
 If miles wide, and so free from danger that a vessel of the largest 
 draft may approach the shore within 100 yards in every part, except- 
 ing at Chasse Point, where a reef runs out 250 yards from the shore. 
 This channel, between Basque Islands on the east and Carousel, Mano- 
 win. West Kocks, and the peninsula on the west, is preferable in every 
 wind, excepting the north and NW., with which, to save beating (since 
 they blow out of the bay), it might be desirable to enter by the West 
 Channel. 
 
 West Channel, between the West Bocks and Croix Point, at the 
 sonthern extremity of the peninsula, is f mile wide and quite free from 
 danger. There are two or three rocks lying 200 yards to the north- 
 ward of West Bocks, but they always show, excepting in very high 
 tides and the smoothest sea. 
 
 Caution. — The ebb tide is turned oft' by Croix Point toward West 
 Bocks, a circumstance which must be attended to in taking this chan- 
 nel with a scant northerly wind. 
 
 Anchorage. — The water is too deep for anchorage in any of these 
 
m-'nnj 
 
 SEVEN ISLANDS BAY. 
 
 285 
 
 i\a usually 
 
 rith Sandy 
 ,nd Cba8s6 
 W. extretn- 
 ;ta be about 
 »y bottom, 
 d uearly J 
 e northern 
 B, in 6 fath- 
 ijchor. 
 pong Bouth- 
 li sufficient 
 
 lie quite 
 thorns, soft 
 
 uinelslead- 
 b Channels. 
 Point, may 
 iks or from 
 itirely free 
 >r, which is 
 it of water, 
 her side of 
 nly attempt 
 que Island, 
 
 1 upward of 
 the largest 
 urt, except- 
 I the shore, 
 use], Mano- 
 jle in every 
 ating (since 
 y the West 
 
 oint, at the 
 
 be free from 
 
 the north- 
 
 1 very high 
 
 >ward West 
 ; this chan- 
 
 ay of these 
 
 channels and the bottom generally rocky, excepting to the eastward 
 and northward of Houle Islands. The ground is not Ht for anchoring 
 until well into tlie bay. The water is extremely deep outside of these 
 islands, and they are so bold that a vessel may stand in close to their 
 rocky shores. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Seven Islands Bay, at 
 Ih. 4Um.; springs rise 9 feet, and neaps 5 feet. 
 
 The rate of the stream of the tides in the bay and in the ])rincipal 
 channels between Seven Islands seldom amounts to one knot; but in 
 the narrow channels between Boule Islands, Basque Islands, and in 
 East and West Channels it may amount to 2 knots in spring tides, or 
 even more in the narrowest of tiiese channels when accelerated by 
 strong winds. The flood coming along from the eastward strikes 
 Boule Islands, and passes between them, and also between the two 
 Basque Islands. It is turned off by Great Boule Island toward 
 Carousel Island and West Channel ; but the greater part of the stream 
 which passes within Boule Islands enters the bay by East Channel, 
 between Great Bas()ue Island and the mainland. There is very little 
 flood in Middle Channel, excepting an eddy outward stream close 
 along the shores of the peninsula, and the narrow stream troth between 
 Bascjue Islands, which sets across toward West Channel. 
 
 The ebb sets fairly out of the bay, part of it by Bast Channel and 
 part of it by Middle Channel, where it meets the stream through West 
 Channel, which turns it to the eastward, past the southern points of 
 Basque and Jionle Islands. 
 
 Winds. — In fine nights the winds are almost always light and baffling 
 between Seven Islands, particularly if the wind be from the westward 
 in the offing. At such times there is generally a northerly land wind 
 in Seven Islands Bay, but it does nut often reach far out among the 
 islands in the early part of the night, although It often does toward the 
 morning. 
 
 Aspect of Coast — The coast between Seven Islands and Point de 
 Monts is less bold in appearance, being less elevated, than that east- 
 ward of Seven Islands. The hills arc, for the most i)art, far back in 
 the country, and the shores are of very moderate height above the sea. 
 The country near the sea is formed of small and low granitic hills, par- 
 tially wooded with spruce trees. Marshes and ponds are frequent 
 between the hills, sandy beaches occur occasionally, and the sandy 
 tracts in rear of them are always the most densely wooded parts. 
 
 This coast is much more bold than its appearance would promise, and 
 although the water is deep off every point of it, yet in general, and 
 with few exceptions, there are sufficient soundings with the deep-sea 
 lead to give warning to a vessel of her ai)proach to the shore. 
 
 From Carousel Island across St. Margaret Bay to St. Margaret Point, 
 a distance of 14 miles, there is deep water all the way. 
 
 St. Margaret River empties nearly j'< the center of St. Margaret 
 
 
286 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 Itiiy, beiiiR <i milos from Croix I'oint. Altliough a large Htream, it 
 aftords slielter to boats only. A bar of sand oxteiuls !< mile from the 
 eiitriiiu'e, ami Iiiih geveral small channels through it, with only .J feet at 
 low water. Immediately within the entrance, which is .'iriO yards wide, 
 there are (5 feet water, and only 3 feet can be carried up to the low falls, 
 which are over granitic rociks, .i{ miles from the entrance. Helow the 
 falls the river H(»ws between cliffs of sand and clay, and is full of sand 
 bars, dry at low water. The water deepens gradually outside the bar, 
 with sandy bottom, to IS fathoms at the distan<^e of one mile from the 
 3-fathom line of soundings. There is a 8an<ly beach for a considerable 
 distance (ui either side of the mouth of the river. 
 
 St Margaret Point is roclty, of moderate height, and has a round 
 hill a short distance within its extremity. There are several rocks, 
 which cover at high water, and which extend nearly i mile off this 
 point. These rocks are extremely bold, and there Is no bottom with 
 the hand lead close outside of them, and no bottom with 70 fathoms of 
 line at a less distance than 2 miles. 
 
 The Coast between St. Margaret Point and Great Cawee Island is 
 low, and fringed with small islets and rocks close to the shore, which 
 may with prudence be closely approached by the lead, but the depth of 
 20 fathoms is near enough to it for a stranger. Book Biver and many 
 other small streams empty into the bay between these points. The 
 deep sea soundings are very irregular oil" this section of the coast, for 
 in some parts there are not more than r»0 fathoms 1 or 5 miles off shore; 
 whoieas, in others, as off May Islets, « miles northward of Cawee 
 Islands, no bottom will be found with GO fathoms within 2 miles of the 
 rocks. 
 
 Cawee Islands are two small and hilly islands of gray granite, and 
 nearly bare of trees. Great Cawee Island, which is the larger, thd higher, 
 and the northeastern of the two, is about ^ mile in diameter, and about 
 250 feet high. Little Cawee Island, lying a mile farther southwest- 
 ward, is composed of two islets, which occupy a length of ^ mile par- 
 allel to the coast, it has several rocks above water close off it to the 
 SW., and a reef 250 yards northwestward of its Avest point. 
 
 Water.— There is neither wood nor water on Cawee Islands, but 
 both may be obtained from the opposite mainland. 
 
 Cawee Rock, small, round, and high, and i mile southward of the 
 south point of Great Cawee, is so bold that a large ship might lie along- 
 side of it. 
 
 Great Cawee Cove, on the north side of Great Cawee Island, is 
 secure for boats, with plenty of water, but too small and narrow in the 
 entrance for vessels. 
 
 Qreat Cawee Shoal lies off the mouth of Great Cawee Cove, 400 
 yards to the northward. The least water on it is 15 feet. 
 
 Cawee Ledge.— Half a mile north from this shoal is a snmll round 
 ledge, awash at low water, and i mile from the mainland. From it the 
 
e Htreatn, it 
 tile fnim the 
 »nly '<i feet at 
 yards wide, 
 blie low falls, 
 Below the 
 full of Hand 
 side the bur, 
 lile from the 
 coiisiderable 
 
 has a round 
 tveral rocks, 
 mile off this 
 bottom with 
 '0 fathoms of 
 
 ree Island is 
 shore, which 
 the depth of 
 er and many 
 points. The 
 the coast, for 
 les offshore; 
 rd of Oawee 
 I miles of the 
 
 granite, and 
 5r,thd higher, 
 er, and about 
 »r south west- 
 )f ^ mile par- 
 e off it to the 
 lit. 
 
 Islands, but 
 
 Iiward of the 
 iglit lie along- 
 wee Island, is 
 narrow in the 
 
 vee Cove, 400 
 
 a small round 
 From it the 
 
 (IRK.VT CAWKK ISLAND ANCIIORAOE. 
 
 287 
 
 Boutli side of the large ro(;kH, between (ireatC^awee and the nmiu,i« ia 
 line with the point ol' the niain to the wcNtwnnl. 
 
 Large Rooks, MM) yards from (hrat Ciiwee Island, between it and. 
 the main, are two large rocks clost- together; they lie . MM* yards from 
 the mainland, and have a reef extending 400 yards SW. from their 
 8W. point. Nearly A mile N K. by N. from these rocks, and at the same 
 distance from tlie main, there is a small rock whitii always sliows. 
 
 Anchorage. — There is anchorage in tlie mouth of the bay on the 
 inner or NW. side of (heat Cawee Island, in 7 fathoms, muddy bottom, 
 at L'(M» yards from the island. The shelter is complete with winds from 
 8\V. by VV\ round northerly to NNK., and tolerably so with all easterly 
 winds, although some swell rolls round theislaml; but the SW. winds 
 blow right in, and send in a very heavy sea. 
 
 Directions. — To run into tiiis anchorage fnmi the northeastward, 
 steer N. 71° W. (N. 4."»o W. mag.) past the NK. side of Great Oawee 
 Island, going no nearer than ^ mile (to avoid the shoal otf the mouth of 
 the cove), until the poiJit of the mainland to the westward opens clear 
 of the north side of the island. Then steer for the point of the nniin- 
 land, keeping it mi4way between the north side of the island and the 
 Large Rocks. Having arrived between the rocks and the ishuul, haul 
 into the mouth of the small bay, which will be seen on the.NVV. side 
 ol the latter, and anchor in 7 fathoms at low water. There are 12 or 
 13 fathoms in tlie middle of the channel, and upward of 1) fathoms can 
 be <!arried through. 
 
 In running for this anchorage from the south westward, a vessel may 
 pass between Little Oawee Island and the main, by keeping in mid- 
 channel ; but the better and safer way is to run between Little and 
 Great Oawee Islands, hauling close round the west point of the latter 
 into the anchorage. By this route there is nothing in the way, except- 
 ing Oawee Rock, which can always be seen. 
 
 From the foregoing description it will be seen that this is a very 
 dangerous and intricate place; and the anchorage between Great 
 Oawee Island and the main is too small for large vessels, the channel 
 being only 400 yards wi<le. Still this anchorage, altlM>ngh too small 
 for an occasional place of shelter, excepting for small vessels, may, 
 nevertheless, be of great use as a place of refuge for a vessel in dis- 
 tress from loss of nuists or other cause, for the ground is so good that 
 a vessel well moored there might be able to ride out any gale which 
 occurs during the summer months. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at Cawee Islands at Ih. 
 5()m. ; springs rise 9 feet, and neaps 5 feet. The tides run fair between 
 the islands and the mainland at a rate which seldom exceeds 1^ knots 
 and which is in general much less. 
 
 Sproule Point, ^ mile westward from Little Oawee Island, is the 
 eastern point of Lobster Bay. A reef extends off its south side 200 
 yards toward Little Oawee, but the principal reef oft' it runs out ^ mile 
 to the southward. 
 
I 
 
 n 
 .1 
 ,1 
 
 288 
 
 GULF OF BT. LAWRENCE — NORTH COAST. 
 
 Lobater Bay in butweeii Sproiile I'oint mid CrookiMl IsIaiidH, which 
 are a group of miiuiII JMletH and rockH running out from thu Hliore 3 
 miles westward of Sproule Point. All the northern part or head of 
 LobHter Bay Ih occupied by an exteiisive Hat of Hand and l>owlder8, 
 dry at low water, aitd on which lobsterH abound : but it in an excellent 
 open roadstead, with plenty of room for large HhipH. 
 
 Crooked Xalanda arc^ Itold to the Houthward and eastward, leaving 
 the mouth of the bay ciear of all danger across the reef oft' Sproule 
 Point. Vessels may anchor midway between the reef and the islands, 
 choosing their depth from 5 to 112 fathoms, according as they may wish 
 to lie, at ^ mile or one mile tvom the 3-fathom edge of the flats in 
 the head of the bay. The bottom is flue sand over clay, and the shelter 
 from northerly and we.sterly winds; but winds from east, round south 
 to 88VV., blow right in, with a heavy sea and thick weather. 
 
 Pentecoat River enters the sea on the SW. side of a rocky point 
 1^ miles southwestward of Crooked Islands. The opposite entrance 
 point is of sand. Alluvial Hill is a remarkable round and wooded emi- 
 nence 2 miles SSW. from the mouth of the river. The tlrst reach of 
 the river is toward this hill,.1eaving a very narrow sandy ridge between 
 it and the sea. Steep cliff's of sand and clay form the banks for 2^ 
 miles, to which distance only it is navigable for boats. The entrance of 
 the river is only 30 yards wide, with a depth of 7 feet at low water, and 
 there are feet within for a short distance. At high water from 12 to 
 16 feet can be carried in, so that this river is capable of aff'ording shelter 
 to coasting schooners as well as boats; but it would be very difficult 
 to take a sailing vessel in through so narrow an entrance, and could 
 never be done on the ebb tide, which runs out with great rapidity. 
 
 A fine bold, sandy beach extends 7 miles south from this river to 
 English Point. 
 
 Engliah Point, 1^ miles northward from North Reef of Egg Island, 
 has a shoal of large stones extending ^ mile off it. On the SW. side 
 this shoal may be approached to the depth of 6 fathoms at low water, 
 bnt on the SE. and east it is very bold, there being 15 fathoms at the 
 distance of ^ mile. 
 
 Egg laland lies 14 miles SSW. from the south point of Great Gawee 
 Island. It IS low, narrow, and of granitic rocks, without trees, and f 
 mile Itong. North Reef, always above water, lies 800 yards north from 
 the island. It is a low, narrow, black reef, which is 600 yards long, in 
 the same direction, bold toward the mainland and also toward English 
 Point. A reef under water extends ^ mile south from these rocks, 
 leaving only a very narf-ow 3-fathom channel between them and the 
 island. 
 
 Northeast Reef extends 1,200 yards f^m the NE. point of Egg Island, 
 and is the greatest danger between Seven Islands and Point de Monts. 
 Some of the rocks upon it show in low tides, and the sea generally 
 breaks on them at low water. This reef prevents the swell from rolling 
 
iihIh, which 
 the Hhore 3 
 or head of 
 d Iwwhlers, 
 All ifxcellent 
 
 jird, leaving 
 oft' Spioule 
 the iHhiiids, 
 By may wish 
 the Hats in 
 d the shelter 
 round south 
 er. 
 rocky point 
 }ite entrance 
 wooded emi- 
 tlrst reach of 
 idge between 
 banks for 2^ 
 >e entrance of 
 >w water, and 
 ter from 12 to 
 )rding shelter 
 very diflicnlt 
 ce, and could 
 rapidity, 
 this river to 
 
 f Egg Island, 
 the 8W. side 
 at low water, 
 fathoms at the ' 
 
 f Great Oawee 
 lit trees, and f 
 rds north from 
 yards long, in 
 oward English 
 a these rocks, 
 them and the 
 
 of Egg Island, 
 •oint de Monts. 
 I sea generally 
 ell from rolling 
 
 BBS 
 
 EOa ISLAND— ANCHOR AGE. 
 
 289 
 
 1 
 
 In betwoeii North lici'f and Kg^ Island, and thus asHistH in shelterlnif 
 the iinchoruijc, 
 
 Light — On l._ : Island is builf Jin octugonal 1i)>;litlu)use, JH feet liigli, 
 Buinioiiiiting the ktcpir's dwelliiiK- it i» painted wliite, wWU one red 
 vertical stripe, and exhibits, at an t'levation of 71 feet, a revolving wliite 
 light every minute and a half, whieh sjionid b(> visiLh' ir» miles. The 
 lighthouse is 2<K) yards from the south end of tlie island. 
 
 TVater. — There is no water on Kgj,' Ishmd, hut it may readily bo 
 obtained t'vom small streams on either side of lioadstead Point. 
 
 Anchorage. — Kgg island, with its rooks and reefs, forms a natural 
 breakwater 1|\ miles long, which inclines sli}>htly toward the shore at 
 its northern end in such a manner as, with the shoal otf English Point, 
 to shelter the anchorage from NK. winds. The northern end of this 
 breakwater is nearly '^ mile from the nuiiuland, and the southern end 
 more than one mile; but extensive tiats extend from the nuiin and 
 diminish the navigable breadth of the channel to about ^ mile in the 
 narrowest part, which is nearly opposite the northein end of Kgg 
 Island. The best anchorage is, however, south of this narrow part, 
 where the breadth from the 3fathom edge of the sh' al off the main to 
 Egg Island is 1,200 yards. 
 
 All along the inner sides of Egg Island and of North lieef, except 
 near their northern end, the water is deep, there being from 17 to 24 
 fathoms at low tide (tlose to them. The soundings decrease gradually 
 toward the mainland, and the best depth to ancho*' in is 9 or 10 fath- 
 oms, according to the time of tide. The bottom is of clay in the deep 
 water toward the island, and of sand from the depth of 9 fathoms 
 toward the mainland. There is little danger of dragging an anchor up 
 hill toward the main, but, with violent squalls oft' the land, vessels 
 should have a good scope of cable out, for should the anchor start they 
 might be on the rocks before they could bring up again. 
 
 In order to have as much room as possible, with a moderate depth of 
 water, vessels should not anchor northward of a line joining Poadstead 
 Point and the center of Egg Island. The best position is with the south 
 end of Egg Island bearing S. 59° E. (S. 34° E. mag.) and the inner side 
 of North Reef N. 20° E. (N. 45° E. mag.). English Point will then 
 be open half a point westward of the latter. In this anchorage vessels 
 will lie sheltered from NE., round by north, to SW. by the mainland, 
 and from ESE. to NE.by the island, with its rocks and reefs. Jhe winds 
 from the remaining points, namely, those between SW. and SE., sel- 
 dom blow strong, and even with them a vessel may find some shelter 
 by shifting her berth to the eastward, where she will tind 7 fathoms 
 over sandy bottom. 
 
 The anchorage at Egg Island is too small to be a favorite resort for 
 large vessels, but in time of need, or as a place of refuge in case of 
 distress, it would be found of great value on a coast so destitute of good 
 harbors. 
 
 1151 19 
 
 
 I ■ 
 
*--r--= 
 
 iWWBiyi 
 
 290 
 
 GULF OF ST. LAWRENCE NORTH COAST. 
 
 Directions are unnecessary for running into this anchorage from the 
 southward, since the south end of Eggr Island is quite bold. But if it 
 be intended to run between the island and the main, stand in to the 
 northward to 8 or 9 fathoms, or until English Point is open half a i>oint 
 to the northward of the North Keef, then steer for English Point, giving 
 the inner side of the North Reef a berth of 200 yards until the vessel 
 has passed the North Keef a full i mile. She will then be in about 7 
 fathoms at low water, and may haul out to sea, taking care to avoid 
 Northeast Iteef. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at Egg Island at 2h.; 
 springs rish 11 feet, and neaps 6 feet. 
 
 The rate oi the tides between Egg Island and the main is from a half 
 to one knot, and part of the stream of ebb sets toward and out through 
 the narrow and dangerous 3-fathom channel between the island and 
 North Keef. Part of the stream of Hood comes in through the same 
 channel. 
 
 Calumet River is a small stream 2^ miles southwestward of Egg 
 Island ; along the shore for one mile southward of its entrance there 
 are reefs of largo stones extending out 1,200 yards from high-water 
 mark, and having 15 fathoms off them at ^ mile to seaward. South- 
 ward of these rocks, as far as Trinity Bay, the coast is free from dan- 
 ger, and may be approached with safety if due caution be used. There 
 are 20 fathoms at from J to one mile off shore. 
 
 Caribou Point, 8^ miles southward from Egg Island, is a small 
 rocky peninsula, having sandy coves on either side of its isthmus, in 
 which pilot boats find shelter; 
 
 Trinity Bay, 5 miles southward of Caribou Point, is 2 miles wide 
 and nearly one mile deep, with a fine sandy beach extending from its 
 south point to Trinity Kiver, which is a small and rapid stream, abound- 
 ing with trout and salmon, where water can be had only at high water, 
 because of the large stones about its entrance. The south point of the 
 bay IP ""^"Jky, and off' the NE. point there are two low black rocks. 
 The depth of water between these points is from 5 to 7 fathoms at low 
 water over sandy bottom. 
 
 Anchorage.— This bay affords e:fcellent anchorage, in a moderate 
 depth of water, with good ground and plenty of room to weigh in any 
 wind. It is a valuable stopping place in westerly winds for vessels 
 bound up the St. Lawrence to wait their opportunity to proceed round 
 Point de Moutg and up the estuary. 
 
 Directions.— In running along the land for Trinity Bay, either from 
 the NB. or SW., come no nearer than the depth of 15 fathoms until the 
 bay opens; then haul in and anchor in 7 fathoms at low water, with 
 the lighthouse on Point de Monts (seen just within a small rock about 
 li miles southwestward of the bay) beariug S. 35° W. (S. 00° W. mag.), 
 and the outer of the two rocks off" the NE. point of the bay N. 15° E. 
 (N. 40° E. mag.). The vessel will be then rather more than f mile from 
 
3T. 
 
 jliorage from the 
 bold. But if it 
 , stand ill to tbe 
 ►pen half a point 
 ish Point, giving 
 I until the vessel 
 in be in about 7 
 g care to avoid 
 
 Island at 2 b.; 
 
 ain is from a half 
 and out through 
 1 tbe island and 
 lirougb the same 
 
 westward of Egg 
 ts entrance there 
 from high-water 
 leaward. South- 
 is free from dan- 
 1 be used. There 
 
 land, is a small 
 )f its isthmus, in 
 
 t, is 2 miles wide 
 [tending from its 
 I stream, abound- 
 ily at high water, 
 louth point of the 
 low black rocks. 
 7 fathoms at low 
 
 fe, in a moderate 
 1 to weigh in any 
 winds for vessels 
 to proceed round 
 
 Bay, either from 
 fathoms until the 
 t low water, with 
 small rock about 
 (S. 00° W. mag.), 
 the bay N. 15° E. 
 than f mile from 
 
 POINT DE MONTS. 
 
 291 
 
 the south point of the bay. Vessels of large draft may anchor farther 
 out and in deeper water, if more convenient, and small schooners in 3 
 fathoms, close under the south point. 
 
 Point de Monts. — The south extremity of the jioint is <i^ miles SW. 
 from the south point of Trinity Bay. 
 
 •A ledge of rocks with 9 or 10 feet least water lies ESE. from the 
 extremity of the point and J mile oft" shore. Another rock with 2 
 fathoms on it lies south J mile from the lighthouse, and there is a third, 
 with a little more water and nearly as far oft", east from the lighthouse. 
 These dangers should be carefully guarded against in making the light 
 in thick weather, or when keeping close to the land with a northerly 
 wind, and the depth of 15 fathoms is quite near enough to them for a 
 large vessel at any time, being no more than 400 yards from the first 
 and about twice that distance from the two last of them. 
 
 Light. — The lighthouse stands low down and close' to the sea, at 5 
 miles southwestward from Trinity Bay and NE. rather more than IJ 
 miles from the south extremity of Point <ie Monts. The lighthouse is 
 90 feet high, circular in shape, and painted white, with two red hori- 
 zontal bands, and exhibits at ar elevation of 93 feet a fixed white light, 
 which IS visible 1." miles. The light can not be seen when bearing 
 southward of N. 10° E. (S. 85° E. mag.), as it is shut i\\ by higher land. 
 
 Fog Signal. — During fogs and snowstorms a cotton-powder cartridge 
 IS ex[)loded every twenty minutes. 
 
 SifOisla. — There is a telegraph and signal station at this lighthouse. 
 
 Tne extreme of the land to the nortlieastward near Caribou Point 
 bears N. 30° E. (N. 55° E. mag.) from the light, which can be seen over 
 the point, and that bearing continued will pass little more than 2^ miles 
 outside of Egg Island at the distance of 20 miles from the light. 
 
 Caution. — Vessels being to the eastward in a dark night, when the 
 land can not be seen, had better tack ; when Point de Monts light bears 
 S. 44° W. (S. 09° W. mag.) will be near enough, if they be as near to 
 it as Trinity Bay. They may, however, stand in nearer, using due 
 caution by the lead. Vessels westward of the ligbt should tack as 
 soon as it bears N. (50° E. (N. 85° E. mag.), for, as previously remarked, 
 it can not be seen to the southward of N. 70° E. (S. 85° E, mag.), in 
 consequence of the high land which interposes. 
 
 When the light disappears, a vessel ofif Goodbout River will be only 
 one mile from the bar. 
 
 II 
 
 li 
 
 Is 
 
 i 
 
CHAPTER X. 
 
 8T. LAWRENCE RIVER, NORTH SHORE— POINT DE M0NT8 TO 8AGUENAY 
 RIVER AND THE SAGUENAY RIVER. 
 
 ■: < 
 
 QUEBEC 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1111.) 
 
 Aspect of Coast — The land, which on the eaHtern side of Point de 
 Monts is rather low, begins to rise immediately from that point to the 
 westward; and granitic hills, very sparingly wooded and in no part 
 above 1,000 feet in height, form the north coast of the estuary as far 
 as St. (liles Point, distant 30J miles west of Point de Monts. The sec- 
 tion of coast just indicated is as bold as any in the St. Lawrence, there 
 being little or no warning by the lead ; neither is there any good anchor- 
 age sutticiently roomy for the occasional use of shipping. 
 
 St. Augustine Cove, 1^ miles westward of Point de Monts, affords 
 shelter only to boats. 
 
 Ooodbout River, 8^ miles westward from Point de Monts, enters 
 the sea at the extremity of a sandy point, and has a bar of sand, which 
 extends nesirly ^ mile from the eastern entrance point, dries in great 
 part at low water, and is bold to seaward. There is usually at low 
 water not more tlian 4 or 5 feet over this bar, on which a heavy surf 
 very frequently breaks, and the river is only of use to boats because of 
 the difficult and narrow entrance, although there are 15 or 16 feet of 
 water over the bar at high water springs. There is a trading and 
 salmon-fishing post of the Hudson Bay Company at this river, and the 
 houses can readily be seen. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, a^ Goodbout Biver at 
 Ih. 32m.; springs rise 11 feet, neaps C feet. 
 
 Anchorage.— It is possible to anchor on either side of the bar off 
 Ooodbout River, but the anchorages are too near to the shore to be of 
 general use. The anchorage westward of the bar may occasionally be 
 useful, in easterly winds, to small vesi^els. They should anchor about 
 midway between the bar and the first rocky point westward of it, at 
 or about one mile westward of the bar. 
 
 At this anchorage, which is only safe in summer, the bottom is of 
 coarse sand. The tides are weak and iri*egular, rendering it difficult to 
 keei) the anchor clear in calm weather; they also frequently set toward 
 the shore, coming in with long ripplings parallel to the coast. 
 
 Directions. — To run for this anchorage, observe that the rocky point 
 just mentioned and the east entrance point of St. Nicholas Harbor in 
 
 292 
 
i TO SAGUENAY 
 
 ide of Point de 
 lat ])oint to the 
 and in no part 
 estuary as far 
 onts. The sec- 
 [iawrence, there 
 ly good anchor- 
 
 I Monts, afibrds 
 
 ) Monts, enters 
 of sand, which 
 , dries in great 
 usually at low 
 h a heavy surf 
 oats because of 
 15 or 16 feet of 
 a trading and 
 s river, and the 
 
 Ibout Biver at 
 
 ! of the bar off 
 B shore to be of 
 occasionally be 
 [I anchor about 
 jtward of it, at 
 
 lie bottom is of 
 
 ig it difficult to 
 
 ntly set toward 
 
 coast. 
 
 the rocky point 
 
 olas Harbor in 
 
 \^ 
 
 8T. NICHOLAS HARBOR. 
 
 293 
 
 line, bearing N. 87° W. (N. 63° W. niag.^, just clears the bar; therefore 
 keep the last-named point in sight until the houses at (loodbout River 
 bea« N. 20° E. (N. 44° E, mag.), and then the bar will have been passed. 
 After which run in and bring the points in line, inuniiig for them until 
 the vessel is judged to be in the position above mentioned, or until the 
 east extremity of the high clay and wooded banks on the west side of 
 the river, where it turns inland, and which can bo seen ove?' the sandy 
 beach, bears N. 9° E. (N. a3° E. mag.). The depth will be G or 7 ftithoms 
 at low water; toward the shore 3J fathoms at the distance of 100 yards; 
 then 3 fathoms for nearly 400 yards farther in ; and thence shoal to the 
 beach, about ^ na'le from the vessel. To seaward the water deepens 
 rapidly to 30 fathoms at ^ mile, 
 
 St Nicholas Harbor lies 3 miles northeastward from Cape St. 
 Nicholas, which is a high bare point of granite, bearing S. 79° W. 
 (N. 77° W. mag.), 17 miles from Point de Monts. This harbor is a nar- 
 row inlet, between granitic hills from 500 to 700 feet in height, extend- 
 ing IJ miles WNW., and is so secure that a vessel might be laid on 
 shore and repaired as if she were in a dock ; on the S\V. side a vessel 
 may lay alongside of the rocks as alongside a wharf. There is as much 
 as 9^ fathoms at low water in the deepest part of the harbor, and the 
 bottom is of mud. 
 
 The breadth of the harbor within, nowhere exceeds 380 yards, and at 
 the entrance is only 150 yards. The shoals on the east side of the 
 entrance dry out so far as to leave a channel between them and Cross 
 Point only CO yards wide, and with a depth of 5 feet at low water spring 
 tides. 
 
 The depth that can be carried in at high water is from 12 to 17 feet, 
 according as it may be neap or spring tides. The bottom in the entrance 
 is of sand with some few large stones upon it, which can be seen and 
 avoided if the tide be not high enough to pass over them. The 
 entrance is in the center of a small bay, f mile wide and rather more 
 than ^ mile deep to the reeky point on the west side of the entrance to 
 the harbor, which will be readily seen projecting out into the bay, and 
 is named Cross Point, ftom a small wooden cross upon it. An exten- 
 sive shoal of sand and bowlders, which dry at half tide, extends from 
 the east point of the bay nearly 700 yards to the SW. and continues 
 northward at the entrance of the harbor. This shoal can always be 
 seen, is quite bold, and completely shuts out the sea from the harbor 
 in southerly and easterly winds. The shoals on the west side extend 
 across a small bay on the SW. side of Cross Point and continue off 
 shore for 200 yards. 
 
 The Anchorage between these shoals, in the bay off the harbor's 
 mouth, is only 600 yards wide, and consequently too small to be con- 
 sidered a roadstead for large vessels, but the ground is good and the 
 depth convenient for anchoring preparatory to warping into the harbor. 
 
 Water. — There are several small streams on the eastern side of St. 
 
 is 
 
294 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER — NORTH SHORE. 
 
 1 '; 
 
 \ 'I! 
 
 Nicholas Harbor where water can be obtaitiecl; and it can also be had 
 at hi«h water from the two small rivers at the head of the inlet, 
 
 Tides.-It is high water, full and change, in St. Nicholas Harbof, at 
 Ih. 55m.; springs rise 12 feet, neaps 7 feet. 
 
 Caution.— Southeast winds blow right into St. Nicholas Harbor, and 
 are consequently the most favorable for running in; but with a strong 
 wind m that direction, and at high water, when the shoals are covered, 
 there is generally some sea outside the narrow entrance. A SW. wind 
 is the safest for running in, for the entrance and bay outside are then 
 quite smooth; but this wind will seldom take a vessel completely in • it 
 will usually only enable her to shoot so far within Cross Point that a line 
 may be sent ashore, or a kedge ahead, for the purpose of warping in the 
 remainder of the way, which may be quickly done if due preparation 
 has been made beforehand. 
 
 The entrance should be attempted in the last quarter flood; then if 
 the vessel touches the ground she will receive no damage, and there 
 will be time for her to warp in before the tide begins to fall. 
 
 Directions.— A vessel wishing to enter St. Nicholas Harbor, and 
 being ofl- the mouth of the bay, should bring the end of Cross Point to 
 bear N. 3° w..(N. 21° E. mag.), then steer so nearly for it as to leave it 
 not more than 50 yards nor less than 30 yards on the port hand. If the 
 wind will allow, continue to run in at the same distance from the shore 
 on the west side until the water deepens. 
 
 The shoal water commences at Cross Point and continues for 400 
 yards, and the channel is rendered narrow by shoals off the eastern 
 side for an equal distance ftirther up the harbor. In order to have as 
 much room as possible, a vessel should anchor farther in than the three 
 large rocks which will be seen on the northeastern side of the harbor 
 To run out again, wait for a NW. wind, or take atlvantage of the land 
 wind m the early part of the morning, which often occurs in fine weather 
 when westerly winds prevail, or, lastly, warp out in a light breeze or 
 calm to the entrance of the bay outside, and to a position from which 
 sail can be made. 
 
 St Pancras Cove, 9 miles from Cape St. Nicholas, being only about 
 320 yards wide, between steep rocks, and open to the southward, with 
 very deep water, is of no use to vessels. The depth is 32 fathoms in its 
 entrance, shoaling gradually to 17 fathoms within J mile of its head 
 The sea is never heavy in it, and a vessel might run in there in time of 
 need. It affords shelter to boats. 
 
 English Bay, between StParicras Point and St. Giles Point, affords 
 no good anchorage, in consequence of tlie great depth of water; a heavy 
 sea rolls into it in easterly winds, and its shores are high and rocky 
 A vessel might anchor close to the shore on its west side, in IG or 17 
 fathoms at low water, and be well sheltered from all but easterly winds- 
 but she would be in great danger if a strong wind from that quarter 
 came m, since there would be no possibility of weathering the eastern 
 side of Manicouagan Shoal during the flood tide. 
 
 k.: 
 
! * 
 
 MANICOUAGAN RIVER. 
 
 295 
 
 1 also be had 
 
 t inlet. 
 
 8 Harbof, at 
 
 Harbor, and 
 nth a strong 
 are covered, 
 A SW. wind 
 lide are then 
 iletelj'in; it 
 it that a line 
 irping in the 
 preparation 
 
 ood ; then if 
 e, and there 
 1. 
 
 larbor, and 
 OSS Point to 
 s to leave it 
 md. If the 
 in the shore 
 
 ues for 400 
 the eastern 
 ■ to have as 
 m the three 
 the harbor, 
 of the land 
 iue weather 
 it breeze or 
 from which 
 
 only about 
 ward, with 
 bonis in its 
 )f its head. 
 3 in time of 
 
 iut, .affords 
 r; a heavy 
 and rocky, 
 in IG or 17 
 srly winds; 
 lat quarter 
 he eastern 
 
 
 Manicouagan River. — St. CWles I'oint, the northern eutrauce point 
 to Manicouagan Kivcr, is high and rocky, like the coas^t to the eastward ; 
 whi^p Manicouagan Point is low and thickly wooded, with a broad sandy 
 beach, like the rest of the coast westward to Outarde Bay. This com- 
 plete change in the character of the coast i)oints out to a vessel her 
 approach toward the dangerous Manicouagan Shoal. 
 
 Manicouagan liiver flows out through narrow channels, between 
 shoals that dry at low water, in Manicouagan Bay, and over a bar 
 which extends from St. Giles Point to the NE. end of Manicouagan 
 Shoal. Six miles west from St. Giles Point the shallow channels 
 between the shoals unite in the inner entrance of the river, which is 
 there narrow and 4 fathoms deep. The falls, where the river discharges 
 a great body of water down a narrow and sloping channel between 
 steep granite rocks, are 3 miles farther up in a NW. direction, and a 
 boat may approach close to them. 
 
 Anchorage. — The principal channel is on the north side of the 
 entrance, and Manicouagan Hole is a deep place in it, 1$ miles long, 
 ftom i to 4 mile wide, and with a depth from 3 to 5 fathoms at low 
 water, and muddy bottom. This large hole is close to St. Gileo I'oint, 
 and extends 1^ miles within it. Although this place appears completely 
 open to easterly winds, no swell of consequence rolls into it, and a 
 vessel well moored on its north side within St. Giles Point would prob 
 ably be in safety. But to get in there it is necessary to pa«s over the 
 bar which extends 2 miles eastward from St. Giles Point. It has 7 feet 
 over it at low, and from 14 to 19 feet at high water, according as it may 
 be neap or spring tides. The outside of the bar is extrenrely bold, 
 there being 30 fathoms, sandy bottom, close to it, and 50 fathoms, mud 
 bottom, at the distance of ore mile. The bar then sweeps round till it 
 joins Manicouagan Shoal, which is dry at low water for nearly 5 miles, 
 NE. by E. from the northern end of Manicouagan Peninsula. 
 
 This is altogether too wild and dangerous a place to be of general 
 use to vessels; but as, nevertheless, it might prove of use in time of 
 need, the following brief directions are given for entering it. 
 
 Directions.— With St. Giles Point bearing S. 65° W. (S. 78° W. 
 mag.) and St. Pancras Point bearing N. 23° W. (north mag.), steer 
 directly for St. Giles Point, and when the head of English Bay bears 
 N. 23° W. (north mag.) the vessel will be close to the bar. Continue to 
 run over the bar on the same course, S. 55° W. (S. 78° W. mag.), until 
 the points on the west side of English Bay bear N. 7° W. (N. 10° E. 
 mag.). She will then be within one mile of St. Giles Point, and must 
 keep away a couple of points to the southward along the southern edge 
 of the shoal, which dries at low water off that point, until the points on 
 the north side of Manicouagan Bay are open out south of St. Giles 
 Point; then haul up again so as to pass that point at 200 yards, and 
 anchor ^ mile within it, in 3 or 4 fathoms at low water. 
 
 Tiaes. — The ebb runs out over Manicouagan Bar to the eastward at 
 
 ! . 
 
 -'■ 
 
 i 
 
i I 
 
 "I 
 
 
 296 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER — NORTH SHORE. 
 
 the rate of about 1^ knots, and the flood is nearly as strong. It is 
 high water, full and change, at 2h. 15m.; springs rise 12 feet and 
 neaps 7 feet. 
 
 Signals. — There is a telegraph and signal station on Mauicouagan 
 Point. 
 
 Manicouagan Shoal is of sand, with many large bowlders scattered 
 about its eastern and southern parts, and probably deposited there by 
 the ice. The easternmost point of this dangerous and extensive shoal 
 is 2J miles N. 88° E. (S. 69° E. mag.) from St. Giles Point, and 5^ miles 
 N. 55° E. (N. 78° E. mag.) from the NB. end of Mauiiouagau Peninsula. 
 
 The bearing of S. 9° W. (S. 32° W. mag.) from St.Pancras Cove 
 passes along the eastern side of the shoal, which is so bold that there 
 are 60 fathoms of water at a little more than 1^ miles, and 40 fathoms 
 at half that distance from the breakers. On this side the shoal dries 
 nearly out to its edge in low tides. The south point of the shoal 
 extends 2J miles southward of Manicouagan Point, and here only is 
 there any suflBcient warning by the deep-sea lead. With Manicouagan 
 Point on any bearing from N. 23° W. (north mag.) to N. .'iTo W. (N. 34° 
 W. mag.), CO fathoms over a bottom of very fine sand will be found at 3} 
 miles from the 3-fathom line, to which the water shoals gradually, till 
 close to it, where there is 17 fathoms. The shoal dries out at low tides 
 in tliis part, and also farther westward, from one to 1^ miles from the 
 beach. 
 
 The shoal continues from its south point 16 miles westward, the out- 
 line of its edge corresponding to the shape of the sandy shore as far 
 as Outarfle Point, off which it extends l^ miles southward, and, filling 
 up all the eastern part of Outarde Bay, stretches out its western point 
 fully 3^ miles SW. from Outarde Point. 
 
 Tidal Streams.— There is often a heavy sea, particularly in a weather 
 tide, off Manicouagan Shoal. The tidal streams are tolerably regular, 
 and not very strong along the shoal; the rate of either stream does not 
 exceed 2 knots at any time, and is usually much less. But great rip- 
 pliugs are met with occasionally, both near the shoals and in the ofling, 
 where they are caused, as in other parts of the estuary, by the unequal 
 velocities or the opposing directions of the streams, as will be readily 
 imagined when it is remembered that the current is always down on 
 the south side, slack in the middle, and up during the flood on the north 
 side of the estuary. These ripplings are very common off the eastern 
 and southern parts of Manicouagan Shoal, where they were observed 
 to movie much faster than the streams of the tides, 'f '.le . often give to 
 the tides the appearance of a rapidity which does not exist. 
 
 Outarde Point is 11 miles westward of the south extremity of Mani- 
 couagan Point, and the shore between them is of low sandy cliffs, with 
 a sandy beach. 
 
 Outarde River empties northward of Outarde Point. This river 
 can be ascended by boats to the falls, over granite rocks, which are 7 
 
trong. It is 
 12 feet aud 
 
 Vlauicouagan 
 
 ers scattered 
 ted there by 
 tensive shoal 
 aud 5-^ miles 
 tu Peninsula, 
 ancras Cove 
 Id that there 
 
 I 40 fathoms 
 B shoal dries 
 )f the shoal 
 
 here only is 
 laiiicouagan 
 oW. (N.340 
 B found at 3.} 
 radually, till 
 
 at low tides 
 iles from the 
 
 ard, the out- 
 shore as far 
 I, and, filling 
 'esteru point 
 
 in a weather 
 ibly regular, 
 )aui does not 
 It great rip- 
 in the ofliug, 
 the unequal 
 
 II be readily 
 ays down on 
 on the north 
 ' the eastern 
 ire observed 
 >ften give to 
 
 k 
 J* 
 
 iityof Mani- 
 y cliflfs, with 
 
 This river 
 which are 7 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 OUTARDE RIVER — BERSIMI8 RIVER. 
 
 297 
 
 mill's ^K. by X. from the point. Those falls sire only 1 fj miles from Mani- 
 i'onagun Kiver. The two rivers, therefore, form the low sandy country 
 between Outarde and IManicoaagan Points into a great peninsula. 
 
 The entrance to Outarde Kiver is by several intricate aud narrow 
 ciiannels through the western part of Manicouagan Shoal, and as there 
 is only 2 or 3 feet of water through these chiinnels at low tide, for 4. 
 or 5 miles, the place is useless to vessels and therefore requires no 
 further description. 
 
 The water of this river holds a white earth suspended, nnd frequently 
 covers the whole surface of Outarde liay, floating on the heavier sea 
 water beneath, and giving the whole bay tlie appearance of being shoal. 
 A vessel sailing through this superstratum of fresh water displaces it, 
 and leaves a blue streak in her wake. 
 
 Outarde Bay, between Outarde and Bersimis Points, has three small 
 rocky islands in it, which appear as two from seaward, and serve to 
 distinguish the bay to strangers; they are far within the edge of the 
 shoals, which extend quite round the bay. 
 
 Anchorage.— Good anchorage will be found on the west side of 
 Outarde Bay in 14 fathoms at low water, over muddy bottom, with Ber- 
 simis Point bearing S. 9° W. (S. 32° W. mag.), 3J miles. Manicouagan 
 Point will then be open southward of Outarde Point, the south side of 
 which will bear N. 61° E. (N. 84° E. mag.), and the vessel will be nearly 
 J mile from the 3-fathom edge of the shoal on the west side of the bay; 
 small vessels may lie closer, in 7 fathoms. 
 
 Directions. — In standing in for this anchorage with a westerly wind 
 beware of the bar of Bersimis Kiver, which is extremely steep. If the 
 first rocky point can be made out to the northward of the river, and 
 which bears from its entrance north (N. 23° E. mag.) 4^ miles, take care 
 that it does not bear to the eastward of N. 25° W. (N. 2° W. mag.), 
 and the vessel will clear the bar. When it is passed she may haul in 
 to the northward into soundings, going no nearer than 10 fathoms. 
 The anchorage, which is not generally known, is excellent in westerly 
 gales, and may occasionally be very useful to vessels bound up the St. 
 Lawrence. The tides are not so strong as has been supposed, the ebb 
 seldom exceeding the rate of 2 knots, and the flood being much weaker. 
 The direction of these streams is reversed by the effect of Outarde 
 River. 
 
 Bersimis River enters the sea northward of the south extremity of 
 Bersimis Point. The wide mouth of the river is closed by sands dry at 
 low water, with the exception of a very narrow channel. 1 he river 
 within, for the first 3 miles, is wide and full of sand shoals. 
 
 Lights.— Two leading lights are exhibited from masts erected on the 
 northern side of the entrance to Bersimis Kiver. Both are fixed white 
 lights, visible through a small arc on each side of their line of direction, 
 and should be visible 5 miles. Tiie outer light is elevated 30 feet and 
 the inner 40 leet, respectively. The masts are painted white, and each 
 
298 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER — NORTH SHORE. 
 
 is surmounted by a diamond. The outor mast is 20 feet and the inner 
 30 feet high, and when in line bear N. 05° W. (N. 43° W. mag.) trom 
 seaward, and lead in 4 feet at low water over the bar. 
 
 The Bar is of sand, which dries in parts at low water, and shifts 
 frequently, being conii)letely exposed to southerly and easterly gales; 
 it extends nearly 1 J miles eastward of the south entrance point. Direc- 
 tions for entering the river are therefore useless; but it may bo as well 
 to remark that within the bar the channel is always close to the south 
 entrance point, and keeps on that side through the wide part within, 
 with a depth of 9 feet at low water. 
 
 Two can buoys and one spar buoy, all painted black, for the conven- 
 ience of vessels to be laden at this river are placed at its mouth by the 
 owners of the sawmill at Bersimis Point. They have no flxetl position 
 but are moved as necessary to mark the channel. 
 
 Vessels anchor in Outarde Bay to load, the anchorage being marked 
 by a can buoy. Small vessels are taken into Bersimis River by local 
 pilots to load at the mill wharves. 
 
 The river discbarges a great volume of water, especially in the spring 
 of the year, and the water 2 miles within its entrance is fresh enough 
 for drinking, when the tide is oat. The river is navigable to the falls, 
 which are 30 or 40 feet high, and over granite rocks. These falls are 
 nearly 40 miles distant by following the windings of the river. The 
 banks of the river are high and precipitous, being either of granite or 
 clift's of sand and gravel over clay. There is good timber to be met 
 with occasionally. The breadth of the river varies from 200 to 600 
 yards, and its depth is usually from 2 to 5 fathoms; there is a place in 
 which the depth amounts to 12 fathoms; but a depth of 2 fathoms is as 
 much as could be carried up the foot of the falls. 
 
 The stream of the flood tide is felt 10 miles up the river; and 6 miles 
 up, the channel is contracted by shoals of sand and bowlders to the 
 breadth of 100 yards for the distance of one mile. Through this nar- 
 row part the ebb runs 4 knots ; above it the rate of the stream is from 
 one to 2^ knots. Boats could row up this river to the foot of the falls 
 and a steamer could ascend it with ease, but the winds are generally 
 too light and battling between its high banks for a sailing vessel. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Bersimis River at 2h. ; 
 springs rise 12 feet, neaps 7 feet. 
 
 Bersimis Point is low, of sand, wooded with spruce trees, and diffi- 
 cult to be seen at night. On its east side the low south point of the 
 river extends 2 miles from the trees and the bar 1:1: miles farther; and 
 to the southward the sand shoal extends ^ mile from the sandy beach, 
 yet it is so bold that the lead affords no warning, there being 60 fathoms 
 muddy bottom at one mile from the edge of the shoal. On the east 
 and SW. sides of the point the shoals are equally steep so that this 
 point is very dangerous, especially to vessels beating at night or in 
 foggy weather. There is a tug at Bersimis Point for the use of vessels 
 to be laden there. 
 
,nd the inner 
 V. mag.) Irom 
 
 er, and shifts 
 asterly gales ; 
 point. Direc- 
 lay bo as well 
 3 to the south 
 9 part within, 
 
 r the conven- 
 mouth by the 
 flxeil position 
 
 being marked 
 iiver by local 
 
 r in the spring 
 fresh enough 
 le to the falls, 
 rhese falls are 
 le river. The 
 • of granite or 
 jber to be met 
 »m 2U0 to 600 
 e is a place in 
 ] fathoms is as 
 
 r; and 6 miles 
 iwlders to the 
 sugh this nar- 
 stream is from 
 ot of the falls 
 are generally 
 g vessel. 
 I Biver at 2h. ; 
 
 rees, and diffl- 
 \i point of the 
 3 farther; and 
 I sandy beach, 
 ing 60 fathoms 
 
 On the east 
 [) so that this 
 it night or in 
 
 use of vessels 
 
 BF.R8IMI8 POINT — LAVAL HAY. 
 
 299 
 
 Coast. — Mille Yairhes Point lies 8W. 2i> miles from the south extrt>m- 
 ity of Bersiniis Point. In all this distance, if the extreme points be 
 excepted, vessels will find by reference to the chart that the sound- 
 ings oft' the shore attord some warning, although there are parts wliore 
 great caution is necessary. 
 
 Tides. — The tides are regular, but the flood stream is rather stronger 
 than the ebb within 6 miles from the shore, where the rate of either 
 seldom exceeds 1^ knots, and is often much less. 
 
 Jeremy Island. — From Hersimis Point a low and sandy shore con- 
 tinues 6J miles westward to Jeremy Island, which is very small, rocky, 
 and close to the coast. There is a trading post of the Hudson Bay 
 Company on the main, the buildings of which can usually be seen; but 
 if not, its position will always be known by some patches of white 
 sand and clay chffs, which are close eastward of the island. Vessels 
 may stand in by the lead, and anchor oft' this pla(;e; but it is a bad 
 anchorage, and the shoal water extends a mile out from the shore. 
 
 Cape Colombier. — From Jeremy Island a rocky and broken shore 
 extends 8W. 5 miles to Cape Colombier, which is a rocky peninsula, 
 with a small islet on its west side. 
 
 ' Gulnare Shoal is a narrow ridge of granite rock, nearly 2 miles 
 long, parallel to the shore, and having from 2 to 3 fathoms over it at 
 low water. The inner or north side of Laval Island nearly in line with 
 Orient Point, the east point of Laval Bay, bearing S. 72° W. (N. 86° 
 W. mag.) leads 400 yards southward of this shoal in 20 fathoms water. 
 It is very dangerous, there being 23 fathoms close to the 8W. end and 
 also along its southern side. There are 4 or 5 fathoms between it and 
 the shore. 
 
 Wild Fowl Reef, 4 miles SW. from Cape Colombier is a large bed 
 of rocks, extending f mile from tike shore between Plougeur Bay and 
 Laval Bay. There are 9 fathoms water at ij mile outside this reef. 
 
 Plongeur Bay, between Wild Fowl Reef and Cape Colombier, may 
 be known by a round and rocky peninsula on its west sidei The inner 
 part of this bay is full of rocks dry at low water, and the whole bay is 
 shoal out to the line joining Wild Fowl Reef and Cape Colombier. 
 
 Caution. — Vessels should be careful in standing toward the part of 
 this coast from Wild Fowl Reef to Gulnare Shoal inclusive; the depth 
 of 30 fathoms is quite clear enough, as will be seen by the soundings 
 on the chart. But southwestward of the reef, until within 2 miles of 
 Portneuf, they may stand in to 6 fathoms at low water with safety. 
 
 Laval Bay, 4 miles westward of Wild Fowl Reef, will be known by 
 the rocky island in its mouth, and by the clay cliffs which commence lA 
 miles south of it, and continue to within the same distance of Portneuf. 
 
 This bay within the island is all dry at low water. Vessels may safely 
 stand in toward it, the water shoaling gradually from 10 fathoms, which 
 is 2^ miles from the shore. There is good anchorage in 6 or 7 fathoms, 
 over clay bottom, off' the clay cliff's above mentioned. 
 
 !| 
 
vH*" 
 
 ! 
 
 Hi 
 
 1 *; 
 
 Si 
 
 '1^ 
 
 300 
 
 BT. LAWRENCE RIVER — NORTH SHORE. 
 
 Portneuf is 8^ miles soutVi of Laval Bay. At this i»oint there Is an 
 estHbllHliiiient belonging to tlie Hiulgou Hay Company. It stands upon 
 a sti'cp santly bank, is 4 miles northward of Mille Vaclies Point, and 
 thert' are several buildingn, which can readily be setiu by a vessel oft' the 
 coast. 
 
 A low and narrow sandy peninsula, with a clump of pine or spruce 
 trees upon it, extends nearly 2 miles south from the sand and clay cliflfs 
 on the north side of Portneuf, the west extreme being nearly J mile 
 SE. from the church. 
 
 Light— I'rom a pier at Portneuf on the west extreme of the penin- 
 sula a fixed white light is exhibited, at an elevation of 40 feet, which 
 should bo visible 11 miles. The lighthouse is a square wooden build- 
 ing, .W feet high, and is painted white, with two red vertical stripes. 
 
 Signals.— There is a telegraph and signal station at this lighthouse. 
 
 Portneuf River is entered from the southward, be, rreen the sandy 
 peninsula and the post on the mainland, but is so shftl'«nv that a boat 
 can not enter it at low water. At the junction of the iieniusula with 
 the sand an<l clay cliff's the river turns abrui)tly inland; its sandy 
 channel is too shallow for a boat at low water below that turn, and 
 rapids commence at 1^ miles above it. Prom 7 to 12 feet water may be 
 carried in it at high water between the peninsula and the mainland, 
 according as it may be neap or spring tides, and a small vessel may lie 
 safely aground on the sand. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and cha i;,o, at Portneuf, at 2h. 10m.; 
 springs rise 14 feet, neaps 8A feet. 
 
 Portneuf Sands are exceedingly steep on every bearing southward 
 of BNE. from Portneuf, and eastward of SSE. from Mille Vaches Point. 
 Oflf Portneuf they extend J mile out from the sandy peninsula. The 
 eastern patch of these shoals, widi^S^ fathoms least water, which is 
 dangerous for a vessel of heavy draft, lies 1^ miles N. 50^ E. (N. 78° 
 E. mag.) from the southwestern end of the sand and clay cliff's at the 
 entrance of Portneuf River. 
 
 Miilway between Portneuf and Mille Vaches Point is the widest part 
 of these sands, which there extend IJ miles from the beach. There are 
 from 20 to 30 fathoms close along their edge, and from 40 to 50 fathoms 
 at the distance of one mile. 
 
 Mille Vaches Point is low, sandy, and wooded with spruce trees. 
 As the dangers on either side are so bold, and as the course of a vessel 
 running up the estuary must ever be more or less uncertain in conse- 
 quence of the set of the tides and currents, the pass between this point 
 and Bicquette Island is justly considered dangerous to a vessel run- 
 ning up in dark nights or foggy weather. 
 
 Mille 'Vaches Bay, on the SW. side of Mille Vaches Point, is very 
 large, with several small rivers, which descend by falls or rapids down 
 the granitic shores. The princii)al of these rivers is Saut de Mouton, 
 44 miles WSW. from the point, which has a fall of 80 feet, visible from 
 
 ■ " m ^W M Maw ^WMBBBBaia 
 
it there Ir an 
 t HtaiuU upon 
 B8 Point, and 
 vessel oft' the 
 
 ine or spruce 
 lud chiy cliff's 
 nearly jj mile 
 
 of the penin- 
 feet, which 
 rooden build- 
 cal stripes. 
 s li);hthou8e. 
 en the sandy 
 V that a boat 
 )uiusnla with 
 d; its sandy 
 lat turn, and 
 water may be 
 he mainland, 
 'essel .may lie 
 
 at 2h. 10m.; 
 
 g southward 
 'aches Point, 
 insula. The 
 ter, which is 
 H'^ E. (N. 78° 
 ' cliff's at the 
 
 9 widest part 
 I. There are 
 
 50 fathoms 
 
 spruce trees. 
 se of a vessel 
 Eiin in conse- 
 en this point 
 
 1 vessel run- 
 
 •oint, is very 
 
 rapids down 
 
 i de Monton, 
 
 visible from 
 
 ESCOUMAINH RIVER — SAGUKNAY RIVER. 
 
 TO! 
 
 a vcHsol whon alnrast of it. All the intcricn- of this bay is occupied by 
 shoals of .sand, iiind, and large bowhlcrs, which dry at low water. 
 
 Anchorage.— There IS anchorage in Mille Vachcs Hay in M fathoms, 
 sand and mud bottom, with the south extremity of Millc Vaches Point 
 in line with the inner or north side of the pine trees on the peninsula 
 of Portnenf, bearing N. M^ K. (N. 5(P K. nnig.) li or ;J miles from the 
 point, and jj mile from the shoals. The shelter is from HVV. by S., 
 round north, to NE. by N. The ground is good, and there is not nnich 
 tide. 
 
 EBcoumains Islets are two large rocks, which have three snmll 
 ones nearly one mile southward of them, and are nearly 12 miles SVV. 
 from Mille Vaches Point. The coast south westward from thes(! islets 
 to Little Hergeron Cove, a distance of 10 miles, consists of granite rock, 
 steep and bold, and free from all danger, excepting a Hat which occupies 
 a bay on the SW. side of Cape Bondesir, but which does not exten«l 
 above \ mile ontslde of a line joining the points of the bay, and is con- 
 secjuently very little in the way of vessels. There are upward of 50 
 fathoms water close to the rocks along this part of the coast. 
 
 Escoumains River is 5 miles southwestward of Escoumains Islets 
 and is a considerable stream. 
 
 A settlement with a population of 607 in 1891, and having a sawmill 
 and a church, is on the north side of the entrance. 
 
 A small bank with 7 fathoms water on it lies off" the south entrance 
 point, on which vessels anchor to load. 
 
 Tides.— The tidal streams are regular, increasing in strength as the 
 comparatively narrow pass on either side of Red Islet is approached. 
 The flood is the stronger stream of the two, the ebb being deflected 
 over toward the southern shore by the stream out of Sagucuay River. 
 The flood does not extend above 5 or 6 miles oft" the north shore below 
 Bergeron Coves, and the closer to that shore the stronger is the stream. 
 Its rate at Mille Vaches Point, where it does not extend far off shore, 
 is from 1| to 2 knots; and off Bergeron Coves from 2 to 3 knots, in 
 spring tides. 
 
 Great and Little Bergeron Coves are two small bays separated by 
 a point. They are both full of large bowlders, which dry at low water, 
 and have small streams at their heads. Little Bergeron Cove is the 
 southwestern, and is 6 miles northeastward of the entrance to Saguenay 
 River. 
 
 SAGUENAY RIVER. 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1112.) 
 
 For the first 50 miles up from its confluence with the St. Lawrence 
 the Saguenay is from § mile to 2 miles wide, tilling up a deep transverse 
 valley through mountains of syenitic granite and gneiss. These moun- 
 tains rise everywhere more or less abruptly from the water, forming, in 
 some parts, precipitous headlands more than 1,000 feet in height. The 
 
 f 
 
 II 
 I 
 
 il 
 
 I 
 
 it .* 
 
0f 
 
 
 ii ■' 
 
 iir--^ 
 
 802 
 
 8T. LAWRKNCK UIVER NOUTH 8HOKE. 
 
 granitic nillsani in general (|uite barrcrn, but the vailcya throiigli which 
 the rapid tributary stroanis dcsjuMid are tllh-d with a deep deposit of 
 sand and clay, and are tldeiciy wooded. At lla lla Hay and at (3hi- 
 coutinu tiiure are (;onHidcrabIe tracts of good hind, as there are also 
 around Lake St. John. Tliis country is being rapitlly settled. 
 
 Within the same part of the Hagutiiuiy the water is almost as deep 
 as tlie mountains are high. Itetween the shoals at the entrance of the 
 river there is a bar a<!ros8, on which, however, there are from 18 to 20 
 fatlioms water, but immediately within that the depth incrreases to 
 upward of 100 fathoms; and farther up for many miles it is fully 145 
 fathoms deep in the center of the channel, decreasing,' to 100 fathoms 
 on either side, often within less than as many feet of the precipitous 
 shores. It is this enormous deptli, itt| mountainous shores, and its 
 impetuous stream, that have rendered the Saguenay so celebrated, and 
 that entitle it to be classed among the most rennirkable features in the 
 geography of (Canada. The bed of the Saguenay for many ndles is sunk 
 more than 100 fathoms below that of the St. Lawrence at their point of 
 junction. There are anchorages occasionally, but they are some miles 
 apart, and there is none, of course, in the great depths between them. 
 In the case of a vessel becalmed, however, there would be little or no 
 danger, since there are no shoals in the channel, when onee within the 
 entrance, and a boat ahead would serve to keep her clear of the shore. 
 In some parts, perhaps, but not often, a line might be made fast to 
 the rocks. 
 
 The Saguenay is navigable for large vessels nearly to Boches Point, 
 57 miles from the St. Lawrence; and schooners, with the assistance of 
 the flood tide, can ascend to Chicoutimi, 8 miles farther. Just above 
 Roches Point the river becomes 8ud<lenly very shoal, there being only 
 7 feet water in its narrow an<l intricate channels, and among shoals 
 composed of large bowlders. Above this shallowest part, where at low 
 water there is a comi)lete rapid, the depth varies from 2 to 8 fathoms, 
 but between shoals of large stones, and the river contracts to little 
 more than J mile in width, retaining that breadth nearly to the rapids, 
 6 miles above Chicoutimi, where the tide ends. 
 
 The Saguenay discharges the water of Lake St. John, contributing 
 to the St. Lawrence a quantity of water only inferior to that which is 
 supplied by the Ottawa. 
 
 Tides and Currents.— It is high water, full and change, at Tadou- 
 sac, at the entrance of the Saguenay, at 2h. 45m., and the rise in ordi- 
 nary springs is 17 feet, and in neaps 10 feet. At Chicoutimi it is high 
 water at 4h. 11m., and the rise in ordinary spring and neap tides is 12 
 and 8 feet. 
 
 The flood tide is extremely weak and of short duration ; above Sfc 
 Marguerite River it is almost imperceptible, excepting a weak stream 
 which may be found running up close to the shores. The water, how- 
 ever, has often been observed to be flowing up at the depth of several 
 
BAOUENAY RIVKR. 
 
 303 
 
 ;hroiifi^h which 
 
 eep deposit of 
 
 y 1111(1 at Chi- 
 
 there are also 
 
 tied. 
 
 most »H deep 
 
 itraiice of the 
 
 from 18 to 20 
 I iiicroascs to 
 it is fully 145 
 ) 100 fathoms 
 le pi'ccipitous 
 lores, and its 
 jlel)rated,and 
 eatures in the 
 ' miles is sunk 
 their point of 
 re some miles 
 •etween them. 
 [>e little or no 
 lee within the 
 : of the shore. 
 
 made fast to 
 
 Roches Point, 
 I assistance of 
 Jnst above 
 re being only 
 imoug shoals 
 ■where at low 
 to 8 fathoms, 
 •acts to little 
 to the rapids, 
 
 , contributing 
 that which is 
 
 ge, at Tadou- 
 e rise in ordi- 
 bimi it is high 
 ap tides is 12 
 
 m; above Sfc 
 weak stream 
 e water, how- 
 >th of several 
 
 fathoms, while it was stationary or ilescending on the surfacp. The 
 tide tluws to the foot of th« Terres Kompiies Itupid, about «i miles above 
 Cliic<>\itimi, and about 71 miles from the Ht. Lawrence. The stream of 
 the t ol) tide is very strong, varying from .'{ to .1 knots, accrording to the 
 breadth of tiie river. It is strongj-st in the mouth of the river, where 
 it sometimes runs at the rate of 7 knots, and sets strongly over Lark 
 Islet 8pit and the SVV. extremity of Vaches Point. 
 
 The meeting of the spring ebb tides d«)WM the Sagucnay and the St. 
 Lawrence causes breaking and whirling eddies and ripplings, so strong 
 as to interfere with the steerage of a vesstl unless she has a command- 
 ing breeze. These st reams, opposed to a heavy easterly gale, cause an 
 exceedingly higli, cross, and breaking sea. On the flood tide at snch 
 tinies there is not more sea there than in other parts of the river. 
 
 Capt. (). Tramblay, in a report to the Oovernment of the Dominion of 
 Canada, 1875, made the following remarks on the currents in Saguenay 
 Eiver : 
 
 From the entrance of Chicoutimi River to Roches Point the current 
 is steady and even, in some parts setting on tlie shoals, but without 
 any undercurrent. 
 
 From Roches Point to St. Jean Bay, 36 miles to the eastward, the 
 surface current is not strong at any time. In many parts there is a 
 strong and variable undercurrent, especially during 8i)rings, strong 
 with the flood, but scarcely perceptible during the ebb. This under- 
 current, acting on vessels drawing from 19 to 25 feet, sometimes renders 
 them unmanageable even when assisted by a tug. 
 
 At spring tides a large body of water passes over the Chicoutimi 
 Shoals (at a very rapid rate during ebb tidts), aud falling suddenly 
 into deep water, seems to strike downward at once, leaving but a slight 
 current on the surface. 
 
 The strong flood tides over the bar at the entrance of Saguenay 
 River falling suddenly into deep water may also contribute to a certain 
 extent to check the strength of the surface current of the river. 
 
 Communication. — There is steam communication three times a week 
 during the summer from Quebec, the vessels calling at Tadousac, Chi- 
 coutimi, Ha Ha Bay, St. Jean Bay, and again at Tadousac in the order 
 given. 
 
 Bntranee of the Sagnanay. — This river enters the St. Lawrence 
 oi)po8ite Red Islet and Green Island, as see pages 321, 322, wherein are 
 described its entrance poiits (Lark Point and Vaches Point), Lark 
 Islet, and the reeft off them, together with the leading marks and buoys 
 for clearing them, as far as re(juired for the guidance of vessels passing 
 up or down the St. Lawrence; also the anchorages of Moulin Baude and 
 of Basque Road; these anchorages will be of great use to vessels 
 frequenting the Saguenay. 
 
 Referring to the chart for the shape of the extensive reefs on either 
 side, it will be seen that the entrance channel between Prince Shoal, 
 
 1 
 
 !•> 
 
 I ■ 
 
 if 
 
 ji 
 
304 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER — NORTH SHORE. 
 
 Bar Eeef, and Lark Islet Spit on the one side, and Vacbes Patch and 
 Eeef on the other, is i| mile wide, with deep water and very irregular 
 soundings. The shallowest part is between Bar Reef and Vaches 
 Patch, where there is as little as 11 fathoms. luimediately within it 
 the depth increases, and off Tadousac exceeds 80 fathoms. It is '^ mile 
 •wide from Hot Point, the NW. point of Tadousac Harbor, marked by 
 a beacon, across to Noire Point. This point has a curious white mark 
 on the south side, and there are two lighthouses, now disused. These 
 buildings in line lead close north of Prince Shoal. 
 
 Buoys. — The entrance of the Sagueuay is buoyed as follows : On the 
 eastern side of the entrance, on Vaches Patch, a red and black baoy 
 lies in 2^ fathoms on the south side of the patch, and on Prince Shoal 
 a red and black buoy. Westward of the entrance a red buoy on the 
 outer or southernmost extreme of Lark Beet is moored in ^ fathoms. 
 
 St. Catherine Bay is on the southern side of the entrance of the 
 Saguenay, between Lark Islet and Noire Point, in which vessels may 
 anchor, in 20 or 30 fathoms of water, out of the strength of the tides, 
 but exposed to considerable swell in easterly winds. On the NW. side 
 of this bay there are several large iron rings in the steep granite shore, 
 which were probably used for mooring or heaving down vessels. 
 
 Tadousac Harbor is on the northern side of the entrance of the 
 Saguenay and one mile within Vaches Point. It is a bay between 
 Bouge and Hot Points, witli a sandy beach at its head, and rather more 
 than J mile wide and ^ mile deep. The anchorage is in from 7 to 18 
 fathoms, clay bottom. Vessels ought always to moor and have a heavy 
 anchor close inshore, for the gusts from the NW. are at times exceed- 
 ingly powerful, and should the anchor start there would be little chance 
 of bringing up again before the vessel had dragged her anchor down 
 hill into dfcp water. Besides, although vessels are here completely 
 out of the regular streams of the tides, yet eddies often set into the 
 bay, causing a vessel to swing round several times in a tide, so that it 
 would be almost impossible to keep a clear anchor. 
 
 The shelter is rendered complete in every direction by either land or 
 reefs, excepting SB., and there Red Islet, with the south coast beyond 
 it at no great distance, prevents any sea of consequence even to a boat 
 from ever entering the harbor. 
 
 Tadousac is now a thriving village, with two churches, an old one, on 
 the site of the oldest church in Canada, near the beach, and a large 
 modern church with a spire a short distance northeastward. A con- 
 spicuous hotel, painted white, stands close inshore of the jSTW. extreme 
 of the beach. 
 
 Tadousac is situated on a semicircular terrace of sand and clay, at 
 the head of the bay, and backed by steep, high, and rugged hills dj 
 granite. It was formerly the principal of those posts for trading with 
 the Indians which were known by the name of the " King's Posts," and 
 were, in 1829, leased to the Hudson Bay Company. 
 
'^"*^1 
 
 SAGUENAY RIVER. 
 
 305 
 
 Bbes Patch and 
 [ very irregular 
 ef aud Vaclies 
 lately within it 
 IS. It is f mile 
 bor, marked by 
 3U8 white mark 
 iisused. These 
 
 rollows: On the 
 md black baoy 
 •n Prince Shoal 
 ed buoy on the 
 in 4^ fathoms, 
 an trance of the 
 ch vessels may 
 th of tbe tides, 
 a the NW. side 
 ) granite shore, 
 vessels, 
 entrance of the 
 1. bay between 
 ud rather more 
 in from 7 to IS 
 d have a heavy 
 t times exceed- 
 be little chance 
 it anchor down 
 ere completely 
 3n set into the 
 tide, so that it 
 
 r either land or 
 
 h coast beyond 
 
 even to a boat 
 
 , an old one, on 
 h, and a large 
 bward. A con- 
 B NW. extreme 
 
 id and clay, at 
 rugged hills d^ 
 ►r trading with 
 g's Posts," and 
 
 In 1887 twelve vessels loaded at Tadousac. Supplies in small quan- 
 tities may be obtained here. 
 
 L'Anse k I'Eau, the small cove next west of Tadousac, has a wharf 
 on the north shore where the steamers from Quebec lie, and it is the 
 seat of a fish hatchery. The telegraph cable that crosses the Saguenay 
 is landed in this cove. 
 
 Directions. — The buoys placed at the entrance of the Saguenay will 
 be found of great assistance to a vessel beating into tho river, there 
 being no clearing mark for the reefs on the SW. side of the entrance; 
 and if buoys were added to Bar Eeef and Lark Islet Spit, vessels might 
 beat in and out at all times with safety. On the ^E. or Vaches Point 
 side observe that Hot and La Boule Points in line, bejiring N". 79° W. 
 (N. 69° W. mag.), pass over the SW. side of Vaches Point Keef, and 
 must be kept open to clear it; La Boule Point being a high and round- 
 backed hill, forming a steep headland 4 miles above Tadousac, and 
 the extreme point seen on the same side of the river. 
 
 Winds from SW., round south to NE. will enable a vessel to enter 
 the Saguenay on the ilood tide. The first, which is the prevailing 
 summer wind, will not carry her far up, since she will be becalmed 
 under the mountainous shores; but the NE. wind, or wind up the St. 
 Lawrence, draws also up the Saguenay, and is the only wind which 
 C3". be depended on for running a vessel up to the anchorages above 
 Tadousac. The NW. wind often blows down the river in furious 
 squalls, especially in the fall of the year. 
 
 Being bound to the Saguenay, approach the entrance early on the 
 flood with a breeze which can be depended on, and plenty of daylight 
 to reach the anchorage off Tadousac. Remember that the ebb sets 
 like a rapid over Lark Islet and Vaches Point Beefs, and that it is 
 dangerous to be becalmed just within either of them, because the water 
 is so deep that it is difficult to anchor. If night be coming on, or the 
 tide or the wind be unfavorable, anchor off Moulin Baude or in Baacjue 
 Eoad, according to circumstances, and wait for an opportunity for run- 
 ning in, unless a vessel has a pilot suflBciently skillful to beat her in 
 with safety. 
 
 Whether the entrance is approached from the SW. or NE., in either 
 case bring Brandy Pots open east of White Islet, bearing S. 14° W. 
 (S. 34° W. mag.). Eun upon this mark (and it will lead well clear of 
 Vaches Patch, Prince Shoal, and Lark Eeefs) until La Boule Point 
 appears just open southwestward of Hot Point, bearing N. 77° W. (N. 
 57° W. mag.). Haul in now for the last-named leading mark, keeping 
 the SW. extreme of La Boule Point just open, and it will lead in clear 
 of all danger. As soon as the vessel is as far in as Rouge Point she 
 •may haul into the harbor, choosing her berth at pleasure, but letting 
 go the outer anchor in 16 fathoms and the inner one close to the low- 
 water mark; or she may lay it and secure it within the low- water mark, 
 if that should be preferred as the safer plan. The marks above given 
 1151 20 
 
 11 
 
 if 
 
 
,-^^ 
 
 
 
 sm 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER — NORTH SHORE. 
 
 are often difficult to distinguish, but the buoys, supposing them to be 
 securely moored, have rendered them no longer absolutely necessary, 
 since there can be no difficulty with a fair wind in running with their 
 assistance through a channel f mile wide. 
 
 ANCHORAGES IN THE SAOUENAY. 
 
 Barqns Cove, rather more than a mile above Tadonsac, and on the 
 same side of the river, is 400 yards deep. A vessel or two might be 
 moored in it. 
 
 St Etienne Bay and River are 10^ miles up the Saguenay, and on 
 its western shore. The bay is a mile wide, and forms a harbor where a 
 number of vessels may ride in from 10 to 30 fathoms, clay bottom, along 
 the edge of the bank which dries out J^ mile from the shore. 
 
 St Lonis Isle, 10 miles up the river, forms an excellent anchorage, 
 either under its east end or between it and the south shore, the depth 
 of water being from 10 to 30 fathoms, sand and mud bottom. 
 
 St Barthelemi Isle, a mile higher up, and on the opposite side of 
 the river, lies close to the month of the Oacard River. A vessel or two 
 might be secured there, the place being small, and the depth of water 
 from 6 to 20 fathoms. 
 
 St Jean, on the southern shore, and 23 miles up the Saguenay, is a 
 large bay with a small islet oflf its NW. point. It is If miles wide and 
 H miles deep. The St. Jean River and several small streams enter at 
 its head. Oft these streams, and along the edge of the bank which dries 
 out 4 mile from the shore, there is good anchorage for many vessels, in 
 from 8 to 40 fathoms, mud bottom. A small village, with a pier and a 
 church, stands on the south shore, and tl ere is a prominent waterfall 
 on the west side of this bay. 
 
 Light— From a mast 11 feet in height elected at the extreme of the 
 pier in St. Jean Bay is exhibited, at an elevation of 16 feet, a fixed white 
 light. It is visible 8 miles. 
 
 ^temit^ Cove, on the same side as St. Jean Bay, and 6 miles higher 
 up the river, is J mile wide and IJ miles deep, with a river of the same 
 name at its head. At the head of this cove vessels may lie securely in 
 from 8 to 30 fathoms, nmd bottom, and as securely landlocked as if 
 they were in a small lake surrounded with mountains. 
 
 Cape L'Eternit6 is the south entrance point, and Capto A, la Trinity 
 the north entrance point of Etemite Cove. The latter resembles three 
 steps when seen from up or down the river. On the lowest is an image 
 of the Virgin, 32 feet high, and about 400 ffeet above high water, and on 
 the next above is a cross at an elevation of about 700 feet. 
 
 La Niche, a curious hole in the cliffs, lies on the west shore, about 2 
 miles NW. of Cape h la Trinity. 
 
 Descente des Femmes is a cove 700 yards long, with a depth of 20 
 fathoms at its entrance, decreasing to 5 fathoms nearita head Several 
 vessels might lie moored in it in great security. It is 42 miles up the 
 
Is 
 
 SAGUENAY RIVER. 
 
 307 
 
 ing tbem to be 
 tely necessary, 
 ling with tlieir 
 
 sac, and on the 
 ' two might be 
 
 fuenay, and on 
 
 iiarbor where a 
 
 T bottom, along 
 
 ore. 
 
 mt anchora^'e, 
 
 ore, the depth 
 
 tom. 
 
 )posite side of 
 
 L vessel or two 
 
 iepth of water 
 
 9agaenay, is a 
 niles wide and 
 reams enter at 
 rik which dries 
 Einy vessels, in 
 h a pier and a 
 nent waterfall 
 
 ixtreme of the 
 ;, a fixed white 
 
 6 miles higlier 
 Qr of the same 
 lie secnrely in 
 idlocked as if 
 
 )to s^ la Trinity 
 
 isembles three 
 
 9t is an image 
 
 water, and on 
 
 t. 
 
 shore, about 2 
 
 a depth of 20 
 ead Several 
 ! miles up the 
 
 river, and on its northern shore. There are houses round this cove, and 
 round those on either side of it. 
 
 The Saguenay turns suddenly to the northward 5 miles above this 
 cove, between Cape East and Cape West, but the previous direction of 
 the river is continued (> or 7 miles beyond the point last named to the 
 head of Ha Ha Bay, 55 miles from the entrance of the river. 
 
 Ha Ha Bay is miles deep and from 1^ to 2$ miles wide, the widest 
 part being at its head, where four considerable streams fall into it. 
 The best anchorage is on either side of a small ifjlet .joined to the shore 
 at low water in the SW, corner of the bay, and from 7 to 30 fathoms, 
 clay bottom. There is room for any number of vessels, but they are 
 rather exiwsed in easterly winds. 
 
 This bay is now fairly well settled, and is cultivated from Fort Point 
 westward and northward to the northern cove at the head. St. Alexis, 
 a considerable village, containing a church with a spire, and a sawmill, 
 is on the shores of La Grande Bale, the SW. arm; and St. Alphonse, 
 which has also a church with a spire, is on the NW. arm of the bay. 
 There is a wharf at St. Alphonse to which the steamers moor. 
 
 In 1891 there were 1,689 residents at St. Alexis and 1,476 at St. 
 Alphonse. 
 
 Light. — From a mast 28 feet high erected at the extreme of the 
 wharf at St. Al])house, and at an elevation of 31 feet, is exhibited a 
 fixed white light. 
 
 Fetites Isles, on the northern shore of the river, 52 miles from its 
 entrance, and 4^ miles above Cape East, are three small rocky islets 
 joined to the shore at low water. The bay on the east side of them 
 forms a small but secure anchorage. The depth of the water is from 
 6 to 17 fathoms, mud bottom. The Sagueuay, which is here nearly 2 
 miles wide and with a depth of 65 fatuoms, is contracted to % mile by 
 a high rocky point projecting from its northern shore at the distance 
 of 2 miles westward, but expands again nearly to the same breadth in 
 the next 3 miles, which is the distance from the high point just men- 
 tioned to Boches Point. On the north side of the river, from the high 
 point to within one mile of Roches Point, there is good anchorage in 
 any depth to 20 fathoms. 
 
 Roches Point is 57 miles ftom the entrance of the river, and here 
 the navigation ends for shipping, but continues for vessels of small 
 draft to Chicotttimi, 7 miles farther. The river is still 1^ miles wide at 
 Bodies Point, but contracts rapidly above it, assuming at the same 
 time the usual character of a river, such as mud banks on either side 
 dry at low Vater, shoals of large bowlder stones, drift trees, etc. The 
 water also becomes fresh when the tide is (mt. 
 
 Chicoutimi is a large village, with a population of 2,277 in 1891, 
 containing a large cathedral with a spire, a marine hospital, in front 
 of which is a large obelisk, a convent, courthouse, hotel, and many 
 other prominent buildings, as well as a wharf. Both sides of the river 
 
 \ ■ 
 
 %l 
 
308 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER — NORTH SHORE. 
 
 are cultivated for some distaDce from the viUage, and farmhouses «re 
 scattered among the fields. 
 
 About 20 vessels are laden here annually. They lie off Moulin River 
 or below the shoals, as only 7 feet water can be carried to Chicoutimi 
 at low water. 
 
 There are two first-class tugs of over 300 tons and a small one of 21 
 tons to tow vessels when necessary. 
 
 Buoys are laid down to assist vessels in navigating from Roches Point 
 to Ohicoutimi. 
 
 Lights.-There are five sets of leading lights to guide the local 
 steamers to Ohicoutimi, and there is a fixed light at the wharf, which 
 shows red down the river and white abreast the wharf 
 
 Chicoutimi River is on tbe south side of the Saguenay and one mile 
 
 ?r7n f/ T' ^^'^ "''^^ '^ *^® ^*''S®«*^ tributary to the Saguenay. 
 It tails 40 or 60 feet, through a narrow, rocky, and rugged channel, 
 only a short distance within its entrance. 
 
 Prom Lake St. John to within 6 or 7 miles of this village the Sajnie- 
 nay is said to be so full of heavy rapids as to be exceedingly dangen)U8 
 to canoes, therefore the longer and more circuitous route up the Ohi 
 coutimi, through Lake Kenogam, and down the Metabetshuan River is 
 preferred. At the mouth of this last-named river, on the south shore 
 01 Lake St. John, stands another of the "King's Posts," leased by the 
 Hudson Bay Company. It was established first by the Jesuit mis- 
 sionaries in the sixteenth ceiitury, and traces of their cultivation still 
 remain. 
 
 Directions.— No directions are necessary for ascending the Sague- 
 nay to the anchorages, since there is not a single rock or shoal in the 
 way from Tadousac to the anchorage below Roches Point 
 
 wxessssmmmmmmimmim 
 
farmhouses »re 
 
 •ff Mouliu River 
 i to Chicoutimi 
 
 auiall one of 21 
 
 tn Roches Point 
 
 :nide the local 
 e wharf, which 
 
 y and one miie 
 
 the Saguenay. 
 
 igged channel, 
 
 age the Sagne- 
 igly dangerous 
 te up the Oui 
 shuan River is 
 le south shore 
 ' leased by the 
 lie Jesuit mis- 
 uitivation still 
 
 tig the Sague- 
 or shoal in the 
 
 t. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER— GREEN ISLAND AND RED ISLET TO SOUTH 
 TRAVERSE AND COUDRES ISLAND. 
 
 yUEBEO. 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1U2.) 
 
 General Remarks. — The estuary of the St. Lawrence has been con- 
 sidered to terminate, and the river to commence, at Green Island, not 
 with '•<ay pretension to geographical accuracy of definition, but because 
 the adoption of such a division, at a pai-t where the navigable diannel 
 becomes divided, contracted, and difficult, naturally and conveniently 
 separates the sailing directions int-o parts corresponding with that dis- 
 tinctive change in the nature of the navigation. The preceding chapters 
 w^re intended, with the aid of the charts, to enable the seaman to nav- 
 igate his vessel as higli up the St. Lawrence as Green Island. 
 
 This chapter commences at what may be considered the first difficult 
 pass ascending the St. Lawrence— the difficulty arising not only from 
 the dangerous reefs off Green Island, Red Islet, and Saguenay River, 
 but also from the great velocity and transverse direction of the tidal 
 streams. 
 
 All light buoys in the St. Lawrence River are withdrawn earlier in 
 the autumn and replaced later in the spring than the ordinary wooden 
 buoys. Wooden buoys mark the positions of the light buoys until the 
 end of the season. 
 
 Some remarks and directions have already been given respecting the 
 passage on either side of Red Islet and its reef. Green Island Light- 
 house and Reef, and the anchorage nnder the latter (pp. 216 and 217). 
 
 The whole distance from the lighthouse on Green Island to the light- 
 vessel at South Traverse is 54 miles. For the first IW miles of that 
 distance the river is divided into two channels (north and south) on 
 either side of Red Islet, White Islet, and Hare Island, with the reefs 
 and banks attached to them, or bearing their names; all of which, 
 lying in the same direction form a narrow but not continued ridge of 
 graywacke and slate rocks, nearly in the middle of the river. In the 
 remainder of the distance, the river is unobstructed by detached shoals 
 from the SW. end of Hare Island Bank, to the NE. end of Middle 
 Ground of South Traverse. The shoals Just mentioned were supposed 
 to be connected together by English Bank, which, however, terminates 
 off Murray Bay, 7 or 8 miles westward of Hare Island Bank. The 
 
 309 
 
 u 
 
 
f^ 
 
 I 1 
 
 310 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 islands above mentioned, with their reefs, banks, and anchorages, will 
 be first described, and afterwards the mainland, and the channels on 
 either side of them. 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1490.) 
 
 Red Islet, W. by N. oj miles from the lighthouse on Green Island, 
 is small, low, and of shingle partially covered with grass and resting 
 on slate rock. 
 
 Light — The light tower on the center of Red Islet is a circular gray 
 stone tower 64 feet high. It exhibits, at an elevation of 68 feet, a flash- 
 ing white light showing three flashes, with intervals of ten seconds 
 between tbeir points of greatest brilliancy, followed by an interval of 
 thirty seconds, during the greater part of which the light is totally 
 eclipsed, thus completing the revolution in fifty seconds; it should be 
 visible 12 miles. 
 
 Red Islet Bank.— Bed Islet is ({uite l>old at its SW. end, but a 
 rocky bank or reef, nearly dry in some parts at low water, extends 2J 
 miles northeastward and is 1^ miles wide. There is good warning by 
 the lead in approaching this bank from the northeastward, but vessels 
 should be cautions in approaching it from the northward, because the 
 water is deep and the ebb stream sets strongly upon it on that dide. 
 In fine summer weather vessels becalmed or bound up, and wishing to 
 wait for the tide, may safely anchor east and SE. of this bank in 10 
 fathoms at low water, where they will have good ground and find the 
 strength of the ebb much broken by the bank. In case of need, they 
 may also anchor in the same depth 400 yards from the south side of 
 the islet, but the ebb stream runs there at the rate of 6^ knots an hour. 
 
 Marks. — The lighthouse and beacons on Green Island are all white, 
 and the southeastern beacon, when in line with the lighthouse bearing 
 S. 43° E. (S. 23° E. mag.), leads northeastward of Red Islet Bank. 
 White Islet, kept twice its own breadth open northward of Hare 
 Island, S. 33° W. (S. 53° W. mag.), will lead to the southeastward; but 
 as these marks are distant and may not always be plainly distin- 
 guished, the lead should never be neglected nor the vessel taken 
 nearer than the depth of 9 fathoms at low water. A red buoy marks 
 the SE. extreme of the bank. There are no marks for leading north- 
 westward of this bank, nor do the soundings there afibrd sufficient 
 warning for the safety of a vessel. 
 
 LlghtvesseL — A lightvessel is moored near the NE. end of Red Islet 
 Bank and exhibits 2 fixed white lights, one on the foremast, 34 feet 
 high, the other on the mainmast, 22 feet high. The lights should be 
 visible 11 miles. 
 
 The lightvessel is painted red, with the words Red Island lightship 
 in white on her sides, and is moored in 10 fathoms in a northeast- 
 erly direction from Red Islet. This vessel is t^ithdrawn annually on 
 November 15. 
 
 Fog Signal. — During thick or foggy weather and snowstorms a 
 
 TKI"*!! liM'ilK.jl. JlUJ!i>aili|i>i!i|iuiiiiMMapiHHaiiSHi 
 
 MaMM 
 
 mutm 
 
chorages, will 
 B channels on 
 
 jrreeu Island, 
 s and resting 
 
 circular gray 
 8 feet, it flusb- 
 f ten seconds 
 3,n interval of 
 ght is totally 
 ; it should be 
 
 V. end, but a 
 ir, extends 2^ 
 id warning by 
 d, but vessels 
 I, because the 
 on that dide. 
 nd wishing to 
 s bank in 10 
 I and find the 
 of need, they 
 south side of 
 :uots an hour, 
 are all white, 
 louse bearing 
 I Islet Bank, 
 rard of Hare 
 astward; but 
 tiainly distin- 
 vessel taken 
 1 buoy marks 
 eading north- 
 brd sufBcient 
 
 d of Red Islet 
 imast, 34 feet 
 its should be 
 
 and lightship 
 
 a northeast- 
 
 t annually on 
 
 inowstorms a 
 
 WHITE ISLET — BRANDY POTS. 
 
 311 
 
 steam whistle is sounded from the lightvessel ten seconds in every 
 minute, or with an interval of fifty seconds between eiioh blast. 
 
 White Islet; lying nearly 10 miles S8W. ^ W. from Eed Islet, is 
 small, 38 feet high, and wooded. It presents the appearance of a clump 
 of trees on Hare Island North Keef. There are other small accumula- 
 tions of bowlders that never cover, but White Islet is the only con- 
 spicuous object on the reef. 
 
 White Islet Reef is composed of a narrow ridge of shite with 
 numerous bowlders on and skirting it, and extends 3 miles northeast- 
 ward of White Islet. The flood stream sets very strongly on and over 
 the NE. extreme of this, reef. Vessels in that neighborhood shouhl 
 therefore guard against this dangerous stream. 
 
 At night or in foggy weather vessels should not approach this reef 
 nearer than a depth of 10 fathoms at low water. 
 
 LightvesseL — A Ughtvessel, with two masts, is moored in 8 fathoms 
 water off the NE. extreme of White Islet Reef, and is painted red, 
 with the words White Island Ueef in white letters on the sides. 
 
 From each masthead is exhibited a fixed white light, that on the 
 foremast at an elevation of 24 feet and the one on the mainmnst at 
 27 feet, respectively. Both should be visible 10 miles. Withdrawn 
 Novembei' 16 each year. 
 
 Fog Signal. — In thick or foggy weather and during snowstorms a 
 steam whistle on board the Ughtvessel will be sounded as follows: A 
 blast of eight seconds, silence eight seconds, a blast of eight seconds, 
 followed by silence for two minutes and twenty seconds. 
 
 Hare Island is nearly joined to White Islet at low water when the 
 passage between is not available even for boats. It rises apparently in 
 an inclined plane from both ends to a summit 323 feet high. There are 
 a few houses on the eastern shore at 1^ miles from the NE. extreme, 
 and a solitary house stands 2 miles farther SW. 
 
 An isolated reef, 2 feet high, lies 600 yards SSE. of the NE. extreme 
 of Hare Island, and a small wooded islet is joined at low water to the 
 SW. extreme. 
 
 Beacons. — A diamond-shaped and a pyramidal beacon stand close 
 west of the eastern houses, and at one mile from the SW. extreme there 
 are two pyiamidal and one diamond beacon. 
 
 Brandy Pots are three islands joined together at low water, but 
 separated from Hare Island by a channel i mile wide with a reef nearly 
 in the middle, and through which no greater depth than 9 feet will be 
 found at low water, though there is a curious deep hole at the SW. 
 entrance. 
 
 The westernmost island is the largest. It attains an elevation of 170 
 feet in a wooded conical summit and falls in clitt's to the northward. 
 The easternmost islet is small and wooded and about 30 feet hi^li. 
 The southernmost islet is white and almost bare of trees. Its south 
 extreme has deep water close to. 
 
 l\ 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
312 
 
 ST. LAWKENCE RIVER. 
 
 r " i 
 
 1*1 .' 
 
 Light — From a square building, 3!) feet high and painted white, 
 situated close to the SK. extreme of the southernmost ot Brandy Pots, 
 and at an elevation of ~)7 feet, is exhibited a flxed white light, which 
 should be visible 10 miles. 
 
 Brandy Pots Bank extends on each side of Brandy Pots. An 
 isolated rock with 12 feet water on it lies 1^ miles 8. 28° W. (S. 48^ W. 
 mag.) from Brandy Pots lighthouse and 1,600 yards from the nearest 
 point of Hare Island. 
 
 A shoal witli 18 feet water over it lies 3i miles S. 30° W. (S. 50° W. 
 raag.) from Brandy Pots lighthouse; a rock with 16 feet water over it, 
 j( mile southwestward of the shoal, and a bank with 17 feet water on it 
 lies \m) yards S. 72° E. (8. 52° E. mag.) from the SW. point of Hare 
 Island. 
 
 Anchorage. — Small vessels seek shelter on either side of Brandy 
 Pots, according to the wind, in depths from 13 to 16 feet water. 
 
 Large vessels anchor as convenient in Brandy Pots Ghanitel or Hare 
 Island Channel south of Middle Ground. The holding ground is good 
 throughout. 
 
 The tidal streams are not so strong in the Southern Ohannel. 
 
 The bank northeastward of Brandy Pots has extended and the whole 
 of Pilgrim Islands must be kept well open of Brandy Pots to clear the 
 outer depth of 17 feet. 
 
 Hare Island South Reef.— The nearest portion of the reef that 
 dries at low water is 1^ miles SW. of Hare Island, the channel between 
 having no greater depth than 18 feet at low water. The streams sweep 
 through this channel with a velocity of 4 to 5 knots at spring tides, 
 eddying with strong swirls on the ebb. 
 
 The local steamers use this channel in going to and from Murray Bay 
 and Kiviere du Loup. 
 
 On this reef are four islets. The two northeastemmost covered with 
 grass with a few small bushes 6 feet above high water, and the south- 
 westernmost a sand bank covered with grass and 4 feet high. The 
 largest is between these and has some spruce trees on the summit, the 
 highest of which is 22 feet above high water. 
 
 Buoy. — A red buoy is moored in 19 feet water at the northeastern 
 extremity of the shoal water extending from Hare Island South Reef, 
 with the summit of White Islet in line with the south extreme of Hare 
 Island, and with the northern pyramidal beacon in line with the dia- 
 mond beacon of the group near the southwestern extreme of Hare 
 Island. 
 
 Hare Island Bank extends 6 miles southwestward of South Beef, 
 and the extreme is marked by a red buoy moored iu 4 fathoms water 
 with the west sides of Hare Island and Reef in line and the two bea- 
 cons at the NE. end of Grande Island Eamouraska, both now painted 
 white, in line. 
 
 Barrett Ledges are two small rocks with deep water between and 
 
 '^SteBfci. 
 
lainted white, 
 Brandy Pots, 
 ) light, which 
 
 iy Pots. An 
 W. (S. 480 w. 
 tn the nearest 
 
 iv. (S. mo vv. 
 
 water over it, 
 set water on it 
 Kiint of Hare 
 
 de of Brandy 
 water. 
 
 aunel or Hare 
 Touud is good 
 
 lannel. 
 
 and the whole 
 
 ts to clear the 
 
 the reef that 
 
 mnel between 
 
 streams sweep 
 
 spring tides, 
 
 n Murray Bay 
 
 ; covered with 
 fnd the south- 
 Bt high. The 
 e summit, the 
 
 ) northeast^-rn 
 1 South Keef, 
 trenie of Hare 
 i with the dia- 
 reme of Hare 
 
 f South Keef. 
 'athoms water 
 1 the two bea- 
 ti now painted 
 
 • between and 
 
 BARRETT LEDGER — MIDDLE HANK. 
 
 ;;i3 
 
 around them. Th^i northeastern has 7 feet water over it and is U ,'„ miles 
 N. 73° K. (S. 87° E. nniir ^ from Brandy Pots lightlumse, and the western, 
 with V2 feet water over it, lies 800 yards 8. 4.So W. (8. 08° W. mag.) 
 from tlie eastern rock. 
 
 The highest liill over St. Andrr, open of (ireat IMIgrim Island, bear- 
 ing 8. 19° W. (S. 31>o W. mag.) leads close east, and Hare Island Sum- 
 mit, in line with the NK. extreme of Hrandy Pots, bearing S. 73" W. 
 (N. 87° W. mag.), leads north of these ledges. 
 
 Buoys. — A buoy checkered bla<!k and white is moored close NB. of 
 the eastern rock, and shows an intermittent white jras lifjht, the period 
 of occultation being about six seconds. 
 
 A can buoy, cLeckeretl black and white, is moored close east of the 
 western rock. 
 
 Manuen Rock, with 7 feet water over it, is a little more than 1^ 
 miles S. 73° E. (8. 53^ E. mag.) from Brandy Pots lighthouse. Middle 
 Shoal, with 9 feet water on it, lies 300 yards SW. by S. of Marmen Bock, 
 and Demers Book, with 11 feet water over it, lies 700 yards southwest- 
 ward of Middle Shoal, and nearly 1^ miles 8.56° K. (8. 36° E. mjg.) 
 from Brandy Pots lighthouse. The apparent easternmost summit on 
 the south shore of the river in line with the north extreme of Gacouna 
 Island, bearing N. 49° E. (N. 69° E, mag.), leads close SE. of these 
 banks. 
 
 Buoys. — A can buoy, painted black, is moored close northward of 
 Marmen Bock, and a buoy, painted red, is moored close southward 
 of Demers Bock. 
 
 Middle Bank extends sonthwestward from Middle Ground to Hare 
 Island Bank with no greater depth than 27 feet. A patch, with 17 
 feet water on it, lies on this bank at 2 miles 8. 89° E. (8. 69° E. mag.) 
 from the SW. extreme of Hare Island, and a shoal, with 18 feet water 
 over it, lies 800 yards northeastward of that patch, with the SW. 
 extreme of White Islet in line with the north extreme of Brandy Pots. 
 
 Buoy. — A can buoy, painted red and black in horizontal bauds, is 
 moored in 25 feet water southward of these shoals, with the two pyram 
 idal beacons in line, and White Islet showing about mid-channel 
 between Brandy Pots and Hare Island. 
 
 Mark. — The best mark for crossing Middle Bank, in 27 feet water, is 
 to keep the NE. extreme of Hare Island in line with the east extreme 
 of Brandy Pots, bearing N. 9° W. (N. 11° E. mag.). 
 
 SOUTH SHORE — BELOW THE TRAVERSE. 
 
 Green Island and Ree£— See pages 216 and 217. 
 
 Green Island is of gray wacke and slate rock ; wooded, and rising to 
 about 250 feet above the sea. The channel between the island and the 
 mainland is f mile wide in the narrowest part, and dries at low water, 
 with the exception of a very narrow channel for boats. 
 
 The island extends 5 miles SW. from the lighthouse, with bold and 
 
814 
 
 8T. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 ro<;ky shores. Its SW. point is low and bare, and has a danperous 
 reef extending from it one mile southwestward. The XW. side of this 
 reef is so bold that there is no warning by the lead. At idght, vessels 
 8h()nld come no nearer to it on that side than 25 fathoms water, nor 
 bring the light to bear northward of N. 47° B. (N. (17° E. mag.), until 
 the NE. end of Cacouna Island bears 8. 43° E. (8. 23<^ E. mag.), which 
 bearing leads to the westward. 
 
 Tides.— The (lood stream sets strongly over the tail of this reef 
 towiird Gaconna Island and the ebb the contrary. There is generally 
 a great rippling oft' the end of the reef oansed by the meeting of the 
 flood tides from either side of (Ireen Island. 
 
 GreMi Island Light~8ee page 217. 
 
 Anchorage.— Midway between the SW. end of Green Island Reef 
 and Gaooana KcKsk there is good anchorage and shelter from easterly 
 winds, in 6 fathoms, muddy bottom, but there might be delay and diiti- 
 culty in getting out when the wind changed to the westward, on which 
 account it is seldom used. 
 
 Cacouna Island is separated from the mainland only at very high 
 tides, and there is a causeway to it that rai-ely or ever covers. 
 
 The island is generally wooded, over gray rock, and is faced by clitt's 
 on the north side; it is 281 feet high, and is conspicuous from its 
 isolated position and greater elevation than the adjacent coast. 
 
 Cacouna Rock. 25 feet high, is joined to the north extreme of 
 Cacouna Island by a reef of slate that dres at low water. A depth 
 of 6 fathoms water will be found at 200 yards from the SW. point 
 of the island. 
 
 Cacouna, a village with a population of 899 in 1891, is on the main- 
 land SB. of Cacouna Island. It is one of the most frequented sum- 
 mer resorts of the Province of Quebec, has a large parish (>hurch with 
 a spire, a small Episcopal church with a spire, and a Presbyterian 
 church with a belfry; the last named is not visible from seaward. 
 
 A large hotel, with three projecting wings and painted wltite, stands 
 near the edge of the clift" that rises close southwestward of the pyram- 
 idal beacon which stands below the charch, and about f mile distant 
 from the latter. Numerous villas of the summer residents and houses 
 of the stationary population line the road for some distance south 
 westward of the hotel. 
 
 The post and telegraph oflBce stands opposite the church. 
 
 Fercee Rocks are in two parts that together extend l/o miles 
 parallel to, and distant nearly one mile from, the south shore of the 
 river. The northeastern part is l-^ miles from Cacouna Island and is 
 a small round rock 9 inches above high water. The southwestern part 
 is one foot high, long and narrow. A tortuous channel with 34 fathoms 
 water in it lies between the reef and the shore. At night vessels 
 should not approach these rocks to a less depth than 8 fathoms. 
 
 Riviere du Loup, the entrance to which is 54 miles southwestward 
 
 WMai i j l t)I > IIMHl l |>l»» ! iUiMt»»MB Ij ! 
 
RIVIKKK niJ LOIP. 
 
 315 
 
 M a danperoiiB 
 iW. Bide of this 
 t idght, vesseiA 
 oms water, nor 
 E. mag.), until 
 E). mag.), which 
 
 »il of this ro4>f 
 ire is generally 
 meetiug of the 
 
 en Inlaud Reef 
 )r ft-om easterly 
 delay and diffl- 
 ward, on which 
 
 ly at very high 
 
 iovers. 
 
 « faced by cliffs 
 
 CUOU8 from its 
 
 it coast. 
 
 [■th extreme of 
 
 Iter. A depth 
 
 the SVV. iM)iut 
 
 is on the main- 
 equented siim- 
 sh church with 
 * Presbyterian 
 
 seaward, 
 i white, stands 
 1 of tlie pyram- 
 
 f mile distant 
 fits and houses 
 listaiice south- 
 
 l/o miles 
 
 rch. 
 end 
 
 h shore of the 
 % Island and is 
 thwestern part 
 dth 3^ fathoms 
 night vessels 
 athoms. 
 sontliwcstward 
 
 of Gaconna Inland, i.s a considerable stream, and lias a depth of 2 foct 
 in the entrance at low wat4>r, bnt dries a«-ro«ci at a siiort distance within 
 the inner end of the i»ier. A deiith of about 10 feet may be found at 
 high water to the mills near the bridge at the head, a distaufe of 1^ 
 miles. Water can b*^ pro«!ured with considerable dittlculty near the 
 bridge. 
 
 A pier extends abont 1,000 feet from the north entrance point of the 
 river, with a crosshead, alongside which there is a deptli of IH feet at 
 low water. A small hotel and telegraph office stand at tht^ inner end 
 of the pier, and a dagstaff on the point. 
 
 A railway in connection with the Intercolonial system extends to tlie 
 end of the pier. 
 
 Light. — From a square lighthouse, 35 feet high, and painted white, 
 at the end of the pier at Riviere du Loup Point is exhibited, at an ele> 
 vation of 30 feet, a fixed whit« light that should be visible 11 miles. 
 
 Signals. — This is a telegraph and signal station. 
 
 Anchorage. — The anchorage off Riviere du Loup is very good; 
 depths ftom 4 to .5 fathoms may be found as convenient, the former 
 at 400 yards from the i)ier. The deepest water will be fnnnd with the 
 courthouse in line with Riviere du Loup Point. The holding ground is 
 very good in this vicinity. 
 
 Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Riviere du Loup Pier at 
 3h. 10m.; springs rise 16^ feet; neaps rise 10^ feet, and ueaps range 7 
 feet. 
 
 Fraserville is ^ small town close inshore of the entrance to the river^ 
 with a population of .4,175 in 1891. Ther^ is a prominent stone church 
 with a spire, and about 250 yards westward of the church is the court- 
 house, a conspicuous square stone building. There is also a small Prot- 
 estant church with a square tower, but it is rarely visible from seaward. 
 There are both post and telegraph offices in Fraservllle, 
 
 Rividre du Loup Village lies south of Fraserville, and is the seat of 
 the engineering works of the Intercolonial Railway, which are grouped 
 abont the railway station. 
 
 Supplies of any kind may be obtained here. Coal can be procured 
 from the Intercolonial Railway, and can be taken In from trucks at the 
 end of the pier. About 1,600 tons are kept stored at Riviere du Loup, 
 and about the same (juantity both at 8t. Flavie and St. Charles Junc- 
 tion, but any quantity can be had from the Pict^u collieries in 50 hours, 
 or from Springhill in 39 hours. 
 
 Aspect of Coast. — The land in this neighborhood consists of a series 
 of ridges parallel to the shore, and separated by valleys under culti- 
 vation. From the valley next south of the ridge that terminates in 
 Riviere du Loup Point rises a remarkable isolated hill 280 foet high 
 that from the westward appears as a sharp cone. The coast ridges, all 
 of which are faced by cliff on the river side, extend to Notre Dame du 
 Portage, the westernmost beiug surmounted by a tlagstaff and a summer 
 
 f. ! 
 
 i- 
 
 1°! ■' 
 
 :< ■: 
 
 i - 
 
816 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVEi'^. 
 
 houHe at 18(1 feet ul)OV« Iii^h wnter. Beliiiul tbene ridgeH the main liills 
 ure aliiiost Hat in outline, and sloyte gradually seaward from elevatioutt 
 (»(' 100 to 5JjO feet high. 
 
 Notre Dame du Portage at^oins the parish of '<ivi<'re du Loup. 
 The parisli church with a spire stands cloHe to the sliore at 5 miles 
 southwestward of Kivlf're du Loup Point. 
 
 Loup Bank extends southwestward from the entrance to the river 
 and shaUowH gradually westward. The lighthouse at Riviere du Loup 
 Point well opiin of the isolated conical hill bearing N. 01^ E. (N. 
 81" K. mag.), leads NW. of the depth of 18 feet on this bank, and of 
 rilgrim Shoal. 
 
 Pilgrim Shoal extends 4^ miles in a direction parallel to the south 
 shore, from which it is distant H^ miles. The least depth found was 13 
 feet near the SW. extreme, but the general depth is from 10 to 18 feet. 
 The channel between it and Loup Bank has only 10 feet water in it, 
 and is 400 yards wide at the narrowest part. From the NE. extreme 
 of the shoal the 8W. extreme of Great Pilgrim Island is in line with 
 the NK. extreme of Middle Pilgrim Island, and the trees near tlie NE. 
 extreme of Hare Island are well open east of Brandy Pots. The mark 
 for clearing Loup Bank leads north, and Green Island well open of 
 Cacouna Rock bearing N. 38'^ E. (N. 68° E. mag.) leads west of this 
 shoal, us also the north extremes of Grande and Burnt Islands, Kam- 
 ouraska, in line bearing 8. 31° W. (8. 51° W. mag.). The SW. extreme 
 of Pilgrim Shoal lies 2^ miles N. 16° E. (N. 36° E. mag.) from Pilgrim 
 Island lighthouse. 
 
 Buoy. — A buoy, painted black, is moored in 5 fathoms water at 1,100 
 yards north of the SW. extreme of Pilgrim Shoal, and exhibits an 
 intermittent white gas light, the period of occultation being about six 
 seconds. 
 
 Pilgrim Islands are a group situated 7^ miles SW. of Biviere du 
 Loup Point. 
 
 Great Pilgrim Island, the easternmost, is of bare gray rock, par- 
 tially covered with turf, and with small wood in the hollows between 
 the hills. It is surmounted over each extreme by a round hiU, the 
 eastern 218 feet and the western 223 feet, respectively, above high 
 water, while between these is a smaller summit faced by gray cliffs. 
 
 Middle Pilgrim Island is partially wooded, and attains an elevation 
 of 181 feet, and the other smaller islands present generally the same 
 characteristics. 
 
 Long Pilgrim Island is the southwesterumost, and is surmounted 
 over the NE. extreme by a partially wooded hill, 128 feet high, from 
 which it extends in a narrow ridge faced by gray cliff for 3 miles 
 nearly, to the small bare islet 10 feet high at the SW. extreme. At 
 high water there is a gap at 1, 700 yards from the SW. extreme, through 
 which boats may pass when the water is smooth. 
 
 Light — At 1^ miles from the SW. extreme of Long Pilgrim Island, 
 
 BBT' 
 
8 the main IijIIh 
 'rota elevations 
 
 vu'Tn du Loup, 
 ore at 5 miles 
 
 ce to the river 
 iviere du Louj» 
 
 N. «lo E. (N. 
 
 H bank, and of 
 
 el to the south 
 h found waH l.'( 
 n 10 to 18 feet, 
 eet water in it, 
 e NK. extreme 
 is in line with 
 s near the NE. 
 ts. The mark 
 I well open of 
 i west of this 
 Islands, Kain- 
 j 8W. extreme 
 ) from Pilgrim 
 
 water at 1,100 
 d exhibits an 
 eiug about six 
 
 of Biviere du 
 
 ray rock, par- 
 lows between 
 ound hdl, the 
 /, above high 
 gray cliflfs. 
 3 an elevation 
 ally the same 
 
 9 surmounted 
 et high, from 
 ' for 3 miles 
 extreme. At 
 •erne, through 
 
 Igrim Island, 
 
 LONG E'lLORIM ISLAND — KAMOUKA8KA ISLANDS. 
 
 317 
 
 and on the mimmit of the ridge, is a H(|uar« lightlnmHe, .'«) feet liiyli, and 
 painted white, with the tower rining from the center of the building, 
 from which, at an elevation' of 180 feet, is Hhown ii fixed wliite light 
 that siiould l>e visible \\i miles. 
 
 Anchorage. — There is anchorage for HnnvU vessels in westerly winds 
 under Lon^ Pilgrim Island and oil" Great Pilgrim Island in 15 feet 
 water. 
 
 Village.— The church of St. Audn-, a stone building with a spire, 
 stands on the mainland southeastward of Pilgrim Islands. A small 
 village surrounds the church, at the east end of which is a large 
 factory. 
 
 St Andr6 Point, a round island, ll'U feet high, is Joined to the 
 mainland by a grassy flat, .WO yards wide, that covers oidy at high 
 water. 
 
 Several remarkable hills fringe the coast in this locality, the highest 
 attaining an elevation of <;30 feet in a conical sumnut, with another 
 north of it 565 feet above high water. 
 
 St. Andr^ Bank extends from Pilgiim to Kamouraska Islands, and 
 in many places dries out more than one mile from the shore. Its 
 northern edge is very steep, but there is an excellent mark for it, 
 namely, the SE. sides of Grande and Burnt Islantls in line, bearing 
 S. 31° W. (S. 51° W. mag.), which leads along it at the distance of 
 from 300 to 400 yards from the 3-fathom line of soundings. 
 
 Kamouraska Islands lie nearly G miles southwestward of Pilgrim 
 Islands, and 2^ miles from the mainland, to which they are Joined by 
 shoals that dry at low water. Grande Island is the northeasternmost, 
 and, together with Burnt Island, extends about '2 miles along the 
 northern edge of the bank. 
 
 These islands are long and narrow ridges of gray wacke and are bold 
 to the westward, there being 20 fathoms water close to them. Crow 
 Island lies about f mile south of Burnt Island, and there are besides 
 two small and bare rocky islets northeastward of Crow Island, and 
 within Burnt Island. Crow Island is about ^ mile from the shore at 
 the church and town of Kamouraska, and carts can cross to it at low 
 water. Tht re is a wharf and good lauding near the chu'-ch, and water 
 may be obti ined at any time of tide when there is depth enough for 
 boats over tht ?>ioal8, but there is no water on the islands. 
 
 Light— A lighthouse is built 240 yards from the NE. end of Grande 
 Island, and exhibits, at an elevation of 109 feet, a revolving white light 
 every half minute. The light should be visible IS miles. The light- 
 house is a square building with dwelling attached, painted white, and 
 39 feet high. 
 
 Beacons. — On the northeastern end of Grande Island there are two 
 white beacons. When in line, bearing S. 23° E. (S. 3° E. mag.), they 
 form a cross mark for the red buoy on the SW. end of Hare Island 
 Bank in 4 fathoms. 
 
f 
 
 318 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 tn 1| 
 il (I 
 
 « fl. 
 
 MS r' 
 
 ^i i 
 
 Kamonraska Bay, which is immediately southward of the town, is 
 well sheltered, and small vessels may safely lie aground and winter 
 there, on a mud bottom, which dries at low water. Vessels in distress, 
 when they have lost their anchors, may be saved by running them in 
 at high water between the reef oif Cape Diable ami Crow Ii»iau(l, leav- 
 ing the latter from i to J mile to the northeastward in passing, and 
 when within the reef hauling into the bay to the S W. In high spring 
 tides 13 or 14 feet of water will be found over the mud, but in neap 
 tides there is seldom more than 9 or 10 feet. 
 
 Anchorage. — There is good anchorage oft' Kamouraska with the pre- 
 vailing winds up and down the river, but exposed to westerly winds. 
 The best berth to anchor in is where tlie church of Kamouraska is just 
 open of Crow Island, bearing S. 67° E. (S. 47° E. mag.), and Grande 
 Island just open northward of Burnt Island, bearing N. 40° E. (N. 60"^ 
 E. mag.j, in 7 fathoms, over stiff mud. Largo vessels wishing for more 
 room may anchor farther out anywhere to the westward. 
 
 Cape Diable lies 3 miles SW. by S. from Crow Island, across the 
 Kamouraska Bay. From it, reels of slate extend northward, more 
 than midway to Crow Island, and northwestward g mile, in which last 
 direction the distance out to the 3-fathom edge of the bank is nearly 
 IJ miles. 
 
 Orignaux Point is a low point 7J miles SW. from Cai)e Diable, 
 extending from some low hillocks. A pier extends 1,200 feet from the 
 point, with a crossheud, alongside which there is a depth of 11 feet 
 at low water. A large hotel and some smaller houses stand on the 
 hillocks close south of the pier. 
 
 Light— From a square lighthouse 28 feet high, and painted white, 
 built at the end of the pier, at Orignaux Point, and at an elevation of 
 34 feet, is exhibited a fixed white light that should be visible 10 miles. 
 This locality is in the parish of St. Denis, and is frequently designated 
 by the name of the parish. 
 
 Fog SignaL — A hand horn answers signals from vessels. 
 
 Anchorage. — There is good anchorage at a little more than one mile 
 from the pier in 5 to 6 fathoms water, and as close in as convenient, a 
 depth of 18 feet being found 700 yards from the pier. 
 
 Vessels loading timber from Riviere Quelle generally anchor here. 
 
 From this point the edge of the shoal water extends SW. by S., 
 gradually increasing its distance from the shore. 
 
 Tides.— It is high water, full and change, at Orignaux Point at 3h. 
 47m. ; springs rise 17J feet, neaps rise 13 feet, and neaps range 9^ feet. 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1491.) 
 
 Ri^bre Otielle is just southward of Quelle Point, the westernmost 
 promincoit projection on the shore in this neighborhood. The point 
 slojies gradually from a height of 108 feet, the westernmost summit of 
 a partially wooded ridge that extends some distance inland. A depth 
 
 •S^SS^imSMWRMMI 
 
 mmmmmm 
 
 WBWHBi'W'ww^'w 
 
RIVIKRE QUELLE — SHOALS OF ST. ANNE. 
 
 319 
 
 rd of the town, is 
 ouud aud winter 
 easels in distress, 
 running theui in 
 'row Iisland, leav- 
 1 in passing, and 
 In high spring 
 nud, but in neap 
 
 ska with the pre- 
 westerly winds, 
 tmouraska is just 
 Ag.), and Grande 
 N. 40° E. (N. 60O 
 wishing for more 
 krd. 
 
 slaiid, a(a"08s the 
 northward, more 
 He, in which last 
 lie bank is nearly 
 
 >m Cai)e Diable, 
 200 feet from the 
 depth of 11 feet 
 $es stand ou the 
 
 1(1 painted white, 
 t an elevation of 
 ) visible 10 miles, 
 eutly designated 
 
 essels. 
 
 )re than one mile 
 
 as convenient, a 
 
 Ly anchor here, 
 snds SW. by S., 
 
 aux Point at 3h. 
 .ps range 0^ feet. 
 
 the westernmost 
 lood. The point 
 imost summit of 
 ulaud. A depth 
 
 
 of 12 feet will be found in Riviere (Quelle at high water as far as the 
 wharf which is on the south side of the river at IJ miles from the point. 
 
 The best channel is south of a small islet about midway to the wharf. 
 A church with a spire stands close east of the bridge that spans the 
 river at 2 miles from Ouelle Point. 
 
 St. Anne de la Pocatidre is the parish next south of Itiviere 
 Ouelle. A conspicuous church with a spire and a large college sur- 
 rounded by a village stand on the slope of Mont St. Anne, a prominent 
 round hill 395 feet high. Several conspicuous isolated hills lie south- 
 V, ard of Mont St. Anne, aud Mont Boutot, a remarkable truncated cone 
 708 feet above high water, lies 2^ miles eastward of St. Anne. 
 
 St Roch dee Aulnets (or Aulnais) is a small village southwest- 
 ward of St Anne de la Pocatiere, and has a church with two small 
 spires, which stands close to the shore. Houses are situated along the 
 road between all these villages. 
 
 Beacons. — A pyramidal beacon is built close to the church, and a 
 similar one on an elevation a little more than ^ mile southeastward. 
 
 Another of the same shape stands just south of the edge of the clitf 
 at 1^ miles south westward of the church, aud inland from it, another one 
 shaped like a diamond. 
 
 Coast.— The coast from St. lioch des Aulnets to St. Jean Port Joli is 
 generally bordered by small cliff, the end of slopes from wooded hills 
 that rise to heights of 320 and 290 feet above high water. 
 
 Shoals of St. Anne extend from the shore of that parish, and are 
 dangerous, particularly at night aud with the first of the flood stream 
 which sets directly ou to the shoulder of the bank at the buoy, and 
 obliquely to the westward. 
 
 The water shoals very rapidly for the greater part of the length of 
 the shoals, the distance between depths of 5 and 3 fathoms being less 
 than 200 yards, and to G feet less than 800 yards. 
 
 Buoy.— A black buoy is moored off St. Anne Shoals in 30 feet water, 
 
 Mark.— Cape Diable well open of the lighthouse on Origuaux Point 
 bearing N. 5Go E. (N. 75° E. mag.) leads ]!fW. of St. Anne Shoals from 
 Ouelle Point southwestward. 
 
 Anchorage.— All along the edge of the bank, from Kamonraska 
 Islands to St. Anne buoy, there is excellent anchorage iu from 7 to 10 
 fathoms, stiff mud bottom. 
 
 The shoals trend 6 miles SW. from St. Anne buoy to the lower light- 
 Vessel at South Traverse, which is moored on the outer point of St. Roch 
 Shoals. 
 
 English Bank extends about IG miles northeastward from Middle 
 Ground with a general breadth of one mile. The least depth found 
 was fathoms, and 6 to 6^ fathoms may be met with at any part of 
 the ridge of the bank as far east as Origuaux Point, where the survey 
 terminated in 1887. It affords good anchorage, and is much used by 
 vessels, while beating in the river, to await a favorable tide. 
 
 5f 
 
 u 
 
 ... 
 
320 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 SOUTH CHANNEL, BELOW THE TRAVERSE. 
 (H. O. Cbarts Nos. 1490 and 1491.) 
 
 General ObservationB. — South Channel is jaatly preferred for the 
 common purposes of navigation. In that part of it which is below the 
 Traverse the tides are not so strong nor the water so inconveniently 
 deep as they are in the corresponding part of the North Channel below 
 Coudres Island. Moreover, it i>o.sses8es good anchorage almost in every 
 part, an<l water enough for vessels of large draft at all times of the tide. 
 
 Vessels of large draft should not pass west of Middle Bank, as not 
 more than 21 feet can be secured at low water in crossing Middle Bank 
 to the main channel, but such vessels should pass eastward of Barrett 
 Ledges, Middle Shoal, and ISIiddle Bank, where the channel is direct. 
 With the assistance of the buoys in this channel, large vessels may 
 beat up or down with .safety. 
 
 Directions from Green Island and Red Islet to Brandy Pots.— 
 Steamers of all descriptions proceeding to Quebec may pass between 
 Bic Island and the south shore of the St. Lawrence, keeping rather 
 nearer the island and guarding against the shoal ott' ]3amaby Island. 
 The two pairs of beacons marking the position of Alcide Bock should 
 not be brought in line to avoid that danger, after passing which, 
 a course should be steered to i>a8S between Ked Islet Bank and 
 Green Island. The High Land of Bic must be kept well oi)en north 
 of Basque Island to avoid Green Island Reef, until the eastern bea- 
 con on Green Island is in line with the lighthouse, when a course 
 should be steered to pass west of Barrett Ledge. The highest hill of 
 St Andr('', open of Great Pilgrim Island, bearing S. 19° W. (S. 39° W. 
 mag.), leads close east of these shoals, and Hare Island well open south 
 of White Island, leads eastward of Hare Island North Eeef, while the 
 south extreme of Green Island open north of Cacouna Ro(!k will lead 
 west of Percee Eocks. Bring the north extreme of Burnt Island 
 (Kamoura8ka).iust in sight north of Grande Island, bearing S. 31° W. 
 (S. 51° W. mag.) before the isolated conical hill eastward of liivieredu 
 Loup Point is nearly in line with the lighthouse o!i that iM)int, bearing 
 N. 61° K. (N. 81° E. mag.), to clear Pilgrim Shoal. The light buoy ott" 
 the latter having been passed, a course should be steered to pass west 
 of Kamouraska Islands and Orignaux Point lighthouse, giving the 
 latter and the shoals off Quelle Point a good berth. Cape Diable must 
 be kept well open of Orignaux Point lighthouse, bearing N. 56° B. 
 (N. 75° E. mag.) to dear St. Anne Shoals until the Traverse light- 
 vessels come in line bearing S. 28° W. (S. 47° W. mag.), when thry 
 should be steered for and left to the westward. After passing Upi)er 
 Traverse lightvessel, it should be brought in line with Lower Traverse 
 lightvessel, bearing N. 28° E. (N. 47° E. mag.), and this line followed 
 to clear St. Roch Shoals. When the buoy marking their west extreme 
 has been passed, steer west of Channel Patch taking care to open the 
 
 i in i .iJMIM 
 
 mn' 
 
^ *%Mi 
 
 ST, LAWRENCE RIVER — NORTH SHORE. 
 
 321 
 
 9E. 
 
 ►referred for the 
 lich is below tlie 
 ) inconveniently 
 h Channel below 
 B almost in every 
 times of the tide, 
 lie Bank, as not 
 ing Middle Bank 
 ward of Barrett 
 lannel is direct, 
 rge vessels may 
 
 Brandy Pots. — 
 
 y pass between 
 , keeping rather 
 Bamaby Island, 
 ide Bock should 
 passing which, 
 [slet Bank and 
 well oi)en north 
 }he eastern bea- 
 , when a coarse 
 ) highest hill of 
 
 = w. (S. 390 W. 
 
 [ well open south 
 1 Beef, while the 
 
 Bo(;k will lead 
 f Burnt Island 
 laring S. 31° W. 
 .rd of Biviere du 
 tiH)int, bearing 
 le light buoy off 
 ed to pass west 
 luse, giving the 
 ape Diable must 
 aring N. 56° B. 
 
 Traverse light- 
 sig.), when th?y 
 
 passing Upi)er 
 Lower Traverse 
 lis line followed 
 lir west extreme 
 care to open the 
 
 highest part of Goose Island Beef south of Stone Tillar lighthouse, 
 bearing S. 37" W. (S. 'i(i° W. mag.) before the bciicou at St. Jean Port 
 Joli is nearly in line with the east extreme of the church. A course 
 should then be shaped eastward of South Bock lighthouse when Crane 
 Island should be brought well open of Goose Island Beef, bearing S. 
 46° W. (S. 65° W. mag.) to clear the shoals between South Bock and 
 Goose Island Beef, and that mark should be opened gradually so as to 
 pass 700 yards southeastward of Goose Island Beef. For continuation, 
 see page 337. 
 
 At night, when the land can not be seen ]>lainly, it is more prudent 
 to pass NW. of Bicqnette Island, keeping sufficiently far off to clear 
 Northwest Beef, when a course should be steered to i)ass between Bed 
 Islet Bank and Green Island. Frequent bearings of the light in this 
 locality and continuous soundings should be taken to insure clearing 
 Green Island Beef. When past Green Island the lighthouse on that 
 island should be just shut in with the west extreme bearing N. 36° E. 
 (N. 56° E. mag.), and should be kept so until Barrett Ledge light buoy 
 is passed, when a course should be steered for the light buoy on Pilgrim 
 Shoal and the directions followed as in daylight. GareM bearings and 
 : oundings should be taken to ascertain the vessel's position, particu- 
 i irly in the neighborhood of St. Anne Shoals, with the beginning of 
 ihe flood stream. 
 
 NORTH SHORE — BELOW COUDRES ISLAND. 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1112.) 
 
 Aspect of Coast. — The northern shore of the St. Lawrence from 
 Saguenay Biver to Coudres Island is bold and mountainous. The 
 granitic hills in most parts rise immediately from the river, forming 
 steep or precipitous headlands. Near the entrance of the Saguenay 
 these hills are not above 1,000 feet high, but those of Eboulements 
 attain an elevation of 2,551 feet above high water. 
 
 At page 301 the coast of the estuary was described up to Little 
 Bergeron Cove. The description of the coast from that point westward 
 will now be given. 
 
 Vaches Point, the east entrance point of Saguenay Biver, lies 6^ 
 miles NW. by W. from Bed Islet lighthouse. Saguenay Cliffs, the 
 high clay cliffs, and the hills covered with sand at this point are easily 
 recognized. 
 
 Moulin Baude Anchorage, in 7 fathoms, mud, is 3 miles NE. by E. 
 from Saguenay Oliffs, and Bed Islet and the SW. end of Green Island 
 are in line. The vessel will here be 800 yards from the 3-fathom line of 
 soundings sind nearly one mile off' shore. The water becomes deep im- 
 mediately outside this anchorage, which is of use to vessels coming up 
 under the north shore with a scant NW. wind, at the end of the tiood 
 and close of the day, and wishing to wait for the next flood, or for 
 daylight; also for vessels waiting for a wind to enter the Saguenay. 
 1151 21 
 
 i- 
 
M 
 
 822 
 
 BT. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 ^1 (I 
 
 i ■ 
 ' 'Si*' 
 
 (H.O. Chart. No. 1490.) 
 
 Vaches Patch, with 13 feet water over it, lies lij miles S. 77'^ E. 
 (S. 57° E. mag.) from Vaches Point, and is a continuation of Vaches 
 Point Reef, which dries out i mile from Vaches Point. 
 
 Buoy.— A buoy, painted red and black in horizontal bands, is 
 moored southward of the patch. 
 
 Prince Shoal is a narrow ridge of stones and bowlders with 17 feet 
 least water. It extends ^ mile SE. by E. from what was considered to 
 be the outer patch at the time of the Admiralty survey of 1829. This 
 shoal, wliich is marked by a red and black buoy, lies 2| miles S. 88<^ B. 
 (S. 68° E. mag.) from Lark Islet lighthouse, and is reported to have 
 much less water. 
 
 Lark Point, the southwestern entrance point of the Saguenay, is 
 2i miles from Vaches Point, and is also of clay cliffs, but nmch lower 
 than those of Vaches Point. 
 
 Lark Islet is composed of shingle and bowlders, is small and low, 
 and lies one mile NE. by E. from Lark Point, and is .joined to it by 
 sand and bowlders dry at low water. 
 
 Light— On the center of Lark Islet is a square building, 40 feet 
 high, painted white, which exhibits, at an elevation of 40 feet, a fixed 
 white light visible 10 miles. 
 
 Fog Signal. — During thick weather, fogs, or snowstorms, a fog horn 
 will give blasts of eight seconds' duration every half minute. The 
 building is paiiiteil gray, with a brown roof. 
 
 Lark Reef is of sand and bowlders, dry at low water nearly out to the 
 edge of the shoal water, which extends Hit miles SE. from Lark Point. 
 Lark Patch, near the southern end of this reef, never covers, and out- 
 side of it, ill 4^ fathoms water, lies a buoy painted red. Between this 
 extensive reef and Vaches Point Keef, including Bar Reef and Prince 
 Shoal, is the entrance of Saguenay River, the navigation of which has 
 been described in the previous chapter. 
 
 The mark for leading SE. of all these reefs, including Prince Shoal, is 
 Brandy Pots open of White Islets, bearing S. 15° W. (S. 35° W. mag.). 
 Running on this mark, a vessel will pass about J mile outside Prince 
 Shoal and Lark Reef, and will clear the Rocky Patches which lie IJ 
 miles eastward of Vaches Patch red and black buoy. The least water 
 found during the survey on these Rocky Patches was 7i fathoms, but 
 they may be extending eastward, and the depth over them be decreas- 
 ing, as was found in 1859 to be the case with Lark and Bar Reefs, and 
 the outer patch which is now Prince Shoal. 
 
 Canard River is a small stream, at the western termination of the 
 clay cliffs, 2 J miles 8W. from Lark Point, and can only be approached 
 in a boat near high water. 
 
 Echafaud Islet is a small steep and rocky islet, lying off the mouth 
 of a cove full of rocks 5 miles SW. of Lark Point. Lark Reef termi- 
 
miles S. 77° E. 
 tion of Vaches 
 
 )ntal bands, is 
 
 era with 17 feet 
 
 bS considered to 
 
 of 1829. This 
 
 miles S. 88^ B. 
 
 ported to have 
 
 e Sagruenay, is 
 )at nmcli lower 
 
 small and low, 
 joined to it by 
 
 tiilding, 40 feet 
 40 feet, a fixed 
 
 rms, a fog horn 
 f minute. The 
 
 early out to the 
 }m Lark Point, 
 overs, and out- 
 Between this 
 eef and Prince 
 n of which has 
 
 Prince Shoal, is 
 ». 35° W. mag.), 
 outside Prince 
 3S which lie 1^ 
 I'he least water 
 Ji fathoms, but 
 lem be decreas- 
 Bar lieefs, and 
 
 nination of the 
 be approached 
 
 J oflF the mouth 
 rk Reef termi- 
 
 MASQITE ROAD — MURRAY BAY. 
 
 323 
 
 nates close southward of I5chafaud Islet, after having trended for 5 
 miles SW. by W. from its SE. extreme. 
 
 Cape Basque, the first mountainous headland SW. of the Saguenay, 
 lies 6^ miles from Lark Point. It is quite bold, having -*0 fathoms 
 close to it. 
 
 Basque Road, between Oape Basque and Lark Reef, is a good 
 anchorage, well sheltered by the reef from easterly winds, and by the 
 mainland from all northerly and westerly winds as far southward as 
 SSW. There is plenty of room for many vessels, but the best berth is 
 with lilchafaud Islet bearing N. 88° W. (N. 68° W. mag ) and distant 
 rather less than one mile, where th% vessel will be in 10 or 11 fathoms, 
 with clay bottom, and nearly ^ mile from the 3-fathom line. Vessels 
 may anchor fsirther out in 13 fathoms; but the farther out the stronger 
 the stream. At the anchorage recommended the tidal streams are not 
 strong, and the holding ground is everywhere good. Thereis no anchor- 
 age on the north shore SW. of this to Murray Bay, a distance of 28 
 miles. 
 
 Cape Dogs, 5A miles southward of Oape Basque, is quite bold, high, 
 precipitous, and of bare granite. Midway between tlie.se capes is the 
 Bay of Rocks, having an island and many large rocks in it, as its name 
 implies, and affording shelter only to boats. 
 
 Cape Salmon is high and bold, like Cape Dogs, from whiclf it is 
 9jJ miles. SSW. Between these capes are Shettle Port, Black River, 
 and Port Parsley, at 2^, 4^, and 7i miles, respectively, from Cape 
 Dogs. They are merely places for boats. 
 
 Light— On the NE. extremity of Cape Salmon, locally known as 
 Pointedes Bodies, is a white, square lighthouse with red lantern. The 
 tower rises from the SE. face of the dwelling. The light is revolving 
 white every fifteen seconds, elevated 77 feet, and visible 14 miles. 
 Height of tower, 40 feet. 
 
 Fog Signal— A steam horn gives blasts of eight seconds with silent 
 intervals of twenty-two seconds. 
 
 Cape Eagle is 5J miles SW. from Cape Salmon, and of the same 
 bold, high, and precipitous character. The bay between these capes is 
 one mile deep, but .iffords no anchorage for shipping in consequence 
 of the great depth of water. In it is Port Salmon, a small cove which 
 large boats can enter at high water, about U miles westward of Cape 
 Salmon. The settlements on the north shore spread to the eastward 
 of this place, and they are continuous from it all along the coast to 
 Quebec. 
 
 Light— On outer end of pier, at east end of Cape Eagle, a fixed 
 white light is shown from a mast, it is elevated 38 feet and visible 
 6 miles. 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1491.) 
 
 Murray Bay, 6J miles SW. by W. from Ca]ie Eagle, is about IJ 
 miles wide and nearly as deep; but it is all dry at low water, excepting 
 
 ■i 
 
 I 
 
 ? 
 
 Me tti rri M .Tiag »iii f» iB M! i a pCi 
 
 % iff j-^7iiifif fft H«\ T^xXf'Vtif^t^Wf^'!. '• 
 
magMgrnfi^ 
 
 824 
 
 8T. LAWRENCE BIVER. 
 
 the shallow channels leading to the river at its head. The river flow- 
 ing down a beautiful valley from two or three smnX\ l{ikes among the 
 hills, is rapid and unnavigable. There is a church and village round 
 the head of the bay, and the settlements extend some miles back from 
 the St. Lawrence. There are grist and saw mills on the river. At the 
 latter deals are made, and are, for the niost part, slipped to Quebec in 
 (}|uall schooners, which lie aground near, or in the entrance of, the 
 river. Occasionally, however, vessels anchor off and take in cargoes of 
 lumber. A pier has been constructed here, having 18 feet of water at 
 its end in the lowest tides. 
 
 A shoal, said to be extending, lies ^ mile NE. of the pier at Pointe ai^ 
 Pic, and the extreme is marked by a red can buoy in 2^ fathoms water 
 at 850 yards northeastward from the lighthouse. Beween the buoy 
 aTid the pier there is a shoal with 5 feet on it at low water. St. Ir6n6e 
 church well open of Oape Sain leads SE. of this shoal, and vessels 
 approaching the pier should keep its NE. side hidden by the SE. front. 
 
 Slight shocks of earthquakes are not infrequent at Murray Bay, and. 
 also at Eboulements, St. Paul Bay, and the neighborhood. 
 
 Light — At Pointe au Pic, the SW. entrance point, from a lantern on 
 the roof of the freight shed on the wharf, is exhibited, at an elevation 
 of 30 feet, a fixed white light that should be visible 10 miles. The roof 
 Qf the building, which is 27 feet high, is red and the lantern white. 
 
 Anc&orage. — The anchorage off Murray Bay is close under the high 
 rocky shore, a lif^tle eastward of the bay, with Pointe Heu bearing S. 
 80° W. (N. 80° W. mag.) 800 yards. The bottom is of clay, good for 
 holding, ^nd the depth 10 or 12 fathoms at about 600 yards from shore, 
 bvit not above ^ niile from the edge of the shoal water. Vessels here 
 will be out of the strength of the tides, well Sheltered from the pre- 
 vailing winds, and in safety if well moored, although inconveniently 
 near the shore except in the case of a vessel taking in her cargo. It is 
 possible to anchor a little farther out in 15 or 16 fathoms, but the tidal 
 streams are there very strong. 
 
 X)irections. — In running up frotn the northeastward to anchor in 
 Murray Bay, give the shore a berth of ^ mile, in order to avoid the 
 shoal water which extends nearly 4 mile off shore midway between Oape 
 Eagle and the anchorage. In running down from the soiithwestward, 
 keep Gape Sain, the first point westward of Pointe au Pic, just open 
 southward of the latter, in order to clear the edge of the shoal water 
 which fills Murray Bay; and when the church bears N. 65° W. (N. 46° 
 W. mag.), a vessel may haul in toward the anchorage. 
 
 Ooose Cape is the extreme of a small wooded bluff, the spur of 
 higher coast ranges. It is bold, and lauding may be effected in a small 
 cove F6st of the lighthouse in ordinary weather. The ebb stream 
 sweeps by this point with great velocity. 
 
 Zdght — From a square building 42 feet high, with dwelling attached 
 
The river flow- 
 l9>kes among the 
 id visage round 
 miles back from 
 le river. At the 
 ped to Quebec in 
 entrance of, the 
 ake in cargoes qf 
 i feet of water at 
 
 pier at Pointe a^ 
 i^ fathoms water 
 leween the buoy 
 ater. St. Ir6n6e 
 loal, and vessels 
 }y the SE. front. 
 I^urray Bay, and. 
 
 LOOd. 
 
 rom a lantern on 
 1, at an elevation 
 miles. The roof 
 antern white. 
 le under the high 
 ) Heu bearing S. 
 of clay, good for 
 rards from shore, 
 )r. Vessels here 
 ed from the pre- 
 h inconveniently 
 her cargo. It is 
 ms, but the tidal 
 
 trd to anchor in 
 der to avoid the 
 ay between Cape 
 ) southwestward, 
 u Pic, just open 
 ' the shoal water 
 r. 650 W. (N. 450 
 
 tluff, the spur of 
 QTected in a small 
 The ebb stream 
 
 L welling attached 
 
 CAPE MARTIN — CAPE BT. JOSEPH. 
 
 ^25 
 
 and painted white, on Goose Ctipe, is exhibited, at an elevation uf 53 
 feet, a fixed white light that should be visible 12 miles. 
 
 Cape Martin, the east point of Eboulements Bay, is a conspicuous 
 sharp projecting cliff. Above it stands the church of Notre Dame 
 des Eboulements at an elevation of 1,180 feet above high water, iii the 
 center of the village. 
 
 The country in this neighborhood is well cultivated, even on the steep 
 slopes of the raneres that dominate this section of the river. 3Iount 
 Ebouleffip^ s, lighest, is 3,551 ffeet ahnve high water, and is sur- 
 
 rounded ^. Mnal' lonical hills. 
 
 A shoal lies in the bay betwet^n Goose Gape and Gape Martin with 
 6 feet of water over it at 800 yards from the shore. 
 
 Anchorage. — The anchorage between Goose Gape and Cape Martin 
 is good and well sheltered from easterly winds. 
 
 Vessels wishing to anchor should not do sd until the west extreme 
 of the beach of shingle that extends westward from Goose Cape bears 
 N. 04° W. (N. 450 W. mag.), when good anchorage may be had in 7 to 
 8 fathoms. The streams, however, are irregular here and occasionally 
 strong. When at anchor too far out in 8^ fathoms, with only a neap 
 tide, the strength of which was, however, aided by an easterly wind, 
 the first of the flood was observed coming round Goose Cape with a 
 great rippling. At first it set slanting on the shore at the rate of 5 
 knots, but soon decreased to 3^ knots. About one hour from its com- 
 mencement the stream increased again to 4^ knots, and after continuing 
 at that rate only for a short time, decreased to 2^ knots, which ratb 
 it retained for the remainder of the tide, setting fairly along shore. 
 Farther out — that is, in 10 fathoms — the ebb also will be found strong 
 as well as the flood. 
 
 Cape St. Joseph in line with Cape Martin bearing 8. 71° W. (west 
 mag.) leads close sotith of the depth of 18 feet at low water in this 
 anchorage. 
 
 Cape St. Joseph may readily be recognized by the sand cliffii facing 
 it, and by & pier extending from the middle of the proinbutory with a 
 depth of 9^ feet at the eitreme at low water. 
 
 Light. — Frotti a mast 19 feet high, with a shed at the base, at the 
 extremity of the pier t^ Cape St. Joseph, and at an elevation of 23 feet, 
 i6 shown a fixed white light that shonld be visible 5 miles. 
 
 A eonspicuous landslip i^ close to the shore at 1^ miles westward bf 
 Cape St. Joseph. 
 
 The shore dries at low water for a considerable distance eastward 
 and Westward of Cape St. Joseph, but all danger will be avoided by 
 keeping the landslip open of the piCir at Cape St. Joseph bearing S. 86° 
 Wi (N. 75° W. mag.) ttutil Goose Cape is in line with Cape Martili 
 beftriri^ N. 64° E. (N. 83° E. mag.). 
 
 This latter ihikrk will lead in mid-channel to St. Paul Bay. 
 
 » 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 h 
 
 ■ i g ii * fetwte-^^B^tf!a:i>'rJ%B-v^a»i»«. -• 
 
tiMii 
 
 
 S26 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 NORTH CHANNEL— BELOW COUDRB8 ISLAND. 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1112.) 
 
 General Observations.— The cbamiel northward of Red Islet and 
 its bank, and between the latter and tlie shoals ott" Sa^uenay Itiver, is 
 2A miles wide, between the .'J fathom lines, and the water is very deep. 
 Farther southwestward, North Channel is much wider, being nowhere 
 less than .'M miles in breadth. 
 
 North Channel from Red Islet to Coudres Island has a depth of water 
 hsually exceeding 30 and sometimes 50 fathoms. It therefore aflords 
 no ancliorage except those described in the last section. A vessel, how- 
 ever, might anchor on the NW. side of Hare Island Bank, and English 
 Bank is common to both channels, but it is only in line weather that 
 vessels could ride in such exposed situations. 
 
 It is this want of good and convenient anchorages which renders this 
 part of North Channel unlit for general use. In South Channel a ves- 
 sel above Cacouna can anchor almost anywhere or at any time when it 
 may become necessary ; but in North Channel, in the event of its falling 
 calm, she would be left at the mercy of the strong tides, and might be 
 in danger of being set on shore if she were in the neighborhood of Red 
 Islet or the shoals off the Saguenay. In other respects North Channel 
 is a fine, wide, and straight channel, free from detached slioals, but 
 with easterly winds and thick weather, or at night, this channel should 
 never be attempted. Besides, the meeting of the ebb streams down 
 the St. Lawrence and out of the Saguenay, at the rate of 5 or 6 knots, 
 and their opposition to the heavy swell up the estuary in NE. gales, 
 causes a very heavy, breaking sea, which it would be difiicult to dis- 
 tinguish from shoal water. 
 
 However, supposing the circumstances such as to render it desirable 
 for a vessel to take North Channel, attend to the following directions: 
 
 Open the half of Cacouna Island westward of Red Islet, and then 
 steer so as to open Brandy Pots southward of White Islet about the 
 breadth of the latter and bearing S. 15° W. (S. 35° W, mag.). Take 
 care to open Brandy Pots as directed, because the line of those islands 
 and White Islet touching passes nearly over Rocky Patches (depth, 7J 
 fathoms) which it is as well to avoid, in case there may be less water 
 there. The cross mark for these Rocky Patches is Red Islet in line 
 with the SW. end of Green Island. Vessels proceeding against the ebb 
 stream will find no difficulty, with the assistance of the charts, in pass- 
 ing these patches. 
 
 Having opened Brandy Pots southward of White Islet, keep them so, 
 as the vessel runs toward them, until Green Island lighthouse is well 
 open southward of Red Islet, or until past the black and white buoy 
 on Lark Reef, when she may steer directly up the middle of the chan- 
 nel between Hare Island and the north shore. In the event of the wind 
 and tide falling, anchorage will be found on Hare Island Bank, English 
 
 
TIDES. 
 
 327 
 
 SD. 
 
 r Red Islet and 
 uenay Kiver, is 
 iv is very deep, 
 being nowhere 
 
 depth of water 
 ierefore affords 
 A vessel, how- 
 It, and English 
 le weather that 
 
 ich renders this 
 Channel a ves- 
 ly time when it 
 nt of its falling 
 , and might be 
 )orhoo<l of Red 
 North Channel 
 ed slioals, but 
 channel should 
 
 streams down 
 >f 5 or 6 knots, 
 
 in NE. gales, 
 litficalt to dis- 
 
 ler it desirable 
 ]g directions: 
 islet, and then 
 slet about the 
 . mag.). Take 
 f those islands 
 ihes (depth, 7J 
 r be less water 
 d Islet in line 
 gainst the ebb 
 harts, in pass- 
 keep them so, 
 ithouse is well 
 id white buoy 
 e of the chau- 
 nt of the wind 
 Bank, English 
 
 Bank, Murray Ray, and westward of (loose Cape. For, dircitions for 
 North (Channel from Couilres Island to (Quebec, see page 350. 
 
 Tides. — The principal stream of flood ascends along the northern 
 sijleof the estuary. One part of this stream sets from beh)W Bergeron 
 Coves toward and over the tail of Ui-d Islet Hank, which it curves 
 round to the soutliward, and then i)a88e8 into North (Channel between 
 Red Islet and Hare Island North Reef. At the same time an inferior 
 stream of tlood ascends alony the sonth shore close outside Ra/.ade, 
 Basque, Apjile, and Clreen Islands, nnd inside of them also after the 
 shoals are covered. When these two streams of flood meet the last of 
 the ebb, and afterwards each other, between (Ireen Island and Red 
 Islet, they cause high breaking ripplings, which can be heard iit a 
 great distance on a still night, and which appear like broken water on 
 a shoal. Each of these two streams of Hood is strongest near its own 
 side, and there is consequently little or no flood in mid-channel, particu- 
 larly in neap tides and westerly winds. 
 
 Westward of Cacouna Island the flood in South Channel sets fairly 
 up the river on either side of Barrett Ledges, Middle Shoal, and Middle 
 Bank, but the strongest part of it passes up tlie deep water northward 
 of these shoals, between them and Brandy Pots and Hare Island, and 
 at the rate of 2^ or 3 knots in spring tides. On arriving at Hare Island 
 Bank, a great part of this stream passes into North Channel between 
 that bank and Hare Island, the rest over the tail of the bank into 
 South Channel. The Hood sets fairly up South Channel, and between 
 Pilgrim Islands and Hare Island Bank, but becomes very weak above 
 them, especially in neap tides, until abreast Orignaux Point, whence 
 it gradually increases in strength, beipg aided by a branch of the 
 northern stream from between English and Hare Island Banks, until 
 it attains its fiill rate of 7^ knots in South Traverse. 
 
 To return again to the principal stream of flood, another part of it 
 passes between Bed Islet Bank and the shoals off the Saguenay, while 
 a third part ascends that river 70 miles to the rapids. When the flood 
 first makes, it meets the ebb down the channel northward of Hare 
 Island and causes a tremendous rippling, extending from Lark Reef to 
 Red Islet. Above that islet the stream of flood, after sweeping round 
 westward past Rocky Bay, pursues a tolerably fair course up North 
 Channel as high as Cape Eagle, oft' which it divides, the southern part 
 proceeding southward of English Bank, on its way to South Traverse, 
 while the northern part passes between English Bank and the north 
 shore up to Goose Gape. 
 
 Off Goose Cape this northern part of the stream of flood again 
 divides; one, the lesser and weaker part, passing southward of Coudres 
 Island, throws oft" at the first of the tide branches to the southward, 
 which pass over the western part of English Bank, on either side of 
 Middle Ground, and between the latter and the shoals eastward of the 
 reefs oft' Seal Islands, into South Channel. This seems to arise from the 
 
 d#«tiv.$«»iic>^<i.B:^s«a«&«tttwi^M 
 
 ^yi&ri^fSfi^iAti- 
 
ST. LAWRENCE RIVEB. 
 
 flood being earlier iu North than iti Bonth Channel, and hence the first 
 of the Hood comes from the north at South TraverHe, and sets for about 
 one hour uu St. Anne and St. Itoch Shoaln. Tlie other and principal 
 part passes between Coudres Island and the north shore, where it 
 attains the rate of 5 knots in spring tides. 
 
 Little need be added respecting the ebb stream beyond what has 
 already been said in the course of this chapter. It may, however, be 
 remarked, generally, that the direction of the ebb stream is always 
 nearly the contrary to that of the Hood, excepting between lied Islet 
 and Green Island and eastward of the former. The principal part of 
 the ebb down North Channel, being tnrned to the SE. by Lark Reef, 
 comes through between Hare Island iNorth Keef and Ued Islet, setting 
 over toward the east end of Green Island at the rate of r> or 6 knots in 
 spring tides. The ebb out of Sagnenay River is equally strong, and 
 sets over toward the east end of Red Islet Bank, whence, curving to 
 the eastward, it unites with the St. Lawrence ebb, from which it can 
 be readily distinguished by the dark color of its water, and both 
 together set down the estuary, as has been explained in other parts of 
 these directions. 
 
 It may be useful to remark here that the Hood and ebb are less un- 
 equal in duration in North than in South Channel, and that in both 
 channels the streams of flood and ebb upoh an average continue three- 
 fourths and one hour, respectively, after it is high and low water by 
 the shore. 
 
 The times of the high and low water by the shore do not seem to be 
 much affected by winds; but the amount of the rise and fall of the 
 tides and the duration of the streams are considerably affected by 
 strong winds; nevertheless, as an approximation near enough for 
 practical purposes, we may state the^ when the stream of flood makes 
 in mid-channel the tide has risen by the shore, at Brandy Pots 1^ fbet 
 imd at South Traverse 2^ feet; and also that when the stream of ebb 
 tnakes, the tide has fallen about 2 feet by ttie shore. But as it is of 
 I:"portauce to know the proportional amount of the rise and fall of the 
 tides for any part of their whole duration, when a large vessel is to be 
 taken over certain shallow parts of the river above South Traverse^ 
 this subject will be noticed again in the following chapter. 
 
 
hetice the first 
 1(1 setH for about 
 r and princip»l 
 shore, where it 
 
 lyond what has 
 iy, however, be 
 ream is always 
 ween UeA Islet 
 riiicipal part of 
 . by Lark Keef, 
 sd Islet, setting 
 r> or 6 knots in 
 illy strong, and 
 juce, curving to 
 )m which it can 
 ater, and both 
 n other parts of 
 
 )bb are less un- 
 
 ud that in both 
 
 continue three> 
 
 id low water by 
 
 ) not seem to be 
 and fall of thd 
 bly affected by 
 Bar enough for 
 1 of flood makes 
 idy Pots li ftset 
 le stream of ebb 
 But as it is of 
 i and fall of the 
 e vessel is to be 
 )onth Traverse) 
 ter. 
 
 — ^ 
 
 1 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 8T. LAWRENC'K RIVER, SOUTH, MIDDLE, AND NORTH CHANNELS, TO 
 
 QUEBEC. 
 
 QUEBBO. 
 (rt.O. Chart No. 1112.) 
 
 Wote.— The vessel has now arrived at the most difficult part of the 
 navigation of the St. Lawrence, where the river becomes divided into 
 three channels by shoals and islands. The eaHtern entranccH of all 
 three of these channels are rendered more or less difficult, either by 
 their narrowness, the want of good anchorage in them, or by the 
 strength of the tides. 
 
 South Channel lies along the southern shore, and between it and 
 the Mhoals and islands occupying the central part of the river from the 
 South Traverse to Quebec. This channel is the one generally used; it 
 is buoyed, and is preferable to the others for the general purposes of 
 navigation, having excellent anchorage and moderate tides in every 
 part, excepting for a few miles in the Traverse. The channel between 
 Beaujeu Bank aad Crane Island has also been buoyed for the use of 
 large vessels, for not more than 17 feet at low water can be carried 
 through eastward of that bank, where nearly all vessels used formerly 
 to pass. 
 
 Middle Channel lies between the shoals and islands which form the 
 western side of the South Channel and the long line of shoals and reefs 
 which extend froia Coudres Island to Beaux Island. In one part of it, 
 near the northeastern entrance of the Middle Traverse, there are not 
 more than 2J fathoms at low water. Having passed this shallow part, 
 there is both room and water enough for vessels of large draft, until 
 they arrive at the group of islands between Crane Island and Orleans 
 Island, where the Middle Channel communicates with South Channel 
 by various narrow passages between the islands. There is plenty of 
 water in most of these passages at all times, but the streams seft strongly 
 through them and they are too intricate and difficult for general navi- 
 gation. The other and better channels will always be preferred for 
 general use; nevertheless, Middle Channel ought to be known to the 
 pilots in common with every other channel in the river. 
 
 North Channel stretches along the high northern shore of the river, 
 inside Coudres Island, and of the line of shoals which extend from the 
 latter to Neptune Eock and Burnt Cape Ledge, and from thence through 
 North Traverse between the shoals which reach from Burnt Cape Ledge 
 
 329 
 
 I 
 1 
 
 i(#i«S»«fi-«SPSjl**.«*'^tt««*»#^«lvW'* 
 
 If ^r"ii' n it T . nr i ir ia. iW rT"iin -i ■"ii<it ^ i^rr"ii~ -i 
 
i 
 
 330 
 
 8T. LAWRENCE KIVEB. 
 
 H 
 
 nearly to TJeanx Island, aiul tluwo which Vw otV tho NE.end of Orleans 
 Island. From North Traverse this channel continnes between Keaux 
 and Madame Islands on the one side and Orleans Island on the other 
 till it unites with South Channel opposite St. Vallier. 
 
 ThiH channel was formerly in general use, but it is now little known 
 to the nuMority of the pilots. It is broader than South Channel, but 
 the streams are nnu-h stronger, and the Narrows at its southwestern 
 end have a depth of only 24 feet at low water ; while, with the ex(;eption 
 of the contracted passage westward of Bea^jeu Bank, there are not less 
 than U8 feet in South Channel. 
 
 Starting with the beginning of a fair tide, a steamer may, however, 
 gain one hour in the passage from Green Island to Quebec by taking 
 North rather than South Channel. 
 
 The anch(.rage generally in North Channel is not good, the bottom 
 being ftml from St. Paul liay southward to Cape Maillard, also because 
 of the strength of the tidal streams. Vessels may, however, anchor on 
 the western edge of the bank, eastward of this channel, in a depth of 
 about 10 fathoms, 
 
 Betw«Hni Coudres Island and the northern shore of the river there is 
 anch(»iuge only in Prairie and St. Paul Bays, both of which afford 
 security under all conditions of wind and weather, but with northerly 
 winds heavy squalls sweep down from the north shore hills. 
 
 Above Coudres Island there is a fine straight channel from IJ to 3J 
 miles wide, entirely free from danger. The water is not incimveniently 
 deep, nowhere exceeding 18 fathoms at low water in mid-channel. It 
 is generally about 11 or 12 fathoms, shoaling toward the sides of the 
 channel, so as to afford good anchorage out of the strength of the tides. 
 There is, however, much more tide and more sea in this long and open 
 reach than in the corresponding parts of Simth Channel; and in the fall 
 of the year the NW. squalls off the mountains are heavy and freciuent. 
 Altogether, South Channel is preferable for the general purposes of 
 navigation, yet North Channel is good, and frequently remains free 
 from ice some time after South Channel becomes unnavigable in the 
 fall of the year. 
 
 Orleans Channel has a good passage for small vessels, but is not 
 available for those of large draft. It is marked by red buoys on the 
 northern side and by black buoys on the southern side. 
 
 SOUTH CHANNEL, THROUGH THE BOUTH TBAVKUSE TO CKANE 
 
 ISLAND. 
 
 (H. O. Charts Noa. 1491 and 1492.) ^ 
 
 South Channel.— The southern shore of the St. Lawrence Elver, Irom 
 St. Roch Point to St. Thomas, is low and composed of slate; inland it 
 rises gradually in a series of ridges to a long wooded range, which is 4 J 
 miles from the river, and attains an elevation of 1.220 feet. The houses 
 are almost continuous on this shore, with villages near the churches. 
 
 i'-4 
 
HOUIH rFfANNKl,. 
 
 331 
 
 E.end uf Orleans 
 'H between Koimx 
 land on the other 
 
 now little known 
 mtli Channel, but 
 
 its southwestern 
 tritli the ex(!fpti(m 
 , there are not less 
 
 ler may, however, 
 [Quebec by taking 
 
 good, the bottom 
 Hard, also because 
 owever, anchor on 
 nel, in a depth of 
 
 f the river there is 
 h of which afford 
 )nt with northerly 
 ire hills. 
 
 nnel from 1^ to 2J 
 not incimveniently 
 ri mid-channel. It 
 (1 the sides of the 
 reiigth of the tides, 
 this long and open 
 iiel; and in the fall 
 eavy and freciuent. 
 eneral purposes of 
 ently remains free 
 [innavigable in the 
 
 vessels, but is not 
 red buoys on the 
 ide. 
 
 BUSE TO OKANE 
 
 iwrence River, ti'om 
 [of slate; inland it 
 I range, which is 4J 
 feet. The houses 
 near the churches. 
 
 Snpplii'H in small ciuantitics nmy generally be obtained at the villages, 
 with tlic exception of (umi. 
 
 Churches.— The churclies at St. Jean, Ht. lOugene, St. Ignace, St. 
 ^Thomas, an<l Berthier have each one 8i>ire; those at St. Koch and 
 L'Islet have each two spires. ! 
 
 Pieri.— The pier at St. .Jean has a depth of 3 feet at low water at its 
 outer end; at LTslet the i)ier is l,liOO feet long, with a depth of 7 feet 
 at low water close to its outer end; a wooden frame beacon, painted 
 black, stands on the extremity of this pier. A small i)ier has been 
 erected at Anso lY Giles, .'JJ miles southwestward from I.' Islet, and 
 another 1,^ miles southwestward of Cape St. Ignace, but both dry at 
 about half tide. There is also a wharf on ;Iie eastern side oi" Cape St. 
 Ignace, but it can only be approached at or near higii v. iter. 
 
 Railway and Telegraph.— St. Jean Port .loli, L'klot, St, Ignace, 
 and St. Thomas are connected with Quebec and Halifax by the Inter- 
 colonial railway, which runs along the right bank of lae St. L utrrence 
 about one mile inland from these villages. The railway sttii ns are 
 also connected with all parts of Canada and the United States by 
 telegraph. 
 
 Shoals.- The northern edge of the shoal grouiu oi" St. Jean Port 
 Joli is only .} mile southeastward of Channel Patch. 
 
 Two shoals, with depths of 4 and 7 feet over them, reported to have 
 been formed since L'Islet Pier was built, lie in the line of that pier, 
 300 aiid COO yards respectively from its outer end. Other shoals, with 
 depths of (> feet, lie SW. of the extremity of L'Islet Pier. 
 
 Trois Saumons River, nearly i miles southwestward of St. Jean 
 Port Joli, has a large sawmill near its mouth. This river, and also the 
 stream at Port Joli, one mile northeastward, will admit small craft at 
 about half tide. 
 
 L'Islet — A conspicuous cross is erected on a cliff, 69 feet high, one 
 mile northeastward of L'Islet church. 
 
 The telegraph and signal station at L '.t is 300 yards northeastward 
 of the church and close westward oi l./c convent, which is a square 
 stone building surmounted by a turret. 
 
 St. Ignace.— The church is OJ miles southwestward from L'Islet, and 
 nearly f mile southeastward of Lape St. Ignace, which is a conical 
 rocky mound, 52 feet high, o- ered with small bushes. 
 
 St Thomas. — Two rivers unite and discharge their waters here. Bras 
 St. Nicholas flowing from the eastward, and Rivifere du Sud from the 
 southward. The combined streams fall, in a cascade about 30 I'oet high, 
 to a small bight, ^ mile eastward of the church. A sawmill is in opera- 
 tion on the eastern side of the falls. St, Thomas church is on the left 
 bank of Riviere du Sud, oj miles southwestward from St. Ignace. 
 
 The channel from St. Thomas to the St. Lawrence River trends north- 
 easterly in one bend, and is generally marked by cask buoys. It nearly 
 dries at low water. 
 
 The high-water bank near St. Thomas has receded considerably 
 
■)/ 
 
 332 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 since the survey of 1827, about 600 feet apparently having bein waslied 
 away, and each year more is brolcen away by ice and «ea. The low- 
 water litte, however, is nearly the same as at that date, except that 
 bowlders are now visible, at low water, beyond the northeastern ex- 
 treme of St. Thomas Bank. 
 
 Light. — From it, mast 25 feet high^ with a brown shM at the base, 
 built on the outet end of the Government pier, at the west etitrah(ie 
 point of Eivi^re dti Sttd is exhibited, at all elevation of 30 fbet, a flied 
 light showing red in the channel to tlie river and white ih all other 
 directions seaward, that should be visible 6 miles. 
 
 St Roch Shoals join those of St. Anne and dontinnd westward in 
 South Bank, which extends a considerable distance from the shore frdm 
 St. Boch to St. Thomas. South Traverse lightvessels in line, bearing 
 S. 27° W. (S. 46° W. mag.), lead westward of these shoals. 
 
 Buoys. — A buoy, painted biack, is moored in 28 feet water, 2^ miles 
 N, 46° E. (2f. 05° B. mag.) from liower Traverse lightvessel, close west- 
 ward of a shoal with 16 feet water on it lying oil" the northwestern 
 angle of St. Roch Shoals, and the black buoy marking the SW. angle 
 of these shoals is now moored close westward of a rock with 24 feet 
 water over it, with St. Roch church bearing N. 78° B. (S. 83° E. mag.) 
 and St. Jean Port Joli church S. 17° B. (S. 2° W. mag.). 
 
 Lights. — Lower Traverse lightvessel, with two masts, is moored in 
 24 feet water at the NB. angle of the northernmost of St. Koch Slioals. 
 It is painted red, with the words Lower Traverse in white letters on the 
 sides. From the foremast a fixed white light is shown at an elevation 
 of 25 feet, and from the mainmast a fixed white light at 31 feet, also a 
 fixed red light from a stay between the two at 49 feet, respectively, 
 above the water. " 
 
 These lights should be seen 9 miles. 
 
 Fog SigttaL— A whistle is sounded for twelve seconds 6f every min- 
 ute in thick weather, fogs, or snowstorms. 
 
 Ill c^se the vessel should be out of position the ball at the mainmast- 
 head will be taken down and one White light only will be shown at 
 night. 
 
 Upper Traverse lightvessel has two masts and is moored in 25 feet 
 Water ofi" the iiorthernmost of St. Roch Shoals^ It is painted red, With 
 the words Upper Traverse in white letters Od each side^ From each 
 of the mastheads is exhibited a fixed white light at elevations of 25 
 and 31 feet, l^eSpectitely, which should be seen 6 miles. 
 
 Should this vessel be ottt of positioii, the light on the foremai^t only 
 will be shdWu at night, and iu day the ball at the foremasthead Will be 
 taken down. 
 
 Fog Signal. — A bell is sounded in thick weather, fogs, or snowstorms. 
 
 Biioy. — A black buoy is moored, in 24 feet water, between the light- 
 Vessels and NW. of St. Roch Shoals at 1,100 yards from Lower Tra- 
 verse lightvessel, with the two beacons near the church in line. 
 
 
SOUTH CHANNEL. 
 
 333 
 
 Eiving betin washed 
 md «ea. The low- 
 date, except that 
 > northeastern ex- 
 
 shM at the base, 
 
 the west eutrahce 
 
 I of 30 fleet, a flied 
 
 white in all other 
 
 tinn6 Westward in 
 'om the shore frdm 
 )ls in line, bearing 
 ihbals. 
 
 )et water, 2^ miles 
 fcvessel, close west- 
 ' the northwestern 
 ng the SW. angle 
 i rock with 24 feet 
 B. (S. 83° E. mag.) 
 
 tg-)- 
 
 lasts, is moored in 
 if St. Koch Shoals, 
 yhite letters on the 
 vn at an elevation 
 it at 31 feet, also a 
 » feet, respectively, 
 
 londs of every mln- 
 
 11 at the mainmast- 
 y will be shown at 
 
 s moored in 25 feet 
 
 [s painted red. With 
 
 1 side^ From each 
 
 at elevations of 25 
 
 [es. 
 
 I the foremast only 
 
 remasthead Will b($ 
 
 9gg, or snowstorms, 
 between the light- 
 is from Lower Tra- 
 irch in line. 
 
 South Traverse is a passage ^ mile wide, between St. Kocli Shoals, 
 on the eatiterii side of which are moored the liglitvessels and buoy. 
 
 The tidal streams run through the channel with great velocity, attain- 
 ing 8 knots an hour in spring tides with the ebb and 7^ knots with the 
 flood. 
 
 Middle Q-round forms the NW. side of this channel and is marked 
 by three red buoys. 
 
 Buoys. — The northeasternmost is an intermittent light buoy in 31 
 feet, the middle a can buoy in 19 feet, close westward of Lower Traverse 
 lightvessel, and the southwesternmost a can buoy in 28 feet northwest- 
 ward of Upper Traverse lightvessel, and with the western beacons at 
 St. Jtoch in line. 
 
 With strong winds the two southwestern buoys are often difBcult to 
 distinguish excej)t by the ripple near them, as they are nearly dragged 
 under %vater by the velocity of the stream. 
 
 Channel Patch, marked by a bell and light buoy checkered black 
 and white, and showing an intermittent white gas light, the period of 
 occnltation being about six seconds, lies directly in the way of vessels; 
 from the patch. Stone Pillar bears S. 35° W. (S. 54° W. mag.) 2^ miles 
 nearly, witli its north extreme just shutting in the highest part of 
 Goose Island Eeef, and a sugarloaf-shaped beacon near St. Jean Port 
 Joli church is just opened eastward of the church, bearing S. 60° E. 
 (S. 41° E. mag.). This buoy alters its position about 200 yards with the 
 tides, and is frequently adrift. The least depth that could be found on 
 Channel Patch in 1886 was 21 feet, although three examinations were 
 made of the locality at slack water ; probably a bowlder has been carried 
 away frpm the summit, as the depth recorded in 1827 was only 18 feet. 
 
 Several shoals with depths of 15 to 18 feet over them lie between 
 Stone Pillar and Channel Patch. They may all be avoided by keeping 
 the highest part of Goose Island Reef just open of Stone Pillar, bearing 
 S. 38° W. (S. 57° W. mag.). This mark must only be kept on while a 
 vessel is southward and westward of Channel Patch. 
 
 Yessels should not proceed northward of Channel Patch, several 
 shoals having been found between it and Stone Pillar. 
 
 Seal Islands consist of a long reef of slate, which is covered at high 
 water, with the exception of three islets, each of which is 6 feet above 
 high water. There are three houses on the easternmost islet, with a 
 cross and two high bushes near them ; on the westernmost islet a con- 
 spicuous spruce tree is surrounded by low bushes. > 
 
 The Pillars are two small and steep islets of graywacke, named 
 Wood Pillar and Stone Pillar. 
 
 The former is 600 yards long and 81 feet above high water. The 
 beacon on this islet is not painted, and being partially obscured by 
 trees, can only be seen from a short distance. A shoal extends from 
 the NE. point of Goose Island to Wood Pillar, and continues 2J miles 
 farther NE. 
 
 ; 
 
 ■■■■njutj.T=; --^.':'i'' 
 
884 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 ♦ 
 I. », jf 
 
 stone PUlar lies U miles eastwai d of Wood Pillar, and is quite bare. 
 Shoals with depths from 2^ to 3^ fathoms water on them extend in a 
 line from Stone Pillar to Channel Patch, and this passage should not 
 be attempted. Middle Rock, between the pillars, dries 17 feet at low 
 water', and is joined to Wood Pillar by a shoal. , . -i^ 
 
 LiEHt-The lighthouse erected upon Stone Pillar is a circular build- 
 ing of gray stone, 52 feet high, and stands about 100 yards from its 
 south point. It exhibits, at an elevation of 83 feet, a revolving white 
 licht every half minute, and should be visible 14 miles. 
 
 Algernon or South Rock is steepto on all sides but the northeast- 
 ern from which shoal water extends 300 yards to a depth of 18 feet, 
 r 'oik with a depth of 18 feet over it, lies N. 34° E. (N 53o E. mag.) 
 700 yards, and a shoal with 26 feet water, K 37° E. (N. 56° E. mag.) 3 
 nile! respectively, from South Kock. The highest Part of Goose 
 Island Reef just open of South Rock lighthouse, bearing S. 43° W. 
 rs G20 W. mag.) leads southward of these shoals, and the jhole of 
 Lne Island well open of Goose Island Reef, bearing S. 47° W (S. 66o 
 W. mag.) loads southward of South Rock, and of the shoals between it 
 
 and Goose Island Reef. r ,• i,i.u .,o« 
 
 Lieht-Ou Algernon or South Rock is a square, white lighthouse, 
 32 feet high, exhibiting, at an elevation of 36 feet, a Axed white light, 
 which should be visible 6 miles. . 
 
 Qoose Island Reef. 2 miles southwestward of Stone Pillar, consists 
 • of a ledge of rock, 1% miles in length, trending with tbe direction of the 
 river Several small heads are visible at all times of tide. The highest 
 mrt a rugged conical mound 29 feet high, is near the southwestern 
 extreme of the reef, and is occasionally surmounted by a beacon An 
 isolated rock, which dries 2 feet at low water lies nearly J mile N 38o 
 E (1^ 570 E. mag.) from the NE. extreme of Goose Island Reef. There 
 a^e five shoal spots between Stone Pillar and Goose Inland R^M^ith 
 deuths of 16, 11, 12, 13, and 18 feet on them, and bearing S. 49o W. (8. 
 S W.l^Uistant one mile; S. 52° W. (S. 71° W. mag^),l* mUes; 
 S 40O W. (S. 590 W. mag.), 1.% miles; S. 38° W. (S. 57° W. mag.), IJ 
 niiles and S 32° W. (S. 51° W. mag.), distant H miles, respectively, 
 from Stone Pillar lighthouse. Several small detached rocks he off the 
 southeastern side ot Goose Island Reel, but they do not extend more 
 fhm 200 yards from it. A rock with a depth ot 8 feet is midway between 
 the southwestern extreme of Goose Island Reef and Goose Island. 
 
 A long spit- with shoals on it varying in depth firom 9 to 11 feet, 
 extends for nearly H miles from the southwestern extreme of Goose 
 Islaud Reef. Stone Pillar lighthouse, open southward of the highest 
 part of that reef, bearing N. 38° E. (N. 57° E "^^g'^'^^f^^.^f ^^/.^.^f, 
 ward of this spit, and the deepest water m thechanne will be found 
 by passing about 8U0 yards southeastward of Goose Island Reef and 
 
 ^^aow'e Island is composed of wooded hilly ground, divided by a 
 
# 
 
 id is quite bare. 
 8in extend in a 
 tage should uot 
 s 17 feet at low 
 
 a circular build- 
 I yards from its 
 revolviug white 
 
 it the northeast- 
 iepth of 18 feet. 
 [N. 53° B. mag.) 
 r. 56° E. reag.) k 
 part of Goose 
 aring S. 43° W. 
 id the whole of 
 S. 47° W. (S. 66° 
 ihoals between it 
 
 rhite lighthouse, 
 Ixed white light, 
 
 le Pillar, consists 
 e direction of the 
 ide. The highest 
 the southwestern 
 )y a beacon. An 
 irly J mile N. 38° 
 land Reef. There 
 Island Reef, with 
 ring S. 49° W. (S. 
 '. raag.),li miles; 
 570 W. mag.), IJ 
 liles, respectively, 
 sd rocks lie off the 
 > not extend more 
 is midway between 
 Goose Island, 
 from 9 to 11 feet, 
 extreme of Goose 
 ird of the highest 
 ), leads close east- 
 nnel will be found 
 B Island Reef and 
 
 und, divided by a 
 
 MHMH 
 
 SOUTH CHANNEL. 
 
 335 
 
 valley into north and south ranges. Near the southwestern extreme 
 are two round summits, elevated 203 feet above high water. A chain 
 of hillocks that from a distance appear like islands, and on wliich are 
 several conspicuous houses, with barns near, extends soutliw^stward 
 from the northern range. From an elevation of 168 feet tlie northern 
 range falls in clifty banks, and at its northeastern extreme is a large 
 white barn, which is very conspicuous from all northerly directions. A 
 large sugarloaf beacon, painted red, stands on a small detached islet 
 close southward of the northeastern extreme of Goose Island. 
 
 The meadows of Goose Island, estending 4J miles southwestward 
 from its S W". extreme, connect it with Crane Island. The meadows are 
 only just aliove high water of ordinary spring tides and are intersected 
 by numerous streams, that have cut deep channels in the mud and are 
 impassable between half flood and hah' ebb. After the harvest the 
 meadows are covered with haystacks, which, from a distance, resemble 
 small houses and are erected on framework to prevent the loss that 
 would otherwise be occasioned by exceptionally high tides. 
 
 Several rocks lie o£f the southeastern shore of Goose Island, all of 
 which cover at high water, except Rocher aux Grelons (formerly mis- 
 called Ghapei Rock), which is 4 feet above high water and on the outer 
 edge of thjB shore that dries at low water, and Hospital Rock, which 
 is 10 feet high. Chapel Rock is on the meadows, and is named from a 
 church which formerly stood there, the foundations of which are still 
 to be seen. 
 
 Beacon. — A wooden pyramidal beacon, painted white, and about 30 
 fe^t high, stands on the southern shore of Goose Island meadows at a 
 little more than 2 miles southwestward of Hospital Rock. 
 
 Dunscombe Rock, 1,700 yards S. by E. from Hospital Rock, has 
 14 feet least water, with 5 fathoms close to. From the rock Mount 
 Tourmente appears in line over summit of Onion Island, bearing 3. 83° 
 "W. (N. 78'^ W. mag.), and the north side of Wood Pillar touching the 
 south side of Goose Island. 
 
 Crane Island rises to an elevation of 132 feet, and is generally flat 
 in outline. The lower part of the land is cultivated, but the summit 
 and southwestern slope are wooded. Mac]>herson (now Le Moine) 
 house and the barns near are conspicuous objects at the northeastern 
 extreme of the island, and numerous beacons are erected on the south- 
 eastern shore. On the northwestern side there is an almost continuous 
 line of houses, with a cliurch built of bricks and surmounted by a spire 
 in the middle of them. This church can rarely be seen from South 
 Channel. 
 
 Light — On the south side of Crane Island, at the end of a pier, about 
 ItV miles eastward of Pointe aux Pins, the southwestern extreme, is 
 an octagonal lighthou&e, 48 feet high, ])ainted white, which exhibits, 
 at an elevation of 48 feet, an intermittent white light, showing bright 
 
 V0^f0^t^f 
 
in 
 
 IM 
 
 11 !W' 
 
 ! : f 
 If «t 
 
 336 
 
 ST. LAWEENCE RIVES. 
 
 for tweuty-six seconds and boiug obscured for four seconds in every 
 half minute, visible 12 miles. 
 
 Prohibited Anchorage. — On Crane Island, about f mile SVV. of 
 Le Moiae house, are two white sugarloaf beacons, and two wliite 
 sugarloaf beacons are situated about 4 uiile NE. of the same house. 
 These mark a space within which no ships are allowed to anchor, as the 
 entrances to the channels north and south of Beaujeu Bank are here 
 much contracted. Between these beacons two diamond- shaped bea- 
 cons have been erected, which in hue led to the white light buoy at the 
 aouthwesteru end of the Beaiyeu Bank. 
 
 Beaujeu Baiik is a narrow shoal of saud and gravel over slate, and 
 has not more than 10 feet at low water over some parts of it. Its SW. 
 end approaches to within f mile of Grape Island. 
 
 Light Buoys. — The northeastern extreme of Beavyeu Bank is marked 
 by a light buoy painted red and black in horizontal stripes, apd show- 
 ing a pink light, moored with L'fslet church, bearing N. 70° ^. (N, 8y=> 
 E. mag.), distant 4 miles, and St. Iguace ehurch, S. 4° E. (S.* 15° W, 
 ipag.), and the southwestern extreme by a white pillar buoy surmounted 
 by a bell and light showing an intermittent light, moored with Crane 
 Island lighthouse, bearing S. 47° W. (S. 66° W. mag.), distant 2 miles. 
 
 Buoys. — A buoy paipted red is moored in 24 feet on the northwestern 
 side of Beaiyeu Channel, nearly a mile south westward of t ie* light buoy 
 ^t the northeasterii extreme of Beaujevi Bank ; and another buoy painted 
 red is moored in the same depth 200 yards westward of the light luoy 
 ^t the southwestern extreme of th^it bi^nk, and on the western side of 
 the n$vrrow channel westward of Bet^ujeu Bank, 
 
 Channel S:^. of Beaiyeu Bank.— The 4^pth in this channel is irreg- 
 ular, varyiiig from £» fathoms to 17 feet, p.nd there is oue rocky patch 
 of 17 feet in the waiy, and di^cult to avqid, so that the latter depth is 
 all that could be carried through there without buoys at low spring 
 tides unless the vessel were conducted by an unusually skillful pilot, 
 in which case 3^ fathoms might be reckoned upon. The channel is ^ to 
 I mile wide. 
 
 Beatgeu Channel, NW. of Beaiyeu Bank, is 4 to ^ mile wide, an4 
 has from 4^ to 9 fathomis water, the shoalest and narrowest part being 
 near the SW. end of the bank. 
 
 Farther southwestward the SE. side of Crane Island is so bold that 
 it may be approached to the distance of 400 yards. A buoy, painted 
 black, marks a shoal with a depth of IG feet on the southern side of 
 the channel abreast Crane Island lighthouse. Two sugarloaf-shaped 
 beacons at the SW. end of Crane Island are used as a cross mark tu 
 lay this buoy. 
 
 St. 71^oniaB Bank is that part of South Bank which extends rather 
 more than 2 miles ofl' shore at the village of St. Thomas. It consists 
 of sand, mud, and stones, and is dry at low water nearly to its northern 
 edge, which is very steep. The appareu t northern extreme of the range 
 
ieconds iu every 
 
 ; § mile SVV. of 
 aud two white 
 the same house, 
 to auehor, as the 
 I Bank are here 
 ond- shaped bea- 
 iight buoy at the 
 
 )1 over slate, and 
 sofit. ItaSW. 
 
 I Bank is marked 
 iripes, apd show- 
 !f . TOO js. (X. gijo 
 
 40 E. (s: 150 w. 
 
 )i|oy surmounted 
 ored with Crane 
 distant 2 miles, 
 the northwestern 
 of tie light buoy 
 Iter bupy painted 
 )f the light luoy 
 B western side of 
 
 I channel is irreg- 
 one rocky patch 
 e latter depth is 
 ys at low spring 
 Uy skillful pilot, 
 iie channel is ^ to 
 
 ^ mile wide, and 
 Dwest part being 
 
 d is so bold that 
 A buoy, painted 
 southern side of 
 sugarloaf-shaped 
 1 a cross mark to 
 
 h extends rather 
 nas. It consists 
 ly to its northern 
 •erne of the range 
 
 SOUTH CHANNEL. 
 
 337 
 
 of liilla on the southoiii shore, Just oi)»'ii soutliwiird of Onmo. Island 
 lightliouse bearing, ^\ ^J-^ ].:. , x. 70° IC. iiiajj;-.), will lead northwestward 
 of «t. 1'homas I'.ank in the ileepest water. A black I)iioy is moored on 
 the NVV. extren-e of the hank, in ;{ fathoms, fn.m wliich Haystack 
 Island appears in line with the SW. extreme of Crane Island: and the 
 red su-iarloaf beacon and the white diamond beacon on the south side 
 of Crane Island are also in line. 
 
 Tides.— The rise and i'all of the tide, for every hour after h)w and 
 high wiiter, will be seen in the table at paf-e IWJ, and from it tlie depth 
 of water at any time, over any shallow iiai t of the river, may easily be 
 deduced. Moreover, large ships should not run through Soutli Traverse 
 at night, if the weather be bad and so dark that the buoys and the land 
 can not be seen; for, although the bearings of the light's and the lead 
 might enable a skillful and exwrienced pilot to take sn<h ships safely 
 through on the last half of the streani of Ihtod, yet it would be a heavy 
 charge and attended with some risk. It is desirable for vessels in gen- 
 oral coming up the river, even with a fair wind, to pass South Traverse 
 .m the flood tide; for the ebb is so strong between the buoys that little 
 progress will be made against it, even with a strong breeze. 
 
 Directions for South Traverse.— Ca])e Diablc should be kept open 
 of Orignaux Point lighthouse bearing N. 06° E. (N. 75° E. mag.) until 
 (l(e lightvessels come in line bearing S. L'8o W, (S. 47° W. mag.), when 
 they may be steered for. The lirst of the Hood will set to the southward, 
 toward St. Koch Shoals, and the ebb in the contrary direction ; the mari- 
 ner must therefore be guided by the bearing of the lightvessel, but 
 more especially by the soundings in the (^hart. 
 
 Keep the southeastern side oi;' r':o cliauuel aboard, l)ut do not go into 
 less than from 7 to 10 fatlioms water according to the time of tide, until 
 up to Lower Traverse lightvessel, lest the shi)) get into the shallow inlet 
 in St. Koch Shoals, which runs in southward of the lightvessel. In 
 pasping the lightvessel, steer S. 41° W. (S. 00° W. mag.), leaving her 
 to the southward and at a short distance. Kun past her about J mile, 
 and then steer S. I'So yy. (S. 17° W. mag.) for 2i miles, or as may be 
 requisite from wind and tide, to pass about 300 yards northwestward 
 of Upper Traverse lightvessel— leaving the three red buoys of the 
 Middle Cround on the starboard hand— whence the course to Stone 
 Pillar is S. 24° W. (S. 43° W. mag.). But here, too, the course alone 
 must not be trusted, for there is no calculating exactly the set of the 
 tides. Generally, a vessel will have to steer a little to the southward 
 of S. 240 W. (S. 43-^ W. mag.) with the flood-stream, to keep along the 
 edge of South Dank, and with tlie ebb a little to the westward; but the 
 lead, buoys, and lightvessels are the only sure guides. 
 
 Having passed Upper Traverse lightvessel, take now «'» fathoms at 
 low water, or a depth corresponding to it at other times of the tide, as 
 a guide along the edge of South Bank, kee[)i)ig Lower Traverse light- 
 vessel and Upjier Traverse lightvessel iu line, bearing N. 38° E. (N. 47° 
 llrtl 22 ' 
 
338 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 E. mag.) until past the black buoy on the SW. point of St. Roch Shoals, 
 and taking care not to cross to the northwestward of the line of deep 
 water (9 to 13 fathoms) which extends southwestward from the Narrows 
 all through South Traverse. The patches off St. Jean Port Joli church 
 will be avoided by passing 500 yards northwestward of the black buoy 
 on them, or by not going southeastward into less water than has been 
 directed, if the buoy can not be seen. If the checkered black and white 
 bell and gas light buoy on Channel Patch can be seen, pass 200 yards 
 southeastward of it; if not seen, run along the edge of South Bank in 
 the depth before directed until St. Jean Port Joli church bears S. 40° 
 E. (S. 21° E. mag.); then open the highest part of Goose Island Reef 
 only lust sufficiently to be seen in lino with the south side of Stone Pil- 
 lar bearing S. 38° W. (S. 57° W. mag.), and run upon that loading mark 
 until St. Jean Port Joli church bears S. 56° E. (S. 37° E. mag.), when 
 the vessel will be about 300 yards southward of Channel Psitch, and 
 should sheer again to the southward and follow the edge of South Bank 
 in the same depth as before. After passing South Rock, Crane Island 
 should b*^; brought well open of Goose Island Reef, bearing 8. 47° W. 
 (S. 06° W. mag.) to clear the shoals between them, and the vessel may 
 open that mark gradually so as to pass 700 yards southeastward of 
 Goose Island Reef. 
 
 To pass East of Beai^jeu Bank proceed as follows, remembering 
 that there is not more than 17 feet at low water: As soon as the vessel 
 is 1 J or 2 miles past Goose Island Reef, steer so as to bring Stone Pillar 
 its own breadth open southward of Goose Island Reef, bearing N. 32° E. 
 (N. 51° E. mag.). Run from those marks, steering about S. 32° W. (8. 
 51° W. mag.), or so as to keep them open as just described, and they 
 will lead 400 yards southeastward of the northeastern light buoy of 
 Beaujeu Bank. Continue the same course, and when St. Vallier Point 
 opens southward of Crane Island about a quarter of a point, bearing 
 S. 52° W. (S. 71° W. mag.), haul up for St. Vallier Point, which will 
 lead about 800 yards southward of the southwestern white light buoy of 
 Beaujeu Bank. Then keep away to the southward, and run along the 
 southern shore of Crane Island at the distance of about 600 yards, so 
 as to pass northwestward of the black buoy on the patch lying 1,200 
 yards from Crane Island lighthouse, or in from 7 to 10 fathoms water, 
 according to the time of tide. 
 
 To pass ■Westward of Beavyeu Bank.— When Hospital Rock bears 
 N. 52° W. (N. 33° W. mag.) bring Stone Pillar lighthouse just open 
 southward of the southern extreme of the highest part of Goose Island 
 Reef, bearing N. 38° E. (N. 57° E. mag.), leading between the light 
 buoy at the northeastern end of Beaujeu Bank and the red buoy off 
 Goose Island, also close to the white light buoy marking the southwest- 
 ern end of Beaujeu Bank. Leave the white light buoy on the port 
 hand, bringing the beacon on Goose Island Meadows in line with the 
 middle of La Grosse Montague (the westernmost hill of Goose Island), 
 
 ^4 
 
f St. Roch Shoals, 
 if the Hue of deep 
 from the Narrows 
 a Port Joli church 
 of the black buoy 
 ter than has beeu 
 stl black and white 
 BU, pass 200 yards 
 of South Bank iu 
 liurch bears S. 40° 
 Groose Island Beef 
 
 I side of Stone Pil- 
 that loading mark 
 17° E. mag.), when 
 hannel Psitch, and 
 dge of South Bank 
 lock, Crane Island 
 bearing S. 47° W. 
 md the vessel may 
 
 southeastward of 
 
 lows, remembering 
 soon as the vessel 
 bring Stone Pillar 
 if, bearing N. 32° E. 
 ibout S. 32° W. (8. 
 lescribed, and they 
 item light buoy of 
 m St. Vallier Point 
 of a point, bearing 
 r Point, which will 
 white light buoy of 
 , and run along the 
 ibout 600 yards, so 
 J patch lying 1,200 
 10 fathoms water, 
 
 lospital Rock bears 
 ^hthouse just open 
 art of Goose Island 
 between thie light 
 [id the red buoy off 
 king the southwest- 
 t buoy on the port 
 »W8 in line with the 
 
 II of Goose Island), 
 
 SOUTH CHANNEL. 
 
 339 
 
 bearing N. 8° E. (N. 27° E. mag.), to pass between that buoy and the 
 redb.. y to the southwestward. When Channel Rock is visiblo, the 
 beacon should be its own height eastward of the rock when this leading 
 mark is on. For continuation, see page 363. 
 
 If, after passing the red buoy on the shoal off Goose Island, the upper 
 buoys should not be immediately seen, continue to run from and upon 
 the mark above given, taking care not to open out the south side of 
 Stone Pillar southward of Goose Island Reef, and as soon as the buoys 
 can be seen steer to pass between them, and proceed us already directed. 
 
 At Night, Beauieu Bank must be passed by tlie lead, aided by tlie 
 light buoys, along the edge of South Bank, or southeastern side of the 
 channel, keeping in 3 fathoms at low water or a deptli corresponding 
 to it at other times of the tide, till Crane IsLoiul light bears S. 56o w. 
 (S. 750 W. mag.), when the vessel must be hauled up for the S\V. end 
 of Crane Island. 
 
 Anchorage in South Traverse.— Vessels may anchor off the shoals 
 of St. Anne in 6 fathoms low water up to within a mile or two of the 
 lightvessel. The ground is better, and there is less tide than on the 
 tail of the Middle Ground; but the latter is the better position for 
 weighing with the first of the flood in northerly winds. Vessels do 
 occasionally anchor for a tide, iu fine weather, on the edge of the bank 
 of St. Roch, between the two lightvessels; but this can not be recom- 
 mended, for the ebb tide runs there at the rate of 8 knots, and the 
 ground is not to be depended on; hence, if the anchor once started, it 
 would be difficult to bring up again, and there would be great danger 
 of losing the anchor. Should the wind begin to fail, or the flood be 
 done, it would be better to run down below Lower Traverse lightvessel, 
 if an anchorage 2 or 3 miles above Upper Traverse lightvessel can not 
 be gained. 
 
 Vessels often anchor off the black buoy on the S W. point of St. Roch 
 Shoal in 6 or 7 fathoms in good ground, but the anchorage is not reck- 
 oned very good until arriving above St. Jean church. All along tlie 
 edge of the south bank, from opposite the Pillars to Crane Island, the 
 holding ground is a stiff clay, and so good that it is sometimes difficult 
 to weigh anchor. Off Crane Island, a mile aljove Beaiyeu Bank in 
 6 or 7 fathoms at low water, there is excellent anchorage iu westerly 
 winds; and under the SW. end of the island, in 5 fathoms, there is 
 equally good anchorage with the winds from eastward. Vessels bound 
 down, and meeting a strong easterly wind anjrwhere above the light- 
 vessel, had better run back to the anchorage. 
 
 Tides.— The flood begins much earlier in the North Channel than in 
 the South, and the first of the stream therefore comes from the north- 
 ward, setting at first about south upon the shoals of St. Anne and St. 
 Roch, but inclining gradually more to the westward, until at a quarter- 
 flood it sets fair to the SW. by S. between the buoys of South 
 Traverse. After half-flood it sets SW., and toward the end of the tide 
 
 a^ilfejA^I^!** 
 
 ■«/i» ytr^4Jilr T-M^iWi-'.— 
 
 J^i,^,»Ji;>^*;fc,-^W»;^; 
 
 b.-i?-:iJiirWa5^ji*>.«l 
 
340 
 
 BT. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 
 1(1 Sj'- 
 
 still more to the wostwanl; peibiips because, tlio time of l-'s'i Ta+«r 
 beiufj somewhat earlier in the North Channel, the water huH begun to 
 fall before the tlootl has (juito ceased in the south. 
 
 The ebb stream nets nearly in the contrary direction to the flood, at> 
 just stated, the first of the ebb setting oft" from tlie shoals of St. Anne 
 aud St. Koch, through the channels to the westward o\' the Middle 
 Ground and over the tail of the latter to the northward. 
 
 Above th" Pillars both tides set lairly up and down the river. 
 
 lu the Narrows of the South Traverse the rate of the ebb is from 
 7 to 8 knots, and that of the Hood from 6 to 7 J knots. The rates of the 
 flood and ebb tides decrease gradually as we proceed to the westward 
 until otf the Tillars; the ebb stream, southward of the Pillars, attains 
 a velocity of .">{ knots per hour at spring tides; aud of U knots past 
 Channel Patch decreasing to 3 knots at Crane Island, while the flood 
 stream runs about one knot an hour less at the respective localities. 
 
 SOUTH CHANNEL, ABOVE CUANK ISLAND— HOTTTH HHOllE, ST. THOMAS 
 
 TO LEVIS rOlNT. 
 
 (IL O. Chart No. 1492.) 
 
 St. Thomas Point is low and lies 3 miles west of the entrance of the 
 Kiviere du Sud, aud the church aud village of St. Thomas on its west 
 
 bank. • v ». 
 
 Wye Rock, with a depth of one foot over it at low water, is about 
 400 yards long in the direction of the river, and 100 yards broad; it is 
 separated from St. Thouuis Bank by a channel nearly ^ mile wide, but, 
 with depths greater than 3 fVithtuns, only 200 yards wide. 
 
 Buoy.— A buoy, painted black, is moored in r>,f fathoms northwest- 
 ward of Wye Rock, and ^ mile northward of St. Thomas Point. 
 
 The mark for leading westward of St. Thojias Bank also leads in the 
 deepest water in South Channel northward of Wye Rock; the chapel 
 near the summit of Cape Tourmente in line with the flagstaff on Grosse 
 T«i^, bearing N. 39° W. (N. 21° W. mag.), leads jiortheastward of Wye 
 Rock in L-> feet water; aud the same chapel, in line with the western 
 wharf on Crosse Isle, bearing N. U^ W. (N. 16o W. mag.), leads south- 
 westward of that rock. The Seminaire is now rarely visible from South 
 Channel, except when the sun is shining on it. 
 
 Trou de Berthier.— The chujch at Berthier has a single spire and is 
 about i mile southward of Trou de Berthier, which latter has a wharf 
 at Verte Point, its eastern entrance point, with a depth of U feet close 
 to its outer end at low water. The former site of the church at this 
 place is now occupied by a large house with a flagstatf near it. 
 
 Rocks.— Two rocks, with depths of one foot and G feet over them, 
 lie SOU yards oil' the shore between Berthier !<:ast Point aud Berthier 
 wharf. From the one-foot rock, Bellechasse lighthouse bears S. GjO 
 W. (S. 83° W. mag.), distant U miles; from the other rock, Bellechasse 
 
iine of l-'s'i Trcter 
 liter bus begun to 
 
 ion to the flood, ab 
 sLoiilH of St. Anne 
 aid ol" the Middle 
 ard. 
 
 vu the river, 
 of the ebb is from 
 I. The rates of tlie 
 d to the westward 
 the PiUars, attains 
 1 of 4i linots past 
 nd, while the Hood 
 >ectlve localities. 
 
 SHOllJi, ST. THOMAS 
 
 ' the entrance of the 
 rhouias on its west 
 
 low water, is about 
 yards broad; it is 
 :ly J mile wide, but, 
 i wide. 
 
 fathoms northwost- 
 bomas Point, 
 luk also leads in the 
 '6 Rock ; the chapel 
 e iiagstaff on Grosse 
 ptheastward of Wye 
 e Avith the western 
 . ma^;'.), leads soutb- 
 y visible from South 
 
 a single spire and is 
 li latter has a wharf 
 leptb of 14 feet close 
 ' the church at this 
 staff near it. 
 d G feet over them, 
 Point and Berth ier 
 ithouse bears S. 05'^ 
 ber rock, Bellecbasse 
 
 <^,ife« 
 
 
 SOUTH CHANNEL. 
 
 341 
 
 light boars S. 00^ W. (S. 84° W. mag.), distant U miles. These rocks 
 are beads of a narrow ledge with de]>tlis of !» to 17 feet over il, run- 
 ning i)aia!Icl to the shon', and witii its northeastern extreme bearing 
 ]S[.49^^ !•:. (N.670 E. mag.) J mile from the one foot rock. Belleciiasse 
 light, kept bearing soutliward of S. r,no W. (S. 73° W. mag.) leads 
 northward of all the above shoal water. 
 
 Bellechasse Island, composed of three principal and several small 
 rocks joined together at low water, is (iO() yards long parallel to the 
 shore, from wliich it is ^ mile. Not m(»re than .'i fathoms water will be 
 found in the clnuiuel between it and the main. 
 
 Light— From a square building, 40 feet high, and painted white, on, 
 the easternmost summit of ISelleehaHse Island, is exiiibited, at an eleva- 
 tion of 54 feet, a fixed white light that should be visible 12 miles. 
 
 Pointed Rock, with 6 feet water on it, lies L'.IO yards northward of 
 the center of the island. A rock that dries 2 feet at low water lies 200 
 yards south westward, and a shoal with 12 feet over it lies 400 yards 
 westward, respectively, from the SW. extreme of liellecliasse Island. 
 
 St Vallier Point is the base of a wooded bbitf 12S feet high, and is 
 the first prominent point on the south shore above the Traverses. The 
 vdlage and church of St. Vallier stand in the bay next westward of 
 St. Vallier Point. A beacon is built on the shore north of the church, 
 which in line with the latter leads to the buoy off Madame Jieef. 
 
 St Vallier Bank fills the whole bay between St. Vallier and St. 
 Michel Points, and extends nearly ^ uiile NNE. from St. iVIichel Point. 
 
 A Shoal, with 1.5 feet water over it, lies i mile N. Wo E. (X. 340 jj, 
 mag.) from St. Valliox- Point, and is the northern of two banks. 
 
 A rock with 12 feet water on it lies nearly If, miles westward from 
 St. Vallier Point. 
 
 The end of the pier at Berthier East Point shut in with the SW. 
 extreme at Bellechasse Island, bearing N. 73° E. (S. 89° E. mag.), leads 
 north. 
 
 St Michel Point is low ; reefs of slate extend eastward, with shoal 
 water in continuation, but there is deep water | mile north of them. 
 
 St Michel Village is about li miles south west ward of the point, 
 and contains a church with a spire. A modern chapel with a fine spire 
 stands on a wooded bluff close west of the village. A pier extends 
 from the shore near the village, but is almost dry at low water. Sev- 
 eral rocks lie off the end of the pier. 
 
 Beaumont Reefs comi)rise a line of bowlders, the east extreme of 
 which dries 4 feet at low water, and numerous bowlders extending 800 
 yards from the shore, gradually decreasing that distance to Durantaye 
 Point. 
 
 Buoy.— A buoy, painted black, is moored in 18 feet water close north 
 of the east extreme of the reef, about f mile from the shore and 1,400 
 yards from the pier at St. Laurent. 
 
 Marks.- The church at St. Joseph de Levis must be kept v. ell open 
 
842 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 I :l 
 
 of Martinifer© Point, bearing 8. 77^ W. (N. 86° W. map.)) «"til St. TSIicliol 
 I'oint is open of Dunuitaye Point, boariug N. U° E. (N. 82° E. luiijj.). 
 
 Beaumont cluircli, whic-li has a spire, stands on a cliff soutli of tbe 
 reef. A waterfall runs over the cliff at one tnile westward of the chnr(!h 
 and close to a ruined mill at the base. Westward of this mill the water 
 is deep ch)8e to the low-water line, which, however, is 400 yards from 
 the hiKhwater mark. 
 
 Martinidre Point is at the base of a small wooded hillo(!k. A 
 diamond shaped beacon stands close to the point. 
 
 St. Joseph church at Levis is a conspicuous building with a spire. 
 A large college and convent, each surmounted by a statue, stand close 
 to the church. 
 
 Levis Point Shoal extends in an easterly direction from the shore 
 at h mile northeastward of Levis Point, and irregular ground continues 
 the shoal for over ^ mile from the shore to the depth of 5 fathoms. A 
 small fall in the land, one mile westward of Durantaye Point, in line 
 with the south extreme of Orleans Island, bearing N. 80° 15. (S. 82° 
 E. mag.), leads north; and the spire of St. John church at Quebec, in 
 line with the SVV. extreme of the immigration offices on Commissioners 
 wharf, bearing S. 56° W. (S. 74° W. mag.), leads west of this shoal. 
 
 SOUTH CHANNEL, A.KOVE (!KANE ISLAND— ISLANDS AND SHOALS 
 FOBMINO ITS NOBTHBBN SIDK. 
 
 (H.O. Chart No. 1492.) 
 
 The islands in order westward of Crane Island are Haystack, Mill, 
 Race, Margaret, Cliff islands, and Grosse Isle. The highest is Grosse 
 Isle, which is 214 feet above high water. 
 
 Between these islands there are narrow and intricate passes, leading 
 into Middle Traverse, and with water enough for vessels of large draft; 
 but they are of little oi' no use for the common purposes of navigation. 
 
 Westward of Grosse Isle are Keaux and Madame Islands, of slate 
 rock, low, wooded, and connected by reefs of slate nearly dry at low 
 water. ExtendiJig from almost all these islands there are reefs of slate 
 rock, thinly cov«'red with sand and mud, and bounding South Channel 
 on its northern side for nearly 14 miles southwestward of Crane Island. 
 
 Crane Island Spit has 5 feet water over the shallowest part, and 
 extends SW. by W., with less depths than 18 feet, IJ miles from Poiute 
 aux Pins. The western extreme of this spit is marked by a red buoy, 
 moored with two beacons on the southern shore of Crane Island in line. 
 The eastern of these beacons, painted red, is 250 yards westward of 
 Crane Island wharf, and the western, painted white, 200 yards farther 
 westward. These beacons in line, bearing N. 64° E. (N. 83° E. mag.), 
 lead, in not less than 24 feet water, southward of Crane Island Spit, 
 but with that depth only as far westward as the above red buoy. 
 The SE. extreme of Crow Island in line with the western extreme of 
 
 k 
 
80UTH CHANNEL. 
 
 343 
 
 ,nntllSt.MJcliol 
 
 iliff Hoiitli of Mie 
 
 ird of the chnrcli 
 
 is mill the watur 
 
 400 yards from 
 
 xled hi11o(;k. A 
 
 ng with a spire, 
 atue, stand close 
 
 •n from the shore 
 ground coiitiiines 
 :)f 5 fatlioms. A 
 lye Point, in line 
 Jf. 80O 15, (S. 82° 
 roll at Quebec, in 
 111 Commissioners 
 of this shoal. 
 
 )B AND SHOALS 
 
 i Haystack, Mill, 
 highest is Grosse 
 
 te passes, leading 
 els of large draft; 
 (SOS of navigation. 
 ! Islands, of slate 
 nearly dry at low 
 3 are reefs of slate 
 iig South Channel 
 d of Crane Island, 
 allowest part, and 
 miles from Pointo 
 ed by a red buoy, 
 me Island in line, 
 rards westward of 
 200 yards farther 
 . (N. 83° E. mag.), 
 )raue Island Spit, 
 above red buoy, 
 ^^estern extreme of 
 
 Middle Island, bearing N.lQo E. (N.38o E. mag.), leads northwestward 
 of this buoy and the spit. 
 
 A bunk, having several shoals with 20 to 23 feet water on them, joins 
 Crane Island Spit to the bank extending southwestwanl from Margaret 
 Tail. 
 
 Margaret Tail, extending l\ miles SW. from Margaret and VAitY 
 Islands, which .ire nearly Joined at low water, is a dangerous shoal, the 
 slate being awnsh in some parts of it in low tides. 
 
 Light Buoy.— A light buoy, painted y 'i>w and showing a pink light, 
 is moored in 4| fathoms, 400 yards soutli westward of a 20- foot patch, 
 at the southwestern extreme of Margaret Tail. Vessels entering the 
 quarantine ground should leave this light buoy on the starboar-l hand. 
 If from any cause this buoy is removed, it will be replaced by a j'ellow 
 can buoy. The church on Crane Island in line with the southern 
 extreme of Haystack Island, bearing N. ."iio E. (N. 70° E. mag.), leads 
 southward of Margaret Tail and the above buoy, but in a least depth 
 of 22 feet only. The northwestern extreme of Two Heads Island in 
 line with the western extreme of Clitt' Island, bearing N. 21° E. (N. 40'^ 
 E. mag.), leads westward of Margaret Tail, and between it and Grosse 
 Isle Patch ; and when the north extreme of Margaret Island is open 
 north of Cliff Island, or the buoy on Grosse Isle Patch passed, the 
 anchorage between (Jrosse Isle Patch and Grosse Isle may be rounded 
 into and the anchor let go. 
 
 Grosse Isle Patch is a rocky shoal, 1,200 yards long, in a SW. 
 direction, and with 7 feet least water; it lies west of Margaret Tail, 
 and the channel between them is \ mile wide, with a depth of 5J 
 fathoms. 
 
 Buoys. — A buoy painted black and white in vertical stripes, and in 
 4 fathoms water, marks the NE. end of the patch. 
 
 The rock, with 7 feet water, southward of Grosse Isle, and lying NW. 
 distant nearly (iOO yards from the above buoy, is also marked by a buoy, 
 painted black and vviiite in vertical stripes. 
 
 A Rock with 15 feet water over it lies westward of Grosse lale Patch, 
 and with the outer end of Grosse Isle West wharf bearing X. 15° E. 
 (N. 340 E. mag.), distant 1,200 yards. The new Episcopal church at 
 Grosse Isle in line with the inner end of the west wluirf, bearing N. 2° 
 W. (N. 170 E. nnxg.), leads in 3^ fathoms between this rock and the 
 western extreme of Grosse Isle Patch; and the summit of Margaret 
 Island in line with the northern extreme of Cliff Island, bearing N. 52° 
 K (N. 71° B. mag.), leads northwestward of Grosse Isle Patch to the 
 (innrantine anchorage. A good cross mark for that anchorage is to 
 have the Episcopal church just open eastward of the western wharf. 
 The whole of liace Island a little open of Margaret Island, bearing 
 N. oio E (N. 70° E. mag.), leads in 23 feet southward of Grosse Isle 
 Patch. 
 
 Quarantine Anchorage. — Vessels generally lie between Grosse Isle 
 
 ..:fiii^^^i,r.V.i,.i-„,U. ~-^^B4 
 
r 
 
 11 'l" 
 
 344 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 Patcli an«l GroHNii Islo, to lie near tho estuhlislmu'iit; but tlio anchor- 
 af?o I'ai'thpr ciiHtward in (inariiiitiiu^ i)iVH8ii;;o northward of Mar^^aiot 
 Island iH by far preferable. All incrcliunt vt'sscJH, as t\w law now 
 BtandH, are oldi^ed lo (Miininnnicato witli tlu^ (|iiarantino autlioritics at 
 Itiinoiiski or (irosse Isle, from whence, after e\aniiiiati(»ii, they aie 
 allowed to ])ro(!eed to <^>uebec, if not detained at the (iinirantine 
 anclioraKC. Tliosei vessels, if neccssaiy, anchor outside (Irossn Islo 
 Patch, and weHtward of Mar-^arol Tail, choosinjr tlioir bcrtli in 5 
 fathomH, where there is one of the beat roadsteads for ridinj; out an 
 easterly gale in the river. 
 
 The inner anchorage at (irosse Isle in not otherwise useful than as a 
 place for vessels to ride quarantine; but the anchorat;e (nitside (Irosse 
 Isle Patch is a convenient place for which vessels, on the ai)i>roach 
 of a strong easterly wind, may boar up, when there is not tide enough 
 for them to reach the anchorage under Crane Island, I nnlos farther 
 eastward. 
 
 Q>roBse Isle may be readily recognized by the number of buildings 
 forming the (|uarantine establishment. Two piers are built on the 
 southern shore, one near the western extrenu* the other near the mid- 
 dle of the island. The hospital, a conspicuous biick building, stands 
 near the eastern extreme and the superiiitiiident's house is inimedi- 
 ately behind the flagstati". The iihurches visible from South ('haiinel 
 are the Kjiiscopal church a brown wooden building with a low tower, 
 standing on an eminence immediately northeastward of the western 
 wharf; and the Uonian (Jatholic chuich, with a snuill spire, near the 
 middle of the southern shore, and visible only from the eastward and 
 westward, being hidden from the southward by a rocky mound in front 
 of it. 
 
 Qruss Isle Tail is now joined by a bar, having no nu)re than IG 
 feet over it at low water, to the banks of Madame Island. Two shoals 
 with 11 feet of water on them lie on the bar about midway between 
 Grosse Isle Tail and the Hanks of Madame island. For crossing the 
 bar the best mark is the western fall of the hill over Cape Tourmente 
 in line with the small rock near the northeastern extreme of Keaux 
 Island, bearing X. 27° W. (N. 8° W. mag.). 
 
 Banks of Madam Island, in their eastern part, extend Ij miles 
 southward of Keaux Island, and from their SE. extreme, in 2i fathoms, 
 the south side of Two Heads Island is just open to the southward of 
 (iro.sse Isle. The mark for clearing the southern side of these banks, 
 as well as Grosse Isle Tail and Grosse Isle Patch, is Ilace Island kept 
 just open south of Margaret Island. 
 
 Madame Reef dries 7.^ feet at low water, and is the extreme of a 
 shoal exteiuling 2:^ miles southwestward from the southwestern extreme 
 of Madame Island. 
 
 Light Buoy. — .\ light buoy, painted red, moored in 4^^ fathoms, and 
 showing a lixed white light, marks the southwestern edge of Madame 
 
0RLKAN8 ISLAND. 
 
 345 
 
 but tlio anchor- 
 11(1 of Miir^-ai'ot 
 as tlio law now 
 no antlioriticH at 
 iati(»n, tlit'y are 
 tlic (|narantin(> 
 ii(U* (liossc IhI« 
 lioir l)orth in .1 
 M" lirtiMf; ont an 
 
 UHet'nl than as a 
 c outsido (Irosse 
 )n the apjti'oach 
 not tide enough 
 I, I miles farther 
 
 iber of builflinjys 
 re built on the 
 er near the mid- 
 buildinj;, stands 
 louse is iujtuedi- 
 i South Channel 
 kith a h)\v tower, 
 I of tiie western 
 1 spire, near tlie 
 lio eastward and 
 y mound in front 
 
 ID more than 1(» 
 lid. Two shoals 
 midway between 
 For erossins the 
 Cape Tourineiite 
 itreuie of lieaux 
 
 extend Ij miles 
 lie, in 2h fathoms, 
 he southward of 
 i of the.se banks, 
 lace Island kept 
 
 the extreme of a 
 iwesteru extreme 
 
 I 4*^ fathoms, and 
 edge of Madame 
 
 Beef. From this buoy Ilelleehasse lighthouse is almost east, distant 
 3J\ miles. 
 
 Uerthier ••iiurch open south of UelleeiiasHe Island, bearintj H. 88° E. 
 (8. 7(P K. map.), loads south, and (-ape Toiirmente ehapel in lino with 
 the Ni;. extreme of Orleans Island, bearing N. 22° K. (N. 40^ K. inaR.), 
 leads north of this reef. 
 
 Orleans Island, dividintj the St. Lawrein-e River into two (ihannels, 
 is usually well (Miltivated on the slopes and in the valleys between the 
 hills. The snniinits are g'enerally wooded, and attain an elevation of 
 550 feet at ;{ miles from the HVV. extreme. Near the N IC. extreme the 
 land is wooded to the shore, and rises jjradually from a hilloek 210 
 feet high over that extreme to about oOO feet in the summit over St. 
 Famille. 
 
 The south shore is bordered generally by a small (difC, whieb inereases 
 in height toward the HW. extreme of the island and at the mouths of 
 the rivers. On the ncu'th eoast the clitf is at some distance from the 
 shore, the intermediate space being tiat and cultivated. Tlie south 
 shore is bordered by bare Hat rock that extends generally about 200 
 yards from the high-water mark, while the north shore is fringed by a 
 mud Hat on which a eoarsc grass grows, and which is indented by 
 nnmerons creeks. These are impassable at about half tide, and are 
 used by bateaux for loading and discharging cargoes. 
 
 St. Francois, the northeasternmost church, has a spire, and stands 
 on the slope of tiie hill at lA miles from the east I'xtrenie. 
 
 Lights. — Two lighthouses are erected at St. Francois, the south 
 western in a field .1 mile southward, and the northeastern at high-water 
 mark \ mile eastward, respectively, of the church. Both are square 
 buildings, painted white, the former being 30 feet and the latter 28 
 feet high. 
 
 From the southwestern lighthouse at an elevation of 77 feet, and 
 from the northeastern at an elevation of 30 feet, respectively, are 
 exhibited fixed white lights. Tlie upper light should be visible 14 
 miles and the lower 10 miles. Beaccuis stand close to each of these 
 lighthouses which, in line, bearing S. 40"^ W. (S. 58° w, mag.), lead 
 close southward of Traverse Spit in 2 fathoms, but over the shoal just 
 west of the checkered buoy. 
 
 Bellefine River empties at 2,\ miles SW. of St. Francois into a small 
 pool that affords good shelter to boats and small craft. Boats can enter 
 about one hour before or after low water and small craft according to 
 their draft. 
 
 There is good anchorage for vessels oft' l>ellefine River in 5J to 
 fathoms, with mud bottom. 
 
 St. Jean is a long straggling village having a church with a spire, 
 which stands close to the edge of the water. 
 
 A pier, with feet water at the extreme, extends from this village at 
 4 mile SW. of the church. 
 
*ii' 
 
 Tf"'*' 
 
 pi 'I i. 
 
 k i 
 
 H' 
 
 m' 
 
 11 ll: 
 
 I 1-1: 
 
 u 
 
 3i6 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 Light.— From a square lighthouse 30 feet high, and painted white, 
 at the extreme of the pidr at St. Jean, and at an elevation of 30 feet, is 
 exhibited a fixed white light that should be visible 10 miles. 
 
 La Fleur River is entered at 1^ miles, and Maheux River at 2^ miles, 
 respectively, westward of the pier at St. Jean, 
 
 These rivers run through deep ravines and generally afford shelter 
 to small craft which lie aground at low water within their entrances. 
 
 The anchorage is good off these rivers; but parallel to the shore, and 
 generally at 600 yards from the low- water line, is a rocky ledge with 
 depths from 5^ to 7 fathoms over it. Vessels should anchor between 
 this ledge and Orleans Island. 
 
 St Laurent is the village next SW. of Si. Jean, though the houses 
 are nearly continuous from one to the other. A church with a spire is 
 built close to the shore and a convent just oast of the church. 
 
 A pier extends from the shore near the church with 13 feet water at 
 the outward extreme. 
 
 Light— From an octagonal lighthouse, 40 feet high, and p^iuted 
 white, and at 40 feet above high water, is shown a fixed white light 
 that should be visible 11 miles. The lighthouse is 22 yards from the 
 extremity of the pier. 
 
 St Patrick Hole is off the mouth of St. Patrick River, a small 
 stream ending in a ravine which is faced by cliffs on both sides. 
 
 Good anchorage may be had here in 8 to 9 fathom». 
 
 Miranda lilocks consist of several rocky patches that completely 
 fill the westornmost cove on the south shore of Orleans Island. The 
 chimney of the lunatic asylum at Beauport, well open of the wharf 
 at the SW. extreme of Orleans Island bearing N. 86° W. (N. 68° W. 
 mag.), or St. Laurent lighthouse open of the soutb extreme of Orleans 
 Island bearing N. 78o E. (S. 84° E. mag.), leads south of these rocks. 
 
 The SW. end of Orleans Island is marked by a large hotel and a 
 wharf from which a steam ferry plies regularly to Quebec. 
 
 St. Petronille, a conspicuous church with a spire, dominates the 
 western point, and an Episcopal church with a small spire stands 
 between it and the hotel. 
 
 Anchorage.— Vessels anchor anywhere clear of the shoals, bat many 
 of them wait a favorable wind south of the SW. extreme of Orleans 
 Island. 
 
 With a strong westerly wind and ebb stream good anchors and 
 chains are required. 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1207.) 
 
 Quebec Harbor is defined by the act of incorporation to comprise 
 the St. Lawrence River and its navigable tributaries between St. Pat- 
 rick Hole and Cape Rouge, both inclusive. It affords excellent anchor- 
 'age over the greater part of this aroa and is generally free from danger. 
 Levis Point Shoal has been already described. 
 
 
. painted white, 
 
 ion of 30 feet, is 
 
 uiles. 
 
 iver at 2^ miles, 
 
 y afford shelter 
 eir entrances. 
 ;o the shore, and 
 ocky ledge with 
 inchor between 
 
 )Ugh the houses 
 
 I with a spire is 
 
 ihurch. 
 
 13 feet water at 
 
 h, and pointed 
 xed white light 
 yards from the 
 
 Eiver, a small 
 th sides. 
 
 that completely 
 IS Island. The 
 u of the wharf 
 W. (N. 68° W. 
 erne of Orleans 
 f these rocks, 
 ^e hotel and a 
 ec. 
 
 dominates the 
 1 spire stands 
 
 loals, bat many 
 Bme of Orleans 
 
 d anchors and 
 
 ion to comprise 
 jtween St. Pat- 
 cellent anchor- 
 )e from danger. 
 
 ■wnni 
 
 BEAUFORT. 
 
 347 
 
 
 Beauport is a large village north of Quebec, to which it is nearly 
 joined by houses. Fronting the village and extending to Princess 
 Louise Basin is a flat of slate covered with mud and sawdust that 
 extends ii» some parts § mile from the shore, and is fringed by shoal 
 water for a futher distance of J mile to the depth of 8 fathoms. 
 
 A buoy, painted red, is moored in about fathoms water off this 
 shoal at 7,000 yards northward of Princess Louise Basin, and another 
 buoy, painted red, is moored in 27 feet water, with Beauport church 
 bearing IST. 15° \V. (N. 3° E. mag.) and the flagstaff at the lunatic asy- 
 lum K. 74° W. (N. 50° W. mag.). 
 
 Ko clearing mark could be found for the whole length of this shoal, 
 but for different parts only. L'Ange Gardien lights in line bearing 
 N. 25° E. (N. 43° E. mag.), lead between it and shoals off Orleans 
 Island. The spire of St. John church in line with the north extreme 
 of the northern immigration offices at Princess Louise Basin, bearing 
 S. 480 W. (S. Ofio w. mag.), will clear the SE. extreme, and the SE. 
 extreme of the Parliament house at Quebec in line with the north 
 extreme of the immigration offices on Commissioners wharf, bearing 
 S. 39° W. (S. 57° W, mag.), will lead clear till Beauport church bears 
 N. 40° W. {'S. 22° W. mag.), when vessels must haul to the eastward to 
 get the other marks on. 
 
 The water in the middle cf the river, south of this bank, is very 
 deep, and anchorage there should be avoided if possible. 
 
 The lunatic asylum, a large collection of buildings, stands almost 
 midway between Beauport church and Quebec. It may be recognized 
 by a flagstaff rising from the middle of a mansard roof and by a large 
 black chimney. The falls of Montmorency are a short distance NE. of 
 Beauport. 
 
 Prohibited Anchorage. — ^Within the following area, covering the 
 ferry and electric cables at Quebec, in the St. Lawrence River, anchor- 
 age is prohited : 
 
 The northern limit of this area is a line drawn from the SE. corner of 
 Crawfords wharf, across the river in a S. 75° E. (S. 67° E. mag.) direc- 
 tion, to the SW. corner of Barras wharf. 
 
 The southern limit of the area is a line drawn from the center of 
 Ohamplain Market Hall, across the river in a S. 75° E. (S. 57° E. mag.) 
 direction, to the NW. corner of Simpsons wharf. 
 
 Anchorage. — ^The deepest water is near the south shore of the river, 
 opposite Quebec, where there is a depth of 30 fathoms. This depth 
 decreases soutwestward, till between Hadlow and Wolfe Coves no 
 greater depth than 15 fathoms will be found. This is the best part of 
 the river for anchorage, as a bank with less than 10 fathoms water on 
 it extends midway across the river from the north shore, the outer edge 
 being 700 yards from La Mouche Bank. 
 
 The narrow channel westward of Diamond Harbor, between La 
 Mouche Bank and the shore of Quebec, has from 20 to 12 feet water in 
 
[ Hi.. 
 
 I ll4\ 
 
 348 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE EIVER. 
 
 it, the deepest water being generally at the booms which are laid 
 between the blocks for vessels to load. 
 
 Spar buoys painted red, mark the north side of La Mouche Bank, and 
 are laid generally in a depth of 9 feet at low water, and at the eastern 
 end both sides of the deepest water in tliis channel are similarly marked. 
 
 Pointe au Pavilion, the apparent north extreme of Orleans Island, in 
 line with the north extreme of Levis Point, bearing N. 39° E. (N. 57° 
 E. mag.) leads south of La Mouche Bank. 
 
 Southward of the Grand Trunk Railway wharf at Levis, which is 
 marked with the name of the company, the shore dries at low water 
 nearly to the extreme of the long Avharves that are built off it. Off' 
 Hadlow Cove the outer part is composed of large bowlders. 
 
 A shoal bank extends from the mouth of the Echemin Kiver. 
 
 Levis is a town of considerable importance, with a great number of 
 prominent buildings, the most conspicuous of which are the college, the 
 Church of Notre Dame, and the Hospital of St. Josepli de la Dcliv- 
 rance, surmounted by a statue and a spire. The termini of the Inter- 
 colonial and Grand Trunk railways are on this shore, to which com- 
 munication by steam ferry is had with Quebec. 
 
 Quebec consists of two parts, the upper town, built on the ridge, 
 which forms the north side of the river, and the lower town, which 
 stands on the plateau between the base of that ridge and St. Charles 
 Eiver and embraces the parishes of St. Boch and St. Sauveur. 
 
 The highest point is the Citadel, which is 340 feet above high water, 
 and the most prominent buildings on approaching it from the eastward 
 are Laval university. Parliament house, and St. John church. The 
 customhouse, a stone building with a dome surmounted by a flagstaff, 
 stands at the NE. extreme of the city. 
 
 The United States is represented by a consul and vice-consul. 
 
 Princess Louise Basin comprises a wet dock and tidal basin at the 
 northeastern extreme of (Quebec, which were opened to shipping in 
 May, 1890. The tidal basin has an area of about 20 acres, with a quay 
 frontage of 2,860 feet. Immediately along the face of the quay wall 
 the depth is 24 feet, but at 10 feet from the Avail a depth of 26 feet at 
 low water spring tides may be obtained. The entrance to the tidal 
 basin is 200 feet wide. The inner or wet dock has an area of about 40 
 acres, with a general depth of 27 feet water and a quay frontage of 
 3,700 feet. Vessels wishing to enter tlie wet dock can do so twice in 
 each twenty-four hours at each time of high water. Lines of railway 
 extend to these docks for transmission of freight to all parts of Canada. 
 
 Lights. — The followijig leading lights are exhibited to guide vessels 
 to the Commissioners' wharf at Princess Louise Basin : 
 
 The front light is a fixed red electric light, 43 feet above high water, 
 and visible 8 miles. It is shown from a mast above a small square 
 brown tower erected on the NE. angle of Princess Louise Basin 
 embankment, near the immigration offices. 
 
 The two back lights are fixed red electric lights, placed vertically 16 
 
which are laid 
 
 niche Bank, and 
 i at the eastern 
 niilarly marked, 
 ■leans Island, in 
 if. 39° E. (N. 57° 
 
 Levis, which is 
 3S at low water 
 railt off it. Oft' 
 (iers. 
 u Kiver. 
 
 great number of 
 ! the college, the 
 ph de la Di'liv- 
 ini of the Inter- 
 ), to which com- 
 
 ilt on the ridge, 
 ver town, which 
 and St. Charles 
 Saiiveur. 
 
 )ove high water, 
 )m the eastward 
 n church. The 
 ;d by a flagstaff, 
 
 ice-consul. 
 ;idal basin at the 
 to shipping in 
 res, with a quay 
 )f the quay wall 
 pth of 26 feet at 
 nice to the tidal 
 area of about 40 
 quay frontage of 
 ,n do so twice in 
 Lines of railway 
 parts of Canada, 
 to guide vessels 
 
 [)ove high water, 
 e a small square 
 ss Louise Basin 
 
 iced vertically 16 
 
 QUEBEC. 
 
 349 
 
 feet apart. The upper light is elevated 112 feet, the lower one 06 feet, 
 and they should be visible 8 miles in and through a small arc on each 
 side of the direction of tiic leading lights in line. They arc shown 
 from posts erected on the battery at the bottom of Ste. Faiuille street, 
 and bear about 1)65 yards S. oO-^ VV. (S. GS'^ \V. mag.) from the front 
 light. 
 
 Docks. — At Levis Point is a stone graving dock 484 feet long, 73J 
 feet wide at the floor, and with a deptli of 25 feet water over the sills 
 at higli watei- of ordinary spring tides. 
 
 Davie and Russell lioating do(iks and patent slips are also at Levis, 
 and are of various sizes. 
 
 The largest vessel hitherto taken by the floating docks was 1,600 reg- 
 ister tons, while the patent slip takes only vessels under tOO tons and 
 drawing less than 1> feet water^ 
 
 In Wolfe Cove the Roche stone graving dock is being constructed. 
 It is intended to be M'> feet long, itl feet wide, and to have a depth of 
 16 feet over the sill at high water. There are also Itoche floating docks 
 in Wolfe Cove similar to those at Levis. 
 
 Pilotage is «;ompulsory for merchant vessels in the St. Lawrence 
 Eiver. The limits under control of tlie (^)uebec pilotage commissioners 
 are from an imaginary line drawn from the eastern anchorge off Barn- 
 aby Island to the eastern anchorage ground under Cape Columbia on the 
 north shore of tlie river as the eastern limit, to the basin o* Portneuf, 
 between (^luebec and Montreal, inclusive, wliile the Montreal commis- 
 sioners control the pilotage from Portueuf to the boundary line between 
 Quebec and Ontario. 
 
 The eastern cruising gror.nd of the pilots is in the neighborhood of 
 Bic Island, and, as a rule, in bad weather one or more pilot .ichoouers 
 will be found at anchor under the lee of .'.;i' island. 
 
 The flag shown by these vessels is a red ivnd a white horizontal 
 band, the white uppermost, and at night 'iie white light on the middle 
 stay just before the mainmast; bat they (ue flash lights at least every 
 quarter of an hour. During fogs : patent bellows horn is sounded. 
 The charges were originally fixed according to *lie sea^sitn, the lowest 
 charge being from May 1 to November 10, from $4.92 to !<<6.72 per foot 
 of draft lor jnlotage from the eastern limit to Quebec, two-thirds of 
 these sums from Brandy Pots, one-third from St. Eoch des Aulnets, 
 and one-quarter from the Avest extreme of Crane Island. By another 
 enactment the charges may be raised until each pilot can receive $600 
 per annum. 
 
 Tugs may be obtained by telegram from any of V s telegraph and 
 signal stations. There are 12 first-class and 30 smaller tugs at Quebec, 
 3 at Chicoutimi, one at Batiscan, one at Bersimis, 3 at Sorel, and one 
 at Three llivers. The charges are fixed by agreement, although a 
 nominal tariff is in jxistence. 
 
 Tides. — It is higi> water, full and (change, at Quebec at6h. 49ra.; 
 springs rise 18 feet, neaps rise 12^ feet, and neaps range 10 feet. The 
 
350 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 flood stream begins at Ih. 8m. after low water, and runs 4h. 56m., 
 while the ebb begins at lb. 3m. after high water, and runs 7h. 27m. by 
 the mean of 90 obssrvatious of each tide. 
 
 The highest tides occur before noon from the spring to the autumnal 
 equinox, and in the afterhoou during the remainder of the year. The 
 greatest semidiurnal inequality observed was 4 feet in September, 1888, 
 but the average dittference between morning and afternoon heights of 
 of high water is about 2^ feet. The inequality in the time of high 
 water is not so marked; the r/jost regular was observed in June, 1888, 
 when the evening tides were found to be twenty-four minutes earlier 
 than the morning tides. There is very little inequality in the height of 
 low water, but that in the time is most marked, a diltereuce of one hour 
 having been observed in June, 1888. The average diflerenije was half 
 an hour. The highest tides observed were during the freshets at the 
 end of May or early in June, and at the autumnal equinoctial tides, 
 October 8, 1897. The former rose 2^ feet and the latt«r 2 feet above 
 the ordinary spring tide. 
 
 As a rule, tides rise higher with strong NE. Avinds and fall lower 
 with SW. winds. 
 
 The tidal streams run generally in the direction of the river, the ebb 
 stream being strongest on the south shore and the flood on the north 
 shore. There is a tendency in the flood stream to set vessels toward the 
 shoal off Beauport, which should be guarded against. The velocity of 
 the ebb was found to attain 4^ knots off Levis Point, and the flood 3 J 
 knots oft' the Citadel. Close t<o the shore the stream turns about 
 twenty minutes after high and low water, the flood making first on the 
 north shore and the ebb on the south shore. 
 
 The highest of the spring tides generally took place on the second or 
 third morning after the change of moon, and the lowest tide occurred 
 at one tide, either before or after the highest. These remarks apply 
 generally to St. Lawrence River. 
 
 The following table will show the tidal data of the places where 
 observations were taiten: 
 
i 
 
 runs 4h. 56m., 
 IDS 7h. 27m. by 
 
 the aiitnmnal 
 the year. The 
 eptember, 1888, 
 loou heights of 
 le time of high 
 
 in June, 1888, 
 minutes earlier 
 in the height of 
 lUce of one hour 
 rence was half 
 freshets at the 
 uinoctial tides, 
 ir 2 feet above 
 
 and fall lower 
 
 e river, the ebb 
 
 1 on the north 
 sels toward the 
 The velocity of 
 id the flood 3J 
 m tarns about 
 ing first on the 
 
 in the second or 
 i tide occurred 
 remarks apply 
 
 » places where 
 
 'm!^ff^gmmm!ii^mm'''9^migfmi'it 
 
 
 1 
 I'i 
 
 Daration 
 of- 
 
 I 
 
 c 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 1. 
 S 
 
 
 
 h. m. 
 29 
 110 
 
 ft. m. 
 6 5 
 5 56 
 
 ft. m. 
 6 20 
 627 
 
 
 
 6 53 
 5 31 
 
 5 9 
 
 6 6 
 
 4 58 
 i 56 
 
 5 9 
 
 6 30 
 
 9 
 7 
 
 t) 
 i 
 i 
 i 
 
 31 
 
 1 6 
 1 7 
 1 10 
 1 3 
 1 
 
 6 51 
 
 7 12 
 
 7 19 
 726 
 7 27 
 713 
 
 QUEBEC. 
 
 351 
 
 At the Lower Traverse lightvessel the ebb stream begins at Ih. 
 33m. after high water at Orignaux Point and runs 6h. 42in., while the 
 flood stream begins at Oh. 44m. after low water at Orignaux Point and 
 runs 5h. 43m. 
 
 At the Upper Traverse lightvessel the ebb stream begins at Ih. 
 29m. after high water at Orignaux Point and runs seven hours, while 
 the flood stream begins at 2h. 3m. after low water at Orignaux Point 
 and runs 5h. 2dm. 
 
 The times of these changes vary considerably, however, and appar- 
 ently without law. 
 
 Ice.— The river seldom, if ever, freezes across below Quebec, but is 
 almost filled with ice that fluctuates with wind and tide from shore to 
 shore, the ebb tide and westerly winds carrying it to the south and the 
 converse with the flood stream. 
 
 The average of fifty- eight years' observations, from 1830 to 1887, 
 shows the first arrival of steamers from Montreal to have occurred on 
 April 27, the first arrival from sea on April 28, and the last departure 
 for sea on November 27. The ferry steamers cross from Quebec to 
 Levis till near the end of January and would occasionally run all the 
 winter, but are compelled to lay up so that the ice may consolidate 
 across the river. The bridge thus formed breaks up late in March or 
 early in April, though in 1890 it remained till April 24. 
 
 Supplies.— Provisions of all kinds can be obtained at Quebec. 
 Water may be obtained by boat, from the hydrants in the city, or from 
 the river. The best place for watei iug is said to be at the north side 
 of Madame Eeef, the impurities of the river having principally subsided 
 before the stream reaches that locality. 
 
 Coal can bo obt iued either by lighters alongside the vessels or at 
 the wharves. The greater quantity is brought from Scotland, but 
 Welsh and Nova Scotian coal can be obtained, and anthracite from 
 Pennsylvania. About 6,000 tons are generally stored at the various 
 coal depots. The depths alongside the wharves range from 19 to 30 
 feet, but any vessel can lie close to the wharves, regulating the dis- 
 tance according to draft. The deepest water is alongside the wharves 
 of the Montreal Ocean Steamship Company, known generally as the 
 Allan Line. 
 
 Wood can be bought without difficulty, and is generally stored in 
 large quantities near the Canadian Pacific Railway station in the lower 
 town. Bateaux are continuously employed in carrying wood from the 
 numerous localities on the north shore of tho river where it is cut. 
 
 Repairs.— Vessels can be repaired in the various docks and slips. 
 The largest foundry is that of Carriere et Laine. at Levis, where boilers 
 of any size may be repaired or made, but there is no machinery capable 
 of making large forgings, which, however, are done at New Glasgow, in 
 Nova S;;otia, and are forwarded by rail to Quebec. There are no sheers 
 in Quebec, and the cranes are. only capable ot unloading vessels. There 
 are no convenieuces for heaving down, but every facility for docking. 
 
'I,,!' 
 
 i 1^ ^d 
 
 ' r If 
 
 
 /i 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 Quarantine. — Vessels liavinj? infectious disease on Iioaid are in- 
 spected at liimouski and i)roceed to tlie quiiriiiitiiie liosjdtal at (Srosse 
 Isle, or. failing in8i)e(!tion at llinioiiski, jjioceed direct to Giosmb Isle, 
 where there is a large (quarantine estalilislmienl with all the necessary 
 appliances for disinfection, a resident i)liy8ician and a staff of interpret- 
 ers. There is a depth of l."> feet at low water alongside the western 
 wharf and of 11 feet at the eastern ])iei' at Grosse Isle. 
 
 There is no sailors' home at Quebec, but the control of shipping for 
 seamen is under the direction of the marine department. Seamen who 
 are sick are sent to the Jeffrey Hale hospital or to the Ilotcl Dieu, 
 under the auspices of the Itoman Catholic church. 
 
 The currency of the Dominion of Canada is expressed by law in dol- 
 lars and cents, £1 sterling being equivalent to 81.806. 
 
 The population of Quebec in 1891 was (>;{,090. 
 
 All management of the harbor is vested in the harbor commission. 
 
 Communication. — Steamers communicate continuously with the 
 United Kingdom. The Allan Line sends a steamer every week to Liv- 
 erpool, via Moville, to Glasgow, and to Loudon, respectively, nearly 
 every week. 
 
 The Dominion Line sends a steamer weekly to Liverpool and fort- 
 nightly to Bristol, and additional freight steamers otrcasioually. 
 
 Steamers of the Bossiere Line run to Havre fortuiglitly, and there 
 are two or three other lines that run regularly to Liverpool or London, 
 the i)rinclpal being the Donaldson and Furwess Tines. 
 
 A steamer runs fortnightly from Quebec *i» Charlottetown and I'ictou, 
 calling at the principal ports in the gulf on the way. 
 
 A small steamer carries the mails to the i^abrador as far as Esqui- 
 maux Point, calling at Kimouski and occasionally at Anticosti, sailing 
 every alterunte Saturday, I/ocal steamers run daily to and from Mon- 
 treal to Saguenay River about four times a week in summer, to the near 
 villages twice a week, to St. Anne de Beaupre daily, and there are 
 ferries that run to Orleans Island and to Xew Liverpool several times 
 in the day. 
 
 There i" lomirvnication l>y rail to all parts of Canada and the Tuited 
 States, iv. • to tie maritime provinces. A new railway has been built 
 to Lake S-;. John, and one ' iu process of construction to Chicoutimi 
 by the c i.sfc. 
 
 Telegrai>hic comniuuication can be had from Quebec to any part of 
 the world where there is a telegraph station, the otlico at that place 
 belonging to the Great iSorthwesteru Company ol' Canada. 
 
 Time Signal. — A time signal is established at the Citadel. The 
 signal is made once daily except on Sunday, and is a ball which is 
 hoisted half way up its mast at a quarter of an hour before and r^ the 
 masthead at live minutes before the signal. This ball is dropped at Ih. 
 mean time of the scventy-lifih meridian, equivalent to 6h. Greenwich 
 meantime. It is proposed to erect a time signal at the custom iu«H» 
 for the cou\ enieuce of vessels iu Louise Basin. 
 
 ill 
 
 t^n-y 
 
 f^:^^iiM 
 
II !)oar(l are iii- 
 )S])ital at (Irosse 
 •t to Giosse Lsle, 
 all the necessary 
 stall' of interpret- 
 >8i«le the western 
 
 il of shipping for 
 nt. Seamen who 
 I the ilotel Dieu, 
 
 sed by law iu dol- 
 
 )or conimission. 
 luously with the 
 very week to Liv- 
 ^pcctively, nearly 
 
 liverpool and fort- 
 
 casioually. 
 
 tuftlitly, and there 
 
 erpool or London, 
 
 i. 
 
 etown and rictou, 
 
 or as far as Esqui- 
 , Anticosti, sailing 
 ' to and from Mon- 
 iimuier, to the near 
 lily, and there are 
 :pool several times 
 
 da and the United 
 ivay has been built 
 stion to Chicoutlmi 
 
 Bbe<; to any part of 
 stlico at that place 
 lauada. 
 
 the Citadel. The 
 IB a ball which is 
 r before and t the 
 ill is <ln>pped at Ih. 
 t to (Ml. (ireenwich 
 at tlie custom lH>a»e 
 
 QUEBEC. 
 
 353 
 
 Storm Signals.— Storm warnings are also shown from the Citadel by 
 the direction of the Government observer, who is instructed from the 
 central meteorological office at Toronto. They consist of a cone and a 
 cylinder. For a moderate gale— that is, with a velocity of from 30 to 40 
 miles an hour from an easterly direction— the cone is hoisted .vith the 
 ai)ex down, and for a moderate gale from westward, with the apex up. 
 For a fresh or heavy gale, winds exceeding 40 miles an hour from the 
 eastward, the cylinder is hoisted above the cone, and for a similar gale 
 from tho westward the cylinder is shown belovf the cone. 
 
 The night signals for easterly gales are two white lights suspended 
 vertically, and for westerly gales two white lights hanging horizontally. 
 
 Weather.— Snow generally begins to fall in the beginningof October, 
 and the hills become white in November, and continue so till May. 
 Patches of snow remain in the valleys till June. 
 
 The winds blow generally up or down the river, the prevailing winds 
 being from SW. in the proportion of 199 westerly to 157 easterly winds. 
 Fogs prevail principally in the months of July and August, and smoke 
 is very common iu August and September, but there is no month in 
 which immunity from fog may be expected. The average height of the 
 barometer for the year is 29.971 inches, the highest in January, 30.042 
 inches, and the lowest' in June, 29.885 inches. The mean temperature 
 is 38.3° ; the highest, 96.0°, occurring in August, and the lowest, -30.5°, 
 in December and January. 
 
 « 
 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1492.) 
 
 Directions from Crane Island to Quebec— There is so little diffi- 
 culty in the navigation from Crane Island to Quebec that scarcely any 
 further directions will be reciuisite beyond that which may be gathered 
 from the foregoing description and remarks, read with reference to the 
 charts, which they are intended to accompany and explain. 
 
 With a fair wind, vessels run up at night witliout hesitation, unless 
 it be too dark to see the land, and even beat up in line weaiher. Witli 
 a fair Av-nd, and with the assistance of the charts and these directions, 
 a laijve vessel might be taken up tlirough this part of the river, even at 
 night. With the land in sight and the lead ^oing there oan not be any 
 ditliculty. As soon as it is ascertained beyond doubt that the vessel is 
 alwve the red light buoy on the SW. end of Madame Reef, haul grad- 
 n;illy over toward Orleans Island sufficiently to avoid St. Yallier Hank 
 and the reef oft St. Michel Point, and then steer for St. Laurent and 
 keep it aboard to avoid Beaumont Reefs, Under the circumstances 
 which we are supposing, af a night not too dark to distinguish objects, 
 the light at St. Laurent will be seen, which has deep wa, •■ at 200 yards 
 disisftuit. but ott the point to the eastward the shoal water extends 
 nearh -WH) yards from the high-water mark, the edge of the shoal biMiig 
 very bold. Vrivtt the lighthouse a berth of at least 200yards, or do not 
 go nearer than the depth of 10 fathoms. If the black buoy on Beau- 
 1151 23 
 
-aBti?flrtPauBaMfcteaaB>2fl 
 
 854 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 moiit Eeefs can be seen, all diflaculty will be removed, since the channel 
 northward of it is clear and more than J mile wide. 
 
 The shore of Orleans Island should be "kept aboard after passing 
 St. Laurent. If it be blowing fresh from the eastward, it will be 
 advisable to bring up off Patrick Hole till daylight, or under the west 
 end of Orleans Island, rather than risk running among the crowd of 
 shipping in the night. When St. Joseph church, on Levis Point, bears 
 about S. 44° E. (S. 26° E. mag.), it will be in line with the monnd or 
 small hillock at the water's edge; the vessel will be then off the NW. 
 extreme of Levis Point Shoal. Southward of the shoal Levis Point 
 becomes quite bold. Go no nearer to that shoal or to Beaiiport Shoals 
 than the depth of 10 fathoms, and that with caution, for they are very 
 steep. 
 
 Anchorage. — Besides the best places for riding with easterly winds, 
 there is anchorage almost everywhere between Crane Island and 
 Quebec. The best ground for holding is generally on the northern side 
 of the channel, and one of the best places in strong westerly winds is 
 under St. Jean Point, Orleans Island. 
 
 NORTH CHANNEL, NORTH TRAVERSE, AND ORLEANS CHANNEL. 
 
 I 
 
 (H. O. Charts Nos. 1491 and 1492.) 
 
 North Channel — The northern shore of the river south westward of 
 St. Paul Bay falls steeply from the summits of high wooded hills that 
 attain an elevation of 2,650 feet, close westward of Petite Riviere. At 
 IJ miles southwestward from Cape la Bale, a small strip of low flat 
 land, lying between the foot of the hills and high-water mark, com- 
 mences and extends southward to Grande Point, a distance of 5 miles. 
 NunieroiiH lionses, forming a parish of Petite Riviere, are built on this 
 flat, and among them is a church, with a single spire, dedicated to St. 
 Frauyois Xavier. Several valleys indent the hills, the most marked 
 being about 2 miles northward of Petite Riviere church. 
 
 The entrance to North Channel, between the reef which extends one 
 mile NE. from the NE. end of Coudres Mmu], and the shoals which 
 stretch across Eboulements Bay, is 1^ miles wide. The narrowest part 
 of the channel between Coudres Island and the main is one mile wide, 
 between Prairie Shoal off the west point of Prairie Bay and the oppo- 
 site side near Cape Corbeau. The leading mark for this part of the 
 passage, as well as for clearing the shoal on the west side of Cape St. 
 Joseph, on the mainland side, is Cape Martin and (loose Cape in line. 
 There is a large settlement at Eboalemeuts, both on the high grounds 
 around the church of Notre Dame and also on the shores of the Inay. 
 Small craft lie aground on the mud in this bay within the large bowldars 
 on the edge of the shoals. 
 
 St. Paul Bay between Cape Corbeau and Cape La Bale dries nearly 
 to the line of these points, and there is no passage into either of the 
 
iuce the channel 
 
 d after passing 
 rard, it will bo 
 under the west 
 ig the crowd of 
 svis Point, bears 
 ii the mound or 
 len off the NW. 
 oal Levis Point 
 Beauport Shoals 
 or they are very 
 
 1 easterly winds, 
 me Island and 
 he northern side 
 esterly winds is 
 
 NS OHANI^L. 
 
 )uthwestward of 
 ^ooded hills that 
 ite Riviere. At 
 strip of low flat 
 ater mark, com- 
 tance of 5 miles, 
 are built on this 
 
 dedicated to St. 
 he most marked 
 sh. 
 
 iich extends one 
 ;he shoals which 
 le narrowest part 
 is one mile wide, 
 ay and the oppo- 
 
 this part of the 
 . side of Cape St, 
 ose Cape in line. 
 he high grounds 
 liores of the bay. 
 lie large bowldssrs 
 
 Baie dries nearly 
 nto either of the 
 
 NORTH CHANNEL. 
 
 356 
 
 rivers at the head at low water. The point in the middle of the bay, 
 separating the mouths of the rivers, is wooded and has a conspicuous 
 sand hill 30 foet high. The village of St. Pierre is near the bridge 
 which (grosses Riviere du Oouflre, the eastern stream at about one iiiilo 
 fiou) the entrance, and has a church with two spires which is seen occa- 
 sionally from the channel. 
 
 The ebb stream sweeps round this bay with a velocity of 7A knots at 
 si»riug tides, and makes a dangerous ripple for boats. There is a snmll 
 space between the northern edge of the stream and the shoal water of 
 the bay, where small vessels will tind secure anchorage in .') fathoms 
 water at about J mile northward from the lighthouse, and about 200 
 yards from the depth of 18 feet at low water. 
 
 Light— Prom a square lighthouse, 30 feet high and painted white, 
 built on a block in the middle of St. Paul Bay, is exhibited, at a height 
 of 33 feet, a fixed white light that should be seen 10 miles. 
 On the block and close to the lighthouse are two red storehouses. 
 Fog Signal.— A hand horn answers signals from vessels. 
 La Baie Bank.— A plateau of rock, covered with miul and bowlders, 
 extends 1,200 yards from Capo La Baie, and fringes the shore generally 
 for about ^ mile as far south as Petite Riviere. South ward of the church 
 the plateau gradually decreases its distance from the shore to Saut au 
 Cochon, wh( re the water is deep within a short distance of the coast. 
 Cape CJribanne open south of Cape Maillard, bearing S. 31° W. (S. r>0o 
 W. mag.), leads east of this shoal eastward of the church at Petite 
 Rivi(>re. 
 
 A buoy, painted rr d, is moored in 4 fathoms water, close eastward of 
 Claude Shoal, the highest accumulation of bowlders off Cape La Baie. 
 La Petite Butte Ronde, a conical wooded 1 ill, 774 feet high, rises 
 above Cape Maillard, and is conspicuous from the northeastward or 
 southwestward. Two small shingle beaches, named Petit Abatis and 
 L' Abatis, are southwestward of Cape Maillard, and on L' Abatis, which 
 is 1| miles from that cape, there are several conspicuous houses. At 
 Saut au Cochon there is another group of houses, a small church, a 
 disused mill, and a wharf which marks the limit of the low-water line. 
 From Cape La Baie southward to Saut au Cochon, the flat which dries 
 at low water extends about ^ mile from high-water mark, and the water 
 deepens to 5 fathoms above 400 yards beyond the edge. Southward of 
 Saut au Cochon the low-water line extends only a short distance ftom 
 high-water mark. The flrst notch in the hills northward of Mount 
 Eboulements in line with the northern extreme of Coudres Island, bear- 
 ing N. 34° E. (N. 530 E. mag.), leads in upward of 5 fathoms eastward 
 of the shoal water off the northern shore. 
 
 Lai^ue Point, a rocky ledge, extends southeastward from the shore 
 at 8O0 yards northward of Cape Gribanne, with depths of 8, 12, and 21 
 feet, at distances of 600, 800 and 1,000 yards, respectively, from the 
 shore. The houses at L' Abatis well open of the wharf at Saut au 
 

 
 m 
 
 b-:'-\: 
 
 LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 Ooclion, bearing N. 23° E. (N. 42° B. mag.), leads close sontbeustward 
 of tbis le<lge, iu about 7 fatboius. A buoy, )[)aiuted red, is uioored in 5 
 fatboHis water close SB. of tbis ledge. 
 
 Landing may be efiected in boats after bflli liood at L' Abatis, Petit 
 Abatia, and Grande Toiute, and generally along tbe coast of Petite 
 Jjivii're; but care must be taken in approacbing tbe sboie to avoid tbe 
 bowlders tliat Ht;ind above tbe general level of tbe flat ground between 
 liigb and low water marks. Petit l)ebiir(juement is tbe best landing 
 place, on either side of a small mound joined to tbe main by a sandy 
 beach at one mile northward of Cape Gribanne. 
 
 Cape Bnil6 — ^Lights. — On tbe edge of the cliff at Cape lirule stands 
 a sciuaro light house, ^i feet high and ])aiuted white, from which, at an 
 elevation of 148 feet, is exhibited ii fixed white light. Northward of this 
 lighthouse ; ire two open framework structures, the eastern 34 feet and the 
 western 24 feet high, both painted white, from each of which is exhibited 
 a fixed white light 158 feet and 128 feet, respectively, above high water. 
 These lights are 110 yards S. 14° W. (S. 33° W. mag.) and N. 14° E. 
 (N. 33° E. mag.) from each other. All these lights should be visible 
 15 miles, and are known locally as those of Montee du Lac. 
 
 Coudres Island is surmounted by wooded hills 390 feet above high 
 water that slope steeply to the north shore. A cuitivated valley lies 
 south of these hills and separates them from a ridge 02 feet high, and 
 fs/ced by cliff that extends generally along the south shore. A round 
 atone mill stands near the middle, and numerous houses are built on 
 tills ridge. 
 
 Tbd SW . points are at the base of bold blufts, and a mound 90 feet 
 iiigli known as la Butt A Gaillard rises north of le Havre, the northern 
 co^'e at the SW. extreme. Tbe extreme SW. i»oint slopes from a wooded 
 hillock 40 feet high, and the NE. point from a similar mound 63 feet high, 
 both of which appear as islands from a short distance. Cape Branche, 
 the western extreme, is under a steep wooded bluff 180 feet high. 
 
 A new church with two spires dedicated to St. Louis has been built 
 on the north shore of L'Anse, tbe southern cove at the SW. extreme. 
 
 Coudres Island is surrounded by reefs, on several of which are large 
 rows of stakes with nets affixed to catcb the marsouin, or whiteflsh, 
 whicb frequent this part of the St. Lawrence Itiver iu the early part of 
 the summer. 
 
 Prairie Bay, on the NW. side of Coudres Island, is comprised 
 between Cap a L'Aigle and Prairie Point, and is one of the best shel- 
 tered anchorages in the river. Vessels may anchor in 10 fathoms, or 
 less as convenient, f mile from the shore. The shore dries at low water 
 300 yards from the high-water mark, and depths less than 5 fathoms 
 extend 600 yards further. The tidal streams decrease in strength as 
 the shore is approached. 
 
 Light — From a mast, 35 feet high, at the end of a small pier at Cap 
 ^ L'Aigle, the eastern entrance point of Prairie Bay, and at 38 feet 
 
)8e sontbesistvvard 
 ud, is moored in 5 
 
 at r/ Abatis, Petit 
 le coawt of Tetite 
 Hhoie to avoid the 
 it ground between 
 
 I the best binding 
 main by a sandy 
 
 Cape Brulr'; stands 
 from which, at an 
 Northward of this 
 tern 34 feet and the 
 wliich is exhibited 
 
 above high water, 
 ig.) and N. 140 E. 
 
 should be visible 
 du Lac. 
 
 ',)() feet above high 
 tivated valley lies 
 3 02 feet high, and 
 
 I I shore. A round 
 ouses are built on 
 
 d a mound 90 feet 
 avre, the northern 
 ipes from a wooded 
 nound 63 feet high, 
 e. Cape 13ranche, 
 80 feet high, 
 mis has been built 
 the SW. extreme, 
 of which are large 
 louiii, or whiteflsh, 
 u the early part of 
 
 and, is comprised 
 10 of the best shel- 
 r in 10 fathoms, or 
 1 dries at low water 
 ss than 5 fathoms 
 ase in strength as 
 
 I small pier at Cap 
 ay, and at 38 feet 
 
 NORTH CHANNEL. 
 
 357 
 
 above high water, is exhibited a fixed white light that should be visible 
 6 miles. 
 
 Prairie Shoal extends •; mile westward of Prairie Point, and termi- 
 nates in numerous bowlders that dry at low water. 
 
 A buoy, painted black, is moored in 13 feet water ott' this shoal. Tlie 
 church of Notre Dame dcs Eboulements open north of the inner end 
 of the pier at Cape St. Joseph, bearing N. uOo E. (N. 69° E. mag,), leads 
 close N VV., and L'IsIet d'en Haut, at the west extreme of Coudres Island, 
 open west of Cape Brauche, bearii . 140 E. (S. 5° W. mag.), leads 
 west of this shoal. 
 
 When approaching Prairie Baj Mi. southward, vessels should 
 
 not turn in until the two points on t • ide of St. Paul Bay are in 
 
 Une, bearing N. 67° W. (N. 48° W. iuug.), u lieu the vessel may steer 
 for the anchorage. 
 
 Anchorage.— Goose Cape shelters Prairie Bay from easterly gales and 
 prevents any sea of consequence from rolling in, so that this anchorage 
 is quite safe in all winds, the ground, of clay, being good for holding, 
 and the tides easy if the vessel be not anchored too far out. There is 
 room for many vessels, the space to anchor in being almost one mile 
 long and about i mile wide, reckoning from 3-fathom mark to 10 fath- 
 oms, beyond which the water deepens rapidly and the streams are of 
 great strength. The best berth is in 6 fathoms, near the center of the 
 bay, where the tides are not nearly so strong as at (Quebec, and where 
 the surveying vessel Oulnare rode out a gale from the eastward (so 
 heavy as to do great damage to the shipping off that city) with ease 
 and safety. Ships meeting with an easterly wind below South Traverse 
 will find this a good anchorage to run tor and should proceed as follows: 
 
 Directions.— Being below Middle Ground, stand over toward Eboule- 
 ments, going no nearer to the reef off the NE. end of Coudres Island 
 than the depth of 10 fathoms. Having passed the reef and opened out 
 the channel, bear up along the shore of Coudres Island, passing close 
 to Cap }\ L'Aigle into the anchorage. Approaching this anchorage from 
 the southwestward, bring the leading marks on for clearing Prairie 
 Shoal, namely, the church of Notre Dame des Eboulements, open north 
 of the inner end of the pier at Cape St. Joseph bearing N. 60° E. (N. 
 69° E. mag.). Run upon these marks until St. Pierre church is shut 
 in behind the NE. side of St. Paul Bay, or the points on the NE. side 
 of that bay are in line, when the vessel may haul to the southeastward 
 into the aucho^rage. The anchorage under Coudres Island in easterly 
 winds is very good, the best position being in 7 fathoms, with the south 
 point of Coudres Island bearing about N. 05° E. (N. 84© E. mag.). 
 
 Tides.— In Prairie Bay the Hood stream by the shore is longer than 
 the ebb, the water flowing for 6h. 20m., and ebbing only 6h. Om., 
 which is contrary to the observations taken in every other part of the 
 river. The stream of flood at the anchorage in 6 fathoms is stronger 
 than that of the ebb, and about 4 knots in spiing tides. The stream of 
 
I < I I M 
 
 358 
 
 ST. LAWBENCE RIVER. 
 
 the ebb ig turned off in great meanure by Prairie Shoal. Its rate for 
 the tlrrtt two liuurs of tlie tide in about 2 IcnotH. It then Hlacks for 
 about live minates no coin])lctely that a vessel will swing to tho wind. 
 After this thn stream be<;oines stronger aud regular during the remain- 
 der of the tide, its rate being about 3^ knots in spring tides. Vessels 
 should moor at Prairie Bay, or at least have a kedge out to insure 
 keeping a clear anchor. 
 
 Coudres Bank extends southwestward from Coudres Island and 
 shoals ra])id)y within tho doi)th of 5 fathoms. There is good anchor- 
 age on tho west side of it in 7 to 8 fathoms. The landslip near Cape 
 St. Joseph open of Cape Branche, bearing N. 20° E. (N. 45° IC. mag.), 
 will lead west of thin bank till abreast Cape Maillard. Vessels anchor- 
 ing may swing into this line, but not farther north than the SW. 
 extreme of Coudres Island bearing S. 41'^ E. (S. 22° E. mag.). 
 
 Neptune Rock (liocher de Saut an Cochon) lies nearly 15 miles firom 
 Coudres Island, and about 1,200 yards southeastward of tho edge of 
 Coudres shoals. It has two heads both of which are one foot above 
 high water spring tides. 
 
 Burnt Cape Ledge is an extensive chain of graywacke and slate 
 rocks. The western extreme is an islet 12 feet above high water, and 
 on the reef eastward of this islet a hut has been built, the roof of 
 which is -^ -let i 3ve high water. The SW. end is nearly abreast 
 Cape Bruh', irom which it is distant 1^ miles. 
 
 BruV- i ;.ink is a sand flat which dries 5 feet at low water and lies 
 westw^^id of Burnt Cape Ledgie, to which it is joined by shoal water. 
 The channel between this bank and the north shore is 1,200 yards 
 wide, and has from 7 to 10 fathoms water in it. This Is the only chan- 
 nel, but between the northeastern part of Brule liank and Burnt Cape 
 Ledge is Brule Cul de Sac, an inlet in the banks, which must be 
 avoided by keeping the north shore aboard, after arriving oft' the east- 
 ern part of the ledge. The black buoy marking the northeastern 
 extreme of Brule Bank is moored in 4 fathoms, with Cape Brule prin- 
 cipal lighthouse bearing S. 60° W. (S. 79° W. mag.), distant 1,% miles. 
 
 The depth of 18 feet at the northeastern end of Brul(^ Bank is on the 
 line of the western end of Two Heads Island in line with the south' 
 western end of Burnt Cape Ledge, bearing S. 28° E. (S. 9° B. mag.). 
 
 Eastern Narrows of North Traverse, between the SW. extreme of 
 Brule Bank and the NE. extreme of Traverse Spit, lie 1^ miles south 
 from Cape Touruiente. Great part of Traverse Spit, as well as of 
 Brul^ Bank, dries soon after half ebb, and thereby greatly lessens the 
 difficulty of the passage. This shoal lies on an extensive reef of slate 
 extending from the NE. end of Orleans Island. The passage is only 
 300 yards wide with depths greater than 3 fathoms, and Traverse Spit 
 is apparently extending northeastward. A black buoy marks the 
 eastern side of the Narrows, at the southwestern extreme of Brul^ Bank 
 in IS feet water, and a red buoy is moored at the northeastern end of 
 
 !* . " 
 
Shortl. Its rate for 
 It then Hlacks for 
 I swing to tlio wind, 
 r (luriuK tiie remain- 
 •ring tides. Vessels 
 tcdge out to insure 
 
 Coudres Island and 
 I ere i.s good anchor- 
 ) landslip near Cape 
 E. (N. 45° K. mag.), 
 ird. Vessels anchor- 
 north than the SW. 
 2° K. mag.). 
 i nearly 15 miles from 
 itward of the edge of 
 h are one foot above 
 
 graywacke and slate 
 bove high water, and 
 len built, the roof of 
 lid is nearly abreast 
 
 it low water and lies 
 )ined by shoal water, 
 shore is 1,200 yards 
 This is the only chan- 
 liank and Burnt Cape 
 anks, which must be 
 ■ arriving oft' the east- 
 ing the northeastern 
 with Cape Brule prin- 
 »g.), distant 1,% miles, 
 f Brul6 Bank is on the 
 a line with the south 
 E. (8. 9° B. mag.), 
 sn the SW. extreme of 
 }pit, lie 1^ miles south 
 se Spit, as well as of 
 aby greatly lessens the 
 extensive reef of slate 
 The passage is ouly 
 ams, and Traverse Spit 
 )lack buoy marks the 
 extreme of Brul6 Bank 
 Dhe uortheasteru end of 
 
 -»te!^ssEs?s69»ai^*sa'!<^jsfeS 
 
, m ,\ 'im > »fi uttm,iim iim^ ,m »mM ti iMh*mr\i i -\dffMiitHa i^iiit 
 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
«' 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical IVIicroreproductlons / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
laaMii 
 
 NORTH CHANNEL. 
 
 359 
 
 Traverse Spit, and on tbe western side of Eastern Narrows. The lights 
 at St. l''ran(;ois in line lead between Brule Kank and Traverse Spit. 
 This alignment passes over the north end of West Sand in 2 fathoms. 
 
 Western Narrows are only 300 yards wide with depths over 18 feet, 
 and are comprised between West Sand and Traverse Spit. West Sand 
 has extended eastward a considerable distance since the survey of 
 1827, and at its northeastern extreme is a shoal with a depth of 12 feet. 
 A buoy checkered black and white is moored in 28 feet water close 
 northeastward of this shoal. The southern and eastern extremes of 
 Orleans Island just open of ea<5h other, bearing S. 35° W. (S. 54° W. 
 mag.), leads northwestward; and tlie islet at the SW. extreme of 
 Goose Isle in line with the eastern extreme of Reaux Island, bearing 
 S. 72° E. (S. 53° E. mag.), leads close northeastward of West Sand. 
 
 Cape Tourmente marks the western extreme of the steep fall to the 
 river. It is surmounted by a densely wooded hill 1,874 feet high, on 
 the slope of which and at an elevation of 1,692 feet above high water 
 is a small chapel, the spire of which can generally be seen from the 
 river. 
 
 Directions for North Channel.— To sail up North Channel by atten- 
 tion to the leading marks given in page 354, there will be no diflBculty 
 in passing between Coudres Island and the main. When St. Pierre 
 church opens out westward of the northeastern side of St. Paul Bay, a 
 vessel will be up to the north extreme of Prairie Shoal, and when 
 L'Islet d'en Ilaut, the small islet at the SW. end of Coudres Island 
 opens westward of Cape Branche, she will be past it, and may haul 
 to the SW. up the channel. 
 
 If wishing to keep Coudres Island aboard, givo Cape Branche a 
 berth of J mile in passing, or go no nearer than 10 fathoms water, and 
 that with due caution, for the bank will be found extremely steep-to 
 until the vessel is abreast the SW. end of the island. After passing 
 Coudres Island she may approach the edge of the bank to 7 fathoms, 
 as far up as Neptune Rock. 
 
 If desirous of keeping the mainland aboard, keep the extremes of 
 the capes to the southward open southward of Cape Maillard, in order 
 to clear the shoal off" Cape La Bale, and also as far westward as Petite 
 Riviere. Farther southward, as off Cape Maillard, where the shoal 
 extends nearly f mile off shore, the first notch .in the hills north of 
 Mount Eboulemeuts must be kept in line with Cape Branche bearing 
 N. 340 E. (N. 530 E. mag.), till she is past Saut au Cochon, after which 
 the shore becomes quite bold. 
 
 After passing Saut au Cochon the houses at L' Abatis must be kept 
 well open of the wharf at Saut au Cochon, bearing N. 23° E. (N. 42° 
 E. mag.), to clear Longue Point, after which the northern shore should 
 be kept weil on board until abreast Cape BrnU. The leading light- 
 houses on that cape (the northernmost and the easternmost of the 
 three) must then be brought in line, bearing N. 14° E. (N. 33° E. mag.), 
 
 
 ■ 'isu-^i^jfii^Jai^aa^fc^iS 
 
 ^**^^*'^*fevi'*-J---ft-;'^>-4^--^Tfi-^fiHWr*4i«^-^4 
 
360 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 and kept so through Eaatern Narrows, between the buoys there and 
 until St. Franyois beacons or lighthouses are in line, bearing S. 40° W. 
 (8. 68° W. mag.). Then steer for those lighthouses with the upper one 
 slightly open southward of the lower one, and before the islet at tbe 
 western extreme of Grosse Isle is in line with the eastern extreme of 
 Reaux Island, bearing S. 72° E. (S. 54° e, mag.), the southeastern 
 extremes of Orleans Island must be brought nearly in line, bearing 
 S. 35° W. (S. 53° W. mag.), to pass between West Sand and Traverse 
 Spit. When St. Vallier church opens westward of Madame Island, 
 haul a little to the southward and keep J mile from Orleans Island 
 farther on. 
 
 Tides.— The stre; nis set fairly through North Traverse, attaining a 
 rate of 3^ to 4 knots at spring tides. These streams increase in strength 
 in North Channel farther northeastward, attaining their greatest veloc- 
 ity between Coudres Island and St. Paul Bay, where a rate of 7J knots 
 was found with the ebb tide and of about G knots during the Hood 
 stream. In strong breezes opposed to these streams there is a high 
 breaking sea that is very dangerous for boats. 
 
 Besides Western Narrows there is an inferior channel, named West 
 Sand Passage, between West and Center Sands, as wide as Western 
 Narrows, but it has only 3J fathoms water in it. 
 
 Orleans Channel is suitable only for vessels drawing 15 feet or less 
 water, as there are several shoals nearly in mid-channel with that 
 depth, and it should not therefore be attempted for the first time with- 
 out a local pilot. 
 
 Lights.— The following lights have been erected to facilitate the 
 navigation of this channel. 
 
 St. Anne de Beauprd— From a mast 20 feet high, at the south 
 extreme of the wharf at St. Anne de Beaupre, is exhibited, at 25 feet 
 above high water, a fixed red light that should be visible 5 miles. At 
 the base of the mast is a wooden shed, painted white, with a red roof. 
 This light is temporarily discontinued. 
 
 St Famille.— From a square ! .-use, 21 feet high and painted 
 
 white, standing a short distance r- rd of the church at St. Famille, 
 and at an elevation of 245 feet, id exhibited a fixed white light that 
 should be visible IG miles. 
 
 At the base of the cliff, below this light and 2,671 feet S. 52° W. 
 (S. 70° W. mag.) from it and near a stone mill, is a mast 50 feet high, 
 from which a fixed white light is shown at 50 feet above high water, 
 that should be visible 12 miles. 
 
 St. Pierre Point. — On this point, and close to the high- water mark, 
 is a square liglithouse, 23 feet liigh and painted white, from which a 
 fixed white light is shown at 20 feet above high water. 
 
 At 539 feet S. 40° W. (S. 58^ W. mag.) from this hghthouse is a mast 
 50 feet high, from which a fixed white light is shown at 60 feet above 
 high water. / 
 
 These lights should be visible 9 and 12 miles, respectively. 
 
)Uoys there and 
 earing S. 40° W. 
 til tbe upper one 
 
 the islet at the 
 stern extreme of 
 ;he southeastern 
 
 in line, bearing 
 nd and Traverse 
 Madame Island, 
 I Orleans Island 
 
 Terse, attaining a 
 irease in strength 
 lir greatest veloc- 
 1, rate of 7J knots 
 during the flood 
 s there is a high 
 
 nel, named West 
 wide as Western 
 
 ng 15 feet or less 
 lannel with that 
 le first time with- 
 
 to facilitate the 
 
 gh, at the south 
 
 libited, at 25 feet 
 
 lible 5 miles. At 
 
 with a red roof. 
 
 ligh and painted 
 ch at St. Famine, 
 white light that 
 
 1 feet S. 52° W. 
 last 50 feet high, 
 )ove high water, 
 
 ligh-water mark, 
 ite, from which a 
 
 ithouse is a mast 
 at 50 feet above 
 
 jtively. 
 
 NORTH CHANNEL. 
 
 361 
 
 L'Ange Q-ardien. — Two square wooden lighthouses, 21 and 23 feet 
 high and paintcul white, sliow fixed white lights at elevations of 33 and 
 20 feet, respectively, and are visible 11 and 9 miles. The back light is 
 1,120 feet N. 250 E. (N. 13o E. mag.) from front light. 
 
 Buoys. — The following buoys are described in the order they should 
 be seen when approaching from the eastward. A red buoy is moored 
 at the SB. extreme of Seminaire Spit, and a black buoy at the north 
 extreme of Traverse Spit. 
 
 A bla(!k buoy marks the NE. extreme of the shoal which lies in mid- 
 channel south of St. Anne River. A black buoy is moored at the south 
 extreme of the bowlders that dry at low water on the shore SE. of Les 
 Islets. A red buoy is moored at the SB. extreme of Les Islets, the 
 bank of bowlders that dries at low water eastward of St. Pierre Point, 
 and another red buoy south of the east extreme; while a third red buoy 
 is moored to show the limit of the shoals extending westward from Les 
 Islets. A black buoy marks the NW. limit of the bowlders off Pointe 
 an Pavilion, but not of the shoal lying eastward of it. 
 
 A red buoy is moored off the east extreme of the sand bank that 
 extends from the north shore off Beauport. 
 
 Directions. — Having passed Cape Brule, a course should be steered 
 to pass between the red buoy off" Seminaire Spit and the black buoy off 
 Traverse Spit, until the apparent NW. extreme of Orleans Island west 
 of the pier at the north end of the island is in line with the end of that 
 pier, bearing S. 62° W. (S. 80° W. mag.). Continue on this mark until 
 the church at St. Anne de Beaupro is in line with the sharp peak on 
 the west summit of the ridge westward of Riviere aux Chieus, bearing 
 S. 77° W. (N. 85° W. mag.), when that mark must be followed to pass 
 between the mid-channel bank oft' St. Anne River and the north shore. 
 
 The course must be changed when Chateau Richer church is in line 
 with the north fall of the hills over L'Ange Gardien, bearing S. 55° 
 W. (S. 73° W. mag.), and this mark followed till the Parliament house 
 at Quebec is in line with the Pointe au Pavilion, bearing 8. 44° W. (S. 
 62° W. mag.). This line will lead in mid-channel between the shoals 
 until the lights at St. Pierre are in line, bearing S. 40° W. (S. 58° W. 
 mag.), when they must be steered for until the lights at St. Famille are 
 in line, bearing N. 52° E. (N. 70° E. mag.). Keep these lights in line 
 astern until Beauport church south spire is midway between the 
 extremes of the two westernmost of Hairs wharves at Montmorency 
 Falls, bearing S. 55° W. (S. 73° W. mag.). This mark will lead north 
 of the shoal lately found to extend northwestward from Pointe au 
 Pavilion, and should be followed until L'Ange Gardien lights are in 
 line, bearing N. 25° E. (S. 43° E. mag.) nearly, when the latter lights 
 should be kept in line astern until the basin of Quebec is reached. 
 
 The tidal streams run generally in the line of the channel, and attain 
 a velocity of 3 to 4 knots at spring tides. 
 
 Tides. — The following table has been formed from the mean of the 
 
 . -mmtwrnmsn 
 
 ^j«aiiMwratr« iih »Vi-f'j) *i »VtfiSiigasfieia^ ^ 
 
362 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVEB. 
 
 observations of several spring tides. The neap tides rise and fall 
 nearly at tlie same rate as in ordinary spring tides — so nearly that any 
 diii'erence that there may be is far e.xceeded by the action of strong 
 winds; but, as in neap tides, the whole rise and fall is not so great as 
 in the ordinary springs sliown in the following table, therefore the pro- 
 portionate part of the rise and fall for every hour after low and high 
 water will also be less, and an allowance must be made accordingly. 
 
 Table shotting approximately the height of the title at every hour after low and high water 
 
 in ordinary spring tidet. 
 
 Place. 
 
 Honra 
 after low 
 
 Flood title. ; Honrs 
 
 Ebb tide. 
 
 alter tuna 
 
 
 
 water. 
 
 Heigbt. 
 
 water. 
 
 Height. 
 
 
 ft, m. 
 
 ft. in. 
 
 h. m. 
 
 ft. in. 
 
 Oiinlinp 4 .. ....■-•..■.•■■•••■■>••■■•■•••■••*■■■■•■>>-- 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1. w. 
 5 6 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 17 Oh.w. 
 
 WUUUvLi ,,«,,,,»■■■••••■•••••••■■•••••"••••■••"•■""•■ 
 
 16 
 
 
 2 
 
 10 6 
 
 2 
 
 11 4 
 
 
 3 
 
 14 9 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 
 4 
 
 16 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 10 
 
 
 4 45 
 
 17 6h.w. 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 7 36 
 
 3 4 
 1 6 
 2 
 1. w. 
 
 Cf l^nrli t\ AM A nlnciis ..>■>>>■■■■■■■•■•■■•■•■■•■••>•■•■ 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1. w. 
 2 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 17 Oh.w. 
 
 i3b> XVUCiIl UVO *» UlUvuo •■■•■••••••••••••••••••••••■■••■•■"■ 
 
 14 9 
 
 
 2 
 
 5 3 
 
 2 
 
 11 g 
 
 
 3 
 
 9 6 
 
 3 
 
 8 6 
 
 * 
 
 4 
 
 13 S 
 
 4 
 
 5 6 
 
 
 6 
 
 16 3 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 s 
 
 6 35 
 
 17 uh.w. 
 
 6 
 6 50 
 
 1 6 
 
 1. w. 
 
 Ttrandv Potfl ............■■•>■•••■•••>■••■■•>•>•>••■••"• 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1. w. 
 
 1 3 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 17 Oh.w. 
 
 A>rf%UU V f UW> ■■■•■■••••«•••••••••••■•••■■••■■■■■■»■"■■■" 
 
 15 
 
 
 2 
 
 4 7 
 
 2 
 
 12 
 
 
 3 
 
 9 5 
 
 3 
 
 8 6 
 
 
 4 
 
 13 8 
 
 4 
 
 5 6 
 
 
 6 
 
 16 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 
 6 50 
 
 17 Oh.w. 
 
 6 
 6 34 
 
 1 
 
 01. W. 
 
 'Pnfl/^iiaaA nnfrflTiPA Ctf RfHtliMXAV HI VOIP . ..■>■■>■■■«■••>•■ 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1. w. 
 
 1 3 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 17 Oh.w. 
 
 XMUvUnUvi tJii iriuiijtJ ui oui£''"u**j' ■»■"' • ^j* • •■•■■••"■•■■••"•■ 
 
 15 
 
 
 2 
 
 4 6 ' 
 
 2 
 
 12 
 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 
 4 
 
 12 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 
 6 
 
 15 6 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 
 8 
 
 17 Oh.w. 
 
 1 
 
 6 16 
 
 
 
 *The tides of Orosge Isle were observed to rise and fall nearly in the same manner, excepting that 
 the rise after low water was not quite so rapid. 
 
 The use of the table will appear evident from a consideration of 
 what has been said in page 337, but to render it still plainer we will 
 suppose a case. A ship bound up the river, and drawing 23 feet 
 water, weighs from off St. Anne buoy just as the stream of flood 
 begins to make; and it is judged from an estimation of her rate of 
 sailing, in addition to that of the stream of flood, that she will be up 
 to Channel Patch in IJ hours, and at Beaujeu Bank in 3 hours. Will 
 she have water enough to pass over Channel Patch, and afterwards to 
 the southward of Beaujeu Bank, and how much at each place? Now, 
 ttie stream of ebb at St. Eoch (see p. 340) runs down IJ hours after 
 low water by the shore, but it is not low water until about a quarter 
 of an hour later at the Pillars. The flood had therefore been rising 
 about one hour there when the ship weighed. The tide will therefore 
 
les rise and fall 
 o nearly that any 
 action of strong 
 is not so great as 
 therefore the pro- 
 pter low and high 
 lie accordingly. 
 
 »■ low and high water 
 
 e.! 
 
 Honrfi 
 
 Ebb tide. 
 
 
 after high 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 water. 
 
 Height. 
 
 
 h. m. 
 
 ft. 
 
 in. 
 
 w. 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 Oh.w. 
 
 
 1 
 
 16 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 11 
 
 4 
 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 S 10 
 
 w. 
 
 S 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 S 
 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 7 36 
 
 
 
 01. W. 
 
 w. 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 Oh. w. 
 
 
 1 
 
 14 
 
 9 
 
 
 2 
 
 11 
 
 9 
 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 6 
 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 « 
 
 
 6 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 w. 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 
 
 6 50 
 
 
 
 1. yr. 
 
 w. 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 Oh.w. 
 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 6 
 
 
 4 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 w. 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 6 34 
 
 
 
 01. W. 
 
 w. 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 Oh.w. 
 
 
 1 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 w. 
 
 « 16 
 
 
 
 
 
 le maimer, excepting that 
 
 i consideration of 
 111 plainer we will 
 
 drawing 23 feet 
 e stream of flood 
 ion of her rate of 
 dat she will be up 
 
 in 3 hours. Will 
 and afterwards to 
 >ach place? Now, 
 ivn IJ hours after 
 ii about a quarter 
 refore been rising 
 tide will therefore 
 
 TIDES. 
 
 363 
 
 have been rising 2^ hours when she arrives at Channel Patch, which 
 may be considered the same as the Pillars. Eeferring to the fore- 
 going table, it will be found that the rise from low water answering to 
 2J hours is about one fathom, which, being added to 3J fathoms, the 
 depth (shown on the plan) over Channel Patch at low water, gives 4J 
 fathoms as the depth over it at the time when the ship is expected to 
 pass, which is only 4 feet to spare. 
 
 Again, it is not low water at Crane Island, near Beaujeu Bank, until 
 40m.— say three-quarters of an hour, later than at St. Koch; the tide 
 had therefore only risen half an hour at Beaiyeu Bank when the ship 
 weighed; which, being added to 3 hours, the time she expects to be 
 going there, will give 3^ hours flood at the time of her arrival. Now, 
 for 3i hours after low water the table gives about 2 fathoms rise, there 
 will therefore be 5 fathoms to the southward of Beaujeu Bank at 3^ 
 hours flood in ordinary spring tides, to which the table is adapted, and 
 consequently water enough for large ships. 
 
 - ■■■»teWBiia^&tifeii!afc6te«»b».awaiife:Mi>iiiM^ 
 
^ 
 
 CHAPTER XIII 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER, ABOVE QUEBEC. ' 
 
 QUEBEC. 
 (H. O. Chart No. 1360.) 
 
 Sault Pass.— 'Inst above the eutrance of the Chandii^re Biver 
 (which is on the southern shore, 5 miles above Quebec), the St. Law- 
 rence is rather less than 800 yards wide, between steep, high, and par- 
 tially wooded banks, composed of graywacke and slate rocks; the 
 channel of the river is still farther reduced at low water by rocky shoals, 
 which dry out from the shore on either side. The breadth of the 
 sti'eam is then only 550 yards, but the depth is nearly 30 fathoms, and 
 the rate of the stream of ebb about 6 knots. This narrow pass is called 
 the Sault ; and it is here that the drift ice packs and forms an ice bridge, 
 over which a sleigh road is formed almost every winter. 
 
 Anchorage. — AtOarouge Point (Cap Eouge), on the northern shore, 
 and about 8 miles above Quebec, there is an excellent anchorage; and 
 the river here begins to expand into a magnificent reach, from 2 to 2J 
 miles wide, which extends westward as far as the eye can reach. The 
 high and steep banks on either side form occasionally precipitous 
 headlands. 
 
 Tremble Shoals. — The navigation of the river is devoid of all diffi- 
 culty as far as the dangerous shoals of Pointe aux Trembles on the 
 northern shore, and 18 or 19 miles above Quebec. These shoals extend 
 westward for many miles up the river, leaving a channel between them 
 and the southern shore in some places only 800 yards wide. Still there 
 are no difficulties in the navigation that may not be easily overcome, 
 even in large ships, as high as Portneuf, which is on the northern shore, 
 and 32 miles above Quebec. 
 
 Richelieu Rapids. — The first great difficulty in the navigation is 
 Richelieu Rapids, which commences just above Portneuf, and extends 
 nearly to Grondines, 41 miles above Quebec. In the narrowest part of 
 Biciielieu Rapids the channel at low water is between extensive shoals 
 of immense bowlder stones, and only 4G0 yards wide. There is water 
 enough for any vessel, but there is only about one hour of very weak 
 stream of flood, while the ebb runs in spring tides at the rate of fully 
 7 knots; this is, therefore, a difficult and dangerous pass. The steam- 
 ers regulate the time of their departure from Quebec so as to arrive at 
 the foot of Richelieu Rapids with the flood tide. 
 364 
 
LIQHTS. 
 
 865 
 
 ' J :v 
 
 c. 
 
 Ohauditire River 
 >ec), the St. Law- 
 ip, high, and par- 
 slate rocka; the 
 r by rocky shoals, 
 ) breadth of the 
 T 30 fathoms, and 
 row pass is called 
 cms an ice bridge, 
 jr. 
 
 le northern shore, 
 b anchorage; and 
 sach, from 2 to 2J 
 > can reach. The 
 ually precipitous 
 
 levoid of all diffl- 
 Trembles on the 
 ese shoals extend 
 lel between them 
 wide. Still there 
 easily overcome, 
 e northern shore, 
 
 ;he navigation is 
 leuf, and extends 
 narrowest part of 
 extensive shoals 
 , There is water 
 our of very weak 
 ; the rate of fully 
 tass. The steam- 
 so as to arrive at 
 
 No greater depth than 22 feet water can be counted on between St. 
 Croix iind Itichelieu Kapids. Two beacons have been erected on Platon 
 Point to indicate the middle of the ship channel at the Barre ix Boulard, 
 liiclielieu Kapids. 
 
 The two lighthouses at Portneuf, on the northern shore of the river, 
 in luH', lead up Richeheu Rapids, through the middle of the channel, to 
 abreast Kiohelieu Islet, on which is shown a fixed white light; after 
 which the two lights at Platon Point, on the southern shore, li miles 
 below Richelieu Islet, kept in line, lead through the remainder of the 
 channel. 
 
 Lights.— Between Quebec and Lake St. Peter the following lights 
 are exhibited, namely — 
 
 Southwest side of the channel: 
 
 St. Antoine. Two fixed white lights, visible 10 miles. 
 
 Trembles Shoal. A light and bell buoy, painted red, with Trembles 
 Shoal in white, and showing at an elevation of 14 feet above the water 
 an intermittent whfte light, is moored off the SE, extreme, visible 8 
 mil'js. 
 
 Paget Bank. A similar buoy, with the words St. Croix, is moored oflf 
 the Avest extreme. 
 
 St. Croix. A fixed white light, visible miles. 
 
 Platon Point. Two fixed white leading lights, visible 12 miles. These 
 lights in line, N. 58° E. (N. 74° B. mag.), lead up Richelieu Rapids. 
 
 Richelieu Island. A fixed white light, visible 6 miles. This light and 
 the two leading lights on Platon Point are very nearly on the same line 
 of bearing, namely, N. 58° E. (N. 74° E. mag.). 
 
 Lotbinitire. Two fixed white lights, visible 10 and 8 miles, bearing 
 S. 43° W. (S. 59° W. mag.), lead through Richelieu Channel. 
 
 Langlais Point, A fixed white light, visible 5 mik^s. To show off 
 Batture des Grondines, and to avoid Batture Gordi; 
 
 St. Emelie. Two leading lights, to be exhibited when new channel is 
 completed. The rear light tower is 3,000 feet, 8. 86° E. (S. 70° B. mag.), 
 from front light tower. 
 
 Cape Charles. Two fixed white leading lights, N. 80° W. (N. 64° W. 
 mag.) and S. 80° E. (8. 64- E. mag.) of each other, visible 6 miles. 
 
 St. Pierre des Becquets. A fixed white light, visible 5 miles. 
 
 Port St. Francis. Two fixed white leading lights, visible 4 miles. 
 These lights in line, bearing N. 62© E. (N. 76° E. mag.), lead through 
 a newly dredged channel. 
 
 North side of the channel: 
 
 Portneuf. Two fixed white leading lights, visible 5 miles. These 
 lights in line, N. 29° E. (N. 45° E. mag.), lead up Richelieu Channel to 
 the light on Richelieu Island. 
 
 Grondines. Two fixed white leading lights, N. 52° E. (N. 68° B. mag.) 
 and 8. 52© W (8. 68° W. mag.) of each other, visible 5 miles. 
 
 Batiscan. Two fixed white leading lights, visible 4 miles. These 
 
 - fs^KMi=riMSaui^-n^i^l^iei»»imiai^Sm,0!ii'' 
 
r 
 
 366 
 
 BT. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 lights in liue, S. 61° W. (8. 77° W. mag.), will lead from their point of 
 iuterHection with Grondines Upper Bange lights through the wide part 
 of the channel clear of St. Anne Shoals. 
 
 Citrouille Point. A fixed white light, visible 11 miles. 
 
 Champlain Lower Range lights. Two fixed white leading lights, 
 visible 6 miles. These lights are in line N. 40° B. (N. 50° E. mag.), lead 
 through B<5cancour Traverse. 
 
 Cape Madeleine. Two pairs of fixed white leading lights. Lower 
 lights 2^ miles below the cape, in line bearing N. 42° E. (N. 58° E. mag.), 
 visible miles. Upper lights 2 miles below the cape, in line N. 70° E. 
 (N. 80° E. mag.), visible miles. 
 
 Point du Lac. A fixed white light, visible 12 miles. In line with 
 East lightship 8. 55° W. (8. 70° W. mag.), shows center of dredged 
 channel from Middle Traverse up to White Buoy Bend. 
 
 Tides.— At Portneuf the spring tides rise 14 feet, while at Grondines 
 they only rise 9 feet; there is, therefore, a great difference in the rise 
 of the tides at the foot and head of Richelieu Rapids— namely, 5 feet in 
 miles — so that it seems that the descent in the bed of the St. Lawrence 
 is there very considerable. 
 
 The navigation above Richelieu Rapids continues more or less diffi- 
 cult, and is so embarrassed by shoals and large bowlders that at 
 Livreur Point (opposite St. Anne River, and 47 or 48 miles above 
 Quebec) the ship channel is reduced to the breadth of 360 yards. 
 
 The villages of Champlain and Gentilly are opposite to each other 
 and 58 miles from Quebec, the former being on the northern and the 
 latter on the southern shore. They may be said to mark the extent 
 of the stream of flood tide, which was not observed above Gentilly 
 Shoals, where the ordinary springs, unless assisted by an easterly gale, 
 do not rise above 2 or 3 feet. Here also a considerable change takes 
 place in the character of the country, for the high banks, which had 
 continued to form the southern shore of the river all the way from 
 opposite Quebec, turn back into the country, and the shores on both 
 sides become low and of an alluvial appearance. 
 
 At the town of Three Rivers, 68 miles above Quebec, the ordinary 
 spring tides rise one foot, and it is high water, full and change, at 
 llj h. In the spring and -fall, easterly gales often occur with the 
 spring tides and cause them to rise, it is said, one or 2 feet higher. 
 
 At Point du Lac, at the lower entrance of Lake St. Peter and 75 miles 
 from Quebec, the neap tides are almost imperceptible, and the spring 
 tides, unless assisted by an easterly gale, do not rise above 3 or 4 inches. 
 The effect of the tides may be said to be lost in Lake St. Peter, since no 
 alternate rise and fall of the water that could be attributed to their 
 influence was observed among the islands at its head. It would be 
 possible to take large vessels to the lower entrance of Lake St. Peter, 
 since 4 fathoms could be carried up by buoying the channel. 
 
om their poiut of 
 Lgh the wide part 
 
 es. 
 
 B leading lights, 
 
 >G° E. mag.)» lead 
 
 g lights. Lower 
 
 (N. 68° B. inag.), 
 
 , in line N. 70° E. 
 
 es. In line with 
 
 Buter of dredged 
 
 d. 
 
 bile at Grondines 
 
 irence In the rise 
 
 -namely, 5 feet in 
 
 the St. Lawrence 
 
 more or less diffl- 
 bowlders that at 
 : 48 miles above 
 f 360 yards, 
 ite to each other 
 northern and the 
 mark the extent 
 d above Gentilly 
 r an easterly gale, 
 hble change takes 
 banks, which had 
 all the way from 
 le s bores on both 
 
 (bee, the ordinary 
 11 and change, at 
 n occnr with the 
 2 feet higher. 
 Peter and 75 miles 
 le, and the spring 
 bove 3 or 4 inches. 
 St. Peter, since no 
 ittributed to their 
 )ad. It would be 
 of Lake St. Peter, 
 haunel. 
 
 iM 
 
 LAKE ST. PETER. 
 
 367 
 
 Lake St Peter.— The disfiuice np this lake from Point du Lac to 
 the islandH is about 18 niilcs, of wliich iibout 4 miles are over ti Mat of 
 sand and clay, tlirougli which a siiip «haniiel .'{(K) feet wide mid 1*7^ 
 feet deep has been dredged. 
 
 The chanuel above Lake Ht. Peter is often narrow and diflicult for 
 sailing vessels, and the ciiricnt, the average rate of whicli docs not 
 excee<l li or 3 knots, is in some narrow i)Iaces of considerably greater 
 strengtli. At St. Mary l{a])id,.iust below the city of iM<njtreal, the rate 
 of the current amounts to 7 knots. The whole river, as well as Lake 
 St. Peter, is now so well buoyed and liglited that sailing vessels are 
 towed night and day withont stopping, except in togs, thronKh the 
 narrowest parts of the channel, and the whole distanc«^ (about 1.18 
 miles) from Quebec to Montreal is often accomplished in twenty-four 
 hours, by leaving Quebec so as to arrive at Kichelieu Kapids with the 
 flood stream. 
 
 Code of Semaphore Signals, showing depth of water in feet in Cap 
 ^ la liocho New Channel. 
 
 Looking downeiream. 
 
 51 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 
 
 iimifr 
 
 29 30 31 32 
 
 33 34 35 
 
 ifttnr 
 
 23' 3" 23' 6" 23' 9" 
 
 The lower arm indicates inches to be added to the feet shown by the 
 upper arm. 
 Ball at head of flag pole indicates rising tide. 
 
 - '•^ ife»j » j i fe w ^i» . ;ii swfetf«& ^t ' -''w fe w r w^ 
 
I 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 'i 
 
 368 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVEB. 
 
 Lookiuy upstream. 
 
 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 
 
 hrfTtHt 
 
 29 30 31 32 
 
 84 85 
 
 rmw 
 
 // nn, Qit 
 
 23' 3" 23' 6" 23' 9 
 
 M 
 
 The lower arm indicates iucbes to be added to tlie feet sbowu by the 
 
 upper arm. 
 
 Ball at bead of Hag pole indicates rising tide. 
 
 Tbe deptb of water in tbe center of tbe old or nortb cbannel at Cap 
 il la Uocbe is 6 feet less tban in tbe new or soutb cbannel. 
 
 Lightvessels and Lights.— Tbe dredged cbannel tbrougb Lake St. 
 Peter is marked by tbree lifrbtvessels, namely: East ligbtvessel, No. 3, 
 in latitude 4Co 15' 56" nortb, longitude 72° 42' 15" west; Center light- 
 vessel, No. 2, in latitude 46^ 11' 35" north, longitude T2o 53' 20" west; 
 West ligbtvessel, No. 1, in latitude 4(io 9' 3;" nortb, longitude 72o 
 66' 45" west. Each exhibits a fixed white light, visible 9 miles m clear 
 weather. The cbannel of Lake St. Peter is also marked by two fixed 
 white leading lights shown from He anx Raisins. These lights in line 
 S. 10° W. (S. 25° W. mag.) lead through the cbannel above the West 
 
 lightvessel. 
 
 St. Francis Eiver. Two fixed lights, tbe outer white and the inner 
 red, and each visible 4 miles, when in line, lead into St. Francis Eiver. 
 
 Lights are shown at the following places between Lake St. Peter and 
 Montreal, namely : 
 
 Stone Island, or He a la Pierre. One fixed white light, visible 12 miles. 
 
 He de Grace. One fixed white light, visible 8 miles. 
 
27 28 
 
 34 35 
 
 23' 6" 23' 9" 
 
 feet sbowu by the 
 
 tU channel at Cap 
 nnel. 
 
 through Lake St. 
 lightvessel, No. 3, 
 est; Center light- 
 > 72° 53' 20" Avest; 
 th, longitude 72° 
 ble 9 miles in clear 
 rked by two fixed 
 liese lights in line 
 el above the West 
 
 jite and the inner 
 St. Francis Eiver. 
 Lake St. Teter and 
 
 ht, visible 12 miles. 
 
 mitammmim^/t 
 
 MONTREAL. 
 
 369 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 Sorel. Two fixed red leading lights. Two beacons are erected to lead 
 to the entrance of Uichclicu iJiver. 
 
 Nortli Halfway Point. Two (Ixed white lights, visible .{ miles. 
 .St. Valeiitiiu'. Two fixed wliite leading lights, visible 2 njiles 
 
 and one mile. 
 Lacolle. Two (Ixed wllit(^ leading lights, visible (5 and I miles. 
 Ash Lsiand. One fixed wiiite light, visible 4 miles. 
 IMoody Island. One fixed white light, visible 4 miles. 
 La Valtrie. Two Hxed white leading lights, visible 10 and 8 miles. 
 Traverse {2^ miles above Contreca'ur). Two fixed white leading 
 
 lights, visible 11 and 13 miles. 
 rie aux Prunes. One fixed white light, visible 10 miles. 
 Uepentigny. Two fixed white leading lights, visible 4 miles. 
 lie 11 laBague. One fixed wiiitt^ light, visible 4 miles. 
 He St. Therese. Two pairs of fixed wliite leading liglits, visible 13 
 
 and 10 miles (lower), miles (upper). 
 Pointe aux Trembles. Two fixed white leading lights, visible 4 miles. 
 Montreal Harbor is the terminus of the ocean navigation of the 
 St. Lawrence Kiver, and is capable of ^sheltering a large number of 
 vessels. 
 
 The channel leading to it from Quel)ec has been dredged, so that in 
 the part of the river aftected by tides the least depth is 22 feet at low 
 water, but in the part of the river above tidal infiuencethe least depth 
 is 27^ feet at low water of m feet on the flats of Lake St. Peter, 
 which occurs in autumn. Ojdy a portion of the excavation at Cap lY la 
 Roche now remains to be done to give a de|»th of 27^ feet at all stages 
 of the tide between Montreal and Cape Charles. Below the latter 
 ' point it has been ascertained that a few places will require dredging to 
 enable deep-draft vessels to pass at low water. 
 
 Immediately above Montreal the navigation is closed by the com- 
 mencement of Lachine Kapids. At <? mile south of the harbor is the 
 Victoria tubular bridge, which crosses the river. It is 0,600 feet long, 
 and rests on piers 35 feet above the ordinary level of the river! 
 Extensive alterations are in course of being made, which will largely 
 increase the wharfage of the harbor and furnish shelter for vessels iu 
 winter. 
 
 Directions.— As pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels, and 
 continuous alterations are made in buoys to suit the newly dredged 
 channel, it would be useless to give instructions for the navigation of 
 the channel to Montreal. Numerous lighthouses, lightvessels, and 
 buoys mark the course. 
 
 Pilotage.— The tariff is, for each vessel in tow of a steamer, $2, for 
 
 steamers $2.50, for sailing vessels upward, $4.20, and downward $2.80, 
 
 respectively, for each foot of draft of water, while $5 are charged for 
 
 moving a vessel from one wharf to another, or from the harbor into 
 
 1151 24 
 
 tri 
 
 
370 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE UIVER. 
 
 Lachiuo Oaual. Proportionate amouuts are charged for pilotage to 
 Portueuf, Three Rivers, and Sorel. 
 
 •Wintering.— Great damage is sometimes done at Montreal from 
 the ice taking the ground and damming back the water so as to over- 
 flow the wharves and storehouses in the lower parts of the city, and 
 thus exposing them to the pressure of the drift ice. Hence it is that 
 vessels can not winter at Montreal, except in the canals, and that the 
 steamers are sent either to Sorel, at the entrance of the Richelieu River, 
 or to Bouoherville Islands, those being the only places where they or 
 other large vessels can be safe from the ice, although tliere are many 
 places where Durham boats and other small river crait may be secured. 
 There is no doubt but that large stones are moved by the ice, and that 
 the depth of water over shoals will vary in consequence; but, from all 
 that can be gathered, there has been no material change in the main 
 channels of the river for many years. The islands and flats of Lake 
 St. Peter are doubtless extending eastward or down the lake, but with- 
 out as yet aflfecting the depth of water in the channel. 
 
 Time Signal.— A time signal is established on the tower of the 
 harbor commissioners' building. The signal is made once daily, except 
 on Sunday, during the season of navigation; and is a ball, which is 
 hoisted close up as preparatory about five minutes before signal, and 
 . dropped at noon mean time of the seventy-fifth meridian, equivalent to 
 5h. Greenwich mean time. 
 
 There is no seaman's hospital at Montreal, but the sick are sent either 
 to the general hospital or to Notre Dame. 
 
 Montreal is the largest city in Canada, and the advantages of its 
 situation make it one of the great centers of trade on the American 
 continent It contains factories of all kinds, several shipbuilding 
 establishments, and machine shops for construction of steam engines 
 and boilers. Supplies of all kinds may be procured for vessels. 
 
 In 1891 the census showed the population to be 216,650, of whom the 
 greater number are of French descent. 
 
 The United States is represented by a consul-general and vice-consul- 
 general. . 
 
 Wharfage.— Along the bank of the river is an extensive line ot 
 quays and warehouses, which are in course of extension. There are 
 about 4^ statute miles of wharfage for vessels of 21^ feet draft, and 
 over a mile for drafts of 10 feet. And in addition, the basins of Lachine 
 Canal afford to vessels of 18 feet draft a wharfage of § mile, and for 
 vessels of 12 feet draft 2% miles. This wharfage is afibrded by the locks 
 described hereafter. 
 
 Docks.— There are two docks, but only one is suitable for seagoing 
 vessels; that is 300 feet long, 45 feet broad, and has a depth of 10 
 feet water over the sills. There are two machine establishments con- 
 nected with the dry docks, and several smaller ones along the river 
 front. 
 
 ■3. 
 
a tor i^ilotage to 
 
 \,t Montreal from 
 ter so as to over- 
 3 of the city, and 
 Hence it is that 
 lals, and that the 
 B Richelieu Itiver, 
 BS where they or 
 I there are many 
 ft may be secured. 
 ' the ice, and that 
 mce; but, from all 
 ange in the main 
 and flats of Lake 
 the lake, but with- 
 1. 
 
 the tower of the 
 once daily, except 
 s a ball, which is 
 before signal, and 
 dian, equivalent to 
 
 jick are sent either 
 
 advantages of its 
 on the American 
 reral 8hii)building 
 1 of steam engines 
 for vessels. 
 6,650, of whom the 
 
 :al and vice-consul- 
 extensive line of 
 onsion. There are 
 VI^ feet draft, and 
 e basins of Lachine 
 ) of % mile, and for 
 forded by the locks 
 
 itable for seagoing 
 has a depth of 10 
 sstablishments con- 
 ies along the river 
 
 ST, LAWRENCE RIVER ABOVE MONTREAL. 371 
 
 Navigation opens about April 23 and closes December 16. The first 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE BIVEB ABOVE MONTREAL. 
 
 f««?t°«!r* Remark8.-Under ordinary conditions, vessels drawing 9 
 
 dTl?H ^*'''''*\'^'*'^^'' ^^^"^^* fr^"^ *^'>°tr«''^' to Ogdensbfrg 
 during the season of navigation (May to November, inclusive). OcJL 
 sionally however, the water falls to a level renderiig it impracticaWe 
 
 tZ TuZ^t:: ''''''T'''' "''^" ^^^^^°^ -«- th'an 8 feet 6 
 
 J^^ ?rrf ?' ""^ *^* Morrisburg Lock No. 23 are such that pro- 
 fZ i; '>;^'l' '' '' '''' ^^''^'"' ^"d paddle boats 180 feefw 
 
 tt bck fnTlir r ^''^7f """'' ' ''''^ «^" P^««- Tins is the smaS: 
 est lock m the system and determines the size of the largest vessel 
 tha can pass through; it is also the governing point for load^ ' 
 The distance from Montreal to Ogdensburg is 119 miles, of which 
 75^ IS river and 43^ canal navigation. ' ^ 
 
 and orr,T ''""^ '"•'^"''"'^ ^'^ ™^^^" '^^ ^'^''^Se between Montreal 
 and Ogdensburg ,s, gomg up, 8 days; going down, 6 days- both eVd 
 
 po'siir'"'^ the time in dock necessai/to place the'pio„:t 
 
 Jn^ZVLmT:^"'' ^,7'?' ""'^ P""'*^"^ '''"^ P«^"t to point, 
 going up ,s $400 for the smallest vessel that requires pontooning and 
 from that up to $1,200 for vessels of 600 tons nooning, and 
 
 Steamers going through will shorten the passage by turning over the 
 propeller, although this is not required. In any event tie sunplv o^ 
 coal need not exceed that required for three days^ f„ll steairing^"^ The 
 company assumes no liability whatever for the safety of the wssels 
 while in their hands, but they propose to furnish powerfu tugs and 
 
 """r*'°V';-'''? '"^ "" '^^''''^ '^''^ l'«««'»^'« precaution ' 
 
 The facilities for coaling at Ogdensburg are good ; Revnoldsville soft 
 coal averages about $4.25 per ton of 2,000 poumls, ;nd iL besrlrade^ 
 of anthracite average from $5.50 to $5.75 per sh^-t to There i^ an 
 ample water front of 13 feet depth alongside the storehouses and coa" 
 will be furnished there or from a scow in the stream 
 
 Sea stores and vessels' supplies can be had in Ogdensburg, and there 
 IS ample service in the way of repairs to machinery. ^' "^ 
 
 feetlonrfitir/'"?/'' ^l''^' ^^t«»-«ght wooden tanks about 40 
 Sfp^H^'f T^^^^ °" *^^ "'""^ *^'"^^^« *« «»« «l"P's shape: one is 
 placed under each quarter while the ship is in dock, and tlfe wo are 
 
 re"ktl7 re?^*^^^^^^ "'^'""^ '''^ «"^- side!'"ndTi„r 
 
 forward ton ends of thi I" ''"'' ''"""' '''' *''«» «««"red to the 
 lorward top ends of the pontoons, passed through the hawse pipes. 
 
 miimjti»tmmm^BHM»' 
 
372 
 
 ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 
 
 I'- 
 
 taken to the capstan, and hove well taut to prevent the pontoons from 
 sagging astern. The joint capacity of the pontoons is 140 tons net. 
 
 The lock chambers of the St. Lawrence Canals are now being enlarged 
 from their present dimensions of 200 feet by 45 feet, with 9 feet water 
 on the sills. Several of these lock chambers are already completed. 
 
 Starting from Montreal the first canal reaches Lachine, extending 
 from Montreal to the village of Lachine, overcoming the St. Louis 
 Bapids, the first series of rapids which bar the ascent of the St. Law- 
 lence. This canal is 8J statute miles in length. 
 
 The Beauharnois Canal commences on the south side of the St. Law- 
 rence, 15 miles from the head of the I-achine. It connects Lakes St. 
 Louis and St. Francis, and passes three rapids known as the Cascades, 
 the Cedars, and the Coteau. The length of this canal is llj statute 
 
 miles. 
 
 From the head of the Beauharnois Canal to the foot of the Cornwall, 
 the next in order, there is a navigable stretch through Lake St. Fran- 
 cis of nearly 33 miles, at the end of which are the Long Sanet Rapids, 
 beyond whicli extends the Cornwall Canal, 11^ statute miles long. 
 
 Five miles from the head of the Cornwall, Farran Point Rapid is 
 overcome by a canal ^ mile long. Ten miles beyond this the Rapide 
 Plat Canal, 4 statute miles long, enables vessels to avoid the Plat Rap- 
 ids. Five miles further the asceudlug vessel reaches the Galop Canal, 
 7g statute miles in length. 
 
 As before stated, under ordinary circumstances vessels drawing 9 
 feet can be brought from Montreal to Ogdensburg, but during a low 
 river, usually occurring in the fall, only 8^ feet can be carried between 
 these points. 
 
he pontoons from 
 s 140 tons net. 
 )w being enlarged 
 with 9 feet water 
 ady completed, 
 achine, extending 
 ng the St. Louis 
 t of the St. Law- 
 
 le of the St. Law- 
 )nnects Lakes St. 
 1 as the Cascades, 
 aal is 11^ statute 
 
 t of the Cornwall, 
 gh Lake St. Fran- 
 >ng Sauet Bapids, 
 te miles long. 
 ,n Point Rapid is 
 i this the Bapide 
 eoid the Plat Rap- 
 } the Galop Canal, 
 
 vressels drawing 9 
 
 but during a low 
 
 )e carried between 
 
 CANALS. 
 
 J 
 
 5 « « «« ti,-a 
 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 
 ^S3 0> JJ 8» Jj J* t- 1- 0> 0> 01 lO 
 
 ^'Qi'S !S!SI!S!3tS!3$|!3!S$ S3 U 
 
 •50-0 
 
 1-9 V, 
 
 .s 
 
 a 
 I 
 
 I 
 i 
 
 e 
 I 
 
 ^ 
 
 i%% %i%%%t^%ii 3 s 
 
 
 Is a«i2 §S agi2«§ s 
 
 I 
 
 f^ w ^f 
 
 ■ el 
 
 I n 
 • o 
 
 • « 
 
 II 
 
 : H ? : 
 
 :«? ; : 
 
 • £"3 " .5 
 
 o be 
 
 " 3 
 
 J 
 
 4S 
 
 e 
 
 II 
 
 el 
 a « « 
 
 :£^ 
 
 : : :r^ 
 i I :..5^ . 
 
 M :•! : :« "Sis 
 
 el ' ' el 9 •"SO*"'^ 
 
 0000 o^ e ? o e S ef V 
 
 
 c4^iA<Dc<*aoa>o>He4c4 
 
 5SL 
 
 373 
 
 i 
 
 MMi 
 
 NiiiiMHiiii'Ti'riiiiifiMiliiiii 
 
 IliM 
 
 r 
 
» : /- -»', 
 
 M 
 
"^ 
 
 I>TDEX. 
 
 Abatis 355 
 
 Petit 355 
 
 Abouchagan River 95 
 
 Aggermore Rock 93 
 
 Agwanus River 264 
 
 Aid Islet 247 
 
 Airy Cape 247 
 
 Aitkins Point 134 
 
 buoy 135 
 
 A I'Aigle Cape 356 
 
 light.... 356 
 
 Alberton 152 
 
 Alchorn Point 115 
 
 AlcideRock.. 214 
 
 buoy 214 
 
 Aldouin River 102 
 
 Alemek Bay 178 
 
 — : Little Bay 178 
 
 Alexander Point 179 
 
 Algernon or South Rock 334 
 
 light 334 
 
 Alluvial Hill 288 
 
 Alright Cape 39 
 
 Island 39 
 
 Reef 39 
 
 Alston Point 184 
 
 American Bank 198 
 
 Amet Isle 81 
 
 light. 82 
 
 Shoals 82 
 
 Sound 81 
 
 directions 83 
 
 tides 83 
 
 Amherst Fort 115 
 
 Harbor 40 
 
 directions 45 
 
 ■ ice .-• 41 
 
 tides ...i 45 
 
 Island 40,42 
 
 ice report 43 
 
 light 43 
 
 Ammonite Point 269 
 
 Reef 269 
 
 Anchor Island 233,267 
 
 Keef 233 
 
 I'age. 
 
 Andromache Rocks 42 
 
 Ange Gardien lights 361 
 
 Anse k Giles _ 331 
 
 Anticosti Island 46 
 
 aspect of coast- . 50, 53 
 
 banks off north 
 
 coast 22 
 
 caution £3, 24 
 
 climate 47 
 
 communication ... 47 
 
 currents 23 
 
 direction boards.. 48 
 
 exports 47 
 
 fisheries 47 
 
 harbors . . 1 47 
 
 ice report 48 
 
 lights.. 48 
 
 north coast 58 
 
 North Point, bea- 
 con 54 
 
 passage north of. . 22 
 
 passage south of. . 28 
 
 population 47 
 
 productions 47 
 
 provision posts... 48 
 
 Rivers 47 
 
 South Point, bea- 
 con 50 
 
 Southwest Point . . 51 
 
 telegraph signal 
 
 stations 48 
 
 tides 56 
 
 to Point de Monts. 24 
 
 West Cliff, beacon. 54 
 
 West Point 53 
 
 Antigonish *. . 70 
 
 Harbor 70 
 
 tides 70 
 
 Antrobns Point 844 
 
 Appeetetat Bay 265 
 
 Apple Island 216 
 
 Arignole Bay 212 
 
 Cape. 212 
 
 Reef 212 
 
 ArisaigPier 71 
 
 Village 71 
 
 375 
 
 mmtum 
 
 mmiM^aismmmeimm^m^mwmmm^isgsima^fss^^- 
 
376 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 5^ 
 
 Paga 
 
 Arnold Bluflf buoy..' 201 
 
 Artimon Bank. 31 
 
 Atlantic Cove 32 
 
 Audubon Isle 258 
 
 Point 257 
 
 Rocks 258 
 
 Augustin Cove 124 
 
 Aux Mouch^a River 240 
 
 Aylesbury Cape. 147 
 
 Aylmer Sound 247 
 
 BagotBlufif 50 
 
 fog signal 50 
 
 light 50 
 
 Rock 50 
 
 BalanceCape. 207 
 
 Bald Cape 95 
 
 BallantyneCove. 70 
 
 Banks Point 138 
 
 Banquerau Bank - 20 
 
 Bar Reef 804,322 
 
 Barachois darbor 85 
 
 Bare Rock 211 
 
 Rocks 251 
 
 Bamaby Island 211 
 
 Road 211 
 
 Shoal .-— 211 
 
 Barometer 9 
 
 Barque Cove 806 
 
 Barre d, Boulard 365 
 
 Barreau Boint 170 
 
 Barrett Ledges 812 
 
 buoys 313 
 
 Barrier Reefs 229 
 
 Barrio Head 68 
 
 Bai-tiboqne Island 165 
 
 lights 165 
 
 River 165 
 
 Pajte. 
 
 Bathurst Harbor 184 
 
 anchorage 184 
 
 Bar 185 
 
 buoys 184 
 
 communication .. 185 
 
 lights - 185 
 
 (or Indian) Island. 184 
 
 pilots 185 
 
 River 185 
 
 tides 186 
 
 Batiscan lights 365 
 
 Battery Point (Charlottetown) 113 
 
 (Pictou) 74 
 
 Shoal 119 
 
 Batture des Grondines 365 
 
 Gordin 365 
 
 Basin (Amherst Island) 42 
 
 (Coacoacho Bay) 258 
 
 (Frigate Harbor) 226 
 
 . r (Tatamagouche Bay) 85 
 
 Head 139 
 
 Island 325 
 
 Bason River 280 
 
 Basque Cape 323 
 
 Harbor 40 
 
 Island 216 
 
 Islands. 283 
 
 — Reefs 216 
 
 Road 323 
 
 Basse Bay - 1"9 
 
 Bathurst 185 
 
 Bauld Cape 220 
 
 Bay of Rocks 244,323 
 
 Verte 91 
 
 directions 93 
 
 Bayfield Island 68 
 
 Beacon Island 251 
 
 Islet (Bonne Esperance har 
 
 bor) 
 
 (Little Natashquan) . . 
 
 Bear Bay. 
 Cape . 
 
 light, 
 tides. 
 
 232 
 
 364 
 
 54 
 
 108 
 
 108 
 
 108 
 
 54 
 
 54 
 
 beacon 54 
 
 Hill 58 
 
 Reef.. - 108 
 
 marks 108 
 
 Head. 
 
 Cliff. 
 
 Beaubdre Island 168 
 
 — -tides 168 
 
 Beanjen Bank. 
 
 buoys 336 
 
 Channels. 336,338 
 
 ■ to pass east of 338 
 
 to pass west of 338 
 
 Beaumont 343 
 
 Reefs... 343 
 
 . buoy 343 
 
 Beauport ......?... 347 
 
 Bank. 347 
 
 buoy - 347 
 
 Beaver Point 186 
 
 B6caucour Traverse 366 
 
 Becket River 61 
 
 Becscie River 52 
 
 telegraph 48 
 
 BedequeBay : 124 
 
Pajje. 
 
 184 
 
 nchorage 184 
 
 Jar 185 
 
 luoya 184 
 
 otninunication .. 185 
 
 ights - 185 
 
 3r Indian) Island. 184 
 
 lilots 185 
 
 185 
 
 les 186 
 
 865 
 
 darlottetown) 113 
 
 tctou) 74 
 
 oal 119 
 
 lines 365 
 
 865 
 
 220 
 
 244,323 
 
 91 
 
 itions 93 
 
 68 
 
 251 
 
 ne Esperance har- 
 
 r). 232 
 
 ;le Natashquan) - . 264 
 
 54 
 
 108 
 
 108 
 
 108 
 
 54 
 
 54 
 
 )eacon 54 
 
 58 
 
 108 
 
 1 108 
 
 168 
 
 tides 168 
 
 336 
 
 loys 336 
 
 liannels. 336,338 
 
 i pass east of 338 
 
 i pass west of 338 
 
 342 
 
 342 
 
 buoy 342 
 
 ?... 347 
 
 347 
 
 noy - 347 
 
 186 
 
 erse 366 
 
 61 
 
 52 
 
 egraph - - - 48 
 
 .■ 124 
 
 INDEX. 377 
 
 Page. 
 
 Bedeque Bay buoyage 125 
 
 directions 125 
 
 Harlxjr 124 
 
 directions 126 
 
 ice 125 
 
 lights 125 
 
 tides 126 
 
 Bedford Bay.. 143 
 
 Bell Point no 
 
 Reef 110 
 
 River 50 
 
 Belle Chasse Island 341 
 
 light.--. 341 
 
 Belledune Point 186 
 
 Bellefine River 345 
 
 Belle Isle 219 
 
 fog signals 220 
 
 lights 219 
 
 provision depot 220 
 
 Strait 220 
 
 currents 13,200 
 
 fogs 222 
 
 ice 232 
 
 navigation.. 222 
 
 soundings 220 
 
 tides 220 
 
 Belles Amours Harbor 227 
 
 directions... 228 
 
 Point 227 
 
 Shoal 227 
 
 tides 328 
 
 water 228 
 
 Belloni Point light 185 
 
 Bergeman Point 90 
 
 Bergeron Coves 301 
 
 Bernache Point 179 
 
 Bersimis Point 393 
 
 River 297 
 
 Bar 298 
 
 lights 397 
 
 tides 298 
 
 Berthier 340 
 
 East Point 340 
 
 Rocks 340 
 
 Betchewun Harbor. 268 
 
 directions 268 
 
 — tides.. 269 
 
 — — Inner Harbor 268 
 
 Betty Point 73 
 
 tides 73 
 
 Bic Island 212 
 
 anchorage 214 
 
 — ; beacons 213 
 
 — northeast reef 214 
 
 Vage. 
 
 Bic Island northwest reef 213 
 
 soundings 316 
 
 southeast reef 313 
 
 tides J 215 
 
 water 213 
 
 west grounds - 214 
 
 Old Harbor. 313 
 
 Road. 312 
 
 Bicoiiues Islets 313 
 
 Bicquette Channel 213 
 
 directions 26 
 
 Island 212 
 
 fog signal 213 
 
 light 212 
 
 Reefs 213 
 
 Big Cove 105 
 
 — Dick Rock 33 
 
 — Tignish River 133 
 
 lights 152 
 
 Billhook Island 147 
 
 lights 148 
 
 Point. 133 
 
 Birch Channel 274 
 
 Islands 374 
 
 Point (Miscou) 173 
 
 (Prince Edward Is- 
 land) 134 
 
 (Shediac Bay) 95 
 
 fog whistle 174 
 
 light... 174 
 
 signal station 174 
 
 - 33 
 
 caution 34 
 
 fog signal 84 
 
 light 34 
 
 soundings 34 
 
 tides 34 
 
 Bird rocks 
 
 toAnticosti 21 
 
 Bislslet 230 
 
 Black Islet 260 
 
 Jack Cove 319 
 
 Ledge 251 
 
 Point (Cascapediac Bay) 192 
 
 (Heron channel) 186 
 
 (Little Rustico) 144 
 
 (St. Lawrence Bay) ... 58 
 
 Pond 139 
 
 Reef 348 
 
 River 164,323 
 
 Rock 58,109 
 
 Rock Point 108 
 
 Blackhouse Point 112 
 
 lights 112 
 
 Blackland Point 170 
 
 • 111 WIOTMIIlTrill'iIlllliWlTi'J 
 
 bi^fe5»a A< riaii«^ 
 

 378 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Blanchard Point 182 
 
 Blanc Bablon Bay 226 
 
 Blaskowitz Point 280 
 
 Bine Cape 68 
 
 Blnff Head 241 
 
 Boat Harbor 75 
 
 Islands 249 
 
 Bold Islet 245 
 
 Rock 282 
 
 Bonami Point 188 
 
 light 188 
 
 Rocks 188 
 
 Bonaventure Island lOfi 
 
 Point... 193 
 
 anchorage 198 
 
 River 198 
 
 BondesirCape 801 
 
 Bonne Esperance Harbor 281 
 
 directions- 282,288 
 
 . snpplies 282 
 
 tides 282 
 
 Island. 
 
 Boot Point 247 
 
 Boss Point 98 
 
 Spit 98 
 
 Boucherrille Islands 370 
 
 BoughtonBar 137 
 
 Bay 187 
 
 Island 137 
 
 Ledge 187 
 
 Narrows 188 
 
 Point 187 
 
 River 137 
 
 tides 137 
 
 settlements 138 
 
 Spit 187 
 
 Bonle Bay 282 
 
 Islands 282 
 
 Islet 240 
 
 Bonleanx Point - 95 
 
 Boulet Islet 235,241 
 
 Boussier Bay 252 
 
 Bowen Rock 26'; 
 
 Bowman Bank 69 
 
 Head - 68 
 
 Brackley Point 145 
 
 BradoreBay 325 
 
 . Harbor 225 
 
 aspect of coast 227 
 
 directions 226 
 
 tides 226 
 
 Hills 226 
 
 Branche Cape 856 
 
 Brandy Pots 311 
 
 PaKO. 
 
 Brandy Pots Bank 818 
 
 anchorage 812 
 
 Channel 812 
 
 light 312 
 
 Bras St. Nicholas 331 
 
 Breaking Ledge 238 
 
 BricePoint 137 
 
 Brideau Point 181 
 
 Brighton Beach 118 
 
 lightB 113 
 
 Brockelby Head 181 
 
 River 122 
 
 Bmce Point. - 137 
 
 Brudenell Island 184 
 
 Point 134 
 
 River 186 
 
 Bmin Cape 95 
 
 Bml6 anchorage 85 
 
 Bank. 858 
 
 Cape 199,856 
 
 lights 856 
 
 CnldeSac 858 
 
 Harbor 85 
 
 Peninsula 84 
 
 Point (Northnmberland 
 
 Strait) 84 
 
 (Shippegan Harbor) . 178 
 
 Shoals 84 
 
 Bryon Island 84 
 
 fishing grounds 85 
 
 Reefs. 85 
 
 ' Shoal 35 
 
 tides 85 
 
 water 85 
 
 Buchan Point 280 
 
 River 280 
 
 Buchanan Point 120 
 
 Buctouche anchorage . . : 101 
 
 directions 100 
 
 Outer Bar 102 
 
 River 100 
 
 lights 100 
 
 Road 100 
 
 tides 101 
 
 Bull Rock 286 
 
 Buoyage, system of 8 
 
 Burnt Cape Ledge 358 
 
 Church Village 170 
 
 Island 317 
 
 Butt k Gaillard 856 
 
 Butte de Portage Hill 44 
 
 Ronde 89 
 
 .LaPetite .355 
 
 * 
 
 J: 
 
 :L.., 
 
818 
 
 anchorage 313 
 
 lel 812 
 
 312 
 
 331 
 
 232 
 
 187 
 
 181 
 
 112 
 
 ;hte 112 
 
 121 
 
 122 
 
 187 
 
 184 
 
 134 
 
 186 
 
 95 
 
 85 
 
 858 
 
 199,856 
 
 856 
 
 858 
 
 85 
 
 84 
 
 irthninberland 
 
 ;rait) 84 
 
 ppegan Harbor) . 178 
 
 84 
 
 84 
 
 ng grounds 35 
 
 !g 85 
 
 »1 35 
 
 s 85 
 
 Br 85 
 
 ,. 280 
 
 280 
 
 120 
 
 ■age..: 101 
 
 — directions 100 
 
 Bar 102 
 
 100 
 
 ights 100 
 
 100 
 
 101 
 
 226 
 
 of 2 
 
 B 358 
 
 llage 170 
 
 317 
 
 356 
 
 Hill 44 
 
 89 
 
 >etite .355 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 B*i*«p»!*!M*r(«i«i».". 
 
 W« Page. 
 
 Cabane Bay 43 
 
 Cabot Strait 5 
 
 ice 5 
 
 Cacard River 806 
 
 Caconna 314 
 
 Island 314 
 
 Rock 814 
 
 Calnmet River 290 
 
 Camille Monnt 210 
 
 Campbell Point Shoal 137 
 
 Campbelltown 190 
 
 lights 190 
 
 ■ tides 190 
 
 Canals ( St. Lawrence River) ... 871 , 378 
 
 Canard River 822 
 
 CanseaaPoint 115 
 
 Spit 115 
 
 bnoy 115 
 
 Ganso Bank 2I 
 
 Qnt 65 
 
 Cantwell Point 87 
 
 CapAl'Aigle 866 
 
 ^ light 856 
 
 laRoche 868 
 
 Rouge 864 
 
 Cape (see proper names). 
 
 Bretonlsland 57 
 
 west coast 67 
 
 — ' caution.. 67 
 
 — ■ currents. 67 
 
 ■ fisheries . 67 
 
 leTrou 44 
 
 The, village 99 
 
 Caplin River. 193 
 
 Capuchin Cove 207 
 
 Caraquette Bay isi 
 
 ice 181 
 
 — ■ Channel isi 
 
 directions 182 
 
 Harbor igi 
 
 Island 180 
 
 light 180 
 
 Shoal 180 
 
 tides 180,182 
 
 Cardigan Bay 132 
 
 Point.... 133 
 
 River 136 
 
 —directions 137 
 
 light 137 
 
 Shoal 133 
 
 buoys 135 
 
 Caribou Channel 80 
 
 directions 80 
 
 Caribou Harbor . 
 
 379 
 
 I'age. 
 -. 79 
 
 directions 79 
 
 tides 80 
 
 Island 78,331 
 
 light 79 
 
 Point 80,200 
 
 Reef 81 
 
 River 79 
 
 West Gully 79 
 
 Carleton 191 
 
 Bay 190 
 
 Head 124 
 
 Mountains 124, 191 
 
 Point 191 
 
 ligbt 191 
 
 Road 191 
 
 anchorage 191 
 
 —directions 193 
 
 tides 198 
 
 Carlisle, New 193 
 
 Point 193 
 
 Carouge anchorage 364 
 
 Point 364 
 
 Carousel Island 283 
 
 light 283 
 
 Carron Point 134 
 
 light 185 
 
 Cascapediac Bay 192 
 
 anchorage 192 
 
 buoys 192 
 
 — • — ■ directions 193 
 
 — ■ settlements 192 
 
 River 193 
 
 Cascnmpeque 152 
 
 anchorage 152 
 
 Bay 149 
 
 '■ directions 151 
 
 Harbor 149 
 
 ■Ice 
 
 lights 
 tides . . 
 
 note 
 
 Cassie Point. 
 
 - anchorage 
 light . 
 
 151 
 150 
 150 
 151 
 
 98 
 
 Cat Rocks 245 
 
 Catherine Pond 54 
 
 Caulfield Point 86 
 
 Caveau Point 59 
 
 Shoals 59 
 
 Cavendish Inlet 149 
 
 Cawee, Great, an .uorage 287 
 
 Cove 286 
 
 Island 286 
 
 »w»imJ?iriiiKtr!itei 
 
380 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 I '^ 
 
 Page. 
 
 Cawee, Qreat, Islands 280 
 
 anchorage... 287 
 
 directions ... 287 
 
 tides 287 
 
 Shoal 286 
 
 Ledge 28fl 
 
 Little Islands 28fl 
 
 Rock 286 
 
 Center Reef 251 
 
 Sand 860 
 
 Central Reef 264 
 
 Chain Islands 232 
 
 ChaleurBay 176 
 
 climate 176 
 
 directions 176 
 
 settlements 175 
 
 soundings 176 
 
 tides 175 
 
 Chamber Point 85 
 
 Champlain Village 366 
 
 lights 306 
 
 Chance Harbor 73 
 
 Channel Island 285 
 
 Patch 888 
 
 buoy 838 
 
 Shoals 838 
 
 Chapel Rock 885 
 
 Charles Cape lights 365 
 
 Harbor 209 
 
 directions 270 
 
 tides 269 
 
 Island 269 
 
 Charleton Point 54 
 
 Charlo River 187 
 
 Shoal 139 
 
 Charlottetown 116 
 
 anchorage 120 
 
 caution 119 
 
 - — charges 117 
 
 coal 117 
 
 communication 117 
 
 directions 117 
 
 Harbor 115 
 
 buoys 113 
 
 caution 113 
 
 hospital 117 
 
 lights 112 
 
 ice 117 
 
 pilots. 117 
 
 population 116 
 
 quarantine 117 
 
 supplies 117 
 
 telegraph 117 
 
 tides 117 
 
 CTia886 Point 2S8 
 
 Chatham 107 
 
 coal 108 
 
 quarantine 107 
 
 repairs 108 
 
 supplies 168 
 
 telegraph 107 
 
 tugs 167 
 
 Cliatte Cape 207 
 
 fog signal 207 
 
 light 207 
 
 signal station 207 
 
 to Matane River, aspect 
 
 of coast 207 
 
 River 206 
 
 Chaudiere River 864 
 
 Chtoe Bank 97 
 
 buoys 97 
 
 Point 98 
 
 coal 98 
 
 railroad 98 
 
 supplies 98 
 
 telegraph 98 
 
 Chetican Harbor 59 
 
 tides 60 
 
 Island 69 
 
 lights 60 
 
 Point 59 
 
 supplies 60 
 
 Cheval Point 104 
 
 Chicoutimi 808 
 
 River 308 
 
 Lights 808 
 
 China Point 121 
 
 Chockpish River 102 
 
 Church Point 100 
 
 lights , 100 
 
 Citrouille Point light 806 
 
 Claude River 206 
 
 Shoal 355 
 
 buoy 355 
 
 Clearwater Point 270 
 
 Shoals 270 
 
 CliflE Islands 249 
 
 Close Islet 247 
 
 Cloudberry Point 259 
 
 Shoal 258 
 
 Cluster Point 246 
 
 Coacoacho Basin 258 
 
 directions 257 
 
 Bay 257 
 
 River 258 
 
 tides 258 
 
 Coal Mine Cove 62 
 
 '«U.*t«*L'i<B Wrv^#i4 M>H!f ■ 4: 
 
P«gn. 
 
 , 2H'.\ 
 
 107 
 
 168 
 
 ine 1«7 
 
 168 
 
 168 
 
 h 167 
 
 107 
 
 207 
 
 gnal 207 
 
 207 
 
 1 station 207 
 
 tane River, aspect 
 
 oast 207 
 
 206 
 
 864 
 
 97 
 
 s 97 
 
 98 
 
 98 
 
 )ad 98 
 
 lies 98 
 
 raph 98 
 
 59 
 
 ides 60 
 
 59 
 
 ights 60 
 
 oint 59 
 
 applies 60 
 
 164 
 
 808 
 
 308 
 
 Lights 308 
 
 121 
 
 102 
 
 100 
 
 ts 100 
 
 ght 866 
 
 206 
 
 355 
 
 Y 355 
 
 270 
 
 1 270 
 
 249 
 
 247 
 
 259 
 
 -- 256 
 
 246 
 
 258 
 
 lirections 257 
 
 257 
 
 258 
 
 tides 258 
 
 62 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 381 
 
 Pagv. 
 Coal Point 72 
 
 CotaKiiHUiirhor nil 
 
 ■ Isliiml 00 
 
 Point iMJ 
 
 River km) 
 
 Cock Covo 10(1, 'JIO 
 
 buoy 11)0,210 
 
 Pf)int .- 2)0 
 
 Cod Bank 201. 2T» 
 
 Cody Point i;{i 
 
 Coffin Island 38 
 
 Cold Spring Head IM 
 
 light i)3 
 
 Cole Point t.^ 
 
 buoy 77 
 
 Collins Shoal(Mingan Islands) . .261.207 
 
 caution 267 
 
 Colombier Cape 299 
 
 Colquhonn Point 72 
 
 Columbine Shoals 88 
 
 Cohnlle Bay 133 
 
 River .' 138 
 
 Contrecci'ur 309 
 
 Conway Inlet 149 
 
 lights.- 149 
 
 Corbeau Cape a,'54 
 
 Cormorant Cape 280 
 
 Islets 280 
 
 Point (Anticosti) 49 
 
 (WapitagTin Har- 
 bor) 254 
 
 coast ,50 
 
 tides 56 
 
 Reef 281 
 
 Rocks ^. . 253 
 
 Coudres Bank 358 
 
 Island 350 
 
 Cove Head 1 44 
 
 lights 144 
 
 Island 250 
 
 Point 244 
 
 Crab Island 236 
 
 Craig Point 247 
 
 Craignish .■ 64 
 
 Crane Island 335 
 
 — beacons 336 
 
 light - : JJ35 
 
 prohibited anchorage . 336 
 
 Spit ,342 
 
 Crapaud 122 
 
 anchorage 123 
 
 buoyage 122 
 
 Channel 122 
 
 directions 123 
 
 Craiiaiid lightM. 
 Road . 
 
 Ill-c 
 
 tidt'H 
 
 Crescent Point 
 
 Crocodile Met 
 
 Croix Point 
 
 caution 
 
 Crooked Islands 
 
 CroMH Point 
 
 Crow Island 318 
 
 Cnunb Island . 
 
 Cumberland Cove 
 
 Harbor 
 
 directions 
 
 Island . 
 
 Curlew Point. 
 
 121 
 123 
 247 
 
 25H 
 284 
 284 
 288 
 21>3 
 342 
 235 
 124 
 230 
 230 
 239 
 259 
 
 D. 
 
 Dalhousie i89 
 
 communication 180 
 
 Harbor . . 188 
 
 anchorage 189 
 
 directions 190 
 
 ice 189 
 
 tides 189 
 
 Island 188 
 
 light 189 
 
 Mountain 73. 190 
 
 pilots 189 
 
 Point - 188 
 
 supplies 189 
 
 Daly Island , 245 
 
 Daniel Hill 195 
 
 Port ... 195 
 
 anchorage 195 
 
 supplies 195 
 
 Darnley Basin 148 
 
 lights 148 
 
 Inlet 147 
 
 Point 147 
 
 lights 147 
 
 Dartmouth River 200 
 
 Deadraan Pond 43, 58 
 
 Dean Shoal 03 
 
 buoy 63 
 
 Deep Bay 55 
 
 Hole 99 
 
 Demers Rock 313 
 
 buoy 313 
 
 Demoiselle Hill 40 
 
 Descente des Femmes Cove 306 
 
 D'Espoir Cape 196 
 
 fog signal 196 
 
 light 196 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 ma-^nT^»iUirta»a»fi«..r«ftfj^,^ -;( j rtff f 'aft11i i n te fM 'tni(-w nf»I I ! B fetf 
 
882 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 I'Mgl', 
 
 D'EHiM)ir Caiw telegraph IIW 
 
 tide* m 
 
 De Hiiliiberry Bay 244 
 
 Deviatimi of the compaHS 1 
 
 Diiil>le('ui»e 818 
 
 Diamond Ilarlwr 847 
 
 Dickson Wands 948 
 
 DivwWet 237 
 
 Dixon Point 100 
 
 Doctor Inland 81 
 
 Point 70 
 
 Reef 81 
 
 Spit 70 
 
 Doc-tors Point 134 
 
 Dog Islands 335 
 
 DogsOtpe 333 
 
 Donaxl'oint 188 
 
 Douglas Island 188 
 
 light 180 
 
 Roadstnad 100 
 
 
 Douglaotown 167,100 
 
 p.nchorage 100 
 
 Doyle Islands 347 
 
 ■ Reef 37 
 
 Du Lac Point 866 
 
 light 366 
 
 Duke Island 230 
 
 Dunk River 126 
 
 Dnnscombe Rock 335 
 
 Durantaye Point 341 
 
 Dutchman Little Rock 127 
 
 . Rock 127 
 
 Duthie Point 102 
 
 Dyke Island 248 
 
 B. 
 
 Eagle Cape 52,323 
 
 light 823 
 
 . Reef 53 
 
 Harbor 240 
 
 East Cape ( Anticosti ) 48 
 
 (Saguenay River) 307 
 
 Channel - 267 
 
 Island 36 
 
 Lake 130 
 
 Patch 82 
 
 Point ( Magdalen Islands) 37 
 
 (Pictou Island) 78 
 
 (Souris) 130 
 
 anchorage 140 
 
 caution - 140 
 
 fog signal 140 
 
 light - 140 
 
 tides 140 
 
 East River 73 
 
 buoy 77 
 
 Rock 226 
 
 Rocks 282 
 
 Saint Island 267 
 
 Eastern Harbor 60 
 
 lights. 60 
 
 Passage 82 
 
 tides 83 
 
 Narrows 358 
 
 Eboulements Bay 325 
 
 Mount 325 
 
 settlement 825 
 
 Echrtfaud Islet 822 
 
 Echemin River 848 
 
 Eden Islands 245 
 
 Egg Island 163,288 
 
 anchorage 280 
 
 directions 300 
 
 light 280 
 
 tides 200 
 
 water 280 
 
 Rocks 230 
 
 EglingtonCove 188 
 
 Point 188 
 
 Egmont Bank 127 
 
 Bay 127 
 
 tides 128 
 
 Cape 127 
 
 light 127 
 
 Eider Group 235 
 
 Elliot River 110 
 
 Ellis Bay 52 
 
 anchorage 62 
 
 directions 52 
 
 Reefs 62 
 
 tides 52 
 
 Elm Tree Point light 186 
 
 Emersion Point 64 
 
 Emery Island 258 
 
 Rocks 258 
 
 English Bank 810 
 
 Bay 204 
 
 Point 288 
 
 Enmore River 128 
 
 Enragee Point 50 
 
 Enter Islet 237 
 
 Entrance Island 248 
 
 Entry, Grand, Harbor 88 
 
 Island 42 
 
 anchorage 42 
 
 light 42 
 
 supplies 42 
 
 Ephraim Banks 93 
 
I'aii«. 
 
 78 
 
 77 
 
 886 
 
 883 
 
 867 
 
 60 
 
 <htH 60 
 
 fiHHHge 88 
 
 les 88 
 
 858 
 
 885 
 
 int 885 
 
 ement 825 
 
 , 883 
 
 848 
 
 845 
 
 163,888 
 
 rage 289 
 
 ions 890 
 
 289 
 
 290 
 
 289 
 
 839 
 
 188 
 
 188 
 
 127 
 
 187 
 
 1 188 
 
 187 
 
 it 187 
 
 835 
 
 110 
 
 58 
 
 ige 63 
 
 ns 62 
 
 62 
 
 52 
 
 ight 186 
 
 64 
 
 258 
 
 858 
 
 819 
 
 294 
 
 888 
 
 138 
 
 59 
 
 837 
 
 ... 843 
 
 irbor 38 
 
 48 
 
 shorage 42 
 
 It 43 
 
 (plies 48 
 
 93 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 883 
 
 Ephraini InlAnd U'.' 
 
 EsconinainH Islets 801 
 
 Hlver 801 
 
 Escmriinac t .j7 
 
 Point 157 
 
 bnoy 157 
 
 fog signal 157 
 
 light 157 
 
 Reef 157 
 
 signals 157 
 
 tolograph 157 
 
 tides 157 
 
 Es<iuinmux Bay 234 
 
 Cliannel 234 
 
 Harbor 271 
 
 (lireotions.. 234,378 
 
 supplies 271 
 
 tides 278 
 
 Island 271 
 
 Islands 281 
 
 Point 271 
 
 River 234 
 
 Etamamu River 853 
 
 Etang du Nord Inlet 43 
 
 Etemit6Cove 306 
 
 Evaua Point 72 
 
 Fair Island 235 
 
 Falcon Point 116 
 
 Fall River 280 
 
 Fame Point 204 
 
 light 204 
 
 signal station 204 
 
 Father Point 210 
 
 fog signal 210 
 
 light 210 
 
 signal station 310 
 
 F6rolle Point 331 
 
 Fifteen Point 127 
 
 .-beacon 127 
 
 settlement 127 
 
 Fin Rocks 244 
 
 Fish Harbor 340 
 
 Island 147 
 
 light , 148 
 
 Islet 233 
 
 Little, Harbor 334 
 
 Fisherman Channel 183 
 
 --Ledge 183 
 
 Fishermans Bank 108 
 
 Fishing Point 89 
 
 Fishing Point light 89 
 
 Fitzroy Rack 113 
 
 — buoy 118 
 
 I Five Leajines Harbor 330 
 
 — directions 330 
 
 j Point 828 
 
 Flat Inland 241 
 
 beacon 341 
 
 Point 65 
 
 I -—River lU 
 
 ! Rock 11)8 
 
 j light 198 
 
 i Rocks 227 
 
 Flenrant Point 187 
 
 Flowerpot Columns 874 
 
 ' Rock 198 
 
 i Fogs 7 
 
 Fort Old, Bay ... 885 
 
 Channel 335 
 
 Island 235 
 
 Point 307 
 
 Rocks 235 
 
 Forteau Bay 220 
 
 Fortune Bay 138 
 
 River 138 
 
 Foul Rock 3t6 
 
 Four Rocks 230 
 
 Four- fathoms Ridge 279 
 
 Fowler Point 187 
 
 FoxBay 55 
 
 Gully l,-)8 
 
 Harbor 89 
 
 Island 158 
 
 lights 158 
 
 Islands 340 
 
 Point 55 
 
 River 50 
 
 Eraser Farmlights 76 
 
 Fraserville 315 
 
 French Creek 108 
 
 Island 102 
 
 Point 55 
 
 River 73,163 
 
 Point 103 
 
 Village 163 
 
 Frenchman Barn Rock 71 
 
 Frigate Point 305 
 
 Fright Channel 336,271 
 
 Island 271 
 
 Q. 
 
 Gallows Point 130 
 
 Gamache River 53 
 
 Garde Rock 267 
 
 !! !' 
 
 
 ! ■ 
 
 ii ■ 
 
 .'S>^«4>4i£,7ftMiirj*»«arr BO^^)t:JA- ifj.t -nfj-n.-^^ 
 
384 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Pago. 
 
 Gasp^ Basin 200 
 
 buoys 201 
 
 caution 201 
 
 tides 201 
 
 Bay 198 
 
 anchorage 190 
 
 directions 201 
 
 winds 202 
 
 Cape 198 
 
 light and fog signal 198 
 
 current 16 
 
 Harbor.... 200 
 
 ice 201 
 
 Little 199 
 
 Spit 201 
 
 buoy 201 
 
 Gaspereaux River. 01 
 
 Gaudin Point 133 
 
 Spit _. 134 
 
 Gentilly Shoals 366 
 
 Village 366 
 
 Georgetown 132 
 
 anchorage 134 
 
 buoyage 135 
 
 coal 133 
 
 directions 135,136 
 
 lights 134 
 
 Harbor 132 
 
 entrance 134 
 
 ice 135 
 
 population 132 
 
 railway 133 
 
 supplies 133 
 
 telegraph 133 
 
 tides 136 
 
 Giddis Point 101 
 
 Gilmour Cove 167 
 
 Godbout River 292 
 
 anchorage 292 
 
 directions 292 
 
 tides 292 
 
 Goddard Islet 232 
 
 Rock.. 232 
 
 Goose Cape 324, 357 
 
 anchorage 325 
 
 light 324 
 
 Island 334 
 
 beacon 335 
 
 meadows 335 
 
 Reef 334 
 
 Lake 177 
 
 light 177 
 
 signal station . _ 177 
 
 Point 50 
 
 Vape. 
 
 Gore Islands 244 
 
 Gouifre River 355 
 
 Governor Island 113 
 
 Shoals 113 
 
 buoy 113 
 
 Graham Head 120 
 
 Ledge 132 
 
 Point 132 
 
 Grand Anse 58 
 
 Entry Harbor 38 
 
 fitang 204 
 
 Greve 199 
 
 Island .. 233,317 
 
 beacons 317 
 
 light 317 
 
 Metis Bay 209 
 
 River 209 
 
 Pabos 196 
 
 Point ... 225 
 
 River (Boughton Bay) 137 
 
 (Chaleur Bay) 196 
 
 (Richmond Bay) 146 
 
 fog signal 196 
 
 -light 196 
 
 Rustic© . _ 144 
 
 beacon 145 
 
 Harbor 144 
 
 directions . _ 145 
 
 lights. 145 
 
 tides 145 
 
 Grande Matte River 306 
 
 Point .: 356 
 
 Grandique Bank 98 
 
 Grandoon Island 165 
 
 Grange Rock 257 
 
 Grant Beach lights 165 
 
 Grasse Point 178 
 
 Grave Point 133 
 
 buoy 135 
 
 Gravois Point 87 
 
 Reef 88 
 
 Great Anse 184 
 
 Bay 184 
 
 Basque Island 283 
 
 BergeronCove 301 
 
 Bird Rock 34 
 
 fog signal 34 
 
 light. 34 
 
 Boule Island 283 
 
 CaweeCove 286 
 
 Island 286 
 
 Shoal 280 
 
 Fo.x River . .. 204 
 
 buoy 204 
 
 aBiWat/l'i Tifiili'^'llrfiiriTll 
 
 tsatsetmuBSsmeigm 
 
Vape. 
 
 244 
 
 5)55 
 
 113 
 
 113 
 
 buoy 113 
 
 13(> 
 
 183 
 
 132 
 
 58 
 
 rbor 38 
 
 204 
 
 199 
 
 233,317 
 
 aeons 317 
 
 :ht 317 
 
 T 209 
 
 ■er 209 
 
 IW) 
 
 225 
 
 3ughton Bay) 137 
 
 baleurBay) IflO 
 
 ichmondBay) 14(1 
 
 ; signal 198 
 
 ht 19f) 
 
 144 
 
 leacon 145 
 
 larbor 144 
 
 directions . _ 145 
 
 ights. 145 
 
 ides 145 
 
 iver 308 
 
 350 
 
 c 98 
 
 1 165 
 
 257 
 
 [its 165 
 
 178 
 
 133 
 
 y 135 
 
 87 
 
 88 
 
 184 
 
 184 
 
 iland 883 
 
 Cove 301 
 
 I 84 
 
 fog signal 34 
 
 ■light. 34 
 
 ,nd 283 
 
 ve 286 
 
 and 28i4 
 
 loal 280 
 
 r 204 
 
 buoy 204 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Great Fox River supplies 304 
 
 Lagoon.. , 87 
 
 Mecattina Island 341 
 
 Pilgrim Island 316 
 
 ■ Pokesuedie Island 178 
 
 light 178 
 
 Point , 173 
 
 Pond 204 
 
 Shemogue River ft5 
 
 Stone 353 
 
 Green Island (Esquimaux Harbor). 370 
 
 (Kegashka Bay) 360 
 
 — ; (St. Lawrence River), 
 
 216,313 
 
 anchorage 217, 314 
 
 fog signal 317 
 
 light 317 
 
 Reef 217,313 
 
 tides 317,314 
 
 Point 172 
 
 Greenly Island 234 
 
 fog signal 285 
 
 ■ light 335 
 
 Granville Harbor 145 
 
 caution 146 
 
 directions 146 j 
 
 lights 146 
 
 tides 146 
 
 Qribanno Cape 355 
 
 Griffin Cove 204 
 
 supplies 304 
 
 River _ 304 
 
 Grindstone Island 40 
 
 light 40 
 
 Point light 185 
 
 Gull Island (Magdalen Islands) 
 
 Islet (Labrador) 
 
 Rock 
 
 Gulnare Shoal 
 
 caution 
 
 Gun Island 35; 
 
 Gut of Canso _ _ 
 
 directions 
 
 light 
 
 tides 
 
 Grondines lights 365 
 
 tides 366 
 
 GrosCap 43 
 
 Cape 59 
 
 Grosse Isle (Magdalen Islands) 44 
 
 (St. Lawrence) 344 
 
 qiiarantine 343 
 
 Patch 343 
 
 buoys 343 
 
 Rock 343 
 
 Tail 344 
 
 Guarde Point I87 
 
 Guernsey Cove 108 
 
 Point 109 
 
 Gulf of St. Lawrence (see St. Law- 
 rence Gulf). 
 
 Gull (Caribou) Island 79 
 
 light 79 
 
 Island (Esquimaux Harbor).. 270 
 
 1151- 25 
 
 Harper Point light 
 Harrington Islands 
 Harry, Old. Head 
 Haszard Point 
 
 lights 
 
 Havre Bouche 
 
 Hay Island 
 
 Haystack Island 
 Heart Shoal 
 Heath Point 
 
 caution 
 
 fog signal 
 
 light 
 
 Reef 
 
 soiindings 
 
 tides 
 
 Heffernan Point 
 Henry Cape 
 
 Island 
 
 Reef 
 
 Hadlow Cove 
 
 Ha-ha Bay (Bic Channel) 
 
 (Labrador) 
 
 (Saguenay) 
 
 Haldimand Cape 
 
 River 
 
 Hamelle Harbor 
 
 Harbor Island 
 
 Point 
 
 Hare Harbor 
 
 anchorage, 
 
 directions 
 
 supplies 
 
 Island 
 
r 
 
 386 
 
 INDEX, 
 
 Page. 
 
 Heron Channel ^^^ 
 
 Islana.-J 1^8 
 
 anchorage 186 
 
 light 
 
 Rock 
 
 Herring Cove _ 
 
 Point light 
 
 Herriot Isles 
 
 Hervey Cove 
 
 Point 
 
 Reef 
 
 187 
 186 
 157 
 177 
 244 
 139 
 139 
 139 
 54 
 42 
 
 Hot Point 804 
 
 Indian Heart ..- 1^4 
 
 Island .- 134 
 
 (Bathurst). 1^4 
 
 Point (Bay Verte) «=' 
 
 406 
 100 
 187 
 
 HighCliflf Point 
 
 Rock 
 
 Hill Point 1^^ 
 
 Hillsborough Bay 1^2 
 
 -caution.. H"^ 
 
 lights - 112 
 
 River H^* 
 
 ^ tides 120 
 
 Holland Harbor 1;^^ 
 
 Horseshoe Shoal 1*^" 
 
 . Shoals 148 
 
 HortonPoint ^7 
 
 . Shoal (Miramichi Bay) .... 159 
 
 (Wallace Harbor) ... 87 
 
 . - buoys 100 
 
 . Spit 87 
 
 44 
 
 335 
 
 44 
 
 (Buctouche River) 
 
 .. lights 
 
 (Restigouche) 
 
 (St. Genevieve Har- 
 bor) 
 
 (Shippegan Gnlly) 
 
 lights 
 
 267 
 
 173 
 
 Rocks 11*^ 
 
 buoy 110 
 
 caution HO 
 
 marks HO 
 
 tides 
 
 Spit 
 
 buoy 
 light 
 
 110 
 124 
 125 
 125 
 
 Inman Point 12*^ 
 
 Rock 
 
 121 
 
 Inner 
 
 Hospital Cape. -- 
 
 — Rock (Goose Island) 
 
 . (Grindstone Island) . 
 
 Hotteurs River 280 
 
 House Harbor 40 
 
 Island 238 
 
 Hov^re Point 1^ 
 
 Huckleberry Gully 158 
 
 . . bitoy 158 
 
 ____ Island 158 
 
 Hulk Rock 274 
 
 Hunter River 145 
 
 Hunting Island 266 
 
 Huntley Rock H^ 
 
 Hydrographic Office, U. S. agents. . "' 
 .^ publica- 
 tions . 
 
 Birch Island 274 
 
 Islet 286 
 
 Island Harbor 241 
 
 of Ledges 225 
 
 Shoal 125 
 
 125 
 
 buoy 
 
 Isthmus Cove 229 
 
 water . 
 
 ■ Point. 
 
 J- 
 
 230 
 63 
 
 68 
 
 Jack Cape 
 
 Shoal - --- ®® 
 
 — caution 
 
 68 
 
 411 
 
 406 
 
 I. 
 
 5 
 369 
 
 Ice 
 
 He a la Bogue light 
 
 Pierrelight 308 
 
 — aux Prunes light 369 
 
 Raisinslight 368 
 
 -de Grace light. 308 ; Judique Bank 
 
 Jackson Point ®'^ 
 
 Jeremy Island 299 
 
 Jerome Ledge 59 
 
 Jerry Island ^9 
 
 John Bay °* 
 
 . Cape 
 
 . -River 
 
 JoliPort 
 
 I Jourimain anchorage 
 
 I _ Cape 
 
 i __ Islands ®4 
 
 liglit 94 
 
 tides 05 
 
 Shoals 04 
 
 — anchorage 04 
 
 65 
 
 84 
 84 
 331 
 94 
 94 
 
 -St. Th6rese lights. 
 • Verte 
 
 369 
 224 
 
 — clearing marks 65 
 
 Shota. 
 
 64 
 
•Pftg''- 
 
 304 
 
 124 
 
 " 124 
 
 lurst). 184 
 
 Verte) »=» 
 
 oucheEiver) -.. 40(J 
 
 lights 100 
 
 igouche) - • 187 
 
 Oenevieve Har- 
 
 ) 367 
 
 ppegan Gnlly) 
 
 Its 178 
 
 110 
 
 110 
 
 on 110 
 
 ■s 110 
 
 110 
 
 124 
 
 125 
 
 ""' , 125 
 
 123 
 
 ...- 121 
 
 d"! 374 
 
 286 
 
 '"[ 241 
 
 "//. 225 
 
 125 
 
 r... 125 
 
 229 
 
 tor" 230 
 
 63 
 
 J- 
 
 68 
 
 \[ 68 
 
 on - 88 
 
 93 
 
 299 
 
 59 
 
 89 
 
 84 
 
 84 
 
 ] 84 
 
 '/_"_ 331 
 
 orage 8* 
 
 > 94 
 
 ids 91 
 
 — light 94 
 
 — tides 95 
 
 lis 94 
 
 — anchorage 94 
 
 65 
 
 ilearing marks 65 
 
 64 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Vane. 
 
 Jnditiue Shoal buoy 65 
 
 Pond 04 
 
 Jtipiter River ... ,., 47 
 
 telegraph . 48 
 
 Just au Corps ($3 
 
 K. 
 
 Kamourasca Bay. 
 
 318 
 
 anchorage 318 
 
 Islands :{18 
 
 beacons 318 
 
 Kegashka Bay -iaQ 
 
 directions 260 
 
 supplies 260 
 
 Point 260 
 
 River 361 
 
 Kenogam Lake 308 
 
 Kettle Rock 050 
 
 Kildare Cape t53 
 
 River 149 
 
 King Head 71 
 
 Knight Point 139 
 
 lights 139 
 
 Knoll Shoal 134 
 
 l>«oy 135 
 
 Konchibouguac Bay 105 
 
 River 105 
 
 tides 105 
 
 Kouchibougnacsis River 105 
 
 Kouchibougnet River 95 
 
 L. 
 
 L'Abatis Beach 335 
 
 L'Ange Gardien lights 361 
 
 L'AnsetH'Eau 305 
 
 LaBaieBank 355 
 
 Cape . 355 
 
 — Bonle Point 305 
 
 — Croix Poini 50 
 
 — Fleur River 345 
 
 — Grande Bale 307 
 
 — MoucheBank 347 
 
 — Niche 306 
 
 — Petite Butte Ronde 355 
 
 — Romaine River C39 ! 
 
 — Valtrie lights 359 i 
 
 Labrador climate 034 ! 
 
 coast-. 323 
 
 codflshery 324 
 
 currents 333 
 
 inhabitants 324 
 
 productions 324 
 
 Lake Island 354 
 
 Lalime Point 190 
 
 I'ttge. 
 
 Langlais Point light 365 
 
 LurgeChannel 374 
 
 Island. 378 
 
 Rocks 287 
 
 Lark Cove 319 
 
 Island _ 219 
 
 Met 303, .•)"-2 
 
 fog signal .' 332 
 
 light 323 
 
 Spit 304 
 
 Patch 323 
 
 Point 303 
 
 Reef 388 
 
 Laurent, St., Caiie 92 
 
 Shoal 93 
 
 Laval Bay 399 
 
 anchorage 399 
 
 Island 899 
 
 Lawrence, St., Gulf (we Gulf of 
 
 St. Lawrence). 
 Riv«r (see St, Law- 
 rence River) . 
 
 Lazy Bay.. 89 
 
 Le Havre Cove 356 
 
 Leagues Reef. 339 
 
 Leander Shoal. 196 
 
 Leards Range 133 
 
 Ledge Point 357 
 
 Leggat Shoals I66 
 
 Lennox Island 146 
 
 settlement 146 
 
 L'fiternite Cove 306 
 
 Les Islets buoys 361 
 
 Leslie Cove 49 
 
 Levis _ 348 
 
 Point 342,349 
 
 docks 349 
 
 Reef 843 
 
 Shoal 343 
 
 Lewis Head 91 
 
 Reef 91 
 
 Light, Al'Aigle 356 
 
 Algernon or South Rock 334 
 
 Amherst Island. 43 
 
 Ange Gardien. 361 
 
 Anticosti Island 48 
 
 Bagot Bluff 50 
 
 Heath Point 49 
 
 SW. Point. 51 
 
 West Point 53 
 
 Bartiboque I65 
 
 Bathurst Harbor 185 
 
 Batiscan 365 
 
 Bear Cape 108 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 
 ^ 
 

 f 
 
 388 
 
 Light. 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 I'ttgO. 
 
 BelleChasse 341 
 
 We 319 
 
 Belloni Point l^"* 
 
 Bersiiuis River 297 
 
 Page. 
 
 Light, Flat Rock ^^ 
 
 —Fox Island 1^ 
 
 FraserFarra "^^ 
 
 198 
 
 . • Bicquette Island - - 212 
 
 Big Tignish River 152 
 
 Billhtfok Island W8 
 
 Birch Point ---- ^''^ 
 
 BirdRocks. » 34 
 
 Blackhouse Point 112 
 
 Bonarai Point l^^ 
 
 . Brandy Pots _ 312 
 
 -Brighton Beach 112 j 
 
 Bnile Cape 3.)0 
 
 -Buctouche River 10^ 
 
 Campbelltown 1^0 i 
 
 Capal'Aigle 356 
 
 Caraqiiette Island 180 
 
 ^ Cardigan River 187 j 
 
 Caribou Island 79 ; 
 
 ■ Carleton Point 1^1 | 
 
 Carousel Island 283 j 
 
 Carron Point 1^5 j 
 
 Cascumpeque Harbor 150 j 
 
 ChatteCape.. 207 , 
 
 Champlain village.. 366 I 
 
 Charles Cape 365 j 
 
 _- Charlottetown 112 j 
 
 . Chetican Island 60 1 
 
 _ Chicoutimi River 308 
 
 Church Point 100 
 
 Citronille Point 366 
 
 Cold Spring Head 92 
 
 Conway Inlet 149 
 
 CoveHead 144 
 
 Crane Island 335 
 
 _ Dalhousie Island 189 
 
 _ Damley Basin 148 
 
 —Point 147 
 
 d'EspoirCape 1^6 
 
 —Douglas Island 189 
 
 DuLacPoint. 366 
 
 _ Eagle Cape 323 
 
 EastPoint 140 
 
 _ EaBtern Harbor 60 
 
 Egg Island 289 
 
 . EgmontCape 127 
 
 Elm TreePoint 186 
 
 Entry Island 42 
 
 Escuminac Point - - - 157 
 
 FamePoint 204 
 
 Father Point 210 
 
 Fish Island. 148 
 
 Fishing Point 89 
 
 QaspeCape 
 
 Georgetown 134 
 
 -GooseCape 324 
 
 ■ Grand Island 317 
 
 River 196 
 
 Rnstico 145 
 
 -Grant Beach 1^5 
 
 - Great Bird Rock 34 
 
 Pokesuedie 178 
 
 - Green Island 217 
 
 -Greenly Island 225 
 
 - Grenville Harbor 146 
 
 -Grindstone Island 40 
 
 Point 185 
 
 Grondines.-- 365 
 
 • Gull (Caribou Island) 79 
 
 • GutofCanso 67 
 
 -Harper Point 177 
 
 - Haszard Point 112 
 
 - Havre Bouche Harbor 67 
 
 -Hay Island 166 
 
 -Heath Point 49 
 
 -Heron Island 187 
 
 -Herring Point,. 177 
 
 - Hillsborough Bay 112 
 
 IleAlaBogue 80« 
 
 .. Pierre 368 
 
 a>ix Prunes 369 
 
 Raisins .-- 368 
 
 de Grace 368 
 
 St. Th6rese. 369 
 
 - IndianPoint 100, 173 
 
 Spit 125 
 
 - Jourimain Islands 94 
 
 -Knight Point.-- 139 
 
 -L'Ange Gardien 361 
 
 -LaValtrie 369 
 
 -Langlais Point 365 
 
 -Lark Islet 322 
 
 - Lighthouse Point 76 
 
 -Limekiln Bank 167 
 
 - Little Belledune Point 186 
 
 -Long Pilgrim 316 
 
 - Lotbiniere 365 
 
 - Lower Neguao 169 
 
 -MabouHarbor - 62 
 
 - Macquereau Point . 195 
 
 - Magdalen Cape 205 
 
 - Malpeqiie Harbor 147, 148 
 
 - Margaree River 61 
 
 -Martin River 206 
 
Page. 
 
 198 
 
 168 
 
 \ 76 
 
 198 
 
 """ 134 
 
 334 
 
 a" 317 
 
 196 
 
 ICO 145 
 
 h 165 
 
 lock 34 
 
 uedie l'''^ 
 
 i 217 
 
 and 235 
 
 arbor 146 
 
 Island 40 
 
 Point 185 
 
 865 
 
 onlsland) 79 
 
 3o 67 
 
 at 177 
 
 int 112 • 
 
 ihe Harbor 67 
 
 166 
 
 It 49 
 
 id 187 
 
 nnt 177 
 
 jhBay 112 
 
 [ue 369 
 
 rre 368 
 
 unes 369 
 
 lisins --- 368 
 
 ce . ^ 368 
 
 jrese .- 369 
 
 at 100,173 
 
 t 125 
 
 Islands 94 
 
 •int.- 139 
 
 ardien..- 361 
 
 , 369 
 
 Point 365 
 
 ; 332 
 
 se Point 76 
 
 Bank 167 
 
 ledune Point 186 
 
 rrim 316 
 
 B 365 
 
 iguac 169 
 
 irbor 62 
 
 lau Point- 195 
 
 I Cape.-- 205 
 
 (Harbor 147,148 
 
 (River 61 
 
 liver '-JOtt 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 389 
 
 Page. 
 
 Light. Matane River 208 
 
 Meat Cove 5S 
 
 Metis Point 209 
 
 Middle Island lOT 
 
 Miramichi Bay 158. l.W 
 
 River ... 107 
 
 ■ Oak Point - . . 165 
 
 - O'Haiii Point ... 201 
 
 • Origneaux Point 318 
 
 ■ Orleans Channel 360 
 
 ■Orwell ... 131 
 
 Panmure Head. - . , 133 
 
 Paspebiac Spit 194 
 
 PaulBhiff 123 
 
 Perroquet Islet 375 
 
 PetiteRocher 186 
 
 Pictou Harbor 76 
 
 Island 78 
 
 PlatonPoint-- 365 
 
 Point de Monts 291 
 
 Pointe au Pic 334 
 
 aux Trembles 309 
 
 Pokeraoitche River _ 173 
 
 Pokesuedie Island 178 
 
 Pomquet Island 69 
 
 Port Hood 63 
 
 St. Francis 365 
 
 Portage Island 159 
 
 Portneuf _ 300,365 
 
 Prairie Bay 356 
 
 Preston Beach 158 
 
 Prim Point 112 
 
 Princess Lonise Basin 348 
 
 Qnelwc 348 
 
 — Red Islet 310 
 
 Bank 310 
 
 Richeliea Island 365 
 
 River. 369 
 
 Richibncto River 102 
 
 Rividro du Loup 315 
 
 Sud 332 
 
 Rosier Cape 203 
 
 St.Alphonse 307 
 
 Miscou Gully 173, 177 
 
 Montee du Lac 356 
 
 Montgomery Island 189 
 
 Monts, Point de 391 
 
 Mullin Point 87 
 
 Murray Bay 333 
 
 Harbor 131 
 
 Neguac Gully 109 
 
 Newport Point 195 
 
 NorthCape 58 
 
 Point 130 
 
 ' I 'ago. 
 
 Light, St. Andrew Point 1 34 
 
 Anne do Beaupre. . - 360 
 
 Antoine 305 
 
 — Croix 365 
 
 Emelie 305 
 
 Famille 360 
 
 Francis River 368 
 
 Frangois 345 
 
 George Cape 70 
 
 Jean 346 
 
 Bay 306 
 
 Joseph . 335 
 
 Laurent 346 
 
 Lawrence Cape 58 
 
 Paul Bay 354 
 
 Island 33 
 
 Peter Bay 143 
 
 Lake 368 
 
 Peters Island 112 
 
 Pierre 360 
 
 des Becquets 365 
 
 Salmon Cape 333 
 
 Point 185 
 
 Salutation Point 134 
 
 Sandy Beach Point 200 
 
 Island 150 
 
 Point 173 
 
 Savage Harbor.. 143 
 
 Island 150 
 
 Sea Cow Head _ 124 
 
 Wolf Island 61 
 
 Seven Islands 283 
 
 Shediac Island 97 
 
 Sheldrake Island _ 164 
 
 Shippegan Gully 173, 179 
 
 Sorel 364 
 
 Souris Head 139 
 
 South Beach : 103 
 
 Cape 43 
 
 Rock -. 334 
 
 Traverse 332 
 
 Southwest Point 51 
 
 Stone Island 308 
 
 Pillar Island. 334 
 
 Stonehaven _ 185 
 
 Summerside 135 
 
 Swash way Channel 159 
 
 Tignish River 152 
 
 Tracadie Harbor 143 
 
 River 171, 173 
 
 Traverse. 333,369 
 
 Tremble Shoals 365 
 
 Vinlslands 163 
 
 Wallace Harbor 87 
 
 
 <: 
 
 ll 
 
mmmtifi^, 
 
 mm 
 
 390 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 i^> 
 
 Page, 
 
 Light, Weat Point ^y^, 1-8 
 
 White Head 197 
 
 Islet Reef 811 
 
 York River -- 118 
 
 Lighthouse Point --- 76 
 
 buoy 76 
 
 light 76 
 
 Lights, period of exhibition 1 
 
 Limekiln Bank 187 
 
 light 1«7 
 
 Limestone Creek. - 00 
 
 Link Islet - 2"~ 
 
 Linzee Cape ^'^ 
 
 Lions Island 333 
 
 L'Islet church 831 
 
 331 
 
 331 
 
 — cross 
 
 — pier. 
 
 r signals 881 
 
 Little Alemek Bay 178 
 
 Basque Island 383 
 
 Belledune Point light 186 
 
 -Bergeron Cove 301 
 
 Boule Island 283 
 
 Cawee Island 888 
 
 Dutchman Rock 127 
 
 . Fish Harbor 834 
 
 — Gaspe 189 
 
 Harbor 73 
 
 Matane 207 
 
 -Mecattina Cove -- 244 
 
 water 844 
 
 . Island.- --.. 244 
 
 River 844 
 
 Metis Bay 208 
 
 Point 809 
 
 -Natashquan Harbor 263 
 
 .. River. 263 
 
 Pane. 
 
 Long Ledge 854 
 
 Peguin Island 316 
 
 anchorage — 3i7 
 
 light 316 
 
 P< int ( Amet Sonnd) 83 
 
 — (Mingan Island) 376 
 
 (St. George Bay) 64 
 
 -Pabos - 196 
 
 -River (Caspediac Bay) 192 
 
 (Pomquet Road) 69 
 
 (Prince Edward Island) 138 
 
 - Rustico Harbor 144 
 
 -Sands - - 109 
 
 -Shemogne River 95 
 
 -Shippegan Harbor 176 
 
 -Tracadie Harbor 68 
 
 (Sandy Bay) 235 
 
 River - 361 
 
 Spit - 37 
 
 Longue Pointe 355 
 
 buoy 356 
 
 Loon Roclis 259 
 
 Lotbiniere light 365 
 
 Lou Road. 247 
 
 Loudon Beach 75 
 
 Louisa Harbor - 248 
 
 directions 248 
 
 Loup Bank 316 
 
 Bay 382 
 
 River 187 
 
 Low Islet ' 268 
 
 Village 102 
 
 Lower Neguac - - - 169 
 
 lights. -- 169 
 
 M. 
 
 Mabou Cape 61 
 
 Harbor 68 
 
 lights 62 
 
 Highland 61 
 
 ~ River 61 
 
 tides 68 
 
 Liverpool (Richibucto) 103 
 
 Livingstone Bay 133 
 
 Livreur Point - 386 
 
 Lobster Bay 336,288 
 
 anchorage 386 
 
 directions 336 
 
 Logan Point 7^^ 
 
 Long Island 340 
 
 Macdonald Reef 77 
 
 buoy 77 
 
 Macdougal Point HI 
 
 Maclsaac Point 70 
 
 Rock 70 
 
 Mackenzie Head 73 
 
 buoy 77 
 
 Point 89 
 
 Shoal 75 
 
 Mackinnon Cape — 847 
 
 Macphee Shoal 137 
 
 Macquereau Point . 195 
 
 i jg dgnal 195 
 
 light 195 
 
 . telegraph 195 
 
 Madame Island 344 
 
 Banks 344 
 
 Reef 344 
 
 buoy 344 
 
 Magdalen Cape 305 
 
 fog signal 205 
 
 KMi i. ^n i Wi 
 
Page. 
 
 864 
 
 td 816 
 
 lorage — 3i7 
 
 t... 816 
 
 t Sonnd) 88 
 
 an Island) 276 
 
 eorge Bay) 64 
 
 jrBay) ^35 
 
 361 
 
 _ 37 
 
 355 
 
 oy 356 
 
 ' 259 
 
 365 
 
 247 
 
 75 
 
 _ 248 
 
 ections 248 
 
 .. 816 
 
 222 
 
 187 
 
 268 
 
 102 
 
 169 
 
 ghts -- 169 
 
 M. 
 
 61 
 
 62 
 
 ;hts 62 
 
 61 
 
 61 
 
 s 62 
 
 77 
 
 juoy 77 
 
 Ill 
 
 70 
 
 70 
 
 73 
 
 bnoy 77 
 
 ._ 89 
 
 75 
 
 : 247 
 
 137 
 
 Qt 195 
 
 — i js signal 195 
 
 — light 195 
 
 — telegraph 195 
 
 344 
 
 lanks 344 
 
 344 
 
 loy 344 
 
 305 
 
 og signal 205 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 391 
 
 Page. 
 
 Magdalen Cape light 305 
 
 signal station 305 
 
 Islands 30 
 
 anchorage 45 
 
 bars 3« 
 
 climate -Wl 
 
 directions 45 
 
 Harbors ',".7 
 
 popnlation 36 
 
 seals 36 
 
 supplies 36 
 
 tides 45 
 
 River 205 
 
 tides 205 
 
 Magnetic attraction of shore 278 
 
 Magpie Bay 279 
 
 anchorage 279 
 
 Point 279 
 
 River 279 
 
 Magnacha Point 188 
 
 Spit - 188 
 
 buoy 188 
 
 Maheux River 346 
 
 Maillard Cape. 188 
 
 MaitlandFlat 137 
 
 -Point 137 
 
 Shoal 137 
 
 Major Reef 348 
 
 Mai Bay 197 
 
 Malcolm Point 165 
 
 Malignant Bay 71 
 
 Mallard Cape 355 
 
 Malpeque 147 
 
 anchorage 149 
 
 Bar 148 
 
 caution 149 
 
 directions 148 
 
 Harbor 147 
 
 lights 147,148 
 
 railway 147 
 
 supplies 147 
 
 tides 149 
 
 Manicoiiagan Bar 395 
 
 tides 395 
 
 Bay 295 
 
 Hole 295 
 
 Peninsula 295 
 
 Point. 295 
 
 signals 296 
 
 River 295 
 
 anchorage 295 
 
 directions 295 
 
 tides 205 
 
 Shoal 296 
 
 I'nKi-. 
 Maniconagan Shoal tidal stream 396 
 
 Manitou Point . . 280 
 
 River 280 
 
 anchorage 280 
 
 directions 280 
 
 water 280 
 
 Manowin Island 388 
 
 Marcelle Point 178 
 
 Mai'garee River. 60 
 
 light...- 61 
 
 tides 60 
 
 Margaret Island 348 
 
 Tail 343 
 
 buoy 343 
 
 Marine Railway 93 
 
 Mark Point 228 
 
 Marie Head 121 
 
 MarmenRock 318 
 
 bnoy 318 
 
 Marsh Island 200 
 
 River 105 
 
 Martin Cape 325 
 
 anchorage 325 
 
 River 306 
 
 light... 206 
 
 signal station 206 
 
 Martiniere Point 342 
 
 Matane 208 
 
 Little, settlement 207 
 
 Papsof 207 
 
 River 207 
 
 anchorage 208 
 
 Bar 308 
 
 buoys 207 
 
 lights. . 208 
 
 pilots 207 
 
 signal station _ . . 208 
 
 supplies 208 
 
 tides 208 
 
 Matte, Grand, River 306 
 
 May Islets 286 
 
 Point _ 118 
 
 McAusIin Island.. 145 
 
 Mclnnis Point 120 
 
 Mc Williams Cove 129 
 
 Meadow Island 200 
 
 MeatCove 58 
 
 lights 58 
 
 telegraph and signal sta- 
 tion 58 
 
 Mecattina Cape . . i 243 
 
 Cove, Little. 244 
 
 Harbor 243 
 
 directions 242 
 
 ■Uf. 
 
 ■':':f 
 
392 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 ft 
 
 I'ago. 
 
 Mecattina Harbor supplies 24:2 
 
 High Land 248 
 
 Island, Great 341 
 
 Little 244 
 
 River, Little 344 
 
 Medea Rot-k 95 
 
 buoys 96 
 
 clearing marks 96 
 
 Merigomish- 78 
 
 Harbor.. 71 
 
 tides.. 73 
 
 Island 73 
 
 Point 71 
 
 Mermot Islet .- 335 
 
 Ledge 335 
 
 Motabetshnan River 308 
 
 Motis, Grand, Bay 309 
 
 River 309 
 
 Little. Bay 308 
 
 Point 309 
 
 River 308 
 
 Point 309 
 
 light 309 
 
 signal station . _ 209 
 
 Meule Cape 40 
 
 Rocks. 40 
 
 MichauxCope 307 
 
 Middle Bank 318 
 
 buoy 318 
 
 Bay 339 
 
 anchorage 329 
 
 Channel _ 339 
 
 Ground (Bedeque Harbor) . 135 
 
 (Charlottetown)... 115 
 
 (Dalhousie) 189 
 
 caution. 189 
 
 (South Traverse).. 333 
 
 buoys 333 
 
 (VinBay) 164 
 
 Island 167 
 
 lights 167 
 
 Islands 349 
 
 Ledges 228 
 
 Passage 83 
 
 tides 83 
 
 Patch 233 
 
 Pilgrim Island 316 
 
 Point 238 
 
 Reef... 374 
 
 Channel 274 
 
 River _ 73,185 
 
 buoys 73 
 
 Rock 334 
 
 Shoal 78 
 
 Pace. 
 
 Middle Shoal buoy 79 
 
 Traverse 820 
 
 Millbrook 85 
 
 Mill Creek 63 
 
 Island 843 
 
 River 140 
 
 Mille Vaches Bay 300 
 
 anchorage 300 
 
 Point 300 
 
 Milne Bank 140 
 
 Point 258 
 
 Reef 258 
 
 Mingan Channel 275 
 
 Harbor.. 276 
 
 directions 270 
 
 trading post. 276 
 
 Island 375 
 
 Islands 365 
 
 banks of soundings. 377 
 
 supplies 366 
 
 tides 266,377 
 
 Patch .. 375 
 
 River. 376 
 
 Minimegash anchorage 130 
 
 directions 130 
 
 lights 180 
 
 Ponds 139 
 
 Reef.... 139 
 
 tides 130 
 
 Miramichi Bar 159 
 
 Bay 157 
 
 anchorage 161 
 
 buoys 160 
 
 caution 160 
 
 directions 161 
 
 lights 158, 159 
 
 lightvessel 160 
 
 pilots 160 
 
 tides 161 
 
 Inner Bay 163 
 
 directions 163 
 
 River 166 
 
 ice 166 
 
 light 167 
 
 Northwest Arm. . 168 
 
 pilots 160 
 
 quarantine 167 
 
 Southwest Arm . 168 
 
 tides 168,169 
 
 Miranda Rocks . 346 
 
 Misaine Bank 31 
 
 Miscou anchorage 176 
 
 Banks 174 
 
 Channel 177 
 
 s a . ft ia ys ) CT^»p« iiM *a i 
 
 jBMCTjiig j KftTy i tiaaMBffWffiWiflfWTi i iw t ^waw^ 
 
Page- 
 79 
 
 820 
 
 85 
 
 68 
 
 842 
 
 140 
 
 800 
 
 jhorage 800 
 
 800 
 
 140 
 
 258 
 
 258 
 
 , 275 
 
 276 
 
 ictions 270 
 
 ling post. 276 
 
 275 
 
 265 
 
 kaofsotindingB. 277 
 
 plies.. 266 
 
 s 266,377 
 
 .. 275 
 
 276 
 
 age 130 
 
 oas 130 
 
 130 
 
 13» 
 
 139 
 
 180 
 
 159 
 
 157 
 
 orage 161 
 
 •8 160 
 
 -- caution 100 
 
 itions 161 
 
 8 158,159 
 
 vessel -. 160 
 
 8 .- 160 
 
 161 
 
 ^y 162 
 
 - directions 163 
 
 166 
 
 i 166 
 
 [ht 167 
 
 jrthwest Arm. . 168 
 
 lots 160 
 
 larantine 167 
 
 iithwest Arm . 168 
 
 ies 168,169 
 
 . 346 
 
 21 
 
 176 
 
 174 
 
 177 
 
 ■;jrai»(a ^ta i i.'ns' -' 
 
 1 
 
 INDKX. 
 
 393 
 
 ra({i'. 
 
 Miscou Channel directions 177 
 
 Flats 1 76 
 
 Oully 178 
 
 lights 173,177 
 
 Harbor 176 
 
 Island 176 
 
 signal station 177 
 
 tides 178 
 
 Miscoxiche Bank 126 
 
 Point 136 
 
 Hpit 125 
 
 buoy 125 
 
 Mistanocine Bay 337 
 
 ■ Harbor 237 
 
 :_ directions 288 
 
 tides 238 
 
 Island 387 
 
 Mistaasini, or Qreat Stone 358 
 
 Mizzenette Ledge 188 
 
 Point 188 
 
 Sands.. 181 
 
 Moisie Bay 281 
 
 Point 281 
 
 River 281 
 
 Bar 283 
 
 tides 388 
 
 trading post 382 
 
 Rock. 282 
 
 mark 383 
 
 Shoal 282 
 
 Molies River 103 
 
 Molns River 103 
 
 Money Point 58 
 
 Moniaclsland 275 
 
 MonkHead 69 
 
 Montague River. 136 
 
 MontBoutot 319 
 
 St. Anne 319 
 
 Montee du Lac lights 356 
 
 Montgomery Island 189 
 
 light 189 
 
 Montmorency Falls 347 
 
 Montreal 369 
 
 directions 369 
 
 docks ;ifl9 
 
 Harbor 369 
 
 navigation 371 
 
 pilotage 369 
 
 time signal 369 
 
 wharfage 370 
 
 wintering 870 
 
 Monts, Point do 291 
 
 aspect of coast. : . . . 293 
 
 , caution 391 
 
 I'uge. 
 
 Monts, Plant de, current 35 
 
 fog signal 291 
 
 light 291 
 
 signals - 291 
 
 to Bicquette Island 35 
 
 to Green Island 27 
 
 Moody Point 165 
 
 Morrell Rivor .. 148 
 
 Morrison Beach 187 
 
 Mosquito Sands 187 
 
 Moulin Baude anchorage ,132 
 
 River 308 
 
 Mount Louis River 205 
 
 Moutango Island 375 
 
 Mullcgash Point 80 
 
 Mullin Point 87 
 
 lights 87 
 
 Murdoch Point 165 
 
 Shoal 76 
 
 Spit 165 
 
 Murphy Point. 84 
 
 Murr Islets 341 
 
 Rocks 241 
 
 Murray Bay _ 328 
 
 anchorage 828 
 
 directions 833 
 
 light . 328 
 
 Harbor . 181 
 
 anchorage 181 
 
 buoys 181 
 
 directions 181 
 
 lights. 131 
 
 tides 131 
 
 Head 108,131 
 
 River 132 
 
 Mushkoniatawee Bay 265 
 
 Musquarro Point 261 
 
 River . . 269 
 
 Mussel Bank 187 
 
 Mutton Island 343 
 
 Mya Point 178 
 
 N. 
 
 Nabesippi River : 264 
 
 trading post 365 
 
 Nail Head 129 
 
 Pond 129 
 
 Napan Bay 164 
 
 Point 164 
 
 River 164 
 
 Napetepee Bay 336 
 
 directions 236 
 
 Narrows, the . . 236 
 
 If 
 
 J f 
 
 
 l\ 
 
 i 
 
 Ww.- «« 6 » > P&^* »tac u * 3 fci /. 4 mtiitiff'^.iJijii.if^ftMifi Kr i^i i * » gja 3a; dPg':'a< ai '!«K »^rfMiP^'^^-*sg-'gJ^^'^ iii- ,."-=■ -i^"-* W- ' 
 
 pi 
 
r 
 
 394 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 ir 
 
 Pagr. 
 
 NashRlver tSfl 
 
 Nata8h<i\tAU Banks . 361 
 
 . Little, Harbor 3tt8 
 
 rtirtxtioiiM - 368 
 
 tides 36« 
 
 ■ — settlement . 363 
 
 . Point 361 
 
 River 368 
 
 currents and 
 
 tides 363 
 
 trading post 363 
 
 Negua*. (iully 1«» 
 
 buoys 
 
 lights 
 
 Lower 
 
 169 
 160 
 160 
 
 Upper 169 
 
 villages 170 
 
 lights 
 
 Nelsontown - i88 
 
 Neptune Rock 35H 
 
 Nest Rock 354 
 
 Netagamu Islands 348 
 
 River 248 
 
 New Carlisle 198 
 
 (Hunter River) 145 
 
 Glasgow ( Pictou Harbor) 74 
 
 London settlement 146 
 
 Paga 
 North Mlnimegash Pond ia» 
 
 Patch 101 
 
 Point (An ticosti) M 
 
 (Miscou) 178 
 
 (Prince Edward Island) liiO 
 
 boacon . 54 
 
 light . 180 
 
 Reef »88 
 
 River IWJ 
 
 Traverse 830 
 
 tides 860 
 
 Newcastle 167 
 
 Newport 105 
 
 Point 195 
 
 light 195 
 
 Niapisca Channel 372 
 
 Island 273 
 
 Niobe Shoal 337 
 
 Nipisighit Bay 186 
 
 River 184 
 
 Nob Islet 245 
 
 Noire Point - - 304 
 
 Norman Cape 230 
 
 North Beach -- 107 
 
 buoy 197 
 
 BirdRock 34 
 
 Cape 44,57 
 
 anchorage 45 
 
 icereports 45 
 
 lights - 58 
 
 Rocks 45 
 
 tides 58 
 
 water 45 
 
 Channel (see St. Lawrence 
 
 Riror). 
 coast of Gulf (.see St. Law- 
 rence Gulf). 
 
 Northeast Cape 87 
 
 Ledge 880 
 
 Reef 888 
 
 Northumberland Strait 71, 107, 153 
 
 vi.ution ... 08 
 
 oirections.. 165 
 
 tides 158 
 
 Northwest Bowen Roci'.. 386 
 
 Spit 42 
 
 Norton Point . 184 
 
 Shoal 184 
 
 Notre Dame du Portage 818 
 
 Nouvelle Point 194 
 
 River 194 
 
 Oak Channel 182 
 
 Island 89 
 
 Bar 87 
 
 Point (Miraraichi Bay) 165 
 
 (Restigouche) 187 
 
 lights 185 
 
 TreePoint 79 
 
 Observation Cape 54 
 
 River 53 
 
 Ogdensburg 371 
 
 O'Hara Point buoy 201 
 
 light 201 
 
 Old Bic Harbor : 212 
 
 Road... --- 213 
 
 FortBay 285 
 
 Channel 235 
 
 Island - 235 
 
 Harry Head - 88 
 
 Store Point 131 
 
 anchorage - - - 181 
 
 Woman Rock 198 
 
 Oldinglsland . 71 
 
 Olomanosheebo River . - 268 
 
 Onion Island 835 
 
 Ore Point - 279 
 
 Orient Point 399 
 
 '«i» 
 
p*g« 
 
 Pond ia» 
 
 101 
 
 »ti) M 
 
 1) 178 
 
 Edward iHland) 130 
 
 54 
 
 180 
 
 asH 
 
 185 
 
 820 
 
 I. 860 
 
 87 
 
 ... 320 
 
 388 
 
 rait 71,107,153 
 
 vj.ation ... 08 
 
 — oijections.. 155 
 
 --t!de« 158 
 
 Rock 386 
 
 43 
 
 184 
 
 184 
 
 •tage 818 
 
 194 
 
 194 
 
 0. 
 
 182 
 
 89 
 
 87 
 
 ichi Bay) 165 
 
 inche) 187 
 
 165 
 
 79 
 
 54 
 
 52 
 
 371 
 
 ' 201 
 
 201 
 
 212 
 
 212 
 
 285 
 
 285 
 
 235 
 
 88 
 
 181 
 
 chorage -.- 181 
 
 198 
 
 71 
 
 Lver .- 268 
 
 886 
 
 279 
 
 399 
 
 INI>K\. 
 
 3!>5 
 
 Orignranx Point 81H 
 
 anchorage 81H 
 
 fog siKnal 818 
 
 light 818 
 
 tldos 818 
 
 Orleiinw C'hannel ;W0 
 
 lights 300 
 
 Island JW5 
 
 anchorage 346 
 
 Orwell 120 
 
 Bay 120 
 
 light 131 
 
 River 120 
 
 Otter River 50 
 
 Quelle Point 818 
 
 River.. 318 
 
 Ontarde Bay 297 
 
 anchorage 297 
 
 directions 397 
 
 Point 3«« 
 
 River. 396 
 
 Outer Birch Island 274 
 
 tides 274 
 
 Islet 257 
 
 beacon 357 
 
 Rocks 348 
 
 Wapitagun Islands 353 
 
 OysterPond 38 
 
 P. 
 
 Paget Bank buoy 865 
 
 Paint River 259 
 
 Palmer Point .. 86 
 
 Palmers Wharf light 122 
 
 Panard Point 201 
 
 Pandora Point 177 
 
 PanmureHead.. 108,133 
 
 light 133 
 
 Island 133 
 
 Ledgo 138 
 
 ahoal 183 
 
 buoy _. 135 
 
 Spit 133 
 
 Papsof Matane 307 
 
 Parsley Port 338 
 
 Partridge Mount 268 
 
 Point '. 268 
 
 Pashasheeboo Bay 365 
 
 Paspebiac 193 
 
 anchorage 193 
 
 Bay 198 
 
 directions 194 
 
 Point 193 
 
 Spit 194 
 
 l'Ul!C. 
 
 Pasimbiac Spit buoy 104 
 
 light Itt4 
 
 i Paul Bluff light 199 
 
 Pavilion River SO 
 
 ! Iwacon SO 
 
 Paynter IslumlH ttS 
 
 , Peacock Cove . 94 
 
 I caution . 05 
 
 Peak Point 229 
 
 PoarlReff 89 
 
 PfHshtebai Bay 265 
 
 j Pectcu Point 177 
 
 I Peninwula Point 84 
 
 ! the 200 
 
 Pentacopt River. 388 
 
 Perc6 197 
 
 Bay m 
 
 tides 197 
 
 Mont, or La Table Ronlante 197 
 
 Point . 197 
 
 Reef 197 
 
 Rock 197 
 
 Perc^e Rocks 814 
 
 Percival River 128 
 
 Peril Rock 286 
 
 Perro(inet Bank. 235 
 
 Channel 375 
 
 Island 325 
 
 Islets 375 
 
 lights 875 
 
 Peter Point (Bathurst Harlwr) 18") 
 
 (Qespe) 198 
 
 Petit Abatis beach 355 
 
 D^barquement 356 
 
 Petite Riviere.. _ 354 
 
 Rocher light 186 
 
 Petites Isles 307 
 
 Phelan Point 194 
 
 Phillip Bar . 89 
 
 River 91 
 
 Pic Point 324 
 
 Pictou 74 
 
 Bar , 75 
 
 coal 74 
 
 directions _ TO 
 
 Harbor _ 73 
 
 customhouse lights. 76 
 
 directions 77 
 
 ice 77 
 
 lights (south en- 
 trance point) 76 
 
 — ; tides 77 
 
 hospital 75 
 
 Island 78 
 
 JL.,., 
 
 * 1 
 
 
 •SI I 
 
 ,p* 
 
m 
 
 896 
 
 INURX. 
 
 I'M"- 
 
 Pictou iHlanil Bank 78 
 
 lifeboat 7« 
 
 light 78 
 
 caution 78 
 
 liunling 74 
 
 pilotage 74 
 
 j>il()tH 74 
 
 port ohiirgt'B 74 
 
 (luaruntiue 75 
 
 repairs 74 
 
 Road. 75 
 
 anchorage 75 
 
 HupplieH 74 
 
 telegraph 74 
 
 Pierre do GroH Cap Reef 44 
 
 River ... 2()6 
 
 Pigeon Islet 236 
 
 Pilgrim, (ireat, Wand 310 
 
 Islands 316 
 
 Long Island 810 
 
 Middle Wand..... 810 
 
 Shoal 816 
 
 bnoy 810 
 
 Pillage Bay 267 
 
 Pillar Islets 883 
 
 Point 195 
 
 PilletCape 95 
 
 Pilots, stations 19 
 
 Pinette Harbor Ill 
 
 tides Ill 
 
 Point 110 
 
 Shoals Ill 
 
 Platon Point lights 365 
 
 Pleasant Bay 41 
 
 anchorage 41 
 
 Pleureuse Point 205 
 
 River 206 
 
 Plongeur Bay 299 
 
 Point (.see proper name). 
 
 duChene 96 
 
 Lac 806 
 
 Pointe au Pavilion 848 
 
 buoy 361 
 
 Pic 334 
 
 light 324 
 
 an.x Pins 335 
 
 Trembles 364 
 
 lights 369 
 
 desMorts 372 
 
 Roches 333 
 
 Heu 824 
 
 Pokemouche (Pocmouche) 172 
 
 Gully 173 
 
 Lagoon 173 
 
 Pokemouche River 173 
 
 — buoyH 172 
 
 lights 178 
 
 tides na 
 
 Pokeshaw 184 
 
 River 184 
 
 Pokesueclie Island 178 
 
 , Great, light . . 178 
 
 -Point 179 
 
 Shoal 178 
 
 Pomqnet Banks 69 
 
 Harbor 09 
 
 tides 69 
 
 Island 09 
 
 light 69 
 
 Point 68 
 
 River 69 
 
 Road 68 
 
 anchorage 68 
 
 directions 69 
 
 Pond, Great 204 
 
 Point . 227 
 
 Poplar Island 116 
 
 Porcupine Cape 65 
 
 Porpoise Rocks 285 
 
 Port Daniel 194 
 
 anchorage 196 
 
 supplies 195 
 
 Hill 146 
 
 Hood.. 62 
 
 anchorage 63 
 
 buoyage 68 
 
 caution 68 
 
 directions 64 
 
 ice 64 
 
 light 68 
 
 supplies 68 
 
 tides 64 
 
 Joli - 381 
 
 Parsley 838 
 
 St. Augustine 289 
 
 Francis lights 365 
 
 Salmon 828 
 
 Shettle 823 
 
 Portage Bay 242 
 
 Harbor 242 
 
 directions 242 
 
 Island 159 
 
 light 159 
 
 tides 161 
 
 Portneuf 800 
 
 light 300 
 
 lights 356 
 
 River 800 
 
I'agB. 
 
 173 
 
 buoyn 173 
 
 liKhts 17a 
 
 lidea 173 
 
 184 
 
 184 
 
 178 
 
 Great, liRht . . 178 
 
 179 
 
 178 
 
 69 
 
 09 
 
 lea . 69 
 
 69 
 
 lit 69 
 
 68 
 
 69 
 
 68 
 
 oraRe 68 
 
 tions -. 69 
 
 304 
 
 237 
 
 116 
 
 ..,- 65 
 
 335 
 
 194 
 
 'age 195 
 
 js 196 
 
 ..- 146 
 
 63 
 
 ige 63 
 
 9 68 
 
 - caution 68 
 
 ns 64 
 
 64 
 
 68 
 
 I 68 
 
 64 
 
 331 
 
 328 
 
 239 
 
 ?ht8 865 
 
 323 
 
 . 323 
 
 243 
 
 242 
 
 Bctions 242 
 
 159 
 
 t 159 
 
 i 161 
 
 300 
 
 300 
 
 356 
 
 . 800 
 
 «tei«ai<,'ifei]ffiSsaiia»8afe 
 
 INDKX. 
 
 I'liKf. 
 
 Portneuf tti vor tideH 8(K) 
 
 Sands 800 
 
 xi> nalB 800 
 
 PortMimiutli Point.* 63 
 
 Spltbnoy 68 
 
 Powell Point 75 
 
 Powiml (Pownell) Bay 120 
 
 Point 119 
 
 Pruirie Day » 856 
 
 aticliorage 857 
 
 directions 857 
 
 li^ht 856 
 
 tides 857 
 
 Point 356 
 
 Shoal 857 
 
 buoy 357 
 
 Presqu'ile 59 
 
 Preston beach 158 
 
 lights 158 
 
 Price Island ... 245 
 
 Prim Island 113 
 
 Point 113 
 
 lights 112 
 
 Reef 113 
 
 buoy 118 
 
 clearing mark 118 
 
 Prince Edward Island 107 
 
 climate 107 
 
 East Coast.. 131 
 
 fogs 107 
 
 government 107 
 
 North Coast 141 
 
 produce 108 
 
 South Coast 108 
 
 tides 153 
 
 trade 108 
 
 West Coast. 139 
 
 Shoal 804,323 
 
 buoy 304,322 
 
 Princess Louise Ba.sin 348 
 
 lights 848 
 
 Provost Cove 124 
 
 Puffin Bay 269 
 
 Pugwash , 90 
 
 anchorage 90 
 
 Bar 90 
 
 Bay 89 
 
 directions 89 
 
 Harbor 90 
 
 Point 89 
 
 Reef 89 
 
 River 90 
 
 tides 91 
 
 water 90 
 
 Road 89 
 
 Q. 
 
 397 
 
 Paifa. 
 
 Quarry (.'hannel 378 
 
 Cove 978 
 
 water 919 
 
 Island 878 
 
 Point 60 
 
 Quart Point-..*.,,,*. 164 
 
 Quebec 848 
 
 anchorage 847 
 
 BaHin 848 
 
 communication 8S9 
 
 Cove 851 
 
 directions . 858 
 
 dcK'ks and harbor works iUO 
 
 Harbor 846 
 
 ice .. 351 
 
 lights 848 
 
 pilotage 849 
 
 port, limits of 84« 
 
 prohibited anchorage :547 
 
 quarantine anchorage . 343,353 
 
 repairs 351 
 
 signals 853 
 
 supplies 851 
 
 tides 849 
 
 time signal 353 
 
 tugs 849 
 
 weather 353 
 
 Quetachoo-Manicouagon Bay 365 
 
 Quin Channel 271 
 
 Island 271 
 
 R. 
 
 Race Island 342 
 
 Raft Gully 170 
 
 Rag Ledge 245 
 
 Ragg Bay 269 
 
 Point 269 
 
 Ragged Point 63 
 
 Ramsheg 86 
 
 Razade Islets 216 
 
 Reaux Island 344 
 
 Red Bay .. 220 
 
 Cape 40 
 
 Island 233 
 
 Islet 310 
 
 light 310 
 
 .-Bank 310 
 
 lightvessel 310 
 
 fog sig- 
 nal.... 310 
 
 marks 310 
 
 Point 193.341 
 
 Reddish Point 195 
 
 Reef Point ( Amet Sound) 82 
 
 § 
 
 % 
 
 ' t 
 
 nil 
 
398 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Reef Point (Fox Bay) 50 
 
 Benouard Point 99 
 
 Eestigonche River '. . 187 
 
 anchorage 187 
 
 directions 190 
 
 Rice Point 114 
 
 Richelieu Island light 365 
 
 Rapids -- 384 
 
 River 369 
 
 lights - 309 
 
 Richibncto - . 103 
 
 anchorage 103 
 
 Bar 103 
 
 buoys . . 104 
 
 directions 104 
 
 Head... 102 
 
 light.. 102 
 
 pilots 104 
 
 Point 102 
 
 River.. 102 
 
 lights 102 
 
 tides 104 
 
 Richmond Bay 146 
 
 buoy 148 
 
 ice 147 
 
 tides.. 147 
 
 Village 192 
 
 buoys 192 
 
 Ridge Point. 279 
 
 RiflemanReef . HO 
 
 caution HI 
 
 Rimouaki 211 
 
 coal.. 211 
 
 mail 211 
 
 pier 211 
 
 River.... 211 
 
 water 211 
 
 Road 210 
 
 telegraph 211 
 
 Riviere du Gouff re 314 
 
 Loup 315 
 
 anchorage 315 
 
 Point 315 
 
 light 315 
 
 signals 315 
 
 supplies 315 
 
 tides 315 
 
 Village 315 
 
 Sud.. 331 
 
 light... 332 
 
 Rix Point 130 
 
 Roadstead Point 289 
 
 water 289 
 
 Roaring Bull 73 
 
 I'age. 
 
 Robert Cape 55 
 
 Rocher aux Qr^lons 385 
 
 de Saut au Cochon 358 
 
 Roches Point • 307 
 
 Rochette 180 
 
 I RockRiver 280 
 
 ! Bocks, Bay oe. 244,323 
 
 ' Rocky Bay 236 
 
 1 directions 230 
 
 I Roger Point 78 
 
 j Bogers Hill 78 
 
 I BolloBay. 138 
 
 I Bomaine, La, Biver 259 
 
 ' Bosier Cape 203 
 
 I fog signal... 20;! 
 
 i light 203 
 
 signals. 203 
 
 Bouge Cape 346 
 
 Point 304 
 
 Bound Head 241 
 
 Islet... 240 
 
 Bock 209 
 
 Boy Island 73 
 
 Ledge 72 
 
 Eoyalty Point 147 
 
 Sand 147 
 
 Buisseau Bock 261 
 
 caution 261 
 
 Bustico, Grand 144 
 
 settlements... 145 
 
 tides 145 
 
 , Little 144 
 
 S. 
 
 Sable Cove 121 
 
 Saddle Hill 265 
 
 Island 86 
 
 Beef 86 
 
 Sate Bock 245 
 
 Saguenay Cliffs 821 
 
 Biver 801 
 
 anchorages 306 
 
 buoys 304 
 
 comm.unication . . . 303 
 
 currents 302 
 
 directions 305, 308 
 
 tides 302 
 
 Sain Cape 324 
 
 St. Alexis village 307 
 
 — Alphonse village 807 
 
 light 307 
 
 — Andr6Bank 317 
 
 Point 817 
 
 village 317 
 
 •iiliuiu^ 
 
I*ag«. 
 
 55 
 
 as 385 
 
 Cochon 858 
 
 307 
 
 186 
 
 280 
 
 244,323 
 
 236 
 
 ons 230 
 
 78 
 
 78 
 
 138 
 
 er 259 
 
 203 
 
 Sfnal... 20;! 
 
 203 
 
 s.. 203 
 
 346 
 
 304 
 
 .. - 241 
 
 240 
 
 209 
 
 73 
 
 72 
 
 147 
 
 147 
 
 261 
 
 ition 261 
 
 144 
 
 fclements... 145 
 
 Bs 145 
 
 144 
 
 S. 
 
 121 
 
 265 
 
 86 
 
 8C 
 
 245 
 
 821 
 
 301 
 
 Dchorages 306 
 
 uoys 304 
 
 omnvunication . . . 303 
 
 urrents 302 
 
 irections 305, 308 
 
 ides 303 
 
 324 
 
 307 
 
 ige 807 
 
 — light 307 
 
 317 
 
 , 317 
 
 - 317 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 399 
 
 Page. 
 
 St. Andrew Bank 166 
 
 Point 134, 165 
 
 light .- 134 
 
 — Anne Cape 206 
 
 de Beaupre 360 
 
 light -- 360 
 
 de la Pocatiere 319 
 
 Pointe an Pere 210 
 
 Mountains 20'*>, 319 
 
 River .. 206.366 
 
 buoy 361 
 
 supplies 206 
 
 Shoals 319,360 
 
 buoy 310 
 
 — Antoine lights 865 
 
 — Augustine Chain 339 
 
 Cove 293 
 
 Harbor 239 
 
 Port 289 
 
 River 289 
 
 — Barthelemi Isle 300 
 
 — Catherine Bay 304 
 
 — Charles Point 381 
 
 Reef 381 
 
 caution 281 
 
 — Cioi;f light 365 
 
 buoy 365 
 
 — Denis 318 
 
 — Emelie lights 365 
 
 — Etienne Bay 306 
 
 River 300 
 
 — Eugene. _ 331 
 
 — Famine 360 
 
 light 360 
 
 — Flavie. 211 
 
 — Francis River lights 368 
 
 — Frangois lights 345 
 
 — Genevieve Harbor 366 
 
 caution 307 
 
 directions . . . 267 
 
 Island 366 
 
 Mount 266 
 
 supplies 267 
 
 — George bay 64.67 
 
 anchorage 67 
 
 Cape 70 
 
 light... 70 
 
 tides 60,70 
 
 Cove 199 
 
 — Giles Point 394 
 
 — Ignace 331 
 
 Cape 331 
 
 — Jacques Bar _ 138 
 
 River 129 
 
 Pajcp. 
 
 St. Jean 345 
 
 Bay...- - 306 
 
 light... 306 
 
 light 346 
 
 Port Joli - 331 
 
 River 306 
 
 — John Lake — 308 
 
 Mount 300.378 
 
 River (Gaspe bay) 199 
 
 (Labrador) 277 
 
 ancliorage 378 
 
 Bar 277 
 
 tides - 378 
 
 water 199 
 
 — Joseph cape 335. 354 
 
 de Levis 341 
 
 light 335 
 
 — Laurent . 346 
 
 light. 346 
 
 — Lawrence Bay 58 
 
 Cape 58 
 
 light 58 
 
 Gulf 1 
 
 barometer 9 
 
 buoyage 2 
 
 caution . . 3 
 
 currents 13 
 
 deviation 1 
 
 fogs 7 
 
 general directions 19 
 
 ice 5 
 
 islands in 33 
 
 li.-hts ... 1 
 
 magnetic attrac- 
 tion 1 
 
 North Coast 333 
 
 aspect of 
 
 coast... 233, 
 350,361,378 
 
 caution . . . 278 
 
 climate 324 
 
 codfishery . 834 
 
 currents. . . 223 
 
 general ob- 
 
 s e r V a • 
 
 tions 223 
 
 icebergs . . _ 223 
 
 inhabitants 334 
 
 p r o d u c - 
 
 tions 334 
 
 soundings . 356 
 
 signal station 3 
 
 telegraph 3 
 
 variation 1 
 
 
 mt 
 I'm 
 
 ! 
 
 ..tS- 
 
400 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Vane. 
 
 St. Lawrence Gulf winds 8 
 
 . River above Quebec. . 364 
 
 Montreal 3*1 
 
 barometer » 
 
 buoyage 3 
 
 caution. 3 
 
 r 
 
 ■Canals 371,373 
 
 -caution 30 
 
 - churches 331 
 
 - directions 35, 
 
 30,330,353 
 -fogs 7 
 
 - general remarks 309 
 
 -ice - - 5 
 
 -lights ..... 1,36.5,368 
 -Middle Channel. 330 
 
 - North Channel . 384 
 
 - (below Coudres 
 
 Island)... 336,339 
 
 - buoys - 361 
 
 -directions.. 336,3.>9, 
 
 361 
 -tides... 327,339,360, 
 
 361 
 -North Shore... 393 
 — aspect of coast. 398, 
 
 331 
 — (below Coudres 
 Island) 831 
 
 - Orleans Chan- 
 
 nel 330 
 
 - piers 331 
 
 - pilots 19 
 
 - railway 331 
 
 - semaphore sig- 
 
 nals 367 
 
 - signal station. 3 
 
 - South Channel 
 
 (above Crane 
 
 Island) 340 
 
 (below the 
 
 Tra\orse)....330, 
 
 directions . . 
 
 i li r o n g h 
 
 South 
 Channel . . 
 
 tides . . . . 
 
 South Shore (be- 
 low the Trav- 
 erse) 
 
 — telegraph 
 
 330 
 
 330 
 339 
 
 . 313 
 3,331 
 tidal streams . 35 
 
 tide table 802 
 
 tides .. 30,301,360 
 
 Pag". 
 
 St. La^vrenoe River Traverse, North 339 
 
 South 333 
 
 winds. . - 8 
 
 — Louis Isle 306 
 
 — Margaret Point 386 
 
 River 385 
 
 — Marguerite River 802 
 
 — Mary Cliffs.. 52 
 
 beacon 52 
 
 Islands 249 
 
 Rapid 867 
 
 Reefs 250 
 
 — MarysBay : 183 
 
 -Michel Point 841 
 
 Village 841 
 
 — Nicholas Cape 
 
 Harbor 298 
 
 anchorage 293 
 
 caution 294 
 
 directions 294 
 
 tides 294 
 
 water 293 
 
 River 102 
 
 PancraceCove 294 
 
 Point 294 
 
 Patrick Hole 846 
 
 River 846 
 
 — Paul Bay 324,354 
 
 fog signal 355 
 
 light 854 
 
 Island 82 
 
 anchorage 82 
 
 beacons 83 
 
 caution 19 
 
 fogsignal 83 
 
 ice report 83 
 
 ■ lights 83 
 
 provision depot — 83 
 
 — Peter Bay 143 
 
 . Harbor 143 
 
 lights 142 
 
 tides 143 
 
 Lake 
 
 lights 868 
 
 River 143 
 
 semaphore signals 
 
 • Peters Island 113 
 
 "light 112 
 
 Road 114 
 
 Shoal 114 
 
 Spit 114 
 
 Pierre 355 
 
 buoy 361 
 
 des Becquets lights 865 
 
 
 ffiif ii f rjiWrtftfiW i tt i - fliit i '|t >ia f iii i(-ifc <g s ii i wr t tfiti i! in i< i< i uc^ ^ ■ ■ 
 
raverse, North 329 
 
 South 333 
 
 inds 8 
 
 , 306 
 
 286 
 
 285 
 
 r 302 
 
 52 
 
 m 52 
 
 249 
 
 867 
 
 250 
 
 : 133 
 
 841 
 
 341 
 
 293 
 
 298 
 
 inchorage 293 
 
 laution 294 
 
 lirections 294 
 
 ides 294 
 
 ivater 293 
 
 102 
 
 294 
 
 294 
 
 846 
 
 846 
 
 324,354 
 
 nal 355 
 
 854 
 
 82 
 
 lorage 32 
 
 ons - 83 
 
 ion 19 
 
 lignal 83 
 
 eport -- 83 
 
 ta 83 
 
 dsion depot — 32 
 
 142 
 
 142 
 
 hts 142 
 
 les 143 
 
 367 
 
 bs 868 
 
 142 
 
 3 signals 367 
 
 112 
 
 ht 113 
 
 114 
 
 114 
 
 114 
 
 355 
 
 361 
 
 aets lights 865 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 401 
 
 Pane. 
 
 St. Pierre Ught 360 
 
 Point 360 
 
 — Roch 331 
 
 buoys 332 
 
 des Aiilnets 310 
 
 beacons 319 
 
 Shoals 332 
 
 Thomas. 33(t 
 
 Bank 336 
 
 Point 340 
 
 — Vallier 341 
 
 -: Bank 341 
 
 Point 341 
 
 Saints Channel 268 
 
 Rocks 266 
 
 SalaberryBay 244 
 
 Salmon Bay 231 
 
 caution 231 
 
 Cape 323 
 
 fog signal 323 
 
 lights 323 
 
 Islet 231 
 
 Pointlight 185 
 
 Port 323 
 
 River 57 
 
 Salt Lake Bay. 50 
 
 beacon near 50 
 
 telegraph station 51 
 
 Salutation Cove 126 
 
 Point 124 
 
 light 124 
 
 Sand Lark Reef 276 
 
 Top Cape 56 
 
 Sandy Bay 225 
 
 Beach Point 200 
 
 fog signal 200 
 
 lightvessel 200 
 
 Harbor 239 
 
 directions 239 
 
 water 239 
 
 Hook 40 
 
 Channel 41 
 
 directions 41 
 
 Flat 41 
 
 Shoal 41 
 
 Island 150 
 
 light 150 
 
 Point ( Mingan Harbor) 276 
 
 (Miscou Gully) 178 
 
 (Seven Islands Bay) ... 283 
 
 light 173 
 
 SapinLedge 106 
 
 Point 106 
 
 SatUtPass 364 
 
 1151 26 
 
 Saut au Cochon 355 
 
 deMouton 300 
 
 Savage Harbor 143 
 
 directions 143 
 
 lights 143 
 
 Island 150 
 
 lights 150 
 
 Point 71 
 
 Sawbill River 279 
 
 Scale Rock.... 246 
 
 Scaumenac Mountain 188 
 
 Scollop Patch 184 
 
 Scoudouc 98 
 
 Sea Cow Channel 370 
 
 Head.... 124 
 
 light 124 
 
 Island 270 
 
 Trout Point 114 
 
 Wolf Island 61 
 
 caution 61 
 
 light 61 
 
 Seal House Cove 381 
 
 Islands... 333 
 
 Point 240 
 
 River 120 
 
 Rock 199 
 
 Rocks (Caribou Harbor) 81 
 
 (Portage bay) 243 
 
 Seminaire Spit buoy 361 
 
 Serpent Point 204 
 
 Reef 204 
 
 buoy 204 
 
 Seven Islands 283 
 
 — Bay 283 
 
 anchorage 284 
 
 aspect of coast. . . 285 
 
 tides 285 
 
 caution 283 
 
 Channels 284 
 
 light 283 
 
 tides 285 
 
 trading post 283 
 
 winds 285 
 
 Sisters 150 
 
 Shag Island (Magdalen Island) ... 39 
 
 (Sandy Harbor) 239 
 
 Islet (Mistanoque) 238 
 
 (Washtawooka) 264 
 
 Rock 238 
 
 Shallop Channel 234 
 
 Cove 229 
 
 Creek 48 
 
 telegraph 48 
 
 River 379 
 
 ,11 
 
 I 
 
402 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 "I 
 I 
 
 % 
 
 71 
 
 F 
 
 ' i 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 Page. 
 
 Shallop Rock 189 
 
 ShecaticaBay 239 
 
 Island 337 
 
 Shediao 98 
 
 97 
 
 95 
 
 07 
 
 Bay. 
 
 ice . . . 
 
 tides . 
 
 — ■ charges . . 
 
 — coal 
 
 — Harbor.. 
 
 Smith Island (St. George Bay) . 
 (Wallace Harbor). 
 
 Pago. 
 .. 03 
 .. 88 
 
 Point 03 
 
 buoy 03 
 
 Sorel 370 
 
 lights 369 
 
 96 
 
 buoys 97 
 
 directions C9 
 
 pilots 97 
 
 Island 95 
 
 beacons 97 
 
 lights... 97 
 
 Point anchorage 99 
 
 River 98 
 
 . -supplies 98 
 
 telegraph 98 
 
 tides. 97 
 
 Village 98 
 
 water 98 
 
 Sheldrake Island 164 
 
 light 164 
 
 tides 164 
 
 . Point 279 
 
 Shemogue River, Great 95 
 
 Little 95 
 
 ShettlePort 828 
 
 biiickshoc Mountains. 206 
 
 Shilelah Cove.. 168 
 
 ShippoganBar 172 
 
 Channel 179 
 
 -^ directions 179 
 
 Flat 178 
 
 Gully 172 
 
 buoys 173,179 
 
 lights 178 
 
 Harbor 179 
 
 Island 178 
 
 Sound 178 
 
 ice 179 
 
 tides 180 
 
 Ships Head Rock 198 
 
 Shoal Cove 269 
 
 Signal stations for passing ships. . . 4 
 
 Simon Inlet 178 
 
 Sims Point 146 
 
 caution 146 
 
 Single Rock 244 
 
 Tree Point 194 
 
 Skinner Reef buoy 77, 81 
 
 Slime Rock --- 254 
 
 Souris 138 
 
 Head 138 
 
 ice 139 
 
 lights 139 
 
 South Bank 336 
 
 (Perc6Bay) 107 
 
 buoy .... 197 
 
 Beach (Richibucto River)... 103 
 
 lights. 103 
 
 Breaker 257 
 
 Cape ( Amherst Island) 48 
 
 light.. 48 
 
 Channel ( see St. Lawrence 
 
 River). 
 
 tides.. 839 
 
 Makers Ledge 258 
 
 Minimegash Pond 129 
 
 Point 50,230 
 
 beacon 50 
 
 River 132 
 
 Rock, or Algernon Rock 334 
 
 light 334 
 
 ■ Traverse 833 
 
 anchorage 839 
 
 — buoys 383 
 
 directions 837 
 
 fog signal 832 
 
 lightvessel 382 
 
 Narrows 388 
 
 tides 887 
 
 Southeast Bowen Rock 266 
 
 Southwest Arm ( Mabou River) — 61 
 
 Breaker 257 
 
 . cape (Amherst Island) . . 45 
 
 Islands 250 
 
 Ledge 231 
 
 Point (Anticosti) 51 
 
 -anchorage 51 
 
 caution 51 
 
 light 51 
 
 Spear Cape 92 
 
 Shoal 93 
 
 Sphinx Rock 364 
 
 Spithead (Charlottetown) 114 
 
 (Port Hood) 62 
 
 buoy 03 
 
 clearing marks 02 
 
 Spit Island 284 
 
 ^^iLm 
 
 mmxemmmiimsm 
 
INDEX. 
 
 403 
 
 wgeBay) 03 
 
 le Harbor).... 88 
 
 02 
 
 03 
 
 370 
 
 369 
 
 138 
 
 138 
 
 139 
 
 139 
 
 336 
 
 Bay) 197 
 
 buoy.... 197 
 
 3ucto River)... 103 
 
 lights. 103 
 
 257 
 
 Bt Island) 48 
 
 48 
 
 I St. Lawrence 
 ,iver). 
 
 339 
 
 e 258 
 
 ?ond 139 
 
 50,230 
 
 50 
 
 132 
 
 srnon Rock 334 
 
 334 
 
 383 
 
 orage 339 
 
 B 333 
 
 itions 887 
 
 lignal 332 
 
 vessel 332 
 
 ■OW8 338 
 
 387 
 
 ock 266 
 
 ibou River) — 61 
 
 257 
 
 iherst Island).. 45 
 
 250 
 
 281 
 
 nticosti) 61 
 
 chorage 61 
 
 ition 61 
 
 ht 51 
 
 92 
 
 93 
 
 264 
 
 jtown) 114 
 
 ^) 62 
 
 63 
 
 narks: 03 
 
 Pajje. 
 
 Spray Reef 347 
 
 Sproule Point 287 
 
 Squaw Bay 120 
 
 anchorage 120 
 
 Shoal 114 
 
 Squirrel Mount 60 
 
 Pond 60 
 
 StaflP Islet 245 
 
 Stanhope Cape 144 
 
 Cove 144 
 
 Stanley River 146 
 
 Star Island 234 
 
 Stewart Point 110 
 
 Stone Island 284 
 
 light 868 
 
 Pillar Island 334 
 
 light 834 
 
 Stonehaven light 185 
 
 Stony Point 227 
 
 Sturgeon Bay 183 
 
 Sud, Riviere du 331 
 
 Sugar Loaf Hill ( Malignant Bay) . . 71 
 
 Mountain 187 
 
 Summerside 125 
 
 coal 125 
 
 lights 125 
 
 Sunbury Cove 127 
 
 Surveyor Inlet 142 
 
 Susan Cape 64 
 
 Creek 64 
 
 Swanton Point 138 
 
 Swashway Channel 159 
 
 lights 159 
 
 Table Head 55 
 
 tides 56 
 
 Roulante, or Perc6 Mont 193 
 
 Tabusintac Qnlly 170 
 
 Lagoon 170 
 
 River 170 
 
 settlement 170 
 
 Tadoussac 304 
 
 Harbor 304 
 
 trading post 304 
 
 Tail Islet 332 
 
 Rocks 246 
 
 Tatamagouche Bay 85 
 
 anchorage 85 
 
 Basin 85 
 
 tides 85 
 
 River 85 I 
 
 Village 85 j 
 
 Telegraph and sigoal stations 4 ! 
 
 Tender Reef 249 
 
 Tent Island 243 
 
 Terraa Point 108 
 
 Torres Rompues Rapid 803 
 
 Tertiary Point 258 
 
 Shell Bay 258 
 
 Teteagouche River 185 
 
 Three Rivers, town 132, 366 
 
 Rocks 239 
 
 Tides, the 116 
 
 Thrumcap Islet 134 
 
 Shoal 184 
 
 buoy 185 
 
 Thunder Point 279 
 
 Tide table from Saguenay River to 
 
 Quebec 863 
 
 TignishHead 98 
 
 River 91,153 
 
 lights 153 
 
 Tormentine Cape 94 
 
 lifeboat 94 
 
 Reefs 93 
 
 anchorage 94 
 
 caution 93 
 
 directions 93 
 
 Tourmente Cape 340 
 
 Mount 335 
 
 Tower Point 55 
 
 Rock 43 
 
 Town Point 74 
 
 buoy 77 
 
 Tracadie Harbor (Prince Edward 
 
 Island) 143 
 
 directions 144 
 
 lights 143 
 
 tides 144 
 
 (St.GeorgeBay). 68 
 
 Lagoons 171 
 
 River (Prince Edward Isl- 
 and) 171 
 
 .Little Gully 171 
 
 .North Gully 171 
 
 buoys . 171 
 
 caution 173 
 
 lights . 171 
 
 .Old Gully 171 
 
 (St. . George Bay) . . 68 
 
 .South Gully 171 
 
 lights.. 173 
 
 Village(St. GeorgeBay).. 68 
 
 Tracadigash Point 191 
 
 Spit 193 
 
 buoy 193 
 
 Traverse Cape 124 
 
 n 
 
 i 
 
 ^' 
 
^ 
 
 404 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Traverse Cape buoys 882-333 
 
 fog signals 333 
 
 lights 869 
 
 lightvessels 333 
 
 .Middle 329 
 
 .North 839 
 
 Narrows, East — 358 
 
 buoy 358 
 
 ,West...- 359 
 
 — buoy 359 
 
 tides 360 
 
 -,South 338 
 
 anchorage 339 
 
 directions 887 
 
 Narrows 338 
 
 tides 837,360 
 
 -Spit 358 
 
 Page. 
 
 VachesPoint 808,831 
 
 Reef 304,333 
 
 Valley Cove 219 
 
 Variation of compass 1 
 
 Vernon River 120 
 
 VerteBay 01 
 
 directions 93 
 
 Victoria 123 
 
 Vin Bay 164 
 
 Harbor 183 
 
 anchorage 168 
 
 directions - 168 
 
 tidefi 163 
 
 Island 163 
 
 lights 168 
 
 buoy , 
 
 361 
 
 Trebble Hill Island 341 
 
 Islet. 259 
 
 TreenBlufiE 82,87 
 
 Reef 87 
 
 Tremble Shoals 364 
 
 buoy 365 
 
 light 365 
 
 Trembles, Pointeaux, Shoals 864 
 
 TrilobiteBay 269 
 
 Trinity, k la. Cape 306 
 
 Trinity Bay 290 
 
 anchorage 290 
 
 directions 390 
 
 Cove 32 
 
 River 290 
 
 Trois Saumons River 831 
 
 TroudeBerthier.. 840 
 
 leCape 44 
 
 Trout River 281 
 
 Rock 115 
 
 Tryon Cape 146 
 
 Head 123 
 
 River : 124 
 
 Shoals 123 
 
 buoy - 123 
 
 caution 133 
 
 Turner Cape 145 
 
 tides 145 
 
 Two Heads Island 343 
 
 Two-fathom Ledge 254 
 
 U. 
 Upper Grandigue Village — 95 
 
 V. 
 
 Vaches Patch 304.323 
 
 buoy 304,322 
 
 River 164 
 
 W. 
 
 Wallace 86 
 
 anchorage 88 
 
 Channel 67 
 
 directions 87 
 
 Harbor 86 
 
 buoys 87 
 
 light 87 
 
 tides 87 
 
 Walrus Channel 272 
 
 Island 270 
 
 Wapitagun Harbor 253 
 
 directions 253 
 
 tides 255 
 
 water 253 
 
 Island 253 
 
 Outor 253 
 
 Warren Cove 115 
 
 Waahatnagunashka Bay 265 
 
 Washball Rock w 86 
 
 Washshecootai Bay 259 
 
 trading post . . . 259 
 
 Washtawooka Bay 264 
 
 Watagheistic Island — 250 
 
 Sound 250 
 
 anchorage 252 
 
 caution 250 
 
 north entrance 250 
 
 south entrance 251 
 
 supplies 252 
 
 (Bonne Esperance 
 
 Harbor) 282 
 
 (Hare Harbor) 245 
 
 Watcheeshoo Hill 265 
 
 Peninsula 265 
 
 . trading post 265 
 
 Waugh Shoal 82 
 
 Watch Rock 
 
 '<& 
 
 l )i WW«M-!>)tll»!.H»»Wj;tiil8amilWBMl|i,»!IIMCIM^ 
 
Page. 
 
 803,321 
 
 304,323 
 
 219 
 
 IS 1 
 
 120 
 
 91 
 
 3 93 
 
 123 
 
 164 
 
 163 
 
 age 163 
 
 jns - 168 
 
 163 
 
 163 
 
 163 
 
 164 
 
 V. 
 
 86 
 
 88 
 
 87 
 
 reotions... 87 
 
 86 
 
 jys 87 
 
 (it 87 
 
 es 87 
 
 373 
 
 270 
 
 : 353 
 
 directions 253 
 
 tides 255 
 
 water 353 
 
 353 
 
 Ouior 353 
 
 115 
 
 :aBay 365 
 
 86 
 
 f 359 
 
 — trading post . . . 359 
 
 J 364 
 
 id.... 250 
 
 id 350 
 
 — anchorage 353 
 
 — caution 250 
 
 — north entrance 250 
 
 — south entrance 351 
 
 — supplies 252 
 
 Sonne Esperance 
 
 Harbor) 332 
 
 [are Harbor) 345 
 
 1 265 
 
 insula 263 
 
 ling post 265 
 
 Wesi; Cape (Amherst Island) 42 
 
 (Saguenay River) 807 
 
 Channel 285 
 
 CliflE 64 
 
 . beacon 54 
 
 tides 56 
 
 Cove 329 
 
 Gully 79,147 
 
 Lake 48 
 
 Point (Anticosti) 68 
 
 fog signal . . 58 
 
 light 68 
 
 INDEX. 405 
 
 Pagk 
 
 White Islet Reef lightvessel 811 
 
 'fogsignal. 811 
 
 Point - 195 
 
 Sands 109 
 
 (PortDaniel) 195 
 
 (Prince Edward Island) 128 
 
 anchorage 128 
 
 ^ buoy 128 
 
 light 128 
 
 tides 138 
 
 Reef 129 
 
 tides 129 
 
 River 73 
 
 buoys : 77 
 
 Rocks 288 
 
 Saint 267 
 
 Sand 860 
 
 Passage 860 
 
 Spit 129 
 
 Western Narrows 859 
 
 Passage. 
 
 tides. 
 
 Whale Channel 284 
 
 Head 244 
 
 — Island 281,269 
 
 Patch 282 
 
 Reef 281 
 
 Wheatley River 145 
 
 Wheeler Bar 186 
 
 caution 136 
 
 Whelp Rock 282 
 
 White Buoy Bend 866 
 
 CliflE 53 
 
 Head : 196 
 
 ■ fog signal 197 
 
 light 197 
 
 HorseReef 44 
 
 Islet 811 
 
 Reef 811 
 
 Whittle Cape 258 
 
 Rocks 256 
 
 Widow Point 79 
 
 Wild Fowl Reef 299 
 
 caution 299 
 
 Wilmot River 126 
 
 Wilson Bank 174 
 
 Point 174 
 
 Winds 8 
 
 Winter Cove 148 
 
 Creek 145 
 
 Portage 158 
 
 Wolf Bay 257 
 
 Island ( Labrador) 257 
 
 ( Magdalen Islands) 44 
 
 River 128 
 
 WolfeCape 129 
 
 Cove 847 
 
 Wood Island (Fish Harbor) 340 
 
 (St.GenevieveHarbor) 267 
 
 Islands 109 
 
 anchorage 109 
 
 light 109 
 
 -Pillar Island. 883 
 
 beacon 833 
 
 Wreck Bay (Anticosti) 48 
 
 (Belle Isle Strait) 220 
 
 Cove 58 
 
 Point 58 
 
 Wrights Range 123 
 
 Wye Rock 340 
 
 buoy 340 
 
 Yacta Point 191 
 
 York Point 330 
 
 River 112 
 
 lights 112 
 
 t. 
 
 Zephyr Rock 95 
 
 buoy 96 
 
 clearing marks 96 
 
LIST OF HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS, ETC. 
 
 No. 
 
 
 
 22 
 
 45 
 
 99 
 
 100 
 
 104 
 
 86 
 
 64 
 
 73 
 
 78 
 
 23 
 
 Title of book. 
 
 102 
 
 105 
 
 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN. 
 
 Qenoral Examination of the Atlantic Ocean. Br Capt. Charles 
 Philippe De Kerhallet, I. F. N. Translated by Capt. R. H. 
 
 Wyman, U. S. N. 8vo. 1870. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Supplement No. 1 . 1886. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Oeneral Directions for the Atlantic Ocean. From the French 
 of F. LabroHse. Second edition. Translated by Lieat. Com- 
 mander J. B. Coghlan, U.S. N. 8vo. 1873. Hydrographij 
 Office 
 
 Nova Scotia, Bay of Fundy, and South Shore of Gulf of St. 
 Lawrence to Miramichi Bay. Second edition. Comi)iled by 
 R. C. Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 1897. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Gulf and River St. Lawrence and Cape Breton Island, includ- 
 ing Cape Breton, Magdalen, and Anticosti Islands. Second 
 edition. Compiled by R. C. Ray, U. S. N. Svo. 1897. 
 Hydrographic Office 
 
 The Depths that Can be Carried into the Harbors and Anchor- 
 ages on the Atlantic and Gulf Coasts of the United States. 
 Prepared by Gustavo Herrle. (Pamphlet.) 1893. Hydro- 
 graphic Office 
 
 The Navigation of the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea. 
 Vol. I. The West India Islands, includic^ the Bahama Banks 
 and Islands, and the Bermuda Islands. Third edition. Com- 
 piled by R. C. Ray, U. S, N. 8vo. 1892. Hydrographic 
 
 Office 
 
 Supplement. Third edition. 1896. Hydrographic Office. 
 
 The Navigation of the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea. 
 Vol. II. The Coast of the Mainland from Key West, Florida, 
 U. S., to the Orinoco River, Venezuela, with the Adjacent 
 Islands, Cays, and Banks. Third edition. Revised by R. C. 
 
 Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 1896. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Supplement. 1897. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Newfoundland and Labrador. Compiled by Lieut. W. W. Gill- 
 patrick and Ensign John Gibson, U. S. N. Svo. 1884. 
 Hydrographic Office 
 
 Newfoundland and Labrador. Supplement. 8vo. 1886. Com- 
 piled by Lieut. R. G. Davenport and Ensign John Gibson, 
 
 U. S. N. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Supplement No. 2. 1891 . Hydrographic Office 
 
 Supplement N o. 3. 1895. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Winds, Currents, and Navigation of the Gulf of Cadiz, the 
 Western Coast of the Spanish Peninsula, and the Strait of 
 Gibraltar, by Capt. R. H. Wyman, U. S. N. Svo. 1870. 
 Hydrographic Office 
 
 General Examination of the Mediterranean Sea. By Capt. A. 
 Le Gras, I. F. N. Translated by Capt. R. H. Wyman, U. S. N. 
 Svo. 1870. Hj'drographic Office - 
 
 The Azores, Madeiras, Salvages, Canaries, and Cape Verde 
 Islands. Second edition. Revised by R. C. Ray, U. S. N. 
 
 Svo. 1892. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Supplement. 1895. Hydrographic Office 
 
 West Coast of Africa. From Cape Spartel to Cape Agulhas, 
 including the Islands in Bight of Biafra, Ascension, St. Hel- 
 ena, Tristan da Cunha, and Gough Islands. Second edition. 
 Compiled by R. C. Rav, U. S. \ . Svo. 1;'93. HydrograpWc 
 
 Office 
 
 Supplement. Second edition. 1897. Hydrographic 
 Office 
 
 Price. 
 
 53.00 
 .10 
 
 2.00 
 
 .25 
 
 1.50 
 .20 
 
 1.50 
 .20 
 
 i.oa 
 
 .60 
 .30 
 .20 
 
 1.00 
 2.00 
 
 .80 
 .10 
 
 1.50 
 .20 
 
 406 
 
 ■■'3«fe^ 
 
IONS, ETC. 
 
 
 Price. 
 
 )t. Charles 
 apt. R. H. 
 
 ce — 
 
 9 
 
 $3.00 
 .10 
 
 le French 
 lent. Com- 
 rographij 
 
 3.00 
 
 ulf of St. 
 mpiled by 
 jffice 
 
 
 d, inclad- 
 ;. Second 
 vo. 1897. 
 
 
 d Anchor- 
 ed States, 
 t. Hydro- 
 
 .25 
 
 ibean Sea. 
 ana Banks 
 on. Com- 
 Irographic 
 
 1.50 
 
 phic Office. 
 )bean Sea. 
 t, Florida, 
 Adjacent 
 idbyR.C. 
 
 .20 
 1.50 
 
 
 .20 
 
 T. W. Qill- 
 vo. 1884. 
 
 i.oa 
 
 386. Com- 
 n Gibson, 
 
 .60 
 
 « 
 
 .20 
 
 e 
 
 .20 
 
 Cadiz, the 
 e Strait of 
 3vo. 1870. 
 
 1.00 
 
 y Capt. A. 
 
 ai, U.S.N. 
 
 2.00 
 
 ape Verde 
 r, V. S. N. 
 
 .80 
 .10 
 
 ) Agulhas, 
 .n, St. Hel- 
 ad edition, 
 irographic 
 
 1.50 
 
 irograpMc 
 
 .20 
 
 HYDROORAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS, ETC. 
 
 407 
 
 No. 
 
 15 
 98 
 
 Title of book. 
 
 ^4 
 
 55 
 
 NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN— Continued. 
 
 (Pani- 
 
 Memoirof the Dangers and Ico in the North Atlantic, 
 phlet.) !««». Bureau of Navigation 
 
 Ice and Ice Movements in North Atlantic Ocean. By Ensign 
 Hugh Rodman, U.S.N. (Pamphlet.) 1890. Hydrographic 
 Office 
 
 SOUTrl ATLANTIC OCEAN. 
 
 East Coast of South America. From the Orinoco River to Cape 
 Virgins, including Falkland, South Georgia, Sandwich, and 
 South Shetland Islands. Second edition. Compiled by R. C. 
 
 Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 1894. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Supplement. 1895. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Navigation of the Strait of Magellan. Translated from the 
 French by Commodore J. C. P. de KrafiEt and Commander 
 William Gibson, U. S. N. (Pamphlet.) 188a. Hydro- 
 graphic Office - - - 
 
 Remarks by Capt. M. A. Lef^vre, of the French Navy, on the 
 voyage of the Vaudreuil through Patagonian Channels and 
 Magellan Strait. Translated by Lieut. George M. Totten, 
 U.S.N. (Pamphlet.) 1874. Hydrographic Office 
 
 68 
 
 89 
 
 84 
 
 96 
 
 41 
 
 4,11) 
 
 41a 
 
 92 
 
 20 
 
 PACIFIC OCEAN. 
 
 General Examination of the Pacific Ocean. By Capt. Charles 
 Philippe De Kerhallet, F. I. N. Translated under the direc- 
 tion of Commodore Charles Henry Davis, U. S. N. Svo. 1867 
 Supplement No. 1. 1886. Hydrographic Office 
 
 The Navigation of the Pacific Ocean. Translated from the 
 French of Mons. F. Labrosse, by Lieut. J. W. Miller, U. S. N. 
 8vo. 1874. Hydrographic Office. Republished 1898 
 
 The West Coast of South America, including Magellan Strait, 
 Tierra del Fuego, and the Outlying Islands. Second edition. 
 Compiled by R. C. Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 1896. Hydro- 
 graphic Office -. - - - V 1: ■ ■ v; ■ -r ■ i ■ 
 
 West Coast of Mexico and Central America, from the United 
 Stat«s to Panama, including the Gulfs of California and 
 Panama. Second edition. Compiled by R. C. Ray, U. S. N. 
 
 8vo. 1893. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Supplement. 1896. Hydrographic Office 
 
 The Coast of British Columbia. From Juan de Fuca Strait to 
 Portland Canal, including Vancouver and Queen Charlotte 
 Islands, Compiled by R. 0. Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 1891, Hy- 
 drographic Office ----- i-.-A-^--- 
 
 Supplement. Third edition. 1895. Hydrographic Office. 
 Supplement No. 2. 1897. Hydrographic Office 
 
 List of Reported Dangers in the North Pacific Ocean. 8vo. 
 
 1871. Hydrographic Office - 
 
 Supplement No. 2. 1891. Hydrographic Office. 
 
 Supplement to Reported Dangers in the North Pacific Ocean. 
 Compiled and arranged by Commander William Gibson, 
 U.S.N. 8vo. 1880, Hydrographic Office - 
 
 List of Reported Dangerri in the South Pacific Ocean. Com- 
 piled and arranged by Lieut, J. E. Pillsbury, U. S, N. 8vo, 
 
 1879. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Supplement, 1891 . Hydrographic Office 
 
 Ice and Ice Movements in Bering Sea and the Arctic Basin, By 
 Ensign E. Simpson, U.S.N. (Pamphlet.) 1890. Hydro- 
 graphic Office - - - - - 
 
 Supplement No. 2 to Directory for Bering Sea and Coast of 
 Auwka, 1895. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Price. 
 
 !^0. JO 
 
 .20 
 
 1.50 
 ,10 
 
 .20 
 
 .20 
 
 i.m 
 
 .10 
 
 1.50 
 
 1.20 
 
 1. 50 
 .10 
 
 1.50 
 .20 
 .10 
 
 1.00 
 .15 
 
 1.00 
 
 1.00 
 .15 
 
 .20 
 .20 
 
 I! 
 
 }^i 
 
 -'aftiMiiifJiSli'V • 
 
it 
 
 24 
 
 108 
 
 108 
 Part III. 
 Snpp. 
 
 SO 
 
 81 
 
 
 72 
 
 
 9 
 
 f 
 
 18 
 
 •-' 
 
 17 
 71 
 
 'u' 
 
 106 
 
 f 
 
 
 66 
 
 57 
 90 
 
 INDIAN OCEAN. 
 
 Sailing Directions of the Indian Ocean, the Winds, Monsoons, 
 Currents, and Passages, including also the Java Sea. 8ulu 
 Sea, Arafnra Sea, and the Philippine Islands. Compiled by 
 Lieut. F. E. Sawyer, U. 8. N. 8vo. 1887. Hydrographic 
 
 Office 
 
 Revised Supplement. 1894. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Oeneral Examination of Indian Ocean, with Directions for the 
 Navigation of Torres Straita. etc. By Capt. Charles Philippe 
 De Kerhallet, I. F. N. Translated by Capt. R. H. Wyman, 
 U.S. N. 8vo. 1870. Hydrographic Office 
 
 LAKES. 
 
 Sailing directions for the Gh-eat Lakes and Connecting Waters. 
 Second edition. Revised by R. G. Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 1896. 
 
 Hydrographic Office 
 
 Supplement. 1897. Hvdrographic Office 
 
 Sailing Directionfl for North Channel of Lake Huron and 
 Qeorgian Bay. Prepared by Lieut. D. H. Malian, U. S. N., 
 assisted by R. C. Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 189S. Hydrographic 
 Office 
 
 LIGHT LISTS. 
 
 List of Lights (No. 1) of North and South America (excepting 
 the United States), including the West Indies and Pacific 
 Islands. Compiled by Boynton Leach. 4to. 1896. Hydro- 
 graphic Office 
 
 List of Lights (No. 2) of South and East Coasts of Africa and 
 theEastlndies, inolndingthe East India Islands, China, Japan, 
 Australia, Tasmania, and New Zealand. Compiled by Boyn- 
 ton Leach. 4to. 1896. Hydrographic Office 
 
 List of Lights (No. 8) of the West Coasts of Africa, Europe, and 
 the Me^terranean Sea, including the Adriatic, the Black Sea, 
 and the Sea of Azof. Compiled by Boynton Leach. 4to. 
 1897. Hydrographic Office 
 
 NAVIGATION BOOKS. 
 
 List of Oeographical Positions. By Lieut. Commander F. M. 
 Green, U. S. N. 4to. 1888. Bureau of Narigation 
 
 The New American Practical Navigator. By Nathaniel Bow- 
 ditoh, LL. D. 8vo. Edition of 1896. Bureau of Navigation. 
 
 Bowditoh's Useful Tables. 8vo. Edition of 1896. Bureau of 
 Navigation 
 
 Projection Tables. 8vo. 1869. Bureau of Navigation 
 
 Azimuth Tables for parallels of latitude between 61° N. and 
 61° S. By Lients. Seaton Schroeder and W. H. H. Souther- 
 land, U. S. N. 4to. Edition of 1897. Hydrographic Office.. 
 
 Azimuth Tables for pandlels of latitude between 40° N. and 
 60° N. For the Great Lakes. 4to. 1894. Hydrographic 
 
 Office 
 
 Supplement to 106. Equation of Time for the years 1894, 
 1895, 1896, and 1897 
 
 Arctic Azimuth Tables for p.aTallelB of latitude between 70° and 
 80°. Prepared by Lieuts. Seaton Schroeder and Richard 
 Wainwright, U. S. N. 12nio. 1881. Hydrographic Office- 
 Tables for Finding the Distance of an Object by two Bearings. 
 (Pamphlet.) 1874. Hydrographic Office , 
 
 The Development of Great Circle Sailing. By G. W. Little- 
 hales. 8vo. 1889. Hydrographic Office 
 
 11.00 
 .20 
 
 2.00 
 
 1.00 
 .20 
 
 1.00 
 
 .25 
 
 .25 
 
 .25 
 
 .75 
 
 2.25 
 
 1.25 
 1.60 
 
 4.25 
 
 .50 
 .10 
 
 .80 
 
 .20 
 
 1.00 
 
 '■'Mr^- 
 
 '^^kS^^s&wssf^ssei-^maiism^iiiti'- 
 

 Price. 
 
 Monsoons, 
 Sea. Hula 
 mpiled by 
 rographio 
 
 11.00 
 
 flee 
 
 ns for the 
 8 Philippe 
 . Wyman, 
 
 g Waters, 
 vo. 1896. 
 
 .80 
 
 a. 00 
 
 1.00 
 
 
 .20 
 
 nron and 
 
 U. 8. N., 
 Irographic 
 
 1.00 
 
 excepting 
 ad Pacific 
 . Hydro- 
 
 .25 
 
 Lfrica and 
 aa, Japan, 
 I by Boyn- 
 
 arope, and 
 Black Sea, 
 ach. 4to. 
 
 .25 
 .25 
 
 tder F. M. 
 >n 
 
 .76 
 
 miel Bow- 
 lavigation. 
 Burean of 
 
 a. 25 
 1.25 
 
 ion... 
 
 (1° N. and 
 . Sonther- 
 
 W° N. and 
 Irographic 
 
 1.50 
 
 4.25 
 
 .60 
 
 irears 1894, 
 
 .10 
 
 en 7(P and 
 
 i Richard 
 
 lie Office.. 
 
 Bearings. 
 
 .80 
 .20 
 
 W. Littlfr 
 
 1.00 
 
 HYDROOHAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS, ETC. 
 
 No. 
 
 91 
 109 
 109a 
 114 
 
 111 
 
 77 
 
 112 
 
 113 
 
 101 
 
 87 
 
 110 
 65 
 
 Title of book. 
 
 NAVIGATION BOOKS— Continued. 
 
 Table of Meridional Parts for the Terrestrial Spheroids, Com- 
 presHion WfiT- By G. W.LittlehalesandJ.S. Siebert. bvo. 
 1880. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Contributions to Terrestrial Magnetism — The Variation of the 
 Compass. Compiled by Lieut. Chauncey Thomas, U. S. N. 
 8vo. 1894. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Contributions to Terrestrial Magnetism— Tho Variation of the 
 Compass. Compiled by Q. W. Littlehales, C. E. 8vo. 1895. 
 Hydrographic Office 
 
 Contributions to Terrestrial Magnetism— The Magnetic Dip or 
 Inclination. As Observed at Thirty Maritime Stations. To- 
 gether with an Investigation of the Secular Change in the 
 Direction of a Fully Suspended Magnetic Needle at Twenty- 
 nine Stations. ByO.W. Littlehales, C.E. 8vo. 1897. Hy- 
 drographic Office 
 
 Tables showing the Local Mean Time of the Sun's Visible Ris- 
 ing and Setting for Each Degree of Latitude between 60° N. 
 and 60° S. , and for Each Degree of the Sun's Declination. Pre- 
 pared by Ensign George Wood Logan, U. S. N. 4to. 1896. 
 Hydrographic Office 
 
 METEOROLOGICAL. 
 
 Practical Hints in regard to West India Hurricanes. By Lient. 
 G. L. Dyer, U. S. N. 1887. (Pamphlet.) Hydrographic 
 Office 
 
 Nautical Monograph No. 5. The Great Storm off the Atlantic 
 Coast of the United States, March 11-14, 1888. By Everett 
 Hayden, U, S. N. 1888. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Illustrative Cloud Forms for the Guidance of Observers in the 
 Classification of Clouds. Prepared by Capt. C. D. Sigsbee, 
 U. S. N.,Hydrographer. 12mo— 4to. 1897. Hydrographic 
 Office 
 
 The Treatment of Marine Meteorological Data, with Special 
 Reference to the Work of the Unit«d States Hydrographic 
 Office. Prepared by Mr. James Page. (Pamphlet.) 1807. 
 Hydrographic Office 
 
 SURVEYS. 
 
 The Methods and Results of the Survey of the West Coast of 
 Lower California by the Officers of the U. S. S. Ranger during 
 the Season of 1889-90. By Lieut. O. W. Lowry, U. S. N., and 
 G. W. Littlehales. 8vo. 1892. Hydrographic Offici°> 
 
 SIGNALS. 
 
 International Signal Code. Revised and Corrected to 1894, 
 including the Semaphore and Storm-signal Service of the 
 Maritime Conntries, the Life-Saving Service and Time-Bfdl 
 System of the United States. 8vo. 1894. Bureau of Naviga- 
 tion 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS. 
 
 The Gulf Stream. By Lieut. Commander John E. Pillsbnry, 
 U.S.N. (Pamphlet.) 1894. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Report on the Telegraphic Determination of Differences of 
 Longitude in the West Indies and Central America. By 
 Lieut. Commander F. M. Green, U. S N. 4to. 1883. Burean 
 of Navigation , 
 
 • Not for sale. 
 
 409 
 
 Price. 
 
 $1.20 
 1.00 
 1.00 
 
 .80 
 
 .10 
 (*) 
 
 1.00 
 (*) 
 
 (*) 
 
 8.00 
 
 .10 
 
 (*) 
 
 .1 
 
 51 
 
410 
 
 HYDROORAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS, ETC. 
 
 I 
 
 'I 
 * 
 
 
 I' 
 
 97 
 
 04 
 95 
 
 108 
 
 107 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS— Contlnnod. 
 
 Report on the ToleKraphic Determination of Longitudes in 
 Mexico, Central America, the We«t Indies, and on tlie North 
 Coast of South America, witli the Latitudes of the Sevenil 
 Stations. By Lieuts. J. A. Norris and Charles Laird, U.S.N. 
 To which is appunded a Report on Magnetic Observations in 
 Mexico and tlie West Indies. By Lieut. Charles Laird and 
 Ensigns J. H. L. Holcombe and L. M. Garrett, U. S. N. 4to. 
 181)1 . Bureau of Navigation 
 
 Rei)ort of the International Meteorologic Congress at Paris, 
 IM81). By Lieut. Aaron Ward, U. S. N. (Pamphlet.) 18U0. 
 
 The Average Form of Isolateil Submarine Peaks, and tlio Interval 
 which should obtain Between Deep-Sea Soundinjcs taken to 
 Disclose the Character of tlie Bottom of the Ocean. By 
 G. W. Littlehales. 8vo. 18U0. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Report on Uniform System for Spelling Foreign Geographic 
 Names. By Lieut. C. M. McCarteney, U. S. N., Boynton 
 Leach, and Gustave Herrle. (Pamphlet.) 1891. Hydro- 
 graphic Office 
 
 Smnnarine Cables; Instruments and Implements Employed in 
 Cable Surveys; Theory of Cable Laying; Specifications and 
 Costs; Submarine Cable Systems of the World. Prepared by 
 G. W. Littlehales. 8vo. 1893. Hydrographic Office 
 
 Wrecks and Derelicts in the North Atlantic Ocean. 1887 to 
 1 893, inclusive. 4to. 1894. Hydrographic Office 
 
 * Not for sole. 
 
I>rloe. 
 
 AGENTS FOR THE SALE OF HYDROGHAPHIC OFFICE CHARTS, 
 SAILIiNG DIRECTIONS, ETC. 
 
 (*) 
 
 $0.20 
 
 ,70 
 
 (•) 
 
 1.00 
 
 (*) 
 
 AGENTS IN UNITED STATES. 
 
 Alexandria, Va.—R. Bell's Sons, South Fairfax street. 
 
 Apalachicola, Fla.— J. E. Griidy. 
 
 Ajitoria, Oregr.— Qriffen & Reed. 
 
 Baltimore, Md.— F. J. Sloane & Co., corner Pratt street and Spear's wharf. 
 
 M. V. O'Neal, 503 East Pratt street. 
 Bangror, Me.— Snow & Nealley Company. 
 Bar Harbor, Me.— Albert W. Bee. 
 Bath, Me.— Charles A. Harriman. 
 Block Island.— C. C. Ball. 
 
 BoBton, Ma»«.— Charles C. Hutchinson, 153 State street. 
 L. Prang & Co., 286 Roxbury street. 
 Samuel Thaxter & Son. 125 State street. 
 Boothbay Harbor, Me.— William O. McCobb. 
 
 Buffalo, N. Y.— Matthews, Northrup «& Co., 179-188 Washington street. 
 Charleston, S. 0.— James Allen «& Co., 285 King street. 
 Chicago, 111.— George Carpenter & Co., 202-208 South Water street. 
 H. Channon Company, 24 and 26 Market street. 
 Rand, McNally & Co. , 160 and 168 Adams street. 
 The Western News Company, 204-206 Madison street. 
 Cleveland, Ohio.— Burrows Brothers Company, 23 Euclid avenue. 
 
 The Marine Record Publishing Company, Western Reserve 
 
 Building. 
 The Marine Review, 516 Perry Payne Building. 
 Detroit, Mich.— H. D. Edwards & Co., 16-24 Woodward avenue. 
 
 J. W. Westcott, foot Woodward avenue. 
 Duluth, Minn.— A. Hirsch. 
 Eastport, Me..— C. E. Cummings. 
 
 East Tawas, Mich —Howard C. Bristol, United States signal observer. 
 Erie, Pa.— William T. Sell, 830 State street. 
 Eureka, Humboldt Couuty, Cal.— James E. Matthews. 
 Fernandina, Fla.— J. W. Howell, customhouse. 
 Galveston, Tex.— Charles F. Trube, 2415 Market street. 
 Gloucester, Mass.— P. A. Chisolm, 161 Main street. 
 Jacksonville, Fla.— The H. & W. B. Drew Company. 
 Keywest, Fla.— Alfred Brost, office of lighthouse inspector. 
 
 H. B. Boyer, weather observer. 
 Los Angeles, Cal.— StoU & Thayer Company, 139 South Spring street. 
 Marquette, Mich.— A. O. Kruger. 
 Millbridge, Me.— N. C. Wallace. 
 Milwaukee, Wis.— Joys Bros. & Co., 205 East Water street. 
 
 411 
 
 il 
 
 .1' 
 
;!■ 
 
 AGENTS FOR HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE CHARTS, ETC. 
 
 Mobile, Ala.— Costello & Bates Company, 24 Front street. 
 
 E. O. Zadek Jewelry Company. 
 New Bedford, Mass.— C. R. Sherman & Son. 
 New London, Conn.— Axel F. Anderson, 57 Bank street. 
 New Orleans, La.— Frigerio & Schully, 411 Royal street. 
 
 L. Frigerio (widow), 1019 Canal street. 
 Woodward, Wight & Co., 406-418 Canal street. 
 Newport, R. 1.— J. M. K. Southwick, 185 Thames street. 
 New York City.— E. Steiger & Co., 25 Park place. 
 
 John Bliss & Co., 138 Front street. 
 Michael Rnpp & Co., 39 South street. 
 
 R. Merrill's Sons, 110 Wall street. ' 
 
 Thomas Manning, 45 Broadway. 
 T. S. & J. D. Negus, 140 Water street. 
 New Whatcom, Wash.- Charles M. Sherman. 
 Norfolk, Va.— C. F. Greenwood & Bro., 158 Main street. 
 
 Vickery & Co., 124 Main street. 
 Ogdensburgr, N. T.— George Hall Coal Company. 
 
 Oswego, N. Y.— John S. Parsons, comer West Cayuga and Water streets. 
 Palmbeach, Fla.- E. M. Brelsford. 
 Pascagoula, Miss.— James I. Friar. 
 Pensacola, Fla.- Henry Horsier & Co., 706 and 708 South Palafox street. 
 
 McKenzie Oerting & Co., 599 South Palafox street. 
 Philadelphia, Pa.— Riggs & Bro., 231 Walnut street. 
 Portland, Me.— William Sentei & Co., 51 Exchange street. 
 Portland, Oreg.— J. K. Gill & Co., Third and Alder streets. Masonic Temple. 
 Port Huron, Mich.— Kendall Marine Reporting Company. 
 Port Townsend, Wash.— Waterman & Katz. 
 
 W. J. Fritz, 830 Water street. 
 Providence, A. L— George A. StockweU, 12 Board of Trade BuUding, Market 
 
 square. 
 Punta Oorda, Fla.— K. B. Harvey. 
 Rockland, Me.— Spear, May & Stover, 408 Main street. 
 Sag Harbor, N. Y.— Charles Philip Cook. 
 San Diego, OaL— E. M. Burbeck, corner Fifth and D streets. 
 San Francisco, Cal.— Dillon & Co., 310 California street. 
 Louis Weule, 418 Battery street. 
 S. S. Amheim, 8 Stuart street. 
 San Pedro, Cal.— W. L. Banning. 
 Santa Barbara, Cal.— H. A. C. McPhail. 
 Sault Ste. Marie, Mich.— P. M. Church & Co. 
 Savannah, Oa.— J. P. Johnson, customhouse. 
 Seattle, Wash.— G. Beninghausen, First avenue south and Washington stnet. 
 
 Lowman & Hanford. 
 Sitka. Alaska.- Edward De Groff. 
 Stonington, Conn.— James H. Stivers, 73 Water street. 
 Sturgeon Bay, Wis.— Frank Long. 
 Tacoma, Wash.— Vaughan & Morrill. 
 Tampa, Fla.— Babbitt & Co., Franklin street. 
 Tarpon Springs, Fla.— C. D. Webster, 88 and 85 Tarpon avenue. 
 Titusville, Fla.— Robert Ranson. 
 Tremont, Me. — Frank McMuUen. 
 Vineyard Haven, Mass.— E. St. Croix Oliver. 
 Waldoboro, Me.— George Bliss. 
 
 
LRTS, ETC. 
 
 al street. 
 
 I Water streets- 
 
 Palafox street, 
 fox street. 
 
 }, Masonic Temple. 
 
 ade Building, Msrifcet 
 
 i Washington stanet. 
 
 venne. 
 
 AGENTS FOR HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE CHARTS, ETC. 413 
 
 Washington, D. C— J. J. Chapman, 608 Thirteenth street. 
 
 W. H. Lowdermilk & Ck). , 1424 F street NW. 
 
 William Ballantyne & Son, 428 Seventh street. 
 
 Brentano's, 1015 Pennsylvania avenue. 
 West Superior, Wis.— Charles S. Barker. 
 Wheeling, W. Va.— Frank Stanton. 
 Wilmington, N. C— Godfrey Hart, 24 South Front street. 
 
 W. N, Harriss, with George Harrisa & Co., North Water 
 street. 
 
 AGENTS IN FOREIGN PORTS. 
 
 Calleo, Peru.— John Newton, 2 Calle de la Constitucion. 
 
 Glasgow, Scotland.— Alexander Dobbie & Son, 18 Clyde place. 
 
 OuaymM, Mexico. — Conrad Eimbeck, C. E. 
 
 Halifax, Nova Scotia.— Robert H. Cogswell. 
 
 Hamburg, Germany. — Eckardt & Messtorflf. 
 
 Hamilton, Ontario. — Hunter & Grant. 
 
 Habana, Cuba.— Edwin W. Wilson, 41 and 43 Obispo street. 
 
 Havre, France.— V. & M. Lepetit, 15 Rue de Paris. 
 
 Honolulu, Hawaiian Islands.- Frank S. Dodge. 
 
 Hongkong, China.— Charl»»s Gaupp & Co. 
 
 Kingston, Jamaica. — James Gall. 
 
 Liverpool, England.— Philip, Son & Nephew, 41 to 51 South Castle street 
 
 Manila, Philippine Islands.— Russell L. Webb. 
 
 Montevideo, Uruguay.- T. Bottini & Co., Calle Rompla, 95-07. 
 
 Montreal, Canada.— Heam & Harrison, 1640 Notre Dame street. 
 
 Nassau, Bahamas.— T. Darling & Co. 
 
 Para, Brazil. — At the consulate. 
 
 Pemambuco, Brazil. — Arthur B. Dallas. 
 
 Port Hawkesbury, C. B. I., Nova Scotia.— Alexander Bain. 
 
 Port of Spain, Trinidad, West Indies.— John A. Donnatien. 
 
 St. Helena Island.— At the consulate. 
 
 St. John, New Brunswick.— J. & A. McMillan. 
 
 St. Johns, Newfoundland.— Garrett Byrne. 
 
 St. Thomas, West Indies.— J. P. Thorsen. 
 
 Turks Island.— E. J. D. Astwood. 
 
 Vancouver, British Columbia.— Albert Uflford, 58 Cordova street. 
 
 Victoria, British Columbia.— T. N. Hibben & Co., 69 Government street. 
 
 Zanzibar, East Africa.— Dorsey Mohun, United States consulate. 
 
y